EN
How to Use This Reference Manual
The CL5/CL3/CL1 Reference Manual (this document) allows you to
search for terms and take advantage of links in the text.
Searching for terms
To search for a term, use the search function of the software you’re using
to view this document.
If you’re using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box and press
the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to search for occurrences of
that term.
Displaying the next/previous view
If you’re using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/next view in
your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back to the
previous page after you’ve used a link to jump to a different page.
Using the Function Tree
A function tree for the CL5/CL3/CL1 is provided on page 4 and
following. You can use this function tree to find the page that explains
an on-screen display or function.
Reference Manual
Contents
Reference Manual
2
Contents
How to Use This Reference Manual .......................................................................... 1
Function Tree ............................................................................ 4
SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................................................... 6
About the SELECTED CHANNEL section................................................................... 6
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ....................................................... 6
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen ........................................................................... 7
Centralogic section ................................................................. 11
About the Centralogic section................................................................................ 11
Operations in the Centralogic section .................................................................... 11
OVERVIEW screen .................................................................................................. 12
Input and output patching..................................................... 15
CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching .......................... 15
Changing the output patch settings ...................................................................... 16
Changing the input patch settings......................................................................... 19
Inserting an external device into a channel ............................................................ 21
Directly outputting an INPUT channel ................................................................... 23
Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer ........................................... 25
Input channels ........................................................................ 27
Signal flow for input channels................................................................................ 27
Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color............................................ 28
Making HA (Head Amp) settings............................................................................ 30
Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses ................... 35
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus .............................. 39
Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay).................................................. 44
Channel library operations..................................................................................... 45
Output channels ..................................................................... 46
Signal flow for output channels ............................................................................. 46
Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color............................................ 47
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus ............................. 48
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to
MATRIX buses............................................................................................. 51
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)............................................... 55
Channel library operations..................................................................................... 55
EQ and Dynamics ..................................................................... 56
About EQ and dynamics ......................................................................................... 56
Using EQ ................................................................................................................ 56
Using dynamics ...................................................................................................... 59
Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries ......................................................................... 63
Grouping and linking .............................................................. 64
About DCA groups and Mute groups ..................................................................... 64
Using DCA groups.................................................................................................. 64
Using mute groups................................................................................................. 66
Channel Link function ............................................................................................ 70
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel.............................................................. 73
Scene memory ......................................................................... 77
About scene memories ........................................................................................... 77
Using scene memories............................................................................................ 77
Editing scene memories.......................................................................................... 82
Using the Global Paste function.............................................................................. 85
Using the Focus function ........................................................................................ 87
Using the Recall Safe function................................................................................. 88
Using the Fade function.......................................................................................... 91
Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall
(GPI OUT) ................................................................................................... 93
Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall............................................... 94
Using Preview mode............................................................................................... 96
Monitor and Cue functions ..................................................... 97
About the Monitor and Cue functions .................................................................... 97
Using the Monitor function .................................................................................... 98
Using the Cue function......................................................................................... 101
Operating the Cue function.................................................................................. 102
Talkback and Oscillator......................................................... 106
About the Talkback and Oscillator functions ......................................................... 106
Using Talkback ..................................................................................................... 106
Using the Oscillator function ................................................................................ 108
Meters.................................................................................... 111
Operations in the METER screen ........................................................................... 111
Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console ..................... 113
Contents
Reference Manual
3
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack ............................... 114
About the virtual rack .......................................................................................... 114
Virtual rack operations ......................................................................................... 115
Graphic EQ operations......................................................................................... 118
About the internal effects..................................................................................... 122
Using the Premium Rack...................................................................................... 130
Using the graphic EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries..................................... 137
I/O device and external head amp ....................................... 138
Using an I/O device ............................................................................................. 138
I/O device patching ............................................................................................. 138
Remotely controlling an Rio unit.......................................................................... 140
Remotely controlling an amp............................................................................... 143
Using an external head amp ................................................................................ 144
MIDI....................................................................................... 149
MIDI functionality on the CL series console.......................................................... 149
Basic MIDI settings .............................................................................................. 149
Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items ................................... 152
Using Control Changes to control parameters ..................................................... 155
Using Parameter Changes to control parameters ................................................. 157
User settings (Security) ........................................................ 158
User Level settings ............................................................................................... 158
Preferences .......................................................................................................... 168
USER DEFINED keys ............................................................................................. 169
USER DEFINED knobs........................................................................................... 171
Assignable encoders ............................................................................................ 172
Custom fader bank .............................................................................................. 173
Master fader ........................................................................................................ 174
Console Lock ....................................................................................................... 175
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive............................... 177
Formatting a USB flash drive................................................................................ 180
Recorder................................................................................ 181
About the USB memory recorder ......................................................................... 181
Assigning channels to the input and output of the recorder................................. 181
Recording audio to a USB flash drive.................................................................... 183
Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive ..................................................... 185
Editing the title list............................................................................................... 187
Using the CL console with Nuendo Live............................................................... 188
Help function ........................................................................ 193
Loading a Help file from a USB flash drive............................................................ 193
Loading a text file from a USB flash drive.............................................................. 193
Viewing Help........................................................................................................ 194
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly................................................... 194
Other functions ..................................................................... 196
About the SETUP screen ....................................................................................... 196
Word clock and slot settings................................................................................. 198
Using cascade connections ................................................................................... 200
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses.................................................... 202
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off.............................................. 203
Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, channel name displays,
and lamps ................................................................................................. 204
Setting the date and time of the internal clock ..................................................... 204
Setting the network address ................................................................................. 205
Initializing the unit to factory default settings ....................................................... 206
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) .............. 207
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) ........................................................... 208
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) ............................... 209
Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)................................................ 211
Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display .......................................... 212
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display.............................................. 213
Dante audio network settings ............................................................................... 213
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) .................................................................. 221
Appendices ............................................................................ 227
EQ Library List ...................................................................................................... 227
DYNAMICS Library List ......................................................................................... 228
Dynamics Parameters ........................................................................................... 230
Effect Type List ..................................................................................................... 232
Effects Parameters................................................................................................. 233
Premium Rack Processor Parameters ..................................................................... 245
Effects and tempo synchronization ....................................................................... 247
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes............................................. 248
NRPN parameter assignments .............................................................................. 250
Mixing parameter operation applicability ............................................................. 254
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys ......................................... 259
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs....................................... 262
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders................................... 263
MIDI Data Format ................................................................................................ 264
Warning/Error Messages....................................................................................... 271
Electrical characteristics ........................................................................................ 273
Mixer Basic Parameters......................................................................................... 274
MIDI Implementation Chart ................................................................................. 275
Index.................................................................................................................... 276
Function Tree
Reference Manual
4
Function Tree
Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the
Owner’s Manual (booklet).
Main
SELECTED CHANNEL 6
OVERVIEW 12
FUNCTION ACCESS AREA (20)
CHANNEL PARAMETER
PATCH/NAME 16, 29, 48
GAIN/PATCH 31
1ch 31
8ch 32
CH1-48 32
CH49-72/ST IN 32
OUTPUT Indication only
INPUT DELAY 44
8ch 44
CH1-48 45
CH49-72/ST IN 45
DELAY SCALE 44
INSERT/DIRECT OUT 21
1ch 21, 23
8ch 22, 24
HPF/EQ 56
1ch 56
8ch 57
CH1-48 58
CH49-72/ST IN 58
OUTPUT 58
DYNAMICS 59
1ch 59
KEY IN SOURCE SELECT 62
8ch 61
CH1-48 62
CH49-72/ST IN 62
OUTPUT 62
SEND TO/SEND FROM 41, 52
TO STEREO/MONO 49
8ch 49
CH1-48 50
CH49-72/ST IN 50
OUTPUT 50
LIBRARY
CHANNEL LIBRARY 45
EQ LIBRARY 63
DYNAMICS LIBRARY 63
GEQ LIBRARY 137
EFFECT LIBRARY 137
Portico5033/Portico5043/U76/Opt-2A/
EQ-1A/DynamicEQ LIBRARY
137
DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY 139
RACK
VIRTUAL RACK 115
RACK MOUNTER 116
GEQ EDIT 118
GEQ LINK 119
EFFECT RACK 122
EFFECT EDIT 125
EFFECT TYPE 126
PREMIUM RACK 130
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER 131
PREMIUM RACK EDIT 132
I/O DEVICE
DANTE PATCH 138
DANTE SETUP 138
DANTE INPUT PATCH 138
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH 140
Rio 140
REMOTE HA EDIT 141
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH 142
AMP 143
DANTE OUTPUT PATCH 143
EXTERNAL HA 146
EXTERNAL HA EDIT 147
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT 147
MONITOR
MONITOR 98
CUE 103
MONITOR 99
OSCILLATOR 109
TALKBACK 107
METER
INPUT METER 111
OUTPUT METER 111
SETUP
USER SETUP 196
PREFERENCE 168
USER DEFINED KEYS SETUP 169
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP (List) 170
USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP 171
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP (List) 171
ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP 172
CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER 173
FADER ASSIGN SELECT 174
Function Tree
Reference Manual
5
NOTE
• The explanations in this reference manual will use the CL5.
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, some screens will not show
channels and faders that do not exist on those models.
USER LEVEL/CREATE USER KEY 158
CREATE KEY 160
SAVE KEY 165
LOGIN 161
SAVE/LOAD 177
WORD CLOCK/SLOT 198
CASCADE IN/OUT PATCH 200, 202
OUTPUT PORT 18
MIDI/GPI 149, 221
MIDI SETUP 150
PROGRAM CHANGE 152
CONTROL CHANGE 155
GPI 222
FADER START 225
BUS SETUP 202
CONSOLE LOCK 175
DATE/TIME 204
NETWORK 205
DANTE SETUP 213
SCENE
SCENE LIST 79
GLOBAL PASTE 85
FADE TIME 91
SONG SELECT 95
FOCUS RECALL 87
PREVIEW 96
RECORDER
USB 181
NUENDO LIVE 188
SETUP CH JOB
CH LINK MODE 71
DCA GROUP ASSIGN 64
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN 66
RECALL SAFE MODE 88
CH COPY MODE 73
CH MOVE MODE 74
CH DEFAULT MODE 76
PATCH
PORT SELECT
22, 24, 100, 104,
139, 201
CH SELECT
19, 117, 174,
175, 182
Others
CONFIRMATION 168
SOFT KEYBORD (21)
LOGIN 161
Startup Menu
MODE SELECT 206
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES 206
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES 206
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 207
INPUT PORT TRIM 210
OUTPUT PORT TRIM 210
SLOT OUTPUT TRIM 210
FADER CALIBRATION 208
CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION 211
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
6
SELECTED CHANNEL section
This chapter explains how to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen to control the selected channel.
About the SELECTED CHANNEL section
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located to the left of the display corresponds to the mixer module
on a conventional analog mixer, and enables you to manually adjust all the major parameters of the
currently-selected channel.
Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL] key. If you
have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip, either the L or the R
channel will be selected, and the major parameters for L and R channels will be linked. You can use the
knobs on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain, HPF/EQ settings, the threshold
setting of the dynamics processors, pan/balance settings, and send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
1. Use a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to control.
To select a channel, press a [SEL] key in the top panel channel strip section, the Centralogic
section, or the master section.
Press the appropriate bank select key so that the
channels you want to control are assigned to the
top panel.
The number and name of the currently-selected
channel is shown in the channel select field
located in the Function Access Area of the touch
screen.
NOTE
• If an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has
been assigned to a single channel strip, you can switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing
the same [SEL] key.
• You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select field located in the Function Access
Area. Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the
field to select the next channel.
2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen for the currently-selected channel. If you leave this screen displayed, you will always be able
to view the settings in the screen while operating the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section.
NOTE
If you have turned on the option “POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED” on the
PREFERENCE tab (accessed by pressing the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button),
pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the popup window (1ch).
Even if a different screen is selected, the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section will always
affect the currently-selected channel. In this case, a window indicating the value of that parameter
will appear on screen when you operate a knob.
3. Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons on the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel.
Channel number
Channel name
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
7
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
■ SEND field
In this field, you can view the send level from the channel to each MIX/
MATRIX bus, switch the on/off status of the send signals, and switch between
pre and post.
1 Tabs
Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be displayed
in the SEND field.
• MIX1–16 tab.............................. displays MIX buses 1–16.
• MIX17–24/MATRIX tab......... displays MIX buses 17–24 and
MATRIX buses 1–8.
The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in the SEND field vary
depending on whether a pair of bus channels (odd-numbered and even-
numbered) are comprised of two mono channels or a stereo channel.
If the destination bus channels are two mono channels:
1 SEND knob
Sets the send level to the corresponding bus.
2 PRE indicator
Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen
is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on.
3 ON button
Switches the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off.
If the destination bus is a stereo channel:
1 SEND/PAN knob
The right-hand knob adjusts the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels (even-numbered
and odd-numbered). The left-hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the same signal.
2 PRE indicator
Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen
is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on.
3 ON button
Press the right-hand button to switch on or off the signal sent to two bus channels.
NOTE
• If the indices of a SEND/PAN knob are white, the send point is assigned as PRE; if the indices
are black, it is assigned as POST.
• If the send point is PRE, you can specify the PRE point as either VARI [PRE EQ] or VARI [PRE
FADER] in the BUS SETUP popup that appears when you press the SETUP button → BUS
SETUP button.
• If the type of the destination bus is set to FIXED, controllers
1–2 mentioned above will not be
displayed. The send level will be fixed at nominal level, and the send point will be fixed at POST
FADER. For details, see “Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses” on page 202.
• Press the SEND LEVEL knob or PAN knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch popup window.
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
8
■ GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog gain settings, and view the operational status of
the head amp.
1 GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain of the head amp.
For a channel to which the head amp has not been
patched, a gray circle appears, instead of the knob. Press
the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch popup window.
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an
indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output
to the audio network.
2 OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power on or off status for the head amp.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp.
NOTE
• For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp, 1 will be a gray circle
and
3 will not be shown. For an output channel, 1 will be a gray circle, and 2–4 will not be
shown.
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP → PREFERENCE
screen, the digital gain knob will appear for
1, and 3 will not be displayed.
For details, refer to “Making HA (Head Amp) settings” on page 30.
■ PAN/BALANCE field
This field enables you to switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel to the
STEREO/MONO bus, and adjust the pan and balance.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected
channel.
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO
bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch popup
window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify
whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in
this popup window. For a MIX channel, the PAN knob
will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE
knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
2 ST/MONO button
Switches the on/off status of a signal sent from the
channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an INPUT/MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR
button appears in location 2.
The LCR button is an overall on/off switch for the signals
sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
When a MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected:
1 BALANCE knob
If the signal on the selected channel is stereo, the
BALANCE knob will appear, enabling you to adjust the
volume balance for the left and right channels. If the
channel signal is monaural, a gray circle will appear in
this location.
Press the knob to open the TO STEREO 8ch popup
window.
■ INPUT DELAY field
This field enables you to view the delay settings.
1 ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay. If the delay is off,
the indicator will not be displayed.
2 Delay time
The delay value is displayed by milliseconds (ms) and also by currently-selected scale. If the scale
uses units of ms, the value in the bottom row will not be displayed. Only the ms value appears in
the middle row.
Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch popup window.
■ HPF field (input channels only)
This field enables you to set the HPF.
1 HPF knob
Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
2 ON button
Switches the HPF on or off.
If an output channel is selected, a gray circle will appear in location
1, and button 2 will be hidden.
2
3
4
1
1 2
2
1
1
2
1
2
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
9
■ EQ parameter field
This field displays the 4-band EQ parameter settings.
1 Q knob
Specifies the Q for each band.
If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF or H. SHELF (high-
shelving), or the LOW band filter type is set to L. SHELF (low-
shelving), the Q knob will not be displayed. Only the filter type
name will be displayed.
NOTE
• Fully rotating the HIGH band Q knob on the panel counter-clockwise while pressing and holding
it down will set the filter type to LPF. Fully rotating the Q knob clockwise while pressing and
holding it down will set the filter type to high-shelving.
• Fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel clockwise while pressing and holding it down
will set the filter type to low-shelving.
• If an output channel has been selected, fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel counter-
clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to HPF.
• You can also switch the filter type on the HPF/EQ 1ch popup window.
2 FREQUENCY knob
Sets the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) for each band.
3 GAIN knob
Sets the amount of cut/boost for each band.
NOTE
• If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF, you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN
knob on the panel.
• If the LOW band filter type is set to HPF, you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN
knob on the panel.
• Press each knob to open the HPF/EQ 1ch popup window.
■ EQ graph field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/
EQ 1ch popup window, in which you can set the attenuator, HPF and EQ.
■ DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 field
This field enables you to view and set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters.
1 OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
2 Level meter
Displays the output signal level (green) and the amount of gain reduction (orange) when the
Dynamics is on. The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line.
3 Threshold
Specifies the threshold.
4 Parameters
Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type.
Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 1ch popup window, in which you can
make detailed parameter settings.
1 2 3
1 2
3
4
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Reference Manual
10
■ INSERT field
This field enables you to make insert settings.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch
popup window.
2 ON button
Switches the insert on or off.
3 RACK EDIT popup button
Appears if an effect or Premium Rack is inserted. Press this button to display the edit screen for
the inserted rack.
4 IN indicator
Appears if a port has been assigned to the insert-in patch. It lights when the signal is sent to the
insert-in.
■ DIRECT OUT field
This field enables you to make insert settings.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch
popup window. The Direct Out level value will appear below
the button.
2 ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
■ RECALL SAFE field
This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings.
1 Popup button
Press this button to open the RECALL SAFE popup window.
2 ON button
Switches the Recall Safe status on or off.
3 PARTIAL indicator
This will light if recall safe applies only to some of the parameters, not to all channel settings.
■ FADER field
This field enables you to view and make settings for the channel on/
off status and the level.
1 Fader
Displays the current level.
Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels.
2 Level indicator
Displays the current level setting by numerical value. If the
signal is clipping at any point in the channel, the ΣCLIP indicator will light.
3 ON button
Switches the channel status on or off. The button is linked with the corresponding [ON] key on
the top panel.
■ DCA/MUTE field
This field enables you to view and select the DCA or mute group to which
the channel is assigned.
1 Tabs
Select DCA or mute as a group to set. Press the selected tab once again
to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
When the DCA group tab is selected:
2 DCA group select buttons
Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
3 Mute group indicators
Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
When the mute group tab is selected:
4 Mute group select buttons
Select the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
NOTE
If the dimmer level is set to the mute group, this button lights
orange.
5 MUTE SAFE button
Temporarily removes the channel from the mute group.
6 DCA group indicators
Indicate the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
1
2
4 3
21
2
1
3
1
2
3
1
3
2
4
5
6
Centralogic section
Reference Manual
11
Centralogic section
This chapter explains how to use the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen to simultaneously
control up to eight channels.
About the Centralogic section
The Centralogic section is located below the touch screen, and lets you recall and simultaneously
control a set of up to eight input channels, output channels, or DCA groups. Use the Bank Select keys
in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you want to control.
If you press one of the Bank Select keys, the channels or DCA groups corresponding to that key will be
assigned to the Centralogic section, and can be controlled using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys
in the Centralogic section.
Operations in the Centralogic section
Follow the steps below to perform operations in the Centralogic section.
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels or DCA
groups that you want to control.
When you press a Bank Select key, the LED of that key will light. The touch screen will display the
OVERVIEW screen, and the parameters of the eight channels you selected will appear.
NOTE
When the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed, you can switch to the OVERVIEW
screen by pressing any of the multifunction knobs 1–8. This is convenient if you want to quickly
switch to the OVERVIEW screen while leaving the same channels or DCA groups selected for
control.
2. Use the faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section to adjust the level of the
group of up to eight selected channels and switch them on or off.
NOTE
• The bottom line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels or DCA groups that can be
controlled by the faders, [ON] keys and [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section.
• The top line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels that can be controlled by multifunction
knobs 1–8 in the Centralogic section.
3. Use the fields on the OVERVIEW screen and the multifunction knobs to adjust the
parameters for the group of up to eight channels.
Bank Select keys
Centralogic section
Reference Manual
12
OVERVIEW screen
■ CHANNEL NAME field
This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number, name, and icon
for the currently-selected eight channels. The name of the currently-selected channel is highlighted.
NOTE
If you have retained the channels assigned to the faders in the Centralogic section by pressing
and holding down a Bank Select key, the channel names shown at the top and bottom of the
OVERVIEW screen may differ.
■ GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings and view the operational
status of the head amp.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected
channel.
If the head amp is patched:
1 GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain of the head amp.
• Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the corresponding
knob in the Centralogic section, which enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal
output to the audio network.
• If the GAIN knob has been assigned to a knob in the Centralogic section, press the knob to open
the GAIN/PATCH 8ch popup window.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when the signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This
indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is not
displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp. This indicator is available only if an input
channel is selected.
NOTE
• If the slot is not connected to the head amp, the patch and the type of the MY card will be
displayed.
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen, the digital GAIN
knob will appear instead of knob
1, and indicator 3 will not be displayed.
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the
signal output to the audio network.
If the slot is patched:
The slot name will appear.
If the rack is connected:
The patch and module name will appear.
If the output is connected:
Only the patch will appear.
: Selected channel
: Unselected channel
1
4
3
2
Centralogic section
Reference Manual
13
■ INPUT DELAY field
This field displays the delay status for the input channel. If an output channel has been selected, this
field will be blank. Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch popup window.
1 DELAY ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
■ INSERT/DIRECT OUT field
This field enables you to make insert and Direct Out settings. Press this field to open the INSERT/
DIRECT OUT 8ch popup window.
1 INSERT ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the insert on/off status.
2 DIRECT OUT ON/OFF indicator (input channels only)
Indicates the Direct Out on/off status.
■ EQ field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ.
Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch popup window, in which
you can set the HPF and EQ.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
■ DYNAMICS 1/2 field
This field displays the threshold value and meter for Dynamics 1/2.
Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/2 1ch popup window.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
■ SEND field
This field displays the send level, send on/off status, and pre/post settings for 16
buses.
To select the 16 destination buses, use the [MIX 1–16] or [MIX 17–24/MATRIX]
key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the panel.
Use the Centralogic multifunction knobs to adjust the send level for each bus.
Touch the knob of the bus you want to operate; it will be assigned to the
Centralogic multifunction knobs. If it is assigned to the multifunction knobs,
touching that knob once again will display the SEND 8ch popup screen.
This field varies depending on the type of the destination bus.
If the destination bus is VARI (mono):
The knob color and scale color indicate the send on/off and pre/post status. If
the send is off, the knob color turns gray. With the post setting, the knob scale
color turns black.
If the destination bus is VARI (stereo):
If a pair of buses (odd-numbered and even-numbered) are in stereo, the left-
hand knob will function as the PAN knob, and the right-hand knob will function
as the SEND knob.
If the destination bus is set to FIXED:
The SEND ON/OFF button will appear instead of each knob.
1
1
2
Centralogic section
Reference Manual
14
■ TO STEREO/MONO field
This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO/MONO
bus.
If you press this field, the knob will be assigned to the corresponding knob in the Centralogic section.
If you press the field once again, the TO STEREO/MONO 8ch popup window will appear.
This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel.
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1 TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch popup window. If the ST IN channel is selected,
you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window. For a MIX
channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if
the signal is stereo.
2 ST/MONO indicator
Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will
be displayed in location 2.
When a MATRIX channel (monaural) or MONO channel is selected:
The ΣCLIP indicator appears, indicating that the signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob appears, indicating the
balance of the left/right channels.
■ DCA group field
A DCA group (1–16) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row in this
field.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
■ Mute group field
A mute group (1–8) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field. If the
channel has been temporarily removed from the mute group, “S” (Safe) will appear on the third row.
If the dimmer level has been set for a mute group, the color of the characters changes from red to
orange.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window.
1
2
2
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
15
Input and output patching
This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect inserts, and
how to use direct outputs.
CL console internal patching and Dante audio
network patching
The following diagram shows the signal flow through the CL series console, I/O devices, and Dante
audio network.
Input patching
CL series consoles and I/O devices feature two types of patching: Dante audio network patching and
CL console internal patching.
For Dante audio network patching, you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window. In this
window, you can patch CL console and I/O device inputs. Sixty-four (64) channels can be input from a
Dante audio network to a CL series console. You can choose up to 64 channels from maximum of 512
channels (logical value) of Dante audio network signals. Select the I/O devices (within 64 channels) that
you want to control from the CL series console.
Then, route the input signals (that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window) to
channels on the CL series console. To do this, choose input ports from DANTE 1–64 in the GAIN/
PATCH popup window.
NOTE
By default, DANTE 1–64 are assigned to input channels 1–64.
Output patching
Use the OUTPUT PORT popup window to patch CL console’s output channels and Dante audio
network. In this window, assign output channel signals to DANTE 1–64 ports.
NOTE
By default, MIX 1–24 are assigned to DANTE 1–24, MATRIX 1–8 are assigned to DANTE 25–32,
STEREO L/R are assigned to DANTE 33/34, and MONO is assigned to DANTE 35.
Next, patch the output signals from DANTE 1–64 (assigned in the OUTPUT PORT popup window) to
I/O device outputs. Use the OUTPUT PATCH popup window of the I/O device to make these
assignments.
64/512
8 16 16 16 64
SW
Dante-MY16-AUD
ID #3
ID #1
ID #2
OMNI MY MY MY
INPUT PATCH
Dante Network
“Dante” (ports)
CL series console
I/O device
I/O device
I/O device
Up to 512 channels
(logical value)
Dante
patching
CL internal
patching
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
16
Changing the output patch settings
To change the patching, you can either select the output port that will be the output destination of each
output channel, or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port.
Selecting the output port for each output channel
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
containing the output channel for which you want to assign the output port.
2. In the top part of the screen, press the channel number/channel name field to
access the PATCH/NAME popup window.
In the PATCH/NAME popup window you can change the channel name, icon, and output port
assigned to each output channel. The window includes the following items.
1 PATCH button
Indicates the port that is patched to the input or output channel. Press this button to enable the
PATCH tab at the bottom of the screen. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, enabling
you to select the network and port.
2 Channel select button
Selects the channel to set.
NOTE
Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console.
3 Channel icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel. Press this
button to enable the ICON tab at the bottom of the screen. The CH COLOR/ICON popup
window will appear, enabling you to select the color, icon, and channel name.
4 Channel number display box
Indicates the channel number. This item cannot be changed.
Channel number/Channel name
3 54
1
6
7
2
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
17
5 Channel name edit box
Indicates the currently-specified channel. Press the inside of this box to enable the NAME tab at
the bottom of the screen. The SOFT KEYBOARD popup window will appear, enabling you to edit
the channel name.
6 Category select list
Selects the type of the port you want to display on the screen.
7 Port select buttons
Enable you to select a port in the current category. To cancel the selection, press the same button
once again.
3. Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the
output port that will be assigned to that channel.
If the output port select buttons are not shown at the bottom of the window, press the PATCH tab.
4. Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys to switch the output channels being
controlled, and specify their output ports in the same way.
5. When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol located in the upper
right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
Selecting the output channel for each output port
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the screen, press the OUTPUT
PORT button to open the OUTPUT PORT popup window.
OUTPUT PORT button
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
18
In the OUTPUT PORT popup window, you can assign the source channel for each output port.
This popup window includes the following items.
1 Slot number/Card type
If an output channel of slot 1–3 is selected for operations, this area indicates the slot number and
the type of I/O card installed in that slot.
2 DELAY SCALE button
Press this button to open the DELAY SCALE popup window, in which you can select the unit for
the delay time.
3 Output port
This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned.
4 Channel select popup button
Enables you to select the channel that you want to assign to the output port. The name of the
currently-selected channel is displayed.
5 Delay time knob
Sets the delay time of the output port. Press this knob to select it, and then use multifunction
knobs 1–8 to adjust the settings. The millisecond delay time value is indicated above the knob,
and the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY SCALE popup window is indicated
below the knob.
NOTE
If you have selected ms (millisecond) as the scale, the delay time value will not appear above the
knob.
6 DELAY button
Switches the output port delay on or off.
7 Ø (Phase) button
Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase and reverse
phase.
8 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain of the output port. To adjust this value, press the knob on screen to select
it, and then operate multifunction knobs 1–8. Rotate the knob to set the value in the range of –96
to +24 dB in 1.0 dB steps. Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the value in
0.1 dB steps. The current value appears immediately below the knob.
9 Level meter
Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port.
0 Output port select tabs
Switch the output ports controlled in the popup window in groups of up to eight ports. Tabs are
categorized into three groups: DANTE, SLOT, and PATCH VIEW. To display tabs in the desired
group, press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row.
3. Use the output port select tabs at the bottom of the popup window to select the
output port you want to control.
The tabs correspond to the following output ports.
• DANTE 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56, 57–64
These tabs control the output channels of the Dante connectors.
• SLOT1 1–8, 9–16
• SLOT2 1–8, 9–16
• SLOT3 1–8, 9–16
These tabs enable you to control output channels 1–8 and 9–16 of slots 1–3 respectively.
• OMNI 1–8
This tab enables you to control OMNI jacks 1–8.
• DIGITAL OUT
This tab enables you to control the L/R channels of the DIGITAL OUT connector.
•PATCH VIEW1
•PATCH VIEW2
These tabs display lists of patches.
4. To assign a channel to an output port, press the channel select popup window for
that port.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
19
The CH SELECT popup window will appear. This popup window includes the following items.
1 Category select list
Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the
following channels. They vary depending on the output port type.
• MIX/MATRIX.................................. MIX 1–MIX 24, MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
• ST/MONO/MONI/CUE ................. STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO(C), MONI L, MONI R,
MONI C, CUE L, CUE R
• DIRECT OUT 1–32......................... CH1–CH32 Direct Outs
• DIRRECT OUT 33–64.................... CH33–CH64 Direct Outs
• DIRECT OUT 65–72 ...................... CH65–CH72 Direct Outs
• INSERT OUT 1–32.......................... CH1–CH32 Insert-outs
• INSERT OUT 33–64 ....................... CH33–CH64 Insert-outs
• INSERT OUT 65–72 ....................... CH65–CH72 Insert-outs
• INSERT OUT MIX/MATRIX ....... Insert-outs for MIX1-MIX24, MATRIX 1-MATRIX8
• INSERT OUT ST/MONO .............. Insert-outs for STEREO L, STEREO R, and MONO (C)
• CASCADE MIX/MATRIX............. MIX1–MIX24, MATRIX1–MATRIX8
• CASCADE ST/MONO/CUE.......... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO(C), CUE L, CUE R
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2 Channel select buttons
Select the channel to be assigned to the output port you selected in step 3.
5. Use the channel select tabs and the channel select buttons to select the source
channel, and press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the OUTPUT PORT popup window.
NOTE
If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to
change the patch settings. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box
will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere.
6. Make settings for delay, phase, and output gain as necessary.
7. Repeat steps 3–6 to assign channels to other output ports.
8. When you have finished making settings, click the “x” symbol in the upper right of
the window to return to the previous screen.
Changing the input patch settings
This section explains how to change the patching of each input channel.
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
for the input channel to which you want to assign the input source.
2. In the top part of the screen, press the channel number/channel name field to
access the PATCH/NAME popup window.
1
2
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
20
In the PATCH/NAME popup window you can view and change the channel name, icon, channel
color, and input port assigned to each input channel.
1 PATCH button
Indicates the currently-selected input port. If you press this button when selecting an icon or
changing the channel name, you will return to the input port select screen.
2 Channel icon button
Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this button, a
screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
3 Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this field, a
keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
4 Category select list
Selects the category of input port shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the
following input ports. They vary depending on the channel type.
• DANTE1–32 ..............DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64 ............DANTE33–DANTE64
• OMNI/PB OUT.........OMNI1–OMNI8, PB OUT(L), PB OUT(R)
• SLOT1 .........................SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 .........................SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 .........................SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16)
• EFFECT RACK......... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK.... PR1L(A)–PR2R(B)
5 Input port select buttons
Assign an input port to the currently-selected input channel.
6 Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
3. Access the input port selection screen of the PATCH/NAME popup window, and
then use the input port select tabs and input port select buttons to select an input
port.
NOTE
If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to
change the patch settings. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box
will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere.
4. When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol located in the upper
right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
NOTE
You can also select input ports from the GAIN/PATCH popup window.
5. Repeat step 2–4 to assign input ports for other channels.
2 3
1
6
4
5
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
21
Inserting an external device into a channel
If desired, you can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT,
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port used for
the insertion and the location of the insert-out/in points can be specified individually for each channel.
1. As desired, connect your external equipment to an OMNI IN/OUT jack or to an
I/O card installed in slots 1–3.
NOTE
If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (see page 198).
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
for the channel to which you want to assign the input source.
3. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window.
In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, you can view or change the type of input/output
port used for insertion and the location at which insertion will occur. There are two variations of
this popup window; one-channel and eight-channel.
Each window view includes the following items.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1ch)
1 INSERT OUT button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output
port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button.
2 INSERT IN button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an input
port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button.
3 INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or off.
To change the currently-selected insert point, press one of the three blocks that does not contain
any buttons.
NOTE
You can set the I/O ports to function as an insert for each block.
4 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert position/Direct Out position will be applied to all input channels.
5 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only)
Specifies whether the insert position settings will be applied to all output channels.
■ INSERT IN HA field
This field will appear if you have selected an input port (that features a head amp) as the insert-in.
6 +48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off.
7 A.GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting for the head amp. Press this knob so that you will be able to use
the multifunction knob to adjust the gain.
8 HA meter
Displays the level of the HA input signal.
1
2
3
4 5
6 7 8
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
22
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (8ch)
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel to set. The channel icon, color, and number appear on the button.
2 INSERT OUT button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output
port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button.
3 INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or off. The currently-specified insert point setting appears above the
button.
4 INSERT IN button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an input
port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button. You can also view the insert-
in level by checking the indicator located to the right of the port button (that is displayed as an
option).
4. Access either the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window, and then press the INSERT OUT button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port used for
insert-out. The window includes the following items.
1 Category select list
Selects the category of output port shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the
following output ports. They vary depending on the channel type.
• OMNI ..........................................OMNI1–OMNI8
• SLOT1 ......................................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ......................................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ......................................... SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16)
• GEQ RACK ................................ GEQ1L(A)–GEQ16R(B) (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and
MONO channels only)
• EFFECT RACK..........................FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK..................... PR1L(A)–PR8R(B)
2 Output port select buttons
These buttons assign the output port that will be used as insert-out for the currently-selected
channel.
NOTE
If a rack in which a GEQ or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert-out or insert-in,
the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack. Also, insert mode will
automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in
which a GEQ or Premium Rack is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be defeated
and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
1
4
3
2
1
2
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
23
5. Use the category and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that
will be used as insert-out, and press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window.
6. Press the INSERT IN button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input port used for
insert-in. The categories correspond to the following input ports.
• OMNI.......................................... OMNI1–OMNI8
• SLOT1 ......................................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ......................................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ......................................... SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16)
• GEQ RACK................................ GEQ1L(A)–GEQ16R(B) (Output channels only)
• EFFECT RACK ......................... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK .................... PR1L(A)–PR2R(B)
7. Specify the input port you will use for insert-in, and press the CLOSE button.
8. Press the INSERT ON/OFF button to turn it ON.
In this state, insert-out/in is enabled. Adjust the input/output levels of your external device if
necessary.
NOTE
• If you have selected the OMNI IN jack on the CL console
as the input port for insert-in, make the HA settings in the
INSERT IN HA field.
• Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal
selected for insert-out will continue to be sent.
9. If you want to change the insert-out/in position, access the one-channel INSERT/
DIRECT OUT popup button, and press one of the three INSERT fields.
The INSERT field you pressed will be enabled.
10. When you have finished making all settings, press the “x” symbol located in the
upper right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
11. As desired, make insert settings for other channels as well.
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I/O device, from
the desired OMNI OUT jack, or from the output channel of a desired slot.
1. Connect your external device to an OMNI OUT jack, OUTPUT jack, or to an I/O card
installed in slot 1–3.
NOTE
If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (see page 198).
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
that includes the input channel that you want to output directly.
3. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window.
There are two variations of this popup window; one-channel and eight channel. Each window
view includes the following items.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1ch)
1 DIRECT OUT field
Enables you to make settings for direct output. Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF
(immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the direct
output position.
5
4
1
32
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
24
2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select a Direct Out
output port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button.
3 DIRECT OUT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
4 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this knob to control the level using the
multifunction knob.
5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point/Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input channels.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (8ch)
1 DIRECT OUT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off. The currently-selected Direct Output point is indicated above
the button.
2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select a Direct Out
output port. The name of the currently-selected port will appear on the button.
3 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this knob to control the level using the
multifunction knob.
4. Access either the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window, and press the DIRECT OUT popup button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port used for
direct output. The window includes the following items.
1 Category select list
Selects the category of output port shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the
following output ports. They vary depending on the channel type.
• OMNI/REC ............... OMNI1–OMNI8, REC IN(L), REC IN(R)
• SLOT1 ........................ SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ........................ SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ........................ SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16)
• DANTE1–32.............. DANTE1–DANTE32
• DANTE33–64............ DANTE33–DANTE64
2 Output port select buttons
These buttons assign the output port used for direct output of the currently-selected INPUT
channel.
5. Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the
output port that will be used for direct output, and press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window.
1
2
3
1
2
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
25
6. Press the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button to turn it ON.
In this state, direct output is enabled. Adjust the input level of your external device as necessary.
NOTE
With the factory settings, all are turned off.
7. If you want to change the position of the direct output, access the one-channel
INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup button, and press one of the DIRECT OUT fields.
The DIRECT OUT field you pressed will be enabled.
8. If you want to adjust the level of the direct output, access either the one-channel
or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, and operate the DIRECT
OUT LEVEL knob.
9. When you have finished making all settings, click the “x” symbol located in the
upper right to close the window.
You will return to the OVERVIEW screen.
10. As desired, make direct output settings for other channels as well.
Recording or playing back using DAW on a
computer
If you plan to add DAW software, such as Steinberg Nuendo, to an audio network that includes a CL
console and I/O devices, you must use Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) driver software. DVS works as
an audio interface, making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and an audio network (that
includes a CL series console and I/O devices). In this way, you will be able to make multi-track
recordings of live performances or use live recordings that were made a day earlier for a virtual sound
check.
This section explains how to perform the setup to add DAW software to an audio network.
Required devices and software
• CL series console; I/O device
• A computer (Windows or Mac) equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga-bit Ethernet
(GbE) network; DAW software
• A GbE-compatible network switch
• CAT5e cable
• Dante Virtual Soundcard driver software
• Dante Controller control software
NOTE
You must have a license ID to use Dante Virtual Soundcard. The license ID is included in the CL
unit package.
The latest information about the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at
the following website:
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Using Nuendo Live
Steinberg’s Nuendo Live DAW software can be used with the CL series console, taking advantage of
functionality that makes them work well together. For details, refer to “Using the CL console with
Nuendo Live” on page 188.
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
26
Word clock settings
In a Dante network, the master device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the network. If
the master device is removed from the network or breaks down, another device will automatically take
over as the clock master.
To make this setting, in the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button, then WORD CLOCK/
SLOT button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup window.
Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard
Install a Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) and the
Dante Controller in a computer that you want to
use for audio recording.
Then, connect the GbE-compatible network port
on the computer to a GbE-compatible network
switch. Configure the computer to obtain an IP
address automatically (this is the default setting).
Before you start DVS, select the desired audio
format (e.g., 48kHz, 24-bit) and Dante latency.
(Select a higher latency value to maintain network
stability during the use of many channels.) For
Advanced settings, select the number of channels
to be used for recording and playback (the default is 8 x 8). Please refer to the Dante Virtual Soundcard
User’s Guide for more information on the ASIO setting (Windows).
Setting up Dante Controller
Connect the network port on the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the
computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
The following settings can be made via Dante Controller.
• For multi-track recording: Patch audio signals from the I/O device to DVS for multi-track recording.
• For virtual sound check: Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the computer
to the Dante audio network, then routed to the channels on the CL console.
Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings of the
Dante Controller.
Setting up DAW software
You must make driver settings in your DAW software. In the device setting window, select “Dante
Virtual Soundcard-ASIO” (for Windows PC) or “Dante” (for Mac).
Some DAW software may require internal patching with the driver. For more information, refer to the
DAW software manual.
If you’re using Nuendo Live DAW software, see also “Using the CL console with Nuendo Live” on
page 188.
Audio recording and playback
After you have made the driver settings in your DAW software, you can record and play back audio.
For multi-track recording, set the input ports for tracks in DAW software to the ports that receive audio
signals from the I/O device.
For a virtual sound check, you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the CL
console. To do so, to patch the signals so that the signals will be output from the DAW software to
DANTE 1–64 on the CL console. It may be convenient for you later if you store two sets of the DANTE
INPUT PATCH settings in the library: one set for routing audio signals from the I/O device, and
another set for routing audio signals from DAW software. In this way, you will be able to switch between
patch settings without starting Dante Controller. In addition, you will be able to patch a specific channel
(such as a vocal) to the I/O device to monitor during a virtual sound check.
Input channels
Reference Manual
27
Input channels
This chapter explains various operations for input channels.
Signal flow for input channels
The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I/O devices, rear panel
input jacks, or slots 1–3, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, MIX buses, or MATRIX
buses. There are two types of input channels, as follows.
MONO channel
These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the CL series console is in the default state,
the input signal from the Dante connector is assigned.
STEREO channel
These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the CL series console is in the default state, the
input signal from the EFFECT RACK 1–8 is assigned.
•INPUT PATCH
Assigns input signals to the input channels.
• Ø (phase)
Switches the phase of the input signal.
• DIGITAL GAIN
Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.
• HPF (High Pass Filter)
This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the specified frequency.
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating, ducking, expander, or compressor.
• DYNAMICS 2
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser.
•INPUT DELAY
Corrects input signal delay. You can specify up to 1000ms.
• LEVEL/DCA 1–16
Adjusts the input level of the channel.
• ON (on/off)
Turns the input channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
•PAN
Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. For the STEREO
channel, you can switch between PAN and BALANCE. The BALANCE parameter adjusts the
volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the STEREO channel to the STEREO bus. You
can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP popup window so that the setting of the PAN
parameter will also be applied to signals sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to stereo.
INPUT PATCH
ATT
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX21-24 OUT
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48, 49-56, 57-64, 65-72]POST EQ(CL5)
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48, 49-56, 57-64]POST EQ(CL3)
CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48]POST EQ(CL1)
ON
4BAND
EQ
GATE
DUCK
EXPAND
COMP
GR METER
COMP
COMPAND
DE-ESSER
KEYIN CUE
HPF
PRE HPF
POST EQ
INSERT
METER
LEVEL/
DCA1-16
PRE FADER
PRE FADER POST ON
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
To OU TPUT PATCH
PRE EQ
INSERT POINT
POST ON INSERT OUT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
GR METER
METER
POST ON
METER
DYNA2OUT
METER
DYNA1OUT
METER
EQ OUT
METER
PRE EQ
PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER/POST ON
ON LEVEL
DIRECT OUT 1-72{64,48}
To OU TP UT PAT CH
PAN LINK
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
CUE R
MIX1,3...23
MIX2,4...24
CUE L
Keyin Filter
CH INSERT IN
1-72{64,48}
To RACKIN PATCH
INSERT
CH 1-72{64,48}
72
{64,
48}
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
ON
ON
ST L
MONO(C)
ST R
MIX
12 2324
ST
LR
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
12 78
CUE
LR
METER
PRE HPF
CH INSERT OUT
1-72{64,48}
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
LEVEL
PAN
ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
To M ATR IX
VAR I
To MATRIX
VAR I
STEREO
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
LEVEL
PAN
ON
PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON
To M IX
VARI
To MIX
VARI
STEREO
To MIX
FIXED
POST ON
ON
ON
To MIX
FIXED
STEREO
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
ON
ON
PAN
TO ST
LR MONO
TO MONO
LCR
TO LCR
CSR
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
PAN MODE
DELAY
Max
1000ms
INSERT
POST ON
INSERT OUT
Digital
GAIN
OSCILLATOR
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
MIX
12 2324
ST
LR
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
12 78
CUE
LR
16
ON
METER
LEVEL/
DCA1-16
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
POST ON
METER
POST ON
PAN LINK
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
CUE R
MIX1,3...23
MIX2,4...24
CUE L
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L
ON
ON
ST L
MONO(C)
ST R
To MATRIX
To MIX
SAME as INPUT1-72{64,48}
PAN /B AL
TO ST
LR MONO
TO MONO
LCR
TO LCR
CSR
POST PAN L
POST PAN R
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R
PAN MODE
ST IN 1L–8R
Digital
GAIN
Keyin
Self PRE EQ
Self POST EQ
MIX21-24 OUT
ST IN 1L-4R POST EQ
4BAND
EQ
GATE
DUCK
EXPAND
COMP
GR METER
COMP
COMPAND
DE-ESSER
KEYIN CUE
HPF
PRE HPF
POST EQPRE EQ
GR METER
METER
DYNA2OUT
METER
DYNA1OUT
METER
EQ OUT
METER
PRE EQ
Keyin Filter
METER
PRE HPF
DELAY
Max
1000ms
SAME as INPUT1-72{64,48}
ATT
OSCILLATOR
INPUT PATCH
All parameters for L and R are
linked to each other (except for
Ø (phase), Digital GAIN, Delay,
and PAN).
Input channels
Reference Manual
28
• LCR (Left/Center/Right)
Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus/MONO bus as a three-channel signal that
consists of the L/R channel plus the center channel.
• MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1–24.
• MATRIX LEVEL 1–24 (MATRIX send levels 1–24)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1–24. As the
position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from the following:
immediately before EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8.
• MATRIX LEVEL 1–8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8)
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8. As the
position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose from the following:
immediately before the EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• INSERT (MONO channels only)
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect
processor. For the position of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose immediately before
the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
• DIRECT OUT (MONO channels only)
You can patch this to any output port to send out the input signal directly from the corresponding
output port. For the position of the direct output, you can choose immediately before the HPF,
immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
• METER
Meters the input channel level. You can switch the position at which the level is detected
(see page 112).
Specifying the channel name, icon and channel
color
On the CL series unit, you can specify the on-screen name and icon for each input channel. This section
explains how to specify the channel name, icon and channel color.
1. Access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel for which you want
to specify the channel name, icon and channel color.
2. Access the PATCH/NAME popup window by pressing the channel number/channel
name field of the channel to which you want to assign the channel name, icon and
channel color.
Channel number/Channel name field
Input channels
Reference Manual
29
This popup window contains the following items:
1 PATCH button
Indicates the currently-patched port. Press this button to enable the PATCH tab at the bottom of
the screen. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, enabling you to select the network and
port.
2 Channel icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel. Press this
button to enable the ICON tab at the bottom of the screen. The CH COLOR/ICON popup
window will appear, enabling you to select the color, icon, and channel name.
3 Channel name edit box
Indicates the currently-specified channel. Press the inside of this box to enable the NAME tab at
the bottom of the screen. The SOFT KEYBOARD popup window will appear, enabling you to edit
the channel name.
4 Tabs
Use these tabs to switch between items.
3. Press the desired channel icon button.
The lower part of the popup window will change as follows.
1 Channel color select buttons
Select a channel color. Pressing the button will immediately apply the change.
2 Icon select buttons
Select a channel icon. Pressing the button will immediately apply the change.
3 Sample name setup buttons
Select a preset sample name. You can edit the name on the NAME tab later.
4. Use the icon select buttons to select the icon you want to use for the channel. You
can use the channel color select buttons to select the color of the channel.
The selected icon or color will appear on the icon button in the upper part of the window.
5. To edit the channel name based on a sample name, use the sample name setup
buttons to select a sample name.
The sample name you selected will be entered in the channel name field in the upper part of the
window.
To enter the channel name directly, proceed to Step 6.
NOTE
You can also add or edit characters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample
name. If you want to quickly assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a
consecutive number, such as “Vocal 1” or “Vocal 2,” enter a sample name first, and then add a
number.
2 3
1
4
1
2
3
Input channels
Reference Manual
30
6. If you want to enter a channel name directly (or edit a sample name that has been
entered), press the channel name field in the upper part of the window.
The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the screen, allowing you to enter or edit the
characters.
7. Use the [SEL] keys to switch input channels, and specify the icon or channel name
for other channels in the same way.
When the PATCH/NAME popup window is displayed, you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the
channel to be controlled.
8. When you finish your data input, press the × symbol in the upper right of the
window.
NOTE
Press the TAB button to switch to the next channel. You can also press the ENTER button to close
the popup window in the same way as using the “x” symbol.
Making HA (Head Amp) settings
This section explains how to make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain,
phase) for each input channel.
Setting the analog gain
1. To adjust only the HA analog gain, use the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section.
2. To edit detailed parameter settings such as phantom power on/off or phase, use
the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that
includes the input channel for which you want to adjust the head amp.
3. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel for which you want to adjust the head
amp. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
This popup window features four types of view. Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to
select one of these four views. Each window view includes the following items.
GAIN/PATCH field
Input channels
Reference Manual
31
GAIN/PATCH popup window (1ch)
1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name indicator
Displays the channel icon, channel number, and channel name.
2 HA section
Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel. This section enables you to operate the
following HA-related controllers:
• +48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off.
• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level. If the
Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the
analog gain when the function is turned on.
•HA meter
Displays the level of the HA input signal.
NOTE
• If a slot is patched to the channel, this section 2 will display the type of the slot/MY card and slot
meter instead.
• If a rack is patched to the channel, this section
2 will display the rack type and the effect type.
• If nothing is patched, section
2 will be blank.
• GC (Gain Compensation) ON/OFF button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. If the Gain Compensation
function is turned on, the level of the signal output from the I/O device to the audio network will
be stabilized. For example, if the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing the input
signal from the I/O device, and if the analog gain is adjusted on the FOH console, this function
will prevent the level of the signal received on the monitoring console from fluctuating. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned off, the analog gain and digital gain will return to the level that
was obtained when you turned on the function. Therefore, the level on the digital network will
remain the same.
• Gain compensation meter
Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation.
3 INPUT PORT button
Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel. Press the button to display the PATCH popup
window, in which you can select a port to patch.
4 Icon/Channel name button
Indicates the channel number, icon, and name. Press this button to access the PATCH/NAME
popup window, in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name.
5 Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input.
6 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level.
7 Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after digital gain.
8 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
32 4 5 6 7
1 8
Input channels
Reference Manual
32
GAIN/PATCH popup window (8ch)
1 Channel select button
Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. When you press this button, the corresponding
channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, and the
corresponding [SEL] key will light.
2 PATCH button
Press this button to display the PORT SELECT popup window to patch the input port to the input
channel.
3 +48V button
This button will appear for the input channel to which the head amp has been patched. Press the
button to switch phantom power (+48V) on or off.
NOTE
If the slot (for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized) is patched, the type of the
mini-YGDAI card will be displayed.
4 A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Press this knob so that you will be
able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain.
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear,
showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on.
5 Level meter
Indicates the input signal level.
6 GC (Gain Compensation) button
Switches the Gain Compensation function on or off for that channel.
7 Ø (Phase) button
Switches the phase of the input signal.
8 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction
knob to adjust the gain.
9 Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after digital gain.
GAIN/PATCH popup window
(1-48, 49-72/ST IN(CL5), 49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1))
This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels. Here you can also
adjust the head amp gain in groups of the selected eight channels by using the multifunction knobs in
the Centralogic section.
1 Parameter select buttons
Select one of the following parameters to view in the window.
• ANALOG GAIN........................ Analog gain
• DIGITAL GAIN ........................Digital gain
• PATC H ........................................ Patch selection
2 GC ALL ON/GC ALL OFF buttons
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
3 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
1
2
3
4
5
9
6
7
8
12 12
3
Input channels
Reference Manual
33
■ If you press the ANALOG GAIN parameter select button:
1 GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to control the gain value using
the multifunction knob. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear,
showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This
indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3 +48V indicator
Indicates the +48V on/off status for each channel.
4 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
NOTE
If the input channel is patched to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not
recognized, the knob
1 will be replaced with the slot/port number of the patch destination. In
addition, the indicator
3 will not be displayed.
If the input channel is patched to the VIRTUAL RACK, the knob
1 will be replaced with the port
ID of the rack.
If nothing is patched to the input channel, the knob
1 will be replaced with a dotted line “----”.
■ If you press the DIGITAL GAIN parameter select button:
1 GAIN knob
Indicates the digital gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to control the gain value using
the multifunction knob.
2 OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This
indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3 Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
■ If you press the PATCH parameter select button:
1 PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an input port
to patch to the channel.
4. Access either the 1ch or 8ch GAIN/PATCH popup window.
5. Use the on-screen buttons or the multifunction knobs to edit the head amp gain,
phase, and phantom power on/off settings.
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference
between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack.
• The GAIN knob and +48V button are valid only on channels for which the assigned input port is
an INPUT jack on the I/O device, the OMNI IN on the CL unit, or a slot that is connected to an
external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or SB168-ES).
6. Perform the same operations for other input channels as desired.
If you are viewing the 1ch GAIN/PATCH popup window, you can also use the [SEL] keys to
switch the channel for editing.
If you are viewing the 8ch GAIN/PATCH popup window, you can use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight.
7. When you finish editing, press the × symbol in the upper right of the window.
1
3
2
4
1
2
3
1
Input channels
Reference Manual
34
Setting the Gain Compensation function
If you are using an I/O device (such as an Rio3224-D) on a Dante network, you can maintain the
constant level of signal output to the audio network by using the Gain Compensation function. If the
FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing an I/O device, or if you are performing digital
recording via Dante connections, using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant level
from the I/O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I/O device is changed.
To do so, follow the steps below:
1. Sets the analog gain as described previously.
2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the selected channel will appear.
3. Press the GAIN field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
4. Press the GC button located to the right of the A. GAIN knob.
When the function is turned on, the button will light. Press the button once again to turn it off.
If you adjust the analog gain value while the Gain Compensation function is turned on, the head
amp level will change accordingly. However, the level of the signal output to the audio network
will automatically be corrected to the level obtained when you turned Gain Compensation on. If
you turn Gain Compensation off while in this state, the analog gain and the compensated gain
within the I/O device will return to the settings that were in effect when you turned Gain
Compensation on. Therefore, the signal level on the audio network will remain the same.
NOTE
Since the compensated gain is the gain used to automatically compensate the gain within the I/
O device, it is not shown as a parameter. The position at the moment this was turned on will be
displayed.
Adjusting the digital gain
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the level of the signal
input to the CL’s input channels.
Follow the steps below:
1. Press the [SEL] key for the input channel that you want to control.
2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the selected channel will appear.
3. Press the GAIN field.
The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
4. Use multifunction knob 8 to adjust the D. GAIN parameter.
NOTE
• Press the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button, select the PREFERENCE tab, and then
set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION to DIGITAL GAIN. You will be able to adjust the digital gain value
by using the GAIN knob on the corresponding channel strip or the GAIN knob in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section.
• You can also operate the digital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN → DIGITAL GAIN to a USER
DEFINED knob, or by assigning an ALTERNATE function to a USER DEFINED key.
Input channels
Reference Manual
35
Relationship between analog and digital gain while Gain
Compensation is on
If Gain Compensation is on, adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the I/O device to
output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount. Therefore, the signals on
the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the digital domain.
For example, assume that the analog gain value has been set to +30 dB and Gain Compensation is now
turned on. Under this condition, if you raise the analog gain value to +45 dB, the level of the signal sent
to the audio network will stay at +30 dB (that is, attenuated by –15 dB).
At this time, the gain of each signal input to the CL series unit will be adjusted by the digital gain
parameter of the CL series console. If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I/
O device, adjusting the analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring
console, because the level of the signal on the audio network is maintained at a constant level.
However, please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain, you must first turn
the Gain Compensation function off, set the gain to an appropriate input level, and then turn the
function back on. If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain Compensation function is on,
the signal on the audio network will be amplified by the same amount due to the Gain Compensation
function, and the signal will remain distorted.
NOTE
You can perform this operation rapidly if you’ve assigned Gain Compensation on/off for the SET
BY SEL function to one of the USER DEFINED keys.
Sending a signal from an input channel to the
STEREO/MONO buses
This section explains how to send a signal from an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used mainly to send signals to the main speakers. There are two
ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR mode. You can
select the mode individually for each channel. These two modes differ as follows.
■ ST/MONO mode
This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus
independently.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or
off individually.
• The panning of a signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by the TO
ST PAN knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.)
• The left/right volume balance of a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is controlled
by this knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.)
If PAN/BALANCE mode is set to PAN, you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals sent to
the STEREO bus L/R individually (see page 37).
■ LCR mode
This mode sends input channel signals to three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) simultaneously.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on or off
collectively.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an input
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
• The TO ST PAN knob/BALANCE knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input channel to
the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
NOTE
If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or
similar devices, press the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area to select “LCR” as the
monitor source before you continue with the following procedure.
Input channels
Reference Manual
36
1. Make sure that an input source is connected to the input channel you are adjusting.
Set the phantom power, gain, and phase of the head amp to obtain the optimum
input signal.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
that includes the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the
STEREO/MONO bus.
3. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust,
and then press the knob once again to access the TO STEREO/MONO popup
window.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can control signals that is sent from an input channel
to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup window features four views. Use the tabs near the bottom of
the window to select one of the four views. Each window view includes the following items.
TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8ch)
Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of signals sent from input channels to the
STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Mode LEDs
3 MODE (ST/MONO/LCR mode select) button
Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR. The LED of the currently-
selected mode will light.
4 ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals sent from each channel to the STEREO
bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
For MONO channels, this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of signals sent to
the STEREO bus. For STEREO channels, this acts as a PAN knob, and also as a BALANCE knob
that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value,
press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
STEREO/MONO field
1
2
3
6
5
4
Input channels
Reference Manual
37
7 PAN/BALANCE MODE button
Switches the knob function of the TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob on the STEREO channel.
If the ST/MONO/LCR mode select button is set to LCR mode, the following button and knob are
displayed instead of the ST/MONO button
4.
8 LCR button
This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus. If this button is off, no signal will be sent from the corresponding input channel to
the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9 CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the
MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then
operate the corresponding multifunction knob. (see page 38)
TO STEREO/MONO popup window
(CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1))
Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
You can also adjust the pan or balance setting in groups of eight selected channels.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning or balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction
knob.
If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the indicator
to the right of the knob will light.
4 ST/MONO indicators
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/off status
of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If a channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location. The LCR
indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus/
MONO bus.
4. Access the eight-channel TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
Input channels
Reference Manual
38
5. Use the MODE button to select either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode for each
channel.
6. In the MASTER section on the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key for the
STEREO channel/MONO channel is turned on, and then raise the fader to an
appropriate level.
7. In the INPUT section on the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key is turned on
for the input channel you want to control, and then raise the fader to an
appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected
for the channel in step 5.
■ Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
8. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the STEREO/MONO button to
individually turn on/off the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus/
MONO bus.
For a channel that is set to ST/MONO mode, signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO
bus can be switched on or off individually.
9. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the TO ST PAN knob to set the
panning of a signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus.
■ Channels for which LCR mode is selected
8. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the LCR button to turn signals sent
from the input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off collectively.
For a channel that is set to LCR mode, signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus are
switched on or off collectively.
9. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the CSR knob to adjust the level
difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to
the MONO (C) bus.
10. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the TO ST PAN knob to set the
panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO (C)
bus.
If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change
the level of signals sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following
diagram. In this case, the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal
is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of a STEREO channel will change the level of signals sent
from the STEREO L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the
following diagram. In this case, the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob,
and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
CLR
TO ST PAN knob
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal level
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
CLR
TO ST BALANCE knob
Signal sent from the STEREO (L) channel to
the STEREO (L) bus
Signal level
CLR
TO ST BALANCE knob
Signal sent from the STEREO (R) channel to
the STEREO (R) bus
Signal level
Input channels
Reference Manual
39
If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the INPUT TO ST PAN knob will change the level of
signals sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following diagram.
Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of an ST IN channel will change the level of signals sent
from the STEREO L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the
following diagram.
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/
MATRIX bus
This section explains how to send a signal from an input channel to MIX buses 1–24 and MATRIX
buses 1–8.
The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on stage, or to
effect processors. The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is independent of the STEREO
bus or MIX buses, and is typically sent to a master recorder or to a backstage monitoring system.
You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus in the following three ways.
■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to
the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from a specific input channel to all
MIX/MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively.
■ Using the Centralogic section
With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level of
signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, the signals sent from eight
consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
■ Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the
top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals
sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
This section explains how to use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send
levels of signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses.
1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you
want to send signals, and that your monitor system, external effect processor, or
other device is connected to the corresponding output port.
2. Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channels that will send
signals to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
CLR
PAN k n o b
Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
Signal level
CLR
TO ST BALANCE knob
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to
the STEREO (L) bus
Signal level
CLR
TO ST BALANCE knob
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to
the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to
the STEREO (R) bus
Signal level
Input channels
Reference Manual
40
3. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
4. In the TO MIX/MATRIX field on screen, make sure that the MIX1–16 button or
MIX17–24/MATRIX button is turned on.
The TO MIX/TO MATRIX field displays the corresponding knobs and buttons. If this button is
off, press the button to turn it on.
MIX buses can be either a FIXED type that features a fixed send level, or a VARI type that features
a variable send level. The MATRIX buses are all VARI type. You can switch between FIXED and
VARI types for each two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX buses. To do so, press the SETUP
button, the USER SETUP button, and then the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP
popup window.
If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, a circle ( ) is displayed instead of the TO MIX
SEND LEVEL knob. In this case, you cannot adjust the send level.
If the send-destination MIX bus is a VARI type, or if the send-destination is a MATRIX bus, the
TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob will be displayed in the same color as the corresponding knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, you can use the corresponding knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level.
If necessary, you can specify two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX buses as a stereo
bus and link the main parameters.
If the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo, the left knob of the two adjacent
TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX/MATRIX PAN knob. (If
BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, it will operate as a
BALANCE knob).
For a MONO channel, the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MIX/MATRIX
buses, and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating
the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND PAN knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal
sent to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount
sent to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus.
For a STEREO channel, if BALANCE mode has been selected on the TO STEREO/MONO popup
window (8ch), the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX/MATRIX buses,
and the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX/
MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND BAL knob counter-clockwise will
increase the amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus,
and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R-channel to the even-numbered
MIX/MATRIX bus. If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window
(8ch), the left knob will function as the PAN knob. The right knob will function as send level, just
as in BALANCE mode.
5. Make sure that the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button is turned on for the
send-destination MIX bus.
If this button is off, press the button on screen to turn it on.
6. In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to
adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
NOTE
If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select
keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then
press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.
7. You can use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to switch input channels and control
the send level to all MIX/MATRIX buses in the same way.
Input channels
Reference Manual
41
Using the Centralogic section
You can use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of signals sent
from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.
1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you
want to send signals, and that your monitor system, external effect, or other device
is connected to the corresponding output port.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
that includes the input channel that you want to control.
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels
to the MIX/MATRIX bus.
3. Press the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send-destination MIX/
MATRIX bus.
A bold frame will appear around all TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MIX/
MATRIX bus.
4. Use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the send level of signals sent from the (up
to) eight input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
If necessary, you can use the Bank Select keys to switch the input channels that you want to assign
to the Centralogic section, and adjust the send levels from other input channels to the selected
MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
If you want to monitor a signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select
keys to assign the corresponding MIX channel to the Centralogic section, and then press the
[CUE] key for that MIX/MATRIX channel.
5. If you want to make detailed settings for MIX/MATRIX sends, press the TO MIX/
MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again.
When you press the currently-selected TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob a second time, the
MIX SEND popup window or the MATRIX SEND popup window will appear. This window
includes the following items.
1 ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to “PRE.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-
source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
At this time, the PRE/POST button will light.
2 ALL POST button
Sets the send point to “POST.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-
source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
At this time, the PRE/POST button will turn off.
3 SEND FROM MODE button
Press this button to switch to the “SEND from 8ch” popup window.
4 Send destination indicator
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
5 Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
14 42 3 1 2 3
0
8
7
6
5
0
9 9
8
7
6
5
Input channels
Reference Manual
42
6 Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and
color appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
7 PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is on,
the send point is set to PRE.
8 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
9 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination
is set to monaural or FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send source is stereo, you can use the PAN/BALANCE mode
setting in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window to select whether
PAN/BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob.
The knob for the mode selected here will appear.
0 SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the
level using the multifunction knobs.
If the send destination is set to FIXED, only a gray circle will appear.
6. Use the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF buttons to switch signals sent from the
input channels to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus on or off.
7. If necessary, use the PRE buttons to select the send point of a signal that is sent
from each input channel to a VARI type MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
• If the PRE button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader) for each MIX/MATRIX bus. This setting is made in the BUS SETUP
popup window (see page 202).
• The PRE button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses.
Input channels
Reference Manual
43
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels to a specific
MIX/MATRIX bus.
1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you
want to send signals, and that your monitor system, external effect, or other device
is connected to the corresponding output port.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button.
The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip
section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each
channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND
ON status.
If you’ve used the bank select keys to assign input channels to the Centralogic section, the
corresponding channels will change to indicating the send levels and ON settings for the signals
sent from those channels to the currently selected MIX/MATRIX bus. If the Centralogic section
has been assigned to output channels, and the send-destination bus is MIX, each channel will still
show the fader value and ON setting. If the send-destination bus is MATRIX, the Centralogic
section will change to show the send level and ON setting for the signals sent from the MIX/
STEREO/MONO channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus. MATRIX channels will
continue showing the channel fader values and ON setting.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that
enable you to switch between MIX1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX17-24/MATRIX ON FADER
mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX buses.
3. Press the MIX1-16, MIX17-24/MATRIX switch button repeatedly to select MIX1-16
or MIX17-24/MATRIX.
In this way, you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/
MATRIX buses.
4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select
the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
• Alternatively, press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a
popup window from which you can select a MIX/MATRIX bus.
• You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the
Centralogic section. If you select the buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX1-
16, MIX17-24/MATRIX switch button will be changed automatically.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be
turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor
a signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
5. Use the faders in the Channel Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level
of signals routed from the input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
NOTE
You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly
switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back
again.
6. Repeat steps 4–5 to adjust the send level for other MIX/MATRIX buses in the same
way.
7. When you have finished adjusting the MIX/MATRIX send levels, press the “x”
symbol in the Function Access Area.
The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit SENDS
ON FADER mode and return to normal mode.
Input channels
Reference Manual
44
Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay)
This section explains how to correct delay between input channels by using Input Delay function.
This function is useful when you want to correct the phase variance, caused by microphone locations
on the stage, to add depth to the sound by using phase variance, or to correct a delay (a gap) that may
exist between video and audio that are sent from a site for broadcast on TV.
1. Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send
signals to the MIX/MATRIX bus.
2. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
3. Press the INPUT DELAY field to access the INPUT DELAY popup window.
In the INPUT DELAY popup window you can set the on/off status and the value of the input
channel delay. This popup window features three types of view. Use the tabs near the bottom of
the window to select one of four views. Each window view includes the following items.
INPUT DELAY (8ch)
1 DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE popup window, in which you can select the unit
for the delay time.
You can select one of the four delay scales: meter (meter/sec), feet (feet/sec), sample (number of
samples), and ms (millisecond).
2 Channel select button
Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the channel.
3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Indicates the channel delay value. You can use the multifunction knob to adjust it. You can view
the current value immediately above the knob (in unit of ms) and below the knob (in the
currently-selected scale). If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing
will appear above the knob.
INPUT DELAY field
1
2
3
Input channels
Reference Manual
45
INPUT DELAY (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5),
CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1))
1 DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE popup window, in which you can select the unit
for the delay time.
2 Channel select button
Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the channel.
3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Indicates the channel delay value. Press this knob to adjust the value using the multifunction
knob. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (in unit of ms) and below the
knob (in the currently-selected scale).
NOTE
If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear to the right of the
knob.
4. Access the INPUT DELAY (8ch) popup window.
5. Use the on-screen buttons and the multifunction knobs to set the delay.
6. Perform the same operations for other input channels as desired.
If you are viewing the 8ch INPUT DELAY popup window, you can use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight.
7. When you finish editing, press the × symbol in the upper right of the window.
Channel library operations
Channel libraries include “INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall various
parameters (including the head amp settings) for input channels.
To recall a library, press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen.
For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
1
2
3
LIBRARY button
Output channels
Reference Manual
46
Output channels
This chapter explains output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels, MONO
channels).
Signal flow for output channels
The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses,
processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The following
types of output channels are provided.
MIX channels
These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the
corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus.
STEREO channel/MONO (C) channel
Each of these channels processes the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO
(C) bus, and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are in LCR
mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three
output channels.
MATRIX channel
These channels process the signals sent from input channels, MIX channels, and STEREO/MONO
channels to MATRIX buses, and send them to the corresponding output ports.
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or compander.
•LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the channel.
• ON (on/off)
Turns the output channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
POST ON
INSERT OUT
To OU TPUT PAT C H
To RACKIN PATCH
(21-24)To KEYIN
To MONITOR SELECT
ATT
4BAND
EQ
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
INSERT
POST EQ
LEVEL
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
GR METER
METER
DYNA OUT
METER
EQ OUT
METER
PRE EQ
Keyin
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX21-24 OUT/
MIX(1-8,9-16,17-24) POST EQ
PRE FADER
CUE ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
MIX 1-24
MIX
12 2324
ST
LR
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
12 78
CUE
LR
ON
POST ON
METER
POST ON
MIX OUT1-24
INSERT
METER
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
To OUTPUT PATCH
MIX
INSERT IN 1-24
To RACKIN PATCH
MIX
INSERT OUT 1-24
ST L
MONO(C)
ST R
PAN/BAL
TO ST
LR MONO
TO MONO
LCR
TO LCR
CSR
POST ON
PAN M O DE
PRE FADER / POST ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
ON
LEVEL
ON
LEVEL
LEVEL
PAN /B AL
ON
To MATRIX
VARI
To MATR I X
VARI
STEREO
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
INSERT
INSERT POINT
POST ON INSERT OUT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
BAL
MIX
12 2324
ST
LR
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
12 78
CUE
LR
ONLEVEL
ON
LEVEL
LEVEL
PAN /B AL
ON
To MATRI X
VARI
To MATRIX
VARI
STEREO
MATRIX1,3...7
MATRIX2,4...8
CUE ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
To OUT PU T PAT CH
To MONITOR SELECT
ATT
4BAND
EQ
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
INSERT
POST EQ
LEVEL
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
GR METER
METER
DYNA OUT
METER
EQ OUT
METER
PRE EQ
Keyin
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX21-24 OUT/
ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ
PRE FADER
STEREO L,R,MONO(C)
ON
POST ON
METER
POST ON
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
INSERT
METER
PRE FADER
BAL
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
To OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO
INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)
To RACKIN PATCH
STEREO
INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C)
PRE FADER / POST ON
PRE FADER / POST ON
INSERT POINT
POST ON INSERT OUT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
POST ON
INSERT OUT
INSERT
MATRIX 1-8
MIX
12 2324
ST
LR
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
12 78
CUE
LR
To OU TPUT PAT C H
To MONITOR SELECT
ATT
4BAND
EQ
COMP
COMPAND
EXPAND
INSERT
POST EQ
LEVEL
PRE EQ
INSERT OUT
PRE EQ
GR METER
METER
DYNA OUT
METER
EQ OUT
METER
PRE EQ
Keyin
Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX21-24 OUT/
MATRIX1-8 POST EQ
PRE FADER
ON
POST ON
METER
POST ON
MATRIX OUT 1-8
INSERT
METER
PRE FADER
PRE FADER
INSERT OUT
To OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX
INSERT IN 1-8
To RACKIN PATCH
MATRIX
INSERT OUT 1-8
CUE ON
(PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL
POST ON
INSERT OUT
INSERT
INSERT POINT
POST ON INSERT OUT
PRE FADER INSERT OUT
PRE EQ INSERT OUT
BAL
Output channels
Reference Manual
47
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or
MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus.
• MATRIX (MATRIX send level)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO
(C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1–8. For the position from which the signal will be sent to the
MATRIX bus, you can choose either immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON]
key.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the PAN knob to adjust the
panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX channel or the
STEREO channel, use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right
channels sent to the two MATRIX buses.
•INSERT
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect
processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations.
• METER
Indicates the level of the output channel.
You can switch the position at which the level is detected.
• KEY IN (MIX channels 21–24 only)
You can send the output signals of MIX channels 21–24 to dynamics processors and use them as
key-in signals to control the dynamics.
• RACK IN PATCH
Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack.
• OUTPUT PATCH
Assigns an output port to an output channel.
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source.
Specifying the channel name, icon and channel
color
This section explains how to specify the channel name, icon and channel color for each output channel.
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
that includes the output channel for which you want to specify the channel name,
icon and channel color.
2. Access the PATCH/NAME popup window by pressing the channel number/channel
name field of the channel to which you want to assign the channel name, icon and
channel color.
Channel number/Channel name field
Output channels
Reference Manual
48
Follow the steps for the input channels (see page 29).
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/
MONO bus
This section explains how to send a signal from a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR
mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. Features of each mode are the same as for
input channels.
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
that includes the MIX channel from which you want to send the signal to the
STEREO/MONO bus.
2. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust,
and then press the knob once again to access the TO STEREO/MONO popup
window.
In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, you can control a signal that is sent from the MIX
channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup window features four types of view. Use the tabs
near the bottom of the window to select one of the four views. These windows include the
following items.
2 3
4
1
STEREO/MONO field
Output channels
Reference Manual
49
TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8ch)
You can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to the
STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Mode LEDs
3 MODE (ST/MONO/LCR mode select) button
Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR. The LED of the currently-
selected mode will light.
4 ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO, this knob will function as a PAN knob that adjusts
the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. If the type of MIX channel
signal is STEREO, this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume level
balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to
select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
If the ST/MONO/LCR mode select button is set to LCR mode, the following button and knob are
displayed instead of the ST/MONO button (
4).
7 LCR button
This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to
the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
8 CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the
MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then
operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
1
2
3
6
5
4
7
8
Output channels
Reference Manual
50
TO STEREO/MONO popup window (CH1-48,
CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1), OUTPUT)
This window displays the status of signals sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO bus/
MONO bus. You can also adjust the pan or balance setting in groups of eight selected channels.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning and balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction
knob.
If the signal level reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the Σ
clipping indicator to the right of the knob will light.
4 ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/off status
of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If a channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator is displayed in this location. The LCR indicator
indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
3. Access the eight-channel TO STEREO/MONO popup window.
4. Use the MODE button to select either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode for each
channel.
5. In the MASTER section on the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key for the
STEREO channel/MONO channel is turned on, and then raise the fader to an
appropriate level.
6. Press one of the Output Bank Select Keys in the Centralogic section so that the MIX
channels you want to control are recalled to the Centralogic section.
7. Make sure that the [ON] keys for those channels are on, and use the fader in the
Centralogic section to raise the master level of the MIX channel to an appropriate
position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected
for the channel in step 4.
■ Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
8. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the STEREO/MONO button to turn
a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off.
For a channel that is set to ST/MONO mode, signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO
bus can be switched on/off individually.
9. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the TO ST PAN knob to set the
panning of a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus.
■ Channels for which LCR mode is selected
8. Make sure that the LCR button is turned on in the TO STEREO/MONO popup
window.
Channels for which the LCR button is off will not send a signal to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, press the CSR knob to select it, and use
multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the level difference between signals sent from
that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
The CSR knob settings are the same as for input channels.
10. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, press the TO ST PAN knob to select it,
and use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the panning of signals sent from the
MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, and the level balance of
signals sent to the MONO (C) bus and STEREO (L/R) bus.
Refer to page 38 for details on how the signal level sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each
bus will change according to the operation of the TO ST PAN knob.
1
2
3
4
Output channels
Reference Manual
51
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses
This section explains how to send a signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses
1–8. You can do this in either of the following three ways.
■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to
the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from a specific MIX,
STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
■ Using the Centralogic section
With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels
to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from up to eight
MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
■ Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the
top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent
from MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted
simultaneously.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section
Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level of signals sent from the
desired MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want
to send signals, and that an external device is connected.
2. Using the Bank Select keys of the Centralogic section, assign MIX channels or
STEREO/MONO channels to the Centralogic section.
3. Use the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that will send
signals to the MATRIX buses.
You can also use the [SEL] key in the MASTER section to directly select the STEREO/MONO
channels.
4. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
5. Make sure that the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button is turned on for the send-
destination MATRIX bus.
If this button is off, press the button on screen to turn it on.
6. In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to
adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
NOTE
If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys
in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the
appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.
7. Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section to switch
channels, and adjust the send level from other channels to the MATRIX buses in
the same way.
Output channels
Reference Manual
52
Using the Centralogic section
This method lets you use the multifunction knobs (in the Centralogic section) to simultaneously adjust
the send levels from the eight channels selected in the Centralogic section to the desired MATRIX bus.
1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want
to send signals, and that your external device is connected to the corresponding
output port.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
that includes the channels (MIX channels or STEREO/MONO channels) that you
want to control.
In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the
MATRIX bus.
3. Press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send-destination MATRIX
bus.
A bold frame will appear around all TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MATRIX bus.
4. Use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the send level of the signals sent from up to
eight MIX channels or the STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
If necessary, you can use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section to
switch the send-source channel.
NOTE
• If you want to monitor signals being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to
access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section, and then press the [CUE]
key for that MATRIX channel.
• If you again press the currently-selected MATRIX bus select button, cue monitoring will be turned
on for the related MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that
is being sent to the selected MATRIX bus.
5. If you want to make detailed settings for MATRIX sends, press the TO MATRIX
SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again.
When you press the currently-selected TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob a second time, the
MATRIX SEND popup window will appear. The window includes the following items.
1 ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to “PRE.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-
source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
2 ALL POST button
Sets the send point to “POST.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-
source channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.)
3 SEND FROM MODE button
Press this button to switch to the “SEND from 8ch” popup window.
4 Send destination indicator
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
14 2 3
0
9
8
7
6
5
Output channels
Reference Manual
53
5 Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
6 Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and
color appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
7 PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is on,
the send point is set to PRE.
8 SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
9 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination
is set to monaural or FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send source is stereo, you can use the PAN/BALANCE mode
setting in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window to select whether
PAN/BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob.
The knob for the mode selected here will appear.
0 SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the
level using the multifunction knobs.
6. Use the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF buttons to switch signals sent from the MIX and
STEREO/MONO channels to the currently-selected MATRIX bus on or off.
7. If necessary, you can use the PRE buttons to select the point from which the signal
is sent from the MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to the MATRIX bus.
8. Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way.
Output channels
Reference Manual
54
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and STEREO/
MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want
to send signals, and that your monitor system etc. is connected to the
corresponding output port.
2. In the function access area, press the SENDS ON FADER button.
The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip
section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each
channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND
ON status.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that
enable you to switch between MIX 1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER
mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX buses.
3. Use the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX 1-
16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX.
Now you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/MATRIX
buses.
4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the function access area to select the
send-destination MATRIX bus.
NOTE
• Alternatively, press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a
popup window, from which you can select a MIX/MATRIX bus.
• You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the
Centralogic section. If you switch buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX 1-16
and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER switch buttons will also be change automatically.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be
turned on for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to
monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
5. Use the faders in the top panel Centralogic section to adjust the send level from
the MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
NOTE
You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly
switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back
again.
6. Repeat steps 4–5 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way.
7. When you’re finished adjusting the MATRIX send levels, press the X symbol in the
function access area.
The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit SENDS
ON FADER mode and return to normal mode.
Output channels
Reference Manual
55
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)
This section explains how to correct delay between output channels by using the Output Delay
function.
This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent to
speakers that are located at a distance from each other.
Output delay settings are made in the OUTPUT PORT popup window, which will appear when you
press the OUTPUT PORT button from the SETUP screen.
For details on operations in the OUTPUT PORT screen, refer to “Selecting the output channel for each
output port” on page 17.
Channel library operations
Channel libraries include “OUTPUT CHANNEL
LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall various
parameters (including the head amp settings) for output
channels.
To recall the library, while an output channel is selected,
press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
For details on using the library, refer to the “Using libraries” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
LIBRARY button
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
56
EQ and Dynamics
This chapter explains the EQ (equalizer) and dynamics that are provided on each channel of the CL
series console.
About EQ and dynamics
Each input channel and output channel on a CL series console provides a four-band EQ and dynamics.
EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immediately
before the EQ, allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the GAIN setting for EQ
will not cause the signal to clip. Input channels also provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the
EQ.
Input channels provide two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking device,
compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard compander, soft
compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used as a
compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander.
Using EQ
This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels.
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes
the channel for which you want to
control the EQ.
The EQ field shows the response of the
EQ. In this OVERVIEW screen, you can
edit the parameter by using the EQ
knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section.
2. If you want to edit while watching the ATT/HPF/EQ parameter values, press the EQ
field in the OVERVIEW screen to access the HPF/EQ popup window.
In the HPF/EQ popup window, you can edit the EQ and high-pass filter parameters and switch
them on/off.
This popup window features five types of views. Each window view includes the following items.
HPF/EQ popup window (1ch)
This lets you view and edit all EQ parameters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if
you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel.
1 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the EQ Library popup window.
2 DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values.
3 COPY button
All EQ parameter settings will be stored in buffer memory.
4 PASTE button
Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data has been
stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
5 COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory.
If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
6 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
This area indicates the icon, number and name of the currently-selected channel.
7 LOW SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the LOW band.
8 HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to select the high pass filter for the LOW band.
EQ field
1 2 3 4 5D8
6
7
C
I
G
F
B
E
J
0
9
A
H
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
57
9 EQ FLAT button
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB.
0 HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving type filter for the HIGH band.
A LPF ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band.
B EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off.
C EQ type select button
Switches between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and TYPE II (an
algorithm that reduces interference between bands).
D EQ graph
This graph displays real-time parameter values for the EQ and filter.
E EQ IN/OUT level meters
Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the EQ. For a stereo channel, these meters
indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
F ATT knob
Indicates an attenuation amount before the signal enters the EQ. You can use the multifunction
knobs to adjust this.
G HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF on or off.
H HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this.
I HPF type select button
Switches the HPF attenuation per octave between –12 dB/oct and –6 dB/oct.
J EQ parameter setting knobs
Indicate the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID, and
HIGH bands. Press these knobs to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs.
NOTE
• If shelving type has been selected for the LOW band, or if HPF is selected for the output
channels, the LOW band Q parameter will not appear.
• If shelving type has been selected for the HIGH band, or if LPF is selected, the HIGH band Q
parameter will not appear.
HPF/EQ popup window (8ch)
This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of eight channels
simultaneously.
Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings. You can adjust the HPF
settings of all eight channels displayed.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the
button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
2 EQ graph
This graph displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. The currently-selected EQ type
appears below the graph.
3 EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off. The OVER indicator (located to the right above the button) lights if the
post-EQ signal is clipping.
4 HPF FREQUENCY knob
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this.
5 HPF ON/OFF button
Switches the HPF on or off.
1
2
3
5
4
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
58
HPF/EQ popup window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5),
CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1), OUTPUT)
This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously. This page
is only for display, and does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful when you need to quickly
check multiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ settings between distant channels.
1 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The current
channel icon, number, and color appear on the button.
2 EQ graph
Indicates the total frequency response of the EQ or filter.
3 Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
3. Access the HPF/EQ popup window (1ch), and then press the EQ ON button to
enable the EQ.
If the HPF/EQ popup window (1ch) is displayed, you will be able to edit all of the EQ parameters.
4. If you want to use the high-pass filter on an input channel, operate the HPF knob
or HPF ON/OFF button in the HPF/EQ popup window.
Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. The HPF ON/
OFF button switches the high-pass filter on or off, and the HPF knob adjusts the cutoff frequency.
NOTE
• Output channels do not feature a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can
turn on the high-pass filter button on the popup window to use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass
filter.
• For both input channels and output channels, you can turn on the low-pass filter button to use the
HIGH band EQ as a low-pass filter.
5. If you want to copy EQ settings to another channel, or initialize the EQ settings,
use the tool buttons in the HPF/EQ popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
• EQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take
advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high-pass filter (see page 8).
• Even when the HPF/EQ popup window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to control the EQ.
1
2
3
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
59
Using dynamics
Input channels feature two dynamics processors; output channels feature one dynamics processor.
1. Use the Bank Select keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel
for which you want to control the dynamics.
The DYNAMICS 1/2 field displays the dynamics on/off status and the amount of gain reduction.
2. In the OVERVIEW screen, press the DYNAMICS 1/2 field to access the DYNAMICS
1/2 popup window.
In the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window, you can edit the dynamics settings and turn the processor
on or off.
This popup window features five types of views. Each window view includes the following items.
DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1ch)
This window displays only the currently-selected channel. All dynamics parameters can be viewed and
edited. This is convenient if you want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel.
1 LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the DYNAMICS Library popup window.
2 DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all dynamics parameters to the initial values.
3 COPY button
All dynamics parameter settings will be stored in buffer memory.
4 PASTE button
Press this button to apply the settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics. If no valid data
has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
5 COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current dynamics settings and the data stored in buffer
memory. If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
6 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
This area indicates the icon, number, and name of the currently-selected channel.
Dynamics 1 field
Dynamics 2 field
1 2 3 4 58
6
7
9
C
A
B
0
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
60
7 Dynamics type buttons
Enable you to select the dynamics type. You can choose from the following dynamics types.
• Dynamics 1 for an input channel
GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER
• Dynamics 2 for an input channel
COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER
• Dynamics 1 for an output channel
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S
8 Dynamics graph
This graph displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors.
9 Dynamics parameter setting knobs
Indicate the dynamics parameter values. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction
knobs.
The type of parameters will vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type.
• GATE or DUCKING:
• COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER:
• COMPANDER-H or COMPANDER-S:
• DE-ESSER:
0 Dynamics IN/OUT level meters, GR meter
These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics processing, and
the amount of gain reduction. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L
and R channels.
A KEY IN SOURCE select button
Press this button to display the KEY IN SOURCE popup window, in which you can select a key-
in signal that will trigger the dynamics.
B KEY IN FILTER parameter area (Displayed only for GATE or DUCKING)
Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass.
• Filter select buttons ..................Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To disable the
filter, press the button that is turned on.
• Q knob......................................... Indicates the filter Q. You can adjust the value by using the
multifunction knob.
• FREQUENCY knob..................Indicates the filter cutoff frequency. You can adjust the value by
using the multifunction knob.
C KEY IN CUE button
Enables you to cue-monitor the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE signal. Cue
will be canceled if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature this button, or if you
move to a different screen.
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
61
DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (8ch)
This window displays the settings for eight channels, including the currently-selected channel. You can
switch between eight-channel groups such as 1–8 and 9–16. Compared to the one-channel display,
fewer parameters can be controlled. This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or
certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right.
1 LIBRARY button
2 DEFAULT button
3 COPY button
4 PASTE bu tto n
5 COMPARE button
These buttons are the same as those on the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window.
6 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the
button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
7 DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters, GR meter
These meters indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing, and the amount of
gain reduction. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a three-step indicator appears,
indicating the open/close status of the gate.
If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, the indicator status means the following:
8 Dynamics graph
This graph displays the dynamics parameter values. The currently-selected dynamics type
appears below the graph. Press the graph to access the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window for that
channel.
9 THRESHOLD knob
Indicates the threshold value for the dynamics. You can use the corresponding multifunction
knobs to adjust the value.
0 DYNAMICS ON/OFF button
Switches dynamics on or off.
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
9
0
8
Type = Any type other than GATE
Type = GATE
Gate status
Red Yellow Green Off (dark)
On/Off status On On On Off
Open/Close status Close Open Open —
Amount of gain
reduction
30 dB or more less than 30 dB 0 dB —
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
62
DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5),
CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1), OUTPUT)
This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the corresponding
channel.
1 LIBRARY button
2 DEFAULT button
3 COPY button
4 PASTE bu tto n
5 COMPARE button
These buttons are the same as those in the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window.
6 Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon, number, threshold, and
color appear on the button.
7 Dynamics parameter area
This area displays the dynamics type and various meters. Press the area to access the DYNAMICS
1ch popup window of that channel.
If DUCKING, EXPANDER, COMPANDER (-H/-S), or DE-ESSER has been selected as the
dynamics type, the type appears near the top of this area.
The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after dynamics
processing, the GR meter, and the threshold (a numeric value). If the dynamics processor is any
type other than GATE, the threshold setting is indicated as a vertical line.
8 Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
3. Access the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1ch), and press the DYNAMICS ON
button to enable the dynamics processor.
4. To select a key-in signal, proceed as follows.
4-1. In the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1ch), press the KEY IN SOURCE button to
access the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT popup window.
KEY IN SOURCE SELECT pop-up window
4-2. Select the key-in signal. You can choose one of the following signals.
• SELF PRE EQ.............................The pre-EQ signal of the same channel
• SELF POST EQ .......................... The post-EQ signal of the same channel
• MIX OUT 21–24 ....................... Output signals of MIX channels 21–24
• CH1–72 POST EQ, ST IN1L–8R POST EQ, MIX1–24 POST EQ,
MTRX1–8 POST EQ, ST L/R, MONO POST EQ
........................... The post-EQ signal of the corresponding channel
*1
*1. The selectable signals are limited to the corresponding eight-channel group.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4-3. Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
5. If you want to copy dynamics settings to another channel, or initialize the
dynamics settings, use the tool buttons in the popup window.
NOTE
• Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can
also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings (see page 9).
• Even when the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the dynamics.
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
8
EQ and Dynamics
Reference Manual
63
Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries
You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings.
EQ library
There is an “INPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store and recall EQ
settings for input channels, and an “OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you
store and recall EQ settings for output channels.
To recall settings from a library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the
HPF/EQ popup window.
NOTE
• You can recall 199 different settings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library. Forty
(40) of the input library items are read-only presets, and three (3) of the output library items are
read-only presets.
• For details on how to access the HPF/EQ popup window, refer to “Using EQ” on page 56.
Dynamics library
Use the “Dynamics Library” to store or recall dynamics settings. All of the dynamics processors on CL
series units use this dynamics library. (However, the available types will differ between an input
channel’s Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2, and an output channel’s Dynamics 1. You cannot recall a type
that cannot be selected.)
To recall an item from the dynamics library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS 1/2
popup window.
NOTE
• You can recall 199 different settings from the library. Forty-one (41) of these are read-only
presets.
• For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window, refer to “Using dynamics” on
page 59.
For details on using the EQ and dynamics libraries, refer to the “Using the library” section in the
separate Owner’s Manual.
LIBRARY button
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
64
Grouping and linking
This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that enable you to control the level
or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link function that links the parameters of
multiple channels, and the operations that enable you to copy or move parameters between channels.
About DCA groups and Mute groups
CL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups and eight mute groups that enable you to control the
level of multiple channels simultaneously.
DCA groups enable you to assign input channels to sixteen groups, so that the Centralogic section
faders 1–8 can be used to control the level of all channels in each group. A single DCA fader will control
the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference
between the channels. This provides a convenient way in which drum mics, for example, can be
grouped.
Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys [1]–[16] to mute or unmute multiple channels in
a single operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously. Mute groups 1–8 can
be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channels can exist in the same
group.
Using DCA groups
This section explains how to assign input channels to the sixteen DCA groups and use the faders in the
Centralogic section to control them.
Assigning channels to a DCA group
There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group.
• You can select a specific DCA group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be assigned.
NOTE
• DCA groups can be used only with input channels.
• DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene.
■ Selecting channels to belong to a specific DCA group
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB
button.
The CH JOB button lets you perform grouping,
linking, and copying operations between channels.
When you press this button, the Function Access Area
will change as follows.
2. Press the DCA GROUP button to access the
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup
window.
In the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup
window, if the DCA GROUP ASSIGN button has been
selected, select the channels to be assigned to the DCA
group. This popup window includes the following
items.
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup window and the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
popup window.
DCA GROUP button
3
4
1
2
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
65
3 DCA group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the
DCA group. The on-screen fader for that channel will turn yellow and the channel will be
assigned to the DCA group. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the
channel from the group.
4 DCA group select button
Selects the DCA group that you want to assign.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• If the [DCA 1–8] key or [DCA 9–16] key has been selected in the Centralogic section, you can
access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the [SEL] key twice
in rapid succession.
In this case, the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window will appear with the
corresponding DCA GROUP 1–16 button selected for that DCA group.
3. Use the DCA GROUP 1–16 buttons to select the DCA group to which you want to
assign channels.
4. Use the [SEL] keys of the input channels to select the input channels that you want
to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] keys of the assigned channels will light, and the corresponding channels will be
highlighted in yellow in the DCA group assign field of the window.
To cancel an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark.
5. Assign channels to other DCA groups in the same way.
NOTE
You can assign a single channel to more than one DCA group. In this case, the value will be the
sum of the levels of all assigned DCA group faders.
6. When you finish making assignments, press the CLOSE button to close the popup
window, and press the × symbol in the Function Access Area (CH JOB display).
You will return to the previous screen. The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen
indicates the DCA group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit yellow in the
upper and middle rows of this field indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs.
NOTE
You can also access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the
DCA/MUTE GROUP field in the OVERVIEW screen.
■ Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong
1. Press a [SEL] key to select the input channel for which you want to make
assignments.
2. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
On this screen you can view all mix parameters for the currently-selected channel.
3. Use the DCA group select buttons to select the DCA group(s) to
which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple
selections are allowed).
4. Select the DCA group(s) for other channels in the same way.
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
66
Controlling DCA groups
Use the faders in the Centralogic section to control DCA groups.
1. Assign input channels to DCA groups.
2. Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Master section on the top panel,
adjust the relative balance between the input channels that belong to the DCA
group you want to use.
3. In the Centralogic section, press the [DCA 1–8] or [DCA 9–16] Bank Select key to
make it light so that you will be able to control the desired DCA groups in the
Centralogic section.
4. Operate the Centralogic section fader corresponding to the DCA group that you
want to use.
The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group will change while preserving the level
differences you established in step 2.
NOTE
Operating a DCA fader will not cause the input faders to move in tandem.
5. To switch a DCA group on/mute, press the [ON] key for that DCA group in the
Centralogic section.
When you press an [ON] key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator go dark, the
channels assigned to that DCA group will be muted (the same state as when the faders are lowered
to the –∞ dB position).
6. To cue-monitor a DCA group, press the [CUE] key for that DCA group in the
Centralogic section.
When you press the [CUE] key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator light, the
[CUE] keys for the channels assigned to that DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will be
enabled. For more information about cue, refer to “Using the Cue function” on page 101.
NOTE
You can also press the [DCA], [DCA 1–8], or [DCA 9–16] key in the Channel Strip section to select
the DCA group that you want to control.
Using mute groups
This section explains how to assign channels to mute groups and use the USER DEFINED keys to
control them.
Assigning channels to mute groups
As with the DCA group, there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups.
• You can select a specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be assigned.
■ Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB
button.
The Function Access Area will change as follows.
2. Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup
window.
MUTE GROUP button
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
67
In this popup window you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group. The
popup window includes the following items.
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup window and the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
popup window.
3 Mute group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the
mute group. The on-screen fader for that channel will turn red and the channel will be assigned
to the mute group. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from
the group.
If the MUTE SAFE button is on, this field displays the channels that are targets for mute safe (that
is, excluded from the mute groups). The operation procedure to apply or cancel mute safe to the
channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or from a mute group. The on-
screen faders of the assigned channels will turn green.
4 Mute group select button
Selects the mute group that you want to assign.
5 MUTE SAFE button
Use this button if you want to exclude a specific channel from all mute groups, regardless of its
assignment settings. The mute group assign field displays the channels that are excluded from the
mute groups. For more information on mute safe, “Using the Mute Safe function” on page 70.
6 MUTE GROUP MASTER button
Switches the corresponding mute group on or off.
7 DIMMER LEVEL knob
Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute group when the dimmer function is enabled.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than –∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP
MASTER button is turned on, this button will light orange.
3. Use the MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons to select the mute group to which you want to
assign channels.
4. Press the [SEL] key for the input channels/output channels that you want to assign
(multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] keys for the assigned channels will light, and the corresponding channels will be
highlighted in red in the mute group assign field of the window. To cancel an assignment, press a
lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark.
5. Assign channels to other mute groups in the same way.
NOTE
You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group.
6. When you finish making assignments, press the CLOSE button to close the popup
window, and press the × symbol in the Function Access Area (CH JOB display).
You will return to the previous screen. The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen
indicates the mute group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit red in the
lower row of this field indicate the mute groups to which that channel belongs.
NOTE
If the dimmer level is set to any level other than –∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP
MASTER button is turned on, these numbers will light orange.
For a channel for which the Mute Safe function (see page 70) has been turned on, an “S”
indicator will light up green at the right end of the bottom row.
3
4
6
7
1
2
5
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
68
■ Selecting the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong
1. Press the [SEL] key for the input channel/output channel that you want to assign.
2. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen.
In this screen you can view the mix parameters for the currently-selected channel.
3. Use the mute group select buttons to select the mute group(s) to
which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple
selections are allowed).
4. Select the mute group(s) for other channels in the same way.
Using mute groups
To control mute groups, you can use the MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons in the MUTE GROUP
ASSIGN popup window. In addition, it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On/Off function
for a mute group 1–8 to a USER DEFINED key.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
This popup window enables you to limit available functionality by user, and also to make system-
wide settings. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs
located at the bottom of the window.
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
69
3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]–
[16].
4. Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the
Mute On/Off function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear.
5. Choose “MUTE MASTER” in the FUNCTION column, and choose “MUTE GROUP x”
(where “x” is the mute group number) in the PARAMETER 1 column.
Then, press the OK button.
To select an item in each column, use / buttons or the multifunction knobs. When you press
the OK button, the Mute On/Off function for the specified mute group will be assigned to the
USER DEFINED key that you selected in step 4, and you will return to the USER DEFINED KEYS
page.
6. In the same way, assign the Mute On/Off function for another mute group to a
different USER DEFINED key.
7. When you finish assigning functions to USER DEFINED keys, press the × symbol to
close the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
8. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.
9. To mute a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key [1]–[16] that has been
assigned to the desired mute group.
The LED of the USER DEFINED key will light, and all channels that belong to the selected mute
group will be muted. At this time, the [ON] keys for the muted channels will blink. You can turn
on multiple USER DEFINED keys to mute multiple mute groups.
10. To defeat muting for a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key that you lit in step
9.
NOTE
Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be affected by operations of the USER
DEFINED key if the [ON] key for that channel is already turned off to begin with.
USER DEFINED key popup button
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
70
Using the Mute Safe function
Specific channels that belong to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations
(Mute Safe).
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE
popup window.
3. Press the MUTE SAFE button.
4. Press a [SEL] key to select the channel(s) that you want to exclude from mute
groups (multiple selections are allowed).
The [SEL] key will light, and the corresponding channel in the mute group assign field of the
window will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL]
key once again to make it go dark.
Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that
channel belongs.
Channel Link function
Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input
channels.
The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.
• Head amp settings
• Digital gain settings
• HPF settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 settings
• Dynamics 2 settings
• Insert on and insert point settings
• Direct Out on, Direct Out level, and Direct Out point settings
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
•Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting
• DELAY setting
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN and MUTE SAFE settings
Two or more input channels that are linked are called a “link group.” There is no limit on the number
of link groups you can create, or on the number or combination of input channels that can be included
in these link groups. You can select the types of parameters to be linked for each link group.
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
71
Linking the desired input channels
This section explains how to link specific parameters of input channels.
NOTE
Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB
button.
2. Press the CH LINK button to open the CH LINK
MODE popup window.
In this popup window you can view the channels that are
linked and specify the parameters that will be linked. The
window includes the following items.
NOTE
You can also access this window by simultaneously
pressing and then releasing the [SEL] keys of two or more
channels that will be linked.
1 Channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding channels will be highlighted. If there are two or
more link groups, each group is shown in a different color.
NOTE
Left and right of the ST IN channel are always linked.
2 LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to link. You can do this
independently for each link group.
3 SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons in the
LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es).
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3. Use the buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field to select the parameter(s) that will
be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked,
but the key-in signals are not linked. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics” on
page 56.
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1/2 button, library recall operations will also be linked.
• The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same
relative level difference between the channels.
CH LINK button
2
1
3
HA Head amp settings
HPF HPF settings
DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings
EQ EQ settings
DYNAMICS 1, 2 Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
INSERT Insert settings
DIRECT OUT Direct Out settings
MIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
MIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
MATRIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
MATRIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
FADER Fader operations
DCA DCA group assignment
CH ON Channel on/off
MUTE Mute group assignment
TO STEREO On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses
DELAY Channel delay settings
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
72
4. If you turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX SEND buttons in
step 3, use the buttons in the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for
which you want operations to be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
The table below lists the buttons you can select in the SEND PARAMETER field.
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, the send on/off and send level parameters
will not be linked.
5. To link channels, hold down the [SEL] key for the link-source input channel and
press the [SEL] key for the link-destination channel.
At this time, the values of the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be copied from the
link-source to the link-destination channel. Subsequent operations of the parameters you selected
in steps 3 and 4 will be linked between channels that belong to the same link group.
The current link status is displayed in the channel display field of the window.
NOTE
• If you want to link three or more channels, hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively
press the [SEL] key for each channel you want to add to the link group.
• When you press the [SEL] key for a channel (that belongs to a link group) to make it light, the
[SEL] keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink.
• If you link an input channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel
will be ignored.
6. If you want to add a new channel to an existing link group, hold down any [SEL]
key within the group and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to add
to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination channel is already assigned to another link group, the channel will be
removed from the previous group and added to the newly assigned group.
7. To remove a channel from a link group, hold down any [SEL] key in the same link
group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to remove.
NOTE
You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily. This can be helpful
if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative
level differences. For example, this may be the case for parameters such as the HA analog gain
and fader, or if you want to change the level balance between channels that belong to the same
link group. While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust
the parameter value.
While you are holding down the [SEL] key, the HA analog gain and fader values will not be linked.
(However, you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.)
You can also perform the operations from step 5 on screen.
5. To link channels, press the channel display field.
The CH LINK SET popup window will appear.
6. Select a channel that you want to link.
7. To confirm the link, press the LINK
button in the lower left of the screen.
An alphabetical character that indicates the link
group will appear on the selected channel
button.
NOTE
If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be
shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.
8. In the same way, link other channels as you wish.
9. When you have finished linking channels, press the CLOSE button.
MIX 1–24 MIX buses 1–24
MATRIX 1–8 MATRIX buses 1–8
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
73
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a specific channel
to their default settings.
Copying the parameters of a channel
You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute the copy
operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination.
You can copy between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel
• Between MIX channels
• Between MATRIX channels
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button to
access the CH JOB menu.
2. Press the COPY button to access the CH COPY MODE
popup window.
This popup window enables you to copy channel settings. The
window contains the following items.
1 SOURCE CH field
This field displays the copy-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on
the top panel to select a channel. The field will indicate the selected channel.
If the copy source is a MIX/MATRIX channel, buttons will
appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy.
COPY TARGET field
•MODULE PARAMETERS button
Selected channel module parameters
• WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button
SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel
2 DESTINATION CHs field
This field displays the copy-destination channel. After you
select the copy source, if you select a copy-destination channel
by pressing its [SEL] key (multiple selections are allowed), this
field will display the selected channel.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those
models will not be shown.
3 COPY button
Executes the copy operation. After selecting the copy-source channel and copy-destination
channel(s), press this button to execute the copy operation.
4 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen.
COPY button
1 4 2 3
Before selection After selection
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
74
3. To select the copy-source channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it
light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window.
When you choose the copy-source channel, the DESTINATION CHs field is automatically
bolded, allowing you to select the copy-destination.
If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press the SOURCE CH field.
NOTE
Copy settings can be made only in the order of “copy-source” → “copy-destination.”
4. To select the copy-destination channel(s), press the corresponding [SEL] key(s) to
make it light (multiple selections are allowed).
The corresponding channel(s) are highlighted in the DESTINATION CHs field of the window.
The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3.
If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination channels, press the DESTINATION CHs
field.
5. If you have selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as the copy-source, use the buttons in
the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy.
6. To execute the copy, press the COPY button.
The copy will be executed, and the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination
channel(s). After the copy has been executed, the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CHs
field will be empty.
7. To close the CH COPY MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
Moving the parameters of a channel
The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel. When you execute a
Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the move-source and move-destination will
move forward or backward by one.
You can move settings between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between ST IN channels
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button
to access the CH JOB menu.
2. Press the MOVE button to access the CH MOVE
MODE popup window.
1 2 3 4 5
1 5 2 3 4
Move by one.
Move
MOVE button
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
75
This popup window lets you move channel settings.
1 SOURCE CH field
This field indicates the move-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key
on the top panel to select an input channel. This field will indicate the selected channel.
You can move settings between monaural input channels, or between ST IN channels.
2 DESTINATION CH field
This field indicates the move-destination channel. After you select the move source, if you select
a move-destination input channel by pressing its [SEL] key, this field will display the selected
channel.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3 MOVE button
Executes a move operation. After selecting the move-source channel and move-destination
channel, press this button to execute the move.
4 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen.
3. To select the move-source channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it
light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window.
When you select the move-source channel, the DESTINATION CH field will automatically be
bolded, allowing you to select the move-destination.
If you want to re-select the move-source channel, press the SOURCE CH field.
NOTE
Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order of “move-source” → “move-
destination.”
4. To select the move-destination channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make
it light.
The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DESTINATION CH field of the window. The
channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3.
If you want to defeat the selected move-destination channel, press the DESTINATION CH field.
5. To execute the move, press the MOVE button.
The settings of all channels between the move-source and move-destination will shift toward the
move-source by one channel, and the channel settings will move from the move-source to the
move-destination. When the Move has been executed, the SOURCE CH field and
DESTINATION CH field will be empty.
6. To close the CH MOVE MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
1 2
3
4
Grouping and linking
Reference Manual
76
Initializing the parameters of a channel
You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on
any channel(s).
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB
button to access the CH JOB menu.
2. Press the DEFAULT button to access the CH
DEFAULT MODE popup window.
This popup window enables you to initialize parameters.
1 TARGET CHs field
This field indicates the channel selected for initialization. While this window is displayed, press a
[SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel (multiple selection is allowed). The field will
indicate the selected channel(s). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel(s).
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2 DEFAULT button
After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation.
3 CLOSE button
Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen.
3. To select the channel(s) to be initialized, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make
it light (multiple selections are allowed).
The corresponding channel(s) are highlighted in the TARGET CHs field of the window.
If you want to de-select all of the selected channels, press the TARGET CHs field.
4. To execute the initialization, press the DEFAULT button.
The parameters of the selected channel(s) will be initialized.
After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will be empty (nothing is selected).
5. To close the CH DEFAULT MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
DEFAULT button
1
3
2
Scene memory
Reference Manual
77
Scene memory
This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations.
About scene memories
On CL series consoles, you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input/output port patch
settings, and store the mix settings in memory (and later recall them from memory) as a “scene.”
Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000–300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene used to
initialize the mix parameters. Scenes 001–300 are writable scenes.
Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the following
parameters.
• Input/output port patching
• Channel name and color
•Bus settings
• Head amp settings
• Digital gain settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
• Input delay settings
• Rack (GEQ/effect/Premium Rack) settings
• Pan/balance settings
• Insert/Direct Out settings
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Settings for signals sent to the STEREO/MONO bus
• DCA group settings
• Mute group settings
• Channel link settings
• Panel assignment status (PANEL SNAPSHOT)
Using scene memories
Storing and recalling scenes
To store the current mix settings as a scene in memory and recall it later, you can use the keys in the
SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section on the top panel, or you can use the SCENE LIST window.
■ Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section
1. Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the
mix parameters as desired.
2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to
select the store-destination scene number.
The number of the currently-selected scene appears in
the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. When
you select a new scene number, the number will blink.
This blinking indicates that the displayed scene
number is different from the currently-loaded scene
number.
This field always displays general information about the scene. You can press this field to access
the SCENE LIST window, in which you can view and edit additional settings for the scene.
1 Scene number
Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene.
2 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (READ ONLY) displayed here. Write-protected
scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol.
3 Scene title
Indicates the title of the currently-selected scene.
4 E symbol (EDIT symbol)
This symbol appears when you edit the mix parameters for the currently-loaded scene.
This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the changes
you made.
4
3
2 21
Scene memory
Reference Manual
78
NOTE
• If you press and hold down either of the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys, the scene number
will count up or down continuously.
• If you press the SCENE MEMORY [INC] and [DEC] keys simultaneously, the SCENE field
indication will return to the number of the currently-loaded scene.
• You cannot store data to a scene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed.
3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key.
The SCENE STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a title or comment to the
scene.
1 SCENE TITLE field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters).
2 COMMENT field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a comment for the scene. You can use this as a
memorandum for each scene (maximum 32 characters).
4. Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired.
For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
5. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key or the STORE button located in the lower
part of the SCENE STORE popup window.
The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store
operation.
6. To execute the Store operation, press the OK button.
The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 2. When the Store
operation is complete, the scene number in the Function Access Area will stop blinking. If you
want to cancel the Store operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
You can make settings such that the Store Confirmation dialog box will not appear (see
page 168). In this case, pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once will display the
SCENE STORE popup window as usual, and pressing it once again will execute the Store
operation. Alternatively, you can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key twice to store
without seeing the SCENE STORE popup window.
7. To recall a stored scene, use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the
scene number that you want to recall.
The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function Access
Area.
8. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation.
9. To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button.
The scene you selected in step 7 will be recalled. If you want to cancel the Recall operation, press
the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
1 2
Scene memory
Reference Manual
79
■ Using the SCENE LIST window
1. Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the
mix parameters as desired.
2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various scene-related
operations. The window includes the following items.
1 Scene list
This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory.
2 NO./TITLE buttons
Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title. Press the same button repeatedly
to toggle between ascending order and descending order.
3 Scene number
Indicates the current scene number.
4 Scene title
Indicates the scene title. Press this title to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup window, in
which you can edit the title.
5 Write-protect
Indicates the Write Protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene. A lock icon
will appear. Press it again to cancel write protection.
6 Current scene
The currently-selected scene (that is, the current scene) is highlighted in blue in the list. If you
press another scene number in the list, the list will scroll and that scene will become the current
scene.
7 SCENE SELECT knob
Use the multifunction knobs to select a scene. You can view the currently-selected scene number
immediately below the SCENE SELECT knob.
8 MULTI SELECT button
You can select consecutive multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the
multifunction knob. If this button is off, you can still select consecutive multiple scenes by
rotating the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.
9 LAST SCENE button
Press this button to select the scene that was recalled most recently.
0 SCENE STORE popup button
This button stores the current mix settings. Press this button to display the SCENE STORE popup
window, which will enable you to assign a name to a scene and store it.
A STORE UNDO button
Undoes the Store operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform an
Overwrite-store operation.
B RECALL SCENE button
Recalls the currently-selected scene.
C RECALL UNDO button
Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a Recall
operation.
D Page switching tabs
Switch views on the right side of the scene list.
E PREVIEW button
Press this to select PREVIEW mode, which allows you to view and edit the scene settings in the
display and the panel without affecting the signal processing of the current scene.
7
3
5
4
2
8
D90 BAC
6
1 E
Scene memory
Reference Manual
80
3. To store a scene, rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the store-
destination scene number.
NOTE
• You can select multiple scene numbers as the store-destination. To do so, press the MULTI
SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the
multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.
• If you selected multiple scenes as the store-destination, the same contents will be stored in all
selected scene numbers. This is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the
same mix settings.
• You can also use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select scene numbers.
4. Press the STORE button.
The SCENE STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a title or comment to the
scene.
5. Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired.
6. Press the STORE button located at the bottom of the SCENE STORE popup window.
The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store
operation.
7. To execute the Store operation, press the OK button.
The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 3. If you want to
cancel the Store operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
8. If you want to cancel the overwrite-store operation that you just performed, press
the STORE UNDO button.
Immediately after overwrite-storing a scene, you can use the STORE UNDO button to undo
(cancel) the scene store operation that was executed most recently. When you press the STORE
UNDO button, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. Press the OK button if
you want to execute the Undo operation. After executing the Undo operation, you can press the
STORE UNDO button once again to Redo (re-execute) the Store operation.
NOTE
• The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite-storing.
• You can also assign the function of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
(see page 169).
9. To recall a scene, rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the store-source
scene number.
10. Press the RECALL button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation.
11. To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button.
The scene you selected in step 9 will be recalled. If you want to cancel the Recall operation, press
the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
12. If you want to cancel the Recall operation that you just performed, press the
RECALL UNDO button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. Press the OK button if you want to
execute the operation. After undoing the recall, you can press the RECALL UNDO button once
again to Redo (re-execute).
NOTE
• You can also assign the function of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
(see page 169).
• You can also use MIDI messages (Program Changes) to recall scenes (see page 152).
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall
You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step
through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a USER DEFINED key.
The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED key.
•INC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene for the number that follows the currently-loaded scene.
•DEC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene for the number that precedes the currently-loaded scene.
NOTE
If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently-loaded scene, the
closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled.
•DIRECT RECALL
Directly recalls the scene number that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key. When you press
a USER DEFINED key to which this function is assigned, the assigned scene will be recalled
immediately.
To assign one of these functions to a USER DEFINED key so that a scene can be recalled in a single
keystroke, proceed as follows.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the
bottom of the window.
Scene memory
Reference Manual
81
3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]–
[16].
4. Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a
function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear.
5. In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.”
Proceed as follows, depending on the function you want to assign.
• To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL
Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column.
• To assign DIRECT RECALL
Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx is
the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.
6. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the popup
window.
If desired, assign scene-recall functions to other USER DEFINED keys in the same way.
7. Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function.
The corresponding scene will be recalled.
Scene memory
Reference Manual
82
Editing scene memories
This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy and paste
them.
Sorting scene memories
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations related to
scene memory. You can use tabs to switch the view of the right half of the SCENE LIST window
between five different fields (COMMENT/FOCUS/FADE TIME/GPI OUT/PLAYBACK LINK).
2. Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
The COMMENT field will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST window.
1 COMMENT sort button
Sorts scenes in alphabetical order of the comments in the COMMENT field. Each time you press
this button, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order.
2 COMMENT field
Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT popup window, in which you can enter
comments for the scene.
3 STATUS field
Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS, FADE TIME, PLAYBACK
(playback link), and GPI (General Purpose Interface) functions. (The Playback Link function
plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled.)
4 TIME STAMP sort button
Sorts scenes in chronological order based on the date and time in the TIME STAMP field. Each
time you press this button, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order.
5 TIME STAMP field
Indicates the date and time the scene was stored.
For details on the TIME STAMP display format, refer to “Setting the date and time of the internal
clock” on page 204.
6 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes made here are
immediately reflected on the CL series console.
3. To select a scene number, rotate one of the multifunction knobs on the top panel.
The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates the scene currently selected for operations.
4. To sort the list, press one of the column headers “NO.”, “TITLE,” “COMMENT,” or
“TIME STAMP” at the top of the scene list and COMMENT field.
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column title you press.
1 NO.
Sorts the list in order of scene number.
2 TITLE
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of title.
3 COMMENT
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of comments.
6
2
3
5
1 4
1 2 3 4
Scene memory
Reference Manual
83
4 TIME STAMP
Sorts the list in order of date of creation.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the sorting order (ascending or
descending).
5. If you want to edit the title or comment of a scene, press the TITLE field or
COMMENT field of the scene to access the SCENE TITLE EDIT or SCENE COMMENT
EDIT popup window.
NOTE
You cannot edit the title or comment of a read-only scene or a write-protected scene.
6. To enable/disable the protect setting, press the protect symbol.
A protect symbol is displayed for write-protected scenes. These scenes cannot be overwritten.
NOTE
The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled.
7. Use the tool buttons to edit the scene memory.
For details, refer to the section “Scene memory editing” that follows.
Scene memory editing
The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers, or cleared
(erased).
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene
memory. You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of the SCENE
LIST window.
The function of each button is described below.
1 COPY button
Press this button to copy the scene to buffer memory.
2 PASTE bu tto n
Press this button to overwrite the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory.
3 CLEAR button
Press this button to erase the selected scene.
4 CUT button
Press this button to delete the selected scene and copy it to buffer memory. The numbers of the
subsequent scenes will be decremented by one.
5 INSERT button
Press this button to insert the scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene number. The
numbers of the subsequent scenes will be incremented by one.
6 UNDO button
Cancels the most recent scene memory paste, clear, cut, or insert operation and restores the
previous state.
2. Perform the desired editing operation.
For more information about the procedure, refer to the corresponding explanations that follow.
Copying and pasting a scene
You can copy a scene into buffer memory, and then paste it to a different scene number.
NOTE
The Global Paste function enables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the
current scene, then paste the data into any single or multiple scenes in memory (see page 85).
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the copy-source scene number, and
then press the COPY button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Copy operation.
3. To execute the copy, press the OK button.
The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in buffer memory.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste, the newly copied or cut scene
will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
• You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy-source.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Scene memory
Reference Manual
84
4. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the paste-destination scene
number, and then press the PASTE button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Paste operation.
NOTE
• You can select multiple paste-destination scenes. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to
turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while
pressing and holding it down. In this case, the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes.
• A copied scene can also be inserted (see page 85).
• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the PASTE button will be unavailable.
5. To execute the paste operation, press the OK button.
The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted to the scene number you selected in step 4.
If you want to cancel the Paste operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
Clearing a scene
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want
to clear, and then press the CLEAR button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation.
NOTE
You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn
it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while
pressing and holding it down.
3. To execute the Clear operation, press the OK button.
The scene number(s) you selected in step 2 will be cleared. If you want to cancel the Clear
operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared.
Cutting a scene
This section explains how to cut a scene.
When you cut a scene, the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly. You can
paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location.
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want
to cut, and then press the CUT button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Cut operation.
NOTE
If the scene list has been sorted in any other way than by number (in the “NO.” column), the CUT
button will be unavailable.
3. To execute the Cut operation, press the OK button.
The scene(s) you selected in step 2 will be cut, and the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be
decremented accordingly. At this time, the scene that was cut will be stored in buffer memory.
NOTE
Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.
4. If desired, you can paste (see page 83) or insert the cut scene (that was held in the
buffer memory).
NOTE
Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or
cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
Scene memory
Reference Manual
85
Inserting a scene
You can insert a scene held in buffer memory at a desired scene number location.
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear.
2. Perform the Copy operation (see page 83) or Cut operation so that the scene you
want to insert is placed in buffer memory.
NOTE
You cannot copy or cut multiple scenes as the source.
3. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the insert-destination scene
number, and then press the INSERT button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Insert operation.
NOTE
• If you select multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted the
selected number of times.
• If the scene list has been sorted in any way other than by number (in the “NO.” column), the
INSERT button will be unavailable.
• If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the INSERT button will be unavailable.
• The INSERT button will be unavailable if there is already a scene stored at scene number 300,
or if the Insert operation would cause an already-stored scene to exceed number 300.
4. To execute the Insert operation, press the OK button.
The scene stored in buffer memory will be inserted at the scene number you selected in step 3. If
you selected multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted multiple
times starting at the scene number you selected.
Scenes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location will be updated and
increase by the number of scenes that were inserted.
Using the Global Paste function
“Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or parameter
from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed). This can be
convenient if you want to apply changes (that you made to the current scene) to multiple scenes that
have already been stored.
NOTE
The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE/SORT
parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST
window.
2. Press the GLOBAL PASTE button located in the upper part of the SCENE LIST
window to open the GLOBAL PASTE window.
This window enables you to select the copy-source channels/parameters and specify the paste-
destination scene number.
1 SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key.
2 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button clears all of the selected channels. The SET ALL button selects all
channels simultaneously.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
1
2
Scene memory
Reference Manual
86
3. Use the tabs to select one of the following as the type of item you want to copy.
4. Select the copy-source channel or parameter.
The view will vary depending on the tab you select.
You cannot select different parameters from different channels.
To select a channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key on the top panel.
•INPUT tab
Select an input channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area.
You can select the following parameters.
• OUTPUT tab
Select an output channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area.
You can select the following parameters.
•RACK tab
Enables you to choose from GEQ RACK, EFFECT RACK, or PREMIUM RACK. You can
individually select an GEQ for a Flex15GEQ or an effect used in dual mode.
•PATCH/NAME tab
You can select the following parameters.
•DCA tab
You can select either ALL or LEVEL/ON. If ALL is selected, all parameters will be copied. If
LEVEL/ON is selected, the master level and DCA channel on/off status will be copied. You can
select copy-source items for each DCA group 1–16 individually.
5. In the DESTINATION SCENE area, select the range of paste-destination scenes.
Scenes specified between FROM and TO (inclusive) become the paste destination. Use
multifunction knob 7 to specify the FROM value, and multifunction knob 8 to specify the TO
value.
6. Press the PASTE button.
The selected items of the current scene will be pasted to the scene(s) in memory.
A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted.
During the paste operation, the STOP button will appear. Press the STOP button if you want to
abort the operation. In that case, part of data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo the
operation.
INPUT Input channel and its parameters
OUTPUT Output channel and its parameters
RACK GEQ/effect/Premium rack
PATCH/NAME Input/output patch, channel name
DCA DCA group
ALL All input channel parameters
INPUT PATCH Input patch settings
NAME Channel name, icon, and channel color
HA
Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel,
and phase
DELAY Input delay settings
HPF HPF settings
DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings for the corresponding input channel
EQ EQ settings
DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)
DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
MIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MIX bus
MATRIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
FADER Fader level
CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys
INSERT Insert on/off status and insert point
INSERT PATCH Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in
DIRECT OUT Direct Out on/off, Direct Out level, Direct Out point and patch settings
MIX ON Send on/off to a MIX bus
MATRIX ON Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
TO ST TO ST on/off status, pan/balance settings
MONO TO MONO on/off status
ALL All output channel parameters
OUTPUT PATCH Output patch settings
NAME Channel name, icon, and channel color
EQ EQ settings
DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
INSERT Insert on/off status and insert point
INSERT PATCH Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in
FADER Fader level
CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys
TO ST/BAL TO ST on/off status, pan/balance settings
MONO TO MONO on/off status (MIX 1-24 only)
MATRIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
MATRIX ON Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
WITH SEND FROM
SOURCE CHs
SEND parameters of the send-source signal that will be sent to a
channel
INPUT PATCH All input channel patches, insert in/out patches, Direct Out patches
OUTPUT PATCH All output channel patches, insert in/out patches
INPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all input channels
OUTPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all output channels
HA
Analog gain, phantom power on/off status, Gain Compensation, phase
settings
CH LINK Channel link settings
Scene memory
Reference Manual
87
Using the Focus function
“Focus” is a function that lets you specify the scene parameters that will be recalled (loaded) when you
recall a scene. You can specify these settings for each scene. This function is useful if you want to recall
only the input channel settings of a specific scene.
NOTE
In contrast to Focus, the CL series console features a “Recall Safe” function that enables you to
exclude specific channels and parameters from recall operations. However while the Focus
function is specified for each scene, Recall Safe settings are applied to all scenes.
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene
memory.
2. Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
The FOCUS field will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST window.
1 FOCUS button
Enables or disables the Focus function for each scene.
2 SET popup button
Press this button to access the FOCUS RECALL popup screen, which allows you to select the
parameters that will be subject to recall.
3 FOCUS PARAMETER indicators
These indicators show the focus recall settings that are specified for each scene.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Here you can specify the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
3. Press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
The FOCUS RECALL popup window will appear. The window contains the following items.
1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
Turns off (or on) all focus channel selections and global focus parameter settings.
■ Focus channel display field
Indicates the target channel for a Recall operation. The view of this field is the same as that in the
RECALL SAFE popup window.
To add channels as the target, turn the SET BY SEL button 2 on, and then press the corresponding
[SEL] keys for the desired channels.
2 SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. When you press the
[SEL] key of a channel, the on-screen fader of the corresponding channel will turn green (all
parameters will be recalled) or blue (only some parameters will be recalled). Press the same [SEL]
key once again to de-select the channel.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
1 2
3
4
2
3
1
Scene memory
Reference Manual
88
■ Channel focus parameter display field
Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall operations. You can use
the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE popup window.
3 FOCUS button
Switches the Focus Recall function on or off.
■ GLOBAL FOCUS PARAMETER field
Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any scene. Procedures
and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE MODE popup window.
4. Follow the procedure starting with step 2 in the “Using the Recall Safe function”
section to make settings.
5. If you want only specific parameters to be recalled for the selected channel or DCA
group, use the buttons other than ALL in the channel focus parameter display field
to select the parameters that will be recalled (multiple selections are allowed). If
you want all parameters to be recalled, turn on the ALL button (this is the default
setting).
If the ALL button is on, all other buttons for that scene will be turned off. Turning on any other
button will turn off the ALL button.
6. Recall a scene for which you have made Focus settings.
Only the channels (DCA groups) / parameters selected in the FOCUS RECALL popup window
will be recalled. Bus settings will always reproduce the state of the recalled scene, regardless of the
Focus Recall settings.
NOTE
• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are marked by a “FOCUS” indicator in the STATUS
field of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab).
• You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or
parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be
recalled.
Using the Recall Safe function
“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from Recall
operations. Unlike the Focus settings (see page 87), which you can apply to individual scenes, the Recall
Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB
button to access the CH JOB popup window.
2. Press the RECALL SAFE button to access the
RECALL SAFE MODE popup window.
In this popup window, you can make settings for the
Recall Safe function. The window contains the
following items.
1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button turns off (disables) the Recall Safe function (that is currently set for
individual channels) and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously. The SET ALL button
turns on (enables) these functions simultaneously.
NOTE
The selection of parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change.
RECALL SAFE button
1
3
5
9
2 4
6
7 8
Scene memory
Reference Manual
89
2 CH RECALL SAFE field
Indicates the channels currently specified for the Recall Safe function.
3 SET BY SEL button
Enables you to use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by the Recall
Safe function. Turn this button on, and then press the [SEL] key for the channel to which you want
to apply Recall Safe. The on-screen fader of the corresponding channel will turn green (all
parameters for the channel will be affected by the Recall Safe function), or turn blue (some
parameters for the channel will be affected by the Recall Safe function). Press the same [SEL] key
once again to de-select the channel.
4 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field
Indicates the state of Recall Safe settings that are not made in units of channels, and the Recall Safe
settings for racks. Press this field to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE popup window.
5 Channel select button
Selects the channel for which you want to set the Recall Safe function.
NOTE
Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
6 Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to apply the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel to all other
input channels.
This can be convenient if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input
channels.
8 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only)
Turn on this button to apply Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to all other
output channels.
This can be convenient if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output
channels.
9 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (excluding DCA groups)
Selects Recall Safe parameters for the selected channel.
The button indication varies depending on the channel type, as follows:
• Input channel
NOTE
ST IN channels do not feature INSERT, INSERT PATCH, or DIRECT OUT button.
• MIX channel
• MATRIX channel
• STEREO channel
• MONO channel
If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters, the safe parameter select buttons of the selected
channel will light green, as follows.
In this illustration, the items that are lit green indicate that the INPUT PATCH, INSERT PATCH,
and DIRECT OUT parameters have been set to Safe by the INPUT PATCH Global parameter
settings.
In the same way, turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME, OUTPUT PATCH, OUTPUT
NAME , and HA will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light green.
All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Some parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels.
Scene memory
Reference Manual
90
On-screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following channels:
0 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (DCA)
Enables you to select parameters for a DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations.
If the ALL button is on, all DCA master parameters will be subject to Recall Safe. If LEVEL/ON
is on, the DCA master level and on/off status will be subject to Recall Safe.
3. To select the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations,
press the corresponding [SEL] key.
The corresponding channel or DCA group will be enclosed by a white frame in the CH RECALL
SAFE field. (However, this white frame does not mean that the Recall Safe setting is now enabled.)
The selected channel or DCA groups 1–8 or 9–16 will be recalled to the SAFE PARAMETER
SELECT field.
NOTE
If the CH RECALL SAFE field’s SET BY SEL button is on, Recall Safe will be enabled when you
press the [SEL] key, and the corresponding channel or DCA group will be highlighted in the CH
RECALL SAFE field. You can select parameters as described in step 4 even after turning Recall
Safe on.
4. If you want to enable Recall Safe for specific parameters of the selected channel or
DCA group, make the following settings in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field.
NOTE
• Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on or off,
you must also perform the operation described in step 5 (see page 91).
• While the APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (or the APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button) is on, operations
in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field will apply to all input channels (or output channels).
• If an input channel is selected:
Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (except for the “ALL”
button) to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe (multiple selections are
allowed). If you want all parameters to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button (this is
the default setting).
• If a ST IN channel is selected:
Use the same steps as those for an input channel. (Different buttons will be displayed.)
• If a MIX channel is selected:
Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (except for the “ALL”
button) to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe (multiple selections are allowed).
In addition, you can use the WITH MIX SEND button displayed in the lower left of the field to enable
Recall Safe for the on/off status and send level of signals sent from input channels to MIX buses.
If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of the field to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on
the ALL button (this is the default setting).
• If a MATRIX channel is selected:
Use the same steps as those for a MIX channel. (Different types of buttons will be displayed.)
• If a DCA group is selected:
If you press a [SEL] key for a DCA group, all parameters for the DCA groups (selected from DCA
groups 1–8 and DCA groups 9–16) will be displayed simultaneously. For the parameters that will
be subject to Recall Safe, you can select either “ALL” or “LEVEL/ON” (fader position and on/off
status of the [ON] key). Recall Safe will be enabled when you make this selection.
If you want all parameters of the DCA group to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button.
Unlike when a channel is selected, Recall Safe will be enabled for that DCA group the moment
you turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.
Button name Corresponding parameter
Input
channel
MIX
channel
MATRIX
channel
STEREO/
MONO
channel
WITH MIX SEND Send level to the MIX bus O
WITH MATRIX SEND Send level to MATRIX bus O
ALL All parameters O O O O
HA HA-related settings O
HPF HPF settings O
EQ EQ settings O O O O
DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings O O O O
DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings O
MIX SEND Send level to MIX bus O
MATRIX SEND Send level to MATRIX bus O O O
FADER Fader settings O O O O
CH ON [ON] key settings O O O O
TO ST
On/off setting for STEREO bus
assignment, PAN, etc.
OO
MONO
On/off setting for MONO bus
assignment
OO
INPUT PATCH Input Patching O
DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings O
INSERT Insert on/off
O
*1
*1. ST IN channels do not feature these buttons.
OOO
INSERT PATCH Insert patch settings
O
*1
OOO
DIRECT OUT Direct Out settings
O
*1
MIX ON MIX Send On/Off O
MATRIX ON MATRIX Send On/Off O O O
DELAY Delay settings O
NAME Channel name O O O O
OUTPUT PATCH Output Patching O O O
BAL BLANCE parameter settings O
O
(stereo only)
Scene memory
Reference Manual
91
5. To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn on the SAFE button in the SAFE
PARAMETER SELECT field. (If you have selected a DCA group, turn on either the
LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.)
Channels or DCA groups for which Recall Safe is enabled will be highlighted in the CH RECALL
SAFE field.
6. To turn on Recall Safe for global parameters, press the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field
to access the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE popup window, and turn on the appropriate
buttons.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
NOTE
If a dual-type GEQ rack or Premium Rack has been selected, you can apply Recall Safe to rack
A and B individually. For other racks, the Recall Safe setting for racks A and B will be linked.
7. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the
popup window. Then perform a Recall operation.
Only the selected DCA group channels and parameters will be excluded from Recall operations.
Bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe. They will always be reproduced in the recalled scene.
This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or
one of two channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of
the other channel(s). In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the
next time it is operated.
You can globally apply Recall Safe to channel links by using the global parameter.
NOTE
• You can use the Recall Safe function along with the Focus function (see page 87). Channels or
parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be
recalled.
• If you hold down the [SEL] key while performing a recall operation, all parameters of that channel
will be treated as Recall Safe regardless of the state of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT
selections.
Using the Fade function
“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups to their
new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade function are made
independently for each scene.
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene
memory.
2. Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
The FADE TIME field is shown in the right half of the SCENE LIST window.
1 SET popup button
Press this button to open the FADE TIME popup window, in which you can select a channel for
which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time over
which the fader will reach its new value).
2 FADER button
Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene.
INPUT PATCH
All input channel patching (including INSERT IN/OUT and DIRECT OUT
patching)
INPUT NAME All input channel names, icons, and channel colors
OUTPUT PATCH All output channel patching (including INSERT IN/OUT patching)
OUTPUT NAME All output channel names, icons, and channel colors
HA All I/O devices, and HA-related parameters for external head amps
CH LINK All channel link group settings
GEQ RACK
EFFECT RACK
PREMIUM RACK
Apply Recall Safe to GEQ racks 1–16, Effect racks 1–8, Premium Racks
1–8 individually.
PANEL SNAPSHOT
Fader bank selections, GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob selection status (set in
units of blocks)
2
1
3
4
Scene memory
Reference Manual
92
3 FADE TIME display
This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
3. Press the SET button to access the FADE TIME popup window.
In this popup window you can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the
fade time.
1 Channel display field
The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted.
2 FADE TIME knob
Sets the fade time. You can adjust the fade time using the corresponding multifunction knob.
3 SET ALL button
Press this button to apply the Fade effect to all faders of that scene.
4 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to cancel the Fade effect for all faders of that scene.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4. Press the [SEL] keys for the desired channels or DCA groups to select the channels
or DCA groups to which the Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are
allowed).
The [SEL] keys for the selected channels or DCA groups will light, and those channels or DCA
groups will be highlighted green in the channel display field of the popup window. You can cancel
the selection by pressing the lit [SEL] key once again to turn it off.
5. Use the multifunction knob that corresponds to the FADE TIME knob to adjust the
fade time.
The range is 0.0 sec – 60.0 sec.
When you have finished setting the fade time, press the OK button to close the FADE TIME
popup window.
NOTE
The fade time you specify here is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in step 4.
6. To enable the Fade function, press the FADE button.
You can turn the Fade function on or off individually for each scene.
NOTE
Scenes for which Fade settings are made are marked by a “FADE” indicator in the STATUS field
of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab).
7. Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on.
The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the
recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time.
NOTE
• The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link.
• You can stop a fade effect by holding down a [SEL] key while you stop the corresponding moving
fader.
• If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, the faders of all channels or DCA groups
will move immediately to their target positions.
2
34
1
Scene memory
Reference Manual
93
Outputting a control signal to an external device
in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)
A contol signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the CL series
console when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows.
NOTE
For more information on the GPI OUT settings, refer to “Using GPI OUT” on page 223.
1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene
memory.
2. Press the GPI OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
The GPI OUT field will appear.
1 GPI OUT CONTROL buttons
These specify the control signal will be output from each GPI OUT.
Pressing a button repeatedly will switch between the following functions.
• –––– (OFF) ................ Nothing will be output.
• TRIGGER .................. A trigger will be output when the scene is recalled.
• TALLY ........................ A tally will be output when the scene is recalled.
2 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
3. For each scene, specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT
port.
4. Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals.
When you recall the scene, the control signals will be output to the external device connected to
the GPI OUT connector.
2
1
Scene memory
Reference Manual
94
Playing back an audio file that links to a scene
recall
You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a specific
scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be played automatically
in a specific scene.
Follow the steps below to link a scene recall with audio file playback.
NOTE
• Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. If you save them in the
root directory or in other folders, you will be unable to specify them for playback. When an audio
file is played, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate \YPE\SONGS\.
• You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode.
• A specified audio file will be played back only once, regardless of the playback mode settings.
• Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters. If you change the file
name after specifying the file for playback, or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly, the specified
file may become unrecognizable in rare cases.
1. Connect a USB flash drive containing the audio files to the USB connector.
2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations related to
scene memory.
3. Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
The PLAYBACK LINK field is shown in the right half of the SCENE LIST window.
1 PLAY button
Sets the Playback Link function’s on/off status for each scene.
2 Song select popup button
Press this button to open the SONG SELECT popup window, in which you can select a song and
set the offset time (time duration from scene recall until the start of playback). Also, the title of
the selected song will appear on the button.
3 Offset time display
Indicates the time duration from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified audio file.
Set the offset time in the SONG SELECT popup window.
4 CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation.
4
3
1
2
Scene memory
Reference Manual
95
4. Press the song select popup button for a scene to which you want to link the audio
file. The SONG SELECT popup window will appear.
In this popup window, you can select an audio file you want to link with the scene, and set the
offset time.
1 Change directory button
Press this button to move to the next higher level.
NOTE
You cannot move to levels higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
2 PATH indicator
This area indicates the current directory path.
3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons
Switch between the song title list and the file name list.
4 SONG TITLE list button
5 ARTIST list button
Press these buttons to sort the audio file list (at the current directory level) by song title and artist
name respectively.
6 Song list
Displays the title, artist name, and audio file time duration of the audio files in the \YPE\SONGS\
folder. You can select an audio file by pressing the audio file name.
7 OFFSET knob
You can use the multifunction knob to set the time duration from scene recall until the start of
audio file playback.
8 Scroll knob
Use the multifunction to scroll the list.
5. Press the screen or use the multifunction knobs to select a file that you want to link
to a scene.
6. If desired, use the corresponding multifunction knobs to set the offset (the time
duration until the start of audio file playback).
The offset value can be adjusted in the range of 0.0–99.0 in 0.5 sec steps.
7. Press the OK button.
The title of the selected song will appear in the center of the song list.
If you select the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, your settings will be discarded and
the unit will return to the SCENE LIST popup window.
8. Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file.
The PLAY button will light in the LINK field. The PLAY indicator will appear in the STATUS field
on the COMMENT tab.
9. Repeat steps 4–8 to link audio files to other scenes.
10. Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked.
After the offset time duration has elapsed, the specified audio file will play one time.
NOTE
• After a scene has been recalled and until the offset time has elapsed, a countdown will appear in
the Function Access Area.
• If another song is playing during a scene recall, the song playback will stop when the scene is
recalled, regardless of the offset time setting.
7
1
8
2 3
4
5
6
Scene memory
Reference Manual
96
Using Preview mode
Preview mode lets you view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal
processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings of the newly recalled
scene will appear on the panel of the CL series console, but the signal processing of the current scene
will remain as it was prior to the recall. Even if you modify the settings and save them as a new scene
or by overwriting, the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall.
During an actual performance, it can be convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you
intend to recall next, or to make minor changes to a scene and then store it.
1. Press the PREVIEW button on the panel or the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST
window.
The PREVIEW button will light, and the console will be in Preview mode.
In this state, operating controllers such as the knobs and faders will not affect the signal
processing of the current scene.
2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number that you
want to recall.
3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. To execute the Recall operation, press the
OK button.
The scene will be recalled. However, the internal signal processing of the current scene will
remain unchanged as it was prior to the Recall operation.
If desired, you can access a specific channel in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, or access a
specific screen in the display to examine the values in detail.
4. If desired, use the panel controls to edit the settings.
Operating a panel control in Preview mode will edit the settings of the scene you recalled in step
3, but will not affect the signal processing of the current scene.
5. If you want to store the changes you made in step 4, select the scene number in
which you want to store the scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key.
The settings you edited in step 4 will be stored into memory.
6. When you have finished viewing or editing the settings of the scene, press the
PREVIEW button of the panel or the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
The PREVIEW button will go dark; the CL series console will exit Preview mode and return to
the normal state.
NOTE
PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in
the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters.
Functions in Preview mode
The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations.
•CL Editor
•Stage Mix
• MIDI Rx
•GPI IN
Similarly, edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external devices.
•CL Editor
•Stage Mix
• MIDI Tx
•GPI OUT
The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene.
Playback Link will operate for recalling the current scene.
If cascade-connected, both master and slave units will operate independently. Link will not occur while
in Preview mode.
The following functions will not operate in Preview mode.
• Synchronization with CL Editor
• Switching users
• Changing the User Level
• Load/Save functions
•Cue changes
•USER DEFINED KEYS operations
•USER DEFINED KNOB operations
• Monitor (MONITOR, CUE, OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK) changes or display
• Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings
• Changing or viewing the recorder
• Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings
• FADE TIME
• EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording
• MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects
• Internal metering for Premium Effects (GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043; VU for Opt-2A and
U76)
In addition, you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations.
• While pasting scene or EQ settings.
• While executing Global Paste
• While synchronizing with CL Editor
• While saving/loading a file
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
97
Monitor and Cue functions
This chapter explains the Monitor and Cue functions of CL series consoles.
About the Monitor and Cue functions
The Monitor function lets you audition various outputs through your nearfield monitors or
headphones. On the front panel of the CL series console is a PHONES Out jack for monitoring, which
enables you to monitor the monitoring source signal at any time. By assigning the MONITOR OUT L/
R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through external
speakers.
You can select the following signals as the monitor source.
• STEREO channel output signal
• MONO channel output signal
• STEREO + MONO channel output signal
• OMNI IN 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, 7–8 channel input signal (for monitoring a two channnel pair)
• RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal
• A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output signals,
RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals, and OMNI IN 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, 7–8 input signals
The Cue function enables you to check an individual channel or DCA group by temporarily monitoring
it via MONITOR OUT, CUE OUT, or PHONES. When you press the [CUE] key on the top panel, the
cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output or cue output from
the selected output port.
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue
signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the cue signal will always be
sent to the PHONES Out jack.
The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow.
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the monitor source.
• METER
Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal.
• DIMMER
Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount.
• MONITOR LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON,
this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.
• MONITOR FADER
Use the STEREO MASTER fader or MONO MASTER fader to adjust the output level of the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with MONITOR
LEVEL. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out
jack.
• ON (on/off)
Switches the Monitor function on or off.
• DELAY (Monitor delay)
Delays monitor signals. The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output.
• PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)
Adjusts the output level at the PHONES Out jack.
• PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone Level Link function)
If this function is turned on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to
the PHONES Out jack.
• CUE INTERRUPTION (Cue Interruption function)
If this function is turned on, pressing the [CUE] key on the top panel will cause the cue signal of
the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output from the selected
output port. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on.
Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers or headphones.
MONITOR L
MONITOR R
MONITOR MONO(C)
MONITOR OUT MONO(C)
MONITOR OUT R
MONITOR OUT L
To OUTPUT PAT CH
To OUTPUT PAT CH
To OUTPUT P AT CH
MONO
METER
MONITOR R
METER
MONITOR MONO(C)
TAL KBAC K ON
METER
MONITOR L
CUE TRIM
(INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA)
CUE L
CUE R
MONO
METER
CUE L
METER
CUE R
ON
MONITOR
LEVEL
DIMMER
MONITOR DIMM ON
CUE LOGIC
+MONO(C)
MONITOR SELECT
MATRIX OUT1-8
MIX OUT1-24
OMNI IN 1/2
DEFINE
MIX
(MAX:8ch)
OMNI IN 3/4
OMNI IN 5/6
OMNI IN 7/8
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
STEREO OUT L,C,R
PHONES L
PHONES R
To PHONES OUT
To PHON E S O U T
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
PHONES
LEVEL LINK
An output port delay becomes invalid by
assigning a monitor out to the output port.
CUE OUT L
CUE OUT R
To OUTPUT P AT CH
To OUTPUT PATCH
CUE OUT ON
PLAYBACK OUT
OMNI IN 1/2
OMNI IN 3/4
OMNI IN 5/6
OMNI IN 7/8
PLAYBACK OUT
STEREO OUT L,R
STEREO OUT MONO(C)
CUE L BUS
CUE R BUS
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
MONITOR
FADER
CUE INTERRUPTION
CUE ON
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
DELAY
(MAX:1000ms)
ON
MONITOR DELAY AUTO BYPASS
CUE OUT
LEVEL
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
98
Using the Monitor function
This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the PHONES Out
jack or external monitor speakers.
1. Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on
the rear panel.
Monitor signals can be sent to any desired output jack or output channel. To monitor through
headphones, make sure that your headphones are connected to the PHONES Out jack on the
front pad.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR
screen.
In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings, and
turn monitoring on or off.
The MONITOR screen contains the following items.
1 MONITOR popup display button
Enables you to access the MONITOR popup window, in which you can make detailed monitor
settings.
2 SOURCE SELECT field
Selects the monitor source. If DEFINE has been selected in this field, access the MONITOR
popup window to specify the source channel.
3 DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor
signals.
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on.
• DIMMER ON button
Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.
4 MONITOR FADER field
Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the monitor fader level. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knob
in the Centralogic section to adjust the level.
• FADER ASSIGN display
This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader. Indicator
assignments are as follows:
• ---- ................................................ No assignment
• MASTER A.................................Master A only
• MASTER A+ .............................. Master A, Master B, Custom Fader bank
• MASTER B .................................Master B only
• MASTER B+............................... Master B, Custom fader bank
• CUSTOM.................................... A single fader in the Custom fader bank
• CUSTOMs .................................. Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank
5 Meter field
Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open the
MONITOR popup window.
6 MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches Monitor Out on or off.
7 PHONES LEVEL LINK button
If this is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob or MONITOR FADER will adjust the level of
signals sent to the PHONES Out jack.
8 MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switch monitor signals to mono.
1
6
7
8
2 3 4 5
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
99
3. Press the popup button or the meter field to open the MONITOR popup window.
In the MONITOR popup window you can make detailed settings for monitoring. The popup
window includes the following items.
1 SOURCE SELECT field
Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus.
2 ASSIGN field
If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, use this field to specify the monitor source.
You can select up to eight monitor sources simultaneously. Pressing the CLEAR ALL button will
clear all selections.
3 DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor
signals.
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on.
• DIMMER ON button
Switches the Dimmer function on or off. The monitor signal will be attenuated if this button is on.
4 TALKBACK DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor
signals when TALKBACK is on.
• TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which monitor signals will be attenuated when talkback is on.
• TALKBACK DIMMER ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the dimmer function for talkback.
5 PHONES LEVEL LINK button
Enables you to link the signal level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level. If this
button is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob and monitor fader knob will adjust the level of the
signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack.
6 CUE INTERRUPTION button
Press this button to interrupt the cue signal with the monitor signal. If this button is on and the
cue is enabled, the cue signal will be sent to the monitor output. With the factory default settings,
this function is turned on. If you do not wish to send the cue signal to the monitor output, switch
this button off.
7 MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switch the monitor output signal to mono.
8 MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches the monitor output on or off.
9 MONITOR FADER field
Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the monitor fader level. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knobs
in the Centralogic section to adjust the level.
• FADER ASSIGN indicator
This area displays the faders that are currently assigned as MONITOR FADER. Indicator
assignments are as follows:
STEREO L/R STEREO L/R channel signals
MONO (C) MONO channel signal
LCR STEREO L/R + MONO channel signals
OMNI 1–2 – 7–8 OMNI IN jacks 1–8 signals (per two channels)
PB OUT Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals
DEFINE The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field
8
A
1
6
5 73
2
4
9 0
---- No assignment
MASTER A MASTER A fader only
MASTER A+ MASTER A, as well as MASTER B fader and Custom fader bank
MASTER B MASTER B fader only
MASTER B+ MASTER B, as well as Custom fader bank
CUSTOM One of the Custom fader bank faders
CUSTOMs Multiple Custom fader bank faders
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
100
0 MONITOR DELAY field
This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out signal is
delayed.
• AUTO BYPASS button
Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on.
• MONITOR DELAY knob
Adjusts the delay time for the monitor signal. The delay time is shown above the knob in ms units,
and below the knob in units of the currently selected scale. However if the scale is set to ms, the
delay time value is not shown above the knob.
Press this knob and you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the value.
• MONITOR DELAY ON button
If this button is on, the monitor signal will be delayed according to the setting of the MONITOR
DELAY knob.
A Meter field
• Meters
Indicates the output level of the monitor L/R/C channels.
• MONITOR OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output
port to patch to the monitor out L/R/C channels.
4. Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT field to select a monitor source.
In the SOURCE SELECT field you can select only one monitor source. However, if you have
selected DEFINE, you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources.
The following table shows the monitor sources that you can select in the ASSIGN field.
NOTE
You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight
monitor sources, no further selections will be possible. Please turn off the buttons for unneeded
sources.
5. To specify a port as the output destination for monitor signals L, C, and R, press
one of the MONITOR OUT PATCH buttons (L/R/C) in the meter field to open the
PORT SELECT popup window. In this window, choose from the following monitor
signal output destinations (multiple selections are allowed).
When you have selected an output port, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
In the same way, specify the output ports for MONITOR OUT L, R, and C.
NOTE
• If desired, you can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R to monitor through two
speakers.
• If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO (C) button or
LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be
distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R.
6. To enable monitoring, press the OUTPUT button to turn it on.
The monitor source you selected in step 4 will be sent to the output destination you specified in
step 5.
NOTE
The PHONES Out jack will always output the monitor signal, regardless of whether the OUTPUT
button is on or off.
7. To control the monitor fader, press the Bank Select [STEREO] key in the Centralogic
section, and then operate the monitor fader.
MIX 1–24 Output signals of MIX channels 1–24
MTRX 1–8 MATRIX buses 1–8 output signals
STEREO STEREO L/R channel output signals
MONO (C) MONO channel output signal
OMNI 1–2 – OMNI 7–8 OMNI IN jacks 1–8 input signals (per two channels)
PB OUT Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals
DANTE 1–64 Output channels 1–64 to audio network
OMNI1–8 OMNI OUT jacks 1–8
DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit
SLOT1–1 – SLOT3–16 Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–3
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
101
8. To adjust the monitor level, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE
MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel.
If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the monitor fader, as well
as the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones.
9. Make settings for Dimmer, Delay, Monaural, and CUE INTERRUPTION as desired.
NOTE
Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also
be assigned to USER DEFINED keys (see page 169).
Using the Cue function
About CUE groups
Cue signals on the CL series console can be categorized into the following four groups.
1 INPUT CUE group
The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the
[CUE] key for any input channel to turn Cue on.
NOTE
If input channels or ST IN channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the
[CUE] keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group.
2 DCA CUE group
The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the [CUE]
key of one of the DCA groups to turn Cue on.
3 OUTPUT CUE group
The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the
[CUE] key of one of the output channels.
Input channel [CUE] key
Centralogic section [CUE] key
(when controlling DCA groups)
[CUE] key in the Master section
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
102
4 Other CUE group
These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the touch
screen. This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE button in the
EFFECT popup window or the PREMIUM popup window, or if
you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1 popup
window. This group will automatically be disabled when you exit
the corresponding popup window.
You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously. Normally, the
group to which the most recently-pressed [CUE] key (or on-screen CUE/KEY IN CUE button)
belongs will take priority, and the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be defeated.
However, if you have switched the cue signal group in a specific order when the CUE MODE
setting is MIX CUE, the state of the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be restored
when the current cue signal is defeated.
The following illustration shows the
priority of the [CUE] keys. After you
have switched groups from lower to
upper levels, if you then defeat cue for
the upper group, the previous [CUE]
key status of the group immediately
below will be restored.
For example, if you switch groups in the
order of OUTPUT CUE group → DCA
CUE group → INPUT CUE group →
Other CUE group, you can then
successively defeat the [CUE] keys
(CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to successively restore the [CUE] key status of the previously-
selected group.
Operating the Cue function
This section explains how to use the [CUE] key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue signals.
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue
signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the front panel PHONES jack
will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. See “Using the Monitor
function” on page 98 for details about the Monitor function.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR
screen.
The CUE field on the MONITOR screen enables you to check the current cue settings, and turn
Cue on or off.
1 CUE popup display button
Enables you to access the CUE popup window, in which you can make detailed cue settings.
2 CUE MODE buttons
Select the cue mode. You can select MIX CUE mode (all selected channels will be cued), or LAST
CUE mode (only the channel selected most recently will be cued).
3 INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field
Indicates the settings for input cue, DCA cue, and output cue. Press this field to open the CUE
popup window.
[CUE] key in the Centralogic section
(when controlling MIX channels or MATRIX channels)
On-screen CUE button
Other CUE group
INPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group
OUTPUT CUE group
1
4
5
2 3
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
103
4 CUE OUTPUT button
Switches the cue out on or off.
5 CLEAR CUE button
Cancels all cue selections simultaneously. If the CUE MODE setting is MIX CUE, all of the
selected channels will be cleared.
2. Press the CUE popup display button or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field to open
the CUE popup window.
The popup window includes the following items.
1 CUE MODE buttons
Select one of the following two cue modes:
• MIX CUE
All selected channels will be mixed and auditioned.
•LAST CUE
Only the most recently selected channel will be auditioned.
2 INPUT CUE field
This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue.
• Cue point select button
Sets the cue point to PFL (before fader (immediately before INPUT DELAY)), AFL (immediately
after fader), or POST PAN (immediately after PAN).
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to
the MONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode.
• PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level.
3 DCA CUE field
This section enables you to make settings related to DCA cue.
• Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the DCA group to PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) or POST PAN
(immediately after PAN).
• DCA TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor level of cue signals from a DCA group. Use the multifunction knob to adjust
the level.
•UNITY button
Turn on this button to monitor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when the
master level for each DCA group was set to 0 dB (unity gain).
4 OUTPUT CUE field
This section enables you to make settings related to output channel cue.
• Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the output channel to PFL (immediately before fader) or AFL (immediately
after fader).
• PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. Press this knob so that you will be able to use
the multifunction knob to adjust the level.
5 Meter field
•Meter
This field indicates the output level of the cue L/R channels.
• CUE OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output
port to patch to the cue out L/R channels.
6 CUE OUTPUT button
Switches cue out on or off.
7 CUE LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the cue out. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level.
8 ACTIVE CUE indicator
Lights to indicate the type of cue currently being monitored (input: blue, DCA: yellow, output:
orange).
9 CLEAR CUE button
Press this button to clear all cue selections simultaneously.
6
7
9
1 2 3 4 5
8
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
104
3. Use the CUE MODE button to select either the mode in which channels are mixed
for auditioning, or the mode in which only the last-selected channel is auditioned.
Select the MIX CUE button or LAST CUE button.
NOTE
In MIX CUE mode, it’s not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue for different Cue groups. The
Cue group to which the last-cued signal belongs will be turned on, allowing only the signals of
that Cue group to be monitored.
4. Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT CUE field, DCA CUE field, and OUTPUT
CUE field to specify the output position and output level for each CUE group.
Refer to the explanation for each item in step 2, and make the desired settings.
5. To specify a port as the output destination for cue signals L and R, press one of the
CUE OUTPUT buttons (L/R) in the meter field to open the PORT SELECT popup
window, and choose from the following cue signal output destinations (multiple
selections are allowed).
When you have selected an output port, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
6. To enable Cue out for the port you specified in step 5, press the CUE OUTPUT
button to turn it on.
NOTE
The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES output jacks regardless of whether the
CUE OUTPUT button is on or off.
However, be aware that the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output if CUE
INTERRUPTION is turned off. The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES output jack,
regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting.
7. Press the [CUE] key for a desired channel or DCA group to turn it on.
The cue signal of the corresponding channel will be sent to the output destination specified in step
5 and to monitor output.
A cue meter is shown in the meter field of the function access area, indicating the cue output level.
The upper part of the cue meter shows an abbreviation indicating the currently-enabled cue
group or cue type. The abbreviations displayed for the cue meters have the following meaning.
NOTE
• When using the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON FADER popup window, you
can press the selected button once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX
channel (see page 43).
• If you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the USER SETUP
popup window, choose the PREFERENCE tab, and then turn on “[CUE] → [SEL] LINK”
(see page 168).
DANTE 1-64 Output channels 1–64 to audio network
OMNI1–8 OMNI OUT jacks 1–8
DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit
SLOT1–1 – SLOT3–16 Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–3
IN INPUT CUE group
DCA DCA CUE group
OUT OUTPUT CUE group
EFFECT CUE in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK (Other CUE groups)
KEY IN KEY IN CUE in the DYNAMICS 1 popup window (Other CUE groups)
REC/PB CUE in the RECORDER INPUT/PLAYBACK OUT (Other CUE groups)
CUE meter
Monitor and Cue functions
Reference Manual
105
8. If you’re auditioning the CUE signal in the monitor, adjust the Cue signal level by
using the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section
of the top panel. Also adjust the MONITOR FADER LEVEL in conjunction with this.
If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, the cue signal level when monitoring through headphones can
be adjusted in three ways: the CUE LEVEL knob, the MONITOR FADER, and the PHONES
LEVEL knob.
NOTE
To adjust the level to the cue out port you specified in step 5, adjust the gain of the output port
that is patched to it.
9. To defeat cue, press the currently-on [CUE] key once again.
You can press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field of the CUE popup window to clear all
cue selections.
NOTE
• If you press the CUE meter in the Function Access Area, all cue selections will be cleared.
• All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in
the CUE MODE section.
• You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key
(see page 169).
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
106
Talkback and Oscillator
About the Talkback and Oscillator functions
Talkback is a function that sends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the desired
bus. This is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer to the performers
and staff. If necessary, you can also use a mic connected to an INPUT jack on the I/O device or the
OMNI IN jack on the CL unit for talkback.
CL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus,
so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical response of the room or
hall.
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals.
Using Talkback
The Talkback function sends the signal (that is input at the input jacks) to the desired bus.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR
screen.
In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback
settings, and turn talkback on or off.
If you want to view or edit the talkback settings in greater detail, use the TALKBACK popup
window described in step 2 and subsequent steps.
1 TALKBACK popup display button
Enables you to access the TALKBACK popup window, in which you can make detailed talkback
settings.
2 TALKBACK IN field
• +48V indicator .......................... Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power
supplied to the TALKBACK jack.
• TALKBACK IN level meter.....Meters the level of signals after the input gain at the
TALKBACK jack.
64
CASCADE
IN
SELECT
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
SLOT3 1-16
TB INPUT
METER
HA
CASCADE IN
TALKBACK
INPUT
SELECT
ON
DANTE IN 1-64
OMNI IN 1-8
MIX
12 2324
ST
LR
M
O
N
O
(C)
MATRIX
12 78
CUE
LR
+48V
+48V MASTER
+48V
AD
[TALKBACK
INPUT]
TALKBACK
INPUT
TAL KB ACK
LEVEL
ON
1
2
3
+
-
+48V
AD
[OMNI IN]
[1-8]
OMNI IN
+
-
1
2
3
METER
HA
LEVEL
ON
Pink Noise
Burst Noise
HPF
LPF
METER
OSC
OSCILLATOR
Sine Wave
GAIN/TRIM
[DANTE]
DANTE
INPUT
METER
DANTE
IN
8
1
1 2 3 4 5
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
107
3 INPUT TO TALKBACK field
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
.......................... Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in
which you can patch a desired input port to an input port to
patch to talkback. The selected port name will appear on the
button.
• +48V indicator.......................... Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power
supplied to the selected port.
• ANALOG GAIN knob ............. Sets the analog gain of the selected port. You can adjust the gain
by using the multifunction knobs.
• HA meter .................................... Displays the level of the HA input signal.
4 TALKBACK ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected output destination of the talkback signal.
5 TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on or off.
2. Press the TALKBACK popup display button or the ASSIGN field to open the
TALKBACK popup window.
In this popup window you can make detailed settings for talkback.
1 TALKBACK IN field
• +48V button
Switches on or off the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the TALKBACK jack.
• TALKBACK level meter
Indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack.
2 INPUT TO TALKBACK field
This field allows a mic connected to a conventional input port to be used as a talkback input.
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can patch a desired
input port to talkback. The selected port name will appear on the button.
• +48V button
This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the selected input port.
• ANALOG GAIN knob
Adjusts the analog gain setting for the selected input port. Press this knob so that you will be able
to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain.
•HA meter
Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port.
• GC ON button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. The button will appear if the
input jack of the I/O device is patched.
• Gain Compensation meter
Indicates the level after Gain Compensation. It will appear if the input jack of the I/O device is
patched.
NOTE
These parameters and meters will not appear if no input port is selected.
3 TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on or off.
4 ASSIGN field
• Channel select buttons
Enable you to select a channel (bus) on which the talkback signal is sent.
• CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
3. Connect a mic to the TALKBACK jack on the front panel, and then rotate the
TALKBACK GAIN knob to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic signal.
The meter in the TALKBACK IN field indicates the input level of the mic connected to the
TALKBACK jack. If you want phantom power (+48V) to be supplied to the TALKBACK jack,
turn on the +48V button located in the TALKBACK IN field.
1 2
4
3
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
108
4. If you want to use an input jack other than the TALKBACK jack as supplementary
input for talkback, follow the steps below.
4-1. Press the INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field to
open the PORT SELECT popup window.
4-2. Press the button for the input that you want to use for talkback to turn the button
indicator on.
You can select only one input at a time.
4-3. Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
Use the INPUT TO TALKBACK field GAIN knob and level meter to adjust the input level
of the connected mic.
NOTE
The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference
between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack.
5. Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the bus(es) to which the talkback
signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
NOTE
You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.
6. To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on.
The TALKBACK ON button will alternately turn on or off each time you press the button (Latch
operation).
While talkback is on, signals from the TALKBACK jack and the selected INPUT jack will be
output to the destination buses.
NOTE
• You can also assign talkback on/off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key. In this case,
you can select either a Latch operation or an Unlatch operation (the function will be enabled only
while you continue holding down the key) (see page 169).
• When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the
talkback signal (see page 99).
Using the Oscillator function
You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR
screen.
In the MONITOR screen, the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings,
and turn the oscillator on or off.
If you want to view or edit the oscillator settings in greater detail, use the OSCILLATOR popup
window described in step 2 and subsequent steps.
1 OSCILLATOR popup display button
Enables you to access the OSCILLATOR popup window, in which you can make detailed
oscillator settings.
2 OSCILLATOR LEVEL field
This adjusts the level of the oscillator. A meter beside the LEVEL knob indicates the output level
of the oscillator. If OSCILLATOR MODE is set to SINE WAVE, the frequency of the oscillator is
shown.
Press the LEVEL knob to adjust the oscillator level using the multifunction knob.
3 OSCILLATOR MODE field
Indicates the currently-selected oscillator mode. Pressing the MODE button repeatedly will
switch modes.
1
3
2
5
4
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
109
4 OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected oscillator output destination (input channels
or buses). Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator output on or off.
2. Press the popup button or the ASSIGN field to open the OSCILLATOR popup
window.
In this popup window, you can make detailed settings for the oscillator.
1 OSCILLATOR MODE buttons
Select one of the following three oscillator operating modes:
2 Parameter field
Enables you to set the oscillator parameters. The controllers and their functions in this field vary
depending on the selected mode. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs.
Mode = SINE WAVE
• LEVEL knob.............. Indicates the output level of the sine wave.
• FREQ knob................ Indicates the frequency of the sine wave.
Mode = PINK NOISE
• LEVEL knob.............. Indicates the output level of the pink noise.
• HPF knob................... Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink noise.
Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off.
• LPF knob.................... Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink noise.
Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off.
Mode = BURST NOISE
• LEVEL knob, HPF knob, and
LPF knob.................... Same as in PINK NOISE mode.
• WIDTH...................... Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently.
• INTERVAL ................ Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts.
SINE WAVE When the oscillator is turned on, a sine wave will be output continuously.
PINK NOISE When the oscillator is turned on, pink noise will be output continuously.
BURST NOISE When the oscillator is turned on, pink noise will be output intermittently.
21
5
4
3
INTERVAL
WIDTH
Level
Time
Pink noise output
Turn BURST NOISE button is on.
Talkback and Oscillator
Reference Manual
110
3 ASSIGN section
Enables you to select a channel to which the oscillator signal will be sent. Press one of the three
tabs located at the bottom of the screen, then press the button(s) for the channel(s) in this section
(multiple selections are allowed). The “ASSIGNED” indicator is lit green for a tab that contains a
selection.
You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4 Meter section
Indicates the oscillator output level.
5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator on or off.
3. Press a button in the MODE field to select the type of signal you want to output.
4. Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator
parameters.
The displayed parameters will differ depending on the oscillator selected in the MODE field. The
knobs shown in the parameter field can be operated using the corresponding multifunction
knobs.
5. Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel(s) or bus(es) to
which the oscillator signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
6. To enable the oscillator, press the OUTPUT button to turn it on.
The oscillator signal will be sent to the input channel or bus you selected in step 5. When you press
the button again, the oscillator will turn off.
Meters
Reference Manual
111
Meters
This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all channels,
and operations related to the optional MBCL meter bridge.
Operations in the METER screen
By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input and output levels of all channels on the screen,
and switch the level meter’s metering points (the points in the signal route at which the level is
detected).
1. In the Function Access Area, press the METER field to access the METER screen.
INPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters and faders for all input channels.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
OUTPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters and faders for all output channels.
Meters
Reference Manual
112
INPUT/OUTPUT tabs
Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen and OUTPUT METER screen.
Fader level and meter display
This area displays the meter, fader, and level value for each channel.
1 Channel number
Indicates the channel number.
2 Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3 OVER indicator
This indicator will light if the signal clips at the METERING POINT.
4 Meter
This meter indicates the input or output level of the channel.
5 Fader
The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value (in dB) that appears
immediately below the fader.
NOTE
Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Centralogic
section.
Centralogic fader display
This area displays the level of the faders currently set in the Centralogic section.
METERING POINT field
Select one of the following as the metering point at which the level will be detected.
■ For INPUT METER
• PRE HPF.................... Immediately before the HPF
• PRE FADER .............. Pre-fader (immediately before INPUT
DELAY)
• POST ON................... Immediately after the [ON] key
■ For OUTPUT METER
• PRE EQ ...................... Immediately before the EQ
• PRE FADER .............. Immediately before the fader
• POST ON................... Immediately after the [ON] key
NOTE
On the CL3 or CL1 console, the metering point for output channels will also affect the optional
meter bridge (MBCL).
PEAK HOLD button
Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on each meter. Turn off this
button to clear the peak hold indication.
2. If necessary, press a button in the METERING POINT field to switch the metering
point.
The metering point for the level meters can be set independently for input channels and output
channels.
3. If you want the peak levels of the level meter to be held, press the PEAK HOLD
button to turn it on.
PEAK HOLD button on/off operations will affect both input channels and output channels as well
as the MBCL meter bridge. When you turn this button off, the peak level indications that had
been held will be cleared.
NOTE
You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to a USER DEFINED key
(see page 169).
1
4
5
2
3
Meters
Reference Manual
113
Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3
or CL1 console
If the optional meter bridge (MBCL) is installed on the CL3 or CL1 console, you will always be able to
view the output levels of MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, MONO, and CUE channels.
The MBCL meters indicate the output levels in 12-segment steps (OVER, –3 dB, –6 dB, –9 dB, –12 dB,
–15 dB, –18 dB, –24 dB, –30 dB, –40 dB, –50 dB, –60 dB).
You can select the metering point (the point at which the level is detected) from the following choices.
For information on how to change the metering point, refer to the section “Operations in the METER
screen” on page 111.
• PRE EQ .......................Immediately before the EQ
• PRE FADER...............Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ...................Immediately after the [ON] key
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
114
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack.
About the virtual rack
CL series consoles enable you to use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “GEQ”) and
effects/processors to modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ: 31BandGEQ which enables you to
freely adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any
fifteen of thirty-one bands. You can also use 54 different effect types. The CL series consoles feature
Premium Rack, which employs VCM technology. This technology models analog circuitry on a
component level to faithfully reproduce amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers six types of
processors.
In order to use a GEQ, effect, or Premium Rack, you must mount the GEQ, effect, or Premium Rack in
each virtual rack, and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words,
the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack,
and used patch cords to connect it. You can mount a GEQ instance in each of the sixteen racks 1–16,
an effect rack instance in each of the eight racks 1–8, and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight
racks 1–8.
Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However if the “31BandGEQ” is
mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.)
The figure below shows the signal flow for the virtual racks.
NOTE
The CL console provides a rack for mounting an I/O device (such as an Rio series), external head
amps (Yamaha AD8HR, SB168-ES, etc.) as well as the virtual rack for GEQ, effects and Premium
Rack. For details, see “I/O device and external head amp” on page 138.
INSERT IN
PATCH
(OUTPUT CH)
PREMIUM
RACK IN
PATCH
EFFECT
RACK IN
PATCH
MIX INSERT IN 1-24
STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C)
24
3
CH INSERT IN 1-72{64,48}
MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8
8
STEREO OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
CH
INSERT OUT
1-72{64,48}
MIX
INSERT OUT
1-24
STEREO
INSERT OUT
L,R,MONO(C)
MATRIX
INSERT OUT
1-8
GEQ
RACK IN
PATCH
GEQ1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
GEQ2-16 IN
A(L)/B(R)
FX1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
FX2-8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
INSERT IN
PATCH
(INPUT CH)
FX1 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
FX2-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
PR 1-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
FX1-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
GEQ RACK1(GEQ1)
Flex15GEQ
METER
RACK IN A
METER
RACK IN B
METER
RACK OUT A
METER
RACK OUT B
GEQ RACK2-16(GEQ2-16) (same as GEQ RACK1)
EFFECT RACK2-8(FX2-8) (same as EFFECT RACK1)
EFFECT RACK1(FX1)
EFFECT
METER
RACK IN L
METER
RACK IN R
METER
RACK OUT L
METER
RACK OUT R
Flex15GEQ
METER
RACK IN A
METER
RACK IN B
METER
RACK OUT A
METER
RACK OUT B
EFFECT CUE
31BandGEQ
METER
RACK IN
METER
RACK OUT
31BandGEQ
METER
RACK IN
METER
RACK OUT
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
SLOT3 1-16
To MATRIX INSERT IN
To STEREO INSERT IN
To MIX INSERT IN
To CH INSERT IN
72
MATRIX OUT
1-8
MIX OUT
1-24
PR1 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PR2-8 IN
A(L)/B(R)
PR1 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
PR2-8 OUT
A(L)/B(R)
PREMIUM RACK2-8 (same as PREMIUM RACK1)
PREMIUM RACK1(PR1)
PROCESSOR
METER
RACK IN L
METER
RACK IN R
METER
RACK OUT L
METER
RACK OUT R
EFFECT CUE
SLOT1 1-16
SLOT2 1-16
SLOT3 1-16
GEQ1-16
OUT
A(L)/B(R)
OMNI IN 1-8
OMNI IN 1-8
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
115
Virtual rack operations
This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the input and output
of the rack as an example.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window.
2. In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ 1–8, GEQ 9–16, or
EFFECT tab to access the GEQ or EFFECT field.
1 Rack tabs
Selects the type of rack you want to display on the screen. Choose from GEQ 1–8 and GEQ 9–16
(GEQ rack), EFFECT (effect rack), and PREMIUM (Premium Rack).
2 Rack mount popup button
Press this button to open the RACK MOUNTER popup window, in which you can select the type
of the rack you want to mount.
3 SAFE toggle button
Switches Recall Safe on or off for the rack. Racks with Recall Safe on will be excluded from Recall
operations.
4 INPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the path of the
signal patched to the rack input. The selected path will appear on the button.
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ, two buttons (A/B)
will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
5 OUTPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the path of the
signal patched to the rack output. The selected path will appear on the button.
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ, two buttons (A/B)
will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
NOTE
For the CL3/CL1, the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH fields will be shown crossed-out if a
channel that does not exist on that model has been specified.
6 Rack container
Indicates the contents of the rack. This container varies depending on the rack type you selected
in the RACK MOUNTER popup window.
23 4 6 5
1
23 4 56
1
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
116
• If nothing is mounted:
Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER popup window, in which you can select the GEQ
or effect that will be mounted in the rack.
• If 31BandGEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, GEQ on/off status, and input/output level. Press this
area to open the GEQ EDIT popup window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings.
• If Flex15GEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, the GEQ on/off status, and the input and output
levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT popup window, in which
you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B.
• If an effect is mounted (EFFECT rack only):
This area indicates the effect type, number of inputs and outputs, bypass on/off status, and the
input/output level. Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT popup window, in which you can
modify the effect settings.
7 Link indicator
Indicates that an odd-numbered rack and even-numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ, or A and B of
the Flex15GEQ are linked each other.
3. To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack.
The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear.
1 Rack number
This indicates the number of the selected rack.
2 Virtual rack
This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons.
3 MODULE SELECT
Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has
the following function.
• BLANK button ..........................Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack; the
rack will be empty.
• 31BandGEQ button..................Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack.
• Flex15GEQ button.................... Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.
• EFFECT button .........................Mounts an effect in the rack.
NOTE
Input/output patching will be defeated if you change the item mounted in a rack.
4 CANCEL button
Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.
5 OK button
Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the window,
all edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded. If you have not yet
closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by mounting the same GEQ or effect
once again.
• You can also display the RACK MOUNTER popup window by pressing a vacant rack in the GEQ/
EFFECT field.
7
43 5
21
43 5
21
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
117
4. Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the item you want to mount, and press
the OK button.
5. To select the input source for a rack, press the INPUT PATCH button for that rack.
The CH SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input source for the rack.
Switch the list as necessary, and select the input source channel that you want to patch.
When you select an input source in the CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you for
confirmation. To confirm the operation, press the OK button.
NOTE
• You have the option of making settings so that the confirmation dialog box will not appear
(see page 169).
• Normally you can specify two channels of input for each rack. However if you have selected
31BandGEQ, only one channel can be used.
1 Category select list
Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window.
• MIX/MATRIX.................................. MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8
*1, *2
• ST/MONO......................................... STEREO L/R, MONO
*1, *2
• INSERT OUT 1–32.......................... CH 1–32
*1
• INSERT OUT 33–64 ....................... CH 33–64
*1
• INSERT OUT 65–72 ....................... CH 65–72
*1
• INSERT OUT MIX/MATRIX ....... MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8
• INSERT OUT ST/MONO .............. STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 1–16 RACK.
*2. Not displayed for PREMIUM 3–8 RACK. Displayed only for PREMIUM 1–2 RACK.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2 Channel select buttons
Use these buttons to select the input source channel.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the popup window.
NOTE
In the case of the GEQ, patching it to either an insert-out or insert-in will automatically assign the
other patch point to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on.
Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a GEQ, the other patch point will
automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
For more information on insert-in/out, see “Inserting an external device into a channel” on
page 21.
6. To select the output source for a rack, press the OUTPUT PATCH button for that
rack.
The CH SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output destination for the
rack. Switch the list items as necessary, and select the output destination that you want to use.
When you select an output destination in the CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask
you to confirm the change. To confirm the change, press the OK button.
NOTE
• You can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear (see page 169).
• Normally you will be able to specify two channels of output for a rack, but if the 31BandGEQ is
selected only one channel can be used.
1 Category select list
Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window.
• CH 1–32 ......................................CH 1–32
*1, *2
• CH 33–64.................................... CH 33–64
*1, *2
2
31
3
2
1
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
118
• CH 65–72.................................... CH 65–72
*1, *2
• INSERT IN 1–32 ....................... CH 1–32
*1
• INSERT IN 33–64..................... CH 33–64
*1
• INSERT IN 65–72..................... CH 65–72
*1
• INSERT IN MIX/MATRIX..... MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8
• INSERT IN ST/MONO............ STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 1-16 RACK.
*2. Not displayed for PREMIUM 3–8 RACK. Displayed only for PREMIUM 1–2 RACK.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be
shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.
2 Channel select buttons
Use these buttons to select the output destination.
3 CLOSE button
Closes the popup window.
7. To switch Recall Safe on/off for each rack, press the SAFE button for that rack.
If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack, the contents and parameters of that rack will not change
when a scene is recalled. For more information on Recall Safe, “Using the Recall Safe function”
on page 88.
Be aware that the Recall Safe settings of each rack will not preserve the input/output patching to
that rack. Recall Safe settings for patching must be made on the input-source or output-
destination channel.
NOTE
The type of GEQ, effect, or premium rack mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the
input-source and output-destination patch settings are saved as part of the scene.
Graphic EQ operations
About the graphic EQ
The CL series console enables you to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1–16 and patch it to the insert-out
and insert-in of a MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in
EFFECT racks 1–8 (FX 1–8) and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX
channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of each band can be adjusted using the faders and [ON]
keys in the Centralogic section.
The following two types of GEQ are provided.
■ 31BandGEQ
This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave
wide, the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB, and the gain of
all thirty-one bands can be adjusted.
If a 31BandGEQ is mounted in a rack, one channel of input
and output can be used for that rack.
■ Flex15GEQ
This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave
wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB. The
Flex15GEQ enables you to adjust the gain for any fifteen of
the same bands as the thirty-one bands of the 31bandGEQ.
(Once you have used up fifteen bands of adjustment, you
will not be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a previously-adjusted band to the flat
setting.)
A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and “B”
respectively) mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input and output. If you mount a
Flex15GEQ in each rack, you will be able to use up to 48 GEQ units simultaneously.
Inserting a GEQ in a channel
This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.
1. Refer to steps 1–6 in the “Virtual rack operations” on page 115 section to mount a
GEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination.
The rack shown in the GEQ field indicates the approximate GEQ settings and the input and
output levels. A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units
(A and B).
NOTE
If you are using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ, or mount two 31BandGEQ units
in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later
step.
INPUT
31BandGEQ
OUTPUT
Rack
INPUT
Flex15GEQ (B)
Flex15GEQ (A)
OUTPUT
Rack
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
119
2. In the GEQ field or the EFFECT field, press the rack in which you mounted the GEQ.
The GEQ popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the GEQ parameters.
NOTE
The popup windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the
Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack.
1 Rack select tabs
Switch among GEQ 1–8, among GEQ 9–16 or among EFFECT1–8. For a rack in which a Flex 15
GEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
2 INPUT PATCH button
Opens the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the input source of the rack. The
operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT PATCH button in the GEQ field.
3 OUTPUT PATCH button
Opens the CH SELECT popup window, enabling you to select the output destination of the rack.
The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT PATCH button in the GEQ field.
4 GEQ LINK button
Links adjacent GEQ units.
In the case of a 31bandGEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will
be linked. In the case of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the same rack will be
linked.
NOTE
The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible.
5 FLAT button
Returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB.
6 GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently-selected GEQ on or off.
3. If you are using a stereo source, link the two GEQ units.
You will be able to use the GEQ LINK button if you have selected a 31BandGEQ or Flex15GEQ
for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. When you turn this button on, the following
popup window will appear. To enable linking, press any button other than CANCEL. The popup
window contains the following items.
1 GEQ x➞y button (“x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and
alphabetical character A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.
2 GEQ y➞x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.
3 RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.
4 CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the popup window.
When you link GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.
4. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the GEQ on.
After you have turned the GEQ on, adjust the bands of the GEQ.
For details on GEQ operations, refer to the following section “Using the 31BandGEQ” on
page 120, or “Using the Flex15GEQ” on page 121.
NOTE
You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field.
2 3 4 5 6
1
1
2
3
4
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
120
Using the 31BandGEQ
You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1–8 and [ON] keys to control the 31BandGEQ.
1. Refer to steps 1–6 in the “Virtual rack operations” section on page 115 to mount a
31BandGEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination.
The rack in which the 31BandGEQ is mounted will show the approximate settings and input and
output levels.
2. In the GEQ field or the EFFECT field, press the rack in which you mounted the
31BandGEQ.
The GEQ popup window will appear. In the GEQ popup window you can use the tabs to switch
among the racks.
1 EQ graph
Indicates the approximate response of the current 31BandGEQ.
2 Faders
Indicate the amount of boost and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ. The actual values are
shown in the numerical boxes below.
3 FADER ASSIGN field
In this field you can select the group of bands that will be controlled by the Centralogic section’s
faders.
3. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on.
4. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands
you will control using the Centralogic section’s faders.
The buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups of bands.
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on screen will turn white,
and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be displayed. Now
you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the band.
NOTE
The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the
button in the FADER ASSIGN field, it will return to the locked state.
5. Operate the faders in the Centralogic section.
The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut.
NOTE
When a fader in the Centralogic section is set to the center (flat) position, the corresponding [ON]
key indicator will turn off. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If you
raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band
has been modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will
immediately return to the flat state.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust each band.
NOTE
If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader assignments in the Centralogic
section will forcibly be defeated. However, if you once again display the same rack, the group of
bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
7. When you have finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN
field.
The faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section will return to their previous function.
NOTE
When you close the GEQ popup window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically
turn off.
8. If you want to copy the currently-displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of
another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at
the top of the popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
• Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less can be copied to a Flex15GEQ.
• GEQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library.
1
2
3
20–100 Eight bands 20.0 Hz–100 Hz
63–315 Eight bands 63.0 Hz–315 Hz
200–1k Eight bands 200 Hz–1.00 kHz
630–3.15k Eight bands 630 Hz–3.15 kHz
2k–10k Eight bands 2.00 kHz–10.0 kHz
4k–20k Eight bands 4.00 kHz–20.0 kHz
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
121
Using the Flex15GEQ
You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1–8 and [ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ.
1. Refer to steps 1–6 in the “Virtual rack operations” section on page 115 to mount a
Flex15GEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination.
A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B).
NOTE
If you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack.
However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit.
2. Press the rack in which you mounted the Flex15GEQ.
The GEQ popup window for GEQ(A) or GEQ(B) will appear.
This window is the same as that for the 31BandGEQ, except that the AVAILABLE BANDS
parameter box indicates the real-time number of additional bands (maximum 15) that can be
controlled in the current GEQ.
For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is
the rack number).
3. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on.
4. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands
you will control using the Centralogic section’s faders.
For details on the bands corresponding to each button in the FADER ASSIGN field, refer to step
4 of “Using the 31BandGEQ” on page 120.
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on the touch screen will
turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be
displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the band.
NOTE
The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the
button in the FADER ASSIGN field, the faders will return to the locked state.
5. Operate the faders in the Centralogic section.
For each of a Flex15GEQ’s two GEQ units (A and B), a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled.
The AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box in the FADER ASSIGN field indicates the real-time
number of additional bands that can be controlled in the current GEQ. If you have used all fifteen
bands, you will have to return one of these bands to the flat position before you can operate any
other band.
NOTE
• The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount. This indicates that
the corresponding band has been modified.
• To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position, press the corresponding [ON] key in
the Centralogic section to make it go dark.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust up to fifteen bands.
NOTE
If you switch the display to a different screen, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section
will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands
you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
7. When you have finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN
field.
The faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section will return to their previous function.
NOTE
When you close the GEQ popup window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically
turn off.
8. If you want to copy the currently-displayed Flex15GEQ settings to the GEQ of
another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at
the top of the popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
GEQ settings can be saved and recalled using the dedicated library.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
122
About the internal effects
The internal effects of the CL series console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1–8, and patched to an
output channel’s output or input channel’s input, or inserted into a channel. For each effect mounted in
a rack, you can choose one of 54 types of effect.
With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 17–24 are input to racks 1–8, and from the
racks are then output to ST IN 1–8 (L/R).
NOTE
Some effect types can be mounted only in racks 1, 3, 5 or 7.
To use an internal effect via send and return, assign the output of a MIX channel. to the input of the
effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the corresponding output
channel is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input channel is used as an effect return
channel.
Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired
channel (except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel.
The internal effects are categorized into two groups: “STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process
the L/R channel input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the two
channels before processing them.
If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R channels are
processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected, as follows.
■ STEREO type effects
■ MIX type effects
If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/stereo-out
regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. However, please note that this
will not apply to COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S, EQUALIZER601, and OPENDECK.
Using an internal effect via send and return
This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return
channel, so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration.
NOTE
• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type. This will allow
you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel.
• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it can be convenient to assign the send
destination MIX bus to stereo. (For details on bus assignments, see “Basic settings for MIX buses
and MATRIX buses” on page 202.)
1. Follow steps 1–3 described in “Virtual rack operations” on page 115, to mount an
effect in a rack.
The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect, the number
of inputs and outputs, and the levels before and following the effect.
OUTPUT PATCH
INPUT PATCH
EFFECT
EFFECT
EFFECT
EFFECT
Rack 2
Rack 7
Rack 8
Output of the
output channel
Input of the input
channel
Rack 1
EFFECT
Insert-out of a
desired channel*
Insert-in of a
desired channel*
* Excluding a ST IN channel
INPUT L EFFECT L L RETURN
INPUT R EFFECT R R RETURN
INPUT L L RETURN
INPUT R
EFFECT
R RETURN
L RETURN
EFFECT
R RETURN
INPUT
L or R
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
123
2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select
a MIX channel as the input source for the rack.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “Virtual rack operations” on
page 115. The output of the MIX channel you are using as the effect send is now assigned to the
L input of the effect.
If you are using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channel to the L/R inputs
of the rack.
3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and
select the L input of the desired ST IN channel as the output-destination for the
rack.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “Virtual rack operations” on
page 115. The L input of the ST IN channel used as the effect return channel is now assigned to
the L output of the effect.
If you are using the output of the effect in stereo, assign the R input of the same ST IN channel to
the R output of the rack in the same way.
NOTE
You can select more than one output destination for the effect.
4. Press the rack in which you mounted the effect.
The EFFECT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the effect parameters.
1 INPUT PATCH buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same
as for the INPUT button in the GEQ field.
2 OUTPUT PATCH buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same
as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field.
3 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
4 MIX BAL. knob
This knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound included in the
output signal from the effect. If you press this knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using
the corresponding multifunction knob.
5. As necessary, use the multifunction knob to adjust the MIX BAL. knob.
Adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound included in the output signal
from the effect. This parameter is provided for all effect types.
If you are using the effect via send and return, set this to 100% (effect sound only).
NOTE
For more information on setting the effect parameters, see “Editing the internal effect parameters”
on page 125.
6. To adjust the effect send level of an input channel, use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel
you want to control.
3
4
1
2
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
124
7. Use the MIX1-16, MIX17-24 and MATRIX keys of the SELECTED CHANNEL section
(top panel) so that the SEND field shows the MIX bus that is patched as the effect
send.
You can also use the MIX1-16, MIX17-24 and MATRIX buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen to switch the displayed bus.
8. Press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob that corresponds to the desired MIX bus, and
turn the multifunction knob to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each
channel to the MIX bus.
In this state you can adjust the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to the internal
effect. Adjust the send level of other input channels in the same way.
If you press the selected knob once again, the MIX SEND popup window (8ch) for the send-
destination MIX bus will appear. This popup window contains on/off switches for the signals sent
from each channel to the corresponding bus, and lets you select the send point (PRE or POST)
(see page 41).
NOTE
At this time, you make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected in step 3 to
the corresponding MIX bus is set to –∞ dB. If you raise this send level, the output of the effect will
be returned to the input of the same effect, possibly causing oscillation.
9. To adjust the master level of the effect send, call up the MIX channel you specified
as the input-source of the rack in step 2 to the Centralogic section, and adjust the
corresponding fader.
Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload point.
NOTE
The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input/output meters in the upper right
of the EFFECT popup window.
10. To adjust the effect return level, operate the ST IN channel that you selected as the
output-destination for the rack in step 3.
Inserting an internal effect into a channel
This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal
effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel).
1. Follow steps 1–3 described in “Virtual rack operations” on page 115, to mount an
effect in a rack.
The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect, the number
of inputs and outputs, and the levels before and after the effect.
2. Press the L side of the INPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window,
and select the insert-out of a channel as the input-source.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “Virtual rack operations” on
page 115. Insert-out is now assigned to the L input of the effect.
3. Press the L side of the OUTPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup
window, and select the insert-in of the same channel as the output-destination.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “Virtual rack operations” on
page 115. Insert-in is now assigned to the L output of the effect.
If you are inserting an effect into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel
insert-out/insert-in to the R input and output.
4. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
for the channel into which you inserted the effect.
5. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window.
Make sure that the rack you inserted into the input and output ports is selected. For more
information on insert-out/in, see “Inserting an external device into a channel” on page 21.
6. Turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the
effect.
If it is off, press the button to turn it on. In this state, effect insertion is enabled for the
corresponding channel.
7. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window, and use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field.
8. Press the effect rack that you inserted into the channel. The EFFECT popup window
will appear.
In this popup window you can edit the effect parameters.
9. Select the effect type and edit the effect parameters.
For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters.”
NOTE
• The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right
of the EFFECT popup window.
• Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach
the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect.
10. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step
3, adjust the level as appropriate.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
125
Editing the internal effect parameters
This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters.
1. Follow steps 1–3 described in “Virtual rack operations” on page 115, to mount an
effect in a rack.
A rack in which an effect is mounted will show the following information.
1 Effect title/type
This area indicates the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of
input/output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
2 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
2. Press the rack in which the effect you want to edit is mounted.
The EFFECT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the effect parameters. In the
EFFECT popup window you can use the tabs to switch among the eight racks (EFFECT 1 –
EFFECT 8).
1 INPUT PATCH buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window.
2 OUTPUT PATCH buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window.
3 Effect type field
Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input and
output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown. Press this field to open
the EFFECT TYPE popup window, in which you can select the effect type.
4 EFFECT CUE button
Enables you to cue-monitor the output of the currently-displayed effect. This Cue function is
valid only while this screen is displayed. The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch
to a different screen.
5 Special parameter field
Indicates special parameters that are specific to some effect types.
6 BYPASS button
Temporarily bypasses the effect.
7 Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
8 Effect parameter field
This area indicates parameters for the currently-selected effect type. When you press a knob in
this field, you will be able to use the multifunction knobs to control the corresponding horizontal
row of knobs.
You can also make fine adjustments by rotating a knob while pressing and holding it down.
9 Rack select tabs
Use these tabs to switch among EFFECT 1–8.
1 2
7
6
1
9
8
243 5
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
126
3. To change the effect type, press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE
popup window.
Press a new effect type to select it.
NOTE
• You can also change the effect type by recalling a library setting.
• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and “FREEZE” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. Also, even if you
copy these two effect types, you will not be able to paste them to rack 2, 4, 6, or 8.
4. To edit the effect parameters, press a knob in the effect parameter field to select
it, and turn the corresponding multifunction knob.
NOTE
For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the Appendices (see page 233).
5. Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary.
For some effect types, parameters such as the following will appear in the special parameter field.
■ TEMPO
This field appears if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is selected.
1 MIDI CLK button
If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that effect will
be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input
from the MIDI port.
■ PLAY/REC
This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.
1 PLAY button/REC button
Enable you to record (sample) and play back when using the
freeze effect. For detailed operations, see “Using the Freeze
effect” on page 129.
■ SOLO
This field appears if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is selected
as the effect type.
1 HIGH/MID/LOW buttons
Allow only the selected frequency band to pass (multiple
selections are allowed).
2 Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band.
■ Gain reduction meter
This field appears if Comp276/276S or Comp260/260S is selected as
the effect type.
1 Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the
compressor.
1
1
1 2
1
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
127
■ Type
This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect type.
1 DRIVE button/CLEAN button
Select one of two equalizer types that feature different effects.
DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog circuits,
creating a driven sound that enhances analog characteristics by adding
some distortion.
CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits, creating a clear
non-distorted sound that is inherently digital.
2 FLAT button
This button resets the gain of all bands to 0dB.
6. If you want to monitor the output signal of the currently-displayed effect, press the
EFFECT CUE button to turn it on.
NOTE
If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE, all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be
monitored. However, only the output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the
EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily
defeated.)
7. If you want to bypass the currently-displayed effect, press the BYPASS button to
turn it on.
8. If you want to copy the currently-displayed effect settings to the effect of another
rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of
the popup window.
For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
Effect settings can be stored and recalled using the effect library.
Using the Tap Tempo function
“Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed
of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval.
To use the Tap function, you must first assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key, and then operate
that USER DEFINED key.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
2
1
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
128
This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the
bottom of the window.
3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]–
[16].
4. Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the
Tap Tempo function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear.
5. Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the
PARAMETER 1 column, and press the OK button.
Use the / buttons or multifunction knobs to select an item in each column. Press the OK
button. The Tap Tempo function will be assigned to the USER DEFINED key that you selected in
step 4.
NOTE
• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column, the Tap Tempo function can be
used for the currently-displayed effect (rack).
• If you specify “RACK x” (x=1–8) in the PARAMETER 1 column, you will be able to use the Tap
Tempo function only for a specific effect (rack).
• For more information on USER DEFINED keys, see “USER DEFINED keys” on page 169.
6. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window, and then use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field.
7. Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted.
The EFFECT popup window will appear.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
129
8. Press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE
popup window, and select an effect type that
includes the BPM parameter.
The BPM parameter is included in delay-type and
modulation-type effects, and can be used to specify the delay
time or modulation speed.
NOTE
For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the
Appendices (see page 233).
9. Set the SYNC parameter to ON.
10. At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you
assigned the Tap Tempo function.
The average interval (BPM) at which you press the key will be calculated, and that value will be
applied to the BPM parameter.
NOTE
• If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it will be ignored.
• If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will
change in relation to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port.
Using the Freeze effect
This section explains how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple
sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations on screen to record (sample) and
play back a sound.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window, and then use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field.
2. Mount an effect in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
NOTE
Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
3. Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted.
The EFFECT popup window will appear.
4. Press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window, and select
“FREEZE.”
If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar will appear
in the special parameter field.
1 PLAY button
2 REC button
3 Progress bar
NOTE
As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also recall the “FREEZE” effect type from
the effect library.
ab c
The average interval will be input to the parameter.
(the average of a, b, and c)
First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap
1 32
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
130
5. To begin recording (sampling), press the REC button and then press the PLAY
button.
The signal being input to the effect will be recorded. The bar reflects the current recording
progress. When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off.
NOTE
You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed settings for recording time, the way
in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For details on the
parameters, refer to the Appendices (see page 242).
6. To play back the recorded sample, press the PLAY button.
NOTE
The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample, change the effect, or turn off
the power to the CL unit.
Using the Premium Rack
About the Premium Rack
The CL series console features processors that faithfully emulate meticulously-selected vintage analog
processors, and a newly-developed Premium Rack, as well as graphic EQs and built-in effects. The
Premium Rack employs VCM technology, which models analog circuitry on a component level to
faithfully reproduce and fine-tune amazing analog sounds.
The Premium Rack offers six types of processors.
Using the Premium Rack
The procedure to set up the I/O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack.
(see page 122)
For the premium rack, only racks 1–2 can be used via send/return. Racks 3–8 are only for patching as
inserts. (Refer to steps 5 and 6 of “Virtual rack operations” on page 115.)
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window.
2. In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the PREMIUM tab to display
the PREMIUM RACK field.
Name Outline
Portico 5033 Models RND’s analog 5-band EQ.
Portico 5043 Models RND’s analog compressor/limiter.
U76 Models a typical vintage compressor/limiter.
Opt–2A Models a classic vacuum tube (optical type) compressor.
EQ–1A Models a classic vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ.
Dynamic EQ
Newly-developed EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to
control the cut/boost amount in relation to the input level.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
131
3. To mount a Premium Rack in the rack, press the RACK MOUNT button for that rack.
The PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear.
4. Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the type you want to mount, and press
the OK button.
There are two ways to mount each processor:
• DUAL ..........................The processor is used on two mono channels.
• STEREO......................The processor is used on one stereo channel.
The DUAL button and STEREO button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by the
Premium Rack processor.
The U76 occupies two rack spaces. Other processors occupy one rack space. If you mount a two-
space Premium Rack processor in the rack, you will be unable to mount any more processors
below those rack spaces. Also, you cannot mount a two-space processor in an even-numbered
rack.
5. Press the L side or the A side of the INPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT
popup window, and select the insert-out of a channel as the input-source.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “Virtual rack operations” on
page 115. Insert-out is now assigned to the L input of the processor.
6. Press the L side or the A side of the OUTPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT
popup window, and select the insert-in of the same channel as the output-
destination.
For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “Virtual rack operations” on
page 115. Insert-in is now assigned to the L output of the processor.
If you are inserting a processor into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel
insert-out and insert-in to the R input and output of the processor.
7. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
for the channel into which you want to insert the processor.
8. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup
window.
Make sure that the rack you inserted in the input and output ports is selected. For details on Insert
Out/In, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” on page 21.
9. Turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the
processor.
If it is off, press the button to turn it on. In this state, processor insertion is enabled for the
corresponding channel.
10. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK
window, and use the PREMIUM tab to display the PREMIUM RACK field.
11. Press the processor rack that you inserted into the channel to open the Premium
Rack popup window.
In this popup window you can edit the processor parameters.
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
132
12. Adjust the parameters.
For details on editing the parameters, refer to the next section “Editing the Premium Rack
parameters.”
NOTE
Adjust the digital gain and the processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the
overload point at the input or output stage of the processor.
13. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in
step 6, adjust the level as appropriate.
Editing the Premium Rack parameters
Each Premium Rack window includes the following items:
1 ASSIST button
Press this button to open a window in which you can assign the parameters to the multifunction
knobs for control.
2 LIBRARY button
Press the button to open the Library popup window for Premium Rack. (For each module type)
3 DEFAULT button
Restores the default parameter setting.
4 Multifunction knob access field
Indicates the name and value of the parameters that are assigned to the multifunction knobs.
To switch the parameter to control, press the knob in the window.
NOTE
• If the ASSIST button is on, you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently
available for editing, and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them.
• You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a multifunction knob while pressing and
holding it down.
■ Portico 5033
Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates a 5-band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve Designs
(RND). 5033EQ features a unique tone control response. It inherited the history of the “1073,” which
was praised as one of the greatest devices developed by Mr. Rupert Neve. Yamaha’s VCM technology
has modeled the EQ to the last detail, including the input/output transformer that was designed by Mr.
Rupert Neve himself. As a result, this processor model produces musically high-quality sound even
when bypassed. Its response features unique effects. For example, if the Lo setting is cut, the low range
becomes tight, and if the Hi setting is raised, the desired range will be boosted without hurting your
ears.
1 ALL BYPASS button
Switches EQ bypass on or off. Even when EQ bypass is on, the signal will pass through the input/
output transformer and amp circuits.
2 TRIM knob
Adjusts the input gain of the effect.
3 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Frequency knobs
Adjust the frequency for each band.
4 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Gain knobs
Adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band.
5 LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs
Adjust the Q (steepness) of each band. The higher the Q value, the narrower the range in which
you can control the gain for the band.
1 2 3
4
1
2
8
7
3
4
5
6
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
133
6 LMF/MF/HMF IN button
Turn LMF/MF/HMF EQ on or off respectively.
7 LF/HF IN button
Turn LF and HF EQ on or off simultaneously.
8 Graph
Indicates the graphical EQ response.
■ Portico 5043
Portico 5043, like Portico 5033, is a processor that emulates RND’s analog compressor.The actual 5043
Compressor is equipped with the same input/output transformer as that of the 5033 EQ, delivering a
natural, analog-like tonality and effect. It enables you to obtain a range of results from hard
compression to natural sound, and is suitable for a broad range of audio sources ranging from drums
to vocals. The most notable feature of this model is that you can switch the gain reduction type. You can
choose either an FF (Feed-Forward) circuit type (which is the current mainstream), or an FB (Feed-
Back) circuit which was typically used in vintage compressors. This allows you to create sounds with
various characteristics as appropriate for your applications.
1 IN button
Turns the compressor’s bypass on or off. When the compressor is bypassed, the button indicator
will turn off. However, even if the compressor is bypassed, the signal will pass through the input/
output transformer and amp circuits.
2 INPUT meter
Indicates the input signal level.
One meter appears in DUAL mode, and two meters appear in STEREO mode.
3 FB button
Switches the gain reduction method between FF (Feed-Forward) circuit and FB (Feed-Back)
circuit. The button will light when FB circuit is selected.
The FF circuit is used in most contemporary compressors. This type is useful when you want to
apply compression thoroughly while maintaining a consistent tonal color.
The FB circuit is used in vintage compressors. This type is suitable when you want to apply a
smooth compression while adding a tonal color that is characteristic to the device.
4 GAIN REDUCTION meter
Indicates the amount of gain reduction.
5 THRESHOLD knob
Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied.
6 RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression ratio. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to switch to the limiter.
7 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time.
8 RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time.
9 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain.
1324
56789
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
134
■ U76
U76 is a processor that emulates a popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of situations. This
processor does not provide the threshold parameter that is found on conventional compressors.
Instead, the intensity of compression is determined by the balance between the input gain and the
output gain. The “All mode” setting for the RATIO parameter allows you to create a heavily-compressed
sound that is typical of this model. It produces an aggressive tonal character with a rich addition of
overtones.
1 INPUT knob
Adjusts the input level. As the input level gets higher, more compression is applied.
2 ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest attack time.
3 RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest release
time.
4 RATIO switch buttons
Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio.
A button with the higher number will raise the compression ratio more. Pressing the ALL button
selects All mode, in which the RATIO will become high, and sharp compression with a faster
release time will be applied, creating substantially-distorted aggressive sound.
5 METER switch buttons
Switch the meter display.
• GR.....................Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
• +4/+8 ................Each meter uses –18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, and indicates
“0VU” for the value of the reference level added by +4 dB or +8 dB.
• OFF...................Turns off the meter display.
6 OUTPUT knob
Adjusts the output level.
If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT level, the level of
audible volume will also change. In this case, use the OUTPUT knob to adjust the volume level.
■ Opt–2A
Opt–2A is a processor that emulates a popular vintage model of tube opto compressors. It features
smooth compression produced using optical components such as a photocell and a light source to
control the level. It also features beautiful high-range overtones created by the warm distortion typical
of tube circuits, resulting in elegant and sophisticated sounds.
1 GAIN knob
Adjusts the output level.
2 PEAK REDUCTION knob
Adjusts the compression amount of the signal.
3 RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression ratio.
4 METER SELECT knob
Switches the meter display.
GAIN REDUCTION indicates the amount of gain reduction when the compressor is operating.
With –18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, the OUTPUT +10 and OUTPUT +4
settings respectively will cause the value +10 dB or +4 dB from this reference level to be shown as
“0VU” on the meter.
21
3645
2134
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
135
■ EQ–1A
EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a famous passive-type vintage EQ. It features a unique style of
operation, allowing you to individually boost and attenuate (cut) each of two frequency ranges (high
and low). The frequency response is utterly unlike that of a conventional EQ, and is a uniquely
distinctive characteristic of this model. The input/output circuits and vacuum tubes produce a tonal
character that is highly musical and well-balanced.
1 IN switch
Turns the processor on or off.
When the switch is off, the signal will bypass the filter section, but pass through the input/output
transformer and amp circuits.
2 LOW FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the low range filter.
3 (LOW) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW FREQUENCY
knob.
4 (LOW) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
5 BAND WIDTH knob
Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter.
As you rotate the knob toward the right (Broad), the band will become wider and the peak level
will decrease. This affects only the response of the boost.
6 HIGH FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the high range filter. This affects only the response of the boost.
7 (HIGH) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH FREQUENCY
knob.
8 (HIGH) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN SEL knob.
9 (HIGH) ATTEN SEL knob
Switches the frequency region attenuated by the ATTEN knob.
■ Dynamic EQ
Dynamic EQ is a newly-developed equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of equalizer. The
sidechain has a filter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ. This allows you to apply EQ in
the same way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a specific frequency region, causing the
EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific frequency region of the input signal becomes too high
or too low. For example you could use this on a vocal sound as a de-esser, so that EQ is applied to a
specific frequency band only when sibilance or high-frequency consonants reach an unpleasant level,
thus preserving a natural sound that does not impair the original tonal character. Two full-band
Dynamic EQs are provided, enabling you to process a wide range of audio sources.
1 BAND ON/OFF button
Turns each band on or off.
2 61
3 4 5 7 8 9
82A
4
3
1
9
0
6
5
7B
C
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
136
2 SIDECHAIN CUE button
Press this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus. At this time, the graph
indicates the filter response for the sidechain.
3 SIDECHAIN LISTEN button
Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal (linked to the dynamics) to the bus (such as a
STEREO bus or MIX/MATRIX bus) to which the insert channel signal is sent. At this time, the
graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
4 FILTER TYPE buttons
Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters. Main bus EQ and sidechain filter
will link as follows:
5 FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter.
6 Q knob
Sets the Q value (steepness) of the equalizer and sidechain filter.
As you rotate this knob clockwise, the frequency range to which the equalizer or sidechain filter
is applied will become wider.
7 THRESHOLD knob
Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking an effect.
8 RATIO knob
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal.
Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost, and counter-clockwise for cut. Fully
rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect.
9 ATTACK/RELEASE buttons
Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack/release time for compression or boost.
Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release. Select SLOW for a faster attack and slower
release. Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack/release time depending on the frequency
ranges.
0 MODE buttons
Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the threshold
value (ABOVE), or when the level does not reach the threshold value (BELOW).
A EQ GAIN meter
Indicates the dynamically-changing EQ gain.
B THRESHOLD meter
Indicates the sidechain signal level in relation to the threshold level.
C Graph area
Displays the equalizer response.
In most cases, this area displays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and intensity,
and the dynamic EQ graph that indicates the dynamically-changing EQ responses.
If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDECHAIN LISTEN is on, this area displays the sidechain filter
response.
FILTER TYPE
(Low Shelf)
(Bell)
(Hi Shelf)
Main EQ Low Shelf Bell Hi Shelf
Sidechain filter LPF BPF HPF
Dynamic EQ graph
Reference EQ graph
Sidechain filter graph
Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack
Reference Manual
137
Using the graphic EQ, effect, and Premium Rack
libraries
■ GEQ library
Use the “GEQ library” to store and recall GEQ settings. All GEQ units used in the CL series console can
reference this GEQ library. Although are two types, 31BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ, you are free to recall
items between differing types. However, only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands can
be recalled to a Flex15GEQ.
200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is read-only data for initialization, and the
remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the GEQ popup
window.
NOTE
• Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units. For one rack, you can store
and recall two Flex15GEQ units independently as A and B.
• To access the GEQ popup window, press the rack in the GEQ field.
■ Effect library
Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the effect
library. Numbers 001–027 are read-only presets, and the remaining library numbers can be freely read
or written.
To recall an item from the effect library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the EFFECT
popup window.
NOTE
If you recall an effect whose effect type is COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S,
EQUALIZER610, OPENDECK, M.BAND DYNA., or M.BAND COMP, the other effects may be
momentarily muted in some cases.
■ Premium Rack library
For the premium rack, there are six library items for each module type. You’ll use the library of each
module type to store and recall Premium Rack settings. The libraries are numbered 000–100, and 000
is read-only data for initialization. All library items other than #000 can be freely read and written.
To recall an item from the Premium Rack library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the
popup window for the corresponding Premium Rack.
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
138
I/O device and external head amp
This chapter explains how to use an I/O device or an external head amp that is connected to the CL
series console.
Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For details,
refer to “Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network” on page 217.
Using an I/O device
CL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I/O device (such as an Rio
series product) connected to the Dante connector.
For details on connecting the CL series console to an I/O device, refer to the “Connecting to I/O
devices” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
I/O device patching
Here’s how an I/O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante audio network.
1. Connect the CL series console to an I/O device.
For details, refer to the “Connecting to I/O devices” and “Quick Guide” sections in the separate
Owner’s Manual.
2. In the function access area, press the I/O DEVICE button to access the I/O DEVICE
screen.
3. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the DANTE PATCH tab to access
the DANTE PATCH field.
The DANTE PATCH field includes the following items.
1 I/O device list
This shows the ID number and model name of the I/O devices.
Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window, where you can specify patching from
the console’s output ports to the I/O devices.
2 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for
the audio network.
3 DANTE INPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window, in which you can select any
of 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the console.
4 OUTPUT PORT SETUP button
Press this button to access the PATCH VIEW 1 tab of the OUTPUT PORT popup window, where
you can choose the 64 channels that will be output from the console’s output ports to I/O devices.
4. To specify the 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the console,
press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button.
The DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window will appear. This popup window includes the
following items.
1
2
3
4
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
139
1 LIBRARY button
Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library. You can
store ten sets of settings in the library.
NOTE
• If you recall data whose I/O device registration state differs from the current state, patching to
devices not registered in the I/O device list will be kept in its current state, and will not be recalled.
• Similarly, if the UNIT ID is different than when the data was stored, the settings will not be
recalled; the current state will be maintained.
2 AUTO SETUP button
The current I/O device connection status will be ascertained, and input patching to the console
will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are registered in the I/O
device list.
When you press this button, a confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to confirm the
execution of auto patching. Press the OK button to execute auto patching. Otherwise, press
CANCEL to return to the previous screen.
3 Port select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window.
The Dante Device ID number (hexadecimal) and channel number (decimal)
are shown in the upper row on the button.
The first eight characters of the channel label (Dante Audio Channel Label) for
each port are shown in the lower row on the button.
If no patch has been assigned, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower
row will indicate nothing.
NOTE
• If you’ve connected a device other than an I/O device supported by the CL series, the upper line
of the button will show the first four letters of the Device Label, a dash “-”, and the channel number
(decimal).
• If no Dante Audio Channel Label has been specified, the lower row will indicate nothing.
• You can set the Dante Audio Channel Label using Audinate’s “Dante Controller” software. For the
latest information, refer to the Yamaha pro audio website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
5. Press the AUTO SETUP button.
A confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to confirm the input patching from the I/O
devices to the console; press OK, and the patching will be performed automatically.
6. If you want to edit the patching individually, press the port select button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
1 Category select list
Enables you to select the I/O device containing the input port that you want to assign.
2 Port select buttons
Select the input port.
3 CLOSE button
Completes the settings and closes the popup window.
1 2
3
2
31
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
140
7. To assign the output ports of the I/O device, select and press the I/O device in the
DANTE PATCH field of the I/O device screen to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup
window.
The OUTPUT PATCH popup window will appear.
1 Port select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window.
8. If you want to change the patching, press the port select button.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
1 Category select list
Select the Dante port to which the signal you want to output is assigned.
2 Port select buttons
Select the Dante port (DANTE 1–64) to which the signal you want to output is assigned.
3 CLOSE button
Completes the settings and closes the popup window.
9. In the same way, specify the channels that you want to output to other OUTPUT
ports.
Remotely controlling an Rio unit
Here’s how to remotely control an Rio unit that’s connected to the Dante connector.
1. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the Rio tab to access the Rio field.
The Rio field includes the following items.
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold down the
button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink.
2 ID/model name indication
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
1
2
31
1 2
3
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
141
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for
the audio network.
■ HA display
This shows the HA settings of the I/O device. Press this area to open the I/O DEVICE HA popup
window, in which you can make detailed head amp settings.
4 Analog gain knob
Indicates the analog gain setting. This item is only for display, and cannot be edited.
5 +48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on/off status for each port.
6 OVER indicator
Warns you when the input signal is clipping.
7 HPF indicator
Indicates the high pass filter on or off status for each port.
■ INPUT display
This shows the input settings of the I/O device.
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light.
■ OUTPUT display
This shows the output settings of the I/O device. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup
window, where you can make output port settings for the I/O device.
If you press the [SEL] key of an output channel, the corresponding port will light.
2. To remotely control the head amp of an I/O device, press the I/O device in the HA
display.
The I/O DEVICE HA popup window will appear. In this window, you can remotely control the
head amp on the I/O device from the CL series console by using the on-screen knobs and buttons
or the multifunction knobs on the top panel.
1 +48V MASTER
Indicates the on/off status of the I/O device’s master phantom power. (Switching this on or off is
performed on the I/O device itself.)
2 +48V button
Switch phantom power on or off for each channel.
3 GAIN knob
Indicates the gain of the head amp on the I/O device. To adjust the value, press the knob to select
it, and use multifunction knobs 1–8. The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob
shows the input level of the corresponding port.
4 GC button
Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal level on the
audio network.
5 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the head amp of the I/O unit, and
adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to
adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob.
6 Displayed port switch tabs
These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the I/O DEVICE HA popup window.
7 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
5
7
4
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
142
3. To remotely control the I/O device’s
head amp from an input channel of
the CL series console, use the bank
select keys in the Centralogic section
to access the OVERVIEW screen that
includes the channel for which you
want to control the head amp.
4. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel for which you want to adjust the I/O
device’s head amp. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
5. When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol to close the popup
window.
6. If you press a rack in which an output I/O device is mounted, the OUTPUT PATCH
popup window will appear.
If you need to make output port settings, make these settings as described in step 7 and following
of the I/O device patching procedure (see page 140).
GAIN/PATCH
field
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
143
Remotely controlling an amp
Here’s how to remotely control an amp that’s connected to the Dante connector.
1. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the AMP tab to access the AMP
field.
The AMP field includes the following items.
1 Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.
2 ID/model name indication
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
3 DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for
the audio network.
2. Press a displayed I/O device to open the OUTPUT PATCH popup window.
If you need to make output port settings, make these settings as described in step 7 and following
of the I/O device patching procedure (see page 140).
1 2
3
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
144
Using an external head amp
If an I/O card (such as an MY16-ES64 card) supports the remote protocol of an external head amp in
the CL’s slot, you will be able to remotely control from the CL console some parameters of the external
head amp (Yamaha SB168-ES or AD8HR), such as phantom power (+48V) on/off status, gain, and HPF.
For details on the I/O card settings, refer to the owner’s manual for the I/O card.
Connecting the CL series console to an AD8HR
To remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64 EtherSound card in
Slot 1 on the CL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL unit to the NAI48-ES. Then, connect
the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48-ES to the HA REMOTE 1 connector on the AD8HR using
an RS422 D-sub 9-pin cable. This connection enables you to remotely control the AD8HR from the CL
series console.
To transmit audio signals (input to the AD8HR) to the CL series console, connect the DIGITAL OUT
A (or B) connector on the AD8HR to the AES/EBU connector on the NAI48-ES using a D-sub 25-pin
AES/EBU cable. Signals will be sent or received between the NAI48-ES and the CL series console via
the MY16-ES64 card.
Alternatively, you can use a “daisy chain” connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units
simultaneously. To do this, connect the AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second AD8HR’s
HA REMOTE 1 connector. If you use the NAI48-ES, you can connect up to six AD8HR units. In this
case, to input AD8HR’s audio signals into the CL series console, install two MY16-EX cards on the CL
unit since each slot on the CL unit accepts up to 16 channel signals. Then, use an Ethernet cable to make
connections to the MY16-ES64.
CL5
AD8HR 1
NAI48-ES
AD8HR 2
AD8HR 3
MY16-
EX
MY16-
EX
MY16-
ES64
DIGITAL OUT A connector
DIGITAL OUT A
connector
DIGITAL
OUT A
connector
HA REMOTE connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
HA REMOTE 2 connector
Up to six units
Audio signal
Remote signal
HA REMOTE 2 connector
HA REMOTE 2 connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
145
Connecting the CL series console to an SB168-ES
To remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64 EtherSound card
in Slot 1 on the CL, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL to the SB168-ES. This connection
enables you to remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console.
Alternatively, you can use a daisy chain or ring connection and install two MY16-EX expansion cards
in the slots on the CL unit to remotely control up to three SB168-ES units simultaneously.
NOTE
Remote control data will be received and transmitted only at Slot 1 on the CL series console.
■ Daisy chain connection
■ Ring connection
NOTE
Please refer to the SB168-ES Owner’s Manual for information on setting up the MY16-ES64/
MY16-EX cards and EtherSound network.
SB168-ES
SB168-ES
SB168-ES
MY16-
ES64
MY16-
EX
MY16-
EX
CL5
OUT
Audio signal
Remote signal
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
SB168-ES
SB168-ES
SB168-ES
CL5
MY16-
ES64
MY16-
EX
MY16-
EX
Audio signal
Remote signal
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
146
Remotely controlling an external head amp
You can remotely control from the CL series console an external head amp (“external HA”) connected
via MY16-ES64 or NAI48-ES.
1. Connect the CL series console to an external HA.
For details, refer to the “Using an external head amp” on page 144 section and the owner’s manual
of your external HA.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the I/O DEVICE button to access the I/O DEVICE
window.
3. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE window, press the EXTERNAL HA tab to display
the EXTERNAL HA field.
The EXTERNAL HA field includes the following items.
1 EXTERNAL HA field
Indicates the state of the connected external HA.
2 ID/Model name/+48V master
Displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is automatically
assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to six. This field also enables you to view the
on/off status of the master phantom power.
3 Virtual racks
This section accommodates up to six racks in which remotely-controllable external HA units can
be mounted. If an external HA is mounted, this field will indicate the HA settings (GAIN setting,
and on/off status of the phantom power and HPF). Press a rack to open the EXTERNAL HA
popup window.
4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button
Press this button to open the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can
specify the input ports to which the external HA mounted in the rack will be connected.
5 VIEW switch buttons
Switch the virtual rack display between SB168-ES and AD8HR. Select the view according to the
connected device.
2 3 4
1
5 6
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
147
6 COMM PORT switch buttons
Specifies whether the external HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely. Select
“SLOT1” if you want to remotely control the external HA.
4. Press the “SLOT1” COMM PORT switch button.
The external HA units that can be controlled will appear in the virtual rack.
5. To specify the input ports for an external HA, press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT
popup button for that rack.
The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window will appear. The popup window includes the
following items.
1 PORT SELECT buttons
Specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected.
6. Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify the input ports to which the audio output
of the external HA is connected.
When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
NOTE
If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the CL series console, you must specify an
appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected
correctly when you patch input ports to input channels.
7. To remotely control an external HA, press the rack in which the external HA you
want to control is mounted.
The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear. Here you can remotely control the external HA
by using the on-screen knobs and buttons on the CL series console or the knobs on the top panel.
1 +48V MASTER
If an external HA is connected, the on/off status of the master phantom power is shown here.
(Switching this on or off is performed on the external HA itself.)
2 +48V button
Switches phantom power on or off for each channel.
3 GAIN knob
Indicates the gain level of the external HA. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and use
multifunction knobs 1–8. The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob shows the
input level of the corresponding port.
4 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the external HA, and adjust its
cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using
the corresponding multifunction knob.
5 Rack select tabs
Enable you to select the rack displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window.
NOTE
• If you connect an additional AD8HR, the setting for this AD8HR will be used. These knobs and
buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window even if an AD8HR is not connected,
allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected.
• Error messages related to the SB168-ES will not be displayed. In addition, you will be unable to
set the EtherSound parameters. Use the AVS-ESMonitor software application for these
functions.
1
2
3
5
1
4
I/O device and external head amp
Reference Manual
148
8. To remotely control the external HA from
an input channel of the CL series console,
use the Bank Select keys to access the
OVERVIEW screen that includes the
channel on which you want to control
the HA.
9. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel on which you want to control the
external HA. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear.
10. Press the PATCH button, and select the input port assigned to the external HA.
With these settings, you will be able to use the external HA in the same way as the head amp on
the I/O device or the CL unit. For details about the GAIN/PATCH popup window, refer to
“Making HA (Head Amp) settings” on page 30.
GAIN/PATCH field
MIDI
Reference Manual
149
MIDI
This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the CL series console
to control the CL console’s parameters, and how to send out MIDI messages from the CL console as you
operate the unit.
MIDI functionality on the CL series console
The CL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations:
■ Program Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the CL series console, a Program
Change message (a number that is assigned to the event) can be transmitted to an external device.
Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from
an external device.
■ Control Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (fader, knob, or key operation) on the CL series console, the
corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events
can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an external device. This allows you
to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play them back
later.
■ Parameter Change (SysEx) transmission and reception
When specific events (fader, knob, or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are
executed, “Parameter Change” SysEx (system exclusive) messages can be transmitted to an external
device. Conversely, events can be executed when Parameter Changes are received from an external
device.
Using this capability, CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other
external device. In addition, changes in system and user settings can be received and executed by
another CL console.
NOTE
You can select the port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages from the rear
panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors or an I/O card installed in a slot 1. All of the functionality described
in this section will be available on the port you select.
Basic MIDI settings
You can select the type of MIDI messages the CL series console will transmit and receive, the MIDI port
that will be used, and the MIDI channel.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI
popup window.
This window includes several pages, which you can switch among using the tabs located at the
bottom of the window.
MIDI
Reference Manual
150
3. Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page.
In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and
received, and choose the port that will be used. This page includes the following items.
1 PORT/CH field
Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI
messages.
• Tx PORT/Tx CH.......Press these buttons to open popup windows in which you can
respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit MIDI messages.
• Rx PORT/Rx CH.......Press these button to open popup windows in which you can respectively
select a port and MIDI channel to receive MIDI messages.
2 PROGRAM CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or off.
• Tx.................................Switches Program Change transmission on or off.
• Rx.................................Switches Program Change reception on or off.
• ECHO..........................Switches on or off echo output of Program Change messages (If this
function is on, Program Change messages received from an external
device will be retransmitted without modification.).
3 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode.
• SINGLE.......................If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received
on a single MIDI channel (Single mode).
• MULTI ........................If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received
on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode).
• OMNI ......................... If this button is on, Program Changes on all MIDI channels will be
transmitted and received in Single mode. Multi mode transmission/
reception and Single mode transmission are disabled.
• BANK ......................... If this button is on, Bank Select messages can be transmitted and
received in Single mode. (Bank Select messages switch the group of
Program Change messages to be used.)
4 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Control Change message transmission and reception on or off.
• Tx ................................ Switches Control Change transmission on or off.
• Rx ................................ Switches Control Change reception on or off.
• ECHO......................... Switches on or off echo output of Control Change messages (If this
function is on, Control Change messages received from an external
device will be retransmitted without modification.).
5 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode.
• NRPN ......................... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/received
as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN mode).
• TABLE button ........... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/received
as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel (TABLE mode).
6 PARAMETER CHANGE field
Enables you to turn SysEx (system exclusive) messages on or off. (These special messages are used
to change the CL parameters.)
• Tx ................................ Switches Parameter Change transmission on or off.
• Rx ................................ Switches Parameter Change reception on or off.
• ECHO......................... Switches on or off echo output of Parameter Change messages (If this
function is on, Parameter Change messages received from an external
device will be retransmitted without modification.).
7 OTHER COMMAND field
Switches on or off echo output of other messages (If this function is on, other messages received
from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.).
1
2
4
6
7
3
5
MIDI
Reference Manual
151
4. To specify the port that will be used to transmit or receive each type of MIDI
message, press the transmit (Tx) or receive (Rx) port select popup button.
The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the port will appear. Operations in this window
are the same for both transmission (Tx) and reception (Rx). This window includes the following
items.
1 TERMINAL field
Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
You can choose from the following items.
2 PORT NO. field
If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field, choose port number 1–8 in this field. (The number
of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed.) The currently-available card
is valid only for port 1.
5. Specify the type of port and the port number.
Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the selected port and
close the MIDI SETUP popup window.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can select a port by pressing the desired port name in the field, or by pressing
the field to highlight it and then rotating one of the multifunction knobs to select the port.
6. To specify the channel on which MIDI messages will be transmitted or received,
press the channel select popup button.
The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the channel will appear. Operations in this
window are the same for both transmission (Tx) and reception (Rx). This window includes the
following items.
1 CH field
Enables you to select CH1–CH16 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
7. Select the channel.
Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the selected channel and
close the MIDI SETUP popup window.
NOTE
• Alternatively, you can select the channel by pressing the desired channel in the field or by rotating
one of the multifunction knobs.
• When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes, the channel number you specify here is used
as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit).
8. Turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI message.
NOTE
• For details on using Program Change messages, refer to “Using Program Changes to recall
scenes and library items,” below.
• For details on using Control Change messages, refer to “Using Control Changes to control
parameters” on page 155.
NONE No port will be used.
MIDI MIDI IN (Rx) and OUT (Tx) connectors on the rear panel
SLOT1 A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on the rear panel
1 2
1
MIDI
Reference Manual
152
Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library
items
The CL series console lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each
Program Change number, so that when this event is executed on the CL console, a Program Change
message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the
corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external
device.
1. Connect the CL series console to an external device.
The following illustration shows an example of using the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit
and receive MIDI messages.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI
popup window.
4. Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page, then select the port and
MIDI channel on which Program Changes will be transmitted and received, as
described in “Basic MIDI settings” on page 149.
5. Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab to access the PROGRAM CHANGE page.
On the PROGRAM CHANGE page, you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted
and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned to
each program number.
This page includes the following items.
1 PROGRAM CHANGE
Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked with the
PROGRAM CHANGE section on the MIDI SETUP page.
• Tx ................................ Turn this button on to transmit corresponding Program Change
messages when events on the list are executed.
• Rx ................................ Turn this button on to execute corresponding events when Program
Change messages are received.
• ECHO ........................ Turn this button on to transmit Program Change messages that are
received from an external device.
2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. This setting is linked with the
PROGRAM CHANGE MODE section on the MIDI SETUP page.
3 List
Shows the event (scene recall or library recall) assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI Program
Change number. The list shows the following items.
• CH/BANK ................. If “CH” appears as the column heading instead of “BANK,” the column
indicates the MIDI channel (1–16) on which Program Changes are
transmitted/received. If Program Change transmission and reception is
in Single mode and the BANK button is on, this will be labeled “BANK,”
and the numerical value in this column will correspond to the bank
number.
• NO............................... Indicates the program number 1–128.
CL5
MIDI OUTMIDI IN MIDI OUTMIDI IN
External device
1
4
5
6
2
3
MIDI
Reference Manual
153
• PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT
...............................Indicates the type/number/title of the event assigned to each channel
(bank number) or program number. Press an individual event display
area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window, in which
you can select the event that you want to assign.
4 Scroll knob
Press this knob to scroll the list using the multifunction knob.
5 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to erase all events from the list.
6 INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
6. Use the buttons in the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field to select the Program
Change transmission/reception mode.
You can select one of the following two Program Change transmission/reception modes.
• Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on):
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/receive
channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.)
When a Program Change is received, the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and
program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of the
corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be transmitted.
• Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on):
Only Program Changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the MIDI
SETUP page will be transmitted and received.
When a Program Change on the Rx channel is received, the event assigned to that program
number of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed.
When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of the
corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list. (If an
event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel, the lowest-numbered
program number will be transmitted.)
If you turn on the OMNI button/BANK button in Single mode, operation will change as follows.
• When the OMNI button is on:
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI channel
that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will
be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for Program Change
transmission.
• When the BANK button is on:
The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and Bank Select (Control
Change #0, #32) and Program Change messages can be transmitted and received. This can be
convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single MIDI channel.
When Bank Select and then Program Change messages (in that order) are received on the Rx
channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on the CL series console, Bank Select and Program Change
messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on
the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-numbered
bank number and program number will be transmitted.)
NOTE
• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode.
• If the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received,
the last-selected bank number will be used.
• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case,
Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.
7. Use the buttons in the PROGRAM CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception
on or off, and make settings for echo output.
This field includes the following items.
• Tx button ................... Switches Program Change transmission on or off.
• Rx button ................... Switches Program Change reception on or off.
• ECHO button............ Selects whether incoming Program Changes are echoed-out from the
MIDI transmission port.
MIDI
Reference Manual
154
8. To change the event assignment for each program number, press the desired event
in the list.
The MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window will appear. In this window, you can specify the
event assigned to each program number. This popup window includes the following items.
1 TYPE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
The following table lists the events you can select.
2 DESTINATION field
Enables you to select the rack for which you want to recall a library item. If EFFECT or
PREMIUM RACK is selected in the TYPE field, the rack number will be shown. If SCENE is
selected, this will indicate “- - -”, and no choice is available for this field.
3 LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY NAME field
Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall.
If you selected SCENE or EFFECT in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY NUMBER and LIBRARY
NAME field will appear. If you selected PREMIUM RACK in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY
NUMBER field will appear.
9. Use the TYPE field to select the type of event to assign. If the type is other than
SCENE, use the DESTINATION field to select the rack number into which you want
to recall the item. Use the LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY NAME field to select the
scene or library number that will be recalled.
Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the
MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window.
NOTE
• You can also select the desired event, scene, or library in this field by pressing it.
• If you press an item in the field to highlight it, you will be able to rotate any of the multifunction
knobs to select the event, scene, or library.
10. Assign events to other program numbers in the same way.
With these settings, executing the specified event on the CL series console will cause the
corresponding Program Change (or Bank Select and Program Change) messages to be
transmitted to an external device.
When an external device transmits Program Change (or Bank Select and Program Change)
messages on the appropriate channel, the event assigned to that program number of the
corresponding MIDI channel (or bank number) will be executed.
NOTE
• You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to program numbers. The
INITIALIZE ALL button will return all program number assignments to their default state.
• Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than
for individual scenes.
• In Single mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one program number on a Tx channel,
only the lowest program number will be transmitted. (If the BANK button is on, only the program
number of the lowest bank number will be transmitted.)
• In Multi mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one MIDI channel and more than one
program number, only the lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
NO ASSIGN No assignment
SCENE Scene memory recall operations
EFFECT Effect library recall operations
PREMIUM RACK Premium Rack library recall operations
1 2 3
MIDI
Reference Manual
155
Using Control Changes to control parameters
You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events (fader/knob operations, [ON]
key on/off operations etc.) on the CL series console. This capability can be used to record fader and key
operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later.
You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways.
■ Using Control Changes
This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119). You can freely
assign an event to each control number.
■ Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)
This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN.
NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB
(Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted Control Change
messages of Control Change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of that parameter.
The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be changed.
NOTE
For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the Appendices (see page 250).
1. Connect the CL series console to an external device.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI
popup window.
4. Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page, then select the port and
MIDI channel on which Control Changes will be transmitted and received, as
described in “Basic MIDI settings” on page 149.
5. Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab to access the CONTROL CHANGE page.
On the CONTROL CHANGE page, you can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and
received, and specify the event (fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned
to each control number. This page includes the following items.
1 CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify whether
Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE field
on the MIDI SETUP page.
2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. This setting is linked
with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
3 List
Shows the event (fader/knob pattern, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control
number.
• NO. .................. Indicates the Control number. You can use Control numbers 1–31, 33–95, and
102–119.
• CONTROL CHANGE EVENT
................... Indicates and enables you to select the type of event assigned to each control
number. When you press an event, the MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup
window will appear, allowing you to change the control number assignment.
4 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all event assignments on the list.
5 INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
6 Scroll knob
Scrolls the contents of the list. You can use a multifunction knob to operate this.
1
6
4
5
2
3
MIDI
Reference Manual
156
6. Use the buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field to select the Control
Change transmission/reception mode.
You can choose one of the following two modes for Control Change transmission/reception.
• NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on):
Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single
MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments on the list will be
ignored.
• TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on):
Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single
MIDI channel as Control Change messages.
NOTE
The channel on which Control Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT/
CH field on the MIDI SETUP page (see page 150).
7. Use the buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception
on or off, and make settings for echo output.
Each button has the following function.
• Tx button....................Switches Control Change transmission on or off.
• Rx button....................Switches Control Change reception on or off.
• ECHO button ............Selects whether incoming Control Changes will be echoed out from the
MIDI transmit port.
8. To change the event assignment for each control number, press the corresponding
event.
The MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window will appear. In this window you can specify the
event assigned to each control number. The window contains the following items.
1 MODE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
2 PARAMETER 1/2 field
In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of event.
NOTE
• The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does
not exist on that model.
• If NRPN mode is selected as the Control Change transmission/reception mode, the settings in
this window are ignored.
• For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes, refer to the Appendices
(see page 248).
9. In the order of the MODE field ➔ PARAMETER1 field ➔ PARAMETER2 field, specify
the type of event you want to assign.
Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window.
NOTE
• You can also press the desired event in the field to select it.
• If you press an item in the field to highlight it, you will be able to rotate one of the multifunction
knobs to select an event.
10. Assign events to other control numbers in the same way.
When you operate the parameters you assigned on the CL series console, Control Change
messages will be transmitted to external devices. Similarly, if the corresponding Control Change
messages are received from an external device on the appropriate channel, the parameters
assigned to those control numbers will change.
NOTE
• You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to control numbers. The INITIALIZE
ALL button will return all control number assignments to their default state.
• Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for
individual scenes.
1
2
MIDI
Reference Manual
157
Using Parameter Changes to control parameters
On the CL series console, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called “Parameter Changes”
to control specific events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations, system and user settings,
etc.) as an alternative to using Control Changes or NRPN messages.
For details on the Parameter Changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to “MIDI data format”
in the Appendices.
1. Connect the CL series console to an external device.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI
popup window.
4. Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page, and select the port and
MIDI channel on which Parameter Changes will be transmitted and received, as
described in “Basic MIDI settings” on page 149.
NOTE
• Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device.
The transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used
as the device number.
• Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does
not match the device number of the receiving CL console, the message will be ignored.
• Do not turn Parameter Change and Control Change transmission/reception on at the same time.
Otherwise, a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other
problems.
5. Use the Tx button and Rx button in the PARAMETER CHANGE field to turn on
Parameter Change transmission/reception.
In this state when you operate specific parameters on the CL console, the corresponding
Parameter Change messages will be transmitted. If valid Parameter Change messages are received
from an external device, the parameters assigned to those Parameter Changes will be controlled.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
158
User settings (Security)
This chapter explains the following settings and operations: the User Level settings that restrict access
to the parameters by certain users, the Console Lock function that temporarily denies access to the
console, the Preference settings that customize the operating environment, and Save/Load operations
using a USB flash drive.
User Level settings
User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that can be operated by each user, or to change
the settings of USER DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user. Settings for each user can be
stored as a “user authentication key” inside the console or together on a USB flash drive, allowing users
to be switched easily. This can be convenient in the following situations.
• Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented.
• The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited.
• In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can be
locked to prevent unintended operations.
• Preferences of each operator can easily be switched.
User types and user authentication keys
There are three types of user, as follows. To operate the CL series console, you must log-in as a user.
• Administrator ...........The administrator of the CL console can use all of its functionality. Only
one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the console.
The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users.
Even if the console was locked by another user, the administrator can use
the administrator password to unlock it.
• Guest ...........................A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the
console.
• User..............................A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive
as user authentication keys. Multiple sets of user settings (up to ten in
internal memory) can be saved, each with the desired user name. A User
who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys
with a specified user level.
When a user logs in, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following
information.
Privileges for each user are as follows.
Setting the Administrator password
With the factory settings, the Administrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log in with
Administrator privileges and perform all operations. If you want to restrict the operations of other
users, you must specify an Administrator password.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
• Password (except for Guest)
• User Level settings (except for Administrator)
•Preferences
•USER DEFINED keys
•USER DEFINED knobs
• Assignable encoders
•Custom fader bank
•MASTER fader
Logged-in user
Editing user setup
data, such as USER
DEFINED keys and
Preferences
Editing User
Level settings
Password
setting
Editing
comments
User authentication
key
Create
new
Overwrite-
save
Administrator
Available
(Can edit the
settings for
Administrator
and for Guest.)
Available
(Cannot edit the user
level, since the adminis-
trator can always perform
all operations. Can edit
the settings for Guest.)
Available —
Available
—
User
Power user Available Available Available
Available Available
Available
Normal user
(User without
Power User
privileges)
Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
Available
Available
—
Available
(Excluding User
Level settings)
Guest Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
—
Available
——
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
159
2. Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a password.
3. Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in
the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button.
The password can be up to eight characters. If the two passwords that were entered match, the
Administrator password will be set.
For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual.
Creating a user authentication key
You can create a user authentication key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the console’s internal
memory. A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power User. The user
level is specified when the authentication key is created, but USER SETUP settings other than the user
level (such as preferences and the USER DEFINED keys) will be carried over from the user who is
currently logged-in.
1. To create a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive
to the USB connector.
If you want to save the user authentication key in internal memory, simply proceed to step 2.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. Press the CREATE USER KEY button.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
160
The CREATE USER KEY popup window will appear.
1 USER NAME
Indicates the user name of up to eight characters. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in
which you can enter the user name.
2 COMMENT
Enables you to specify and view a comment of up to 32 characters about the user. Press this area
to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter the comment.
3 PASSWORD
Enables you to specify a password of up to eight characters. Press this area to access a keyboard
window, in which you can enter the password.
4 POWER USER
Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user.
5 ACCESS PERMISSION
These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform. For details on each item,
refer to page 166.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4. When you have specified the user name, comment, password, power user
privileges on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE button.
The CREATE KEY popup window will appear.
5. If you want to create a user authentication key in the console’s internal memory,
press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field.
You can store ten keys in the console’s internal memory.
6. If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive, press the
button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field.
NOTE
The file name of the user authentication key will be the current user name, and it will be created
and saved in the root directory.
7. Press the CREATE TO button.
The user authentication key will be created in the location specified in step 5 or step 6.
1
2 3 4
5
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
161
Logging-in
To operate the CL series console, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User.
User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself. However, to log in as a User
you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself, or connect the USB flash drive in which
a user authentication key has been saved. If you use a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, you
will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after logging-in.
NOTE
If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state
in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter
the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest.
■ Logging-in as Administrator
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN popup window.
3. Press the ADMINISTRATOR button, and then press the LOGIN button.
If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been
set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
4. Enter the password and press the OK button.
If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the
screen.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
162
■ Logging-in as Guest
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN window.
3. Press the GUEST button, and then press the LOGIN button.
■ Logging-in as a User
To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB flash drive.
If using a USB flash drive, you may also log-in using a user authentication key created on a different CL
series console.
With a user authentication key stored in the console
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN window.
3. In the LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE field, choose the user authentication key
with which you want to log in, and press the LOAD button.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
163
If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard
window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
4. Enter the password and press the OK button.
If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the
screen.
With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN window.
4. In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field, click the (LOAD .CLU FILE) popup button.
The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the files and directories saved on the USB flash
drive will be displayed. The user authentication key file has a “.CLU” file name extension.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
164
5. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the user authentication key for the user as
whom you want to log in.
For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “Loading a file from the USB flash
drive” on page 178.
6. Press the LOAD button.
If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard
window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
NOTE
• If you have selected a user authentication key that was created on a different CL series console,
a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the CL series
console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not
appear.) When you enter the correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will
appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected user.
• If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be asked for the Administrator password
the next time.
For details on re-saving the user authentication key, refer to “Editing a user authentication key”
on page 165.
7. Enter the password and press the OK button.
If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the
screen.
Changing the password
Follow the steps below to change the password of the logged-in user. A change in the Administrator
password is updated immediately. A change in a User password is also updated immediately, but will be
discarded if the user simply logs out after changing it. The change must be saved by overwriting the old
authentication key before the user logs-out. The Guest account does not have a password.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a password.
3. Enter the current password and press the OK button.
When you enter the correct password, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the
new password.
4. Enter the new password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same
password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the
OK button.
If the two passwords that were entered match, the new password will be set.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
165
Editing a user authentication key
If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your preference settings, USER DEFINED keys, USER
DEFINED knobs, assignable encoders, custom fader banks, master fader, comments, and password,
and save (overwrite) them onto your user authentication key. If you are logged-in as a Power User, you
can also change the user level.
1. Log-in as a user, and edit the Preference settings (page 168), USER DEFINED keys
(page 169), USER DEFINED knobs (page 171), assignable encoders (page 172),
custom fader bank (page 173), and master fader (page 174) settings.
If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. Press the SAVE KEY button.
The SAVE KEY popup window will appear.
4. Press the save-destination button, and then press the SAVE TO button.
5. A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you want to overwrite that user
authentication key; press OK button.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
166
Changing the user level
You can view or change the user level.
• Administrator ...........The Administrator does not have a user level setting, but can change the
user level setting of the Guest account.
• Guest ...........................The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest account, but
cannot change it.
• Normal user...............A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her User account,
but cannot change it.
• Power User .................A power user can view and change his or her User account.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
3. Press the USER LEVEL tab to access the USER LEVEL page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can switch to the USER LEVEL for GUEST page,
and view or change the user level of the Guest account.
This page includes the following items.
1 CH OPERATION
Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input channels,
output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the currently selected channel.
Settings for currently-selected channels will be displayed below the CH OPERATION section.
Use the panel [SEL] keys or the Selected Channel field in the Function Access Area to select the
channel for which you want to make settings.
The type of buttons shown will depend on the selected channel or group.
INPUT channel.............................. [HA], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
MIX/MATRIX channel ................[WITH SEND], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
STEREO/MONO channel............ [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
DCA group.....................................[DCA MASTER], [DCA GROUP ASSIGN]
3
4
1
8
2
6
7
5
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
167
• HA................................................ Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that
channel.
• PROCESSING ........................... Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that
channel (excluding the fader, channel on/off, and send level).
• FADER/ON ................................ Restricts operation of that channel’s fader, channel on/off, and
send level.
• WITH SEND ............................. Restricts operation of that channel’s send parameters. (From
MIX, From MATRIX)
• DCA MASTER .......................... Restricts operation of that channel’s DCA group fader, ON/
OFF, and ICON/COLOR/NAME.
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN............ Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group.
• SET BY SEL................................ If this button is on, you can press the panel [SEL] key of a
channel to enable or disable the operating restrictions for that
channel.
2 CURRENT SCENE
Specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory.
• INPUT PATCH/INPUT NAME.................. Restricts operations for input channel patching
and names.
• OUTPUT PATCH/OUTPUT NAME......... Restricts operations for output channel patching
and names.
• BUS SETUP................................ Restricts operations for bus setup.
• GEQ RACK/EFFECT RACK/PREMIUM RACK
........................................ Restricts operations for the racks. Press this area to open the
RACK USER LEVEL popup window, in which you can set this
restriction. However, there will be no restriction on operating
the MIDI CLK button displayed for delay-type and
modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC button displayed
for the FREEZE effect.
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP MASTER
........................................ Restricts operations for mute group assignment and mute
group master.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3 SCENE LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories.
•STORE/SORT operations
•RECALL operations
4 LIBRARY LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries.
• STORE/CLEAR operations
•RECALL operations
5 FILE LOAD
Specifies the settings that will be applied when a file is loaded from a USB flash drive. The user
authentication key contains settings such as the user level, preferences, and the USER DEFINED
key settings (USER SETUP settings). Other data is saved in an “ALL” file. The “ALL” file also
includes the USER SETUP settings of the Administrator and the Guest.
• USER SETUP (Preference and USER DEFINED keys settings)
• SYSTEM SETUP/MONITOR SETUP
• CURRENT SCENE
•SCENE LIST
•LIBRARY LIST
6 MONITOR SETUP
Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed.
•OSCILLATOR
•TALKBACK
7 SYSTEM SETUP
Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed.
• MIXER SETUP
•OUTPUT PORT
• MIDI/GPI
8 SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button
Permits/clears all items.
4. Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted.
5. When you have finished making settings, close the popup window and press the
SETUP button in the Function Access Area.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
168
Preferences
Follow the steps below to make various settings for the CL console operating environment, such as how
popup windows appear, and whether [SEL] key operations will be linked. These settings are changed
for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you will also be able to
change the Guest settings.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the SETUP button to open the USER SETUP popup window.
3. Press the PREFERENCE tab to access the PREFERENCE page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the
lower right of the screen to access the PREFERENCE for Guest page and make preference settings
for the Guest account.
This page includes the following items.
1 STORE/RECALL field
Enables you to turn on or off options related to scene store/recall operations.
• STORE CONFIRMATION
• RECALL CONFIRMATION
If these ON buttons are lit, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a Store or Recall
operation respectively.
2 PATCH field
Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations.
• PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output
patch.
• STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or output patch
item that is already patched to a port.
3 LOCALE SETUP field
In the SAVE/LOAD screen or RECORDER screen, select JA if you want Japanese to be displayed.
(This does not select the Help language.)
4 ERROR MESSAGE field
Specifies whether error messages will be displayed.
• DIGITAL I/O ERROR
If this ON button is lit, an error message will appear when a digital I/O error occurs.
• MIDI I/O ERROR
If this is on, an error message will appear when a MIDI transmit/receive error occurs.
5 PANEL OPERATION field
Enables you to make settings for options related to panel operation.
• AUTO CHANNEL SELECT
Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the [ON] key or
fader for the channel. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels) and
OUTPUT (output channels).
• [CUE] [SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If the LINK button is on,
channels for which cue operations were performed will be selected.
•[FADER BANK] [SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader bank selection. You can set this
parameter separately for INPUT (input channels), OUTPUT (output channels), and CUSTOM
(Custom fader bank).
If the LINK button is on, and you select the corresponding fader bank, the channel in that bank
that was selected most recently will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light.
• IDENTIFY I/O DEVICE PORT BY [SEL]
Specifies whether to enable a function that allows you to identify the I/O device port connected
to a channel by pressing the [SEL] key for that channel.
If this ON button is lit, pressing a [SEL] key on the panel will cause the signal indicator to flash
for the port of the I/O device that is assigned to the corresponding channel by the INPUT
PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH settings.
1
2
3
4
5
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
169
• POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED
Specifies whether pressing a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section while the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed will cause a popup window (1ch) to appear. If the ON
button is lit, a popup window (1ch) will open (or close) whenever you press a knob.
NOTE
If you press the SEND or PAN knob, a popup window (8ch) will open.
• GAIN KNOB FUNCTION
Specifies what will happen when you operate the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section on the panel. When the ANALOG GAIN button is lit, you can adjust analog gain on the
head amp. When the DIGITAL GAIN button is lit, you can adjust digital gain on the console.
• SCENE UP/DOWN
Specifies what the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys will do when pressed in the SCENE
popup windows.
When the SCENE +1/–1 button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will increment or
decrement the scene number.
When the LIST UP/DOWN button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will scroll the list
upward or downward.
•LIST ORDER
Specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear on the list.
When the NORMAL button is lit, the list appears in ascending numerical order. When the
REVERSE button is lit, the list appears in descending numerical order.
•NAME DISPLAY
Specifies the content of the channel name display on the top panel.
When the NAME ONLY button is lit, only the channel name appears. When the FULL
FUNCTION button is lit, the channel name display also indicates knob assignment information
and fader level.
4. Use the buttons on screen to make Preference settings.
5. When you have finished making settings, close the popup window and press the
SETUP button in the Function Access Area.
USER DEFINED keys
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the USER
DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel, and press these keys to execute the defined function.
This assignment procedure will define the USER DEFINED keys for the user who is currently logged-
in, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make USER DEFINED key settings for
the Guest account.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the
lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KEYS for Guest page and make USER
DEFINED key settings for the Guest account.
The sixteen buttons on screen corresponds to USER DEFINED keys [1]–[16] on the top panel.
The name of function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding
on-screen button. If nothing is assigned to the key, an indication of “---” will appear next to the
button.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
170
4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to
assign a function.
The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window will appear. In this window, you can select a function
to assign to the USER DEFINED key, and select the parameters.
NOTE
The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does
not exist on that model.
5. Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame, then use the /
buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel
to select the function you want to assign.
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be
assigned to USER DEFINED keys” on page 259.
6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move
the frame, and select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window.
8. Assign the desired functions to other USER DEFINED keys in the same way.
9. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[16]
key on the panel.
Using the Alternate function
If you assign the Alternate function (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, you will be
able to switch parameters on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section while
pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key.
The console enters Alternate mode when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key to which
the Alternate function has been assigned (the key will light).
The Alternate function features two options: LATCH and UNLATCH.
If you select UNLATCH, Alternate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and holding down
the USER DEFINED key. If you select LATCH, you will be able to turn Alternate mode on or off by the
key presses. You do not need to hold down the key.
NOTE
• The console exits Alternate mode when you switch the display between the OVERVIEW screen
and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or when you open a popup window.
• In Alternate mode, “ALT” will be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area.
In Alternate mode, the following knobs change their behavior.
• [GAIN] knob
Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value. If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for HA
KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP popup window, rotate this
knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp.
• [MIX/MATRIX] knob
Rotate this knob to switch between PRE and POST for the corresponding send signal.
Press this knob to switch the corresponding send signal on or off.
•[HPF] knob
Press this knob to switch the high pass filter on or off.
•[DYNAMICS 1] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off.
•[DYNAMICS 2] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off.
NOTE
In Alternate mode, all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs
mentioned above will be disabled.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
171
USER DEFINED knobs
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the USER
DEFINED KNOBS section on the top panel, and press these knobs to execute the defined function.
This assignment procedure will define the USER DEFINED knobs for the user who is currently logged-
in, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make USER DEFINED knob settings for
the Guest account.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
3. Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab to select the USER DEFINED KNOBS page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the
lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS for Guest page and make USER
DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account.
The four on-screen buttons correspond to USER DEFINED knobs [1]–[4] on the top panel. The
name of function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding on-
screen button. If nothing is assigned to the knob, an indication of “---” will appear next to the
button.
4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to
assign a function.
The USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window will appear. In this window you can select a
function to assign to the USER DEFINED knob, and select the parameters.
NOTE
The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does
not exist on that model.
5. Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame, then use the /
buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel
to select the function you want to assign.
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be
assigned to USER DEFINED knobs” on page 262.
6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move
the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window.
8. Assign the desired functions to other USER DEFINED knobs in the same way.
9. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[4]
knob on the panel.
About TOUCH AND TURN
The TOUCH AND TURN function is assigned to the USER DEFINED [4] knob by
default. If this function is assigned to one of the USER DEFINED knobs, you can
press a desired knob on the touch screen and then use the USER DEFINED knob to
immediately operate that on-screen knob.
At this time, a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch screen, indicating
that you can operate that knob.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
172
Assignable encoders
You can assign the desired function to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the fader strip of each channel,
and control the function using the knob.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
3. Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab to select the USER DEFINED KNOBS page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the
lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER
for Guest page, and make assignable knob settings for the Guest account.
4. Press the button in the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER field.
The ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP popup window will appear.
5. Use the / buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on
the top panel to select the function you want to assign.
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be
assigned to the assignable encoders” on page 263.
NOTE
SELECTED SEND is the default setting. It functions as the send to the MIX/MATRIX channel that
is selected for SENDS ON FADER in the Function Access Area.
6. Press the OK button to close the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window.
7. Press the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key on the top panel repeatedly
to select ASSIGN.
The CL3 and CL1 feature one [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key. Therefore, the
function of all GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knobs will change simultaneously.
On the CL5, you can switch the knob function in block A (left side) and
block C/Master fader section (right side) independently by using the
corresponding [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys.
NOTE
This assignment does not apply to the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section, since these
knobs are used to control on-screen parameters.
8. Operate the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on each fader strip.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
173
Custom fader bank
Groups that organize channels routed to the top-panel faders are called “fader banks.”
There are input and output channel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader banks enable
you to select various combinations of channels, regardless of channel types. This section explains how
to set up a custom fader bank.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
3. Press the CUSTOM FADER tab to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER
page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the
lower right of the screen to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page,
and make custom fader bank settings for the Guest account.
This page includes the following items.
1 CUSTOM FADER BANK field
•Bank select buttons
Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of channels.
The number and name of the custom fader banks vary depending on the console model.
CL5: A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
CL3: A1, A2, A3, B1, B2
CL1: A1, B1, B2, B3, B4
2 MASTER FADER field
•MASTER button
Press this button to set channels that will be controlled by the faders in the Master fader section.
3 Block indicators
Display the graphics of the block and faders that are the current target for editing.
The graphics vary depending on the console model.
CL5: A (16 faders), B, C, MASTER
CL3: A (16 faders), B, MASTER
CL1: A (8 faders), B, MASTER
4 Fader select button
Selects the target fader. Press this button to select it, then press the [SEL] keys on the top panel to
add the corresponding channels to the selected fader bank.
5 Channel select popup button
Opens the channel select popup window, in which you can change the channel specified for
CHANNEL ASSIGN.
6 CLEAR ALL button
Clears the current fader bank assignment. Pressing this button will open a confirmation dialog
box. Press OK to clear the assignment. Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen
without changing the setting.
4. Use the Bank Select keys to recall the fader settings to the top panel for the
channels you want to add to the custom fader bank.
5. Press the bank select button for the custom fader bank you
want to set up.
6. In the CHANNEL ASSIGN field, press the number button for
the fader you want to set up.
7. On the top panel, press the [SEL] key of the channel that you
want to assign to that fader number.
The name of the selected channel will appear on the channel select
popup button.
1
2
6
4
3
5
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
174
8. To assign channels to other faders, repeat steps 4 through 7.
9. If necessary, select channels by pressing the channel select popup buttons.
Use the list in the left column to select the desired channel group, then use the buttons in the right
column to select channels.
When you have finished selecting the channels, press the CLOSE button.
Master fader
You can set channels that will be controlled by the two faders in the Master fader section.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window.
3. Press the CUSTOM FADER tab to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER
page.
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the
lower right of the screen to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page,
and make master fader settings for the Guest account.
4. Press the MASTER button.
The CHANNEL ASSIGN field shows the channel assignments of the master section.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
175
5. Press the channel select popup button of the fader (A or B) that you want to edit,
and choose the channel.
Use the list in the left column to select the desired channel group, then use the buttons in the right
column to select channels. When you have finished selecting the channels, press the CLOSE
button.
Console Lock
You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting
completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen, so that controllers cannot be operated by
an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break.
If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console Lock
function.
NOTE
• If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the unit to the factory default settings” in
the separate Owner’s Manual.
• The Guest cannot set a password.
• Even while the console is locked, you can operate the console from an external device via MIDI
or CL Editor as usual.
Locking the console
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the CONSOLE LOCK button.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
176
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing
you to enter the password.
3. Enter the password for the logged-in user, and press the OK button.
The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear, the Console Lock function will be enabled, and all
controllers (excluding the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will become inoperable.
Unlocking the console
1. Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing
you to enter the password.
2. Enter the password for the logged-in user or for the Administrator, and press the
OK button.
The console will be unlocked, you will return to the SETUP screen, and the controllers will be
operable once again.
Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image
If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive, you can view that image on the CONSOLE LOCK
screen.
In the SAVE/LOAD popup window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it
from the USB flash drive. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “Loading a
file from the USB flash drive” on page 178.
NOTE
Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16/24/32-bit, but they will be
converted into 16-bit for display.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
177
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB
flash drive
This section explains how to connect a commercially-available USB flash drive to the USB connector
located to the right of the display, and save the internal settings and user authentication keys of the CL
series console to the USB flash drive or load them from the USB flash drive.
NOTE
• Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash drives.
• The operation of USB flash drives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified. (However, this
does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB flash drives.) The FAT16 and FAT32
formats are supported. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in
FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
NOTICE
An ACCESS indicator appears in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed (saved,
loaded, or deleted). During this time, do not disconnect the USB plug or power-off the CL unit.
Doing so may damage the data in the flash drive.
Saving the CL console’s internal data on a USB flash drive
All of the CL series console’s internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file. The saved
file will have an extension of “.CLF”.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3. If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory.
To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field.
4. Press the SAVE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a file name and comment.
5. Enter a file name or comment, and press the SAVE button.
When the file has been saved, the PROCESSING popup window that shows the progress of the
writing operation will close.
NOTE
• If you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder, a dialog
will ask you to confirm the overwrite.
• You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.
• You may enter a file name of more than eight characters. However, the drive name, path name,
and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters. If you exceed this limit, you will be unable
to save the file. If an error message appears at the bottom of the screen, shorten the file name
and try saving the file again.
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
178
Loading a file from the USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to load CL settings file (extension .CLF) from the USB flash drive into the CL
series console.
You can use the same procedure to load the following files as well as setting files.
NOTICE
Some data may contain settings that will cause the console to output signals immediately after
the data is loaded. Therefore, before loading data, turn off the power to the equipment connected
to the CL series console and/or lower the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a
problem even if a signal is output from the CL console.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3. To select the file that you want to load, press the name of the desired file in the file
list, or rotate the corresponding multifunction knob on the panel.
The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations.
4. If you want the DANTE SETUP and I/O device-related settings saved in the CL
settings file (file name extension .CLF) to be applied to the CL console, press the
WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button to turn it on.
5. Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear.
6. Press the OK button to begin loading the file.
When the file has finished loading, the PROCESSING popup window that shows the progress of
the loading operation will close. If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress, data up to the
cancellation point will still be loaded.
Some setting data may not be loaded, depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load
operation.
Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive
This section explains how to perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories on the
USB flash drive, editing the file names or comments, copying, and pasting.
■ File editing
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
The list will show the files and sub-directories that have been saved.
1 COPY button
Copies a file into buffer memory (a temporary holding area).
2 PASTE button
Pastes the file from buffer memory.
3 DELETE button
Deletes the selected file or directory.
NOTE
A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty. The message “Directory Not Empty!” will appear.
Extension Type Contents of file
.CLF ALL CL console internal setting file
.CLU KEY CL console user authentication key
.XML XML XML file for displaying Help
.TXT TEXT Text file for displaying Help
.BMP BMP
Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen (256 or more
colors, uncompressed bitmap format)
1 2 3 45 6
7
8 9 0 A BC
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
179
4 MAKE DIR button
Creates a new directory.
5 PATH
Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next higher
level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed.
6 VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE
Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive.
If the USB flash drive is write-protected, a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME
field.
7 File list
This area lists the files that are saved on the USB flash drive.
The highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations.
The file list contains the following items. When you press the item name at the top of each column,
it will turn orange, and the list will be sorted by that item. Each time you press the item name, the
sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order.
• FILE NAME ...............Indicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon indicating
its type.
• COMMENT ...............The comment added to the CL console setting file is displayed here.
• READ ONLY..............A lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding file is
protected. You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting.
• TYPE...........................ALL indicates a file containing CL internal settings, KEY indicates a user
authentication key, XML indicates a Help file, BMP indicates a bitmap
image file, MP3 indicates an MP3 file, and [DIR] indicates a directory.
• TIME STAMP............Indicates the date and time at which the file was modified most recently.
8 File selection knob
Selects a file on the file list. You can operate this knob using the multifunction knob.
9 SAVE button
Saves all of the CL console internal settings together (see page 177).
0 LOAD button
Loads the selected CL setting file (see page 178).
A CREATE USER KEY button
Creates a user authentication key (see page 158).
B FORMAT button
Initializes the USB flash drive (see page 180).
C WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button
If this is off, the DANTE SETUP and I/O device settings will be omitted when a settings file is
loaded.
NOTE
The DANTE SETUP settings SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even
if the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is on.
3. Perform the desired editing operation.
For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations that follow.
■ Sorting files and editing file names/comments
1. To sort the files, press one of the headings “FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ
ONLY,” “TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of each column on the file list.
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.
1 FILE NAME
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the file names.
2 COMMENT
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the comment.
3 READ ONLY
Sort the list by Write Protect on/off status.
4 TYPE
Sort the list by file type.
5 TIME STAMP
Sort the list by date and time of update.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the direction (ascending order or
descending order) in which the list is sorted.
2. If you want to edit the file name or comment, press the FILE NAME field or
COMMENT field of each file to access the keyboard window.
3. Enter a file name or comment, and press the RENAME button or SET button.
4. To turn the protect setting on or off, press the READ ONLY field for the file.
A protect symbol is displayed for write-protected files. These files cannot be overwritten.
NOTE
You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write-protected file.
1 2 3 4 5
User settings (Security)
Reference Manual
180
■ Copying and pasting a file
Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a different file
name.
1. Turn the multifunction knob to select the copy-source file, and press the COPY
button.
The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations.
2. If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory.
To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field.
3. Press the PASTE button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the file name.
4. Enter the file name, and press the PASTE button.
NOTE
You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file.
■ Deleting a file
1. Rotate the multifunction knob to select a file to delete, then press the DELETE
button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Delete operation.
2. To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button.
NOTE
You cannot delete a protected file.
■ Creating a directory
1. If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory.
To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field.
2. Press the MAKE DIR button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a directory name.
3. Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button.
NOTE
You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists.
Formatting a USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to format a USB flash drive.
A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash drive
with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
3. Press the FORMAT button.
A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the volume name that will be applied after
formatting.
4. Enter a volume name, and press the FORMAT button.
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Format operation.
5. To execute the Format operation, press the OK button.
Recorder
Reference Manual
181
Recorder
This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder.
About the USB memory recorder
The CL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal
signals to a USB flash drive, or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash drive.
As the file format for recording, the CL series console supports MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3). For
playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC) files.
However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported.
By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be recorded to
a USB flash drive, or background music or sound effects saved on a USB flash drive can be played back
via an assigned input channel.
■ Signal flow for the USB memory recorder
* CL3: INPUT1-64, CL1: INPUT1-48
NOTE
• Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.
• The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel.
Assigning channels to the input and output of the
recorder
Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory
recorder. You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the
recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER
screen.
2. Press the USB tab in the upper right of the screen.
On this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder, and
perform recording and playback operations.
1 RECORDER INPUT popup buttons (L/R)
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the signals
patched to the recorder’s L/R input channels.
2 RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder.
3 RECORDER INPUT CUE button
Press this button to audition the signal input to the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously.
MIX1-24
MATRIX1-8
STEREO L/R
MONO
INPUT1-72*
DIRECT OUT
RECORDER
INPUT
PLAYBACK
OUT
INPUT1-72*
ST IN 1L1R-8L8R
L
R
L
R
USB memory
recorder
1 2 3 4 8765
Recorder
Reference Manual
182
4 RECORDER INPUT meters
Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder.
5 PLAYBACK OUT popup buttons (L/R)
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the signals
patched to the recorder’s L/R output channels for playback.
6 PLAYBACK OUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the recorder playback output signal.
7 PLAYBACK OUT CUE button
Press this button to audition the signal output from the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously.
8 PLAYBACK OUT meters
Indicates the level of the recorder playback output signal.
3. To assign channels to the recorder inputs, press the RECORDER INPUT popup
button L or R.
The CH SELECT popup window will appear.
1 Category list
Enables you to select the type of channels.
2 Channel select buttons
Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s inputs.
• MIX 1–24....................MIX channels 1–24
• MTRX 1–8..................MATRIX channels 1–8
• ST L/R .........................STEREO channel L/R
• ST L+C ....................... STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C) channel
• ST R+C....................... STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO (C) channel
• MONO........................ MONO channel
• CH1–72 ...................... Direct output of an INPUT channel 1–72
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4. Use the category list and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you
want to patch to the USB memory recorder output.
If you select a channel to which a channel is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm
the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
5. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the RECORDER screen.
6. Assign a channel to the other input in the same way.
NOTE
The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in
monaural, with the same signal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to
the same channel.
7. To assign channels to the recorder playback outputs, press the PLAYBACK OUT
popup button L or R.
The CH SELECT popup window will appear.
1 Category List
Enables you to select the type of channels.
2
1
2
1
Recorder
Reference Manual
183
2 Channel select buttons
Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s playback outputs, from the
following choices.
• CH1–72....................................... INPUT channels 1–72
• STIN 1L/1R–STIN 8L/8R........ ST IN channels 1–8 L/R
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
8. Use the category list and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you
want to patch to the USB memory recorder output.
If you select a channel to which another signal is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to
confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
NOTE
The recorder playback output can be patched to multiple channels.
9. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
You will return to the RECORDER screen.
10. Assign a channel to the other output in the same way.
Recording audio to a USB flash drive
You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB flash drive
inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER
screen.
2. Press the USB tab in the upper right of the screen.
■ TRANSPORT field
This field enables you to control recording and playback of a song.
1 Current song
Indicates the currently-selected song’s track number, title and artist name. The following
indicators will appear during playback or recording.
2 Elapsed time display
Indicates the elapsed playback time of the current song during playback, and the elapsed
recording time during recording.
1
2
3 4A0987 5 6
C
B
Playing Recording
Recorder
Reference Manual
184
3 Remaining time display
Indicates the remaining playback time of the current song during playback.
4 Current song format
Indicates the file format and bit rate of the current song (the file being played back).
5 REC RATE button
Switches the recording rate.
6 Display switch button
Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT and PLAYBACK OUT fields at
the bottom of the song list.
7 REW button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song. If the playback point has already
been located at the beginning, the point will move to the beginning of the preceding song that has
been checked for playback.
When the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song, holding down this button
for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the
button was released.
8 STOP button
The recorder will change from play/record/recording-standby mode to stop mode.
9 PLAY/PAUSE button
Changes the recorder mode as follows:
Stop mode → Playback mode, then starts playback from the beginning of the current song
Playback mode → Playback pause mode
Playback pause mode → Playback mode, then starts playback from the paused point.
Recording standby mode → Recording mode
Recording mode → Recording-pause mode
Recording pause mode → Recording mode, then starts recording from the paused point.
0 FF button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the next song that is marked with a PLAY check symbol.
If you hold down this button for two seconds or longer, fast-forward will occur.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the
button was released.
A REC button
Places the recorder in recording standby mode.
The pause indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button will light.
NOTE
You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key (see page 169).
■ PLAY MODE field
This field enables you to specify how the recorder will behave when playback of the current song is
complete.
B SINGLE button
If this button is on, only the current song will play.
If this button is off, when the current song finishes playing, the recorder will play the next song in
the list that is marked with a PLAY check symbol.
C REPEAT button
If this button is on, playback will repeat. If the SINGLE button is on, only the current song will
play repeatedly. If the SINGLE button is off, all songs in the list that are marked with a PLAY check
symbol will repeatedly play in the order of the list.
If this is off, the song will play only once. If the SINGLE button is on, the current song will play
only once, and then stop. If the SINGLE button is off, all songs in the list that are marked with a
PLAY check symbol will play once in the order of the list, and then playback will stop.
3. Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector.
The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity. When you connect a USB flash drive
to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created
automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the
currently-selected folder below that level.
■ Directory structure of a USB flash drive
4. Assign the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder
(see page 181).
Song (audio file)
Songs folder
YPE folder
Root directory
Recorder
Reference Manual
185
5. To monitor the signal being recorded, raise the fader for the channel(s) that are
patched to the input of the recorder.
The level of the input signal to the recorder is shown by the RECORDER INPUT field’s level meter
in the RECORDER screen. If necessary, use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to
adjust the input level to the recorder.
NOTE
• The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT).
• Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the
corresponding output channel.
6. Press the REC RATE field in the lower right of the screen, then select the bit rate
for the audio file that will be recorded.
You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality,
but will increase the size of the data.
NOTE
The word clock rate at which the CL series console is currently operating will automatically be
selected as the sampling rate for the audio file.
7. Press the REC (●) button.
The REC (●) button and the PAUSE ( ) indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button will light.
The current song indicator area will show “----RECORDING----.”
8. To start recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button.
During recording, the REC (●) button and the PLAY ( ) indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE ( )
button will light. You can also see the elapsed recording time.
9. To stop recording, press the STOP (■) button.
The audio file will be saved to the USB flash drive.
NOTE
• In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE
folder. You may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder.
• The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later.
10. To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows.
10–1. Select a recorded audio file, and press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button.
The recorded content will be played back via the input channel you specified in step 4.
You can also turn on the CUE button in the PLAYBACK OUT field to audition it.
10–2. To stop playback, press the STOP (■) button.
Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive
You can play back audio files that have been saved on your USB flash drive. In addition to files that were
recorded on the CL series console, you can also play files that were copied from your computer to the
USB flash drive.
The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA (Windows
Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The playable sampling rates are 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. The
supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps.
1. Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
NOTE
If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder,
or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of
unsupported formats will not be recognized.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER
screen.
1 Title list
This list shows the playable audio files and the folders that are saved in the selected folder of USB
flash drive. The row with the blue background in the center of the list indicates the song file/folder
that is selected for operations.
6 7 8 9
A
0
3 15
2
4
Recorder
Reference Manual
186
2 Status indicator
A symbol indicating whether the file is playing or paused is shown at the left edge of the title list.
: Playing, : Paused
3 Track number
Indicates the file number on the list.
4 Sub-directory
If there is a folder at a lower level, a folder icon is shown at the track number position. You can
move to the lower level by pressing the folder icon.
5 PLAY check symbol
Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively.
6 SELECT knob
Use the multifunction knob to switch the current song. (The title list will scroll up or down.)
7 NOW PLAYING button
If you turn this button on, the currently-playing song will always be selected in the list (it will have
a blue background).
8 MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons
Sort the current song list in descending or ascending order.
9 Display switch buttons
Switch between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display on the list.
0 SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol setting as a playlist.
A RELOAD button
Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current playlist you
are editing back to the previous setting.
3. You can use the change directory button on screen and the folder icon in the NO.
column to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file.
If the directory on the USB flash drive is displayed:
• Upper level .................Press this button to move up to the directory that is one level higher than
the current one.
• Subdirectory ..............Press this button to move to the corresponding sub-directory.
NOTE
• If you select a folder in this way, that folder will automatically be selected as the recording
destination.
• The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and
folders located below the SONGS folder.
• The CL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single-byte characters.
If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly.
• A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 subdirectories
can be managed.
4. Use the multifunction knob or press the on-screen file name to select the desired
file.
5. Press a button in the PLAY MODE to select the playback mode.
You can choose from the following four playback modes.
6. If you have selected a consecutive playback mode in step 5, press the PLAY check
symbol column for each song you want to play.
When performing consecutive playback, the files marked with a check symbol will be played.
7. Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button.
The song you selected in step 4 will begin playing.
NOTE
• The USB memory recorder can play back audio files that feature a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz or
48 kHz.
• Even if the sampling rate at which the CL series console is operating differs from the sampling
rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically
convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly.
• If the REPEAT button is on, playback will continue until you stop playback.
8. To stop playback, press the STOP (■) button.
SINGLE
button
REPEAT
button
Mode
On On The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback.
On Off The currently-selected song will play once and then stop.
Off On
Starting with the currently-selected song on the title list, songs will play
back consecutively until the last song. Then, playback will return to the
first song and will continue until you stop playback.
Off Off
Starting with the currently-selected song in the title list, songs will play
back consecutively, and playback will stop at the last song on the list.
Recorder
Reference Manual
187
Editing the title list
You can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist names.
1. Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the USB connector.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER
screen (USB tab).
1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button
Enables you to edit the title of the song selected in the list. The file name cannot be edited here.
2 ARTIST EDIT button
Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list.
3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the title or file name.
4 ARTIST SORT button
Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the artist name.
5 SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings to a USB flash drive as a
playlist.
6 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button
Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE/FILE
NAME field.
3. In the screen, you can use the folder icon in the NO. column and the change
directory button to view the contents of the folder that includes the desired file.
4. If you want to edit a title in the title list, press the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT
button. If you want to edit the artist name, press the ARTIST EDIT button.
A popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the text.
NOTE
• If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be
converted into for display.
• The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3 format audio files.
5. Edit the title or artist name.
A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-byte characters) can be input for both the
title and for the artist name. If the text cannot be shown completely in the input field, the text will
scroll horizontally.
6. Press the OK button to close the popup window.
7. If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button,
and MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list.
Use the following buttons to change the order of the title list.
• SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button
Press this button to sort the title list in numerical → alphabetical order by title/file name. Pressing
the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order.
• ARTIST SORT button
Press this button to sort the title list in numerical → alphabetical order by artist name. Pressing the
button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order.
• MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons
Press these buttons to move the track number of the file currently-selected in the title list upward
or downward by one.
•SAVE LIST button
Press this button to store the title list order and playback selections (the PLAY check symbol) to
a USB flash drive as a play list. You should perform this operation if you want the state of the title
list to be preserved even after you disconnect the USB flash drive or turn off the power to the
console.
Since these settings are stored for each folder, a confirmation dialog box will ask you whether you
want to save them when you attempt to change folders.
3 4
2
5
6
1
Recorder
Reference Manual
188
Using the CL console with Nuendo Live
The CL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinberg’s Nuendo Live DAW
software.
In addition to the equipment and software mentioned in “Recording or playing back using DAW on a
computer” on page 25, the “CL Extension” software which integrates the CL series and Nuendo Live can
be installed in your computer, allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console to easily
perform multi-track recording operations.
Here we explain how to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console.
Preparing the project
Make the following settings as described in “Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer” on
page 25.
1. Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard or Dante Accelerator
Specify the audio format, network settings, and ASIO driver settings so that Dante Virtual
Soundcard (DVS) or Dante Accelerator (DANTE-ACCEL) can be used.
2. Setting up Dante Controller
Use Dante Controller to patch between the I/O device and DVS, and between DVS and the CL
series console. Assign the signals from the I/O device to the various input ports of DVS. Patching
can also be specified from the CL series console.
NOTE
Separately, route the signals from I/O devices to the channels on the CL series console. (see
page 138)
The following example shows Dante Controller settings for patching I/O device channels 1–16 to
DVS.
In this case, the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the CL series console must be switched when
changing between multi-track recording and multi-track playback. Switching will be easy if
you’ve stored the respective settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY (see page 139).
3. Setting up Nuendo Live
When you start Nuendo Live and create a new project, a track for each channel specified for DVS
will be created automatically. In addition, the tracks will automatically use the channel names and
color information as specified on the CL series console.
Make the following settings in Nuendo Live.
•In Setup button → Audio System, select DVS or DANTE-ACCEL as the driver.
NOTE
For details on the settings of each software program, refer to the manual for that software.
Recorder
Reference Manual
189
Recording into a project
1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER
screen.
2. Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the screen.
The Nuendo Live screen will appear.
The screen shows the following items.
1 Nuendo meter display field
This shows the channel levels of Nuendo Live.
2 PEAK CLEAR button
Clears the peak levels indicated by the peak hold function.
3 Marker list field
Lists the marker information recorded in the current Nuendo Live project.
The markers can be selected by pressing the on-screen list or by using the multifunction knobs.
4 Nuendo Live SETUP button
Specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with Nuendo Live.
(see page 190)
5 DANTE INPUT PATCH button
Press this to access the DANTE INPUT PATCH screen (see page 138).
6 Location information display
This displays information for the current location of the Nuendo Live project. You can press the
button at the right to switch the time display format.
7 GO TO PROJECT START button
Returns the location to the start of the project.
8 GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button
Returns the location to the previous marker.
9 GO TO NEXT MARKER button
Advances the location to the next marker.
0 GO TO PROJECT END button
Advances the location to the end of the project.
A CYCLE button
Turns repeat on/off for the project.
B STOP button
Stops playback/recording of the project.
C PLAY button
Starts playback of the project.
D RECORD button
Starts/stops recording of the project.
E EASY RECORDING button
Immediately starts recording all tracks.
Pressing this button will reset the current location to the end point of the latest recording, place
all tracks in recording mode, start recording, and then display and lock the recording panel.
Recording will start retroactively by the specified time duration (default: 10 seconds).
F Record lock button
Turns recording status lock on/off.
This prevents recording from being accidentally stopped during recording.
G DVS information display
Shows the device label of the selected DVS.
H ADD MARKER button
Adds a marker to the project at the current location.
I RECALL LINK button
Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene. If this function is turned on,
the button will be lit.
NOTE
Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys. (see page 169)
1
6
3
2
4
5
FEDCBA0987
G
H I
Recorder
Reference Manual
190
3. Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording.
4. When you have finished recording, press the record lock button and then the STOP
button.
Specifying DVS or DANTE-ACCEL
1. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the NUENDO Live SETUP button.
The NUENDO LIVE SETUP popup window will appear.
NOTE
• Even if the CL’s CONSOLE ID is set to something other than #1, you can still specify DVS or
DANTE-ACCEL in the NUENDO Live SETUP screen.
• However, you must not select the same DVS or DANTE-ACCEL from more than one CL console.
1 Setup method selection buttons
Use these buttons to select one of the following methods to specify DVS or DANTE-ACCEL.
• NO ASSIGN............................... Not assigned
• DVS ............................................. Select a DVS from the device list
• SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS ...... When using DANTE-ACCEL, specify the IP address of the PC
■ When setup method selection button = DVS
To choose from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DVS button to display
the DEVICE LIST field.
This screen contains the following items.
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live.
2 DEVICE LIST select knob
Operate the multi-function knob to choose the DVS that you want to select.
1
1
2
Recorder
Reference Manual
191
■ When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS
If you’re using DANTE-ACCEL, use the SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS field to specify the IP address of the
PC. Since the IP address of DANTE-ACCEL will differ from the IP address used by CL Extension, you
must specify the IP address manually.
This screen contains the following items.
1 IP ADDRESS knobs
Use the multifunction knobs to specify the IP address.
NOTE
• As the IP address, specify the IP address of the PC that is running Nuendo Live.
• Set the address of that PC in the range of 169.254.0.0 – 169.254.255.255, and set the subnet
mask as 255.255.0.0.
• For the PC in which DANTE-ACCEL is installed, the Dante port of DANTE-ACCEL as well as the
Ethernet port of the PC must both be connected to the same network.
Refer to the illustration below.
NOTE
Depending on the firmware version, DANTE-ACCEL might not support redundant networking.
Refer to the following website to check whether your version of the DANTE-ACCEL (Dante
Accelerator) firmware supports redundant networking.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the
NUENDO LIVE SET UP popup window.
1
PC
SW
(Primary)
SW
(Secondary)
Ethernet
DANTE-ACCEL
P
S
CL
Dante
P
S
Recorder
Reference Manual
192
Playing a multi-track project
1. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button.
2. Assign the signals from Nuendo Live to the desired DANTE1–DANTE64 ports.
For example, press the PORT SELECT button for DANTE1.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
3. In the list at the left, select the DVS you’re using with Nuendo Live, and select the
port that you want to assign to DANTE1.
4. Press the + button located in the upper part of the screen to switch to DANTE2,
and assign a DVS port to it in the same way.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to exit the screen.
6. Press the “X” symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to
close it.
NOTE
If you’ve saved the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library, it will be easy to switch the
settings on the CL series console (see page 139).
7. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the START button.
8. Operate the channels so that sound is output.
9. To stop playback, press the STOP button.
Help function
Reference Manual
193
Help function
You can view Help files provided by Yamaha, or display any user-created text file.
We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files created by a
third party other than Yamaha.
Loading a Help file from a USB flash drive
NOTE
A help file for only one language is stored in the console’s internal memory. Once you load the
help file, it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off.
The first time you press the HELP button to view the help file after turning the power on, it will take
a while for the help file to be loaded from internal memory. It is not possible to read from internal
memory while the USB flash drive is being accessed, including while the recorder is recording or
playing back, and therefore Help cannot be displayed during this time.
Once the data has finished loading, subsequently pressing the HELP button will display the help
file instantly.
1. Before you proceed, save the Help file (file extension: .xml) provided by Yamaha
on your USB flash drive. For the latest information on help files, refer to the
Yamaha Pro Audio website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
4. To select the Help file (file extension: .xml) that you want to load, press one of the
Help files in the file list, or turn the multifunction knob on the panel.
5. Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear.
6. Press the OK button to load the file.
Loading a text file from a USB flash drive
1. Using a commercially available text editor or the “Notepad” included with
Microsoft Windows, create a text file (file extension: .txt) and save it on your USB
flash drive.
By default, the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However, by adding a
line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force
recognition of the file using that character code set. You can specify the desired character code set
when using your text editor to save the text file.
The Help function is able to display the following text files (character code sets/languages).
• Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.)
• Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set (Japanese)
• Text files of the above languages written in the UTF-8 character code set.
The maximum size of the text file is 1024 Kbytes.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window.
4. To select the text file you want to load, press one of the text files in the file list or
turn the multifunction knob on the panel.
5. Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear.
6. Press the OK button to load the file.
Help function
Reference Manual
194
Viewing Help
1. Before you proceed, load the Help file or text file from your USB flash drive.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the (Help) button to access the HELP
popup window.
3. By turning multifunction knobs 1–2 you can scroll the index area at the left. By
turning multifunction knobs 3–8 you can scroll the main area at the right.
4. By pressing a link (underlined text) in the text, you can scroll to the linked
destination.
By pressing a window link (a location with an → symbol and underlined text), you can close the
HELP popup window and open the corresponding window.
5. You can also scroll by using the buttons in the tool bar as needed.
• button................Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently-displayed location.
• button................Returns to the preceding item in the history of links you pressed.
• button................Proceeds to the subsequent item in the history of links you pressed.
6. To close the window, press the (Help) button of the Function Access Area or
the “x” symbol of the HELP popup window.
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly
1. Before you proceed, load the Help file from your USB flash drive.
2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER
SETUP popup window.
Help function
Reference Manual
195
4. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
5. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to
assign the Help function.
6. In the FUNCTION column, choose “HELP” and press the OK button.
7. When you have finished assigning functions to USER DEFINED keys, press the ×
symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
8. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.
■ Recalling the HELP popup window using only a USER DEFINED key
9. Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. The HELP
popup window will appear.
10. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help
function is assigned.
■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller
9. While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help
function, press (or rotate) the panel controller for which you want to recall Help.
Panel controllers (other than the faders) will not function as long as you continue holding down
the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
10. If the corresponding controller has an explanation associated with it, the HELP
popup window will appear, and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding
item.
If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat step 9 to successively
display these explanations.
11. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help
function is assigned.
■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen
9. While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help
function, press the on-screen controller for which you want to recall Help.
The on-screen buttons and tabs will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER
DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
10. If there is a corresponding Help item, the HELP popup window will appear and you
will automatically scroll to the corresponding item.
If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, close the HELP popup window and then
repeat step 9 to successively view these explanations.
11. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help
function is assigned.
Other functions
Reference Manual
196
Other functions
This chapter explains various functions of CL series consoles that are not covered in other chapters.
About the SETUP screen
The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire CL console. To access
the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. The screen contains the
following items.
■ CURRENT USER field
This field enables you to make various user-related settings.
1 USER SETUP popup button
Press this button to open the USER SETUP popup window, in which you can make various
settings for each user.
2 CURRENT USER popup button
Press this button to open the LOG IN popup window, in which you can switch log-in users.
3 COMMENT EDIT popup button
Press this button to open the USER COMMENT EDIT popup window, in which you can enter
comments.
4 PASSWORD CHANGE popup button
Press this button to open the PASSWORD CHANGE popup window, in which you can change
the password.
5 SAVE KEY popup button
Enables you to save the user authentication key. Press this button to open the SAVE KEY popup
window. (see page 165)
■ STORAGE field
This field enables you to create, save, or load a user authentication key.
6 CREATE USER KEY popup button
Press this button to open the CREATE USER KEY popup window, in which you can create a new
user authentication key.
7 SAVE/LOAD popup button
Press this button to open the SAVE/LOAD popup window, in which you can save or load user
authentication keys and console files.
■ SYSTEM SETUP field
This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the CL console.
8 +48V MASTER button
Switches the console’s master +48V master phantom power on or off. If this button is off, phantom
power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an OMNI jack input channel or
TALKBACK IN is on.
NOTE
This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs
(I/O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting.
9 WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup button
Press this button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup window, in which you can make word
clock settings and various settings for each slot.
0 CASCADE popup button
Press this button to open the CASCADE popup window, in which you can make patch settings
for cascade connections.
A OUTPUT PORT popup button
Press this button to open the OUTPUT PORT popup window, in which you can make output port
settings.
1 6 72543
8
E
F
9
C
A
0
G
D
B
H I J
Other functions
Reference Manual
197
B MIDI/GPI popup button
Press this button to open the MIDI/GPI popup window, in which you can make MIDI and GPI-
related settings.
C DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window. This window enables you to make
various audio network settings (console ID setting; SECONDARY PORT functionality setting;
audio bit rate; latency setting; selections for devices controlled via the I/O DEVICE screen).
■ BUS SETUP field
This field enables you to make bus-related settings.
D BUS SETUP popup button
Press this button to open the BUS SETUP popup window, in which you can make MIX bus/
MATRIX bus-related settings.
■ DATE/TIME popup button
Press this button to open the DATE/TIME popup window, in which you can set the date and time.
■ NETWORK popup button
Press this button to open the NETWORK popup window, in which you can set the network address.
■ Indicator field
This field displays various information about the console’s status.
E BATTERY indicator
Indicates the status of the internal battery.
NOTE
The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. In this case, immediately contact
your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual
(separate document) to have the backup battery replaced.
F POWER SUPPLY indicator
Indicates the currently-running power supply: INT (internal) or EXT (PW800).
G Version indicator
Indicates the version number of the main CPU, sub CPU, and DANTE module.
■ CONSOLE LOCK button
This button executes the Console Lock function. If the console password has been set, pressing this
button will open the AUTHORIZATION popup window. Enter the correct password to execute
Console Lock.
If the console password has not been set, pressing this button will execute the Console Lock
immediately.
■ CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field
This field enables you to set the LCD brightness and contrast.
H BANK A/BANK B buttons
Select a bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can save two
different settings in bank A and B, and switch between them if desired.
I CONTRAST NAME knob
Adjusts the contrast of the channel name display.
J BRIGHTNESS NAME knob
Adjusts the brightness of the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR knob
Adjusts the brightness balance of the channel color and the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS SCREEN knob
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
BRIGHTNESS PANEL knob
Adjusts the brightness of the panel LEDs.
BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob
Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector.
Other functions
Reference Manual
198
Word clock and slot settings
“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing. To
send and receive digital audio signals between devices, those devices must be synchronized to the same
word clock. If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state, the data may not be
transmitted or received correctly, and noise may be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are
the same.
Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the entire
system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock slaves) so that they
synchronize to the word clock master.
If you wish to use the CL series console as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock
supplied from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source (the port through
which the word clock is obtained).
This section explains how to select the clock source that the CL series console will use.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field at the center of the screen, press the WORD CLOCK/
SLOT SETUP button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP popup window.
This popup window contains the following items.
■ MASTER CLOCK SELECT field
1 Master clock frequency display
Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) of the currently-selected master clock. If the unit is
not synching to the master clock, “UNLOCK” will appear.
NOTE
If sample rate pull-up/down has been specified in the Dante
Controller application, this area indicates the change in the
sample rate as a percentage, such as –4.0%, –0.1%, +4.0%,
4.1667%, etc.
2 Master clock select buttons
Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock master from the
following options:
• INT 48 k
• INT 44.1 k
The CL console internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) will be the clock source.
• WORD CLOCK IN
The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console will
be used as the clock source.
1
2
3
Other functions
Reference Manual
199
• DANTE 48 k
• DANTE 44.1 k
The word clock supplied from the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the
clock source.
•SLOT 1–3
The word clock supplied via a digital I/O card installed in a console slot will be used as the clock
source. Word clock can be selected in pairs for each slot.
3 Clock status display
Indicates the status of synchronization with the master clock for each clock source. Each indicator
is explained below:
•LOCK (light blue)
Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an external
device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is occurring properly
between that device and the CL series console. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may
be displayed even if not synchronized.
• LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow)
A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an external
device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between
that device and the CL series console.
• SRC ON (green)
This is a special status applied only to SLOT 1–3, indicating that the corresponding channel’s SRC
(Sampling Rate Converter) is enabled. This means that even if the signal is not synchronized,
normal input/output with the CL series console is occurring.
• UNLOCK (red)
A valid clock is being input, but the CL series console is not synchronized to the selected clock.
If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, it will be unable to
communicate properly with the CL console.
• UNKNOWN (black)
This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or
because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this connector/slot, but successful
synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established.
If the indicator for the port selected as the clock source has turned light blue, and the clock
frequency appears in the upper left of the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field, this indicates that the
CL series console is operating correctly with the new clock.
NOTE
• If the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device
is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.
• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. To protect your
speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock
setting.
• If you attempt to select a channel (for which SRC is on) as the word clock source, a message will
appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled.
■ SLOT SETUP field
This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the console.
1 Card name
Indicates the type of card installed in the slot. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear.
2 SRC buttons
The SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function can be switched on or off for a slot in which an MY
card (MY8-AE96S) that features the SRC function is installed. If another type of card is installed,
or if no card is installed, no SRC button will appear.
3 FREQUENCY display
Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of
input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is
installed, “----” will appear.
4 EMPHASIS STATUS display
Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus
of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is
installed, “----” will appear.
3. In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field, select a clock source.
4. To close the WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup window, press the “x” symbol located in
the upper right.
You will return to the SETUP screen.
5. To close the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area.
1
3
2
4
Other functions
Reference Manual
200
Using cascade connections
Using multiple CL series consoles, or a CL console and an external mixing console (such as a Yamaha
PM5D) in a cascade connection enable buses to be shared among the devices. This can be convenient
if you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.
This section explains cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two CL units are
connected in a cascade configuration.
About cascade connections
To cascade two CL series consoles, you must first install digital I/O cards in the appropriate slots, and
connect the output ports of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports of the receiving unit
(the cascade master).
The following illustration shows an example in which three eight-channel digital I/O cards for each unit
are installed in the cascade slave CL unit and in the cascade master CL unit. The DIGITAL OUT jacks
of the sending unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit.
In this example, up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1–24, MATRIX bus 1–8, STEREO bus
(L/R), MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals transmitted from the
cascade master CL unit. (If you use three 16-ch digital I/O cards, all buses can be shared among the
devices.)
You must specify bus assignments for each or channel on each CL unit. Separate procedures are
outlined below for the cascade slave and the cascade master.
NOTE
• If you are making a cascade connection between the CL unit and the PM5D, you can use the CL
unit as the cascade slave by setting the PM5D’s CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot. However,
only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked.
• You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer.
• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at
the cascade slave will increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade master.
Operations on a cascade slave CL unit
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen, press the
CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup window.
This window enables you to select an I/O port used for cascade connections. The window consists
of two pages: The CASCADE IN PATCH page and the CASCADE OUT PATCH page. To switch
pages, press the corresponding tab at the bottom of the window.
3.
Press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab to access the CASCADE OUT PATCH page.
In this screen you can select the slot and output port that will output each bus.
1 Port select popup buttons (CASCADE OUT PATCH section)
Enable you to select the output port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–
8, STEREO L/R, MONO, and CUE L/R buses. Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup
window, in which you can select a port.
2 CASCADE LINK MODE buttons
Specify whether only cue operations will be linked, or all linkable operations including scene
store/recall operations will also be linked when CL series consoles are cascade-connected.
3 CASCADE COMM PORT buttons
Specify the communication port used for transmitting and receiving link information when
operations such as cue and scene store/recall are linked between cascade-connected CL series
consoles.
CL BCL A
DIGITAL
OUT
DIGITAL
IN
Audio signals of
A + B
Audio signals of
unit A
Digital I/O card
(Cascade slave) (Cascade master)
3
1
2
Other functions
Reference Manual
201
4. Press the port select popup button for the bus for which you want to assign the
port.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
This popup window contains the following items.
1 Category select list
Selects the port (slot 1–3) that will be shown on the screen.
2 Port select buttons
Within the specified slot, these buttons select the ports that will be patched.
5. Use the category select list and port select buttons to select the desired slot and
output ports, and then press the CLOSE button.
The port will be assigned to the selected bus.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses.
NOTE
You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a port to which a
signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be canceled.
7. If you want to use the Cascade Link function to link parameters and events
between two CL consoles, proceed as follows.
7–1. Use the CASCADE COMM PORT field to select the port that will transmit and
receive control signals for cascade link.
You can choose from the following items.
• NONE.......... No link operation
• MIDI............ Use MIDI port
• SLOT1 ......... Use SLOT1
NOTE
Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a
port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask
whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
7–2. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link.
You can choose from the following items.
• OFF
No link operation
•CUE
The following cue-related parameters and events will be linked.
• Cue enable/disable
• Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE)
• Cue point settings for input channels and output channels
•ALL
All linkable parameters and events (including cue-related parameters) will be linked.
• Cue-related parameters and events (see above)
• Scene recall operations
• Scene store operations
• DIMMER (MONITOR screen) operations
• Panel LED and display brightness (SETUP screen) operations
• Master mute group operations
8. To close the CASCADE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
2
1
Other functions
Reference Manual
202
Operations on the cascade master CL unit
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen, press the
CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup window.
3. Press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab to access the CASCADE IN PATCH page.
4. Press the port select popup button for the bus to which you want to assign a port.
The PORT SELECT popup window will appear.
5. Use the category select list and port select buttons to select the desired slot and
input ports, and then press the CLOSE button.
The port will be assigned to the selected bus.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses.
If desired, you can assign two or more buses to the same input port.
7. If you want to link specific parameters or events between two CL series consoles,
proceed as follows.
7–1. Use the CASCADE COMM PORT field to select the port that will transmit and
receive control signals for cascade link.
The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window
(see page 200).
NOTE
Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select
a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask
whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
7–2. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link.
The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window
(see page 200).
8. To close the CASCADE popup window, press the CLOSE button.
In this state, the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade
master, and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade master. If the
Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified operations or parameter changes performed on
either CL series console will be followed by the other CL console.
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such as
switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the send point from which the signal of an input
channel will be sent.
The settings you make in the following procedure will be saved as part of the scene.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the center right of the SETUP screen, press the BUS SETUP button to open the
BUS SETUP popup window.
In the BUS SETUP popup window you can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX
buses.
1 SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons
Select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses. Select either STEREO (stereo
signal) or MONOx2 (monaural signal x 2).
2 Bus type/send point select buttons (MIX bus only)
For every adjacent pair of buses, you can select the bus type and (for vari-type) the send point.
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button Bus type Pre-fader send point
VARI [PRE EQ] VARI Immediately before the EQ
VARI [PRE FADER] VARI Immediately before the fader
FIXED FIXED ---
1 42
1 43
MIX 1–16 page MIX BUS 17–24/MATRIX BUS page
Other functions
Reference Manual
203
3 Send point select buttons (MATRIX bus only)
Select the pre-fader send point from the input channel. These buttons correspond to the following
parameters.
4 PAN LINK button
This button appears only if two adjacent buses are paired in stereo and the bus type is set to VARI.
If the button is on, the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the corresponding two
buses will link with the STEREO bus pan setting.
3. Use the MIX1-16 tab and MIX17-24/MATRIX tab to access the buses whose settings
you want to edit.
4. Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to specify whether each bus will function
as STEREO (main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd-numbered/even-
numbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels).
5. Use the buttons of the PRE FADER SEND POINT/BUS TYPE field to select the
position from which the signal of the input channel will be sent.
In the case of a MIX bus, you can use this field to switch the type of bus (VARI or FIXED).
6. As desired, turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off.
In the PAN LINK field, you can specify whether the panning of the signal routed from an input
channel to the stereo bus will be linked with operation of the INPUT TO ST PAN knob (if the
input channel’s SIGNAL TYPE is set to STEREO and BUS TYPE is set to VARI).
• If the PAN LINK button is on:
If the send-destination bus is stereo, the PAN knob that appears in the location of the SEND
LEVEL knob on the screens for input channels will be linked with the INPUT TO ST PAN knob.
• If the PAN LINK button is off:
The PAN knob that appears in the location of the SEND LEVEL knob of input channels in various
screens is not linked with INPUT TO ST PAN; it can be operated independently.
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/
off
1. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the +48V MASTER field’s ON button or OFF
button.
If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an OMNI jack
input channel or TALKBACK IN is on.
NOTE
This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs
(I/O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting.
Button Pre-fader send point
PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ
PRE FADER Immediately before the fader
Other functions
Reference Manual
204
Specifying the brightness of the touch screen,
LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps
Follow the steps below to specify the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, channel name
displays, and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the field located in the right of the bottom row of the SETUP screen, press the
BANK A or BANK B button.
You can save two different brightness settings in bank A and B, and switch between them rapidly
if desired.
3. Use the multifunction knobs to set the following parameters.
CONTRAST field
• NAME .........................Adjusts the contrast of the characters in the channel name displays on
the top panel.
BRIGHTNESS field
• NAME .........................Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel.
This will also change the CH COLOR brightness. If you want to adjust
the CH COLOR brightness after setting the name display brightness, use
the CH COLOR knob.
• CH COLOR................Adjusts the brightness of the channel colors on the top panel. This lets
you apply a relative adjustment to only the channel color brightness
without changing the channel name display brightness.
• SCREEN......................Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. If the brightness is set to lower
than level 2, the CL will start up next time with a brightness setting of 2
so that you will be able to see the screen.
• PANEL ........................Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs. If the optional MBCL
meter bridge is installed on the CL3/CL1, this knob setting will also
affect the LEDs on the meter bridge.
NOTE
If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR’s LEDs will also change.
• LAMP ..........................Adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP
jacks.
4. If desired, switch between banks A and B and make settings for the other bank in
the same way.
Now you can switch between the BANK A and BANK B buttons to change the brightness of the
touch screen, LCD, channel name displays, and lamps in a single operation. You can also assign
this parameter to a USER DEFINED key, and press that key to switch between banks A and B.
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
This section explains how to set the date and time of the CL console’s internal clock, and how to select
the date and time display format.
The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the DATE/TIME button to access the DATE/
TIME popup window.
This popup window includes the following items.
1) DATE
Specifies the date of the internal clock.
2) TIME
Specifies the time of the internal clock.
3) FORMAT
Specifies the format in which the time of the internal clock is displayed.
3. In the FORMAT field, press the MODE buttons several times to select the desired
format for date and time display.
You can select from the following display formats.
•Date
MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year)
DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year)
YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)
•Time
24-Hour (hours shown in the range of 0–23)
12-Hour (hours shown from 0am–11am, and 0pm– 11pm)
4. Use multifunction knobs 1–6 on the top panel to specify the current date and time.
5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
The date, time, and display format you specified will be finalized, and the popup window will
close. If you press the CANCEL button or the “x” symbol instead of the OK button, your changes
will be discarded and the popup window will close.
Other functions
Reference Manual
205
Setting the network address
This section explains how to set the network address that will be required when you use the
NETWORK connector on the CL series console to connect it to a computer.
NOTE
Only the Administrator can change network settings.
1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the NETWORK button to access the
NETWORK popup window.
1 IP ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network.
2 GATEWAY ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies a device (gateway) that converts data between different media
or protocols to allow communication within the network.
3 SUBNET MASK
Within the IP address used in the network, this defines the bits that are used for the network
address that distinguishes the network.
4 MAC ADDRESS
Indicates the MAC (Machine Access Control) address, which identifies a host in a network. This
address is for display only, and cannot be edited.
NOTE
The NETWORK connector on the CL series console transmits data via either 100BASE-TX
(transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps).
3. Press the on-screen knob or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to specify
the address.
If you plan to connect the CL series console to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we
recommend that you use the following default values. Make sure that the IP address and Gateway
address do not match the addresses of any other device on the network.
IP address: 192.168.0.128 or similar
Gateway address: 192.168.0.1 or similar
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 or similar
For details on settings related to connecting to a LAN, refer to the CL Editor Installation Guide.
4. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
If you changed the setting, a confirmation dialog box will appear.
5. To make the setting, press the OK button.
The changes will be finalized, and the popup screen will close. If you decide to cancel the change,
press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button.
NOTE
In order for the change to take effect, you must power-off the CL series console and then turn it
on again.
6. Restart the CL series console.
1
2
3
4
Other functions
Reference Manual
206
Initializing the unit to factory default settings
If an error occurs in the CL console internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot operate
the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.
NOTICE
The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory!
Proceed with the following operation only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory.
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
2. Press one of the following buttons, depending on the type of initialization you
want to perform.
• INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
The entire memory, including scene memories and libraries, will be returned to factory default
settings.
• INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
The contents of memory — except for scene memories and libraries — will be returned to its
factory default settings.
3. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the initialization. Press the INITIALIZE button.
A dialog box will ask you to reconfirm the operation.
4. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
The Initialization operation starts.
NOTE
Do not press any buttons until initialization is complete.
5. A message indicates that the initialization process is complete. Press the EXIT
button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Other functions
Reference Manual
207
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen
(Calibration function)
Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen.
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
2. Press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button.
The TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to calibrate the
touch screen.
NOTE
If you are unable to access the calibration screen by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN
CALIBRATION button, you can use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC ] keys to select TOUCH
SCREEN CALIBRATION, and then press the [STORE] key to start.
3. Press the START button.
A confirmation dialog box will appear.
4. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
5. A cross-shaped cursor will appear in the screen a total of three times. Press each
location at which it appears.
NOTE
To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and
posture in which you normally operate the unit.
6. Press the EXIT button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Other functions
Reference Manual
208
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
Depending on the environment in which you use the CL series console, discrepancies may occur in the
motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies.
NOTE
For information about adjusting the input gain or the detection point of the touch screen, refer to
the appropriate sections in this chapter.
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
2. Press the FADER CALIBRATION button.
The FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, enabling you to adjust the faders.
The specified faders in the channel strip section, Centralogic section, and Master section will be
semi-automatically calibrated. This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader
settings while the CL is starting up.
3. Press a [SEL] key to specify the faders that you want to calibrate.
Faders for which a problem was detected at start-up will already be selected.
4. Press the START button.
A confirmation dialog box will appear.
5. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
6. Each of the specified faders will move to the target positions in the following
sequence. Manually adjust the faders to the correct positions.
1 –∞ dB (all the way down)
2 –20 dB
3 0 dB
4 +10 dB (all the way up)
7. After you adjust the fader position, press the [NEXT] button.
The process will proceed to the next fader position.
Other functions
Reference Manual
209
8. Repeat steps 6–7 to adjust the faders for positions 1 through 4.
After the positions are corrected, automatic motorized calibration will start.
9. When calibration is complete and if the RESTART button has not appeared, press
the APPLY button.
The calibration settings will be saved in internal memory. If the RESTART button appears,
calibration has failed. Press the RESTART button to execute calibration once again.
10. Press the EXIT button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration
function)
If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain.
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
2. In the MODE SELECT field, select the item you want to adjust, and then press the
button.
The corresponding setting screen will appear.
You can make the following three gain adjustments for analog input and output.
Other functions
Reference Manual
210
• INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain)
Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified
analog input port in 0.1 dB steps.
• OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the output port gain)
Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified
analog output port in 0.01 dB steps.
• SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the slot output port gain)
Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the output
ports of the specified slot in 0.01 dB steps.
3. Press an on-screen knob to select it, and then use the corresponding multifunction
knob to adjust the value.
If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen, all settings in the screen will be reset
to 0 dB.
The factory settings are also 0 dB.
4. Press the EXIT button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Other functions
Reference Manual
211
Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)
If necessary, you can adjust the channel color.
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
After the welcome screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
2. Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button.
The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the
channel color.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to
adjust the color.
NOTE
Only one can be selected. Multiple selections are not possible.
4. Press one of the color buttons on screen to select the desired color.
All channel color indicators turn the selected color. The currently-selected color button on screen
will be surrounded by a white frame.
5. While comparing the color of the selected channel’s indicator with the color of the
other channel indicators (for which the [SEL] keys are turned off), use the three
right-most multifunction knobs to adjust the color.
The RGB values in the RGB ADJUSTMENT field change accordingly.
Other functions
Reference Manual
212
6. When you have finished adjusting the color, press the APPLY button located on the
right of the window to confirm the change.
NOTE
The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB values.
7. To reset all channel color indicators to the factory default setting, press the RESET
ALL button.
8. Press the EXIT button.
The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Adjusting the brightness of the channel name
display
If necessary, you can adjust the brightness of the channel name display.
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key of the panel, turn on the
power.
After the welcome screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
2. Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button.
The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the
channel color.
3. Press the [CUE] key or [ON] key of the channel whose brightness you want to
adjust.
Pressing the [CUE] key will increase the brightness, and pressing the [ON] key will decrease the
brightness.
4. When you have finished adjusting the brightness, press the APPLY button located
in the right of the screen to confirm the change.
5. Press the EXIT button.
The CL will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Other functions
Reference Manual
213
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name
display
If necessary, you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display.
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key of the panel, turn on the
power.
After the welcome screen, the following startup menu screen will appear.
2. Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button.
The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the
channel color.
3. Hold down a [SEL] key on the panel, and turn multi-function knob 1 in the
Centralogic section.
Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels; turning it toward the
right will darken the contrast of all channels.
4. If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other
channels, hold down the [SEL] key of the desired channel and press its [CUE] key
or [ON] key.
Pressing the [CUE] key will darken the contrast, and pressing the [ON] key will lighten the
contrast.
5. When you have finished adjusting the contrast, press the APPLY button located in
the right of the screen to confirm the change.
NOTE
The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting.
6. Press the EXIT button.
The CL will start up in normal operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
Dante audio network settings
You will use the CL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself and the
I/O devices connected to the Dante connector of the CL series console. This section explains how to
make Dante audio network settings.
Setting up a Dante audio network
1. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the DANTE field at the center of the screen, press the DANTE SETUP button to
open the DANTE SETUP popup window.
Other functions
Reference Manual
214
3. In the upper part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen, press the SETUP tab to access
the SETUP field.
This screen contains the following items.
1 CONSOLE ID select buttons
Set the IDs for the CL series consoles.
If five or more CL units are connected to a network, and you plan not to assign IDs to some of the
units, press the OFF button of each of those units to turn off the ID.
2 SECONDARY PORT select buttons
Specify how the Dante audio network is configured.
3 CANCEL button
When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, you can press this button to
cancel the changes you made.
4 APPLY button
After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, press this button to apply the
changes you made.
5 BIT select buttons
Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24-bit or 32-bit.
NOTE
24bit: Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an Rio unit. When using a CL
series system, you will normally use this setting.
32bit: This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25-bit or larger data (when using cascade
or gain compensation), but the amount of data being transmitted will increase 20–30% compared
to 24-bit.
6 LATENCY select buttons
Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, or 5.0 ms.
The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size. For details,
refer to “Setting the Dante audio network latency” on page 215.
7 DANTE PATCH BY select buttons
Use these select buttons when using Dante Controller to make Dante patch settings.
If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT
PATCH settings can be edited from the CL series console.
If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, it will not be possible to edit the Dante patch
settings.
You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons on
other CL series consoles on the network.
NOTE
• Settings that are shared with the I/O device (BIT/LATENCY/W.CLOCK) will reflect the settings of
the CL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to #1.
• If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section, and you
attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings, the message “This Operation is Not
Allowed” will appear at the bottom of the screen.
34
12
76
5
Other functions
Reference Manual
215
Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT
1. In the SETUP field, select the CONSOLE ID and the SECONDARY PORT.
The button you switched is shown in red.
2. Press the APPLY button.
A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the change to the CONSOLE ID and
SECONDARY PORT.
3. To execute the change, press the OK button.
The network audio module will be rebooted in order to change the settings.
When the Dante audio network settings have been applied, the button you selected will return to
its original appearance.
NOTE
• If you change the SECONDARY PORT, you must also change the method of connection between
the CL series console and the I/O devices. For example if the connections used for the REDUNDANT
setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN, it will become impossible
to send and receive audio. Be sure to disconnect the cables before you change the setting.
• The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the
CL series console.
Setting the Dante audio network latency
An appropriate latency setting for signals sent and received via a Dante audio network varies depending on
the network connection method and size. This section explains how to set an appropriate latency setting
depending on the connection method of Dante-enabled devices that are connected to the CL series console.
■ Relationship between the switches and the number of hops
An appropriate latency setting on a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of hops in
the network.
One hop is the step from one router (switch) to the next. You count the number of hops starting from
the master device to the most distant device (assuming that all devices are connected in series).
Switches mean network switches and routers, as well as the switches that are built into CL series
consoles and I/O devices.
Set the latency value based on the number of hops. The following table shows typical latency settings
based on the number of hops.
NOTE
• Depending on network conditions, you may need to raise the latency value even if the number of
hops is small.
• If a problem occurs, select 5.0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting
is the cause of the problem.
■ Connection examples and latency settings
Daisy chain connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
Number of hops Latency (ms)
Up to 3 0.25
Up to 5 0.5
Up to 10 1.0
11 or more (or if a problem occurs) 5.0
3
3
2
2
11
3 hops = 0.25 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms
Other functions
Reference Manual
216
Daisy chain connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
Redundant connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
Redundant connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
Daisy chain connections
256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
4
2
11
3
3
2
4 hops = 0.5 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms
3
4
12
4 hops = 0.5 ms
3
4
12
4 hops = 0.5 ms
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
2
3
4
11
9 hops = 1.0 ms 4 hops = 0.5 ms
Other functions
Reference Manual
217
Redundant connections
Two consoles are sharing 256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
Here’s how to select which of the multiple I/O devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so
that they can be used. Up to 24 units can be mounted for one CL series console.
1. In the lower part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen, press the DEVICE MOUNT tab
to access the DEVICE MOUNT field.
This screen contains the following items.
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all I/O devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2 REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
3 I/O device select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the DEVICE SELECT popup window.
The upper line of the button shows the device label.
The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs.
If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show
nothing.
4
5
3
2
1
5 hops = 0.5 ms
1 2
3
Other functions
Reference Manual
218
2. Press an I/O device select button to access the DEVICE SELECT popup window.
1 Setup method selection buttons
Choose one of the following methods for mounting the I/O device.
• NO ASSIGN............................... Not mounted
• DEVICE LIST............................ Select and mount from the device list
• SUPPORTED DEVICE............ Select and mount a supported device
• DVS ............................................. Enter a device label and mount (only for DVS)
• MANUAL ................................... Enter a device label and mount
■ When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST
To mount by choosing from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DEVICE
LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field.
This screen contains the following items.
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the I/O device that you want to mount.
2 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the multi-function knob to select the I/O device that you want to mount.
3 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the multi-function knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio
network. If the selected I/O device is supported by the CL series, the number of inputs and outputs
will be entered automatically.
1
1
2
3
Other functions
Reference Manual
219
■ When the setup method select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE
If you want to select and mount an I/O device that is supported by the CL series, press the SUPPORTED
DEVICE button to see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field. These settings can be made even when not
connected to a Dante audio network.
This screen contains the following items.
1 DEVICE TYPE
This area shows a list of the I/O device types that are supported by the CL series.
From the list, choose the type of I/O device that you want to mount.
2 DEVICE TYPE select knob
Use the multi-function knob to select the type of I/O device that you want to mount.
3 I/O device indication
This area shows the selected I/O device.
The upper line shows the front panel of the I/O device.
The lower line shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs.
4 UNIT ID knob
Use the multifunction knobs to specify the UNIT ID.
The indicator shows the UNIT ID.
NOTE
• If there is one I/O device, set the I/O device’s UNIT ID to “1”.
• If multiple devices are connected, assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between
devices.
• For devices other than the Rio series, it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned
to the same ID as an Rio series unit or the same ID as a different model of device. However since
the I/O device input/output port screen shows the UNIT ID, this will make it difficult to distinguish
between the units, so we recommend that whenever possible, you avoid allowing the ID numbers
to overlap.
• If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit
screen etc. (such as the Dante-MY16-AUD card or DANTE-ACCEL), and you want to use that
device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE, you must change its device label via Dante Controller.
• The Dante-MY16-AUD and DANTE-ACCEL will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you
assign the device label as follows.
Dante-MY16-AUD: Y###-Audinate-DANTE-MY16******
DANTE-ACCEL: Y###-Yamaha-DANTE-ACCEL*******
# is a three-digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0–9 and uppercase A–F (000–
FFF)
* indicates any desired character (alphabetical uppercase or lowercase, numerals, or -
(hyphen) may be used)
• If you are controlling the CL console from an Rio series unit, we recommend that you set the Rio
unit’s START UP MODE to “REFRESH.”
Operation will be safer with the “REFRESH” setting, since mute will be cleared after
synchronization has been completed with CL units whose system setting for REMOTE HA
ASSIGN is set to “WITH RECALL.”
With the “RESUME” setting, mute will be cleared and the unit will start operating with the settings
that were backed up by the Rio series unit itself, which could allow unexpected audio to be output.
• A single CL console can control the HA of up to eight Rio series units.
If nine or more Rio series units are connected, you can either divide the HA control between
multiple CL consoles, or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the Rio series units
whose HA does not need to be controlled, and use them with START UP MODE set to
“RESUME.”
1
2
3
4
Other functions
Reference Manual
220
■ When setup method selection button = DVS
■ When setup method selection button = MANUAL
If you want to enter the device label of an I/O device and mount it, press the DVS or MANUAL button
to access the DVS/MANUAL field.
This screen contains the following items.
1 DEVICE LABEL
Displays the device label of the I/O device which you entered from the keyboard.
2 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the multi-function knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio
network.
3 Device label entry keyboard
Use this keyboard to enter the device label of the I/O device.
NOTE
• If the I/O device is a DVS, mount it by pressing the DVS button.
• If the device label you entered is detected automatically, the INPUT/OUTPUT knob settings will
be ignored, and the rated number of inputs and outputs will be specified.
3. After you’ve selected the I/O device to mount, press the OK button to close the
DEVICE SELECT popup window.
REMOTE HA settings
Here’s how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so
that they can be used. Up to 8 units can be mounted for one CL series console.
1. In the lower part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen, press the REMOTE HA tab to
access the REMOTE HA field.
This screen contains the following items.
1 CLEAR ALL button
Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2 REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network.
3 HA device select buttons
Press one of these buttons to open the REMOTE HA SELECT popup window.
The upper line of the button shows the device label.
The lower line of the button shows the product name and the number of inputs and outputs.
If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show
nothing.
1
3
2
13 2
Other functions
Reference Manual
221
2. Press a HA device select button to access the REMOTE HA SELECT popup window.
This screen contains the following items.
1 DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the HA devices on the Dante audio network.
2 with RECALL button
If this button is on, the settings saved in the CL series console will be applied to the HA device
when the CL series console starts up and when a scene is recalled.
3 DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the multi-function knob to select the HA device that you want to mount.
NOTE
• Do not specify “with RECALL” if an HA device is shared by multiple CL series consoles and
settings have already been made on a different CL series console.
• The HA device can also be operated from a CL series console that is not set to “with RECALL.”
3. After you’ve selected the HA device to mount, press the OK button to close the
REMOTE HA SELECT popup window.
If you’ve changed the setting by pressing the “with RECALL” button, a confirmation dialog box
will appear.
To make the setting, press the OK button.
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
The rear panel GPI (General Purpose Interface) connector can be used as an input/output connector.
This connector provides five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports. For example you can use an
external switch to control internal parameters of the CL series console or to switch scenes. Conversely,
operations or scene changes performed on the CL series console can send control signals to an external
device.
For details on how to send control signals to an external device when you switch scenes, refer to
“Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)” on page 93.
Using GPI IN
You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the CL series console
from an external device. For example, you could use an external switch to turn the CL series console’s
Talkback on/off, operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes.
1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector.
2. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
1
3
2
Other functions
Reference Manual
222
3. Press the MIDI/GPI button.
The MIDI SETUP screen will appear.
4. Press the GPI tab.
The GPI page will appear.
1 GPI IN status indicator
This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port.
2 POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port.
............ (Low active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active
when the switch is grounded.
............ (High active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active
when the switch is opened or when a high-level voltage is input.
3 GPI IN SETUP popup button
Press this button to open the GPI IN SETUP popup window.
The button shows the name of the currently selected function or parameter.
5. Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port.
For each port, select either low-active or high-active as appropriate for the specifications of the
external device you’re using.
1
2
3
Other functions
Reference Manual
223
6. To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI IN
SETUP popup button.
The GPI IN SETUP popup window will appear.
NOTE
The items that can be selected are the same as for the USER DEFINED keys.
7. In each field, select the desired function or parameter.
NOTE
• With latched operation, the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is
input from the external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of
external switch.
• With unlatched operation, the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch
is at the high level or low level. In this case, you may use either a non-locking or a locking type
of external switch as appropriate for your needs.
8. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
You will return to the GPI screen.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 to specify functions and parameters for other ports.
NOTE
Settings in the GPI screen are common to all scenes. They can be saved as SETUP data.
Using GPI OUT
The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by performing
operations on the CL series console.
1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector.
2. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. Press the MIDI/GPI button.
The MIDI/GPI screen will appear.
4. Press the GPI tab.
The GPI page will appear.
1 GPI OUT status indicator
This indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port.
2 POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI OUT port.
............ (Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active.
............ (Low active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active.
43
1
2
Other functions
Reference Manual
224
3 GPI OUT SETUP popup button
Press this button to open the GPI OUT SETUP popup window.
The button shows the name of the currently selected function or parameter.
4 TEST button
While this is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control signal.
5. Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port.
For each port, select either low-active or high-active as appropriate for the specifications of the
external device you’re using.
6. To assign a function or parameter, press the GPI OUT SETUP popup button.
You can assign the following functions.
7. In each field, select the desired function or parameter.
8. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 to specify functions and parameters for other ports.
Using FADER START
Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate in tandem
with fader operations.
1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector.
2. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
3. Press the MIDI/GPI button.
The MIDI/GPI screen will appear.
Function Parameter CL console operation
NO ASSIGN --- No assignment
CUE ACTIVE
CUE ON Turn on the [CUE] key of the selected channel
DCA ONLY Turn on the DCA [CUE] key
INPUT ONLY Turn on the [CUE] key of an input channel
OUTPUT ONLY Turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel
GPI IN ACTIVE IND. PORT 1–PORT 5
The function assigned to GPI IN port 1–5
becomes active
POWER ON --- The power of the CL series console is turned on
USER DEF.
KEY ACTIVE IND.
USER DEFINED KEY 1–
USER DEFINED KEY 16
The function assigned to the USER DEFINED
key becomes active
Other functions
Reference Manual
225
4. Press the FADER START tab to access the FADER START page.
The following items are displayed.
1 CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
2 OUTPUT DESTINATION field
• GPI OUT1–GPI OUT5 buttons
Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings.
3 Fader indicator
This indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys of the console panel to select a fader.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4 THRESHOLD field
• UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs
These specify the level that will be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal. A trigger signal
will be output when the fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level, or when the fader falls below the
DOWNSTROKE level. If FADER TALLY is selected as the fader mode, UPSTROKE and
DOWNSTROKE specify the level range for which a trigger signal will be output. You can use the
multifunction knobs to operate these parameters.
NOTE
• The THRESHOLD values specified by the UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to
all GPI OUT ports. However, you can individually choose the channel (fader) for each GPI OUT
port.
• Only the UPSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START, and only the
DOWNSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP. If MODE is set to FADER
TALLY, both the UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid.
5 MODE field
Here you can select the mode of fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output from the
GPI OUT port.
You can choose from the following fader modes.
•NO ASSIGN
Operating the fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output.
• FADER START
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves
upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a point below it.
• FADER STOP
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches the
specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to 9.95 dB).
• FADER TALLY
A trigger signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the
specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a point below it. This signal will be held
until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to 9.95 dB) or until that GPI
OUT port receives a different trigger.
3
2
5
4
1
Other functions
Reference Manual
226
The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI OUT port will change in
each fader mode when a fader is operated. In this example, UPSTROKE in the THRESHOLD field is
set to –60.00, and DOWNSTROKE is set to –∞. (This illustration shows the case in which is
selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port. If the polarity is , the polarity of the output signal
will be reversed.)
NOTE
At the high level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires high
level, take it from the +5V power supply pin. However in this case, the amount of current is limited;
for details, refer to the “Input/output characteristics” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.
5. For each GPI OUT port, specify the channel that will cause the external device to
operate, and the type of operation.
6. When you have finished making settings, click the “x” symbol located in the upper
right to close the FADER MODE screen.
FADER
START
FADER
TALLY
FADER
STOP
250 msec
250 msec
Appendices
Reference Manual
227
Appendices
EQ Library List
# Title
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
01 Bass Drum 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 1.25 10.0 0.90 —
02 Bass Drum 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF
G +8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON
F 80.0 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 1.4 4.5 2.2 —
03 Snare Drum 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB
F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz
Q 1.25 4.5 0.11 —
04 Snare Drum 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q — 10.0 0.70 0.10
05 Tom-tom 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB
F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz
Q 1.4 10.0 1.25 0.28
06 Cymbal
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB
F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz
Q — 8.0 0.90 —
07 High Hat
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB
F 95.0 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz
Q —0.501.0 —
08 Percussion
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz
Q — 4.5 0.56 —
09 E. Bass 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q —5.04.5—
10 E. Bass 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB
F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q 0.10 5.0 6.3 —
11 Syn. Bass 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 0.10 8.0 4.5 —
12 Syn. Bass 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 1.6 8.0 2.2 —
13 Piano 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz
Q —8.00.90—
14 Piano 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 5.6 10.0 0.70 —
15 E. G. Clean
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 0.18 10.0 6.3 —
16 E. G. Crunch 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz
Q 8.0 4.5 0.63 9.0
17 E. G. Crunch 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz
Q 8.0 0.40 0.16 —
18 E. G. Dist. 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q —9.010.0—
19 E. G. Dist. 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q — 10.0 4.0 —
20 A. G. Stroke 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 0.90 4.5 3.5 —
# Title
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
21 A. G. Stroke 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz
Q —9.04.5—
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q —4.54.50.125
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G 0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz
Q —7.04.5—
24 Brass Sec.
PEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKING
G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0
25 Male Vocal 1
PEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKING
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB
F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11
26 Male Vocal 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q 0.11 10.0 5.6 —
27 Female Vo. 1
PEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKING
G –1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB
F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz
Q 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14
28 Female Vo. 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q —0.160.20—
29 Chorus & Harmo
PEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKING
G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0
30 Total EQ 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB
F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz
Q 7.0 2.2 5.6 —
31 Total EQ 2
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz
Q 7.0 2.8 5.6 —
# Title
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
Appendices
Reference Manual
228
DYNAMICS Library List
32 Total EQ 3
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 67.0 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz
Q — 0.28 0.70 —
33 Bass Drum 3
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz
Q 2.0 10.0 0.40 0.40
34 Snare Drum 3
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q —4.52.80.10
35 Tom-tom 2
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz
Q — 4.5 1.25 —
36 Piano 3
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q 8.0 10.0 9.0 —
37 Piano Low
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 —
38 Piano High
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB
F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz
Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 0.10
39 Fine-EQ Cass
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB
F 75.0 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q —4.51.8—
40 Narrator
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q 4.0 7.0 0.63 —
# Title
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH
# Title Type Parameter Value
1Gate GATE
Threshold (dB) –26
Range (dB) –56
Attack (ms) 0
Hold (ms) 2.56
Decay (ms) 331
2Ducking DUCKING
Threshold (dB) –19
Range (dB) –22
Attack (ms) 93
Hold (ms) 1.20 S
Decay (ms) 6.32 S
3A. Dr. BD GATE
Threshold (dB) –11
Range (dB) –53
Attack (ms) 0
Hold (ms) 1.93
Decay (ms) 400
4A. Dr. SN GATE
Threshold (dB) –8
Range (dB) –23
Attack (ms) 1
Hold (ms) 0.63
Decay (ms) 238
5De-Esser DE-ESSER
Threshold (dB) –8
Frequency (kHz) 2.00
Type HPF
Q1.6
6Comp COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –8
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 30
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 250
7Expand EXPANDER
Threshold (dB) –23
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) 3.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 70
8Compander (H)COMPANDER-H
Threshold (dB) –10
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 6
Release (ms) 250
9Compander (S)COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) –8
Ratio ( :1) 4
Attack (ms) 25
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 24
Release (ms) 180
10 A. Dr. BD COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –24
Ratio ( :1) 3
Attack (ms) 9
Out gain (dB) 5.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 58
11 A. Dr. BD COMPANDER-H
Threshold (dB) –11
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) –1.5
Width (dB) 7
Release (ms) 192
12 A. Dr. SN COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –17
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 8
Out gain (dB) 3.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 12
13 A. Dr. SN EXPANDER
Threshold (dB) –23
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 0
Out gain (dB) 0.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 151
14 A. Dr. SN COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) –8
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 11
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 10
Release (ms) 128
15 A. Dr. Tom EXPANDER
Threshold (dB) –20
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 2
Out gain (dB) 5.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 749
16 A. Dr. OverTop COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) –24
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 38
Out gain (dB) –3.5
Width (dB) 54
Release (ms) 842
17 E. B. Finger COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –12
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 15
Out gain (dB) 4.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 470
# Title Type Parameter Value
Appendices
Reference Manual
229
* At fs=44.1 kHz
18 E. B. Slap COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –12
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 6
Out gain (dB) 4.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 133
19 Syn. Bass COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –10
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 9
Out gain (dB) 3.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 250
20 Piano1 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –9
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 17
Out gain (dB) 1.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 238
21 Piano2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –18
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 7
Out gain (dB) 6.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 174
22 E. Guitar COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –8
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 7
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee 4
Release (ms) 261
23 A. Guitar COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –10
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 5
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 238
24 Strings1 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –11
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 33
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 749
25 Strings2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –12
Ratio ( :1) 1.5
Attack (ms) 93
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 4
Release (ms) 1.35 S
# Title Type Parameter Value
26 Strings3 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –17
Ratio ( :1) 1.5
Attack (ms) 76
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 186
27 BrassSection COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –18
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 18
Out gain (dB) 4.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 226
28 Syn. Pad COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –13
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 58
Out gain (dB) 2.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 238
29 SamplingPerc COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) –18
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 8
Out gain (dB) –2.5
Width (dB) 18
Release (ms) 238
30 Sampling BD COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –14
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 2
Out gain (dB) 3.5
Knee 4
Release (ms) 35
31 Sampling SN COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –18
Ratio ( :1) 4
Attack (ms) 8
Out gain (dB) 8.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 354
32 Hip Comp COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) –23
Ratio ( :1) 20
Attack (ms) 15
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Width (dB) 15
Release (ms) 163
33 Solo Vocal1 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –20
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 31
Out gain (dB) 2.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 342
# Title Type Parameter Value
34 Solo Vocal2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –8
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 26
Out gain (dB) 1.5
Knee 3
Release (ms) 331
35 Chorus COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –9
Ratio ( :1) 1.7
Attack (ms) 39
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee 2
Release (ms) 226
36 Click Erase EXPANDER
Threshold (dB) –33
Ratio ( :1) 2
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) 2.0
Knee 2
Release (ms) 284
37 Announcer COMPANDER-H
Threshold (dB) –14
Ratio ( :1) 2.5
Attack (ms) 1
Out gain (dB) –2.5
Width (dB) 18
Release (ms) 180
38 Limiter1 COMPANDER-S
Threshold (dB) –9
Ratio ( :1) 3
Attack (ms) 20
Out gain (dB) –3.0
Width (dB) 90
Release (ms) 3.90 s
39 Limiter2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) 0
Ratio ( :1) ∞
Attack (ms) 0
Out gain (dB) 0.0
Knee hard
Release (ms) 319
40 Total Comp1 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –18
Ratio ( :1) 3.5
Attack (ms) 94
Out gain (dB) 2.5
Knee hard
Release (ms) 447
41 Total Comp2 COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB) –16
Ratio ( :1) 6
Attack (ms) 11
Out gain (dB) 6.0
Knee 1
Release (ms) 180
# Title Type Parameter Value
Appendices
Reference Manual
230
Dynamics Parameters
Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2. Output channels provide
DYNAMICS section 1.
An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types:
GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, and EXPANDER.
An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 2 provides the following four types:
COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft),
and DE-ESSER.
An output channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types:
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), and COMPANDER-S
(Compander Soft).
■ GATE
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
■ DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced
automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified
THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD (dB) –72 to 0 (73 points)
This determines the level at which the gate effect is
applied.
RANGE (dB) –∞, –69 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when the
gate closes.
ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)
This determines how fast the gate opens when the
signal exceeds the threshold level.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long the gate stays open once
the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how fast the gate closes once the
hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the
duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
Input Level Time Time
Output Level
Input Level
Output Level
• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis
RANGE
THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD
RANGE
Input Signal Output Signal
ATTACK DECAY
HOLD
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN)
required to activate ducking.
RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when
ducking is activated.
ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is ducked once
the ducker has been triggered.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points)
This determines how long ducking remains active
once the trigger signal has fallen below the
THRESHOLD level.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its
normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below
the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration
required for the level to change by 6 dB.
Input Level Time Time
Output Level
Input Level
Output Level
RANGE
THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD
RANGE
ATTACK DECAY
HOLD
• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis
Input Signal Output Signal
Appendices
Reference Manual
231
■ COMPRESSOR
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The
COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the
threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the threshold.
■ EXPANDER
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to
trigger the compressor.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of compression, that is,
the change in output signal level relative to change
in input signal level.
ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal will be
compressed once the compressor has been
triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor returns to
its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops
below the threshold. The value is expressed as the
duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the compressor’s output signal level.
KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how compression is applied at the
threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is
applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified
threshold, creating a more natural sound.
•I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard, OUT
GAIN=0.0dB)
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
RATIO
THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD
ATTACK RELEASE
Input Level Time Time
Output Level
Input Level
Output Level
Input Signal Output Signal
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to
trigger the expander.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the expander returns to its
normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the
threshold.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the signal is expanded
once the signal level drops below the threshold. The
value is expressed as the duration required for the
level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the expander’s output signal level.
KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how expansion is applied at the
threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is
applied gradually as the signal falls below the
specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
•I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
RATIO
THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD
ATTACK RELEASE
Input Level Time Time
Output Level
Input Level
Output Level
Input Signal Output Signal
Appendices
Reference Manual
232
■ COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S)
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1 0dB and higher ................................ Functions as a limiter.
2 Exceeding the threshold ................. Functions as a compressor.
3 Below the threshold and width ..... Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of
1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a
fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and
expansion processes.
■ DE-ESSER
This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal.
Effect Type List
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points)
This determines the level at which compression is
applied.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed
or expanded once the compander has been
triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor or
expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger
signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold
respectively. The value is expressed as the duration
required for the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB) –18.0 to 0.0 (181 points) This sets the compander’s output signal level.
WIDTH (dB) 1–90 (90 points)
This determines how far below the threshold
expansion will be applied. The expander is activated
when the level drops below the threshold and width.
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD –54 to 0 (55 points) Threshold level at which the de-esser effect applies.
FREQUENCY 1kHz–12.5kHz (45 points) Cutoff frequency of the filter used to detect the high frequencies.
TYPE HPF, BPF Type of filter used to detect the frequency band.
Q 10.0–0.10 (41 points) Q (steepness) of the filter when TYPE is BPF.
0dB
Input Level
Output Level
WIDTH
THRESHOLD
Title Type Description
REV-X Hall REV-X HALL New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay,
and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound.
Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL,
REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
REV-X Room REV-X ROOM
REV-X Plate REV-X PLATE
Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate
Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate
Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb
Early Ref. EARLY REF. Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections
Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections
Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay
Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay
Mod.Delay MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation
Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay
Echo ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback
Chorus CHORUS Chorus
Flange FLANGE Flanger
Symphonic SYMPHONIC
Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation
than normal chorus
Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter
Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger
Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter
HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results
Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter
Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo
Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto-panner
Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation
Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator
Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated filter
Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter
Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel
RevChorus REVCHORUS Reverb and chorus in series
Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel
RevFlange REVFLANGE Reverb and flanger in series
Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel
RevSympho. REVSYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series
RevPan REVPAN Reverb and auto-pan in series
Delay+Er. DELA
Y+ER. Delay and early reflections in parallel
DelayEr. DELAYER. Delay and early reflections in series
Appendices
Reference Manual
233
Effects Parameters
■ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE
Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich reverberation,
smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from
three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel
DelayRev DELAYREV Delay and reverb in series
DistDelay DISTDELAY Distortion and delay in series
Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler
Distortion DISTORTION Distortion
Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation
Comp276 COMP276
This compressor emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has
become a sought-after classic in recording studios.
Comp276S COMP276S This is a stereo model of COMP276.
Comp260 COMP260
This compressor emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the latter
1970s that has become a sought-after classic for live SR.
Comp260S COMP260S This is a stereo model of the COMP260.
Equalizer601 EQUALIZER601
This equalizer emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It
can be used to obtain a sense of drive.
OpenDeck OPENDECK
This is a tape saturation effect that emulates the tape compression produced by
two open-reel tape recorders: a recording deck and a reproduction deck.
M.Band Dyna. M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor
M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor
Title Type Description
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME
0.28–27.94 s
*1
*1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ
depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting.
Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–120.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO 0.1–1.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio
LO.FREQ 22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting
DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
ROOM SIZE 0–28 Size of room
DECAY 0–53 Gate closing speed
HPF THRU, 22.0 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
1.00 kHz–18.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb
E/R BAL. 0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed
HOLD
*1
*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
Gate open time
DECAY
*2
*2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Gate closing speed
Appendices
Reference Manual
234
■ STEREO REVERB
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
■ EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
■ MONO DELAY
One input, one output basic repeat delay.
■ STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type
INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
E/R BAL. 0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early
reflections)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Parameter Range Description
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density
ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections
FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Parameter Range Description
TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections
FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Parameter Range Description
DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1. (Max. value depends on tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB. G L –99 to +99%
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R –99 to +99%
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Appendices
Reference Manual
235
■ MOD.DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
■ DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
■ ECHO
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
■ CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
*2
*2.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time
LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level
LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level
LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
NOTE C
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time
FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time
FB. G L –99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R –99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
LR FBG –99 to +99%
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
RL FBG –99 to +99%
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
NOTE FBL
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D L
NOTE FBR
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D R
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Appendices
Reference Manual
236
■ FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
■ SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
■ PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
■ DYNA.FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance
STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Parameter Range Description
SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity
DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
*1
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Decay speed
OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset
FB.GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Appendices
Reference Manual
237
■ DYNA.PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
■ HQ. PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
■ DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
■ TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Parameter Range Description
SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity
DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
*1
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Decay speed
OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
FB.GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Parameter Range Description
PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift
FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine
DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
Parameter Range Description
PITCH 1 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift
FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 1 –100 to +100%
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse
phase)
PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan
DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time
FB. G 1 –99 to +99%
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision
PITCH 2 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift
FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 2 –100 to +100%
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse
phase)
PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan
DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time
FB. G 2 –99 to +99%
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE 1
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay
NOTE 2
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Appendices
Reference Manual
238
■ AUTOPAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
■ ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
■ RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
■ MOD.FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
■ DYNA.FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
DIR.
*1
*1. LR, LR, LR , Tu r n L, Tu r n R
Panning direction
WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*2
*2.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
Parameter Range Description
ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start
SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed
FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed
DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level
ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes
LOW 0–100 Low-frequency filter
HIGH 0–100 High-frequency filter
Parameter Range Description
SOURCE OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency
FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed
FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
FM NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ
Parameter Range Description
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset
RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance
LEVEL 0–100 Output level
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Parameter Range Description
SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity
DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
*1
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Filter frequency change decay speed
TYPE LPF, H PF, B PF F i lt e r t ype
OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset
RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance
LEVEL 0–100 Output Level
Appendices
Reference Manual
239
■ REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
■ REVCHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
■ REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
■ REVFLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
REV.BAL 0–100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance
(0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
REV.BAL 0–100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance
(0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Appendices
Reference Manual
240
■ REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
■ REVSYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
■ REVPAN
This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan effect.
■ DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
REV/SYM 0–100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
REV.BAL 0–100%
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance
(0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time
WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1
*1.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
REV.BAL 0–100%
Reverb and panned reverb balance
(0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
DIR.
*1
*1. LR, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R
Panning direction
WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*2
*2.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
DLY/ER 0–100%
Delay and early reflections balance
(0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
Appendices
Reference Manual
241
■ DELAYER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
■ DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
■ DELAYREV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
DLY.BAL 0–100%
Delay and early reflected delay balance
(0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing
LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
DLY/REV 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
DLY.BAL 0–100%
Delay and delayed reverb balance
(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0–10 Spread
DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
Appendices
Reference Manual
242
■ DISTDELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
■ MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
■ FREEZE
One input, two output basic sampler.
■ DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter Range Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive
MASTER 0–100 Master volume
TONE –10 to +10 Tone control
N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction
SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
*1
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
*2
*2.
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time
FB. GAIN –99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth
DLY.BAL 0–100%
Distortion and delay balance
(0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)
Parameter Range Description
TYPE 1 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency
LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level
RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance
TYPE 2 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency
LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level
RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance
TYPE 3 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency
LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level
RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance
Parameter Range Description
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY
buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the
REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal.
REC DLY –1000 to +1000 ms
Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is
received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received.
PLY MODE
MOMENT, CONTI.,
INPUT
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is
pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has
been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP
NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.
TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or
playback)
TRG MASK 0–1000 ms
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the
duration of the TRG MASK time.
START
*1
*1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)
Playback start point in milliseconds
END
*1
Playback end point in milliseconds
LOOP
*1
Loop start point in milliseconds
LOOP
NUM
0–100 Number of times the sample plays
PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Playback pitch shift
FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift fine
MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages.
START
[SAMPLE]
0–131000 Playback start point in samples
END
[SAMPLE]
0–131000 Playback end point in samples
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
0–131000 Loop start point in samples
Parameter Range Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive
MASTER 0–100 Master volume
TONE –10 to +10 Tone
N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction
Appendices
Reference Manual
243
■ AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
■ COMP276
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios.
It will produce a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can control two monaural
channels independently.
■ COMP276S
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios.
It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can link and control the L and
R channel parameters.
■ COMP260
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard for live
SR. You can control two monaural channels independently. You can also link several parameters via
stereo links.
■ COMP260S
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard for live
SR. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters.
Parameter Range Description
AMP TYPE
*1
*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive
MASTER 0–100 Master volume
BASS 0–100 Bass tone control
MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control
TREBLE 0–100 High tone control
N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction
CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
Parameter Range Description
INPUT 1 –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 input level
OUTPUT 1 –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 output gain
RATIO 1 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio for CH1 compressor
ATTACK 1 0.022–50.4 ms Attack time for CH1 compressor
RELEASE1 10.88–544.22 ms Release time for CH1 compressor
MAKE UP1 OFF, ON
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is
applied
SIDEHPF1 OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on, the
compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing
the low range.
INPUT 2 –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 input level
OUTPUT 2 –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 output gain
RATIO 2 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of CH2 compressor
ATTACK 2 0.022–50.4 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor
RELEASE2 10.88–544.22 ms Release time of CH2 compressor
MAKE UP2 OFF, ON
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is
applied
SIDEHPF2 OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on, the
compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing
the low range.
Parameter Range Description
INPUT –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the input level
OUTPUT –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the output gain
RATIO 1:2, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of the compressor
ATTACK 0.022–50.4 ms Attack time of the compressor
RELEASE 10.88–544.22 ms Release time of the compressor
MAKE UP OFF, ON
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is
applied
SIDE HPF OFF, ON
When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on, the
compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing
the low range.
Parameter Range Description
THRE.1 –60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of CH compressor
KNEE1 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of CH1 compressor
ATTACK1 0.01–80.0 ms Attack time of CH1 compressor
RELEASE1 6.2–999 ms Release time of CH1 compressor
RATIO1 1.0–500, ∞ Ratio of CH1 compressor
OUTPUT1 –20 to 40 dB Adjusts the CH1 output gain
THRE.2 –60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of CH2 compressor
KNEE2 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of CH2 compressor
ATTACK2 0.01–80.0 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor
RELEASE2 6.2–999 ms Release time of CH2 compressor
RATIO2 1.0–500, ∞ Ratio of CH2 compressor
OUTPUT2 –20 to 40 dB Adjusts the CH2 output gain
ST LINK OFF, ON
Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair. THRE., KNEE, ATTACK, RELEASE, and
RATIO parameters are linked; OUTPUT parameter is not linked
Parameter Range Description
THRE. –60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of the compressor
KNEE SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of the compressor
ATTACK 0.01–80.0 ms Attack time of the compressor
RELEASE 6.2–999 ms Release time of the compressor
RATIO 1.0–500, ∞ Ratio of the compressor
OUTPUT –20 to 40 dB Adjusts the output gain
Appendices
Reference Manual
244
■ EQUALIZER601
This effect emulates the characteristics of 70’s analog equalizers. Re-creating the distortion of typical
analog circuits will add drive to the sound.
■ OPENDECK
It emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck and a
playback deck.) You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such as the deck type,
tape quality, playback speed, etc.
■ M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering
for each band.
Parameter Range Description
LO TYPE HPF-2/1, LSH-1/2 Type of EQ1
LO F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Cut-off frequency of EQ1
LO G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ1
MID1 Q 0.50–16.0 Q of EQ2
MID1 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ2
MID1 G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ2
MID2 Q 0.50–16.0 Q of EQ3
MID2 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ3
MID2 G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ3
INPUT –18.0 to +18.0 dB Input gain
OUTPUT –18.0 to +18.0 dB Output gain
MID3 Q 0.50–16.0 Q of EQ4
MID3 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ4
MID3 G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ4
MID4 Q 0.50–16.0 Q of EQ5
MID4 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ5
MID4 G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ5
HI TYPE LPF-2/1, HSH-1/2 Type of EQ6
HI F
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
*1
*1. 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz (LPF-1, LPF-2), 1.0 kHz to 20.0 kHz (HSH-1, HSH-2)
Cut-off frequency of EQ6
HI G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ6
LO SW OFF, ON Switches EQ1 on/off
MID1 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ2 on/off
MID2 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ3 on/off
MID3 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ4 on/off
MID4 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ5 on/off
HI SW OFF, ON Switches EQ6 on/off
TYPE CLEAN, DRIVE
Selects the equalizer type. The CLEAN equalizer provides non-distorted,
clear, typical digital sound, emulating variations in frequency response in
the analog circuits. The DRIVE equalizer provides distorted, driven sound
that enhances analog flavor, emulating changes in frequency response in
the analog circuits.
Parameter Range Description
REC DEC
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
Selects the recording deck type
REC LVL –96.0 to +18.0 dB
Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape
compression is generated, which narrows the dynamic range and distorts
the sound
REC HI –6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck
REC BIAS –1.00 to +1.00 Adjusts the bias of the recording deck
REPR DEC
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
Selects the playback deck type
REPR LVL –96.0 to +18.0 dB Adjusts the output level of the playback deck
REPR HI –6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck
REPR LO –6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck
MAKE UP Off, On
When you adjust the REC LVL, the REPR LVL reflects the change,
maintaining the relative output level. You can change the amount of
distortion without changing the output level.
TP SPEED 15ips, 30ips Selects the tape speed
TP KIND Old, New Selects the tape type
Parameter Range Description
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope
LOW GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Low band gain
MID GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Mid band gain
HI. GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB High band gain
TOTAL –72.0 dB to +12.0 dB Overall gain
CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
CMP.THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the compressor
CMP.RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the compressor
CMP.ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the compressor
CMP.REL
*1
Release time of the compressor
CMP.KNEE 0–5 Knee of the compressor
CMP.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the compressor
EXP.THRE –54.0 dB to –24.0 dB Threshold of the expander
EXP.RAT 1:1 to 5:1 Ratio of the expander
EXP.REL
*1
Release time of the expander
EXP.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the expander
LIM.THRE –12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the limiter
LIM.ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the limiter
Appendices
Reference Manual
245
■ M.BAND COMP
Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each
band.
Premium Rack Processor Parameters
■ Portico5033
This models an analog 5-band EQ made by the RND company.
■ Portico5043
This models an analog compressor/limiter made by the RND company.
LIM.REL
*1
Release time of the limiter
LIM.KNEE 0–5 Knee of the limiter
LIM.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the limiter
PRESENCE –10 to +10
Positive (+) values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the
threshold of the low band. Negative (–) values do the opposite. If this is
set to 0, the high, mid, and low bands will be affected in the same way.
LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay
MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Parameter Range Description
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope
LOW GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Low band gain
MID GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Mid band gain
HI. GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB High band gain
TOTAL –72.0 dB to +12.0 dB Overall gain
CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0dB, OFF Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the low band compressor
LOW RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the low band compressor
LOW ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the low band compressor
LOW REL
*1
*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Release time of the low band compressor
LOW KNEE 0–5 Knee of the low band compressor
LOW BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the low band compressor
MID THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the mid band compressor
MID RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the mid band compressor
MID ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the mid band compressor
MID REL
*1
Release time of the mid band compressor
MID KNEE 0–5 Knee of the mid band compressor
MID BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the mid band compressor
HI. THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the high band compressor
HI. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the high band compressor
HI. ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the high band compressor
HI. RAT
*1
Release time of the high band compressor
HI. KNEE 0–5 Knee of the high band compressor
HI. BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the high band compressor
LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay
MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level
Parameter Range Description
Parameter Range Description
ALL BYPASS OFF, ON
Turns bypass on/off for the EQ. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will
pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
TRIM –12.0 to 12.0 dB Input gain
LF FREQ 30.00 to 300.0 Hz Center frequency of the LF band
LF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the LF band
LMF IN OFF, ON Switches the LMF band on/off
LMF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the LMF band
LMF FREQ 50.00 to 400.0 Hz Center frequency of the LMF band
LMF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the LMF band
MF IN OFF, ON Switches the MF band on/off
MF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the MF band
MF FREQ 330.0 to 2500 Hz Center frequency of the MF band
MF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the MF band
HMF IN OFF, ON Switches the HMF band on/off
HMF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the HMF band
HMF FREQ 1.80k to 16.0k Hz Center frequency of the HMF band
HMF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the HMF band
LF/HF IN OFF, ON Switches the LF/HF bands on/off
HF FREQ 2.50k to 25.0k Hz Center frequency of the HF band
HF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the HF band
Parameter Range Description
IN OFF, ON
Turns bypass on/off for the compressor. When bypassed, the button will
be unlit. However even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through
the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
FB OFF, ON Switches between feed-forward type and feed-back type.
THRESHOLD –50.0 to 0.0 dB Threshold level
RATIO 1.10 : 1 to 28.9 : 1, LIMIT Compression ratio
ATTACK 20 to 75 ms Attack time
RELEASE 100 ms to 2.50 sec Release time
GAIN –6.0 to 20.0 dB Output level
Appendices
Reference Manual
246
■ U76
This models a well-known vintage compressor/limiter used in a wide range of situations.
■ Opt-2A
This processor emulates a well-known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor.
■ EQ-1A
This processor emulates a vintage EQ that’s considered a classic example of a passive EQ.
■ Dynamic EQ
This is a newly developed equalizer that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the input
signal, controlling the amount of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or expander.
Parameter Range Description
INPUT –96.0 to 0.0 dB Input level
OUTPUT –96.0 to 0.0 dB Output level
ATTACK 5.50 to 0.10 ms
Attack time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces
the fastest attack.
RELEASE 1100.0 to 56.4 ms
Release time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces
the fastest release.
RATIO ALL, 4, 8, 12, 20 Switches the compression ratio. Pressing ALL produces the strongest effect.
METER OFF, +4, +8, GR Switches the meter display
Parameter Range Description
GAIN –56.0 dB to 40.0 dB Output level
PEAK REDUCTION –48.0 dB to 48.0 dB Amount of gain reduction
RATIO 2.00 to 10.00 Compression ratio
METER SELECT
OUTPUT+10, GAIN REDUCTION,
OUTPUT+4
Switches the meter display
Parameter Range Description
LOW FREQUENCY 20, 30, 60, 100 Hz Frequency range of the low range filter
(LOW) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the low range filter
(LOW) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the low range filter
HIGH FREQUENCY 3k, 4k, 5k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k Hz Frequency range of the high range filter
(HIGH) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the high range filter
(HIGH) BAND WIDTH 0.0 to 10.0 Band width of the high range filter
(HIGH) ATTEN SEL 5k, 10k, 20k Hz Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter
(HIGH) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the high range filter
IN OFF, ON
Turns the processor on/off. If this is off, the filter section
will be bypassed, but the signal will pass through the
input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Parameter Range Description
BAND ON/OFF OFF, ON Turns the corresponding band on/off
SIDECHAIN CUE OFF, ON
If this is on, the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will
be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
SIDECHAIN LISTEN OFF, ON
If this is on, the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics
will be output to the bus (such as the STEREO bus or a MIX/
MATRIX bus) to which the inserted channel is being sent.
FILTER TYPE Low Shelf, Bell, Hi Shelf Switches the type of equalizer and sidechain filter
FREQUENCY 20.0 to 20.0k Hz Frequency controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter
Q 15.0 to 0.50 Q of the equalizer and sidechain filter
THRESHOLD –80.0 to 10.0 dB Threshold value at which processing begins to apply
RATIO ∞ : 1 to 1 : 1.50 Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal.
MODE BELOW, ABOVE
Specifies whether the processor will operate when the
sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting (ABOVE) or
when it falls below the threshold setting (BELOW)
ATTACK/RELEASE FAST, SLOW, AUTO
Attack time/release time for when compression or boost is
applied
Appendices
Reference Manual
247
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some effects of the CL series can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types of effect;
delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change
according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will
change according to the tempo.
Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC: .................................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO:.........These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.: ..........DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the
modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect
sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and
FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects.
How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY (or FREQ.) value
*a
from the TEMPO and NOTE.
Turn SYNC ON
Change NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
Change TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) sec
FREQ. = (TEMPO/60) / (NOTE x 4) Hz
Example 1:
When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter
note
DELAY = new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
Example 2:
When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60 / new TEMPO)
= (1/8) x 4 x (60/121)
= 0.2479 (sec)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values
The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values.
You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum
possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF.
Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
• It is a common value shared by all effects
• You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a
Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when
that effect was stored. Here is an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120 Change TEMPO to 60 Recall the effect: TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if
the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it
was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the CL series does
not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the
same as when that effect was stored.
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
= 1/48
= 3/16
= 1/24
= 1/4
= 1/16
= 3/8
= 1/12
= 1/2
= 3/4
= 3/32
= 1/8
= 1/1
= 2/1
= 1/6
Appendices
Reference Manual
248
Parameters that can be assigned to control changes
Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2
NO ASSIGN — 0
FADER H
INPUT
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
FADER L
INPUT
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
CH ON
INPUT
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
PHASE INPUT
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
INSERT
INPUT
CH 1–CH 72
*1
OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
DIRECT OUT ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
PAN/BALANCE INPUT
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
BALANCE OUTPUT
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–STEREO R
TO STEREO ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
TO MONO ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
LCR
ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
CSR
MIX/MATRIX SEND
MIX 1 ON – MIX24 ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MATRIX 1 ON – MATRIX 8 ON
MIX 1 POINT – MIX 24 POINT
MATRIX 1 POINT – MATRIX 8 POINT
MIX 1 LEVEL H – MIX 24 LEVEL H
MIX 1 LEVEL L – MIX 24 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H – MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L – MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MIX 1/2 PAN – MIX 23/24 PAN
MATRIX1/2 PAN – MATRIX7/8 PAN
MIX TO STEREO
TO STEREO ON
MIX 1–MIX 24TO MONO ON
PAN
MIX TO MATRIX
MATRIX 1 POINT – MATRIX 8 POINT
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1 ON – MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H – MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L – MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN – MATRIX 7/8 PAN
STEREO TO MATRIX
MATRIX 1 POINT – MATRIX 8 POINT
STEREO L–MONO(C)
MATRIX 1 ON – MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H – MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L – MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN – MATRIX 7/8 PAN
INPUT EQ
ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
INPUT ATT INPUT
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
INPUT HPF
ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
FREQ
OUTPUT EQ
ON
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW HPF ON
HIGH LPF ON
Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2
Appendices
Reference Manual
249
OUTPUT ATT OUTPUT
MIX1-MIX24
MATRIX1-MATRIX8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
INPUT DYNAMICS1
ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RANGE
HOLD H
HOLD L
DECAY/RELEASE H
DECAY/RELEASE L
RATIO
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN H
GAIN L
INPUT DYNAMICS2
ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
FILTER FREQ
OUTPUT DYNAMICS1
ON
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
EFFECT
BYPASS
Rack1–8MIX BALANCE
PARAM 1 H – PARAM 32 L
Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2
GEQ
ON A
Rack1–16
ON B
GAIN A 1 – GAIN A 31
GAIN B 1 – GAIN B 31
PREMIUM RACK A
BYPASS
Rack1–8
PARAM 1 H – PARAM 64 L
PREMIUM RACK B
BYPASS
Rack1–8
PARAM 1 H – PARAM 64 L
DCA
ON
DCA 1–DCA 16FADER H
FADER L
MUTE MASTER ON MASTER 1–MASTER 8
RECALL SAFE ON
CH 1–CH 72
*1
STIN1L–STIN8R
MIX 1–MIX 24
MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8
STEREO L–MONO(C)
GEQ RACK 1A–16B
EFFECT RACK 1A–8B
PREMIUM RACK 1A–8B
DCA 1–DCA16
*1. CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48
Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2
Appendices
Reference Manual
250
NRPN parameter assignments
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
FADER
INPUT 0000 0057
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
0060 007D
INPUT to MIX9-16 LEVEL
MIX9 SEND 007E 00D5
MIX10 SEND 00DE 0135
MIX11 SEND 013E 0195
MIX12 SEND 019E 01F5
MIX13 SEND 01FE 0255
MIX14 SEND 025E 02B5
MIX15 SEND 02BE 0315
MIX16 SEND 031E 0375
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
LEVEL
MATRIX1 SEND 037E 03D5
MATRIX2 SEND 03DE 0435
MATRIX3 SEND 043E 0495
MATRIX4 SEND 049E 04F5
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX LEVEL
MATRIX1 SEND 04FE 0513
MATRIX2 SEND 0514 0529
MATRIX3 SEND 052A 053F
MATRIX4 SEND 0540 0555
MATRIX5 SEND 0556 056B
MATRIX6 SEND 056C 0581
MATRIX7 SEND 0582 0597
MATRIX8 SEND 0598 05AD
ON
INPUT 05B6 060D
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
0616 0633
INPUT to MIX9-16 ON
MIX9 SEND 0634 068B
MIX10 SEND 0694 06EB
MIX11 SEND 06F4 074B
MIX12 SEND 0754 07AB
MIX13 SEND 07B4 080B
MIX14 SEND 0814 086B
MIX15 SEND 0874 08CB
MIX16 SEND 08D4 092B
INPUT to MATRIX1-4 ON
MATRIX1 SEND 0934 098B
MATRIX2 SEND 0994 09EB
MATRIX3 SEND 09F4 0A4B
MATRIX4 SEND 0A54 0AAB
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX ON
MATRIX1 SEND 0AB4 0AC9
MATRIX2 SEND 0ACA 0ADF
MATRIX3 SEND 0AE0 0AF5
MATRIX4 SEND 0AF6 0B0B
MATRIX5 SEND 0B0C 0B21
MATRIX6 SEND 0B22 0B37
MATRIX7 SEND 0B38 0B4D
MATRIX8 SEND 0B4E 0B63
MIX1-8 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST 0B64 0B6B
PHASE INPUT 0B6C 0BC3
INSERT ON
INPUT 0BCC 0C13
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
0C2C 0C49
INPUT to MIX9-16 PRE/
POST
MIX9 SEND 0C4A 0CA1
MIX10 SEND 0CAA 0D01
MIX11 SEND 0D0A 0D61
MIX12 SEND 0D6A 0DC1
MIX13 SEND 0DCA 0E21
MIX14 SEND 0E2A 0E81
MIX15 SEND 0E8A 0EE1
MIX16 SEND 0EEA 0F41
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
PRE/POST
MATRIX1 SEND 0F4A 0FA1
MATRIX2 SEND 0FAA 1001
MATRIX3 SEND 100A 1061
MATRIX4 SEND 106A 10C1
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
LEVEL
MIX1 SEND 10CA 10D1
MIX2 SEND 10D2 10D9
MIX3 SEND 10DA 10E1
MIX4 SEND 10E2 10E9
MIX5 SEND 10EA 10F1
MIX6 SEND 10F2 10F9
MIX7 SEND 10FA 1101
MIX8 SEND 1102 1109
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
MATRIX5 SEND 110A 1111
MATRIX6 SEND 1112 1119
MATRIX7 SEND 111A 1121
MATRIX8 SEND 1122 1129
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
ON
MIX1 SEND 112A 1131
MIX2 SEND 1132 1139
MIX3 SEND 113A 1141
MIX4 SEND 1142 1149
MIX5 SEND 114A 1151
MIX6 SEND 1152 1159
MIX7 SEND 115A 1161
MIX8 SEND 1162 1169
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX5 SEND 116A 1171
MATRIX6 SEND 1172 1179
MATRIX7 SEND 117A 1181
MATRIX8 SEND 1182 1189
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
PRE/POST
MIX1 SEND 118A 1191
MIX2 SEND 1192 1199
MIX3 SEND 119A 11A1
MIX4 SEND 11A2 11A9
MIX5 SEND 11AA 11B1
MIX6 SEND 11B2 11B9
MIX7 SEND 11BA 11C1
MIX8 SEND 11C2 11C9
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MATRIX5 SEND 11CA 11D1
MATRIX6 SEND 11D2 11D9
MATRIX7 SEND 11DA 11E1
MATRIX8 SEND 11E2 11E9
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
INPUT57-64 EQ
LOW TYPE 11EA 11F1
HIGH TYPE 11F2 11F9
INPUT57-64 HPF FREQ 11FA 1201
INPUT57-64 to MIX1/2-
7/8 PAN
MIX1/2 1202 1209
MIX3/4 120A 1211
MIX5/6 1212 1219
MIX7/8 121A 1221
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX5/6 1222 1229
MATRIX7/8 122A 1231
INPUT57-64 to STEREO ON 1232 1239
INPUT57-64 RECALL
SAFE
ON 123A 1241
INPUT57-64 to MONO ON 1242 1249
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS1
RATIO 124A 1259
KNEE/WIDTH 125A 1269
GAIN 126A 1279
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS2
reserved 127A 1289
FILTER FREQ 128A 1299
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
RECALL SAFE
ON 129A 12A9
EQ INPUT, MIX1-20,
MATRIX, STEREO LR
ON 1304 1381
LOW Q 1382 13FF
LOW FREQ 1400 147D
LOW GAIN 147E 14FB
LOW MID Q 14FC 1579
LOW MID FREQ 157A 15F7
LOW MID GAIN 15F8 1675
HIGH MID Q 1676 16F3
HIGH MID FREQ 16F4 1771
HIGH MID GAIN 1772 17EF
HIGH Q 17F0 186D
HIGH FREQ 186E 18EB
HIGH GAIN 18EC 1969
ATT 196A 19C1
HPF ON 19E8 1A65
LPF ON 1A66 1AE3
INPUT DYNAMICS1
ON 1AE4 1B3B
ATTACK 1B44 1B9B
THRESHOLD 1BA4 1BFB
RANGE 1C04 1C5B
HOLD 1C64 1CBB
DECAY/RELEASE 1CC4 1D1B
INPUT DYNAMICS2 ON 1D24 1DA1
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR DYNAMICS1
ATTACK 1DA2 1E1F
THRESHOLD 1E20 1E9D
RELEASE 1E9E 1F1B
RATIO 1F1C 1F99
GAIN 1F9A 2017
KNEE/WIDTH 2018 2095
PAN/BALANCE INPUT 2096 20ED
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
Appendices
Reference Manual
251
INPUT to MIX9/10-15/16
PAN
MIX9/10 20F6 214D
MIX11/12 2156 21AD
MIX13/14 21B6 220D
MIX15/16 2216 226D
INPUT to MATRIX1/2,
3/4 PAN
MATRIX1/2 2276 22CD
MATRIX3/4 22D6 232D
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX PAN
MATRIX1/2 2336 234B
MATRIX3/4 234C 2361
MATRIX5/6 2362 2377
MATRIX7/8 2378 238D
MIX1-8 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST 238E 2395
BALANCE
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
2396 23B3
MIX, STEREO LR, MONO
to MATRIX PRE/POST
MATRIX1 SEND 23B4 23CE
MATRIX2 SEND 23D0 23EA
MATRIX3 SEND 23EC 2406
MATRIX4 SEND 2408 2422
MATRIX5 SEND 2424 243E
MATRIX6 SEND 2440 245A
MATRIX7 SEND 245C 2476
MATRIX8 SEND 2478 2492
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX ON
MATRIX1 SEND 2494 2498
MATRIX2 SEND 249A 249E
MATRIX3 SEND 24A0 24A4
MATRIX4 SEND 24A6 24AA
MATRIX5 SEND 24AC 24B0
MATRIX6 SEND 24B2 24B6
MATRIX7 SEND 24B8 24BC
MATRIX8 SEND 24BE 24C2
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
MIX1 SEND 24C4 24D3
MIX2 SEND 24D4 24E3
MIX3 SEND 24E4 24F3
MIX4 SEND 24F4 2503
MIX5 SEND 2504 2513
MIX6 SEND 2514 2523
MIX7 SEND 2524 2533
MIX8 SEND 2534 2543
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 ON
MIX1 SEND 2544 2553
MIX2 SEND 2554 2563
MIX3 SEND 2564 2573
MIX4 SEND 2574 2583
MIX5 SEND 2584 2593
MIX6 SEND 2594 25A3
MIX7 SEND 25A4 25B3
MIX8 SEND 25B4 25C3
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
MIX1 SEND 25C4 25D3
MIX2 SEND 25D4 25E3
MIX3 SEND 25E4 25F3
MIX4 SEND 25F4 2603
MIX5 SEND 2604 2613
MIX6 SEND 2614 2623
MIX7 SEND 2624 2633
MIX8 SEND 2634 2643
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MIX1/2 2644 2653
MIX3/4 2654 2663
MIX5/6 2664 2673
MIX7/8 2674 2683
EFFECT RACK1-8
BYPASS 26B4 26BB
MIX BALANCE 26BC 26C3
PARAM1 26C4 26CB
PARAM2 26CC 26D3
PARAM3 26D4 26DB
PARAM4 26DC 26E3
PARAM5 26E4 26EB
PARAM6 26EC 26F3
PARAM7 26F4 26FB
PARAM8 26FC 2703
PARAM9 2704 270B
PARAM10 270C 2713
PARAM11 2714 271B
PARAM12 271C 2723
PARAM13 2724 272B
PARAM14 272C 2733
PARAM15 2734 273B
PARAM16 273C 2743
PARAM17 2744 274B
PARAM18 274C 2753
PARAM19 2754 275B
PARAM20 275C 2763
PARAM21 2764 276B
PARAM22 276C 2773
PARAM23 2774 277B
PARAM24 277C 2783
PARAM25 2784 278B
PARAM26 278C 2793
PARAM27 2794 279B
PARAM28 279C 27A3
PARAM29 27A4 27AB
PARAM30 27AC 27B3
PARAM31 27B4 27BB
PARAM32 27BC 27C3
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
GEQ RACK1A-3B
ON 27C4 27C9
GAIN1 27CA 27CF
GAIN2 27D0 27D5
GAIN3 27D6 27DB
GAIN4 27DC 27E1
GAIN5 27E2 27E7
GAIN6 27E8 27ED
GAIN7 27EE 27F3
GAIN8 27F4 27F9
GAIN9 27FA 27FF
GAIN10 2800 2805
GAIN11 2806 280B
GAIN12 280C 2811
GAIN13 2812 2817
GAIN14 2818 281D
GAIN15 281E 2823
GAIN16 2824 2829
GAIN17 282A 282F
GAIN18 2830 2835
GAIN19 2836 283B
GAIN20 283C 2841
GAIN21 2842 2847
GAIN22 2848 284D
GAIN23 284E 2853
GAIN24 2854 2859
GAIN25 285A 285F
GAIN26 2860 2865
GAIN27 2866 286B
GAIN28 286C 2871
GAIN29 2872 2877
GAIN30 2878 287D
GAIN31 287E 2883
FADER MIX21-24, MONO 28E4 28E8
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
MIX1 SEND 28EA 2929
MIX2 SEND 292A 2969
MIX3 SEND 296A 29A9
MIX4 SEND 29AA 29E9
MIX5 SEND 29EA 2A29
MIX6 SEND 2A2A 2A69
MIX7 SEND 2A6A 2AA9
MIX8 SEND 2AAA 2AE9
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
MATRIX5 SEND 2AEA 2B29
MATRIX6 SEND 2B2A 2B69
MATRIX7 SEND 2B6A 2BA9
MATRIX8 SEND 2BAA 2BE9
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
Appendices
Reference Manual
252
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX LEVEL
MATRIX1 SEND 2BEA 2BEE
MATRIX2 SEND 2BF0 2BF4
MATRIX3 SEND 2BF6 2BFA
MATRIX4 SEND 2BFC 2C00
MATRIX5 SEND 2C02 2C06
MATRIX6 SEND 2C08 2C0C
MATRIX7 SEND 2C0E 2C12
MATRIX8 SEND 2C14 2C18
ON MIX21-24, MONO 2C2A 2C2E
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 ON
MIX1 SEND 2C30 2C6F
MIX2 SEND 2C70 2CAF
MIX3 SEND 2CB0 2CEF
MIX4 SEND 2CF0 2D2F
MIX5 SEND 2D30 2D6F
MIX6 SEND 2D70 2DAF
MIX7 SEND 2DB0 2DEF
MIX8 SEND 2DF0 2E2F
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX5 SEND 2E30 2E6F
MATRIX6 SEND 2E70 2EAF
MATRIX7 SEND 2EB0 2EEF
MATRIX8 SEND 2EF0 2F2F
MIX9-24 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST 2F36 2F45
INSERT MIX21-24, MONO 2F46 2F4A
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
MIX1 SEND 2F4C 2F8B
MIX2 SEND 2F8C 2FCB
MIX3 SEND 2FCC 300B
MIX4 SEND 300C 304B
MIX5 SEND 304C 308B
MIX6 SEND 308C 30CB
MIX7 SEND 30CC 310B
MIX8 SEND 310C 314B
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MATRIX5 SEND 314C 318B
MATRIX6 SEND 318C 31CB
MATRIX7 SEND 31CC 320B
MATRIX8 SEND 320C 324B
DCA13-16
ON 324C 324F
FADER 3252 3255
BALANCE MIX21-24 (,MONO) 3258 325C
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
MIX21-24, MONO EQ
ON 325E 3262
LOW Q 3264 3268
LOW FREQ 326A 326E
LOW GAIN 3270 3274
LOW MID Q 3276 327A
LOW MID FREQ 327C 3280
LOW MID GAIN 3282 3286
HIGH MID Q 3288 328C
HIGH MID FREQ 328E 3292
HIGH MID GAIN 3294 3298
HIGH Q 329A 329E
HIGH FREQ 32A0 32A4
HIGH GAIN 32A6 32AA
HPF ON 32AC 32B0
LPF ON 32B2 32B6
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 EQ
LOW TYPE 3440 347F
HIGH TYPE 3480 34BF
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
LOW TYPE 34C0 34E2
HIGH TYPE 34E4 3506
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 EQ
LOW TYPE 3508 3517
HIGH TYPE 3518 3527
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
HPF
FREQ 3528 3537
DIRECT OUT INPUT65-
72
ON 3538 353F
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
MATRIX5 SEND 3540 354F
MATRIX6 SEND 3550 355F
MATRIX7 SEND 3560 356F
MATRIX8 SEND 3570 357F
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MATRIX5 SEND 3580 358F
MATRIX6 SEND 3590 359F
MATRIX7 SEND 35A0 35AF
MATRIX8 SEND 35B0 35BF
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MATRIX5 SEND 35C0 35CF
MATRIX6 SEND 35D0 35DF
MATRIX7 SEND 35E0 35EF
MATRIX8 SEND 35F0 35FF
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX5/6 3600 360F
MATRIX7/8 3610 361F
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 HPF FREQ 3640 367F
MIX21-24, MONO
DYNAMICS1
ON 3680 3684
ATTACK 3686 368A
THRESHOLD 368C 3690
RELEASE 3692 3696
RATIO 3698 369C
GAIN 369E 36A2
KNEE/WIDTH 36A4 36A8
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MIX1/2 36AA 36E9
MIX3/4 36EA 3729
MIX5/6 372A 3769
MIX7/8 376A 37A9
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MATRIX5/6 37AA 37E9
MATRIX7/8 37EA 3829
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MATRIX1/2 382A 382E
MATRIX3/4 3830 3834
MATRIX5/6 3836 383A
MATRIX7/8 383C 3840
MIX9-24 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST 3842 3851
GEQ RACK4A-6B
ON 3852 3857
GAIN1 3858 385D
GAIN2 385E 3863
GAIN3 3864 3869
GAIN4 386A 386F
GAIN5 3870 3875
GAIN6 3876 387B
GAIN7 387C 3881
GAIN8 3882 3887
GAIN9 3888 388D
GAIN10 388E 3893
GAIN11 3894 3899
GAIN12 389A 389F
GAIN13 38A0 38A5
GAIN14 38A6 38AB
GAIN15 38AC 38B1
GAIN16 38B2 38B7
GAIN17 38B8 38BD
GAIN18 38BE 38C3
GAIN19 38C4 38C9
GAIN20 38CA 38CF
GAIN21 38D0 38D5
GAIN22 38D6 38DB
GAIN23 38DC 38E1
GAIN24 38E2 38E7
GAIN25 38E8 38ED
GAIN26 38EE 38F3
GAIN27 38F4 38F9
GAIN28 38FA 38FF
GAIN29 3900 3905
GAIN30 3906 390B
GAIN31 390C 3911
LCR INPUT1-64, STIN1-4,
MIX1-16
ON 3912 3969
CSR 396A 39C1
DIRECT OUT INPUT1-64 ON 39C2 3A01
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
STEREO
ON 3A02 3A41
DCA1-12
ON 3A42 3A4D
FADER 3A4E 3A59
MUTE MASTER ON 3A5A 3A61
RECALL SAFE ON 3A66 3B05
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
Appendices
Reference Manual
253
HA
EXTERNAL GAIN1 3B06 3B0B
INPUT GAIN 1 3B0F 3B15
EXTERNAL GAIN2 3B16 3B1B
INPUT GAIN 2 3B1F 3B25
EXTERNAL GAIN3 3B26 3B2B
INPUT GAIN 3 3B2F 3B35
EXTERNAL GAIN4 3B36 3B3B
INPUT GAIN 4 3B3F 3B45
EXTERNAL GAIN5 3B46 3B4B
INPUT GAIN 5 3B4F 3B55
EXTERNAL GAIN6 3B56 3B5B
INPUT GAIN 6 3B5F 3B65
EXTERNAL GAIN7 3B66 3B6B
INPUT GAIN 7 3B6F 3B75
EXTERNAL GAIN8 3B76 3B7B
INPUT GAIN 8 3B7F 3B85
EXTERNAL +48V 1 3B86 3B8B
INPUT +48V 1 3B8F 3B95
EXTERNAL +48V 2 3B96 3B9B
INPUT +48V 2 3B9F 3BA5
EXTERNAL +48V 3 3BA6 3BAB
INPUT +48V 3 3BAF 3BB5
EXTERNAL +48V 4 3BB6 3BBB
INPUT +48V 4 3BBF 3BC5
EXTERNAL +48V 5 3BC6 3BCB
INPUT +48V 5 3BCF 3BD5
EXTERNAL +48V 6 3BD6 3BDB
INPUT +48V 6 3BDF 3BE5
EXTERNAL +48V 7 3BE6 3BEB
INPUT +48V 7 3BEF 3BF5
EXTERNAL +48V 8 3BF6 3BFB
INPUT +48V 8 3BFF 3C05
EXTERNAL HPF1 3C06 3C0B
INPUT HPF1 3C0F 3C15
EXTERNAL HPF2 3C16 3C1B
INPUT HPF2 3C1F 3C25
EXTERNAL HPF3 3C26 3C2B
INPUT HPF3 3C2F 3C35
EXTERNAL HPF4 3C36 3C3B
INPUT HPF4 3C3F 3C45
EXTERNAL HPF5 3C46 3C4B
INPUT HPF5 3C4F 3C55
EXTERNAL HPF6 3C56 3C5B
INPUT HPF6 3C5F 3C65
EXTERNAL HPF7 3C66 3C6B
INPUT HPF7 3C6F 3C75
EXTERNAL HPF8 3C76 3C7B
INPUT HPF8 3C7F 3C85
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
MONO
ON 3C86 3CC5
MIX1-16 TO MONO ON 3CC6 3CD5
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
SLOT OUT DELAY
ON 3CD6 3D05
TIME HIGH 3D06 3D35
TIME LOW 3D36 3D65
OMNI OUT DELAY
ON 3D66 3D6D
TIME HIGH 3D76 3D7D
TIME LOW 3D86 3D8D
DIGITAL OUT DELAY
ON 3D96 3D97
TIME HIGH 3D98 3D99
TIME LOW 3D9A 3D9B
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS1
RATIO 3D9C 3DD3
KNEE/WIDTH 3DD4 3E0B
GAIN 3E0C 3E43
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS2
reserved 3E44 3E7B
FILTER FREQ 3E7C 3EB3
GEQ RACK7A-8B
ON 3EB4 3EB7
GAIN1 3EB8 3EBB
GAIN2 3EBC 3EBF
GAIN3 3EC0 3EC3
GAIN4 3EC4 3EC7
GAIN5 3EC8 3ECB
GAIN6 3ECC 3ECF
GAIN7 3ED0 3ED3
GAIN8 3ED4 3ED7
GAIN9 3ED8 3EDB
GAIN10 3EDC 3EDF
GAIN11 3EE0 3EE3
GAIN12 3EE4 3EE7
GAIN13 3EE8 3EEB
GAIN14 3EEC 3EEF
GAIN15 3EF0 3EF3
GAIN16 3EF4 3EF7
GAIN17 3EF8 3EFB
GAIN18 3EFC 3EFF
GAIN19 3F00 3F03
GAIN20 3F04 3F07
GAIN21 3F08 3F0B
GAIN22 3F0C 3F0F
GAIN23 3F10 3F13
GAIN24 3F14 3F17
GAIN25 3F18 3F1B
GAIN26 3F1C 3F1F
GAIN27 3F20 3F23
GAIN28 3F24 3F27
GAIN29 3F28 3F2B
GAIN30 3F2C 3F2F
GAIN31 3F30 3F33
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
ATT 3F34 3F56
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 TO
STEREO
ON 3F58 3F67
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8,
MIX17-24 TO MONO
ON 3F68 3F7F
LCR IN65-72, STIN5-8,
MIX17-24
ON 3F80 3F97
CSR 3F98 3FAF
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
DYNAMICS1
RATIO 3FB0 3FBF
KNEE/WIDTH 3FC0 3FCF
GAIN 3FD0 3FDF
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
DYNAMICS2
reserved 3FE0 3FEF
FILTER FREQ 3FF0 3FFF
Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)
Appendices
Reference Manual
254
Mixing parameter operation applicability
This table indicates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter.
It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo, and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE, GLOBAL PASTE, and USER LEVEL settings, and a channel library.
■ Input channels
Parameter
Stereo
*1
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8
USER LEVEL
Channel
Library
ALL Parameter Select button
HA
Gain
O
*10
HA
*10
O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O
Gain Compensation O HA O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O
+48V
O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O
Phase
O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O
Digital Gain
O
*10
DIGITAL GAIN
*10
O DIGITAL GAIN HA O
Name, Icon, Color
O INPUT NAME, GLOBAL INPUT NAME INPUT NAME O
Input Patch
O INPUT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH
Insert
Out Patch
O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH
In Patch O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA HA
On INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT PROCESSING O
Point
INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT PROCESSING O
Direct Out
Out Patch
O INPUT DIRECT OUT, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH
On, Level DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT PROCESSING O
Point
DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT PROCESSING O
HPF O INPUT HPF O INPUT HPF INPUT PROCESSING O
Att O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT PROCESSING O
EQ O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT PROCESSING O
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING
Key-In Filter O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING O
Others O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING O
Dynamics2
Key-In Source
O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT PROCESSING
Others O INPUT DYNAMICS2 O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT PROCESSING O
To Mix
On O
INPUT MIX ON
*2
O
INPUT MIX ON
*7
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
O
Level O
INPUT MIX SEND
*2
O
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
O
Pan/Balance
O
*11
O
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
O
Pre/Post O
INPUT MIX SEND
*2
O
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT PROCESSING
*4
O
To Matrix
On O
INPUT MATRIX ON
*3
O
INPUT MATRIX ON
*7
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
O
Level O
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*3
O
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
O
Pan/Balance
O
*11
O
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
O
Pre/Post O
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*3
O
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT PROCESSING
*4
O
DELAY
ms
O
*10
INPUT DELAY
*10
O INPUT DELAY INPUT PROCESSING O
ON O INPUT DELAY O INPUT DELAY INPUT PROCESSING O
To Stereo O TO STEREO O INPUT TO ST INPUT PROCESSING O
To Mono O TO STEREO O INPUT TO MONO INPUT PROCESSING O
Appendices
Reference Manual
255
*1 These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1–8.
*2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1–24 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*3 Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1–8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when assigned to either a Send source channel or a Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*10 Operates differentially
*11 Balance only
Pan/balance
O
*11
O INPUT TO ST INPUT FADER/ON O
Pan Mode O
O
*5
INPUT PROCESSING O
LCR
On O TO STEREO O
*5
INPUT PROCESSING O
CSR O TO STEREO O
*5
INPUT PROCESSING O
Mode O TO STEREO O
*5
INPUT PROCESSING O
On O INPUT CH ON O INPUT CH ON INPUT FADER/ON O
Fader
O
*10
INPUT FADER
*10
O INPUT FADER INPUT FADER/ON O
Mute Assign O INPUT MUTE O
*5
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O
DCA Assign O INPUT DCA O
*5
DCA GROUP ASSIGN O
Fade Time, On
O
*6
O
*9
STORE
O
*6
Channel Link O GLOBAL CH LINK
Cue O
Key In Cue
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O
Parameter
Stereo
*1
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8
USER LEVEL
Channel
Library
ALL Parameter Select button
Appendices
Reference Manual
256
■ MIX Channels
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*13 Linked only for stereo MATRIX
Parameter
Linked for a
stereo pair
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
USER LEVEL
Channel
Library
ALL Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color
O MIX NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME O
Output Patch
O MIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
Insert
Out Patch
O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
In Patch O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MIX PROCESSING
On O O MIX INSERT MIX PROCESSING O
Point O O MIX INSERT MIX PROCESSING O
Att O O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING O
EQ O O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING O
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
O MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING
Others O O MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING O
To Matrix
On O O
MIX MATRIX ON
*7
MIX FADER/ON
*4
O
Level
O
*13
O
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX FADER/ON
*4
O
Pan/Balance O O
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX FADER/ON
*4
O
Pre/Post O O
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX PROCESSING
*4
O
To Stereo O O MIX TO ST MIX PROCESSING O
To Mono O O MIX MONO MIX PROCESSING O
Pan/Balance
O
*11
O MIX TO ST, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MIX FADER/ON O
LCR
On O O
*5
MIX PROCESSING O
CSR O O
*5
MIX PROCESSING O
Mode O O
*5
MIX PROCESSING O
On O O MIX CH ON MIX FADER/ON O
Fader O O MIX FADER MIX FADER/ON O
From Input
On O
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND
*4
Level O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND
*4
Pan/Balance
O
*11
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND
*4
Pre/Post O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND
*4
Mute Assign O O
*5
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O
Fade Time, On
O
*6
O
*9
STORE
O
*6
Cue O
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O
Appendices
Reference Manual
257
■ MATRIX Channels
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
Parameter
Linked for a
stereo pair
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
USER LEVEL
Channel
Library
ALL Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color
O MATRIX NAME,GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME O
Output Patch
O MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
Insert
Out Patch
O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
In Patch O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MATRIX PROCESSING
On O O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX PROCESSING O
Point O O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX PROCESSING O
Att O O MATRIX EQ MATRIX PROCESSING O
EQ O O MATRIX EQ MATRIX PROCESSING O
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX PROCESSING
Others O O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX PROCESSING O
Balance O O MATRIX BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MATRIX FADER/ON O
On O O MATRIX CH ON MATRIX FADER/ON O
Fader O O MATRIX FADER MATRIX FADER/ON O
From Input
From Mix
From Stereo/Mono
On O
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
Level O WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
Pan/Balance
O
*11
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
Pre/Post O WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
Mute Assign O O
*5
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O
Fade Time, On
O
*6
O
*9
STORE
O
*6
Cue O
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O
Appendices
Reference Manual
258
■ STEREO, MONO Channels
*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
■ DCA
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
Parameter
Linked for a
stereo pair
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
USER LEVEL
Channel
Library
ALL Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color
O STEREO, MONO NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME O
Output Patch
O STEREO, MONO OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
Insert
Out Patch
O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
In Patch O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
On O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O
Point O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O
Att O O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O
EQ O O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
Others O O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O
To Matrix
On O O
STEREO, MONO MATRIX ON
*7
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
O
Level
O
*13
O
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
O
Pan/Balance O O
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
O
Pre/Post O O
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
*4
O
Balance O O STEREO, MONO BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O
On O O STEREO, MONO CH ON STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O
Fader O O STEREO, MONO FADER STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O
Mute Assign O O
*5
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O
Fade Time, On
O
*6
O
*9
STORE
O
*6
Cue O
Mute Safe O
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O
Parameter
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
USER LEVEL
ALL Parameter Select button
Name, Icon, Color O
*5
DCA MASTER
On O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER
Fader O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER
Fade Time, On O
*9
STORE
Input DCA Assign
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
Appendices
Reference Manual
259
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation
NO ASSIGN — — No assignment.
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
LATCH —
Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is
pressed.
UNLATCH —
Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while
pressed.
BRIGHTNESS BANK CHANGE —
Toggle between the brightness settings stored
in A and B.
CH ON SPECIFIC CH *4) Switch the CH ON/OFF.
CH SELECT
INC
—
Increment or decrement the selected channel
number.
DEC
SPECIFIC CH *1) Select a channel from list 1).
CL EDITOR
CONTROL
MASTER —
Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.
SENDS ON FADER —
OVERVIEW
CH 1-16 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH17-32 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH33-48 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH49-64 {CL5/CL3}
CH65-72 {CL5}
ST IN
MIX1-16
MIX17-24
MATRIX
STEREO/MONO
DCA
CUSTOM FADER BANK
A1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
A2 {CL5/CL3}
A3 {CL3}
B1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
B2 {CL3/CL1}
B3 {CL1}
B4 {CL1}
C1 {CL5}
C2 {CL5}
C3 {CL5}
C4 {CL5}
C5 {CL5}
C6 {CL5}
SELECTED CHANNEL —
CL EDITOR
CONTROL
LIBRARY
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.
INPUT EQ LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
EFFECT LIBRARY
GEQ LIBRARY
INPUT CH LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
PREMIUM RACK
LIBRARY
Portico5033 LIBRARY
Portico5043 LIBRARY
U76 LIBRARY
Opt-2A LIBRARY
EQ-1A LIBRARY
DynamicEQ LIBRARY
PATCH EDITOR
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH
OUTPUT INSERT PATCH
DIRECT OUT PATCH
PATCH LIST
RACK EDITOR
RACK
GEQ 1–16
EFFECT 1–8
PREMIUM 1A
PREMIUM 1B
:
PREMIUM 8A
PREMIUM 8B
METER
INPUT METER
OUTPUT METER
GROUP/LINK
DCA GROUP
MUTE GROUP
CHANNEL LINK
SCENE
SCENE MEMORY
RECALL SAFE
FADE TIME
FOCUS RECALL
CUE
OUTPUT — Switch CUE on/off
CLEAR CUE
SPECIFIC CH *2) CUE the channel selected from list 2).
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation
Appendices
Reference Manual
260
EFFECT
BYPASS
EFFECT RACK1–8
PREMIUM RACK1A
PREMIUM RACK1B
:
PREMIUM RACK8A
PREMIUM RACK8B
GAIN KNOB
FUNCTION
LATCH —
Toggle the function of the GAIN knob
(ANALOG GAIN/DIGITAL GAIN). Lit when
DIGITAL GAIN is selected.
UNLATCH —
Assign the function of the GAIN knob
(ANALOG GAIN/DIGITAL) to DIGITAL GAIN
only while held down.
* However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is
switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE
screen etc., this will remain lit until the next
time it is pressed.
GEQ FREQ
BANK
INC
—
Adds or removes a frequency bank in the GEQ
EDIT screen.
DEC
GPI OUT
LATCH
PORT1–PORT5
Toggle the GPI OUT function. Lit when active.
UNLATCH Make GPI OUT active only while pressed.
HELP — —
Opens and closes the HELP pop-up window.
Operating the controllers on the panel
(excluding faders), or controllers on the screen,
while holding down this key will display the
related information.
HOME
SELECTED CH VIEW — Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
OVERVIEW — Displays the OVERVIEW screen.
TOGGLE —
Each press of the key will alternately display the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the
OVERVIEW screen.
METER PEAK HOLD ON —
Turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off. Lit
when on.
MIDI
PROGRAM CHANGE PGM 0–128
Transmit the corresponding MIDI message.
CONTROL CHANGE
CC 1–31, 33–95,
102–119
NOTE ON
NOTE ON C-2 (0)
:
NOTE ON G 8 (127)
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation
MONITOR
OUTPUT — Switch MONITOR on/off.
SELECTED CH ASSIGN —
While holding down this key, press the SEL key
of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the
assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL]
LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding
down this key will be stored. Pressing the key
again will recall the stored setting. Settings can
be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid
assignment switching.
SOURCE SELECT
STEREO L/R
Recall the selected signal to the monitor.
MONO(C)
LCR
PB OUT
OMNI1-2
OMNI3-4
OMNI5-6
OMNI7-8
DEFINE
MUTE
MASTER
MUTE GROUP 1
— Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off.:
MUTE GROUP 8
ALL MUTE —
Turns all MUTE GROUP MASTER settings on/off
together.
NUENDO
LIVE
TRANSPORT
GO TO PROJECT START
Operate the transport functions of Nuendo
Live.
GO TO PREV MARKER
REWIND
FAST FORWARD
GO TO NEXT MARKER
GO TO PROJECT END
CYCLE
STOP
START
REC
EASY RECORDING
PEAK CLEAR —
Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live
screen.
OSCILLATOR
OSCILLATOR ON — Switch the OSC on/off.
SELECTED CH ASSIGN —
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of
a channel to switch the assignment on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if
assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
DIRECT ASSIGN *1)
Assign the oscillator to the channel selected
from list 1).
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation
Appendices
Reference Manual
261
*1) CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8,
ST L, ST R, MONO(C)
*2) CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8,
STEREO, MONO(C)
*3) MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO(C)
*4) CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8,
STEREO, MONO(C), DCA1–DCA16
PAGE
CHANGE
BOOKMARK
Memorize the currently selected screen (hold
down the key for two seconds or longer), or
display the last-memorized screen (press and
release the key within two seconds). Popup
screens can also be memorized. In the case of a
rack, the number of that rack is also
memorized.
BOOKMARK with “SEL” —
Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the
addition of the SEL status.
PREVIOUS PAGE
— Display the previous/next page.
NEXT PAGE
CLOSE POPUP — Close the displayed popup window.
RECORDER
TRANSPORT
PLAY/PAUSE, STOP,
FF/NEXT,
REW/PREVIOUS, REC
Display the previous/next page.
AUTO REC
Shortcut function for STOP → REC → PLAY.
Recording will be initiated in a single action. If
this is executed during recording, the file being
recorded will first be closed, and then
recording will continue with a new file.
REC & START
Start recording immediately without entering
record-ready mode.
DIRECT PLAY
NO ASSIGN The specified audio file will be played once
from the beginning. Audio files to be played
should be saved in the SONGS folder inside the
YPE folder. Please note that a file cannot be
specified if it is saved in the root directory or in
any other folder. When you execute playback,
the path in the TITLE LIST screen will move to
\YPE\SONGS\.
(TITLE 1)
:
SCENE
INC RECALL — Recall the scene of the next existing number.
REC RECALL —
Recall the scene of the previous existing
number.
DIRECT RECALL SCENE #000–#300
Directly recall the scene of the specified
number.
RECALL UNDO — Execute RECALL UNDO.
STORE UNDO — Execute STORE UNDO.
SEND
ENCOD
ER
MODE
MIX1-16/MIX17-24,
MATRIX
—
If INPUT or ST IN is selected, switch the
function of the Selected Channel section’s send
encoders from TO MIX1-16/TO MIX17-24,
MATRIX.
SENDS ON
FADER
MIX1–MIX24
—
Switches the MIX ON FADER function for the
selected MIX on and off.
MTRX1–MTRX8
Switches the MATRIX ON FADER function for
the selected MATRIX on and off.
MIX ON FADER
Switches the MIX ON FADER function on and
off.
MATRIX ON FADER
Switches the MATRIX ON FADER function on
and off.
SENDS ON FADER
Switches the SENDS ON FADER function on
and off.
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation
SET BY SEL
SET [+48V]
—
Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it
on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on
or dark if off.
If SET [PRE SEND] is selected, “SEND ON
FADER” mode is engaged while you are
holding down the [SEL] key.
SET [Ø]
SET [INSERT ON]
SET [DIRECT OUT ON]
SET [PRE SEND]
SET [TO STEREO]
SET [TO MONO]
SET [TO LCR]
SET [GAIN
COMPENSATION]
SET DEFAULT
VALUE
——
While holding down this key, press a knob in
the Selected Channel or Centralogic section to
reset it to the default value.
SET
NOMINAL
VALUE
——
While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key
to set the fader of that channel to nominal
level.
TALKBACK
TALKBACK ON
LATCH Switch TALKBACK on/off.
UNLATCH Turn TALKBACK on while pressed.
SELECTED CH ASSIGN —
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of
an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment
on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be
lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding
down this key will be stored. Pressing the key
again will recall the stored setting. Settings can
be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid
assignment switching.
DIRECT ASSIGN *3)
Assign TALKBACK to the channel selected from
list 3).
TAP TEMPO
CURRENT PAGE —
Use the tap tempo function in the displayed
screen.
EFFECT RACK1–8 —
Use the tap tempo function for the specified
effect.
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation
Appendices
Reference Manual
262
Functions that can be assigned to
USER DEFINED knobs
*2) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8, MIX1–MIX24,
MTRX1–MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
*3) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R
*4) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8
*5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R, MIX1–MIX24
*7) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R, MIX1–MIX24,
ST L, ST R, MONO (C)
*10) # 1–# 6
*11) REMOTE HA # 1–# 8
*12) DANTE 1–DANTE64, OMNI 1–OMNI 8, SLOT1 1–SLOT1 16, SLOT2 1–SLOT2 16, SLOT3 1–SLOT3 16,
DIGITAL OUT L, DIGITAL OUT R
*13) SELECTED CH, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
NO ASSIGN
BRIGHTNESS
LAMP
PANEL
SCREEN
CH COLOR
NAME
CUE
INPUT PFL TRIM
DCA TRIM
OUTPUT PFL TRIM
CUE LEVEL
DYNAMICS1
THRESHOLD
*2)
RANGE
RATIO
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RELEASE
OUTGAIN
KNEE
WIDTH *13)
DYNAMICS2
THRESHOLD
*4)
RATIO
FREQUENCY
ATTACK
RELEASE
OUTGAIN
KNEE
WIDTH
EQ
ATT
*2)
LOW Q
LOW FREQUENCY
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQUENCY
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQUENCY
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQUENCY
HIGH GAIN
EXTERNAL HA GAIN1–GAIN8 *10)
HPF FREQUENCY *4)
I/O DEVICE GAIN1–GAIN32 *11)
INPUT DELAY DELAY TIME *3)
INPUT GAIN
ANALOG GAIN
*4)
DIGITAL GAIN
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE
CTRL 1–CTRL 31
CTRL 33–CTRL 95
CTRL 102–CTRL 119
MONITOR
DIMMER LEVEL
TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL
MONITOR DELAY
MONITOR FADER
OSCILLATOR
LEVEL
SINE WAVE FREQUENCY
HPF
LPF
WIDTH
INTERVAL
OUTPUT PORT
DELAY TIME
*12)
GAIN
TO MIX LEVEL MIX1–MIX24 *3)
TO MATRIX LEVEL MATRIX1–MATRIX8 *7)
TO MIX PAN MIX1/2–MIX23/24 *3)
TO MATRIX PAN MATRIX1/2–MATRIX7/8 *7)
TO ST/MONO
PAN/BAL
*5)
CSR
TOUCH AND TURN
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
Appendices
Reference Manual
263
Functions that can be assigned to the
assignable encoders
*1 Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether this will be analog gain or
digital gain.
*2 The send destination that is the target of Sends On Fader will be selected.
*3 Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch
the PRE/POST setting of the corresponding send or will switch the corresponding send on/off when pressed.
*4 Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch the
high-pass filter on/off.
*5 Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch
DYNAMICS 1 on/off.
*6 Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch
DYNAMICS 2 on/off.
PAN GAIN ASSIGN FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
O PAN/BALANCE
PAN
BAL
O ANALOG GAIN A.GAIN *1
O DIGITAL GAIN D.GAIN *1
O SELECTED SEND
MIX1-MTRX8
Depends on status
*2
OMIX1 SEND MIX1 *3
OMIX2 SEND MIX2 *3
OMIX3 SEND MIX3 *3
OMIX4 SEND MIX4 *3
OMIX5 SEND MIX5 *3
OMIX6 SEND MIX6 *3
OMIX7 SEND MIX7 *3
OMIX8 SEND MIX8 *3
OMIX9 SEND MIX9 *3
O MIX10 SEND MIX10 *3
O MIX11 SEND MIX11 *3
O MIX12 SEND MIX12 *3
O MIX13 SEND MIX13 *3
O MIX14 SEND MIX14 *3
O MIX15 SEND MIX15 *3
O MIX16 SEND MIX16 *3
O MIX17 SEND MIX17 *3
O MIX18 SEND MIX18 *3
O MIX19 SEND MIX19 *3
O MIX20 SEND MIX20 *3
O MIX21 SEND MIX21 *3
O MIX22 SEND MIX22 *3
O MIX23 SEND MIX23 *3
O MIX24 SEND MIX24 *3
O MATRIX1 SEND MTRX1 *3
O MATRIX2 SEND MTRX2 *3
O MATRIX3 SEND MTRX3 *3
O MATRIX4 SEND MTRX4 *3
O MATRIX5 SEND MTRX5 *3
O MATRIX6 SEND MTRX6 *3
O MATRIX7 SEND MTRX7 *3
O MATRIX8 SEND MTRX8 *3
O HPF FREQUENCY HPF *4
O DYNAMICS1 THRESHOLD THRE1 *5
O DYNAMICS2 THRESHOLD THRE2 *6
Appendices
Reference Manual
264
MIDI Data Format
This section explains the format of the data that the CL series is able
to understand, send, and receive.
1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
1.1 NOTE OFF (8n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
1.2 NOTE ON (9n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)
Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN] (Non-
Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110) messages.
Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is
ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings of the
[CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer
to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 248.
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is
ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and
DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the specified parameter.
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a
parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these
messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be
assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 248.
If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a
specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA
ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the
parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control
changes” on page 248.
CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because
there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.
If [TABLE] is selected
Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data
paramSteps = paramMax – paramMin + 1;
add = paramWidth / paramSteps;
mod = paramWidth – add * paramSteps;
curValue = paramSteps * add + mod / 2;
(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps
paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;
(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps
paramWidth = 16384;
(2-1) When High and Low data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(2-2) When only Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);
(2-3) When only High data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);
(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152
steps
paramWidth = 2097152;
(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received
rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-2) When only Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);
(3-3) When only Middle data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;
(3-4) When only High data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;
(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-6) When only High and Low data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);
(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received
rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128;
if ( rxValue > paramWidth)
rxValue = paramWidth;
param = ( rxValue–mod / 2) / add;
If [NRPN] is selected
1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)
Reception
If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed
from MIDI OUT.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx] is
ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are received
regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene memory, effect
librarya nd premium rack library are recalled according to the settings of the
[PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST].
Transmission
If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the
[PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory, effect library and
premium rack library are recalled.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
If the recalled scene memory, effect library and premium rack library has been assigned
to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered PROGRAM NUMBER
for each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because
there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.
If SINGLE is selected
You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH.
You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.
A bank of up to 16 can be specified.
If MULTI is selected
The Rx and Tx channels will be the same.
The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select messages
will not be added.
You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.
STATUS 1000nnnn 8n
Note off message
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn
Note number
0vvvvvvv vv
Velocity (ignored)
STATUS 1001nnnn 9n
Note on message
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn
Note number
0vvvvvvv vv
Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn
Control change
DATA 00
Control number (00)
0vvvvvvv vv
Control Value (0-127)
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn
Control change
DATA 20
Control number (32)
0vvvvvvv vv
Control Value (0-127)
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn
Control change
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn
Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,
102-119) *
0vvvvvvv vv
Control Value (0-127)
* Numbers 0, 32, and 96–101 cannot be used.
* Control number 6, 38 can be used.
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn
Control change
DATA 01100010 62
NRPN LSB
0vvvvvvv vv
Parameter number LSB
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn
Control change *
DATA 01100011 63
NRPN MSB
0vvvvvvv vv
Parameter number MSB
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn
Control change *
DATA 00000110 06
Data entry MSB
0vvvvvvv vv
Parameter data MSB
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn
Control change *
DATA 00100110 26
Data entry LSB
0vvvvvvv vv
Parameter data LSB
* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not
be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly
whether or not the status byte is omitted.
STATUS 1100nnnn Cn
Program change
DATA 0nnnnnnn nn
Program number (0-127)
Appendices
Reference Manual
265
2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
2.1 SONG SELECT (F3)
Reception
Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder.
2.2 TIMING CLOCK (F8)
Reception
This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four times
per quarter note.
Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.
2.3 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms.
This message is not subject to echoing.
2.4 SYSTEM RESET (FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running
Status will be cleared).
This message is not subject to echoing.
3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
3.1 MMC
< MMC STOP >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops.
< MMC PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
< MMC DEFERED PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
< MMC RECORD STROBE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts
recording.
< MMC PAUSE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses.
3.2 BULK DUMP
This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored within
the unit.
The basic format is as follows.
The CL series uses the following data types for a bulk dump.
*1) 0–300 Scene Number (0 Request Only),
*2) 1–199 Input EQ Library Number (1–40 Request Only)
*3) 1–199 Output EQ Library Number (1–3 Request Only)
*4) 1–199 Dynamics Library Number (1–41 Request Only)
*5) 0–199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
*6) 1–199 Effect Library Number (1–27 Request Only)
*7) 512–583 Input 1-72,
*8) 584–599 STIN 1L-8R,
*9) 768–791 MIX 1-24,
*10) 1024–1031 MATRIX 1-8,
*11) 1280–1282 STEREO L-C,
*12) 512–530 GEQ 1-19, 531–538 EFFECT GEQ 1-8,
*13) 512–519 EFFECT 1-8,
*14) 512 Current Data,
*15) 768 Current Data with Recall Safe,
*16) 8192 Store Undo Data, 8193 Recall Undo Data, 8194 Clear Undo Data,
*17) 0–199 Input CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
*18) 0–199 Output CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
*19) 512–527 Premium Rack 1A, 1B, 2A, … 8A, 8B
*20) 0–100 Each Premium Effect Library Number (0 Request Only)
*21) 1536–1607 Input 1-72 (for Dynamics2),
*22) 1608–1623 STIN 1L-8R (for Dunamics2),
*23) 0-10 Dante Input Patch Library Number (0 Request Only)
Data is lost when you write to the preset library.
The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a CL series.
To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE COUNT
(LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary complement,
and set bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time when a
Bulk Dump Request is received.
A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump
Request.
In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of 7-bit
data.
STATUS 11110011 F3
Song select
Song number 0sssssss ss
Song number (0-127)
STATUS 11111000 F8
Timing clock
STATUS 11111110 FE
Active sensing
STATUS 11111111 FF
System reset
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000001 01
Stop(MCS)
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000010 02
Play(MCS)
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000011 03
Deferred Play(MCS)
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000110 06
Record strobe
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00001001 09
Pause(MCS)
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Command rx/tx Function
F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 19 mm … mm dd
dd … ee F7
rx/tx
BULK DUMP DATA
F0 43 2n 3E 19 mm … mm dd dd F7 rx
BULK DUMP REQUEST
Module Name(mm) Data Number(dd)
SCENE LIB “SCENE___” *1) *14) *15) *16)
INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” *2) *7) *8)
OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” *3) *9) *10) *11)
Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” *4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *21) *22)
INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” *17) *7) *8)
OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNNL” *18) *9) *10) *11)
GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” *5) *12)
EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” *6) *13)
Premium Effect “PEFFECT_” *19)
Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” *20)
Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” *20)
U76 LIB “U76_____” *20)
Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” *20)
EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” *20)
DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” *20)
Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” *23)
Mixer Setup “MIXERSET” Fix (512)
Outport Setup “OUT_PORT” Fix (512)
Monitor Setup “MONITOR_” Fix (512)
MIDI Setup “MIDI_SET” Fix (512)
Lib Number “LIB_NUM_” Fix (512)
Program Change Table “PRGMCHG_” Fix (512)
Control Change Table “CTRLCHG_” Fix (512)
Preference (Current) “PREF_CUR” Fix (512)
Preference (Admin) “PREF_ADM” Fix (512)
Preference (Guest) “PREF_GST” Fix (512)
User Defined Keys (Current) “UDEF_CUR” Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
User Defined Keys (Admin) “UDEF_ADM” Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
User Defined Keys (Guest) “UDEF_GST” Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Custom Fader Bank (Current) “CFAD_CUR” Fix (512)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin) “CFAD_ADM” Fix (512)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest) “CFAD_GST” Fix (512)
User Level (Current) “UKEY_CUR” Fix (512)
User Level (Guest) “UKEY_GST” Fix (512)
Module Name(mm) Data Number(dd)
Appendices
Reference Manual
266
[Conversion from actual data to bulk data]
d[0-6]: actual data
b[0-7]: bulk data
b[0] = 0;
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
if( d[I]&0x80){
b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
}
b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
[Recovery from bulk data to actual data]
d[0-6]: actual data
b[0-7]: bulk data
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
b[0] <<= 1;
d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
Reception
This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches
the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is
received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER REQUEST
is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a
PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which CONTROL
CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be
transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.
In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be
transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number.
4 PARAMETER CHANGE details
4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP
4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed
immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL CHANGE
EVENT LIST].
4.1.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed
via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is received.
4.1.3 Data category
4.2 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY STORE, RECALL –
4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed
immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when
[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.
4.2.2 Function Name
Command rx/tx Function
F0 43 1n 3E 19 … F7
RARAMETER CHANGE
rx/tx
CL series native parameter change
F0 43 3n 3E 19 … F7
PARAMETER REQUEST
rx/tx
CL series native parameter request
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
DATA 0eeeeeee eh
Element no High.
0eeeeeee el
Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih
Index no High.
0iiiiiii il
Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch
Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl
Channel no Low.
0ddddddd dd
Data
::
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 3n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
DATA 0eeeeeee eh
Element no High.
0eeeeeee el
Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih
Index no High.
0iiiiiii il
Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch
Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl
Channel no Low.
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Data Category Name
0x01 00000001
Current Scene /Setup/Backup/
User Setup Data
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L"
(ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i"
(ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b"
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh
Number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Number Low
0ccccccc ch
Channel High
0ccccccc cl
Channel Low
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Function Name
Store “LibStr__”
Recall “LibRcl__”
Unknown Factor Store “LibUnStr”
Unknown Factor Recall “LibUnRcl”
Store Undo (only Score) “LibStrUd”
Recall Undo (only Scene) “LibRclUd”
Appendices
Reference Manual
267
4.2.3 Module Name
*1) 0:CH1 – 71:CH72
72:ST IN 1L – 87:ST IN 8R
*2) 256:MIX 1 – 279:MIX 24
*3) 512:MATRIX 1 – 519: MATRIX 8
*4) 1024:STEREO L – 1026:STEREO C
*5) 512:will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one.
*6) 0: GEQ1A, 1: GEQ1B, 2: GEQ2A, … 36: GEQ19A, 37:GEQ19B
38: EFFECT GEQ1A, 39: EFFECT GEQ1B,
40: EFFECT GEQ2A, … 52: EFFECT GEQ8A, 53: EFFECT GEQ8B
*7) 0:Effect1- 7:Effect8
*8) 1280:CH1 – 1351:CH72
1352:ST IN 1L – 1367:ST IN 8R
*9) 0: Premium Rack 1A, 1: Premium Rack 1B,
2: Premium Rack 2A, … 14: Premium Rack 8A, 15: Premium Rack 8B
4.3 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY EDIT –
4.3.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library will be
changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE
ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
4.3.2 Function Name
4.3.3 Module Name
Module Name
Scene “SCENE___”
Input EQ “INEQ____”
Output EQ “OUTEQ___”
Dynamics “DYNA____”
Input CH “INCHNNL_”
Output CH “OUTCHNNL”
GEQ “GEQ_____”
Effect “EFFECT__”
Portico5033 “P5033___”
Portico5043 “P5043___”
U76 “U76_____”
Opt-2A “OPT-2A__”
EQP-1A “EQ-1A___”
DynamicEQ “DYNAEQ__”
Dante Input Patch “DANTEIN_”
Function Number Channel*1) tx/rx
“LibStr__” SCENE 1-300 *5)
tx/rx
INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 *1)
tx/rx
OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 *2) *3) *4)
tx/rx
Dynamics LIB 42-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
tx/rx
INPUT CH LIB 1-199 *1)
tx/rx
OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4)
tx/rx
GEQ LIB 1-199 *6)
tx/rx
EFFECT LIB 28-199 *7)
tx/rx
Premium Effect LIB 1-100 *9)
tx/rx
Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 *5)
tx/rx
“LibUnStr” SCENE 1-300 0
tx
INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 0
tx
OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 0
tx
Dynamics LIB 42-199 0
tx
INPUT CH LIB 1-199 0
tx
OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 0
tx
GEQ LIB 1-199 0
tx
EFFECT LIB 28-199 0
tx
Premium Effect LIB 1-100 0
tx
Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 0
tx
“LibRcl__” SCENE 0-300 *5)
tx/rx
INPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *1)
tx/rx
OUTPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4)
tx/rx
Dynamics LIB 1-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
tx/rx
INPUT CH LIB 0-199 *1)
tx/rx
OUTPUT CH LIB 0-199 *2) *3) *4)
tx/rx
GEQ LIB 0-199 *6)
tx/rx
EFFECT LIB 1-199 *7)
tx/rx
Premium Effect LIB 0-100 *9)
tx/rx
Dante Input Patch LIB 0-10 *5)
tx/rx
“LibUnRcl” SCENE 0 *5)
tx
INPUT EQ LIB 0 *1)
tx
OUTPUT EQ LIB 0 *2) *3) *4)
tx
Dynamics LIB 0 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
tx
INPUT CH LIB 0 *1)
tx
OUTPUT CH LIB 0 *2) *3) *4)
tx
GEQ LIB 0 *6)
tx
EFFECT LIB 0 *7)
tx
Premium Effect LIB 0 *9)
tx
Dante Input Patch LIB 0 *5)
tx
“LibStrUd” SCENE 0 0
“LibRclUd” SCENE 0 0
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L"
(ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i"
(ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b"
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE).
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
Function Number Channel*1) tx/rx
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0sssssss sh
number -source start High
0sssssss sl
number -source start Low
0eeeeeee eh
number -source end High
0eeeeeee el
number -source end Low
0ddddddd dh
number -destination start High
0ddddddd dl
number -destination to start Low
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Function Name
Copy “LibCpy__”
Paste “LibPst__”
Clear “LibClr__”
Cut “LibCut__”
Insert “LibIns__”
Edit Undo “LibEdtUd”
Module Name Function
SCENE LIB “SCENE___” Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo
INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” Clear Only
OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” Clear Only
Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” Clear Only
INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” Clear Only
OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNNL” Clear Only
GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” Clear Only
EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” Clear Only
Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” Clear Only
Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” Clear Only
U76 LIB “U76_____” Clear Only
Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” Clear Only
EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” Clear Only
DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” Clear Only
Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” Clear Only
Appendices
Reference Manual
268
4.4 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE –
4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library title will
be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE
ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately
the data is received.
4.4.3 Module Name
4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE
4.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
When CL series receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer will
be sent back with the following Parameter change.
This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only. Top
number is requested number or more.
-Example-
SCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101
Request Number: 0
Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7
Request Number: 8
Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10
Request Number: 11
Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101
Request Number: 102
Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L"
(ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i"
(ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b"
(ASCII CODE)
01000001 "A"
(ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t"
(ASCII CODE)
01110010 "r"
(ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b"
(ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t"
(ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh
Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh
Element High
0eeeeeee el
Element Low
0iiiiiii ih
Index High
0iiiiiii il
Index Low
0ccccccc ch
Channel High
0ccccccc cl
Channel Low
0000dddd dd
Data28~31bit
0ddddddd dd
Data21~27bit
0ddddddd dd
Data14~20bit
0ddddddd dd
Data7~13bit
0ddddddd dd
Data0~6bit
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L"
(ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i"
(ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b"
(ASCII CODE)
01000001 "A"
(ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t"
(ASCII CODE)
01110010 "r"
(ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b"
(ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t"
(ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh
Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh
Element High
0eeeeeee el
Element Low
0iiiiiii ih
Index High
0iiiiiii il
Index Low
0ccccccc ch
Channel High
0ccccccc cl
Channel Low
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Module Name Number
SCENE LIB “SCENE___” 0-300 (0:response only)
INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” 1-200 (1-40:response only)
OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” 1-200 (1-3:response only)
Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” 1-200 (1-41:response only)
INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” 0-200 (0:response only)
OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNNL” 0-200 (0:response only)
GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” 0-200 (0:response only)
EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” 1-200 (1-27:response only)
Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” 0-100 (0:response only)
Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” 0-100 (0:response only)
U76 LIB “U76_____” 0-100 (0:response only)
Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” 0-100 (0:response only)
EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” 0-100 (0:response only)
DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” 0-100 (0:response only)
Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” 0-10 (0:response only)
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L"
(ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i"
(ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b"
(ASCII CODE)
01000101 "E"
(ASCII CODE)
01111000 "x"
(ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i"
(ASCII CODE)
01110011 "s"
(ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t"
(ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0sssssss ss
Data Status ( 0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data )
0nnnnnnn nh
Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Request Number Low
0ttttttt th
Top Number High
0ttttttt tl
Top Number Low
0eeeeeee eh
End Number High
0eeeeeee el
End Number Low
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Appendices
Reference Manual
269
4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately
the data is received.
4.5.3 Module Name
4.6 FUNCTION CALL – COLLECTION STORE –
4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on.
4.6.2 Function Name
4.6.3 Module Name
4.7 FUNCTION CALL – MODULE –
4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding effect will function
immediately the data is received (depending on the effect type).
4.7.2 Module Name
This will not work when the Effect Type is different.
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L"
(ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i"
(ASCII CODE)
01100010 "b"
(ASCII CODE)
01000101 "E"
(ASCII CODE)
01111000 "x"
(ASCII CODE)
01101001 "i"
(ASCII CODE)
01110011 "s"
(ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t"
(ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh
Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Request Number Low
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Module Name Number
SCENE LIB “SCENE___” 1-300
INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” 41-200
OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” 4-200
Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” 42-200
INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” 1-200
OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNL” 1-200
GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” 1-200
EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” 55-200
Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” 1-100
Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” 1-100
U76 LIB “U76_____” 1-100
Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” 1-100
EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” 1-100
DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” 1-100
Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” 1-10
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "C"
(ASCII CODE)
01101001 "o"
(ASCII CODE)
01100010 "l"
(ASCII CODE)
01010101 "U"
(ASCII CODE)
01101110 "n"
(ASCII CODE)
01010011 "S"
(ASCII CODE)
01110100 "t"
(ASCII CODE)
01110010 "r"
(ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh
Number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Number Low
0ccccccc ch
Channel High
0ccccccc cl
Channel Low
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Function Number tx/rx
“ColUnStr” Setup 0
tx
User Defined Key 0
tx
Program Change 0
tx
Control Change 0
tx
Module Name
Mixer Setting “MIXERSET”
Outport Setting “OUT_PORT”
Monitor Setting “MONITOR_”
MIDI Setting “MIDI_SET”
Lib Number “LIB_NUM_”
Program Change Table “PRGMCHG_”
Control Change Table “CTRLCHG_”
Preference (Current) “PREF_CUR”
Preference (Admin) “PREF_ADM”
Preference (Guest) “PREF_GST”
User Defined Keys (Current) “UDEF_CUR”
User Defined Keys (Admin) “UDEF_ADM”
User Defined Keys (Guest) “UDEF_GST”
Custom Fader Bank (Current) “CFAD_CUR”
Custom Fader Bank (Admin) “CFAD_ADM”
Custom Fader Bank (Guest) “CFAD_GST”
User Level (Current) “UKEY_CUR”
User Level (Guest) “UKEY_GST”
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001101 "M"
01101111 "o"
01100100 "d"
01000110 "F"
01111000 "x"
01010100 "T"
01110010 "r"
01100111 "g"
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0eeeeeee ee
Effect number (0:RACK1 - 7:RACK8)
0ppppppp pp
Release:0, Press:1
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Module Name Number
Freeze Play button “FRZPLAY_” 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
Freeze Record button “FRZREC__” 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
Module Name
Appendices
Reference Manual
270
4.8 FUNCTION CALL – CHANNEL –
4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
4.8.2 Module Name
*1) 0 :CH1 - 71:CH72
256 :MIX 1 - 279:MIX 24
512 :MATRIX 1 - 519: MATRIX 8
4.9 LEVEL METER DATA
4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the corresponding
metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds. If metering
information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to be sent in at least
every 10 seconds.
Receive
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering data
will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will
vary depending on devices). When rebooted or port setting is changed, the
transmission will be disabled.
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Receive
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number
of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when
[PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. the corresponding metering data will be sent
via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will
vary depending on devices).
When Address UL = 0x7F is received, all metering data transmission will be
immediately stopped [disabled].
Transmission
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01000011 "C"
01101000 "h"
01101100 "l"
01010000 "P"
01101001 "i"
01110010 "r"
01000011 "C"
01110000 "p"
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0sssssss sh
Source Channel Number H *1)
0sssssss sl
Source Channel Number L *1)
0ddddddd dh
Destination Channel Number H *1)
0ddddddd dl
Destination Channel Number L *1)
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Module Name
Pair On (with Copy) “PAIRONCP”
Pair On (with Reset Both) “PAIRONRS”
Pair Off “PAIROFF_”
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21
REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS LU
0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS LL
0ddddddd dd
Data1
::
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01000011 43
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00010010 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21
REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS LU
0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS LL
0ccccccc ch
Count H
0ccccccc cl
Count L
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Appendices
Reference Manual
271
Warning/Error Messages
Message Meaning
xxx Parameters Copied. Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.
xxx Parameters Initialized. Parameter xxx was initialized.
xxx Parameters Pasted. Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.
xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer.
Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy
buffer.
ALTERNATE FUNCTION: Turned off! ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off.
Assignment is Restricted to Max. 8 Sources!
The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources
to be selected, but you attempted to assign more than eight.
Cannot Assign!
In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the CL3/CL1, you attempted
to edit an item that cannot be edited for that model.
Cannot Bookmark This Popup. This popup window cannot be bookmarked.
Cannot Mount This Type of Device in This
Position.
You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it
cannot be mounted.
Cannot Paste! Cannot paste the character string.
Cannot Recall! Failed to recall a scene memory or library.
Cannot Select This Channel.
You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to
your user level or some other reason.
Cannot Store! Failed to store a scene memory or library.
Cannot Undo! You pressed the [UNDO] button when Undo was not available.
Channel Copied. Channel settings have been copied.
Channel Moved. Channel settings have been moved.
Channel Returned to Default Settings. Channel settings have been returned to the default settings.
Couldn’t Access File. File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason.
Couldn’t Write File. File could not be saved to the USB flash drive.
Current User Changed. [xxx] Current user was changed to [xxx].
Directory Not Empty!
You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were
files remaining in the directory.
EDITOR: Data Framing Error!
EDITOR: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being exchanged with CL Editor.
EDITOR: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the CL Editor input port.
EDITOR: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being transmitted from the CL Editor output
port.
EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.
CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup
window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen.
External HA Connection Conflict!
External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of
connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was
stored.
External Power Supply is Cut Off!
The PW800 (EXT) power supply connected to the CL series
console has stopped operating.
File Access is Busy!
The following operation has not been performed yet because the
USB flash drive is being accessed.
File Already Exists!
The USB flash drive already contains a file/directory with the same
name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create.
File Error [xx]! Internal file access error
File Protected!
Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB flash
drive is write-protected.
Flash Memory Initializing Finished. Memory initialization has been completed.
Help File Not Found! The help file has not been loaded.
Illegal Address! The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid.
Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use Network.
Communication via the Network connector is not possible
because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some
reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the
end of the Owner’s Manual (separate document).
Illegal Storage Format!
The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is
invalid or unsupported.
Internal Power Supply is Cut Off!
The internal (INT) power supply has stopped operating.
Alternatively, some other problem has occurred. Contact a
Yamaha service center listed at the end of the owner’s manual
(separate document).
Internal Power Supply is Turned On. The internal (INT) power supply has started up normally.
KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.
KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the
DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different
screen.
Loading Aborted. Loading from USB flash drive was aborted.
Loading Finished. Finished loading from USB flash drive.
Low Battery! The backup battery voltage is low.
Maximum Number of Audio Files Exceeded!
The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory
recorder has been exceeded.
Memory Error! All Memories were
Initialized.
All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup
memory has been lost, due to failure of the backup battery or
some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center
listed at the end of the operating manual (separate document).
MIDI: Data Framing Error!
MIDI: Data Overrun!
An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.
MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port.
MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! To much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port.
No Access From Recorder!
In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level
higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
No channel selected.
A copy-source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE
screen.
No Copy Item Selected.
In the Global Paste screen, you attempted to paste without
having selected an item to paste.
No Corresponding Help Items. The corresponding section was not found in the Hlep file.
No ID3 Tag exists. You can not edit. The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag.
No Response from External HA. No response from an external AD8HR.
No Response from I/O DEVICE. The I/O devices not responding.
Message Meaning
Appendices
Reference Manual
272
Page Bookmarked. The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.
Password Changed. The password has been changed.
PLAYBACK OUT CUE: Turned Off.
CUE was cancelled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched
from the RECORDER screen to another screen.
PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy!
Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in
progress.
Please wait, Dante patch is proceeding now.
You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when
patching was not possible.
Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!
The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. If a
malfunction has occurred, please contact your Yamaha service
center listed at the end of the operating manual (separate
document).
Processing Aborted. Processing was interrupted.
PREVIEW Mode : Cannot Use This Function.
The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used
during Preview.
PREVIEW Mode : Disabled Preview was disabled.
PREVIEW Mode : Enabled Preview was enabled.
Re-Enter Password!
When specifying the user password, the password was not
entered a second time.
RECORDER: CODEC Error [0x%08X] ! A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen.
Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted!
Operation of the button was cancelled because time is required
for recorder processing.
RECORDER IN CUE: Turned Off.
CUE was cancelled for RECORDER IN because you switched from
the RECORDER screen to another screen.
Removed from the Channel Link group. The channel was removed from the link group.
Saving Aborted. Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted.
Saving Finished. Finished saving to USB flash drive.
SCENE #xxx is Empty!
No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or
the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled.
SCENE #xxx is Protected! You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.
SCENE #xxx is Read Only! You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.
Scene Playback Link Canceled! The audio playback link for the scene was cancelled.
SLOT x: Data Framing Error!
SLOT x: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.
SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.
SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port.
Some Song Files Are Unidentified.
Some songs were not identified. Songs that have not been
specified might be used for DIRECT PLAY or PLAY BACK LINK.
Song File Not Found!
The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a
USER DEFINED key does not exist.
STAGEMIX: Data Framing Error!
STAGEMIX: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix.
STAGEMIX: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port.
Message Meaning
STAGEMIX: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output
port.
Storage Full!
The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on
the USB flash drive.
Storage Not Found! The USB flash drive could not be recognized.
Storage Not Ready! Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready.
Sync Error! [xxx] The CL series console is not synchronized to the [xxx] signal.
Tap Operation Ignored.
Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not
displayed in the screen.
This Operation is Not Allowed.
This operation has been ignored because the current user does
not have permission.
Too Large Files! Loading Failed.
Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The
maximum supported file size is 307,256 Bytes.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Compare.
Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed
because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to
Flex15GEQ.
Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed
because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded!
Power consumption of the I/O cards installed in the slots has
exceeded the rated value.
Unassigned Encoder.
Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter
that corresponds to the knob you operated.
Unsupported File Format!
The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an
unsupported format.
USB Currently Active for Recorder function!
Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory
recorder is recording or playing.
USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD!
The recorder cannot operate, since mixer scene memory or library
data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive.
USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped!
Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB
flash drive processing.
USB Memory Full !
Can’t save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free
space on the USB flash drive.
USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive
capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating.
USB Memory is Protected! The USB flash drive’s Protect setting is turned on.
USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder
Stopped.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was
disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating.
USB over current Error! Disconnect USB
device.
The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB
current.
Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped!
Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock
was lost.
Wrong Audio File Format! The format of the audio file is invalid.
Wrong Password! The password you input was incorrect.
Wrong Word Clock!
The CL series console cannot synchronize because the source
selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen
is not appropriate.
You Cannot Create User Key. The current user does not have permission to create a user key.
Message Meaning
Appendices
Reference Manual
273
Electrical characteristics
All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms
■ Frequency Response. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz–20 kHz, referenced
to the nominal output level @1 kHz
■ Gain Error. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @1 kHz
■ Total Harmonic Distortion. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
* Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz
■ Hum & Noise. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise
*Hum & Noise are measured with A-weight filter.
■ Dynamic Range. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
* Dynamic Range are measured with A-weight filter.
■ Sampling Frequency
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
GAIN: +66dB
–1.5 0.0 0.5
dB
PHONES 8 Ω –3.0 0.0 0.5
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
Input level : –62 dBu , GAIN : +66 dB
Output level +4.0 dBu (Typ.)
–2.0 0 2.0
dB
Input level : +10 dBu , GAIN : –6 dB
Output level +4.0 dBu (Typ.)
Internal OSC
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
Full scale output, Output level :
+24.0 dBu (Typ.)
–0.5 0 0.5
PHONES 8 Ω
–30 dBFs, phones level control : max.
Output level 0 dBu (Typ.)
–0.5 0 0.5
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: +66dB 0.1
%
+4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: –6dB 0.05
Internal OSC
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Full Scale Output @1 kHz 0.02
PHONES 8 Ω
Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES Level
Control: Max.
0.2
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: +66dB
Master fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
–128
EIN
dBu
–62
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB
Master fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
–84 –79
All INPUTs OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB
Master fader at nominal level and all
OMNI IN 1-8 in faders at nominal level.
–70
— OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off –88
—PHONES 8 Ω
Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level
Control Min.
–88
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: –6dB 108 dB
— OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω DA Converter 112 dB
Parameter Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
External Clock
Frequency
Range
Fs= 44.1 kHz
Fs= 45.9375 kHz (44.1 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 44.1441 kHz (44.1 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 44.0559 kHz (44.1 kHz –0.1%)
Fs= 42.336 kHz (44.1 kHz –4.0%)
–200 +200 ppm
Fs= 48 kHz
Fs= 50 kHz (48 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 48.048 kHz (48 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 47.952 kHz (48 kHz –0.1%)
Fs= 46.080 kHz (48 kHz –4.0%)
Jitter of PLL
DIGITAL IN Fs= 44.1 kHz
DIGITAL IN Fs= 48 kHz
10 ns
Internal Clock
Frequency
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz 44.1
kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz 48
Accuracy
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
–50 +50 ppm
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Jitter
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz 4.429
ns
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz 4.069
Appendices
Reference Manual
274
Mixer Basic Parameters
■ Libraries
■ Input Function
■ Output Function
■ Output Port
■ Processor
Name Number Total
Scene Memory Preset 1 + User 300 301
Input CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 200
Output CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 200
Input EQ Library Preset 40 + User 159 199
Output EQ Library Preset 3 + User 196 199
Dynamics Library Preset 41 + User 158 199
Effect Library Preset 27 + User 172 199
GEQ Library Preset 1 + User 199 200
Premium Rack Library
Portico5033
Portico5043
U76
Opt-2A
EQ-1A
DynamicEQ
Preset 1 + User 199 200
Dante Input Patch Library Preset 1 + User 10 11
Function Parameter
Phase Normal/Reverse
Digital Gain –96 dB to +24 dB
HPF
Slope= 12 dB/Oct
Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz
Attenuator –96 dB to 0 dB
4 Band
Equalizer
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Type I/Type II
Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Direct Out Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Dynamics 1
Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander
Threshold= Gate: –72 dB to 0 dB
Others: –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Hold= 48 kHz: 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec
44.1 kHz: 0.02 msec to 2.13 sec
Decay= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Releace= 48 kHz: 5msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Range= Gate: –∞ dB to 0 dB
Ducking: –70 dB to 0 dB
Gain= 0.0 dB to +8dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF
Dynamics2
Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Frequency= 1.0 KHz to 12.5KHz
TYPE= HPF, BPF
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
On On/Off
Pan/Balance
Position L63 to R63
Pan Mode: Pan/Balance
DCA Group 16 Groups
Mute Group 8 Groups
Mix Send
24 sends
Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes
Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Matrix Send
8 Sends
Matrix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
LCR Pan CSR= 0% to 100%
DELAY 0 ms to 1000 msec
Function Parameter
Function Parameter
Attenuator –96 dB to 0 dB
4Band Equalizer
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Type I/Type II
Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Dynamics 1
Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to + 18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 MIX24/
MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
On On/Off
Pan/Balance Position L63 to R63
Mute Group 8 Groups
Mix to Matrix
Stereo to Matrix
Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB
Oscillator
Level= 0 to –96dB (1 dB step)
On/Off= Software control
Function Parameter
Out Port Delay 0 msec to 1000 msec
Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse
Gain –96 to +24 dB
Function Parameter
GEQ 31 bands x 16(24) or 15 bands x 32(48) systems
Effects Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems
Premium Rack
Parameter
Stereo(Dual) In/Stereo(Dual) Out Premium Rack x
8systems
Appendices
Reference Manual
275
M IDI Implementation Chart
2102 .raM 1 :etaD] elosnoC gnixiM latigiD [ AHAMAY
Model: CL5/CL3/CL1
MIDI Implementation Chart
Version: 1.0
Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1–16
1–16
1–16
1–16
Memorized
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
**************
1, 3
X
X
Memorized
Note
Number
True Voice
0–127
X
0–127
X
Velocity
Note On
Note Off
O 9nH, v=0,127
X
O 9nH, v=1-127
O
Effect Control
After
Touch
Key’s
Ch’s
X
X
X
X
Pitch
Bend
XX
Control
Change
0,32
6,38
98,99
1-31,33-95, 102-
119
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Bank Select
Data Entry
NRPN LSB,MSB
Assignable Cntrl
Prog
Change :True#
O 0–127
**************
O 0–127
0–300
Assignable
2*,1* O1* OevisulcxE metsyS
Common
:Song Pos.
:Song Sel.
:Tune
X
X
X
X
O
X
Recorder Control
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
X
X
O
X
Effect Contro
l
Aux
Messages
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
Notes
*1 Bulk Dump/Request and Parameter Change/Request.
*2 MMC
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
Appendices
Reference Manual
276
Index
A
Assignable encoders....................................... 172
Functions that can be assigned................. 263
Audio file (links to a scene recall) .................. 94
C
Calibration function.............. 207, 208, 209, 211
Cascade connections...................................... 200
Centralogic section........................................... 11
Channel
Copying, moving, initializing ..................... 73
Channel color................................... 29, 204, 211
Channel library ........................................... 45, 55
Channel Link..................................................... 70
Channel name displays.................................. 204
Console Lock................................................... 175
Control Changes
Control parameters .................................... 155
Cue function.............................................. 97, 101
Operating..................................................... 102
Custom fader bank......................................... 173
D
Dante audio network ............................... 15, 213
DAW .................................................................. 25
DCA groups ...................................................... 64
Directly outputting........................................... 23
Dynamics..................................................... 56, 59
Libraries......................................................... 63
DYNAMICS Library List............................... 228
Dynamics Parameters .................................... 230
E
Effect................................................................. 114
Libraries....................................................... 137
Effect Type List ............................................... 232
Effects and tempo synchronization ............. 247
Effects Parameters .......................................... 233
Electrical characteristics ................................ 273
EQ....................................................................... 56
Libraries......................................................... 63
EQ Library List................................................ 227
External device.................................................. 21
External head amp.................................. 138, 144
F
Factory set........................................................ 206
Fade function..................................................... 91
Focus function................................................... 87
Function Tree...................................................... 4
G
Gain .................................................................... 30
Analog gain.................................................... 30
Digital gain .................................................... 34
Gain Compensation ................................... 34, 35
Global Paste function....................................... 85
GPI.................................................................... 221
Graphic EQ...................................................... 114
Libraries ....................................................... 137
Operations ................................................... 118
Grouping............................................................ 64
H
HA (Head Amp) ............................................... 30
Help function .................................................. 193
Recalling....................................................... 194
Viewing ........................................................ 194
I
I/O device......................................................... 138
Initialize ........................................................... 206
Input channels................................................... 27
Channel library ............................................. 45
Channel name and icon............................... 28
Sending to MIX/MATRIX bus ................... 39
Sending to STEREO/MONO buses ........... 35
Input Delay........................................................ 44
Input patch ........................................................ 19
Inserting............................................................. 21
Internal clock................................................... 204
Internal effects................................................. 122
L
Lamps ............................................................... 204
LEDs ................................................................. 204
Linking ............................................................... 64
M
Master fader.................................................... 174
MATRIX buses................................... 39, 51, 202
MBCL meter bridge (optional) .................... 113
METER screen................................................ 111
Meters.............................................................. 111
MIDI ................................................................ 149
MIDI Data Format......................................... 264
MIDI Implementation Chart ....................... 275
MIX buses ................................................. 39, 202
MIX channels
Sending to MATRIX buses.......................... 51
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus ............... 48
Mixer Basic Parameters................................. 274
Mixing parameter operation applicability.. 254
Monitor function ....................................... 97, 98
Mute groups................................................ 64, 66
N
Network address ............................................ 205
NRPN parameter assignments..................... 250
Nuendo Live ................................................... 188
O
Oscillator................................................. 106, 108
Output channels................................................ 46
Channel library ............................................. 55
Channel name and icon ............................... 47
Output Delay ..................................................... 55
Output patch...................................................... 16
OVERVIEW screen .......................................... 12
P
Parameter Changes........................................ 157
Parameters that can be assigned to
control changes............................................. 248
Patching.............................................................. 15
Pink frame (TOUCH AND TURN)............ 171
Preferences...................................................... 168
Premium Rack................................................ 130
Libraries ...................................................... 137
Premium Rack Processor Parameters......... 245
Preview mode .................................................... 96
Program Changes........................................... 152
R
Recall Safe function.......................................... 88
Recall scenes.............................................. 80, 152
S
Scene memory .................................................. 77
Editing ........................................................... 82
Security ............................................................ 158
SELECTED CHANNEL section....................... 6
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen............ 7
SETUP screen ................................................. 196
Slot.................................................................... 198
STEREO/MONO buses............................. 35, 48
STEREO/MONO channels
Sending to MATRIX buses ......................... 51
T
Talkback .......................................................... 106
Title list ............................................................ 187
TOUCH AND TURN.................................... 171
Touch screen................................................... 204
U
USB flash drive
Formatting .................................................. 180
Loading a file .............................................. 178
Loading a Help file..................................... 193
Loading a text file....................................... 193
Playing back audio files............................. 185
Recording audio ......................................... 183
Saving and loading setup data.................. 177
USB memory recorder................................... 181
USER DEFINED keys.................................... 169
Functions that can be assigned................. 259
Recalling Help ............................................ 194
USER DEFINED knobs................................. 171
Functions that can be assigned................. 262
User Level settings.......................................... 158
V
Virtual rack ..................................................... 114
Operations................................................... 115
W
Warning/Error Messages .............................. 271
Word clock...................................................... 198
301IP-C0
© 2012-2013 Yamaha Corporation
C.S.G., Pro Audio Division
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Documenttranscriptie
How to Use This Reference Manual The CL5/CL3/CL1 Reference Manual (this document) allows you to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text. Searching for terms To search for a term, use the search function of the software you’re using to view this document. If you’re using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box and press the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to search for occurrences of that term. Displaying the next/previous view If you’re using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/next view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back to the previous page after you’ve used a link to jump to a different page. Reference Manual Using the Function Tree A function tree for the CL5/CL3/CL1 is provided on page 4 and following. You can use this function tree to find the page that explains an on-screen display or function. EN Contents Contents EQ and Dynamics ..................................................................... 56 About EQ and dynamics ......................................................................................... Using EQ ................................................................................................................ Using dynamics ...................................................................................................... Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries ......................................................................... How to Use This Reference Manual .......................................................................... 1 Function Tree ............................................................................ 4 Grouping and linking .............................................................. 64 About DCA groups and Mute groups ..................................................................... Using DCA groups.................................................................................................. Using mute groups................................................................................................. Channel Link function ............................................................................................ Copying, moving, or initializing a channel.............................................................. SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................................................... 6 About the SELECTED CHANNEL section ................................................................... 6 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ....................................................... 6 SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen ........................................................................... 7 Centralogic section ................................................................. 11 About scene memories ........................................................................................... 77 Using scene memories ............................................................................................ 77 Editing scene memories.......................................................................................... 82 Using the Global Paste function.............................................................................. 85 Using the Focus function ........................................................................................ 87 Using the Recall Safe function................................................................................. 88 Using the Fade function.......................................................................................... 91 Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT) ................................................................................................... 93 Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall............................................... 94 Using Preview mode............................................................................................... 96 Input and output patching..................................................... 15 15 16 19 21 23 25 Input channels ........................................................................ 27 Signal flow for input channels................................................................................ Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color............................................ Making HA (Head Amp) settings............................................................................ Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses ................... Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus .............................. Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay) .................................................. Channel library operations ..................................................................................... Monitor and Cue functions ..................................................... 97 27 28 30 35 39 44 45 About the Monitor and Cue functions .................................................................... 97 Using the Monitor function .................................................................................... 98 Using the Cue function......................................................................................... 101 Operating the Cue function.................................................................................. 102 Talkback and Oscillator......................................................... 106 About the Talkback and Oscillator functions ......................................................... 106 Using Talkback ..................................................................................................... 106 Using the Oscillator function ................................................................................ 108 Output channels ..................................................................... 46 Signal flow for output channels ............................................................................. Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color............................................ Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus ............................. Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses............................................................................................. Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay) ............................................... Channel library operations ..................................................................................... 64 64 66 70 73 Scene memory ......................................................................... 77 About the Centralogic section................................................................................ 11 Operations in the Centralogic section .................................................................... 11 OVERVIEW screen .................................................................................................. 12 CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching .......................... Changing the output patch settings ...................................................................... Changing the input patch settings......................................................................... Inserting an external device into a channel ............................................................ Directly outputting an INPUT channel ................................................................... Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer ........................................... 56 56 59 63 46 47 48 Meters.................................................................................... 111 Operations in the METER screen ........................................................................... 111 Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console ..................... 113 51 55 55 2 Reference Manual Contents Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack ............................... 114 About the virtual rack .......................................................................................... Virtual rack operations ......................................................................................... Graphic EQ operations......................................................................................... About the internal effects..................................................................................... Using the Premium Rack ...................................................................................... Using the graphic EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries..................................... Loading a text file from a USB flash drive.............................................................. 193 Viewing Help ........................................................................................................ 194 Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly................................................... 194 114 115 118 122 130 137 Other functions ..................................................................... 196 About the SETUP screen ....................................................................................... 196 Word clock and slot settings ................................................................................. 198 Using cascade connections ................................................................................... 200 Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses .................................................... 202 Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off.............................................. 203 Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps ................................................................................................. 204 Setting the date and time of the internal clock ..................................................... 204 Setting the network address ................................................................................. 205 Initializing the unit to factory default settings ....................................................... 206 Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) .............. 207 Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) ........................................................... 208 Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) ............................... 209 Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)................................................ 211 Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display .......................................... 212 Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display .............................................. 213 Dante audio network settings ............................................................................... 213 Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) .................................................................. 221 I/O device and external head amp ....................................... 138 Using an I/O device ............................................................................................. I/O device patching ............................................................................................. Remotely controlling an Rio unit .......................................................................... Remotely controlling an amp............................................................................... Using an external head amp ................................................................................ 138 138 140 143 144 MIDI....................................................................................... 149 MIDI functionality on the CL series console.......................................................... Basic MIDI settings .............................................................................................. Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items ................................... Using Control Changes to control parameters ..................................................... Using Parameter Changes to control parameters ................................................. 149 149 152 155 157 User settings (Security) ........................................................ 158 User Level settings ............................................................................................... Preferences .......................................................................................................... USER DEFINED keys ............................................................................................. USER DEFINED knobs........................................................................................... Assignable encoders ............................................................................................ Custom fader bank .............................................................................................. Master fader ........................................................................................................ Console Lock ....................................................................................................... Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive............................... Formatting a USB flash drive ................................................................................ 158 168 169 171 172 173 174 175 177 180 Appendices ............................................................................ 227 EQ Library List ...................................................................................................... DYNAMICS Library List ......................................................................................... Dynamics Parameters ........................................................................................... Effect Type List ..................................................................................................... Effects Parameters................................................................................................. Premium Rack Processor Parameters ..................................................................... Effects and tempo synchronization ....................................................................... Parameters that can be assigned to control changes............................................. NRPN parameter assignments .............................................................................. Mixing parameter operation applicability ............................................................. Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys ......................................... Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs....................................... Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders ................................... MIDI Data Format ................................................................................................ Warning/Error Messages....................................................................................... Electrical characteristics ........................................................................................ Mixer Basic Parameters ......................................................................................... MIDI Implementation Chart ................................................................................. Index.................................................................................................................... Recorder................................................................................ 181 About the USB memory recorder ......................................................................... Assigning channels to the input and output of the recorder................................. Recording audio to a USB flash drive.................................................................... Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive ..................................................... Editing the title list............................................................................................... Using the CL console with Nuendo Live............................................................... 181 181 183 185 187 188 Help function ........................................................................ 193 Loading a Help file from a USB flash drive ............................................................ 193 3 227 228 230 232 233 245 247 248 250 254 259 262 263 264 271 273 274 275 276 Reference Manual Function Tree Function Tree SEND TO/SEND FROM TO STEREO/MONO Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the Owner’s Manual (booklet). Main SELECTED CHANNEL OVERVIEW FUNCTION ACCESS AREA 6 GAIN/PATCH (20) 16, 29, 48 31 1ch 31 8ch 32 CH1-48 32 CH49-72/ST IN 32 OUTPUT 138 CH1-48 50 DANTE INPUT PATCH 138 CH49-72/ST IN 50 DANTE OUTPUT PATCH 140 OUTPUT 50 LIBRARY CHANNEL LIBRARY 45 EQ LIBRARY 63 DYNAMICS LIBRARY 63 GEQ LIBRARY 137 EFFECT LIBRARY 137 Portico5033/Portico5043/U76/Opt-2A/ EQ-1A/DynamicEQ LIBRARY 137 DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY 139 44 VIRTUAL RACK CH1-48 45 DELAY SCALE 44 21 1ch 21, 23 8ch 22, 24 HPF/EQ 56 1ch 56 8ch 57 CH1-48 58 CH49-72/ST IN 58 OUTPUT 58 DYNAMICS 59 1ch 59 KEY IN SOURCE SELECT 115 RACK MOUNTER 116 GEQ EDIT 118 GEQ LINK 61 CH1-48 62 CH49-72/ST IN 62 OUTPUT 62 141 DANTE OUTPUT PATCH 142 AMP 143 DANTE OUTPUT PATCH EXTERNAL HA 143 146 EXTERNAL HA EDIT 147 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT 147 MONITOR MONITOR 98 103 99 OSCILLATOR 109 TALKBACK 107 119 EFFECT RACK EFFECT EDIT EFFECT TYPE PREMIUM RACK 122 METER 125 INPUT METER 111 126 OUTPUT METER 111 130 PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER 131 PREMIUM RACK EDIT 132 SETUP USER SETUP 168 USER DEFINED KEYS SETUP 169 USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP 170 171 USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP (List) 171 ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP 172 CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER 173 FADER ASSIGN SELECT 4 196 PREFERENCE USER DEFINED KEY SETUP (List) 62 8ch 140 REMOTE HA EDIT CUE 8ch INSERT/DIRECT OUT Rio MONITOR Indication only 45 138 DANTE SETUP RACK CH49-72/ST IN DANTE PATCH 49 44 INPUT DELAY 49 I/O DEVICE 8ch 12 CHANNEL PARAMETER PATCH/NAME 41, 52 174 Reference Manual Function Tree SETUP CH JOB 158 CH LINK MODE 71 CREATE KEY 160 DCA GROUP ASSIGN 64 SAVE KEY 165 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN 66 LOGIN 161 RECALL SAFE MODE 88 SAVE/LOAD 177 CH COPY MODE 73 WORD CLOCK/SLOT 198 CH MOVE MODE 74 CH DEFAULT MODE 76 USER LEVEL/CREATE USER KEY CASCADE IN/OUT PATCH OUTPUT PORT MIDI/GPI 200, 202 18 149, 221 MIDI SETUP 150 PROGRAM CHANGE 152 CONTROL CHANGE 155 GPI 222 FADER START 225 BUS SETUP 202 CONSOLE LOCK 175 DATE/TIME 204 NETWORK 205 DANTE SETUP 213 PATCH 22, 24, 100, 104, 139, 201 PORT SELECT 19, 117, 174, 175, 182 CH SELECT Others CONFIRMATION 168 SOFT KEYBORD (21) LOGIN 161 Startup Menu SCENE SCENE LIST MODE SELECT 79 GLOBAL PASTE 85 FADE TIME 91 SONG SELECT 95 FOCUS RECALL 87 PREVIEW 96 RECORDER USB 181 NUENDO LIVE 188 206 INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES 206 INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES 206 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 207 INPUT PORT TRIM 210 OUTPUT PORT TRIM 210 SLOT OUTPUT TRIM 210 FADER CALIBRATION 208 CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION 211 NOTE • The explanations in this reference manual will use the CL5. • In the case of the CL3/CL1, some screens will not show channels and faders that do not exist on those models. 5 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section 2. SELECTED CHANNEL section This chapter explains how to use the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to control the selected channel. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the currently-selected channel. If you leave this screen displayed, you will always be able to view the settings in the screen while operating the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. NOTE About the SELECTED CHANNEL section If you have turned on the option “POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED” on the PREFERENCE tab (accessed by pressing the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button), pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the popup window (1ch). The SELECTED CHANNEL section located to the left of the display corresponds to the mixer module on a conventional analog mixer, and enables you to manually adjust all the major parameters of the currently-selected channel. Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL] key. If you have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip, either the L or the R channel will be selected, and the major parameters for L and R channels will be linked. You can use the knobs on the panel to control mix parameters such as head amp gain, HPF/EQ settings, the threshold setting of the dynamics processors, pan/balance settings, and send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. Even if a different screen is selected, the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section will always affect the currently-selected channel. In this case, a window indicating the value of that parameter will appear on screen when you operate a knob. Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 1. Use a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to control. To select a channel, press a [SEL] key in the top panel channel strip section, the Centralogic section, or the master section. Press the appropriate bank select key so that the Channel number channels you want to control are assigned to the Channel name top panel. The number and name of the currently-selected channel is shown in the channel select field located in the Function Access Area of the touch screen. NOTE • If an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has been assigned to a single channel strip, you can switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same [SEL] key. • You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select field located in the Function Access Area. Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the field to select the next channel. 3. 6 Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel. Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen If the destination bus channels are two mono channels: 1 2 3 1 SEND knob Sets the send level to the corresponding bus. 2 PRE indicator Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on. 3 ON button Switches the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off. If the destination bus is a stereo channel: 1 2 ■ SEND field In this field, you can view the send level from the channel to each MIX/ MATRIX bus, switch the on/off status of the send signals, and switch between pre and post. 3 1 1 SEND/PAN knob The right-hand knob adjusts the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels (even-numbered and odd-numbered). The left-hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the same signal. 1 Tabs Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be displayed in the SEND field. • MIX1–16 tab.............................. displays MIX buses 1–16. • MIX17–24/MATRIX tab ......... displays MIX buses 17–24 and MATRIX buses 1–8. 2 PRE indicator Indicates the send point of the corresponding bus. If the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON, this PRE indicator will be turned on. 3 ON button Press the right-hand button to switch on or off the signal sent to two bus channels. The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in the SEND field vary depending on whether a pair of bus channels (odd-numbered and evennumbered) are comprised of two mono channels or a stereo channel. NOTE • If the indices of a SEND/PAN knob are white, the send point is assigned as PRE; if the indices are black, it is assigned as POST. • If the send point is PRE, you can specify the PRE point as either VARI [PRE EQ] or VARI [PRE FADER] in the BUS SETUP popup that appears when you press the SETUP button → BUS SETUP button. • If the type of the destination bus is set to FIXED, controllers 1–2 mentioned above will not be displayed. The send level will be fixed at nominal level, and the send point will be fixed at POST FADER. For details, see “Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses” on page 202. • Press the SEND LEVEL knob or PAN knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch popup window. 7 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section ■ GAIN/PATCH field This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog gain settings, and view the operational status of the head amp. 1 GAIN knob Sets the analog gain of the head amp. For a channel to which the head amp has not been patched, a gray circle appears, instead of the knob. Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch popup window. 1 If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network. 2 ST/MONO button Switches the on/off status of a signal sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. If an INPUT/MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR button appears in location 2. The LCR button is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. 2 When a MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected: 3 1 BALANCE knob 4 If the signal on the selected channel is stereo, the BALANCE knob will appear, enabling you to adjust the volume balance for the left and right channels. If the channel signal is monaural, a gray circle will appear in this location. Press the knob to open the TO STEREO 8ch popup window. 2 OVER indicator Warns you when the signal is clipping. 3 +48V indicator Indicates the phantom power on or off status for the head amp. 4 Ø (Phase) indicator ■ INPUT DELAY field This field enables you to view the delay settings. Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp. NOTE • For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp, 1 will be a gray circle and 3 will not be shown. For an output channel, 1 will be a gray circle, and 2–4 will not be shown. • If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP → PREFERENCE screen, the digital gain knob will appear for 1, and 3 will not be displayed. For details, refer to “Making HA (Head Amp) settings” on page 30. 1 1 1 ON indicator Indicates the on/off status of the delay. If the delay is off, the indicator will not be displayed. 2 2 Delay time The delay value is displayed by milliseconds (ms) and also by currently-selected scale. If the scale uses units of ms, the value in the bottom row will not be displayed. Only the ms value appears in the middle row. Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch popup window. ■ PAN/BALANCE field This field enables you to switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel to the STEREO/MONO bus, and adjust the pan and balance. The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel. ■ HPF field (input channels only) This field enables you to set the HPF. When an input channel or MIX channel is selected: 1 HPF knob 2 1 Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 1 TO STEREO PAN knob Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus. 1 Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch popup window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this popup window. For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo. 2 2 ON button Switches the HPF on or off. 2 If an output channel is selected, a gray circle will appear in location 1, and button 2 will be hidden. 8 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section ■ EQ parameter field This field displays the 4-band EQ parameter settings. ■ EQ graph field This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/ EQ 1ch popup window, in which you can set the attenuator, HPF and EQ. 1 Q knob Specifies the Q for each band. If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF or H. SHELF (highshelving), or the LOW band filter type is set to L. SHELF (lowshelving), the Q knob will not be displayed. Only the filter type name will be displayed. ■ DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 field This field enables you to view and set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters. 1 1 2 2 3 NOTE 3 • Fully rotating the HIGH band Q knob on the panel counter-clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to LPF. Fully rotating the Q knob clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to high-shelving. • Fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to low-shelving. • If an output channel has been selected, fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel counterclockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to HPF. • You can also switch the filter type on the HPF/EQ 1ch popup window. 4 1 OVER indicator Warns you when the signal is clipping. 2 FREQUENCY knob 2 Level meter Sets the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) for each band. Displays the output signal level (green) and the amount of gain reduction (orange) when the Dynamics is on. The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line. 3 GAIN knob 3 Threshold Sets the amount of cut/boost for each band. Specifies the threshold. NOTE • If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF, you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN knob on the panel. • If the LOW band filter type is set to HPF, you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN knob on the panel. • Press each knob to open the HPF/EQ 1ch popup window. 4 Parameters Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type. Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 1ch popup window, in which you can make detailed parameter settings. 9 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section ■ INSERT field This field enables you to make insert settings. ■ FADER field This field enables you to view and make settings for the channel on/ off status and the level. 1 1 Popup button 2 ON button 4 Displays the current level. Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels. 3 Displays the current level setting by numerical value. If the signal is clipping at any point in the channel, the ΣCLIP indicator will light. 3 RACK EDIT popup button Appears if an effect or Premium Rack is inserted. Press this button to display the edit screen for the inserted rack. 3 ON button Switches the channel status on or off. The button is linked with the corresponding [ON] key on the top panel. 4 IN indicator Appears if a port has been assigned to the insert-in patch. It lights when the signal is sent to the insert-in. ■ DCA/MUTE field This field enables you to view and select the DCA or mute group to which the channel is assigned. ■ DIRECT OUT field This field enables you to make insert settings. 1 Select DCA or mute as a group to set. Press the selected tab once again to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window. 2 2 DCA group select buttons Switches the Direct Out on or off. Press this button to open the RECALL SAFE popup window. 2 ON button 3 When the DCA group tab is selected: 2 ON button 1 Popup button 1 1 Tabs 1 Popup button ■ RECALL SAFE field This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings. 3 1 2 Level indicator Switches the insert on or off. Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch popup window. The Direct Out level value will appear below the button. 2 1 Fader 2 Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch popup window. 2 Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned. 3 Mute group indicators Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned. 1 3 When the mute group tab is selected: 2 4 Mute group select buttons 5 Select the mute group to which the channel is assigned. Switches the Recall Safe status on or off. NOTE 3 PARTIAL indicator If the dimmer level is set to the mute group, this button lights orange. This will light if recall safe applies only to some of the parameters, not to all channel settings. 5 MUTE SAFE button 6 4 Temporarily removes the channel from the mute group. 6 DCA group indicators Indicate the DCA group to which the channel is assigned. 10 Reference Manual Centralogic section Centralogic section Operations in the Centralogic section Follow the steps below to perform operations in the Centralogic section. This chapter explains how to use the Centralogic section and the OVERVIEW screen to simultaneously control up to eight channels. 1. About the Centralogic section Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels or DCA groups that you want to control. When you press a Bank Select key, the LED of that key will light. The touch screen will display the OVERVIEW screen, and the parameters of the eight channels you selected will appear. NOTE The Centralogic section is located below the touch screen, and lets you recall and simultaneously control a set of up to eight input channels, output channels, or DCA groups. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you want to control. When the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed, you can switch to the OVERVIEW screen by pressing any of the multifunction knobs 1–8. This is convenient if you want to quickly switch to the OVERVIEW screen while leaving the same channels or DCA groups selected for control. 2. Use the faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section to adjust the level of the group of up to eight selected channels and switch them on or off. NOTE • The bottom line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels or DCA groups that can be controlled by the faders, [ON] keys and [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section. • The top line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels that can be controlled by multifunction knobs 1–8 in the Centralogic section. 3. Use the fields on the OVERVIEW screen and the multifunction knobs to adjust the parameters for the group of up to eight channels. Bank Select keys If you press one of the Bank Select keys, the channels or DCA groups corresponding to that key will be assigned to the Centralogic section, and can be controlled using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section. 11 Reference Manual Centralogic section ■ GAIN/PATCH field This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings and view the operational status of the head amp. The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel. OVERVIEW screen If the head amp is patched: 1 GAIN knob 2 3 4 1 Sets the analog gain of the head amp. • Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the corresponding knob in the Centralogic section, which enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network. • If the GAIN knob has been assigned to a knob in the Centralogic section, press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 8ch popup window. 2 OVER indicator Lights when the signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected. 3 +48V indicator Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is not displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel. 4 Ø (Phase) indicator Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected. NOTE • If the slot is not connected to the head amp, the patch and the type of the MY card will be displayed. • If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen, the digital GAIN knob will appear instead of knob 1, and indicator 3 will not be displayed. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network. ■ CHANNEL NAME field This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number, name, and icon for the currently-selected eight channels. The name of the currently-selected channel is highlighted. : Selected channel If the slot is patched: The slot name will appear. : Unselected channel If the rack is connected: The patch and module name will appear. NOTE If you have retained the channels assigned to the faders in the Centralogic section by pressing and holding down a Bank Select key, the channel names shown at the top and bottom of the OVERVIEW screen may differ. If the output is connected: Only the patch will appear. 12 Reference Manual Centralogic section ■ INPUT DELAY field This field displays the delay status for the input channel. If an output channel has been selected, this field will be blank. Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch popup window. ■ SEND field This field displays the send level, send on/off status, and pre/post settings for 16 buses. To select the 16 destination buses, use the [MIX 1–16] or [MIX 17–24/MATRIX] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the panel. Use the Centralogic multifunction knobs to adjust the send level for each bus. Touch the knob of the bus you want to operate; it will be assigned to the Centralogic multifunction knobs. If it is assigned to the multifunction knobs, touching that knob once again will display the SEND 8ch popup screen. This field varies depending on the type of the destination bus. 1 1 DELAY ON/OFF indicator Indicates the on/off status of the delay. ■ INSERT/DIRECT OUT field This field enables you to make insert and Direct Out settings. Press this field to open the INSERT/ DIRECT OUT 8ch popup window. If the destination bus is VARI (mono): The knob color and scale color indicate the send on/off and pre/post status. If the send is off, the knob color turns gray. With the post setting, the knob scale color turns black. 1 2 1 INSERT ON/OFF indicator Indicates the insert on/off status. 2 DIRECT OUT ON/OFF indicator (input channels only) If the destination bus is VARI (stereo): If a pair of buses (odd-numbered and even-numbered) are in stereo, the lefthand knob will function as the PAN knob, and the right-hand knob will function as the SEND knob. Indicates the Direct Out on/off status. ■ EQ field This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch popup window, in which you can set the HPF and EQ. NOTE If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank. ■ DYNAMICS 1/2 field This field displays the threshold value and meter for Dynamics 1/2. Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/2 1ch popup window. If the destination bus is set to FIXED: The SEND ON/OFF button will appear instead of each knob. NOTE If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank. 13 Reference Manual Centralogic section ■ TO STEREO/MONO field This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus. If you press this field, the knob will be assigned to the corresponding knob in the Centralogic section. If you press the field once again, the TO STEREO/MONO 8ch popup window will appear. This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel. ■ DCA group field A DCA group (1–16) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row in this field. Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window. When an input channel or MIX channel is selected: 1 ■ Mute group field A mute group (1–8) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field. If the channel has been temporarily removed from the mute group, “S” (Safe) will appear on the third row. If the dimmer level has been set for a mute group, the color of the characters changes from red to orange. Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window. 2 1 TO STEREO PAN knob Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus. Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch popup window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window. For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo. 2 ST/MONO indicator Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus. If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in location 2. 2 When a MATRIX channel (monaural) or MONO channel is selected: The ΣCLIP indicator appears, indicating that the signal is clipping at some point in the channel. For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob appears, indicating the balance of the left/right channels. 14 Reference Manual Input and output patching Input and output patching Input patching CL series consoles and I/O devices feature two types of patching: Dante audio network patching and CL console internal patching. For Dante audio network patching, you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window. In this window, you can patch CL console and I/O device inputs. Sixty-four (64) channels can be input from a Dante audio network to a CL series console. You can choose up to 64 channels from maximum of 512 channels (logical value) of Dante audio network signals. Select the I/O devices (within 64 channels) that you want to control from the CL series console. Then, route the input signals (that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window) to channels on the CL series console. To do this, choose input ports from DANTE 1–64 in the GAIN/ PATCH popup window. This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect inserts, and how to use direct outputs. CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching The following diagram shows the signal flow through the CL series console, I/O devices, and Dante audio network. NOTE I/O device I/O device By default, DANTE 1–64 are assigned to input channels 1–64. ID #1 ID #3 Dante-MY16-AUD Dante Network Up to 512 channels (logical value) I/O device Output patching ID #2 Use the OUTPUT PORT popup window to patch CL console’s output channels and Dante audio network. In this window, assign output channel signals to DANTE 1–64 ports. SW 64/512 OMNI 8 MY 16 MY 16 MY 16 Dante patching NOTE By default, MIX 1–24 are assigned to DANTE 1–24, MATRIX 1–8 are assigned to DANTE 25–32, STEREO L/R are assigned to DANTE 33/34, and MONO is assigned to DANTE 35. “Dante” (ports) 64 INPUT PATCH Next, patch the output signals from DANTE 1–64 (assigned in the OUTPUT PORT popup window) to I/O device outputs. Use the OUTPUT PATCH popup window of the I/O device to make these assignments. CL internal patching CL series console 15 Reference Manual Input and output patching Changing the output patch settings In the PATCH/NAME popup window you can change the channel name, icon, and output port assigned to each output channel. The window includes the following items. To change the patching, you can either select the output port that will be the output destination of each output channel, or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port. 3 4 5 Selecting the output port for each output channel 1. 1 Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen containing the output channel for which you want to assign the output port. Channel number/Channel name 2 7 6 1 PATCH button Indicates the port that is patched to the input or output channel. Press this button to enable the PATCH tab at the bottom of the screen. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port. 2 Channel select button Selects the channel to set. NOTE Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console. 2. In the top part of the screen, press the channel number/channel name field to access the PATCH/NAME popup window. 3 Channel icon button Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel. Press this button to enable the ICON tab at the bottom of the screen. The CH COLOR/ICON popup window will appear, enabling you to select the color, icon, and channel name. 4 Channel number display box Indicates the channel number. This item cannot be changed. 16 Reference Manual Input and output patching 5 Channel name edit box Selecting the output channel for each output port Indicates the currently-specified channel. Press the inside of this box to enable the NAME tab at the bottom of the screen. The SOFT KEYBOARD popup window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. OUTPUT PORT button 6 Category select list Selects the type of the port you want to display on the screen. 7 Port select buttons Enable you to select a port in the current category. To cancel the selection, press the same button once again. 3. Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be assigned to that channel. If the output port select buttons are not shown at the bottom of the window, press the PATCH tab. 4. Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys to switch the output channels being controlled, and specify their output ports in the same way. 5. When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window. You will return to the OVERVIEW screen. 2. 17 In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the screen, press the OUTPUT PORT button to open the OUTPUT PORT popup window. Reference Manual Input and output patching 6 DELAY button In the OUTPUT PORT popup window, you can assign the source channel for each output port. This popup window includes the following items. Switches the output port delay on or off. 2 7 Ø (Phase) button Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase and reverse phase. 1 3 4 8 GAIN knob Adjusts the output gain of the output port. To adjust this value, press the knob on screen to select it, and then operate multifunction knobs 1–8. Rotate the knob to set the value in the range of –96 to +24 dB in 1.0 dB steps. Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the value in 0.1 dB steps. The current value appears immediately below the knob. 5 6 7 9 Level meter 8 0 Output port select tabs Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port. Switch the output ports controlled in the popup window in groups of up to eight ports. Tabs are categorized into three groups: DANTE, SLOT, and PATCH VIEW. To display tabs in the desired group, press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row. 9 3. 0 Use the output port select tabs at the bottom of the popup window to select the output port you want to control. The tabs correspond to the following output ports. • DANTE 1–8, 9–16, 17–24, 25–32, 33–40, 41–48, 49–56, 57–64 These tabs control the output channels of the Dante connectors. 1 Slot number/Card type If an output channel of slot 1–3 is selected for operations, this area indicates the slot number and the type of I/O card installed in that slot. • SLOT1 1–8, 9–16 • SLOT2 1–8, 9–16 • SLOT3 1–8, 9–16 These tabs enable you to control output channels 1–8 and 9–16 of slots 1–3 respectively. 2 DELAY SCALE button Press this button to open the DELAY SCALE popup window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time. • OMNI 1–8 This tab enables you to control OMNI jacks 1–8. 3 Output port • DIGITAL OUT This tab enables you to control the L/R channels of the DIGITAL OUT connector. This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned. 4 Channel select popup button • PATCH VIEW1 • PATCH VIEW2 These tabs display lists of patches. Enables you to select the channel that you want to assign to the output port. The name of the currently-selected channel is displayed. 5 Delay time knob 4. Sets the delay time of the output port. Press this knob to select it, and then use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the settings. The millisecond delay time value is indicated above the knob, and the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY SCALE popup window is indicated below the knob. To assign a channel to an output port, press the channel select popup window for that port. NOTE If you have selected ms (millisecond) as the scale, the delay time value will not appear above the knob. 18 Reference Manual Input and output patching 5. The CH SELECT popup window will appear. This popup window includes the following items. Use the channel select tabs and the channel select buttons to select the source channel, and press the CLOSE button. You will return to the OUTPUT PORT popup window. NOTE If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere. 6. 7. 8. 2 1 Make settings for delay, phase, and output gain as necessary. Repeat steps 3–6 to assign channels to other output ports. When you have finished making settings, click the “x” symbol in the upper right of the window to return to the previous screen. Changing the input patch settings This section explains how to change the patching of each input channel. 1 Category select list 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the input channel to which you want to assign the input source. 2. In the top part of the screen, press the channel number/channel name field to access the PATCH/NAME popup window. Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the following channels. They vary depending on the output port type. • MIX/MATRIX.................................. MIX 1–MIX 24, MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 • ST/MONO/MONI/CUE ................. STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO(C), MONI L, MONI R, MONI C, CUE L, CUE R • DIRECT OUT 1–32......................... CH1–CH32 Direct Outs • DIRRECT OUT 33–64.................... CH33–CH64 Direct Outs • DIRECT OUT 65–72 ...................... CH65–CH72 Direct Outs • INSERT OUT 1–32.......................... CH1–CH32 Insert-outs • INSERT OUT 33–64 ....................... CH33–CH64 Insert-outs • INSERT OUT 65–72 ....................... CH65–CH72 Insert-outs • INSERT OUT MIX/MATRIX ....... Insert-outs for MIX1-MIX24, MATRIX 1-MATRIX8 • INSERT OUT ST/MONO .............. Insert-outs for STEREO L, STEREO R, and MONO (C) • CASCADE MIX/MATRIX............. MIX1–MIX24, MATRIX1–MATRIX8 • CASCADE ST/MONO/CUE.......... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO(C), CUE L, CUE R NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 2 Channel select buttons Select the channel to be assigned to the output port you selected in step 3. 19 Reference Manual Input and output patching In the PATCH/NAME popup window you can view and change the channel name, icon, channel color, and input port assigned to each input channel. 2 • EFFECT RACK......... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B) • PREMIUM RACK.... PR1L(A)–PR2R(B) 3 5 Input port select buttons Assign an input port to the currently-selected input channel. 6 Tabs 1 Enable you to switch between items. 3. Access the input port selection screen of the PATCH/NAME popup window, and then use the input port select tabs and input port select buttons to select an input port. NOTE If PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere. 5 4. 4 When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window. You will return to the OVERVIEW screen. NOTE You can also select input ports from the GAIN/PATCH popup window. 6 5. Repeat step 2–4 to assign input ports for other channels. 1 PATCH button Indicates the currently-selected input port. If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name, you will return to the input port select screen. 2 Channel icon button Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name. 3 Channel name input box Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear. 4 Category select list Selects the category of input port shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the following input ports. They vary depending on the channel type. • DANTE1–32 ..............DANTE1–DANTE32 • DANTE33–64 ............DANTE33–DANTE64 • OMNI/PB OUT.........OMNI1–OMNI8, PB OUT(L), PB OUT(R) • SLOT1 .........................SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16) • SLOT2 .........................SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16) • SLOT3 .........................SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16) 20 Reference Manual Input and output patching 3 INSERT ON/OFF button Inserting an external device into a channel Switches the insert on or off. To change the currently-selected insert point, press one of the three blocks that does not contain any buttons. If desired, you can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT, MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port used for the insertion and the location of the insert-out/in points can be specified individually for each channel. 1. As desired, connect your external equipment to an OMNI IN/OUT jack or to an I/O card installed in slots 1–3. NOTE If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (see page 198). NOTE You can set the I/O ports to function as an insert for each block. 2. 3. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel to which you want to assign the input source. 4 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only) Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, you can view or change the type of input/output port used for insertion and the location at which insertion will occur. There are two variations of this popup window; one-channel and eight-channel. Each window view includes the following items. 5 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only) Specifies whether the insert position/Direct Out position will be applied to all input channels. Specifies whether the insert position settings will be applied to all output channels. ■ INSERT IN HA field This field will appear if you have selected an input port (that features a head amp) as the insert-in. 6 7 8 INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1ch) 3 6 +48V button 1 2 Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off. 7 A.GAIN knob Indicates the analog gain setting for the head amp. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain. 8 HA meter 4 Displays the level of the HA input signal. 5 1 INSERT OUT button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button. 2 INSERT IN button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an input port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button. 21 Reference Manual Input and output patching 4. INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (8ch) 1 Access either the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, and then press the INSERT OUT button. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port used for insert-out. The window includes the following items. 2 3 4 2 1 1 Channel select button Selects the channel to set. The channel icon, color, and number appear on the button. 1 Category select list 2 INSERT OUT button Selects the category of output port shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the following output ports. They vary depending on the channel type. • OMNI .......................................... OMNI1–OMNI8 • SLOT1 ......................................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16) • SLOT2 ......................................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16) • SLOT3 ......................................... SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16) • GEQ RACK ................................ GEQ1L(A)–GEQ16R(B) (MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO channels only) • EFFECT RACK.......................... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B) • PREMIUM RACK..................... PR1L(A)–PR8R(B) Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button. 3 INSERT ON/OFF button Switches the insert on or off. The currently-specified insert point setting appears above the button. 4 INSERT IN button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an input port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button. You can also view the insertin level by checking the indicator located to the right of the port button (that is displayed as an option). 2 Output port select buttons These buttons assign the output port that will be used as insert-out for the currently-selected channel. NOTE If a rack in which a GEQ or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert-out or insert-in, the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in which a GEQ or Premium Rack is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off. 22 Reference Manual Input and output patching 5. 6. Directly outputting an INPUT channel Use the category and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be used as insert-out, and press the CLOSE button. You will return to the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window. The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I/O device, from the desired OMNI OUT jack, or from the output channel of a desired slot. Press the INSERT IN button. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input port used for insert-in. The categories correspond to the following input ports. • OMNI.......................................... OMNI1–OMNI8 • SLOT1 ......................................... SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16) • SLOT2 ......................................... SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16) • SLOT3 ......................................... SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16) • GEQ RACK ................................ GEQ1L(A)–GEQ16R(B) (Output channels only) • EFFECT RACK ......................... FX1L(A)–FX8R(B) • PREMIUM RACK .................... PR1L(A)–PR2R(B) 7. Specify the input port you will use for insert-in, and press the CLOSE button. 8. Press the INSERT ON/OFF button to turn it ON. In this state, insert-out/in is enabled. Adjust the input/output levels of your external device if necessary. 1. Connect your external device to an OMNI OUT jack, OUTPUT jack, or to an I/O card installed in slot 1–3. NOTE If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (see page 198). 2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel that you want to output directly. 3. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window. There are two variations of this popup window; one-channel and eight channel. Each window view includes the following items. INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (1ch) NOTE • If you have selected the OMNI IN jack on the CL console as the input port for insert-in, make the HA settings in the INSERT IN HA field. • Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal selected for insert-out will continue to be sent. 9. If you want to change the insert-out/in position, access the one-channel INSERT/ DIRECT OUT popup button, and press one of the three INSERT fields. The INSERT field you pressed will be enabled. 10. When you have finished making all settings, press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window. You will return to the OVERVIEW screen. 11. As desired, make insert settings for other channels as well. 1 4 2 3 5 1 DIRECT OUT field Enables you to make settings for direct output. Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF (immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the direct output position. 23 Reference Manual Input and output patching 4. 2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select a Direct Out output port. The name of the currently-selected port appears on the button. 3 DIRECT OUT ON button Access either the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, and press the DIRECT OUT popup button. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output port used for direct output. The window includes the following items. Switches the Direct Out on or off. 4 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knob. 5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only) Specifies whether the insert point/Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input channels. 2 1 INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window (8ch) 1 Category select list Selects the category of output port shown in the popup window. The categories correspond to the following output ports. They vary depending on the channel type. • OMNI/REC ............... OMNI1–OMNI8, REC IN(L), REC IN(R) • SLOT1 ........................ SLOT1(1)–SLOT1(16) • SLOT2 ........................ SLOT2(1)–SLOT2(16) • SLOT3 ........................ SLOT3(1)–SLOT3(16) • DANTE1–32.............. DANTE1–DANTE32 • DANTE33–64............ DANTE33–DANTE64 1 2 3 2 Output port select buttons 1 DIRECT OUT ON button These buttons assign the output port used for direct output of the currently-selected INPUT channel. Switches the Direct Out on or off. The currently-selected Direct Output point is indicated above the button. 5. 2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select a Direct Out output port. The name of the currently-selected port will appear on the button. Use the output port select tabs and the output port select buttons to specify the output port that will be used for direct output, and press the CLOSE button. You will return to the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window. 3 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knob. 24 Reference Manual Input and output patching 6. Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer Press the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button to turn it ON. In this state, direct output is enabled. Adjust the input level of your external device as necessary. NOTE If you plan to add DAW software, such as Steinberg Nuendo, to an audio network that includes a CL console and I/O devices, you must use Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) driver software. DVS works as an audio interface, making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and an audio network (that includes a CL series console and I/O devices). In this way, you will be able to make multi-track recordings of live performances or use live recordings that were made a day earlier for a virtual sound check. This section explains how to perform the setup to add DAW software to an audio network. With the factory settings, all are turned off. 7. If you want to change the position of the direct output, access the one-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup button, and press one of the DIRECT OUT fields. The DIRECT OUT field you pressed will be enabled. 8. If you want to adjust the level of the direct output, access either the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, and operate the DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob. 9. When you have finished making all settings, click the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window. You will return to the OVERVIEW screen. 10. As desired, make direct output settings for other channels as well. Required devices and software • CL series console; I/O device • A computer (Windows or Mac) equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga-bit Ethernet (GbE) network; DAW software • A GbE-compatible network switch • CAT5e cable • Dante Virtual Soundcard driver software • Dante Controller control software NOTE You must have a license ID to use Dante Virtual Soundcard. The license ID is included in the CL unit package. The latest information about the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at the following website: http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Using Nuendo Live Steinberg’s Nuendo Live DAW software can be used with the CL series console, taking advantage of functionality that makes them work well together. For details, refer to “Using the CL console with Nuendo Live” on page 188. 25 Reference Manual Input and output patching Word clock settings Setting up Dante Controller In a Dante network, the master device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the network. If the master device is removed from the network or breaks down, another device will automatically take over as the clock master. To make this setting, in the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button, then WORD CLOCK/ SLOT button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup window. Connect the network port on the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting). The following settings can be made via Dante Controller. • For multi-track recording: Patch audio signals from the I/O device to DVS for multi-track recording. • For virtual sound check: Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the computer to the Dante audio network, then routed to the channels on the CL console. Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings of the Dante Controller. Setting up DAW software You must make driver settings in your DAW software. In the device setting window, select “Dante Virtual Soundcard-ASIO” (for Windows PC) or “Dante” (for Mac). Some DAW software may require internal patching with the driver. For more information, refer to the DAW software manual. If you’re using Nuendo Live DAW software, see also “Using the CL console with Nuendo Live” on page 188. Audio recording and playback After you have made the driver settings in your DAW software, you can record and play back audio. For multi-track recording, set the input ports for tracks in DAW software to the ports that receive audio signals from the I/O device. For a virtual sound check, you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the CL console. To do so, to patch the signals so that the signals will be output from the DAW software to DANTE 1–64 on the CL console. It may be convenient for you later if you store two sets of the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library: one set for routing audio signals from the I/O device, and another set for routing audio signals from DAW software. In this way, you will be able to switch between patch settings without starting Dante Controller. In addition, you will be able to patch a specific channel (such as a vocal) to the I/O device to monitor during a virtual sound check. Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard Install a Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) and the Dante Controller in a computer that you want to use for audio recording. Then, connect the GbE-compatible network port on the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting). Before you start DVS, select the desired audio format (e.g., 48kHz, 24-bit) and Dante latency. (Select a higher latency value to maintain network stability during the use of many channels.) For Advanced settings, select the number of channels to be used for recording and playback (the default is 8 x 8). Please refer to the Dante Virtual Soundcard User’s Guide for more information on the ASIO setting (Windows). 26 Reference Manual Input channels Input channels STEREO channel These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the CL series console is in the default state, the input signal from the EFFECT RACK 1–8 is assigned. This chapter explains various operations for input channels. MIX 1 2 Signal flow for input channels ST IN 1L–8R INPUT PATCH MONO channel These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the CL series console is in the default state, the input signal from the Dante connector is assigned. MIX . . 1 2 . 2324 M O N O MATRIX . .7 8 L R (C) 1 2 . ST L R Digital GAIN INPUT PATCH HPF INSERT ATT 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ PRE HPF OSCILLATOR DIRECT OUT 1-72{64,48} LEVEL PAN DYNA1OUT EQ OUT DYNA2OUT METER METER METER GR METER GR METER PRE EQ METER PRE HPF METER 72 {64, 48} ON PRE HPF / PRE EQ / PRE FADER/POST ON PRE EQ INSERT OUT Keyin Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX21-24 OUT CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48, 49-56, 57-64, 65-72]POST EQ(CL5) CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48, 49-56, 57-64]POST EQ(CL3) CH[1-8,9-16,17-24,25-32,33-40,41-48]POST EQ(CL1) GATE COMP DUCK COMPAND EXPAND DE-ESSER COMP KEYIN CUE Keyin Filter To MIX PRE FADER METER INSERT DELAY Max 1000ms To MIX To MIX POST ON POST PAN L POST PAN R PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON VARI To MIX VARI STEREO To MATRIX PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON VARI To MATRIX (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L VARI STEREO ON (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R ON ON PRE EQ / PRE FADER / POST ON LR MONO POST PAN L POST PAN R TO MONO TO ST LCR INSERT To OUTPUT PATCH PAN MODE ST R POST ON POST ON INSERT OUT ON MIX1,3...23 ON ON MIX2,4...24 ON ON ON ON LEVEL ON ON LEVEL ON ON LEVEL PAN OSCILLATOR All parameters for L and R are linked to each other (except for Ø (phase), Digital GAIN, Delay, and PAN). Keyin Self PRE EQ Self POST EQ MIX21-24 OUT ST IN 1L-4R POST EQ PRE FADER POST ON METER ON LR MONO LCR PAN MODE ST L MONO(C) TO LCR ST R CSR POST ON PAN LINK MIX1,3...23 To MIX To MATRIX LEVEL/ DCA1-16 DELAY Max 1000ms SAME as INPUT1-72{64,48} SAME as INPUT1-72{64,48} MIX2,4...24 MATRIX1,3...7 MATRIX2,4...8 (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN L ON CUE L (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL / POST PAN R ON CUE R • 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer) A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW. ON ON PRE EQ POST EQ PRE FADER METER • HPF (High Pass Filter) This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the specified frequency. PAN LINK ON PRE HPF ATT GATE COMP DUCK COMPAND EXPAND DE-ESSER COMP KEYIN CUE Keyin Filter • DIGITAL GAIN Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal. ST L MONO(C) TO LCR CSR PRE FADER PRE FADER INSERT OUT FIXED FIXED STEREO POST ON METER LEVEL/ DCA1-16 HPF 4BAND EQ L R • Ø (phase) Switches the phase of the input signal. INSERT POINT POST ON INSERT OUT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT 16 Digital GAIN POST PAN L POST PAN R TO MONO TO ST CUE • INPUT PATCH Assigns input signals to the input channels. CUE CH 1-72{64,48} To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH DYNA1OUT EQ OUT DYNA2OUT METER METER METER GR METER GR METER PRE EQ METER PRE HPF METER The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I/O devices, rear panel input jacks, or slots 1–3, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, MIX buses, or MATRIX buses. There are two types of input channels, as follows. CH INSERT OUT 1-72{64,48} CH INSERT IN 1-72{64,48} PAN/BAL M O N O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 7 8 ST 2324 ON ON LEVEL MATRIX1,3...7 ON ON LEVEL MATRIX2,4...8 ON ON LEVEL PAN • DYNAMICS 1 This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating, ducking, expander, or compressor. • DYNAMICS 2 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser. CUE L CUE R • INPUT DELAY Corrects input signal delay. You can specify up to 1000ms. • LEVEL/DCA 1–16 Adjusts the input level of the channel. • ON (on/off) Turns the input channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted. • PAN Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. For the STEREO channel, you can switch between PAN and BALANCE. The BALANCE parameter adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the STEREO channel to the STEREO bus. You can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP popup window so that the setting of the PAN parameter will also be applied to signals sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to stereo. 27 Reference Manual Input channels • LCR (Left/Center/Right) Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus/MONO bus as a three-channel signal that consists of the L/R channel plus the center channel. Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color • MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off) This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1–24. On the CL series unit, you can specify the on-screen name and icon for each input channel. This section explains how to specify the channel name, icon and channel color. • MATRIX LEVEL 1–24 (MATRIX send levels 1–24) Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1–24. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. 1. Access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel for which you want to specify the channel name, icon and channel color. Channel number/Channel name field • MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off) This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8. • MATRIX LEVEL 1–8 (MATRIX send levels 1–8) Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1–8. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before the EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. • INSERT (MONO channels only) You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. For the position of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key. • DIRECT OUT (MONO channels only) You can patch this to any output port to send out the input signal directly from the corresponding output port. For the position of the direct output, you can choose immediately before the HPF, immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key. • METER Meters the input channel level. You can switch the position at which the level is detected (see page 112). 2. 28 Access the PATCH/NAME popup window by pressing the channel number/channel name field of the channel to which you want to assign the channel name, icon and channel color. Reference Manual Input channels 3. This popup window contains the following items: 2 3 Press the desired channel icon button. The lower part of the popup window will change as follows. 1 1 2 3 4 1 Channel color select buttons 1 PATCH button Select a channel color. Pressing the button will immediately apply the change. Indicates the currently-patched port. Press this button to enable the PATCH tab at the bottom of the screen. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port. 2 Icon select buttons Select a channel icon. Pressing the button will immediately apply the change. 2 Channel icon button 3 Sample name setup buttons Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel. Press this button to enable the ICON tab at the bottom of the screen. The CH COLOR/ICON popup window will appear, enabling you to select the color, icon, and channel name. Select a preset sample name. You can edit the name on the NAME tab later. 4. Use the icon select buttons to select the icon you want to use for the channel. You can use the channel color select buttons to select the color of the channel. The selected icon or color will appear on the icon button in the upper part of the window. 5. To edit the channel name based on a sample name, use the sample name setup buttons to select a sample name. The sample name you selected will be entered in the channel name field in the upper part of the window. To enter the channel name directly, proceed to Step 6. 3 Channel name edit box Indicates the currently-specified channel. Press the inside of this box to enable the NAME tab at the bottom of the screen. The SOFT KEYBOARD popup window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name. 4 Tabs Use these tabs to switch between items. NOTE You can also add or edit characters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample name. If you want to quickly assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a consecutive number, such as “Vocal 1” or “Vocal 2,” enter a sample name first, and then add a number. 29 Reference Manual Input channels 6. Making HA (Head Amp) settings If you want to enter a channel name directly (or edit a sample name that has been entered), press the channel name field in the upper part of the window. The keyboard window will appear in the lower part of the screen, allowing you to enter or edit the characters. This section explains how to make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain, phase) for each input channel. Setting the analog gain 1. To adjust only the HA analog gain, use the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 2. To edit detailed parameter settings such as phantom power on/off or phase, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel for which you want to adjust the head amp. GAIN/PATCH field 7. Use the [SEL] keys to switch input channels, and specify the icon or channel name for other channels in the same way. When the PATCH/NAME popup window is displayed, you can use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel to be controlled. 8. When you finish your data input, press the × symbol in the upper right of the window. NOTE Press the TAB button to switch to the next channel. You can also press the ENTER button to close the popup window in the same way as using the “x” symbol. 3. 30 Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel for which you want to adjust the head amp. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear. This popup window features four types of view. Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of these four views. Each window view includes the following items. Reference Manual Input channels GAIN/PATCH popup window (1ch) 1 • Gain compensation meter Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation. 8 3 INPUT PORT button Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel. Press the button to display the PATCH popup window, in which you can select a port to patch. 4 Icon/Channel name button Indicates the channel number, icon, and name. Press this button to access the PATCH/NAME popup window, in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name. 5 Ø (Phase) button Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input. 2 3 4 5 6 6 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob 7 Indicates the digital gain value. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level. 7 Digital gain meter 1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name indicator Indicates the level after digital gain. Displays the channel icon, channel number, and channel name. 8 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button 2 HA section Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously. Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel. This section enables you to operate the following HA-related controllers: • +48V button Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off. • A.GAIN (analog gain) knob Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on. • HA meter Displays the level of the HA input signal. NOTE • If a slot is patched to the channel, this section 2 will display the type of the slot/MY card and slot meter instead. • If a rack is patched to the channel, this section 2 will display the rack type and the effect type. • If nothing is patched, section 2 will be blank. • GC (Gain Compensation) ON/OFF button Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, the level of the signal output from the I/O device to the audio network will be stabilized. For example, if the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing the input signal from the I/O device, and if the analog gain is adjusted on the FOH console, this function will prevent the level of the signal received on the monitoring console from fluctuating. If the Gain Compensation function is turned off, the analog gain and digital gain will return to the level that was obtained when you turned on the function. Therefore, the level on the digital network will remain the same. 31 Reference Manual Input channels 6 GC (Gain Compensation) button GAIN/PATCH popup window (8ch) Switches the Gain Compensation function on or off for that channel. 7 Ø (Phase) button Switches the phase of the input signal. 1 8 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob Indicates the digital gain value. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain. 2 3 9 Digital gain meter Indicates the level after digital gain. 4 5 6 GAIN/PATCH popup window (1-48, 49-72/ST IN(CL5), 49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1)) 7 This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels. Here you can also adjust the head amp gain in groups of the selected eight channels by using the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section. 8 2 9 1 2 1 3 1 Channel select button Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. When you press this button, the corresponding channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light. 2 PATCH button Press this button to display the PORT SELECT popup window to patch the input port to the input channel. 3 +48V button This button will appear for the input channel to which the head amp has been patched. Press the button to switch phantom power (+48V) on or off. 1 Parameter select buttons NOTE If the slot (for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized) is patched, the type of the mini-YGDAI card will be displayed. Select one of the following parameters to view in the window. • ANALOG GAIN........................ Analog gain • DIGITAL GAIN ........................ Digital gain • PATCH ........................................ Patch selection 4 A.GAIN (analog gain) knob Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on. 2 GC ALL ON/GC ALL OFF buttons Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously. 3 Channel select button 5 Level meter Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. Indicates the input signal level. 32 Reference Manual Input channels ■ If you press the PATCH parameter select button: ■ If you press the ANALOG GAIN parameter select button: 2 3 4 1 1 1 PATCH button 1 GAIN knob Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an input port to patch to the channel. Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to control the gain value using the multifunction knob. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator will appear, showing the position of the analog gain when the function is turned on. 2 OVER indicator Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected. 4. Access either the 1ch or 8ch GAIN/PATCH popup window. 5. Use the on-screen buttons or the multifunction knobs to edit the head amp gain, phase, and phantom power on/off settings. NOTE 3 +48V indicator • The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and +18 dB. • Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack. • The GAIN knob and +48V button are valid only on channels for which the assigned input port is an INPUT jack on the I/O device, the OMNI IN on the CL unit, or a slot that is connected to an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or SB168-ES). Indicates the +48V on/off status for each channel. 4 Ø (Phase) indicator Indicates the phase setting for each channel. NOTE If the input channel is patched to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized, the knob 1 will be replaced with the slot/port number of the patch destination. In addition, the indicator 3 will not be displayed. If the input channel is patched to the VIRTUAL RACK, the knob 1 will be replaced with the port ID of the rack. If nothing is patched to the input channel, the knob 1 will be replaced with a dotted line “----”. 6. Perform the same operations for other input channels as desired. If you are viewing the 1ch GAIN/PATCH popup window, you can also use the [SEL] keys to switch the channel for editing. If you are viewing the 8ch GAIN/PATCH popup window, you can use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight. 7. When you finish editing, press the × symbol in the upper right of the window. ■ If you press the DIGITAL GAIN parameter select button: 2 1 3 1 GAIN knob Indicates the digital gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to control the gain value using the multifunction knob. 2 OVER indicator Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected. 3 Ø (Phase) indicator Indicates the phase setting for each channel. 33 Reference Manual Input channels Setting the Gain Compensation function Adjusting the digital gain If you are using an I/O device (such as an Rio3224-D) on a Dante network, you can maintain the constant level of signal output to the audio network by using the Gain Compensation function. If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing an I/O device, or if you are performing digital recording via Dante connections, using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant level from the I/O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I/O device is changed. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the level of the signal input to the CL’s input channels. Follow the steps below: To do so, follow the steps below: 1. Sets the analog gain as described previously. 2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the selected channel will appear. 3. Press the GAIN field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear. 4. Press the GC button located to the right of the A. GAIN knob. 1. Press the [SEL] key for the input channel that you want to control. 2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen for the selected channel will appear. 3. Press the GAIN field. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear. 4. Use multifunction knob 8 to adjust the D. GAIN parameter. NOTE • Press the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button, select the PREFERENCE tab, and then set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION to DIGITAL GAIN. You will be able to adjust the digital gain value by using the GAIN knob on the corresponding channel strip or the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. • You can also operate the digital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN → DIGITAL GAIN to a USER DEFINED knob, or by assigning an ALTERNATE function to a USER DEFINED key. When the function is turned on, the button will light. Press the button once again to turn it off. If you adjust the analog gain value while the Gain Compensation function is turned on, the head amp level will change accordingly. However, the level of the signal output to the audio network will automatically be corrected to the level obtained when you turned Gain Compensation on. If you turn Gain Compensation off while in this state, the analog gain and the compensated gain within the I/O device will return to the settings that were in effect when you turned Gain Compensation on. Therefore, the signal level on the audio network will remain the same. NOTE Since the compensated gain is the gain used to automatically compensate the gain within the I/ O device, it is not shown as a parameter. The position at the moment this was turned on will be displayed. 34 Reference Manual Input channels Relationship between analog and digital gain while Gain Compensation is on Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO buses If Gain Compensation is on, adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the I/O device to output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount. Therefore, the signals on the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the digital domain. For example, assume that the analog gain value has been set to +30 dB and Gain Compensation is now turned on. Under this condition, if you raise the analog gain value to +45 dB, the level of the signal sent to the audio network will stay at +30 dB (that is, attenuated by –15 dB). This section explains how to send a signal from an input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used mainly to send signals to the main speakers. There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These two modes differ as follows. ■ ST/MONO mode This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently. • Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or off individually. • The panning of a signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by the TO ST PAN knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.) • The left/right volume balance of a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by this knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.) If PAN/BALANCE mode is set to PAN, you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals sent to the STEREO bus L/R individually (see page 37). At this time, the gain of each signal input to the CL series unit will be adjusted by the digital gain parameter of the CL series console. If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I/ O device, adjusting the analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring console, because the level of the signal on the audio network is maintained at a constant level. However, please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain, you must first turn the Gain Compensation function off, set the gain to an appropriate input level, and then turn the function back on. If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain Compensation function is on, the signal on the audio network will be amplified by the same amount due to the Gain Compensation function, and the signal will remain distorted. ■ LCR mode This mode sends input channel signals to three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) simultaneously. • Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on or off collectively. • The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus. • The TO ST PAN knob/BALANCE knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus. NOTE You can perform this operation rapidly if you’ve assigned Gain Compensation on/off for the SET BY SEL function to one of the USER DEFINED keys. NOTE If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or similar devices, press the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area to select “LCR” as the monitor source before you continue with the following procedure. 35 Reference Manual Input channels 1. 2. TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8ch) Make sure that an input source is connected to the input channel you are adjusting. Set the phantom power, gain, and phase of the head amp to obtain the optimum input signal. Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of signals sent from input channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Channel select button Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. 2 Mode LEDs 3 MODE (ST/MONO/LCR mode select) button Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR. The LED of the currentlyselected mode will light. 4 ST/MONO buttons STEREO/MONO field 3. These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals sent from each channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust, and then press the knob once again to access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window. 5 Σ clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. 6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window you can control signals that is sent from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup window features four views. Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of the four views. Each window view includes the following items. For MONO channels, this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of signals sent to the STEREO bus. For STEREO channels, this acts as a PAN knob, and also as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. 36 Reference Manual Input channels TO STEREO/MONO popup window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1)) Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. You can also adjust the pan or balance setting in groups of eight selected channels. 7 1 2 3 4 7 PAN/BALANCE MODE button Switches the knob function of the TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob on the STEREO channel. If the ST/MONO/LCR mode select button is set to LCR mode, the following button and knob are displayed instead of the ST/MONO button 4. 8 9 8 LCR button This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If this button is off, no signal will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. 1 Channel select button 9 CSR knob Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. (see page 38) 2 Σ clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. 3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob Adjusts the panning or balance. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the indicator to the right of the knob will light. 4 ST/MONO indicators If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus. If a channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location. The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus/ MONO bus. 4. 37 Access the eight-channel TO STEREO/MONO popup window. Reference Manual Input channels Use the MODE button to select either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel. 6. In the MASTER section on the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key for the STEREO channel/MONO channel is turned on, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level. 7. In the INPUT section on the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key is turned on for the input channel you want to control, and then raise the fader to an appropriate position. 10. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO (C) bus. If the CSR knob is set to 0%, operating the TO ST PAN knob of an INPUT channel will change the level of signals sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following diagram. In this case, the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus. Signal level 5. The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 5. Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus ■ Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected 8. 9. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the STEREO/MONO button to individually turn on/off the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus/ MONO bus. For a channel that is set to ST/MONO mode, signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or off individually. L C TO ST PAN knob R Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of a STEREO channel will change the level of signals sent from the STEREO L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following diagram. In this case, the TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the LCR button to turn signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off collectively. For a channel that is set to LCR mode, signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus are switched on or off collectively. 9. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus. Signal sent from the STEREO (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus L C TO ST BALANCE knob R Signal level 8. Signal level ■ Channels for which LCR mode is selected Signal sent from the STEREO (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus L 38 C TO ST BALANCE knob R Reference Manual Input channels Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/ MATRIX bus If the CSR knob is set to 100%, operating the INPUT TO ST PAN knob will change the level of signals sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following diagram. This section explains how to send a signal from an input channel to MIX buses 1–24 and MATRIX buses 1–8. The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on stage, or to effect processors. The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses, and is typically sent to a master recorder or to a backstage monitoring system. You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus in the following three ways. Signal level Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus L C PAN knob ■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively. R Operating the TO ST BALANCE knob of an ST IN channel will change the level of signals sent from the STEREO L/R channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, as shown in the following diagram. ■ Using the Centralogic section With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously. Signal level Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the MONO (C) bus ■ Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously. Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus L Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section C R TO ST BALANCE knob This section explains how to use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels of signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses. 1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your monitor system, external effect processor, or other device is connected to the corresponding output port. 2. Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channels that will send signals to the MIX/MATRIX buses. Signal level Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the MONO (C) bus Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus L C R TO ST BALANCE knob 39 Reference Manual Input channels 3. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. If necessary, you can specify two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX buses as a stereo bus and link the main parameters. If the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo, the left knob of the two adjacent TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX/MATRIX PAN knob. (If BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, it will operate as a BALANCE knob). 4. For a MONO channel, the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND PAN knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus. For a STEREO channel, if BALANCE mode has been selected on the TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8ch), the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX/ MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND BAL knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R-channel to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus. If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8ch), the left knob will function as the PAN knob. The right knob will function as send level, just as in BALANCE mode. In the TO MIX/MATRIX field on screen, make sure that the MIX1–16 button or MIX17–24/MATRIX button is turned on. The TO MIX/TO MATRIX field displays the corresponding knobs and buttons. If this button is off, press the button to turn it on. MIX buses can be either a FIXED type that features a fixed send level, or a VARI type that features a variable send level. The MATRIX buses are all VARI type. You can switch between FIXED and VARI types for each two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX buses. To do so, press the SETUP button, the USER SETUP button, and then the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP popup window. If the send-destination MIX bus is a FIXED type, a circle ( ) is displayed instead of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob. In this case, you cannot adjust the send level. 5. Make sure that the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button is turned on for the send-destination MIX bus. If this button is off, press the button on screen to turn it on. 6. In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. NOTE If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section. If the send-destination MIX bus is a VARI type, or if the send-destination is a MATRIX bus, the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob will be displayed in the same color as the corresponding knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, you can use the corresponding knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level. 7. 40 You can use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to switch input channels and control the send level to all MIX/MATRIX buses in the same way. Reference Manual Input channels 4. Using the Centralogic section You can use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus. 1. 2. Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your monitor system, external effect, or other device is connected to the corresponding output port. Use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the send level of signals sent from the (up to) eight input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus. If necessary, you can use the Bank Select keys to switch the input channels that you want to assign to the Centralogic section, and adjust the send levels from other input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus. NOTE If you want to monitor a signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to assign the corresponding MIX channel to the Centralogic section, and then press the [CUE] key for that MIX/MATRIX channel. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel that you want to control. In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX bus. 5. If you want to make detailed settings for MIX/MATRIX sends, press the TO MIX/ MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again. When you press the currently-selected TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob a second time, the MIX SEND popup window or the MATRIX SEND popup window will appear. This window includes the following items. 41 2 3 41 2 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 9 0 0 3 1 ALL PRE button Sets the send point to “PRE.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all sendsource channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will light. 2 ALL POST button 3. Sets the send point to “POST.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all sendsource channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will turn off. Press the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send-destination MIX/ MATRIX bus. A bold frame will appear around all TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MIX/ MATRIX bus. 3 SEND FROM MODE button Press this button to switch to the “SEND from 8ch” popup window. 4 Send destination indicator Indicates the currently-selected send destination. 5 Send destination select buttons Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination. 41 Reference Manual Input channels 6 Channel select button The knob for the mode selected here will appear. Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button. 7 PRE/POST button Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is on, the send point is set to PRE. 8 SEND ON/OFF button Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off. 9 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is set to monaural or FIXED, this knob will not appear. If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob. 0 SEND LEVEL knob Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs. If the send destination is set to FIXED, only a gray circle will appear. If the send source is stereo, you can use the PAN/BALANCE mode setting in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window to select whether PAN/BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob. 6. Use the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF buttons to switch signals sent from the input channels to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus on or off. 7. If necessary, use the PRE buttons to select the send point of a signal that is sent from each input channel to a VARI type MIX/MATRIX bus. NOTE • If the PRE button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX/MATRIX bus. This setting is made in the BUS SETUP popup window (see page 202). • The PRE button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses. 42 Reference Manual Input channels Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) 3. Press the MIX1-16, MIX17-24/MATRIX switch button repeatedly to select MIX1-16 or MIX17-24/MATRIX. In this way, you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/ MATRIX buses. 4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus. You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus. 1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your monitor system, external effect, or other device is connected to the corresponding output port. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button. The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND ON status. NOTE • Alternatively, press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a popup window from which you can select a MIX/MATRIX bus. • You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section. If you select the buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX116, MIX17-24/MATRIX switch button will be changed automatically. • If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus. If you’ve used the bank select keys to assign input channels to the Centralogic section, the corresponding channels will change to indicating the send levels and ON settings for the signals sent from those channels to the currently selected MIX/MATRIX bus. If the Centralogic section has been assigned to output channels, and the send-destination bus is MIX, each channel will still show the fader value and ON setting. If the send-destination bus is MATRIX, the Centralogic section will change to show the send level and ON setting for the signals sent from the MIX/ STEREO/MONO channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus. MATRIX channels will continue showing the channel fader values and ON setting. In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that enable you to switch between MIX1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX17-24/MATRIX ON FADER mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX buses. 5. Use the faders in the Channel Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level of signals routed from the input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus. NOTE You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again. 43 6. Repeat steps 4–5 to adjust the send level for other MIX/MATRIX buses in the same way. 7. When you have finished adjusting the MIX/MATRIX send levels, press the “x” symbol in the Function Access Area. The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit SENDS ON FADER mode and return to normal mode. Reference Manual Input channels Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay) INPUT DELAY (8ch) 1 This section explains how to correct delay between input channels by using Input Delay function. This function is useful when you want to correct the phase variance, caused by microphone locations on the stage, to add depth to the sound by using phase variance, or to correct a delay (a gap) that may exist between video and audio that are sent from a site for broadcast on TV. 1. Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals to the MIX/MATRIX bus. 2. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. 2 3 INPUT DELAY field 1 DELAY SCALE button Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE popup window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time. You can select one of the four delay scales: meter (meter/sec), feet (feet/sec), sample (number of samples), and ms (millisecond). 2 Channel select button Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the channel. 3 Delay setting knob (input channels only) 3. Indicates the channel delay value. You can use the multifunction knob to adjust it. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (in unit of ms) and below the knob (in the currently-selected scale). If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear above the knob. Press the INPUT DELAY field to access the INPUT DELAY popup window. In the INPUT DELAY popup window you can set the on/off status and the value of the input channel delay. This popup window features three types of view. Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of four views. Each window view includes the following items. 44 Reference Manual Input channels Channel library operations INPUT DELAY (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1)) Channel libraries include “INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall various parameters (including the head amp settings) for input channels. To recall a library, press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. 1 2 3 LIBRARY button For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate Owner’s Manual. 1 DELAY SCALE button Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE popup window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time. 2 Channel select button Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the channel. 3 Delay setting knob (input channels only) Indicates the channel delay value. Press this knob to adjust the value using the multifunction knob. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (in unit of ms) and below the knob (in the currently-selected scale). NOTE If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear to the right of the knob. 4. 5. 6. Access the INPUT DELAY (8ch) popup window. 7. When you finish editing, press the × symbol in the upper right of the window. Use the on-screen buttons and the multifunction knobs to set the delay. Perform the same operations for other input channels as desired. If you are viewing the 8ch INPUT DELAY popup window, you can use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight. 45 Reference Manual Output channels Output channels STEREO channel/MONO (C) channel Each of these channels processes the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO (C) bus, and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are in LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three output channels. This chapter explains output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels, MONO channels). Signal flow for output channels MIX 1 2 2324 M O N O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 7 8 ST CUE L R STEREO L,R,MONO(C) The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses, processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The following types of output channels are provided. INSERT POINT To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C) STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C) POST ON INSERT OUT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT PRE EQ METER INSERT MIX channels MIX 1 2 2324 ATT COMP COMPAND EXPAND 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ PRE EQ INSERT OUT These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus. M O ST ON MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 7 8 EQ OUT DYNA OUT METER METER GR METER CUE ON LEVEL ON MATRIX2,4...8 LEVEL ON LEVEL ON MIX 1-24 INSERT POINT To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH MIX INSERT OUT 1-24 MIX INSERT IN 1-24 PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ METER EQ OUT DYNA OUT METER METER GR METER ATT 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ PRE EQ INSERT OUT CUE ON INSERT PRE FADER Keyin Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX21-24 OUT/ ST(L,R,MONO(C)) POST EQ POST ON INSERT OUT To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT POST ON PRE FADER / POST ON To MATRIX VARI PRE FADER / POST ON To MATRIX VARI STEREO COMP COMPAND EXPAND LEVEL BAL ON INSERT INSERT PRE FADER INSERT OUT MATRIX channel POST ON METER PRE FADER METER PRE FADER Keyin Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX21-24 OUT/ MIX(1-8,9-16,17-24) POST EQ MIX OUT1-24 POST ON INSERT OUT These channels process the signals sent from input channels, MIX channels, and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses, and send them to the corresponding output ports. (21-24)To KEYIN To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT POST ON MIX (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL MATRIX1,3...7 LEVEL ON MATRIX2,4...8 LEVEL ON LEVEL ON PAN/BAL MONO(C) STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) ON POST ON INSERT OUT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT INSERT ST L BAL INSERT PAN/BAL L R LEVEL (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL MATRIX1,3...7 CUE POST ON METER PRE FADER METER PRE FADER / POST ON PRE FADER / POST ON 1 2 To MATRIX CUE L R MATRIX 1-8 VARI To RACKIN PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH To MATRIX VARI STEREO 2324 M O N O MATRIX L R (C) 1 2 7 8 ST PAN MODE TO ST TO MONO TO LCR MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8 MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8 PAN/BAL LR MONO LCR ST R INSERT POINT POST ON INSERT OUT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE EQ INSERT OUT PRE EQ METER EQ OUT DYNA OUT METER METER GR METER POST ON CSR INSERT ATT 4BAND EQ PRE EQ POST EQ PRE EQ INSERT OUT CUE ON COMP COMPAND EXPAND POST ON METER PRE FADER METER LEVEL INSERT PRE FADER INSERT OUT PRE FADER Keyin Self PRE EQ/Self POST EQ/MIX21-24 OUT/ MATRIX1-8 POST EQ BAL ON MATRIX OUT 1-8 INSERT POST ON INSERT OUT To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT POST ON (PRE FADER)PFL / (POST ON)AFL • 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer) A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW. • DYNAMICS 1 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or compander. • LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the channel. • ON (on/off) Turns the output channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted. 46 Reference Manual Output channels • MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off) This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus. Specifying the channel name, icon and channel color • MATRIX (MATRIX send level) Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1–8. For the position from which the signal will be sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key. If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the PAN knob to adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX channel or the STEREO channel, use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses. This section explains how to specify the channel name, icon and channel color for each output channel. 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the output channel for which you want to specify the channel name, icon and channel color. Channel number/Channel name field • INSERT You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations. • METER Indicates the level of the output channel. You can switch the position at which the level is detected. • KEY IN (MIX channels 21–24 only) You can send the output signals of MIX channels 21–24 to dynamics processors and use them as key-in signals to control the dynamics. • RACK IN PATCH Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack. • OUTPUT PATCH Assigns an output port to an output channel. • MONITOR SELECT Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source. 2. 47 Access the PATCH/NAME popup window by pressing the channel number/channel name field of the channel to which you want to assign the channel name, icon and channel color. Reference Manual Output channels 2 Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/ MONO bus 3 This section explains how to send a signal from a MIX channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. Features of each mode are the same as for input channels. 1 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the MIX channel from which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus. 4 Follow the steps for the input channels (see page 29). STEREO/MONO field 2. 48 In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust, and then press the knob once again to access the TO STEREO/MONO popup window. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, you can control a signal that is sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. This popup window features four types of view. Use the tabs near the bottom of the window to select one of the four views. These windows include the following items. Reference Manual Output channels TO STEREO/MONO popup window (8ch) If the ST/MONO/LCR mode select button is set to LCR mode, the following button and knob are displayed instead of the ST/MONO button (4). You can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels. 7 1 8 2 3 4 7 LCR button This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. 5 6 8 CSR knob Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0–100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. 1 Channel select button Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. 2 Mode LEDs 3 MODE (ST/MONO/LCR mode select) button Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR. The LED of the currentlyselected mode will light. 4 ST/MONO buttons These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode. 5 Σ clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. 6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO, this knob will function as a PAN knob that adjusts the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. If the type of MIX channel signal is STEREO, this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume level balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. 49 Reference Manual Output channels TO STEREO/MONO popup window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1), OUTPUT) 3. Access the eight-channel TO STEREO/MONO popup window. 4. Use the MODE button to select either ST/MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel. 5. In the MASTER section on the top panel, make sure that the [ON] key for the STEREO channel/MONO channel is turned on, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level. 6. Press one of the Output Bank Select Keys in the Centralogic section so that the MIX channels you want to control are recalled to the Centralogic section. 7. Make sure that the [ON] keys for those channels are on, and use the fader in the Centralogic section to raise the master level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position. This window displays the status of signals sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO bus/ MONO bus. You can also adjust the pan or balance setting in groups of eight selected channels. 1 2 3 4 The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 4. ■ Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected 1 Channel select button Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. 8. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the STEREO/MONO button to turn a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off. For a channel that is set to ST/MONO mode, signals sent to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on/off individually. 9. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. 2 Σ clipping indicator ■ Channels for which LCR mode is selected Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. 3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob Adjusts the panning and balance. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. If the signal level reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the Σ clipping indicator to the right of the knob will light. 8. Make sure that the LCR button is turned on in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window. Channels for which the LCR button is off will not send a signal to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. 9. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, press the CSR knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus. The CSR knob settings are the same as for input channels. 10. In the TO STEREO/MONO popup window, press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the panning of signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, and the level balance of signals sent to the MONO (C) bus and STEREO (L/R) bus. Refer to page 38 for details on how the signal level sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each bus will change according to the operation of the TO ST PAN knob. 4 ST/MONO indicator If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus. If a channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator is displayed in this location. The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus. 50 Reference Manual Output channels Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/ MONO channels to MATRIX buses 4. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. 5. Make sure that the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button is turned on for the senddestination MATRIX bus. If this button is off, press the button on screen to turn it on. 6. In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. This section explains how to send a signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1–8. You can do this in either of the following three ways. ■ Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from a specific MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses. ■ Using the Centralogic section With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from up to eight MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channels to a specific MATRIX bus. ■ Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL section Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level of signals sent from the desired MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses. 1. 2. 3. Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that an external device is connected. Using the Bank Select keys of the Centralogic section, assign MIX channels or STEREO/MONO channels to the Centralogic section. NOTE If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section. Use the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that will send signals to the MATRIX buses. You can also use the [SEL] key in the MASTER section to directly select the STEREO/MONO channels. 7. 51 Use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section to switch channels, and adjust the send level from other channels to the MATRIX buses in the same way. Reference Manual Output channels 4. Using the Centralogic section This method lets you use the multifunction knobs (in the Centralogic section) to simultaneously adjust the send levels from the eight channels selected in the Centralogic section to the desired MATRIX bus. Use multifunction knobs 1–8 to adjust the send level of the signals sent from up to eight MIX channels or the STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus. If necessary, you can use the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section to switch the send-source channel. 1. NOTE 2. Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your external device is connected to the corresponding output port. • If you want to monitor signals being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section, and then press the [CUE] key for that MATRIX channel. • If you again press the currently-selected MATRIX bus select button, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that is being sent to the selected MATRIX bus. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channels (MIX channels or STEREO/MONO channels) that you want to control. In the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the TO MATRIX field to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX bus. 5. If you want to make detailed settings for MATRIX sends, press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob inside the bold frame once again. When you press the currently-selected TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob a second time, the MATRIX SEND popup window will appear. The window includes the following items. 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 ALL PRE button 3. Sets the send point to “PRE.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all sendsource channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.) Press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob for the desired send-destination MATRIX bus. A bold frame will appear around all TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs for that MATRIX bus. 2 ALL POST button Sets the send point to “POST.” (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all sendsource channels — including the input and output channels — to the selected send destination.) 3 SEND FROM MODE button Press this button to switch to the “SEND from 8ch” popup window. 4 Send destination indicator Indicates the currently-selected send destination. 52 Reference Manual Output channels 5 Send destination select buttons The knob for the mode selected here will appear. Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination. 6 Channel select button Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button. 7 PRE/POST button Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is on, the send point is set to PRE. 8 SEND ON/OFF button Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off. 9 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is set to monaural or FIXED, this knob will not appear. If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob. 0 SEND LEVEL knob Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs. 6. Use the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF buttons to switch signals sent from the MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to the currently-selected MATRIX bus on or off. 7. If necessary, you can use the PRE buttons to select the point from which the signal is sent from the MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to the MATRIX bus. 8. Repeat steps 3–6 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way. If the send source is stereo, you can use the PAN/BALANCE mode setting in the TO STEREO/MONO popup window to select whether PAN/BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob. 53 Reference Manual Output channels 4. Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and STEREO/ MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus. 1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your monitor system etc. is connected to the corresponding output port. 2. In the function access area, press the SENDS ON FADER button. The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND ON status. In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that enable you to switch between MIX 1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX buses. 3. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the function access area to select the send-destination MATRIX bus. NOTE • Alternatively, press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a popup window, from which you can select a MIX/MATRIX bus. • You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section. If you switch buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER switch buttons will also be change automatically. • If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus. 5. Use the faders in the top panel Centralogic section to adjust the send level from the MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus. NOTE You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again. 6. Repeat steps 4–5 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way. 7. When you’re finished adjusting the MATRIX send levels, press the X symbol in the function access area. The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit SENDS ON FADER mode and return to normal mode. Use the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX 116 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX. Now you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/MATRIX buses. 54 Reference Manual Output channels Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay) This section explains how to correct delay between output channels by using the Output Delay function. This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent to speakers that are located at a distance from each other. Output delay settings are made in the OUTPUT PORT popup window, which will appear when you press the OUTPUT PORT button from the SETUP screen. For details on operations in the OUTPUT PORT screen, refer to “Selecting the output channel for each output port” on page 17. Channel library operations Channel libraries include “OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY,” which enables you to store and recall various parameters (including the head amp settings) for output channels. To recall the library, while an output channel is selected, press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. LIBRARY button For details on using the library, refer to the “Using libraries” section in the separate Owner’s Manual. 55 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics EQ and Dynamics HPF/EQ popup window (1ch) This lets you view and edit all EQ parameters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel. This chapter explains the EQ (equalizer) and dynamics that are provided on each channel of the CL series console. 8 D About EQ and dynamics Each input channel and output channel on a CL series console provides a four-band EQ and dynamics. EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immediately before the EQ, allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the GAIN setting for EQ will not cause the signal to clip. Input channels also provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. Input channels provide two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking device, compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard compander, soft compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used as a compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander. 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 7 B C 9 A E G J H I F Using EQ This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels. 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for which you want to control the EQ. The EQ field shows the response of the EQ. In this OVERVIEW screen, you can edit the parameter by using the EQ knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 1 LIBRARY button Press this button to open the EQ Library popup window. 2 DEFAULT button Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values. 3 COPY button All EQ parameter settings will be stored in buffer memory. EQ field 4 PASTE button Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. 5 COMPARE button 2. Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. If you want to edit while watching the ATT/HPF/EQ parameter values, press the EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen to access the HPF/EQ popup window. In the HPF/EQ popup window, you can edit the EQ and high-pass filter parameters and switch them on/off. This popup window features five types of views. Each window view includes the following items. 6 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name This area indicates the icon, number and name of the currently-selected channel. 7 LOW SHELVING ON/OFF button Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the LOW band. 8 HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only) Turn on this button to select the high pass filter for the LOW band. 56 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics 9 EQ FLAT button HPF/EQ popup window (8ch) Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB. This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of eight channels simultaneously. Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings. You can adjust the HPF settings of all eight channels displayed. 0 HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button Turn on this button to select the shelving type filter for the HIGH band. A LPF ON/OFF button Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band. 1 B EQ ON/OFF button Switches the EQ on or off. 2 C EQ type select button Switches between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands). 3 D EQ graph 4 This graph displays real-time parameter values for the EQ and filter. 5 E EQ IN/OUT level meters Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the EQ. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels. 1 Channel select button F ATT knob Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button. Indicates an attenuation amount before the signal enters the EQ. You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this. 2 EQ graph G HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only) This graph displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. The currently-selected EQ type appears below the graph. Switches the HPF on or off. H HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only) 3 EQ ON/OFF button Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this. Switches the EQ on or off. The OVER indicator (located to the right above the button) lights if the post-EQ signal is clipping. I HPF type select button Switches the HPF attenuation per octave between –12 dB/oct and –6 dB/oct. 4 HPF FREQUENCY knob Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the multifunction knobs to adjust this. J EQ parameter setting knobs Indicate the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID, and HIGH bands. Press these knobs to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs. 5 HPF ON/OFF button Switches the HPF on or off. NOTE • If shelving type has been selected for the LOW band, or if HPF is selected for the output channels, the LOW band Q parameter will not appear. • If shelving type has been selected for the HIGH band, or if LPF is selected, the HIGH band Q parameter will not appear. 57 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics 4. HPF/EQ popup window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1), OUTPUT) This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously. This page is only for display, and does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful when you need to quickly check multiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ settings between distant channels. If you want to use the high-pass filter on an input channel, operate the HPF knob or HPF ON/OFF button in the HPF/EQ popup window. Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. The HPF ON/ OFF button switches the high-pass filter on or off, and the HPF knob adjusts the cutoff frequency. NOTE • Output channels do not feature a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can turn on the high-pass filter button on the popup window to use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass filter. • For both input channels and output channels, you can turn on the low-pass filter button to use the HIGH band EQ as a low-pass filter. 1 2 5. If you want to copy EQ settings to another channel, or initialize the EQ settings, use the tool buttons in the HPF/EQ popup window. For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual. NOTE • EQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations. • You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high-pass filter (see page 8). • Even when the HPF/EQ popup window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the EQ. 3 1 Channel select button Selects the channel that you want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button. 2 EQ graph Indicates the total frequency response of the EQ or filter. 3 Tabs Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen. 3. Access the HPF/EQ popup window (1ch), and then press the EQ ON button to enable the EQ. If the HPF/EQ popup window (1ch) is displayed, you will be able to edit all of the EQ parameters. 58 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics Using dynamics DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1ch) Input channels feature two dynamics processors; output channels feature one dynamics processor. This window displays only the currently-selected channel. All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edited. This is convenient if you want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel. 1. 8 Use the Bank Select keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for which you want to control the dynamics. The DYNAMICS 1/2 field displays the dynamics on/off status and the amount of gain reduction. 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 7 C Dynamics 1 field B Dynamics 2 field A 9 1 LIBRARY button 2. Press this button to open the DYNAMICS Library popup window. In the OVERVIEW screen, press the DYNAMICS 1/2 field to access the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window. In the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window, you can edit the dynamics settings and turn the processor on or off. This popup window features five types of views. Each window view includes the following items. 2 DEFAULT button Press this button to reset all dynamics parameters to the initial values. 3 COPY button All dynamics parameter settings will be stored in buffer memory. 4 PASTE button Press this button to apply the settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics. If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. 5 COMPARE button Press this button to swap between the current dynamics settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been stored in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. 6 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name This area indicates the icon, number, and name of the currently-selected channel. 59 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics 7 Dynamics type buttons • GATE or DUCKING: Enable you to select the dynamics type. You can choose from the following dynamics types. • Dynamics 1 for an input channel GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER • COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER: • COMPANDER-H or COMPANDER-S: • Dynamics 2 for an input channel COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER • DE-ESSER: 0 Dynamics IN/OUT level meters, GR meter • Dynamics 1 for an output channel COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels. A KEY IN SOURCE select button Press this button to display the KEY IN SOURCE popup window, in which you can select a keyin signal that will trigger the dynamics. B KEY IN FILTER parameter area (Displayed only for GATE or DUCKING) Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass. • Filter select buttons .................. Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To disable the filter, press the button that is turned on. • Q knob......................................... Indicates the filter Q. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. • FREQUENCY knob .................. Indicates the filter cutoff frequency. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. 8 Dynamics graph This graph displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors. 9 Dynamics parameter setting knobs Indicate the dynamics parameter values. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs. The type of parameters will vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type. C KEY IN CUE button Enables you to cue-monitor the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE signal. Cue will be canceled if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature this button, or if you move to a different screen. 60 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (8ch) If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, the indicator status means the following: This window displays the settings for eight channels, including the currently-selected channel. You can switch between eight-channel groups such as 1–8 and 9–16. Compared to the one-channel display, fewer parameters can be controlled. This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right. 1 2 3 4 Gate status Red Yellow Green Off (dark) On On On Off Close Open Open — 30 dB or more less than 30 dB 0 dB — On/Off status 5 Open/Close status Amount of gain reduction 6 8 Dynamics graph 7 8 This graph displays the dynamics parameter values. The currently-selected dynamics type appears below the graph. Press the graph to access the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window for that channel. 9 THRESHOLD knob 9 Indicates the threshold value for the dynamics. You can use the corresponding multifunction knobs to adjust the value. 0 0 DYNAMICS ON/OFF button Switches dynamics on or off. 1 LIBRARY button 2 DEFAULT button 3 COPY button 4 PASTE button 5 COMPARE button These buttons are the same as those on the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window. 6 Channel select button Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button. 7 DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters, GR meter These meters indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a three-step indicator appears, indicating the open/close status of the gate. Type = Any type other than GATE Type = GATE 61 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1), OUTPUT) 3. Access the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1ch), and press the DYNAMICS ON button to enable the dynamics processor. This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the corresponding channel. 4. To select a key-in signal, proceed as follows. 1 2 3 4 4-1. In the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window (1ch), press the KEY IN SOURCE button to access the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT popup window. 5 KEY IN SOURCE SELECT pop-up window 6 7 4-2. Select the key-in signal. You can choose one of the following signals. • SELF PRE EQ ............................. The pre-EQ signal of the same channel • SELF POST EQ .......................... The post-EQ signal of the same channel • MIX OUT 21–24 ....................... Output signals of MIX channels 21–24 • CH1–72 POST EQ, ST IN1L–8R POST EQ, MIX1–24 POST EQ, MTRX1–8 POST EQ, ST L/R, MONO POST EQ ........................... The post-EQ signal of the corresponding channel *1 8 1 LIBRARY button 2 DEFAULT button 3 COPY button 4 PASTE button 5 COMPARE button These buttons are the same as those in the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window. *1. The selectable signals are limited to the corresponding eight-channel group. 6 Channel select button NOTE Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon, number, threshold, and color appear on the button. In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 4-3. Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window. 7 Dynamics parameter area 5. This area displays the dynamics type and various meters. Press the area to access the DYNAMICS 1ch popup window of that channel. If DUCKING, EXPANDER, COMPANDER (-H/-S), or DE-ESSER has been selected as the dynamics type, the type appears near the top of this area. The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after dynamics processing, the GR meter, and the threshold (a numeric value). If the dynamics processor is any type other than GATE, the threshold setting is indicated as a vertical line. If you want to copy dynamics settings to another channel, or initialize the dynamics settings, use the tool buttons in the popup window. NOTE • Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations. • You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings (see page 9). • Even when the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the dynamics. 8 Tabs Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen. 62 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics Using the EQ or Dynamics libraries You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings. EQ library LIBRARY button There is an “INPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store and recall EQ settings for input channels, and an “OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store and recall EQ settings for output channels. To recall settings from a library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the HPF/EQ popup window. NOTE • You can recall 199 different settings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library. Forty (40) of the input library items are read-only presets, and three (3) of the output library items are read-only presets. • For details on how to access the HPF/EQ popup window, refer to “Using EQ” on page 56. Dynamics library Use the “Dynamics Library” to store or recall dynamics settings. All of the dynamics processors on CL series units use this dynamics library. (However, the available types will differ between an input channel’s Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2, and an output channel’s Dynamics 1. You cannot recall a type that cannot be selected.) To recall an item from the dynamics library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window. NOTE • You can recall 199 different settings from the library. Forty-one (41) of these are read-only presets. • For details on how to access the DYNAMICS 1/2 popup window, refer to “Using dynamics” on page 59. For details on using the EQ and dynamics libraries, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate Owner’s Manual. 63 Reference Manual Grouping and linking ■ Selecting channels to belong to a specific DCA group Grouping and linking 1. This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that enable you to control the level or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link function that links the parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that enable you to copy or move parameters between channels. About DCA groups and Mute groups 2. CL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups and eight mute groups that enable you to control the level of multiple channels simultaneously. DCA groups enable you to assign input channels to sixteen groups, so that the Centralogic section faders 1–8 can be used to control the level of all channels in each group. A single DCA fader will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference between the channels. This provides a convenient way in which drum mics, for example, can be grouped. Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys [1]–[16] to mute or unmute multiple channels in a single operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously. Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channels can exist in the same group. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. The CH JOB button lets you perform grouping, linking, and copying operations between channels. When you press this button, the Function Access Area will change as follows. DCA GROUP button Press the DCA GROUP button to access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window. In the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window, if the DCA GROUP ASSIGN button has been selected, select the channels to be assigned to the DCA group. This popup window includes the following items. 1 2 Using DCA groups This section explains how to assign input channels to the sixteen DCA groups and use the faders in the Centralogic section to control them. 3 Assigning channels to a DCA group 4 There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group. • You can select a specific DCA group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or • You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be assigned. NOTE • DCA groups can be used only with input channels. • DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene. 1 CLEAR ALL button Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected DCA group. 2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup window and the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup window. 64 Reference Manual Grouping and linking ■ Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong 3 DCA group assign field This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected DCA group. While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the DCA group. The on-screen fader for that channel will turn yellow and the channel will be assigned to the DCA group. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group. 1. Press a [SEL] key to select the input channel for which you want to make assignments. 2. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. On this screen you can view all mix parameters for the currently-selected channel. 3. Use the DCA group select buttons to select the DCA group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple selections are allowed). 4. Select the DCA group(s) for other channels in the same way. 4 DCA group select button Selects the DCA group that you want to assign. NOTE • In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. • If the [DCA 1–8] key or [DCA 9–16] key has been selected in the Centralogic section, you can access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the [SEL] key twice in rapid succession. In this case, the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window will appear with the corresponding DCA GROUP 1–16 button selected for that DCA group. 3. Use the DCA GROUP 1–16 buttons to select the DCA group to which you want to assign channels. 4. Use the [SEL] keys of the input channels to select the input channels that you want to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed). The [SEL] keys of the assigned channels will light, and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in yellow in the DCA group assign field of the window. To cancel an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark. 5. Assign channels to other DCA groups in the same way. NOTE You can assign a single channel to more than one DCA group. In this case, the value will be the sum of the levels of all assigned DCA group faders. 6. When you finish making assignments, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window, and press the × symbol in the Function Access Area (CH JOB display). You will return to the previous screen. The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper and middle rows of this field indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs. NOTE You can also access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window by pressing the DCA/MUTE GROUP field in the OVERVIEW screen. 65 Reference Manual Grouping and linking Using mute groups Controlling DCA groups Use the faders in the Centralogic section to control DCA groups. 1. Assign input channels to DCA groups. 2. Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Master section on the top panel, adjust the relative balance between the input channels that belong to the DCA group you want to use. 3. 4. This section explains how to assign channels to mute groups and use the USER DEFINED keys to control them. Assigning channels to mute groups As with the DCA group, there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups. • You can select a specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or • You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be assigned. In the Centralogic section, press the [DCA 1–8] or [DCA 9–16] Bank Select key to make it light so that you will be able to control the desired DCA groups in the Centralogic section. ■ Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group Operate the Centralogic section fader corresponding to the DCA group that you want to use. The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group will change while preserving the level differences you established in step 2. NOTE Operating a DCA fader will not cause the input faders to move in tandem. 5. To switch a DCA group on/mute, press the [ON] key for that DCA group in the Centralogic section. When you press an [ON] key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator go dark, the channels assigned to that DCA group will be muted (the same state as when the faders are lowered to the –∞ dB position). 6. To cue-monitor a DCA group, press the [CUE] key for that DCA group in the Centralogic section. When you press the [CUE] key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator light, the [CUE] keys for the channels assigned to that DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will be enabled. For more information about cue, refer to “Using the Cue function” on page 101. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. The Function Access Area will change as follows. 2. Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window. MUTE GROUP button NOTE You can also press the [DCA], [DCA 1–8], or [DCA 9–16] key in the Channel Strip section to select the DCA group that you want to control. 66 Reference Manual Grouping and linking 6 MUTE GROUP MASTER button In this popup window you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group. The popup window includes the following items. Switches the corresponding mute group on or off. 7 DIMMER LEVEL knob 1 Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute group when the dimmer function is enabled. NOTE • In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. • If the dimmer level is set to any level other than –∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP MASTER button is turned on, this button will light orange. 2 3 3. Use the MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels. 4. Press the [SEL] key for the input channels/output channels that you want to assign (multiple selections are allowed). The [SEL] keys for the assigned channels will light, and the corresponding channels will be highlighted in red in the mute group assign field of the window. To cancel an assignment, press a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark. 5. Assign channels to other mute groups in the same way. 5 4 6 7 NOTE You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group. 1 CLEAR ALL button 6. Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected mute group. 2 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN popup window and the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup window. When you finish making assignments, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window, and press the × symbol in the Function Access Area (CH JOB display). You will return to the previous screen. The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit red in the lower row of this field indicate the mute groups to which that channel belongs. 3 Mute group assign field This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group. While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the mute group. The on-screen fader for that channel will turn red and the channel will be assigned to the mute group. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group. If the MUTE SAFE button is on, this field displays the channels that are targets for mute safe (that is, excluded from the mute groups). The operation procedure to apply or cancel mute safe to the channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or from a mute group. The onscreen faders of the assigned channels will turn green. NOTE If the dimmer level is set to any level other than –∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP MASTER button is turned on, these numbers will light orange. For a channel for which the Mute Safe function (see page 70) has been turned on, an “S” indicator will light up green at the right end of the bottom row. 4 Mute group select button Selects the mute group that you want to assign. 5 MUTE SAFE button Use this button if you want to exclude a specific channel from all mute groups, regardless of its assignment settings. The mute group assign field displays the channels that are excluded from the mute groups. For more information on mute safe, “Using the Mute Safe function” on page 70. 67 Reference Manual Grouping and linking ■ Selecting the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong Using mute groups 1. Press the [SEL] key for the input channel/output channel that you want to assign. 2. Press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. In this screen you can view the mix parameters for the currently-selected channel. To control mute groups, you can use the MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons in the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN popup window. In addition, it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On/Off function for a mute group 1–8 to a USER DEFINED key. 3. Use the mute group select buttons to select the mute group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple selections are allowed). 4. Select the mute group(s) for other channels in the same way. 68 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. This popup window enables you to limit available functionality by user, and also to make systemwide settings. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window. Reference Manual Grouping and linking 3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page. The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]– [16]. USER DEFINED key popup button 4. Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Mute On/Off function. The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear. 5. Choose “MUTE MASTER” in the FUNCTION column, and choose “MUTE GROUP x” (where “x” is the mute group number) in the PARAMETER 1 column. Then, press the OK button. To select an item in each column, use / buttons or the multifunction knobs. When you press the OK button, the Mute On/Off function for the specified mute group will be assigned to the USER DEFINED key that you selected in step 4, and you will return to the USER DEFINED KEYS page. 6. In the same way, assign the Mute On/Off function for another mute group to a different USER DEFINED key. 7. When you finish assigning functions to USER DEFINED keys, press the × symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page. 8. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen. 9. To mute a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key [1]–[16] that has been assigned to the desired mute group. The LED of the USER DEFINED key will light, and all channels that belong to the selected mute group will be muted. At this time, the [ON] keys for the muted channels will blink. You can turn on multiple USER DEFINED keys to mute multiple mute groups. 10. To defeat muting for a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key that you lit in step 9. NOTE Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be affected by operations of the USER DEFINED key if the [ON] key for that channel is already turned off to begin with. 69 Reference Manual Grouping and linking Channel Link function Using the Mute Safe function Specific channels that belong to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations (Mute Safe). 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the MUTE GROUP button to access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window. 3. Press the MUTE SAFE button. 4. Press a [SEL] key to select the channel(s) that you want to exclude from mute groups (multiple selections are allowed). The [SEL] key will light, and the corresponding channel in the mute group assign field of the window will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark. Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that channel belongs. Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input channels. The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices. • Head amp settings • Digital gain settings • HPF settings • EQ settings • Dynamics 1 settings • Dynamics 2 settings • Insert on and insert point settings • Direct Out on, Direct Out level, and Direct Out point settings • Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses • On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses • Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses • On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses • Fader operations • [ON] key operations • TO STEREO/MONO setting • DELAY setting • DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting • MUTE GROUP ASSIGN and MUTE SAFE settings Two or more input channels that are linked are called a “link group.” There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create, or on the number or combination of input channels that can be included in these link groups. You can select the types of parameters to be linked for each link group. 70 Reference Manual Grouping and linking 1 Channel display field Linking the desired input channels When you create a link group, the corresponding channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. This section explains how to link specific parameters of input channels. NOTE NOTE Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene. 1. 2. Left and right of the ST IN channel are always linked. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. Press the CH LINK button to open the CH LINK MODE popup window. In this popup window you can view the channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked. The window includes the following items. 2 LINK PARAMETER field Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to link. You can do this independently for each link group. CH LINK button 3 SEND PARAMETER field If you have turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es). NOTE NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. You can also access this window by simultaneously pressing and then releasing the [SEL] keys of two or more channels that will be linked. 3. 1 2 3 Use the buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field to select the parameter(s) that will be linked (multiple selections are allowed). The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field. HA Head amp settings HPF HPF settings DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings EQ EQ settings DYNAMICS 1, 2 Dynamics 1 and 2 settings INSERT Insert settings DIRECT OUT Direct Out settings MIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses MIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses MATRIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses MATRIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses FADER Fader operations DCA DCA group assignment CH ON Channel on/off MUTE Mute group assignment TO STEREO On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses DELAY Channel delay settings NOTE • If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the key-in signals are not linked. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics” on page 56. • If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1/2 button, library recall operations will also be linked. • The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same relative level difference between the channels. 71 Reference Manual Grouping and linking 4. If you turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX SEND buttons in step 3, use the buttons in the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for which you want operations to be linked (multiple selections are allowed). The table below lists the buttons you can select in the SEND PARAMETER field. MIX 1–24 MIX buses 1–24 MATRIX 1–8 MATRIX buses 1–8 You can also perform the operations from step 5 on screen. 5. To link channels, press the channel display field. The CH LINK SET popup window will appear. 6. Select a channel that you want to link. 7. To confirm the link, press the LINK button in the lower left of the screen. An alphabetical character that indicates the link group will appear on the selected channel button. NOTE If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, the send on/off and send level parameters will not be linked. 5. To link channels, hold down the [SEL] key for the link-source input channel and press the [SEL] key for the link-destination channel. At this time, the values of the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be copied from the link-source to the link-destination channel. Subsequent operations of the parameters you selected in steps 3 and 4 will be linked between channels that belong to the same link group. The current link status is displayed in the channel display field of the window. NOTE • If you want to link three or more channels, hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key for each channel you want to add to the link group. • When you press the [SEL] key for a channel (that belongs to a link group) to make it light, the [SEL] keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink. • If you link an input channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored. 6. If you want to add a new channel to an existing link group, hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to add to the group. NOTE If the link-destination channel is already assigned to another link group, the channel will be removed from the previous group and added to the newly assigned group. 7. To remove a channel from a link group, hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to remove. NOTE You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative level differences. For example, this may be the case for parameters such as the HA analog gain and fader, or if you want to change the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group. While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the parameter value. While you are holding down the [SEL] key, the HA analog gain and fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.) NOTE If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model. 72 8. In the same way, link other channels as you wish. 9. When you have finished linking channels, press the CLOSE button. Reference Manual Grouping and linking 1 SOURCE CH field Copying, moving, or initializing a channel This field displays the copy-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select a channel. The field will indicate the selected channel. You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings. Before select ion Aft er select ion Copying the parameters of a channel You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute the copy operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination. You can copy between the following combinations of channels. • Between input channels • Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel • Between MIX channels • Between MATRIX channels 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu. 2. Press the COPY button to access the CH COPY MODE popup window. If the copy source is a MIX/MATRIX channel, buttons will appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy. COPY TARGET field • MODULE PARAMETERS button Selected channel module parameters This popup window enables you to copy channel settings. The window contains the following items. • WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel COPY button 2 DESTINATION CHs field This field displays the copy-destination channel. After you select the copy source, if you select a copy-destination channel by pressing its [SEL] key (multiple selections are allowed), this field will display the selected channel. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 3 COPY button Executes the copy operation. After selecting the copy-source channel and copy-destination channel(s), press this button to execute the copy operation. 4 CLOSE button Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen. 1 4 2 3 73 Reference Manual Grouping and linking 3. Moving the parameters of a channel To select the copy-source channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light. The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window. When you choose the copy-source channel, the DESTINATION CHs field is automatically bolded, allowing you to select the copy-destination. If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press the SOURCE CH field. The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel. When you execute a Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the move-source and move-destination will move forward or backward by one. Move NOTE 1 2 3 4 5 1 5 2 3 4 Copy settings can be made only in the order of “copy-source” → “copy-destination.” 4. To select the copy-destination channel(s), press the corresponding [SEL] key(s) to make it light (multiple selections are allowed). The corresponding channel(s) are highlighted in the DESTINATION CHs field of the window. The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3. If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination channels, press the DESTINATION CHs field. 5. If you have selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as the copy-source, use the buttons in the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy. 6. To execute the copy, press the COPY button. The copy will be executed, and the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination channel(s). After the copy has been executed, the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CHs field will be empty. 7. Move by one. You can move settings between the following combinations of channels. • Between input channels • Between ST IN channels 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu. 2. Press the MOVE button to access the CH MOVE MODE popup window. To close the CH COPY MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button. MOVE button 74 Reference Manual Grouping and linking 3 MOVE button This popup window lets you move channel settings. Executes a move operation. After selecting the move-source channel and move-destination channel, press this button to execute the move. 4 CLOSE button Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen. 3. 1 2 3 To select the move-source channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light. The corresponding channel is highlighted in the SOURCE CH field of the window. When you select the move-source channel, the DESTINATION CH field will automatically be bolded, allowing you to select the move-destination. If you want to re-select the move-source channel, press the SOURCE CH field. NOTE Settings for the Move operation can be made only in the order of “move-source” → “movedestination.” 4 1 SOURCE CH field 4. To select the move-destination channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light. The corresponding channel is highlighted in the DESTINATION CH field of the window. The channels that can be selected will depend on the channel you selected in step 3. If you want to defeat the selected move-destination channel, press the DESTINATION CH field. 5. To execute the move, press the MOVE button. The settings of all channels between the move-source and move-destination will shift toward the move-source by one channel, and the channel settings will move from the move-source to the move-destination. When the Move has been executed, the SOURCE CH field and DESTINATION CH field will be empty. 6. To close the CH MOVE MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button. This field indicates the move-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel. This field will indicate the selected channel. You can move settings between monaural input channels, or between ST IN channels. 2 DESTINATION CH field This field indicates the move-destination channel. After you select the move source, if you select a move-destination input channel by pressing its [SEL] key, this field will display the selected channel. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 75 Reference Manual Grouping and linking Initializing the parameters of a channel 3. To select the channel(s) to be initialized, press the corresponding [SEL] key to make it light (multiple selections are allowed). The corresponding channel(s) are highlighted in the TARGET CHs field of the window. If you want to de-select all of the selected channels, press the TARGET CHs field. 4. To execute the initialization, press the DEFAULT button. The parameters of the selected channel(s) will be initialized. After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will be empty (nothing is selected). 5. To close the CH DEFAULT MODE popup window, press the CLOSE button. You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on any channel(s). 1. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB menu. Press the DEFAULT button to access the CH DEFAULT MODE popup window. This popup window enables you to initialize parameters. DEFAULT button 1 2 3 1 TARGET CHs field This field indicates the channel selected for initialization. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel (multiple selection is allowed). The field will indicate the selected channel(s). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel(s). NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 2 DEFAULT button After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation. 3 CLOSE button Press this button to close the popup window and return to the previous screen. 76 Reference Manual Scene memory Scene memory Using scene memories This chapter explains how to perform scene memory operations. Storing and recalling scenes To store the current mix settings as a scene in memory and recall it later, you can use the keys in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section on the top panel, or you can use the SCENE LIST window. About scene memories ■ Using the keys in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section On CL series consoles, you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input/output port patch settings, and store the mix settings in memory (and later recall them from memory) as a “scene.” Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000–300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene used to initialize the mix parameters. Scenes 001–300 are writable scenes. Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the following parameters. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Input/output port patching Channel name and color Bus settings Head amp settings Digital gain settings EQ settings Dynamics 1 and 2 settings Input delay settings Rack (GEQ/effect/Premium Rack) settings Pan/balance settings Insert/Direct Out settings On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses Settings for signals sent to the STEREO/MONO bus DCA group settings Mute group settings Channel link settings Panel assignment status (PANEL SNAPSHOT) 1. Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired. 2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the store-destination scene number. The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. When you select a new scene number, the number will blink. This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number is different from the currently-loaded scene number. 1 2 2 4 3 This field always displays general information about the scene. You can press this field to access the SCENE LIST window, in which you can view and edit additional settings for the scene. 1 Scene number Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene. 2 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (READ ONLY) displayed here. Write-protected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol. 3 Scene title Indicates the title of the currently-selected scene. 4 E symbol (EDIT symbol) This symbol appears when you edit the mix parameters for the currently-loaded scene. This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the changes you made. 77 Reference Manual Scene memory NOTE 5. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key or the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE popup window. The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation. 6. To execute the Store operation, press the OK button. The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 2. When the Store operation is complete, the scene number in the Function Access Area will stop blinking. If you want to cancel the Store operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. • If you press and hold down either of the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys, the scene number will count up or down continuously. • If you press the SCENE MEMORY [INC] and [DEC] keys simultaneously, the SCENE field indication will return to the number of the currently-loaded scene. • You cannot store data to a scene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed. 3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. The SCENE STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene. 1 2 NOTE You can make settings such that the Store Confirmation dialog box will not appear (see page 168). In this case, pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once will display the SCENE STORE popup window as usual, and pressing it once again will execute the Store operation. Alternatively, you can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key twice to store without seeing the SCENE STORE popup window. 7. To recall a stored scene, use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number that you want to recall. The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function Access Area. 8. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation. 9. To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button. The scene you selected in step 7 will be recalled. If you want to cancel the Recall operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. 1 SCENE TITLE field Press this field to select it, and then enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters). 2 COMMENT field Press this field to select it, and then enter a comment for the scene. You can use this as a memorandum for each scene (maximum 32 characters). 4. Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired. For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual. 78 Reference Manual Scene memory ■ Using the SCENE LIST window 5 Write-protect 1. Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired. 2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various scene-related operations. The window includes the following items. Indicates the Write Protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene. A lock icon will appear. Press it again to cancel write protection. 6 Current scene The currently-selected scene (that is, the current scene) is highlighted in blue in the list. If you press another scene number in the list, the list will scroll and that scene will become the current scene. 1 E 7 SCENE SELECT knob Use the multifunction knobs to select a scene. You can view the currently-selected scene number immediately below the SCENE SELECT knob. 2 8 MULTI SELECT button 5 4 3 You can select consecutive multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the multifunction knob. If this button is off, you can still select consecutive multiple scenes by rotating the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. 9 LAST SCENE button 6 Press this button to select the scene that was recalled most recently. 0 SCENE STORE popup button This button stores the current mix settings. Press this button to display the SCENE STORE popup window, which will enable you to assign a name to a scene and store it. A STORE UNDO button Undoes the Store operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform an Overwrite-store operation. 7 B RECALL SCENE button 8 Recalls the currently-selected scene. C RECALL UNDO button 90 A B C D Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a Recall operation. 1 Scene list D Page switching tabs This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory. Switch views on the right side of the scene list. 2 NO./TITLE buttons E PREVIEW button Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title. Press the same button repeatedly to toggle between ascending order and descending order. Press this to select PREVIEW mode, which allows you to view and edit the scene settings in the display and the panel without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. 3 Scene number Indicates the current scene number. 4 Scene title Indicates the scene title. Press this title to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT popup window, in which you can edit the title. 79 Reference Manual Scene memory 3. 12. To store a scene, rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the storedestination scene number. NOTE • You can select multiple scene numbers as the store-destination. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. • If you selected multiple scenes as the store-destination, the same contents will be stored in all selected scene numbers. This is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the same mix settings. • You can also use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select scene numbers. 4. NOTE • You can also assign the function of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key (see page 169). • You can also use MIDI messages (Program Changes) to recall scenes (see page 152). Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Press the STORE button. The SCENE STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a title or comment to the scene. 5. Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired. 6. Press the STORE button located at the bottom of the SCENE STORE popup window. The SCENE STORE popup window will close, and a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Store operation. 7. To execute the Store operation, press the OK button. The current mix settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 3. If you want to cancel the Store operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. 8. If you want to cancel the overwrite-store operation that you just performed, press the STORE UNDO button. Immediately after overwrite-storing a scene, you can use the STORE UNDO button to undo (cancel) the scene store operation that was executed most recently. When you press the STORE UNDO button, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. Press the OK button if you want to execute the Undo operation. After executing the Undo operation, you can press the STORE UNDO button once again to Redo (re-execute) the Store operation. You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a USER DEFINED key. The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED key. • INC RECALL Immediately recalls the scene for the number that follows the currently-loaded scene. • DEC RECALL Immediately recalls the scene for the number that precedes the currently-loaded scene. NOTE If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently-loaded scene, the closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled. • DIRECT RECALL Directly recalls the scene number that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key. When you press a USER DEFINED key to which this function is assigned, the assigned scene will be recalled immediately. To assign one of these functions to a USER DEFINED key so that a scene can be recalled in a single keystroke, proceed as follows. NOTE • The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite-storing. • You can also assign the function of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key (see page 169). 9. To recall a scene, rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the store-source scene number. 10. Press the RECALL button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Recall operation. 11. To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button. The scene you selected in step 9 will be recalled. If you want to cancel the Recall operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. If you want to cancel the Recall operation that you just performed, press the RECALL UNDO button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Undo operation. Press the OK button if you want to execute the operation. After undoing the recall, you can press the RECALL UNDO button once again to Redo (re-execute). 80 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window. Reference Manual Scene memory 3. 5. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page. The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]– [16]. In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.” Proceed as follows, depending on the function you want to assign. • To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column. • To assign DIRECT RECALL Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose “SCENE #xxx” (xxx is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column. 4. 6. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the popup window. If desired, assign scene-recall functions to other USER DEFINED keys in the same way. 7. Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function. The corresponding scene will be recalled. Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function. The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear. 81 Reference Manual Scene memory 1 COMMENT sort button Editing scene memories Sorts scenes in alphabetical order of the comments in the COMMENT field. Each time you press this button, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order. This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy and paste them. 2 COMMENT field Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT popup window, in which you can enter comments for the scene. Sorting scene memories 1. 3 STATUS field Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations related to scene memory. You can use tabs to switch the view of the right half of the SCENE LIST window between five different fields (COMMENT/FOCUS/FADE TIME/GPI OUT/PLAYBACK LINK). Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS, FADE TIME, PLAYBACK (playback link), and GPI (General Purpose Interface) functions. (The Playback Link function plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled.) 4 TIME STAMP sort button Sorts scenes in chronological order based on the date and time in the TIME STAMP field. Each time you press this button, the list will alternate between ascending and descending order. 5 TIME STAMP field Indicates the date and time the scene was stored. For details on the TIME STAMP display format, refer to “Setting the date and time of the internal clock” on page 204. 2. Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. The COMMENT field will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST window. 1 6 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes made here are immediately reflected on the CL series console. 4 3. To select a scene number, rotate one of the multifunction knobs on the top panel. The line highlighted in blue in the scene list indicates the scene currently selected for operations. 4. To sort the list, press one of the column headers “NO.”, “TITLE,” “COMMENT,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of the scene list and COMMENT field. The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column title you press. 1 5 3 2 2 3 4 1 NO. Sorts the list in order of scene number. 2 TITLE Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of title. 6 3 COMMENT Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of comments. 82 Reference Manual Scene memory 4 TIME STAMP 4 CUT button Sorts the list in order of date of creation. Press this button to delete the selected scene and copy it to buffer memory. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented by one. NOTE By pressing the same location again, you can change the sorting order (ascending or descending). 5. 5 INSERT button Press this button to insert the scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene number. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be incremented by one. If you want to edit the title or comment of a scene, press the TITLE field or COMMENT field of the scene to access the SCENE TITLE EDIT or SCENE COMMENT EDIT popup window. 6 UNDO button Cancels the most recent scene memory paste, clear, cut, or insert operation and restores the previous state. NOTE You cannot edit the title or comment of a read-only scene or a write-protected scene. 6. 2. To enable/disable the protect setting, press the protect symbol. A protect symbol is displayed for write-protected scenes. These scenes cannot be overwritten. Copying and pasting a scene NOTE The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled. 7. You can copy a scene into buffer memory, and then paste it to a different scene number. NOTE Use the tool buttons to edit the scene memory. For details, refer to the section “Scene memory editing” that follows. The Global Paste function enables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the current scene, then paste the data into any single or multiple scenes in memory (see page 85). Scene memory editing The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers, or cleared (erased). 1. 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear. 2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the copy-source scene number, and then press the COPY button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Copy operation. 3. To execute the copy, press the OK button. The scene you selected in step 2 will be saved in buffer memory. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene memory. You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of the SCENE LIST window. The function of each button is described below. 1 Perform the desired editing operation. For more information about the procedure, refer to the corresponding explanations that follow. 2 3 4 5 6 1 COPY button NOTE Press this button to copy the scene to buffer memory. • Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory. • You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy-source. 2 PASTE button Press this button to overwrite the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory. 3 CLEAR button Press this button to erase the selected scene. 83 Reference Manual Scene memory 4. Cutting a scene Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the paste-destination scene number, and then press the PASTE button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Paste operation. This section explains how to cut a scene. When you cut a scene, the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly. You can paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location. 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear. 2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to cut, and then press the CUT button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Cut operation. NOTE • You can select multiple paste-destination scenes. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. In this case, the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes. • A copied scene can also be inserted (see page 85). • If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the PASTE button will be unavailable. 5. To execute the paste operation, press the OK button. The scene stored in the buffer memory will be pasted to the scene number you selected in step 4. If you want to cancel the Paste operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. NOTE If the scene list has been sorted in any other way than by number (in the “NO.” column), the CUT button will be unavailable. Clearing a scene 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear. 2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to clear, and then press the CLEAR button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Clear operation. 3. To execute the Cut operation, press the OK button. The scene(s) you selected in step 2 will be cut, and the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly. At this time, the scene that was cut will be stored in buffer memory. NOTE Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut. 4. If desired, you can paste (see page 83) or insert the cut scene (that was held in the buffer memory). NOTE Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory. NOTE You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. 3. To execute the Clear operation, press the OK button. The scene number(s) you selected in step 2 will be cleared. If you want to cancel the Clear operation, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. NOTE Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared. 84 Reference Manual Scene memory Using the Global Paste function Inserting a scene You can insert a scene held in buffer memory at a desired scene number location. 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear. 2. Perform the Copy operation (see page 83) or Cut operation so that the scene you want to insert is placed in buffer memory. “Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed). This can be convenient if you want to apply changes (that you made to the current scene) to multiple scenes that have already been stored. NOTE The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE/SORT parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings. NOTE You cannot copy or cut multiple scenes as the source. 3. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the insert-destination scene number, and then press the INSERT button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Insert operation. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST window. 2. Press the GLOBAL PASTE button located in the upper part of the SCENE LIST window to open the GLOBAL PASTE window. This window enables you to select the copy-source channels/parameters and specify the pastedestination scene number. NOTE • If you select multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted the selected number of times. • If the scene list has been sorted in any way other than by number (in the “NO.” column), the INSERT button will be unavailable. • If nothing has been stored in the buffer memory, the INSERT button will be unavailable. • The INSERT button will be unavailable if there is already a scene stored at scene number 300, or if the Insert operation would cause an already-stored scene to exceed number 300. 4. 1 2 To execute the Insert operation, press the OK button. The scene stored in buffer memory will be inserted at the scene number you selected in step 3. If you selected multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted multiple times starting at the scene number you selected. Scenes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location will be updated and increase by the number of scenes that were inserted. 1 SET BY SEL button Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. 2 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button The CLEAR ALL button clears all of the selected channels. The SET ALL button selects all channels simultaneously. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 85 Reference Manual Scene memory 3. Use the tabs to select one of the following as the type of item you want to copy. INPUT OUTPUT RACK PATCH/NAME DCA 4. DYNA 1 INSERT INSERT PATCH FADER CH ON TO ST/BAL MONO MATRIX SEND MATRIX ON WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs Input channel and its parameters Output channel and its parameters GEQ/effect/Premium rack Input/output patch, channel name DCA group Select the copy-source channel or parameter. The view will vary depending on the tab you select. You cannot select different parameters from different channels. To select a channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key on the top panel. • RACK tab Enables you to choose from GEQ RACK, EFFECT RACK, or PREMIUM RACK. You can individually select an GEQ for a Flex15GEQ or an effect used in dual mode. • INPUT tab Select an input channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area. You can select the following parameters. ALL INPUT PATCH NAME HA DELAY HPF DIGITAL GAIN EQ DYNA 1 DYNA 2 MIX SEND MATRIX SEND FADER CH ON INSERT INSERT PATCH DIRECT OUT MIX ON MATRIX ON TO ST MONO • PATCH/NAME tab You can select the following parameters. All input channel parameters Input patch settings Channel name, icon, and channel color Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel, and phase Input delay settings HPF settings Digital gain settings for the corresponding input channel EQ settings Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER) Dynamics 2 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE) Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MIX bus Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus Fader level On/off status of [ON] keys Insert on/off status and insert point Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in Direct Out on/off, Direct Out level, Direct Out point and patch settings Send on/off to a MIX bus Send on/off to a MATRIX bus TO ST on/off status, pan/balance settings TO MONO on/off status INPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH INPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME HA CH LINK All input channel patches, insert in/out patches, Direct Out patches All output channel patches, insert in/out patches Channel names, icons, and colors for all input channels Channel names, icons, and colors for all output channels Analog gain, phantom power on/off status, Gain Compensation, phase settings Channel link settings • DCA tab You can select either ALL or LEVEL/ON. If ALL is selected, all parameters will be copied. If LEVEL/ON is selected, the master level and DCA channel on/off status will be copied. You can select copy-source items for each DCA group 1–16 individually. • OUTPUT tab Select an output channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area. You can select the following parameters. ALL OUTPUT PATCH NAME EQ Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE) Insert on/off status and insert point Insert in/out patch settings, head amp settings for insert-in Fader level On/off status of [ON] keys TO ST on/off status, pan/balance settings TO MONO on/off status (MIX 1-24 only) Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus Send on/off to a MATRIX bus SEND parameters of the send-source signal that will be sent to a channel 5. In the DESTINATION SCENE area, select the range of paste-destination scenes. Scenes specified between FROM and TO (inclusive) become the paste destination. Use multifunction knob 7 to specify the FROM value, and multifunction knob 8 to specify the TO value. 6. Press the PASTE button. The selected items of the current scene will be pasted to the scene(s) in memory. A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted. During the paste operation, the STOP button will appear. Press the STOP button if you want to abort the operation. In that case, part of data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo the operation. All output channel parameters Output patch settings Channel name, icon, and channel color EQ settings 86 Reference Manual Scene memory Using the Focus function 3 FOCUS PARAMETER indicators “Focus” is a function that lets you specify the scene parameters that will be recalled (loaded) when you recall a scene. You can specify these settings for each scene. This function is useful if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a specific scene. 4 CURRENT SETTING field These indicators show the focus recall settings that are specified for each scene. Here you can specify the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. NOTE 3. In contrast to Focus, the CL series console features a “Recall Safe” function that enables you to exclude specific channels and parameters from recall operations. However while the Focus function is specified for each scene, Recall Safe settings are applied to all scenes. 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene memory. 2. Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. The FOCUS field will appear in the right half of the SCENE LIST window. 1 Press the SET button for the scene you want to set. The FOCUS RECALL popup window will appear. The window contains the following items. 1 2 2 3 3 1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button Turns off (or on) all focus channel selections and global focus parameter settings. ■ Focus channel display field Indicates the target channel for a Recall operation. The view of this field is the same as that in the RECALL SAFE popup window. To add channels as the target, turn the SET BY SEL button 2 on, and then press the corresponding [SEL] keys for the desired channels. 4 2 SET BY SEL button 1 FOCUS button Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. When you press the [SEL] key of a channel, the on-screen fader of the corresponding channel will turn green (all parameters will be recalled) or blue (only some parameters will be recalled). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel. Enables or disables the Focus function for each scene. 2 SET popup button Press this button to access the FOCUS RECALL popup screen, which allows you to select the parameters that will be subject to recall. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 87 Reference Manual Scene memory ■ Channel focus parameter display field Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall operations. You can use the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE popup window. Using the Recall Safe function “Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from Recall operations. Unlike the Focus settings (see page 87), which you can apply to individual scenes, the Recall Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes. 3 FOCUS button Switches the Focus Recall function on or off. ■ GLOBAL FOCUS PARAMETER field Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any scene. Procedures and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE MODE popup window. 4. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button to access the CH JOB popup window. 2. Press the RECALL SAFE button to access the RECALL SAFE MODE popup window. Follow the procedure starting with step 2 in the “Using the Recall Safe function” section to make settings. 5. If you want only specific parameters to be recalled for the selected channel or DCA group, use the buttons other than ALL in the channel focus parameter display field to select the parameters that will be recalled (multiple selections are allowed). If you want all parameters to be recalled, turn on the ALL button (this is the default setting). If the ALL button is on, all other buttons for that scene will be turned off. Turning on any other button will turn off the ALL button. 6. Recall a scene for which you have made Focus settings. Only the channels (DCA groups) / parameters selected in the FOCUS RECALL popup window will be recalled. Bus settings will always reproduce the state of the recalled scene, regardless of the Focus Recall settings. RECALL SAFE button In this popup window, you can make settings for the Recall Safe function. The window contains the following items. 2 14 NOTE • Scenes for which Focus settings are made are marked by a “FOCUS” indicator in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab). • You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled. 3 5 6 9 7 8 1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button The CLEAR ALL button turns off (disables) the Recall Safe function (that is currently set for individual channels) and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously. The SET ALL button turns on (enables) these functions simultaneously. NOTE The selection of parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change. 88 Reference Manual Scene memory 2 CH RECALL SAFE field 9 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (excluding DCA groups) Indicates the channels currently specified for the Recall Safe function. Selects Recall Safe parameters for the selected channel. The button indication varies depending on the channel type, as follows: 3 SET BY SEL button • Input channel Enables you to use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by the Recall Safe function. Turn this button on, and then press the [SEL] key for the channel to which you want to apply Recall Safe. The on-screen fader of the corresponding channel will turn green (all parameters for the channel will be affected by the Recall Safe function), or turn blue (some parameters for the channel will be affected by the Recall Safe function). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel. NOTE ST IN channels do not feature INSERT, INSERT PATCH, or DIRECT OUT button. All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels. • MIX channel Some parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels. Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels. • MATRIX channel 4 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field Indicates the state of Recall Safe settings that are not made in units of channels, and the Recall Safe settings for racks. Press this field to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE popup window. • STEREO channel 5 Channel select button Selects the channel for which you want to set the Recall Safe function. NOTE Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel. 6 Selected channel display • MONO channel This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel. 7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only) Turn on this button to apply the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel to all other input channels. This can be convenient if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input channels. If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters, the safe parameter select buttons of the selected channel will light green, as follows. 8 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only) Turn on this button to apply Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to all other output channels. This can be convenient if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output channels. In this illustration, the items that are lit green indicate that the INPUT PATCH, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT parameters have been set to Safe by the INPUT PATCH Global parameter settings. In the same way, turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME, OUTPUT PATCH, OUTPUT NAME , and HA will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light green. 89 Reference Manual Scene memory 3. On-screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following channels: Button name WITH MIX SEND Corresponding parameter Input channel Send level to the MIX bus MIX channel MATRIX channel STEREO/ MONO channel O WITH MATRIX SEND Send level to MATRIX bus O To select the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations, press the corresponding [SEL] key. The corresponding channel or DCA group will be enclosed by a white frame in the CH RECALL SAFE field. (However, this white frame does not mean that the Recall Safe setting is now enabled.) The selected channel or DCA groups 1–8 or 9–16 will be recalled to the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field. NOTE ALL All parameters O HA HA-related settings O HPF HPF settings O EQ EQ settings O O O O DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings O O O O DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings O MIX SEND Send level to MIX bus O MATRIX SEND Send level to MATRIX bus O O O NOTE FADER Fader settings O O O O CH ON [ON] key settings O O O O TO ST On/off setting for STEREO bus assignment, PAN, etc. O O • Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on or off, you must also perform the operation described in step 5 (see page 91). • While the APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (or the APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button) is on, operations in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field will apply to all input channels (or output channels). MONO On/off setting for MONO bus assignment O O INPUT PATCH Input Patching O DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings O INSERT Insert on/off O*1 O O O *1 O O O O INSERT PATCH Insert patch settings O DIRECT OUT Direct Out settings O*1 MIX ON MIX Send On/Off O MATRIX ON MATRIX Send On/Off O DELAY Delay settings O NAME Channel name O OUTPUT PATCH Output Patching BAL BLANCE parameter settings O O If the CH RECALL SAFE field’s SET BY SEL button is on, Recall Safe will be enabled when you press the [SEL] key, and the corresponding channel or DCA group will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field. You can select parameters as described in step 4 even after turning Recall Safe on. 4. If you want to enable Recall Safe for specific parameters of the selected channel or DCA group, make the following settings in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field. • If an input channel is selected: Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (except for the “ALL” button) to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe (multiple selections are allowed). If you want all parameters to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button (this is the default setting). O • If a ST IN channel is selected: Use the same steps as those for an input channel. (Different buttons will be displayed.) • If a MIX channel is selected: Use the buttons in the lower part of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (except for the “ALL” button) to select the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe (multiple selections are allowed). In addition, you can use the WITH MIX SEND button displayed in the lower left of the field to enable Recall Safe for the on/off status and send level of signals sent from input channels to MIX buses. If you want all parameters shown in the lower part of the field to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button (this is the default setting). O O O O O O O O O (stereo only) • If a MATRIX channel is selected: Use the same steps as those for a MIX channel. (Different types of buttons will be displayed.) *1. ST IN channels do not feature these buttons. • If a DCA group is selected: If you press a [SEL] key for a DCA group, all parameters for the DCA groups (selected from DCA groups 1–8 and DCA groups 9–16) will be displayed simultaneously. For the parameters that will be subject to Recall Safe, you can select either “ALL” or “LEVEL/ON” (fader position and on/off status of the [ON] key). Recall Safe will be enabled when you make this selection. If you want all parameters of the DCA group to be subject to Recall Safe, turn on the ALL button. Unlike when a channel is selected, Recall Safe will be enabled for that DCA group the moment you turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button. 0 SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field (DCA) Enables you to select parameters for a DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations. If the ALL button is on, all DCA master parameters will be subject to Recall Safe. If LEVEL/ON is on, the DCA master level and on/off status will be subject to Recall Safe. 90 Reference Manual Scene memory 5. 6. Using the Fade function To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn on the SAFE button in the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT field. (If you have selected a DCA group, turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.) Channels or DCA groups for which Recall Safe is enabled will be highlighted in the CH RECALL SAFE field. “Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene. To turn on Recall Safe for global parameters, press the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field to access the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE popup window, and turn on the appropriate buttons. These buttons correspond to the following parameters. INPUT PATCH INPUT NAME OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT NAME HA CH LINK GEQ RACK EFFECT RACK PREMIUM RACK PANEL SNAPSHOT All input channel patching (including INSERT IN/OUT and DIRECT OUT patching) All input channel names, icons, and channel colors All output channel patching (including INSERT IN/OUT patching) All output channel names, icons, and channel colors All I/O devices, and HA-related parameters for external head amps All channel link group settings Apply Recall Safe to GEQ racks 1–16, Effect racks 1–8, Premium Racks 1–8 individually. 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene memory. 2. Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. The FADE TIME field is shown in the right half of the SCENE LIST window. Fader bank selections, GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob selection status (set in units of blocks) NOTE If a dual-type GEQ rack or Premium Rack has been selected, you can apply Recall Safe to rack A and B individually. For other racks, the Recall Safe setting for racks A and B will be linked. 7. 2 1 When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window. Then perform a Recall operation. Only the selected DCA group channels and parameters will be excluded from Recall operations. Bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe. They will always be reproduced in the recalled scene. This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or one of two channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of the other channel(s). In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the next time it is operated. You can globally apply Recall Safe to channel links by using the global parameter. 3 4 NOTE • You can use the Recall Safe function along with the Focus function (see page 87). Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled. • If you hold down the [SEL] key while performing a recall operation, all parameters of that channel will be treated as Recall Safe regardless of the state of the SAFE PARAMETER SELECT selections. 1 SET popup button Press this button to open the FADE TIME popup window, in which you can select a channel for which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time over which the fader will reach its new value). 2 FADER button Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene. 91 Reference Manual Scene memory 3 FADE TIME display 4. Press the [SEL] keys for the desired channels or DCA groups to select the channels or DCA groups to which the Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed). The [SEL] keys for the selected channels or DCA groups will light, and those channels or DCA groups will be highlighted green in the channel display field of the popup window. You can cancel the selection by pressing the lit [SEL] key once again to turn it off. 5. Use the multifunction knob that corresponds to the FADE TIME knob to adjust the fade time. The range is 0.0 sec – 60.0 sec. When you have finished setting the fade time, press the OK button to close the FADE TIME popup window. This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene. 4 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. 3. Press the SET button to access the FADE TIME popup window. In this popup window you can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time. 1 3 4 NOTE The fade time you specify here is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in step 4. 6. To enable the Fade function, press the FADE button. You can turn the Fade function on or off individually for each scene. NOTE 2 Scenes for which Fade settings are made are marked by a “FADE” indicator in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window (COMMENT tab). 7. 1 Channel display field Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on. The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time. NOTE The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted. • The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link. • You can stop a fade effect by holding down a [SEL] key while you stop the corresponding moving fader. • If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, the faders of all channels or DCA groups will move immediately to their target positions. 2 FADE TIME knob Sets the fade time. You can adjust the fade time using the corresponding multifunction knob. 3 SET ALL button Press this button to apply the Fade effect to all faders of that scene. 4 CLEAR ALL button Press this button to cancel the Fade effect for all faders of that scene. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 92 Reference Manual Scene memory 1 GPI OUT CONTROL buttons Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT) These specify the control signal will be output from each GPI OUT. Pressing a button repeatedly will switch between the following functions. • –––– (OFF) ................ Nothing will be output. • TRIGGER .................. A trigger will be output when the scene is recalled. • TALLY ........................ A tally will be output when the scene is recalled. A contol signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the CL series console when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows. NOTE For more information on the GPI OUT settings, refer to “Using GPI OUT” on page 223. 1. 2. 2 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations for scene memory. 3. For each scene, specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT port. 4. Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals. When you recall the scene, the control signals will be output to the external device connected to the GPI OUT connector. Press the GPI OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. The GPI OUT field will appear. 1 2 93 Reference Manual Scene memory Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall The PLAYBACK LINK field is shown in the right half of the SCENE LIST window. You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be played automatically in a specific scene. Follow the steps below to link a scene recall with audio file playback. 1 2 NOTE • Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. If you save them in the root directory or in other folders, you will be unable to specify them for playback. When an audio file is played, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate \YPE\SONGS\. • You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode. • A specified audio file will be played back only once, regardless of the playback mode settings. • Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters. If you change the file name after specifying the file for playback, or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly, the specified file may become unrecognizable in rare cases. 1. Connect a USB flash drive containing the audio files to the USB connector. 2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. The SCENE LIST window will appear, in which you can perform various operations related to scene memory. 3 4 1 PLAY button Sets the Playback Link function’s on/off status for each scene. 2 Song select popup button 3. Press this button to open the SONG SELECT popup window, in which you can select a song and set the offset time (time duration from scene recall until the start of playback). Also, the title of the selected song will appear on the button. Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. 3 Offset time display Indicates the time duration from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified audio file. Set the offset time in the SONG SELECT popup window. 4 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. 94 Reference Manual Scene memory 4. 7 OFFSET knob Press the song select popup button for a scene to which you want to link the audio file. The SONG SELECT popup window will appear. In this popup window, you can select an audio file you want to link with the scene, and set the offset time. 2 You can use the multifunction knob to set the time duration from scene recall until the start of audio file playback. 8 Scroll knob 3 Use the multifunction to scroll the list. 5. Press the screen or use the multifunction knobs to select a file that you want to link to a scene. 6. If desired, use the corresponding multifunction knobs to set the offset (the time duration until the start of audio file playback). The offset value can be adjusted in the range of 0.0–99.0 in 0.5 sec steps. 7. Press the OK button. The title of the selected song will appear in the center of the song list. If you select the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, your settings will be discarded and the unit will return to the SCENE LIST popup window. 8. Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file. The PLAY button will light in the LINK field. The PLAY indicator will appear in the STATUS field on the COMMENT tab. 9. Repeat steps 4–8 to link audio files to other scenes. 10. Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked. After the offset time duration has elapsed, the specified audio file will play one time. 1 4 5 6 7 8 1 Change directory button Press this button to move to the next higher level. NOTE NOTE • After a scene has been recalled and until the offset time has elapsed, a countdown will appear in the Function Access Area. • If another song is playing during a scene recall, the song playback will stop when the scene is recalled, regardless of the offset time setting. You cannot move to levels higher than \YPE\SONGS\. 2 PATH indicator This area indicates the current directory path. 3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons Switch between the song title list and the file name list. 4 SONG TITLE list button 5 ARTIST list button Press these buttons to sort the audio file list (at the current directory level) by song title and artist name respectively. 6 Song list Displays the title, artist name, and audio file time duration of the audio files in the \YPE\SONGS\ folder. You can select an audio file by pressing the audio file name. 95 Reference Manual Scene memory Using Preview mode Functions in Preview mode The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations. • CL Editor • Stage Mix • MIDI Rx • GPI IN Preview mode lets you view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings of the newly recalled scene will appear on the panel of the CL series console, but the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. Even if you modify the settings and save them as a new scene or by overwriting, the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. During an actual performance, it can be convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to make minor changes to a scene and then store it. 1. Similarly, edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external devices. • CL Editor • Stage Mix • MIDI Tx • GPI OUT Press the PREVIEW button on the panel or the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window. The PREVIEW button will light, and the console will be in Preview mode. In this state, operating controllers such as the knobs and faders will not affect the signal processing of the current scene. 2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number that you want to recall. 3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button. The scene will be recalled. However, the internal signal processing of the current scene will remain unchanged as it was prior to the Recall operation. If desired, you can access a specific channel in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, or access a specific screen in the display to examine the values in detail. 4. If desired, use the panel controls to edit the settings. Operating a panel control in Preview mode will edit the settings of the scene you recalled in step 3, but will not affect the signal processing of the current scene. 5. If you want to store the changes you made in step 4, select the scene number in which you want to store the scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. The settings you edited in step 4 will be stored into memory. 6. When you have finished viewing or editing the settings of the scene, press the PREVIEW button of the panel or the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window. The PREVIEW button will go dark; the CL series console will exit Preview mode and return to the normal state. The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene. Playback Link will operate for recalling the current scene. If cascade-connected, both master and slave units will operate independently. Link will not occur while in Preview mode. The following functions will not operate in Preview mode. • Synchronization with CL Editor • Switching users • Changing the User Level • Load/Save functions • Cue changes • USER DEFINED KEYS operations • USER DEFINED KNOB operations • Monitor (MONITOR, CUE, OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK) changes or display • Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings • Changing or viewing the recorder • Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings • FADE TIME • EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording • MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects • Internal metering for Premium Effects (GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043; VU for Opt-2A and U76) NOTE In addition, you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations. • While pasting scene or EQ settings. • While executing Global Paste • While synchronizing with CL Editor • While saving/loading a file PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters. 96 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions Monitor and Cue functions • MONITOR SELECT Selects the monitor source. This chapter explains the Monitor and Cue functions of CL series consoles. • METER Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal. About the Monitor and Cue functions • DIMMER Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount. • MONITOR LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack. The Monitor function lets you audition various outputs through your nearfield monitors or headphones. On the front panel of the CL series console is a PHONES Out jack for monitoring, which enables you to monitor the monitoring source signal at any time. By assigning the MONITOR OUT L/ R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through external speakers. You can select the following signals as the monitor source. • STEREO channel output signal • MONO channel output signal • STEREO + MONO channel output signal • OMNI IN 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, 7–8 channel input signal (for monitoring a two channnel pair) • RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal • A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output signals, RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals, and OMNI IN 1–2, 3–4, 5–6, 7–8 input signals • MONITOR FADER Use the STEREO MASTER fader or MONO MASTER fader to adjust the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with MONITOR LEVEL. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack. • ON (on/off) Switches the Monitor function on or off. • DELAY (Monitor delay) Delays monitor signals. The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output. • PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level) Adjusts the output level at the PHONES Out jack. The Cue function enables you to check an individual channel or DCA group by temporarily monitoring it via MONITOR OUT, CUE OUT, or PHONES. When you press the [CUE] key on the top panel, the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output or cue output from the selected output port. • PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone Level Link function) If this function is turned on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack. NOTE • CUE INTERRUPTION (Cue Interruption function) If this function is turned on, pressing the [CUE] key on the top panel will cause the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output from the selected output port. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on. Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers or headphones. Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES Out jack. The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow. CUE TRIM (INPUT/OUTPUT/DCA) CUE L BUS CUE L CUE R BUS CUE R CUE ON MONO CUE OUT ON METER CUE L METER CUE R DELAY (MAX:1000ms) DELAY (MAX:1000ms) MONITOR DELAY AUTO BYPASS CUE OUT L To OUTPUT PATCH CUE OUT R To OUTPUT PATCH CUE OUT LEVEL CUE LOGIC DEFINE MIX (MAX:8ch) MONITOR L MONO METER MONITOR L MONITOR R METER MONITOR R MONITOR MONO(C) METER MONITOR MONO(C) ON CUE INTERRUPTION DELAY (MAX:1000ms) DIMMER MONITOR SELECT STEREO OUT L,R STEREO OUT MONO(C) STEREO OUT L,C,R STEREO OUT L,R STEREO OUT MONO(C) MIX OUT1-24 MATRIX OUT1-8 DELAY (MAX:1000ms) DELAY (MAX:1000ms) OMNI IN 1/2 OMNI IN 3/4 OMNI IN 5/6 OMNI IN 7/8 PLAYBACK OUT OMNI IN 1/2 OMNI IN 3/4 OMNI IN 5/6 OMNI IN 7/8 PLAYBACK OUT PHONES LEVEL LINK DELAY (MAX:1000ms) ON DELAY (MAX:1000ms) +MONO(C) PHONES L To PHONES OUT PHONES R To PHONES OUT MONITOR OUT L MONITOR OUT R MONITOR OUT MONO(C) To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH An output port delay becomes invalid by assigning a monitor out to the output port. TALKBACK ON MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR DIMM ON LEVEL FADER 97 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 2 SOURCE SELECT field Using the Monitor function Selects the monitor source. If DEFINE has been selected in this field, access the MONITOR popup window to specify the source channel. This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the PHONES Out jack or external monitor speakers. 1. 2. 3 DIMMER field Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on the rear panel. Monitor signals can be sent to any desired output jack or output channel. To monitor through headphones, make sure that your headphones are connected to the PHONES Out jack on the front pad. Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals. • DIMMER LEVEL knob Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on. • DIMMER ON button Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen. In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings, and turn monitoring on or off. The MONITOR screen contains the following items. 2 3 4 4 MONITOR FADER field Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level. • MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob Adjusts the monitor fader level. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust the level. 5 • FADER ASSIGN display This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader. Indicator assignments are as follows: • ---- ................................................ No assignment • MASTER A................................. Master A only • MASTER A+ .............................. Master A, Master B, Custom Fader bank • MASTER B ................................. Master B only • MASTER B+............................... Master B, Custom fader bank • CUSTOM .................................... A single fader in the Custom fader bank • CUSTOMs .................................. Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank 6 1 7 8 5 Meter field Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open the MONITOR popup window. 6 MONITOR OUTPUT button Switches Monitor Out on or off. 7 PHONES LEVEL LINK button If this is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob or MONITOR FADER will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack. 1 MONITOR popup display button 8 MONO MONITOR button Enables you to access the MONITOR popup window, in which you can make detailed monitor settings. Turn on this button to switch monitor signals to mono. 98 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 3. • DIMMER ON button Switches the Dimmer function on or off. The monitor signal will be attenuated if this button is on. Press the popup button or the meter field to open the MONITOR popup window. In the MONITOR popup window you can make detailed settings for monitoring. The popup window includes the following items. 3 5 4 TALKBACK DIMMER field 6 7 Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals when TALKBACK is on. • TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL knob Adjusts the amount by which monitor signals will be attenuated when talkback is on. 8 • TALKBACK DIMMER ON indicator Indicates the on/off status of the dimmer function for talkback. 1 4 9 0 5 PHONES LEVEL LINK button A Enables you to link the signal level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level. If this button is on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob and monitor fader knob will adjust the level of the signal sent to the PHONES OUT jack. 6 CUE INTERRUPTION button Press this button to interrupt the cue signal with the monitor signal. If this button is on and the cue is enabled, the cue signal will be sent to the monitor output. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on. If you do not wish to send the cue signal to the monitor output, switch this button off. 2 7 MONO MONITOR button Turn on this button to switch the monitor output signal to mono. 8 MONITOR OUTPUT button 1 SOURCE SELECT field Switches the monitor output on or off. Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus. STEREO L/R STEREO L/R channel signals MONO (C) MONO channel signal LCR STEREO L/R + MONO channel signals OMNI 1–2 – 7–8 OMNI IN jacks 1–8 signals (per two channels) PB OUT Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals DEFINE The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field 9 MONITOR FADER field Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level. • MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob Adjusts the monitor fader level. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level. • FADER ASSIGN indicator This area displays the faders that are currently assigned as MONITOR FADER. Indicator assignments are as follows: 2 ASSIGN field If you selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, use this field to specify the monitor source. You can select up to eight monitor sources simultaneously. Pressing the CLEAR ALL button will clear all selections. 3 DIMMER field Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals. • DIMMER LEVEL knob Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on. 99 ---- No assignment MASTER A MASTER A fader only MASTER A+ MASTER A, as well as MASTER B fader and Custom fader bank MASTER B MASTER B fader only MASTER B+ MASTER B, as well as Custom fader bank CUSTOM One of the Custom fader bank faders CUSTOMs Multiple Custom fader bank faders Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 5. 0 MONITOR DELAY field This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out signal is delayed. • AUTO BYPASS button Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on. To specify a port as the output destination for monitor signals L, C, and R, press one of the MONITOR OUT PATCH buttons (L/R/C) in the meter field to open the PORT SELECT popup window. In this window, choose from the following monitor signal output destinations (multiple selections are allowed). • MONITOR DELAY knob Adjusts the delay time for the monitor signal. The delay time is shown above the knob in ms units, and below the knob in units of the currently selected scale. However if the scale is set to ms, the delay time value is not shown above the knob. Press this knob and you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the value. • MONITOR DELAY ON button If this button is on, the monitor signal will be delayed according to the setting of the MONITOR DELAY knob. A Meter field • Meters Indicates the output level of the monitor L/R/C channels. • MONITOR OUT PATCH button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output port to patch to the monitor out L/R/C channels. 4. Use the buttons of the SOURCE SELECT field to select a monitor source. In the SOURCE SELECT field you can select only one monitor source. However, if you have selected DEFINE, you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources. DANTE 1–64 Output channels 1–64 to audio network OMNI1–8 OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit SLOT1–1 – SLOT3–16 Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–3 When you have selected an output port, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window. In the same way, specify the output ports for MONITOR OUT L, R, and C. The following table shows the monitor sources that you can select in the ASSIGN field. MIX 1–24 Output signals of MIX channels 1–24 NOTE MTRX 1–8 MATRIX buses 1–8 output signals STEREO STEREO L/R channel output signals MONO (C) MONO channel output signal OMNI 1–2 – OMNI 7–8 OMNI IN jacks 1–8 input signals (per two channels) • If desired, you can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R to monitor through two speakers. • If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO (C) button or LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R. PB OUT Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals 6. NOTE You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight monitor sources, no further selections will be possible. Please turn off the buttons for unneeded sources. To enable monitoring, press the OUTPUT button to turn it on. The monitor source you selected in step 4 will be sent to the output destination you specified in step 5. NOTE The PHONES Out jack will always output the monitor signal, regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off. 7. 100 To control the monitor fader, press the Bank Select [STEREO] key in the Centralogic section, and then operate the monitor fader. Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 8. 9. Using the Cue function To adjust the monitor level, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the monitor fader, as well as the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones. About CUE groups Cue signals on the CL series console can be categorized into the following four groups. Make settings for Dimmer, Delay, Monaural, and CUE INTERRUPTION as desired. 1 INPUT CUE group NOTE The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the [CUE] key for any input channel to turn Cue on. Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also be assigned to USER DEFINED keys (see page 169). Input channel [CUE] key NOTE If input channels or ST IN channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group. 2 DCA CUE group The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the [CUE] key of one of the DCA groups to turn Cue on. Centralogic section [CUE] key (when controlling DCA groups) 3 OUTPUT CUE group The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the [CUE] key of one of the output channels. [CUE] key in the Master section 101 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions Operating the Cue function This section explains how to use the [CUE] key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue signals. NOTE Be aware that if you turn CUE INTERRUPTION off in the MONITOR popup window, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers. However, the front panel PHONES jack will always output the cue signal regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. See “Using the Monitor function” on page 98 for details about the Monitor function. [CUE] key in the Centralogic section (when controlling MIX channels or MATRIX channels) 1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen. The CUE field on the MONITOR screen enables you to check the current cue settings, and turn Cue on or off. 2 4 Other CUE group These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the touch screen. This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE button in the EFFECT popup window or the PREMIUM popup window, or if you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1 popup On-screen CUE button window. This group will automatically be disabled when you exit the corresponding popup window. You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously. Normally, the group to which the most recently-pressed [CUE] key (or on-screen CUE/KEY IN CUE button) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be defeated. However, if you have switched the cue signal group in a specific order when the CUE MODE setting is MIX CUE, the state of the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be restored when the current cue signal is defeated. The following illustration shows the priority of the [CUE] keys. After you Other CUE group have switched groups from lower to upper levels, if you then defeat cue for INPUT CUE group the upper group, the previous [CUE] key status of the group immediately DCA CUE group below will be restored. For example, if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group → DCA OUTPUT CUE group CUE group → INPUT CUE group → Other CUE group, you can then successively defeat the [CUE] keys (CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to successively restore the [CUE] key status of the previouslyselected group. 3 4 1 5 1 CUE popup display button Enables you to access the CUE popup window, in which you can make detailed cue settings. 2 CUE MODE buttons Select the cue mode. You can select MIX CUE mode (all selected channels will be cued), or LAST CUE mode (only the channel selected most recently will be cued). 3 INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field Indicates the settings for input cue, DCA cue, and output cue. Press this field to open the CUE popup window. 102 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 4 CUE OUTPUT button 3 DCA CUE field Switches the cue out on or off. This section enables you to make settings related to DCA cue. • Cue point select button Sets the cue point for the DCA group to PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) or POST PAN (immediately after PAN). 5 CLEAR CUE button Cancels all cue selections simultaneously. If the CUE MODE setting is MIX CUE, all of the selected channels will be cleared. 2. • DCA TRIM knob Indicates the monitor level of cue signals from a DCA group. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level. Press the CUE popup display button or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field to open the CUE popup window. The popup window includes the following items. 1 2 3 4 • UNITY button Turn on this button to monitor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when the master level for each DCA group was set to 0 dB (unity gain). 5 6 4 OUTPUT CUE field This section enables you to make settings related to output channel cue. 7 • Cue point select button Sets the cue point for the output channel to PFL (immediately before fader) or AFL (immediately after fader). 8 • PFL TRIM knob Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the level. 9 1 CUE MODE buttons 5 Meter field Select one of the following two cue modes: • Meter This field indicates the output level of the cue L/R channels. • MIX CUE All selected channels will be mixed and auditioned. • CUE OUT PATCH button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select an output port to patch to the cue out L/R channels. • LAST CUE Only the most recently selected channel will be auditioned. 2 INPUT CUE field 6 CUE OUTPUT button This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue. Switches cue out on or off. • Cue point select button Sets the cue point to PFL (before fader (immediately before INPUT DELAY)), AFL (immediately after fader), or POST PAN (immediately after PAN). 7 CUE LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the cue out. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level. 8 ACTIVE CUE indicator NOTE Lights to indicate the type of cue currently being monitored (input: blue, DCA: yellow, output: orange). Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to the MONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode. • PFL TRIM knob Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the level. 9 CLEAR CUE button Press this button to clear all cue selections simultaneously. 103 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 3. 6. Use the CUE MODE button to select either the mode in which channels are mixed for auditioning, or the mode in which only the last-selected channel is auditioned. Select the MIX CUE button or LAST CUE button. NOTE The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES output jacks regardless of whether the CUE OUTPUT button is on or off. However, be aware that the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output if CUE INTERRUPTION is turned off. The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES output jack, regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting. NOTE In MIX CUE mode, it’s not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue for different Cue groups. The Cue group to which the last-cued signal belongs will be turned on, allowing only the signals of that Cue group to be monitored. 4. Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT CUE field, DCA CUE field, and OUTPUT CUE field to specify the output position and output level for each CUE group. Refer to the explanation for each item in step 2, and make the desired settings. 5. To specify a port as the output destination for cue signals L and R, press one of the CUE OUTPUT buttons (L/R) in the meter field to open the PORT SELECT popup window, and choose from the following cue signal output destinations (multiple selections are allowed). To enable Cue out for the port you specified in step 5, press the CUE OUTPUT button to turn it on. 7. Press the [CUE] key for a desired channel or DCA group to turn it on. The cue signal of the corresponding channel will be sent to the output destination specified in step 5 and to monitor output. A cue meter is shown in the meter field of the function access area, indicating the cue output level. The upper part of the cue meter shows an abbreviation indicating the currently-enabled cue group or cue type. The abbreviations displayed for the cue meters have the following meaning. IN INPUT CUE group DCA DCA CUE group OUT OUTPUT CUE group EFFECT CUE in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK (Other CUE groups) KEY IN KEY IN CUE in the DYNAMICS 1 popup window (Other CUE groups) REC/PB CUE in the RECORDER INPUT/PLAYBACK OUT (Other CUE groups) CUE meter DANTE 1-64 Output channels 1–64 to audio network OMNI1–8 OMNI OUT jacks 1–8 DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit NOTE SLOT1–1 – SLOT3–16 Output channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1–3 • When using the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON FADER popup window, you can press the selected button once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel (see page 43). • If you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the USER SETUP popup window, choose the PREFERENCE tab, and then turn on “[CUE] → [SEL] LINK” (see page 168). When you have selected an output port, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window. 104 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 8. If you’re auditioning the CUE signal in the monitor, adjust the Cue signal level by using the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel. Also adjust the MONITOR FADER LEVEL in conjunction with this. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, the cue signal level when monitoring through headphones can be adjusted in three ways: the CUE LEVEL knob, the MONITOR FADER, and the PHONES LEVEL knob. NOTE To adjust the level to the cue out port you specified in step 5, adjust the gain of the output port that is patched to it. 9. To defeat cue, press the currently-on [CUE] key once again. You can press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field of the CUE popup window to clear all cue selections. NOTE • If you press the CUE meter in the Function Access Area, all cue selections will be cleared. • All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section. • You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key (see page 169). 105 Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator Talkback and Oscillator Using Talkback The Talkback function sends the signal (that is input at the input jacks) to the desired bus. About the Talkback and Oscillator functions 1. Talkback is a function that sends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the desired bus. This is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer to the performers and staff. If necessary, you can also use a mic connected to an INPUT jack on the I/O device or the OMNI IN jack on the CL unit for talkback. CL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus, so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical response of the room or hall. The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals. MIX . . 1 2 . 23 24 O M N O MATRIX . .7 8 L R (C) 1 2 . ST In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen. In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback settings, and turn talkback on or off. If you want to view or edit the talkback settings in greater detail, use the TALKBACK popup window described in step 2 and subsequent steps. CUE L R CASCADE IN SLOT1 1-16 SLOT2 1-16 SLOT3 1-16 CASCADE IN SELECT +48V MASTER +48V ON HA +48V [TALKBACK INPUT] TALKBACK INPUT 1 2 METER + - 3 AD TALKBACK LEVEL DANTE IN METER [DANTE] DANTE INPUT OMNI IN 1 2 3 INPUT SELECT ON OSCILLATOR Sine Wave Pink Noise Burst Noise 64 LEVEL OSC METER ON HPF LPF HA +48V [OMNI IN] [1-8] TALKBACK TB INPUT DANTE IN 1-64 OMNI IN 1-8 1 METER + - AD GAIN/TRIM 8 1 2 3 4 5 1 TALKBACK popup display button Enables you to access the TALKBACK popup window, in which you can make detailed talkback settings. 2 TALKBACK IN field • +48V indicator .......................... Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power supplied to the TALKBACK jack. • TALKBACK IN level meter..... Meters the level of signals after the input gain at the TALKBACK jack. 106 Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator 3 INPUT TO TALKBACK field 2 INPUT TO TALKBACK field This field allows a mic connected to a conventional input port to be used as a talkback input. • INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button .......................... Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can patch a desired input port to an input port to patch to talkback. The selected port name will appear on the button. • +48V indicator .......................... Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power supplied to the selected port. • ANALOG GAIN knob ............. Sets the analog gain of the selected port. You can adjust the gain by using the multifunction knobs. • HA meter.................................... Displays the level of the HA input signal. • INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can patch a desired input port to talkback. The selected port name will appear on the button. • +48V button This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the selected input port. • ANALOG GAIN knob Adjusts the analog gain setting for the selected input port. Press this knob so that you will be able to use the multifunction knob to adjust the gain. • HA meter Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port. 4 TALKBACK ASSIGN field An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected output destination of the talkback signal. • GC ON button Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. The button will appear if the input jack of the I/O device is patched. 5 TALKBACK ON button Switches talkback on or off. 2. • Gain Compensation meter Indicates the level after Gain Compensation. It will appear if the input jack of the I/O device is patched. Press the TALKBACK popup display button or the ASSIGN field to open the TALKBACK popup window. In this popup window you can make detailed settings for talkback. 1 NOTE 2 These parameters and meters will not appear if no input port is selected. 3 TALKBACK ON button Switches talkback on or off. 3 4 ASSIGN field • Channel select buttons Enable you to select a channel (bus) on which the talkback signal is sent. • CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all selections. 3. 4 Connect a mic to the TALKBACK jack on the front panel, and then rotate the TALKBACK GAIN knob to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic signal. The meter in the TALKBACK IN field indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack. If you want phantom power (+48V) to be supplied to the TALKBACK jack, turn on the +48V button located in the TALKBACK IN field. 1 TALKBACK IN field • +48V button Switches on or off the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the TALKBACK jack. • TALKBACK level meter Indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack. 107 Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator 4. Using the Oscillator function If you want to use an input jack other than the TALKBACK jack as supplementary input for talkback, follow the steps below. You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus. 4-1. Press the INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button in the INPUT TO TALKBACK field to open the PORT SELECT popup window. 1. 4-2. Press the button for the input that you want to use for talkback to turn the button indicator on. You can select only one input at a time. 4-3. Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window. Use the INPUT TO TALKBACK field GAIN knob and level meter to adjust the input level of the connected mic. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button to access the MONITOR screen. In the MONITOR screen, the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings, and turn the oscillator on or off. If you want to view or edit the oscillator settings in greater detail, use the OSCILLATOR popup window described in step 2 and subsequent steps. NOTE The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and +18 dB. Keep in mind that noise may be generated when using phantom power if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of an external device connected to the INPUT jack. 5. Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the bus(es) to which the talkback signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed). NOTE You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections. 6. To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on. The TALKBACK ON button will alternately turn on or off each time you press the button (Latch operation). While talkback is on, signals from the TALKBACK jack and the selected INPUT jack will be output to the destination buses. 5 1 4 2 NOTE • You can also assign talkback on/off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key. In this case, you can select either a Latch operation or an Unlatch operation (the function will be enabled only while you continue holding down the key) (see page 169). • When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the talkback signal (see page 99). 3 1 OSCILLATOR popup display button Enables you to access the OSCILLATOR popup window, in which you can make detailed oscillator settings. 2 OSCILLATOR LEVEL field This adjusts the level of the oscillator. A meter beside the LEVEL knob indicates the output level of the oscillator. If OSCILLATOR MODE is set to SINE WAVE, the frequency of the oscillator is shown. Press the LEVEL knob to adjust the oscillator level using the multifunction knob. 3 OSCILLATOR MODE field Indicates the currently-selected oscillator mode. Pressing the MODE button repeatedly will switch modes. 108 Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator 4 OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field Mode = SINE WAVE An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected oscillator output destination (input channels or buses). Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. • LEVEL knob.............. Indicates the output level of the sine wave. • FREQ knob................ Indicates the frequency of the sine wave. 5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button Turns the oscillator output on or off. 2. Mode = PINK NOISE Press the popup button or the ASSIGN field to open the OSCILLATOR popup window. In this popup window, you can make detailed settings for the oscillator. 1 2 5 • LEVEL knob.............. Indicates the output level of the pink noise. • HPF knob................... Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink noise. Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off. • LPF knob.................... Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink noise. Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off. 4 Mode = BURST NOISE 3 • LEVEL knob, HPF knob, and LPF knob.................... Same as in PINK NOISE mode. • WIDTH...................... Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently. • INTERVAL ................ Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts. 1 OSCILLATOR MODE buttons Select one of the following three oscillator operating modes: SINE WAVE When the oscillator is turned on, a sine wave will be output continuously. PINK NOISE When the oscillator is turned on, pink noise will be output continuously. BURST NOISE When the oscillator is turned on, pink noise will be output intermittently. Level INTERVAL Pink noise output WIDTH 2 Parameter field Enables you to set the oscillator parameters. The controllers and their functions in this field vary depending on the selected mode. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs. Turn BURST NOISE button is on. 109 Time Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator 3 ASSIGN section Enables you to select a channel to which the oscillator signal will be sent. Press one of the three tabs located at the bottom of the screen, then press the button(s) for the channel(s) in this section (multiple selections are allowed). The “ASSIGNED” indicator is lit green for a tab that contains a selection. You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 4 Meter section Indicates the oscillator output level. 5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button Turns the oscillator on or off. 3. Press a button in the MODE field to select the type of signal you want to output. 4. Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters. The displayed parameters will differ depending on the oscillator selected in the MODE field. The knobs shown in the parameter field can be operated using the corresponding multifunction knobs. 5. Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel(s) or bus(es) to which the oscillator signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed). 6. To enable the oscillator, press the OUTPUT button to turn it on. The oscillator signal will be sent to the input channel or bus you selected in step 5. When you press the button again, the oscillator will turn off. 110 Reference Manual Meters Meters INPUT METER screen This screen shows the meters and faders for all input channels. This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all channels, and operations related to the optional MBCL meter bridge. Operations in the METER screen By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input and output levels of all channels on the screen, and switch the level meter’s metering points (the points in the signal route at which the level is detected). 1. In the Function Access Area, press the METER field to access the METER screen. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. OUTPUT METER screen This screen shows the meters and faders for all output channels. 111 Reference Manual Meters INPUT/OUTPUT tabs Centralogic fader display Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen and OUTPUT METER screen. This area displays the level of the faders currently set in the Centralogic section. Fader level and meter display METERING POINT field This area displays the meter, fader, and level value for each channel. 1 Select one of the following as the metering point at which the level will be detected. 2 3 4 ■ For INPUT METER • PRE HPF.................... Immediately before the HPF • PRE FADER .............. Pre-fader (immediately before INPUT DELAY) • POST ON................... Immediately after the [ON] key ■ For OUTPUT METER • PRE EQ ...................... Immediately before the EQ • PRE FADER .............. Immediately before the fader • POST ON................... Immediately after the [ON] key 5 NOTE 1 Channel number On the CL3 or CL1 console, the metering point for output channels will also affect the optional meter bridge (MBCL). Indicates the channel number. 2 Σ clipping indicator PEAK HOLD button Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on each meter. Turn off this button to clear the peak hold indication. 3 OVER indicator This indicator will light if the signal clips at the METERING POINT. 4 Meter 2. If necessary, press a button in the METERING POINT field to switch the metering point. The metering point for the level meters can be set independently for input channels and output channels. 3. If you want the peak levels of the level meter to be held, press the PEAK HOLD button to turn it on. PEAK HOLD button on/off operations will affect both input channels and output channels as well as the MBCL meter bridge. When you turn this button off, the peak level indications that had been held will be cleared. This meter indicates the input or output level of the channel. 5 Fader The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value (in dB) that appears immediately below the fader. NOTE Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Centralogic section. NOTE You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to a USER DEFINED key (see page 169). 112 Reference Manual Meters Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console If the optional meter bridge (MBCL) is installed on the CL3 or CL1 console, you will always be able to view the output levels of MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, MONO, and CUE channels. The MBCL meters indicate the output levels in 12-segment steps (OVER, –3 dB, –6 dB, –9 dB, –12 dB, –15 dB, –18 dB, –24 dB, –30 dB, –40 dB, –50 dB, –60 dB). You can select the metering point (the point at which the level is detected) from the following choices. For information on how to change the metering point, refer to the section “Operations in the METER screen” on page 111. • PRE EQ .......................Immediately before the EQ • PRE FADER ...............Immediately before the fader • POST ON ...................Immediately after the [ON] key 113 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack MIX INSERT OUT 1-24 STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C) This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack. MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-8 About the virtual rack CL series consoles enable you to use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “GEQ”) and effects/processors to modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ: 31BandGEQ which enables you to freely adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any fifteen of thirty-one bands. You can also use 54 different effect types. The CL series consoles feature Premium Rack, which employs VCM technology. This technology models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers six types of processors. In order to use a GEQ, effect, or Premium Rack, you must mount the GEQ, effect, or Premium Rack in each virtual rack, and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. You can mount a GEQ instance in each of the sixteen racks 1–16, an effect rack instance in each of the eight racks 1–8, and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight racks 1–8. Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However if the “31BandGEQ” is mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.) The figure below shows the signal flow for the virtual racks. GEQ RACK IN PATCH GEQ RACK1(GEQ1) METER RACK IN METER RACK OUT 31BandGEQ METER RACK IN A METER RACK IN B GEQ1 IN A(L)/B(R) GEQ2-16 IN A(L)/B(R) Flex15GEQ INSERT IN PATCH (INPUT CH) OMNI IN 1-8 METER RACK OUT A METER RACK OUT B SLOT1 1-16 SLOT2 1-16 SLOT3 1-16 FX1-8 OUT A(L)/B(R) GEQ RACK2-16(GEQ2-16) (same as GEQ RACK1) PR 1-8 OUT A(L)/B(R) CH INSERT IN 1-72{64,48} To CH INSERT IN 72 EFFECT RACK IN PATCH EFFECT RACK1(FX1) METER RACK IN MIX OUT 1-24 INSERT IN PATCH (OUTPUT CH) OMNI IN 1-8 MATRIX OUT 1-8 STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) CH INSERT OUT 1-72{64,48} METER RACK OUT 31BandGEQ METER RACK IN A METER RACK IN B METER RACK OUT A METER RACK OUT B SLOT1 1-16 SLOT2 1-16 SLOT3 1-16 METER RACK IN L METER RACK IN R METER RACK OUT L METER RACK OUT R GEQ1-16 OUT A(L)/B(R) Flex15GEQ EFFECT EFFECT CUE FX1 IN A(L)/B(R) FX2-8 IN A(L)/B(R) PREMIUM RACK IN PATCH EFFECT RACK2-8(FX2-8) (same as EFFECT RACK1) MIX INSERT IN 1-24 24 3 To MIX INSERT IN STEREO INSERT IN L,R,MONO(C) MATRIX INSERT IN 1-8 To STEREO INSERT IN To MATRIX INSERT IN 8 FX1 OUT A(L)/B(R) FX2-8 OUT A(L)/B(R) PREMIUM RACK1(PR1) METER RACK IN L METER RACK IN R METER RACK OUT L METER RACK OUT R PROCESSOR PR1 IN A(L)/B(R) PR2-8 IN A(L)/B(R) EFFECT CUE PREMIUM RACK2-8 (same as PREMIUM RACK1) PR1 OUT A(L)/B(R) PR2-8 OUT A(L)/B(R) NOTE The CL console provides a rack for mounting an I/O device (such as an Rio series), external head amps (Yamaha AD8HR, SB168-ES, etc.) as well as the virtual rack for GEQ, effects and Premium Rack. For details, see “I/O device and external head amp” on page 138. 114 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 2 Rack mount popup button Virtual rack operations Press this button to open the RACK MOUNTER popup window, in which you can select the type of the rack you want to mount. This section explains how to mount a GEQ or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the input and output of the rack as an example. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window. 3 SAFE toggle button Switches Recall Safe on or off for the rack. Racks with Recall Safe on will be excluded from Recall operations. 4 INPUT PATCH button Press this button to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack input. The selected path will appear on the button. 2. In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ 1–8, GEQ 9–16, or EFFECT tab to access the GEQ or EFFECT field. 1 If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear. 1 5 OUTPUT PATCH button Press this button to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack output. The selected path will appear on the button. If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear. NOTE For the CL3/CL1, the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH fields will be shown crossed-out if a channel that does not exist on that model has been specified. 6 Rack container 23 4 6 5 23 4 6 5 Indicates the contents of the rack. This container varies depending on the rack type you selected in the RACK MOUNTER popup window. 1 Rack tabs Selects the type of rack you want to display on the screen. Choose from GEQ 1–8 and GEQ 9–16 (GEQ rack), EFFECT (effect rack), and PREMIUM (Premium Rack). 115 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 3. • If nothing is mounted: To mount a GEQ or effect in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack. The RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear. 1 2 1 2 Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER popup window, in which you can select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. • If 31BandGEQ is mounted: 3 4 5 3 4 5 1 Rack number This area indicates the settings for each band, GEQ on/off status, and input/output level. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT popup window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings. This indicates the number of the selected rack. 2 Virtual rack • If Flex15GEQ is mounted: This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons. 3 MODULE SELECT Use these buttons to select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following function. • BLANK button .......................... Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack; the rack will be empty. • 31BandGEQ button.................. Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack. • Flex15GEQ button.................... Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack. • EFFECT button ......................... Mounts an effect in the rack. This area indicates the settings for each band, the GEQ on/off status, and the input and output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT popup window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B. • If an effect is mounted (EFFECT rack only): This area indicates the effect type, number of inputs and outputs, bypass on/off status, and the input/output level. Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT popup window, in which you can modify the effect settings. NOTE Input/output patching will be defeated if you change the item mounted in a rack. 4 CANCEL button Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window. 7 5 OK button Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER popup window, and closes the window. 7 Link indicator NOTE Indicates that an odd-numbered rack and even-numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ, or A and B of the Flex15GEQ are linked each other. • Be aware that if you remove a GEQ or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the window, all edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ or effect will be discarded. If you have not yet closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by mounting the same GEQ or effect once again. • You can also display the RACK MOUNTER popup window by pressing a vacant rack in the GEQ/ EFFECT field. 116 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 4. 5. Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the item you want to mount, and press the OK button. 2 Channel select buttons To select the input source for a rack, press the INPUT PATCH button for that rack. The CH SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the input source for the rack. Switch the list as necessary, and select the input source channel that you want to patch. When you select an input source in the CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you for confirmation. To confirm the operation, press the OK button. 3 CLOSE button Use these buttons to select the input source channel. Closes the popup window. NOTE In the case of the GEQ, patching it to either an insert-out or insert-in will automatically assign the other patch point to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a GEQ, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off. For more information on insert-in/out, see “Inserting an external device into a channel” on page 21. NOTE • You have the option of making settings so that the confirmation dialog box will not appear (see page 169). • Normally you can specify two channels of input for each rack. However if you have selected 31BandGEQ, only one channel can be used. 6. To select the output source for a rack, press the OUTPUT PATCH button for that rack. The CH SELECT popup window will appear, allowing you to select the output destination for the rack. Switch the list items as necessary, and select the output destination that you want to use. When you select an output destination in the CH SELECT popup window, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the change. To confirm the change, press the OK button. NOTE • You can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear (see page 169). • Normally you will be able to specify two channels of output for a rack, but if the 31BandGEQ is selected only one channel can be used. 2 1 3 1 Category select list 2 Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window. • MIX/MATRIX.................................. MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8 *1, *2 • ST/MONO......................................... STEREO L/R, MONO *1, *2 • INSERT OUT 1–32.......................... CH 1–32 *1 • INSERT OUT 33–64 ....................... CH 33–64 *1 • INSERT OUT 65–72 ....................... CH 65–72 *1 • INSERT OUT MIX/MATRIX ....... MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8 • INSERT OUT ST/MONO .............. STEREO L/R, MONO 1 3 1 Category select list *1. Not displayed for GEQ 1–16 RACK. *2. Not displayed for PREMIUM 3–8 RACK. Displayed only for PREMIUM 1–2 RACK. Selects the category of channel shown in the popup window. • CH 1–32 ...................................... CH 1–32 *1, *2 • CH 33–64.................................... CH 33–64 *1, *2 NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 117 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack • • • • • • CH 65–72.................................... CH 65–72 *1, *2 INSERT IN 1–32 ....................... CH 1–32 *1 INSERT IN 33–64..................... CH 33–64 *1 INSERT IN 65–72..................... CH 65–72 *1 INSERT IN MIX/MATRIX..... MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8 INSERT IN ST/MONO............ STEREO L/R, MONO Graphic EQ operations About the graphic EQ The CL series console enables you to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1–16 and patch it to the insert-out and insert-in of a MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1–8 (FX 1–8) and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of each band can be adjusted using the faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section. The following two types of GEQ are provided. *1. Not displayed for GEQ 1-16 RACK. *2. Not displayed for PREMIUM 3–8 RACK. Displayed only for PREMIUM 1–2 RACK. NOTE • In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. • If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model. ■ 31BandGEQ This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB, and the gain of all thirty-one bands can be adjusted. If a 31BandGEQ is mounted in a rack, one channel of input and output can be used for that rack. 2 Channel select buttons Use these buttons to select the output destination. 3 CLOSE button Closes the popup window. 7. INPUT Rack OUTPUT 31BandGEQ ■ Flex15GEQ This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave OUTPUT INPUT Rack wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB. The Flex15GEQ (A) Flex15GEQ enables you to adjust the gain for any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands of the 31bandGEQ. Flex15GEQ (B) (Once you have used up fifteen bands of adjustment, you will not be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a previously-adjusted band to the flat setting.) A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively) mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input and output. If you mount a Flex15GEQ in each rack, you will be able to use up to 48 GEQ units simultaneously. To switch Recall Safe on/off for each rack, press the SAFE button for that rack. If Recall Safe is turned on for a rack, the contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled. For more information on Recall Safe, “Using the Recall Safe function” on page 88. Be aware that the Recall Safe settings of each rack will not preserve the input/output patching to that rack. Recall Safe settings for patching must be made on the input-source or outputdestination channel. NOTE The type of GEQ, effect, or premium rack mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the input-source and output-destination patch settings are saved as part of the scene. Inserting a GEQ in a channel This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use. 1. Refer to steps 1–6 in the “Virtual rack operations” on page 115 section to mount a GEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination. The rack shown in the GEQ field indicates the approximate GEQ settings and the input and output levels. A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B). NOTE If you are using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ, or mount two 31BandGEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later step. 118 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 2. 3. In the GEQ field or the EFFECT field, press the rack in which you mounted the GEQ. The GEQ popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the GEQ parameters. NOTE The popup windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack. 2 3 4 5 If you are using a stereo source, link the two GEQ units. You will be able to use the GEQ LINK button if you have selected a 31BandGEQ or Flex15GEQ for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. When you turn this button on, the following popup window will appear. To enable linking, press any button other than CANCEL. The popup window contains the following items. 6 1 2 3 4 1 GEQ x➞y button (“x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and alphabetical character A or B) The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked. 2 GEQ y➞x button 1 The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked. 1 Rack select tabs 3 RESET BOTH button Switch among GEQ 1–8, among GEQ 9–16 or among EFFECT1–8. For a rack in which a Flex 15 GEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number). The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked. 4 CANCEL button 2 INPUT PATCH button Cancels the link and closes the popup window. When you link GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status. Opens the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the input source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT PATCH button in the GEQ field. 3 OUTPUT PATCH button Opens the CH SELECT popup window, enabling you to select the output destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT PATCH button in the GEQ field. 4 GEQ LINK button Links adjacent GEQ units. In the case of a 31bandGEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will be linked. In the case of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the same rack will be linked. 4. NOTE Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the GEQ on. After you have turned the GEQ on, adjust the bands of the GEQ. For details on GEQ operations, refer to the following section “Using the 31BandGEQ” on page 120, or “Using the Flex15GEQ” on page 121. NOTE The GEQ LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field. 5 FLAT button Returns all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB. 6 GEQ ON/OFF button Switches the currently-selected GEQ on or off. 119 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack Using the 31BandGEQ The buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups of bands. You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1–8 and [ON] keys to control the 31BandGEQ. 1. 2. Refer to steps 1–6 in the “Virtual rack operations” section on page 115 to mount a 31BandGEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination. The rack in which the 31BandGEQ is mounted will show the approximate settings and input and output levels. In the GEQ field or the EFFECT field, press the rack in which you mounted the 31BandGEQ. The GEQ popup window will appear. In the GEQ popup window you can use the tabs to switch among the racks. 20–100 Eight bands 20.0 Hz–100 Hz 63–315 Eight bands 63.0 Hz–315 Hz 200–1k Eight bands 200 Hz–1.00 kHz 630–3.15k Eight bands 630 Hz–3.15 kHz 2k–10k Eight bands 2.00 kHz–10.0 kHz 4k–20k Eight bands 4.00 kHz–20.0 kHz When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on screen will turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the band. NOTE The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field, it will return to the locked state. 5. 1 Operate the faders in the Centralogic section. The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut. NOTE When a fader in the Centralogic section is set to the center (flat) position, the corresponding [ON] key indicator will turn off. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If you raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band has been modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state. 2 3 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust each band. NOTE If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated. However, if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders. 1 EQ graph Indicates the approximate response of the current 31BandGEQ. 7. 2 Faders Indicate the amount of boost and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ. The actual values are shown in the numerical boxes below. 3 FADER ASSIGN field NOTE When you close the GEQ popup window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off. In this field you can select the group of bands that will be controlled by the Centralogic section’s faders. 3. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on. 4. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control using the Centralogic section’s faders. When you have finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field. The faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section will return to their previous function. 8. If you want to copy the currently-displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window. For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual. NOTE • Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less can be copied to a Flex15GEQ. • GEQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. 120 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack Using the Flex15GEQ When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on the touch screen will turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the band. You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1–8 and [ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ. 1. Refer to steps 1–6 in the “Virtual rack operations” section on page 115 to mount a Flex15GEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination. A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B). NOTE The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field, the faders will return to the locked state. 5. NOTE If you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack. However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit. 2. Operate the faders in the Centralogic section. For each of a Flex15GEQ’s two GEQ units (A and B), a maximum of fifteen bands can be controlled. The AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box in the FADER ASSIGN field indicates the real-time number of additional bands that can be controlled in the current GEQ. If you have used all fifteen bands, you will have to return one of these bands to the flat position before you can operate any other band. Press the rack in which you mounted the Flex15GEQ. The GEQ popup window for GEQ(A) or GEQ(B) will appear. NOTE • The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount. This indicates that the corresponding band has been modified. • To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position, press the corresponding [ON] key in the Centralogic section to make it go dark. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust up to fifteen bands. NOTE If you switch the display to a different screen, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders. 7. This window is the same as that for the 31BandGEQ, except that the AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box indicates the real-time number of additional bands (maximum 15) that can be controlled in the current GEQ. For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number). 3. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on. 4. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control using the Centralogic section’s faders. For details on the bands corresponding to each button in the FADER ASSIGN field, refer to step 4 of “Using the 31BandGEQ” on page 120. When you have finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field. The faders and [ON] keys in the Centralogic section will return to their previous function. NOTE When you close the GEQ popup window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off. 8. If you want to copy the currently-displayed Flex15GEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window. For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual. NOTE GEQ settings can be saved and recalled using the dedicated library. 121 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack About the internal effects ■ STEREO type effects The internal effects of the CL series console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1–8, and patched to an output channel’s output or input channel’s input, or inserted into a channel. For each effect mounted in a rack, you can choose one of 54 types of effect. With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 17–24 are input to racks 1–8, and from the racks are then output to ST IN 1–8 (L/R). INPUT L EFFECT L L RETURN INPUT R EFFECT R R RETURN ■ MIX type effects INPUT L L RETURN EFFECT NOTE INPUT R Some effect types can be mounted only in racks 1, 3, 5 or 7. R RETURN If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. However, please note that this will not apply to COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S, EQUALIZER601, and OPENDECK. To use an internal effect via send and return, assign the output of a MIX channel. to the input of the effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the corresponding output channel is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input channel is used as an effect return channel. INPUT L or R L RETURN EFFECT R RETURN Rack 1 EFFECT Using an internal effect via send and return This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel, so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration. EFFECT Rack 7 INPUT PATCH Output of the output channel OUTPUT PATCH Rack 2 NOTE Input of the input channel • If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type. This will allow you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel. • If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it can be convenient to assign the send destination MIX bus to stereo. (For details on bus assignments, see “Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses” on page 202.) EFFECT Rack 8 EFFECT 1. Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired channel (except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel. Insert-out of a desired channel* EFFECT Follow steps 1–3 described in “Virtual rack operations” on page 115, to mount an effect in a rack. The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect, the number of inputs and outputs, and the levels before and following the effect. Insert-in of a desired channel* * Excluding a ST IN channel The internal effects are categorized into two groups: “STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process the L/R channel input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the two channels before processing them. If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected, as follows. 122 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 2. 3. 2 OUTPUT PATCH buttons Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select a MIX channel as the input source for the rack. For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “Virtual rack operations” on page 115. The output of the MIX channel you are using as the effect send is now assigned to the L input of the effect. If you are using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channel to the L/R inputs of the rack. Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field. 3 Input/output meters Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect. 4 MIX BAL. knob This knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. If you press this knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the L input of the desired ST IN channel as the output-destination for the rack. For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “Virtual rack operations” on page 115. The L input of the ST IN channel used as the effect return channel is now assigned to the L output of the effect. If you are using the output of the effect in stereo, assign the R input of the same ST IN channel to the R output of the rack in the same way. 5. NOTE NOTE For more information on setting the effect parameters, see “Editing the internal effect parameters” on page 125. You can select more than one output destination for the effect. 4. As necessary, use the multifunction knob to adjust the MIX BAL. knob. Adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. This parameter is provided for all effect types. If you are using the effect via send and return, set this to 100% (effect sound only). 6. Press the rack in which you mounted the effect. The EFFECT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the effect parameters. 2 To adjust the effect send level of an input channel, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the input channel you want to control. 3 1 4 1 INPUT PATCH buttons Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ field. 123 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 7. Use the MIX1-16, MIX17-24 and MATRIX keys of the SELECTED CHANNEL section (top panel) so that the SEND field shows the MIX bus that is patched as the effect send. You can also use the MIX1-16, MIX17-24 and MATRIX buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to switch the displayed bus. 2. Press the L side of the INPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-out of a channel as the input-source. For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “Virtual rack operations” on page 115. Insert-out is now assigned to the L input of the effect. 8. Press the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob that corresponds to the desired MIX bus, and turn the multifunction knob to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to the MIX bus. In this state you can adjust the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to the internal effect. Adjust the send level of other input channels in the same way. If you press the selected knob once again, the MIX SEND popup window (8ch) for the senddestination MIX bus will appear. This popup window contains on/off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the corresponding bus, and lets you select the send point (PRE or POST) (see page 41). 3. Press the L side of the OUTPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-in of the same channel as the output-destination. For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “Virtual rack operations” on page 115. Insert-in is now assigned to the L output of the effect. If you are inserting an effect into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out/insert-in to the R input and output. 4. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel into which you inserted the effect. 5. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window. Make sure that the rack you inserted into the input and output ports is selected. For more information on insert-out/in, see “Inserting an external device into a channel” on page 21. To adjust the master level of the effect send, call up the MIX channel you specified as the input-source of the rack in step 2 to the Centralogic section, and adjust the corresponding fader. Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload point. 6. Turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the effect. If it is off, press the button to turn it on. In this state, effect insertion is enabled for the corresponding channel. NOTE 7. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window, and use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field. 8. Press the effect rack that you inserted into the channel. The EFFECT popup window will appear. In this popup window you can edit the effect parameters. 9. Select the effect type and edit the effect parameters. For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters.” NOTE At this time, you make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected in step 3 to the corresponding MIX bus is set to –∞ dB. If you raise this send level, the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect, possibly causing oscillation. 9. The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input/output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT popup window. 10. To adjust the effect return level, operate the ST IN channel that you selected as the output-destination for the rack in step 3. Inserting an internal effect into a channel This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel). 1. NOTE • The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT popup window. • Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect. Follow steps 1–3 described in “Virtual rack operations” on page 115, to mount an effect in a rack. The rack in which an effect is mounted will indicate the effect type used by that effect, the number of inputs and outputs, and the levels before and after the effect. 10. 124 Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step 3, adjust the level as appropriate. Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 1 INPUT PATCH buttons Editing the internal effect parameters Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window. This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters. 1. 2 OUTPUT PATCH buttons Follow steps 1–3 described in “Virtual rack operations” on page 115, to mount an effect in a rack. A rack in which an effect is mounted will show the following information. 1 Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window. 3 Effect type field Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown. Press this field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window, in which you can select the effect type. 2 4 EFFECT CUE button Enables you to cue-monitor the output of the currently-displayed effect. This Cue function is valid only while this screen is displayed. The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch to a different screen. 1 Effect title/type This area indicates the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input/output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown. 5 Special parameter field 2 Input/output meters Indicates special parameters that are specific to some effect types. Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect. 2. 6 BYPASS button Temporarily bypasses the effect. Press the rack in which the effect you want to edit is mounted. The EFFECT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the effect parameters. In the EFFECT popup window you can use the tabs to switch among the eight racks (EFFECT 1 – EFFECT 8). 3 42 7 Input/output meters Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect. 8 Effect parameter field 5 This area indicates parameters for the currently-selected effect type. When you press a knob in this field, you will be able to use the multifunction knobs to control the corresponding horizontal row of knobs. You can also make fine adjustments by rotating a knob while pressing and holding it down. 6 9 Rack select tabs 7 Use these tabs to switch among EFFECT 1–8. 1 8 9 125 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 3. ■ TEMPO This field appears if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is selected. To change the effect type, press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window. Press a new effect type to select it. 1 MIDI CLK button If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input from the MIDI port. 1 ■ PLAY/REC This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type. 1 PLAY button/REC button Enable you to record (sample) and play back when using the freeze effect. For detailed operations, see “Using the Freeze effect” on page 129. ■ SOLO This field appears if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is selected as the effect type. 2 Allow only the selected frequency band to pass (multiple selections are allowed). • You can also change the effect type by recalling a library setting. • Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and “FREEZE” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. Also, even if you copy these two effect types, you will not be able to paste them to rack 2, 4, 6, or 8. 2 Gain reduction meters Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band. To edit the effect parameters, press a knob in the effect parameter field to select it, and turn the corresponding multifunction knob. ■ Gain reduction meter This field appears if Comp276/276S or Comp260/260S is selected as the effect type. NOTE For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the Appendices (see page 233). 5. 1 1 HIGH/MID/LOW buttons NOTE 4. 1 Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary. For some effect types, parameters such as the following will appear in the special parameter field. 1 1 Gain reduction meters Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor. 126 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack ■ Type This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect type. 1 DRIVE button/CLEAN button Using the Tap Tempo function “Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. To use the Tap function, you must first assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key, and then operate that USER DEFINED key. 1 Select one of two equalizer types that feature different effects. 2 DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog circuits, creating a driven sound that enhances analog characteristics by adding some distortion. CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits, creating a clear non-distorted sound that is inherently digital. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. 2 FLAT button This button resets the gain of all bands to 0dB. 6. If you want to monitor the output signal of the currently-displayed effect, press the EFFECT CUE button to turn it on. NOTE If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE, all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be monitored. However, only the output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated.) 7. If you want to bypass the currently-displayed effect, press the BYPASS button to turn it on. 8. If you want to copy the currently-displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack, or to initialize the settings, you can do so using the tool buttons at the top of the popup window. For details on how to use these buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual. NOTE Effect settings can be stored and recalled using the effect library. 127 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window. 3. 4. Press the popup button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function. The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP popup window will appear. 5. Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and press the OK button. Use the / buttons or multifunction knobs to select an item in each column. Press the OK button. The Tap Tempo function will be assigned to the USER DEFINED key that you selected in step 4. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page. The USER DEFINED KEYS page enables you to assign functions to USER DEFINED keys [1]– [16]. NOTE • If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently-displayed effect (rack). • If you specify “RACK x” (x=1–8) in the PARAMETER 1 column, you will be able to use the Tap Tempo function only for a specific effect (rack). • For more information on USER DEFINED keys, see “USER DEFINED keys” on page 169. 128 6. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window, and then use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field. 7. Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted. The EFFECT popup window will appear. Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 8. Using the Freeze effect Press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window, and select an effect type that includes the BPM parameter. The BPM parameter is included in delay-type and modulation-type effects, and can be used to specify the delay time or modulation speed. This section explains how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations on screen to record (sample) and play back a sound. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window, and then use the EFFECT tab to display the EFFECT field. 2. Mount an effect in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. NOTE For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the Appendices (see page 233). NOTE Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. 9. Set the SYNC parameter to ON. 10. At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you assigned the Tap Tempo function. The average interval (BPM) at which you press the key will be calculated, and that value will be applied to the BPM parameter. 3. Press the rack in which the effect you want to control is mounted. The EFFECT popup window will appear. 4. Press the effect type field to open the EFFECT TYPE popup window, and select “FREEZE.” If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar will appear in the special parameter field. The average interval will be input to the parameter. (the average of a, b, and c) a b c 1 3 2 1 PLAY button First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap 2 REC button 3 Progress bar NOTE NOTE • If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it will be ignored. • If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will change in relation to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port. As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also recall the “FREEZE” effect type from the effect library. 129 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 5. Using the Premium Rack To begin recording (sampling), press the REC button and then press the PLAY button. The signal being input to the effect will be recorded. The bar reflects the current recording progress. When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off. The procedure to set up the I/O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack. (see page 122) For the premium rack, only racks 1–2 can be used via send/return. Racks 3–8 are only for patching as inserts. (Refer to steps 5 and 6 of “Virtual rack operations” on page 115.) NOTE You can adjust the parameters in the window to make detailed settings for recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For details on the parameters, refer to the Appendices (see page 242). 6. To play back the recorded sample, press the PLAY button. NOTE 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window. 2. In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the PREMIUM tab to display the PREMIUM RACK field. The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample, change the effect, or turn off the power to the CL unit. Using the Premium Rack About the Premium Rack The CL series console features processors that faithfully emulate meticulously-selected vintage analog processors, and a newly-developed Premium Rack, as well as graphic EQs and built-in effects. The Premium Rack employs VCM technology, which models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce and fine-tune amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers six types of processors. Name Outline Portico 5033 Models RND’s analog 5-band EQ. Portico 5043 Models RND’s analog compressor/limiter. U76 Models a typical vintage compressor/limiter. Opt–2A Models a classic vacuum tube (optical type) compressor. EQ–1A Models a classic vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ. Dynamic EQ Newly-developed EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to control the cut/boost amount in relation to the input level. 130 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 3. 4. To mount a Premium Rack in the rack, press the RACK MOUNT button for that rack. The PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER popup window will appear. Use the MODULE SELECT buttons to select the type you want to mount, and press the OK button. There are two ways to mount each processor: • DUAL ..........................The processor is used on two mono channels. • STEREO......................The processor is used on one stereo channel. 5. Press the L side or the A side of the INPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-out of a channel as the input-source. For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 5 of “Virtual rack operations” on page 115. Insert-out is now assigned to the L input of the processor. 6. Press the L side or the A side of the OUTPUT PATCH button to open the CH SELECT popup window, and select the insert-in of the same channel as the outputdestination. For details on the CH SELECT popup window, refer to step 6 of “Virtual rack operations” on page 115. Insert-in is now assigned to the L output of the processor. If you are inserting a processor into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out and insert-in to the R input and output of the processor. 7. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel into which you want to insert the processor. 8. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window. Make sure that the rack you inserted in the input and output ports is selected. For details on Insert Out/In, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” on page 21. 9. Turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the processor. If it is off, press the button to turn it on. In this state, processor insertion is enabled for the corresponding channel. 10. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button to access the VIRTUAL RACK window, and use the PREMIUM tab to display the PREMIUM RACK field. 11. Press the processor rack that you inserted into the channel to open the Premium Rack popup window. In this popup window you can edit the processor parameters. The DUAL button and STEREO button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by the Premium Rack processor. The U76 occupies two rack spaces. Other processors occupy one rack space. If you mount a twospace Premium Rack processor in the rack, you will be unable to mount any more processors below those rack spaces. Also, you cannot mount a two-space processor in an even-numbered rack. 131 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 12. ■ Portico 5033 Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates a 5-band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve Designs (RND). 5033EQ features a unique tone control response. It inherited the history of the “1073,” which was praised as one of the greatest devices developed by Mr. Rupert Neve. Yamaha’s VCM technology has modeled the EQ to the last detail, including the input/output transformer that was designed by Mr. Rupert Neve himself. As a result, this processor model produces musically high-quality sound even when bypassed. Its response features unique effects. For example, if the Lo setting is cut, the low range becomes tight, and if the Hi setting is raised, the desired range will be boosted without hurting your ears. Adjust the parameters. For details on editing the parameters, refer to the next section “Editing the Premium Rack parameters.” NOTE Adjust the digital gain and the processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the processor. 13. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step 6, adjust the level as appropriate. Editing the Premium Rack parameters Each Premium Rack window includes the following items: 1 2 3 8 5 3 1 2 7 4 4 1 ASSIST button 6 1 ALL BYPASS button Press this button to open a window in which you can assign the parameters to the multifunction knobs for control. Switches EQ bypass on or off. Even when EQ bypass is on, the signal will pass through the input/ output transformer and amp circuits. 2 LIBRARY button 2 TRIM knob Press the button to open the Library popup window for Premium Rack. (For each module type) Adjusts the input gain of the effect. 3 DEFAULT button 3 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Frequency knobs Restores the default parameter setting. Adjust the frequency for each band. 4 Multifunction knob access field 4 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Gain knobs Indicates the name and value of the parameters that are assigned to the multifunction knobs. To switch the parameter to control, press the knob in the window. Adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band. 5 LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs NOTE Adjust the Q (steepness) of each band. The higher the Q value, the narrower the range in which you can control the gain for the band. • If the ASSIST button is on, you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently available for editing, and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them. • You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. 132 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 6 LMF/MF/HMF IN button 3 FB button Turn LMF/MF/HMF EQ on or off respectively. Switches the gain reduction method between FF (Feed-Forward) circuit and FB (Feed-Back) circuit. The button will light when FB circuit is selected. The FF circuit is used in most contemporary compressors. This type is useful when you want to apply compression thoroughly while maintaining a consistent tonal color. The FB circuit is used in vintage compressors. This type is suitable when you want to apply a smooth compression while adding a tonal color that is characteristic to the device. 7 LF/HF IN button Turn LF and HF EQ on or off simultaneously. 8 Graph Indicates the graphical EQ response. 4 GAIN REDUCTION meter ■ Portico 5043 Portico 5043, like Portico 5033, is a processor that emulates RND’s analog compressor.The actual 5043 Compressor is equipped with the same input/output transformer as that of the 5033 EQ, delivering a natural, analog-like tonality and effect. It enables you to obtain a range of results from hard compression to natural sound, and is suitable for a broad range of audio sources ranging from drums to vocals. The most notable feature of this model is that you can switch the gain reduction type. You can choose either an FF (Feed-Forward) circuit type (which is the current mainstream), or an FB (FeedBack) circuit which was typically used in vintage compressors. This allows you to create sounds with various characteristics as appropriate for your applications. 1 2 3 Indicates the amount of gain reduction. 5 THRESHOLD knob Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied. 6 RATIO knob Adjusts the compression ratio. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to switch to the limiter. 7 ATTACK knob Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. 4 8 RELEASE knob Adjusts the compressor’s release time. 9 GAIN knob Adjusts the output gain. 5 6 7 8 9 1 IN button Turns the compressor’s bypass on or off. When the compressor is bypassed, the button indicator will turn off. However, even if the compressor is bypassed, the signal will pass through the input/ output transformer and amp circuits. 2 INPUT meter Indicates the input signal level. One meter appears in DUAL mode, and two meters appear in STEREO mode. 133 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack ■ U76 U76 is a processor that emulates a popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of situations. This processor does not provide the threshold parameter that is found on conventional compressors. Instead, the intensity of compression is determined by the balance between the input gain and the output gain. The “All mode” setting for the RATIO parameter allows you to create a heavily-compressed sound that is typical of this model. It produces an aggressive tonal character with a rich addition of overtones. 1 6 OUTPUT knob Adjusts the output level. If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT level, the level of audible volume will also change. In this case, use the OUTPUT knob to adjust the volume level. ■ Opt–2A Opt–2A is a processor that emulates a popular vintage model of tube opto compressors. It features smooth compression produced using optical components such as a photocell and a light source to control the level. It also features beautiful high-range overtones created by the warm distortion typical of tube circuits, resulting in elegant and sophisticated sounds. 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 INPUT knob Adjusts the input level. As the input level gets higher, more compression is applied. 2 3 4 1 GAIN knob 2 ATTACK knob Adjusts the output level. Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest attack time. 2 PEAK REDUCTION knob 3 RELEASE knob Adjusts the compression amount of the signal. Adjusts the compressor’s release time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest release time. 3 RATIO knob Adjusts the compression ratio. 4 RATIO switch buttons 4 METER SELECT knob Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio. A button with the higher number will raise the compression ratio more. Pressing the ALL button selects All mode, in which the RATIO will become high, and sharp compression with a faster release time will be applied, creating substantially-distorted aggressive sound. Switches the meter display. GAIN REDUCTION indicates the amount of gain reduction when the compressor is operating. With –18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, the OUTPUT +10 and OUTPUT +4 settings respectively will cause the value +10 dB or +4 dB from this reference level to be shown as “0VU” on the meter. 5 METER switch buttons Switch the meter display. • GR.....................Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor. • +4/+8 ................Each meter uses –18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, and indicates “0VU” for the value of the reference level added by +4 dB or +8 dB. • OFF...................Turns off the meter display. 134 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack ■ EQ–1A EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a famous passive-type vintage EQ. It features a unique style of operation, allowing you to individually boost and attenuate (cut) each of two frequency ranges (high and low). The frequency response is utterly unlike that of a conventional EQ, and is a uniquely distinctive characteristic of this model. The input/output circuits and vacuum tubes produce a tonal character that is highly musical and well-balanced. 3 4 5 7 8 7 (HIGH) BOOST knob Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH FREQUENCY knob. 8 (HIGH) ATTEN knob Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN SEL knob. 9 (HIGH) ATTEN SEL knob 9 Switches the frequency region attenuated by the ATTEN knob. ■ Dynamic EQ Dynamic EQ is a newly-developed equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of equalizer. The sidechain has a filter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ. This allows you to apply EQ in the same way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a specific frequency region, causing the EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific frequency region of the input signal becomes too high or too low. For example you could use this on a vocal sound as a de-esser, so that EQ is applied to a specific frequency band only when sibilance or high-frequency consonants reach an unpleasant level, thus preserving a natural sound that does not impair the original tonal character. Two full-band Dynamic EQs are provided, enabling you to process a wide range of audio sources. 1 2 6 1 IN switch C Turns the processor on or off. When the switch is off, the signal will bypass the filter section, but pass through the input/output transformer and amp circuits. 1 3 4 2 LOW FREQUENCY knob Sets the frequency of the low range filter. 3 (LOW) BOOST knob 6 Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW FREQUENCY knob. 5 9 4 (LOW) ATTEN knob Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW FREQUENCY knob. 0 5 BAND WIDTH knob 28 Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter. As you rotate the knob toward the right (Broad), the band will become wider and the peak level will decrease. This affects only the response of the boost. A 7B 1 BAND ON/OFF button Turns each band on or off. 6 HIGH FREQUENCY knob Sets the frequency of the high range filter. This affects only the response of the boost. 135 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack 2 SIDECHAIN CUE button B THRESHOLD meter Press this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus. At this time, the graph indicates the filter response for the sidechain. Indicates the sidechain signal level in relation to the threshold level. C Graph area 3 SIDECHAIN LISTEN button Displays the equalizer response. In most cases, this area displays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and intensity, and the dynamic EQ graph that indicates the dynamically-changing EQ responses. Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal (linked to the dynamics) to the bus (such as a STEREO bus or MIX/MATRIX bus) to which the insert channel signal is sent. At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters. 4 FILTER TYPE buttons Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters. Main bus EQ and sidechain filter will link as follows: Dynamic EQ graph FILTER TYPE Reference EQ graph (Bell) (Hi Shelf) Low Shelf Bell Hi Shelf LPF BPF HPF (Low Shelf) Main EQ Sidechain filter If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDECHAIN LISTEN is on, this area displays the sidechain filter response. 5 FREQUENCY knob Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter. 6 Q knob Sets the Q value (steepness) of the equalizer and sidechain filter. As you rotate this knob clockwise, the frequency range to which the equalizer or sidechain filter is applied will become wider. Sidechain filter graph 7 THRESHOLD knob Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking an effect. 8 RATIO knob Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal. Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost, and counter-clockwise for cut. Fully rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect. 9 ATTACK/RELEASE buttons Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack/release time for compression or boost. Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release. Select SLOW for a faster attack and slower release. Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack/release time depending on the frequency ranges. 0 MODE buttons Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the threshold value (ABOVE), or when the level does not reach the threshold value (BELOW). A EQ GAIN meter Indicates the dynamically-changing EQ gain. 136 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, effects, and Premium Rack ■ Premium Rack library For the premium rack, there are six library items for each module type. You’ll use the library of each module type to store and recall Premium Rack settings. The libraries are numbered 000–100, and 000 is read-only data for initialization. All library items other than #000 can be freely read and written. To recall an item from the Premium Rack library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the popup window for the corresponding Premium Rack. Using the graphic EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries ■ GEQ library Use the “GEQ library” to store and recall GEQ settings. All GEQ units used in the CL series console can reference this GEQ library. Although are two types, 31BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ, you are free to recall items between differing types. However, only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands can be recalled to a Flex15GEQ. 200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is read-only data for initialization, and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written. To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the GEQ popup window. NOTE • Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units. For one rack, you can store and recall two Flex15GEQ units independently as A and B. • To access the GEQ popup window, press the rack in the GEQ field. ■ Effect library Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the effect library. Numbers 001–027 are read-only presets, and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written. To recall an item from the effect library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the EFFECT popup window. NOTE If you recall an effect whose effect type is COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S, EQUALIZER610, OPENDECK, M.BAND DYNA., or M.BAND COMP, the other effects may be momentarily muted in some cases. 137 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp 3. I/O device and external head amp This chapter explains how to use an I/O device or an external head amp that is connected to the CL series console. Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For details, refer to “Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network” on page 217. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the DANTE PATCH tab to access the DANTE PATCH field. The DANTE PATCH field includes the following items. 2 Using an I/O device 3 CL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I/O device (such as an Rio series product) connected to the Dante connector. For details on connecting the CL series console to an I/O device, refer to the “Connecting to I/O devices” section in the separate Owner’s Manual. 1 I/O device patching 4 Here’s how an I/O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante audio network. 1. Connect the CL series console to an I/O device. For details, refer to the “Connecting to I/O devices” and “Quick Guide” sections in the separate Owner’s Manual. 2. In the function access area, press the I/O DEVICE button to access the I/O DEVICE screen. 1 I/O device list This shows the ID number and model name of the I/O devices. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window, where you can specify patching from the console’s output ports to the I/O devices. 2 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for the audio network. 3 DANTE INPUT PATCH button Press this button to open the DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window, in which you can select any of 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the console. 4 OUTPUT PORT SETUP button Press this button to access the PATCH VIEW 1 tab of the OUTPUT PORT popup window, where you can choose the 64 channels that will be output from the console’s output ports to I/O devices. 4. 138 To specify the 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the console, press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button. The DANTE INPUT PATCH popup window will appear. This popup window includes the following items. Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp 1 NOTE 2 • If you’ve connected a device other than an I/O device supported by the CL series, the upper line of the button will show the first four letters of the Device Label, a dash “-”, and the channel number (decimal). • If no Dante Audio Channel Label has been specified, the lower row will indicate nothing. • You can set the Dante Audio Channel Label using Audinate’s “Dante Controller” software. For the latest information, refer to the Yamaha pro audio website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ 3 5. Press the AUTO SETUP button. A confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to confirm the input patching from the I/O devices to the console; press OK, and the patching will be performed automatically. 6. If you want to edit the patching individually, press the port select button. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear. 1 LIBRARY button Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library. You can store ten sets of settings in the library. NOTE 2 • If you recall data whose I/O device registration state differs from the current state, patching to devices not registered in the I/O device list will be kept in its current state, and will not be recalled. • Similarly, if the UNIT ID is different than when the data was stored, the settings will not be recalled; the current state will be maintained. 2 AUTO SETUP button The current I/O device connection status will be ascertained, and input patching to the console will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are registered in the I/O device list. When you press this button, a confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to confirm the execution of auto patching. Press the OK button to execute auto patching. Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen. 1 3 1 Category select list Enables you to select the I/O device containing the input port that you want to assign. 2 Port select buttons 3 Port select buttons Select the input port. Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window. The Dante Device ID number (hexadecimal) and channel number (decimal) are shown in the upper row on the button. The first eight characters of the channel label (Dante Audio Channel Label) for each port are shown in the lower row on the button. If no patch has been assigned, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will indicate nothing. 3 CLOSE button Completes the settings and closes the popup window. 139 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp 7. 2 Port select buttons To assign the output ports of the I/O device, select and press the I/O device in the DANTE PATCH field of the I/O device screen to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window. The OUTPUT PATCH popup window will appear. Select the Dante port (DANTE 1–64) to which the signal you want to output is assigned. 3 CLOSE button Completes the settings and closes the popup window. 9. In the same way, specify the channels that you want to output to other OUTPUT ports. Remotely controlling an Rio unit 1 Here’s how to remotely control an Rio unit that’s connected to the Dante connector. 1. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the Rio tab to access the Rio field. The Rio field includes the following items. 1 2 1 Port select buttons 3 Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window. 8. If you want to change the patching, press the port select button. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear. 2 1 Display switch buttons 1 Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold down the button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink. 3 2 ID/model name indication This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device. 1 Category select list Select the Dante port to which the signal you want to output is assigned. 140 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp 2. 3 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for the audio network. ■ HA display This shows the HA settings of the I/O device. Press this area to open the I/O DEVICE HA popup window, in which you can make detailed head amp settings. To remotely control the head amp of an I/O device, press the I/O device in the HA display. The I/O DEVICE HA popup window will appear. In this window, you can remotely control the head amp on the I/O device from the CL series console by using the on-screen knobs and buttons or the multifunction knobs on the top panel. 7 6 1 5 2 4 3 7 4 4 Analog gain knob Indicates the analog gain setting. This item is only for display, and cannot be edited. 5 5 +48V indicator Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on/off status for each port. 6 6 OVER indicator 1 +48V MASTER Warns you when the input signal is clipping. Indicates the on/off status of the I/O device’s master phantom power. (Switching this on or off is performed on the I/O device itself.) 7 HPF indicator Indicates the high pass filter on or off status for each port. 2 +48V button ■ INPUT display This shows the input settings of the I/O device. Switch phantom power on or off for each channel. 3 GAIN knob Indicates the gain of the head amp on the I/O device. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1–8. The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob shows the input level of the corresponding port. 4 GC button Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal level on the audio network. If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. ■ OUTPUT display This shows the output settings of the I/O device. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH popup window, where you can make output port settings for the I/O device. 5 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the head amp of the I/O unit, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob. 6 Displayed port switch tabs These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the I/O DEVICE HA popup window. 7 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button If you press the [SEL] key of an output channel, the corresponding port will light. Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously. 141 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp 3. To remotely control the I/O device’s head amp from an input channel of the CL series console, use the bank select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for which you want to control the head amp. 6. If you press a rack in which an output I/O device is mounted, the OUTPUT PATCH popup window will appear. GAIN/PATCH field If you need to make output port settings, make these settings as described in step 7 and following of the I/O device patching procedure (see page 140). 4. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel for which you want to adjust the I/O device’s head amp. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear. 5. When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol to close the popup window. 142 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp 2. Remotely controlling an amp Press a displayed I/O device to open the OUTPUT PATCH popup window. Here’s how to remotely control an amp that’s connected to the Dante connector. 1 2 3 If you need to make output port settings, make these settings as described in step 7 and following of the I/O device patching procedure (see page 140). 1. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the AMP tab to access the AMP field. The AMP field includes the following items. 1 Display switch buttons Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. 2 ID/model name indication This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device. 3 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window, in which you can make settings for the audio network. 143 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp Using an external head amp CL5 Audio signal If an I/O card (such as an MY16-ES64 card) supports the remote protocol of an external head amp in the CL’s slot, you will be able to remotely control from the CL console some parameters of the external head amp (Yamaha SB168-ES or AD8HR), such as phantom power (+48V) on/off status, gain, and HPF. For details on the I/O card settings, refer to the owner’s manual for the I/O card. Remote signal Connecting the CL series console to an AD8HR To remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64 EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the CL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL unit to the NAI48-ES. Then, connect the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48-ES to the HA REMOTE 1 connector on the AD8HR using an RS422 D-sub 9-pin cable. This connection enables you to remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console. To transmit audio signals (input to the AD8HR) to the CL series console, connect the DIGITAL OUT A (or B) connector on the AD8HR to the AES/EBU connector on the NAI48-ES using a D-sub 25-pin AES/EBU cable. Signals will be sent or received between the NAI48-ES and the CL series console via the MY16-ES64 card. Alternatively, you can use a “daisy chain” connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units simultaneously. To do this, connect the AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 1 connector. If you use the NAI48-ES, you can connect up to six AD8HR units. In this case, to input AD8HR’s audio signals into the CL series console, install two MY16-EX cards on the CL unit since each slot on the CL unit accepts up to 16 channel signals. Then, use an Ethernet cable to make connections to the MY16-ES64. MY16EX MY16EX MY16ES64 NAI48-ES HA REMOTE connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector AD8HR 1 HA REMOTE 2 connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector AD8HR 2 HA REMOTE 2 connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector AD8HR 3 HA REMOTE 2 connector Up to six units 144 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp ■ Ring connection Connecting the CL series console to an SB168-ES CL5 To remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64 EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the CL, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL to the SB168-ES. This connection enables you to remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console. Alternatively, you can use a daisy chain or ring connection and install two MY16-EX expansion cards in the slots on the CL unit to remotely control up to three SB168-ES units simultaneously. Audio signal Remote signal NOTE Remote control data will be received and transmitted only at Slot 1 on the CL series console. ■ Daisy chain connection CL5 MY16ES64 Audio signal MY16EX MY16EX Remote signal OUT IN SB168-ES MY16ES64 MY16EX MY16EX OUT IN SB168-ES OUT OUT IN IN SB168-ES SB168-ES OUT OUT IN NOTE SB168-ES Please refer to the SB168-ES Owner’s Manual for information on setting up the MY16-ES64/ MY16-EX cards and EtherSound network. OUT IN SB168-ES 145 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp Remotely controlling an external head amp The EXTERNAL HA field includes the following items. 5 You can remotely control from the CL series console an external head amp (“external HA”) connected via MY16-ES64 or NAI48-ES. 1. Connect the CL series console to an external HA. For details, refer to the “Using an external head amp” on page 144 section and the owner’s manual of your external HA. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the I/O DEVICE button to access the I/O DEVICE window. 6 1 2 3 4 1 EXTERNAL HA field 3. Indicates the state of the connected external HA. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE window, press the EXTERNAL HA tab to display the EXTERNAL HA field. 2 ID/Model name/+48V master Displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is automatically assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to six. This field also enables you to view the on/off status of the master phantom power. 3 Virtual racks This section accommodates up to six racks in which remotely-controllable external HA units can be mounted. If an external HA is mounted, this field will indicate the HA settings (GAIN setting, and on/off status of the phantom power and HPF). Press a rack to open the EXTERNAL HA popup window. 4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button Press this button to open the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can specify the input ports to which the external HA mounted in the rack will be connected. 5 VIEW switch buttons Switch the virtual rack display between SB168-ES and AD8HR. Select the view according to the connected device. 146 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp 6 COMM PORT switch buttons Specifies whether the external HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely. Select “SLOT1” if you want to remotely control the external HA. 4. 5. 1 2 Press the “SLOT1” COMM PORT switch button. The external HA units that can be controlled will appear in the virtual rack. 3 To specify the input ports for an external HA, press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup button for that rack. The EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT popup window will appear. The popup window includes the following items. 4 5 1 1 +48V MASTER If an external HA is connected, the on/off status of the master phantom power is shown here. (Switching this on or off is performed on the external HA itself.) 2 +48V button Switches phantom power on or off for each channel. 3 GAIN knob Indicates the gain level of the external HA. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1–8. The level meter located immediately to the right of the knob shows the input level of the corresponding port. 4 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the external HA, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob. 5 Rack select tabs Enable you to select the rack displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window. 1 PORT SELECT buttons Specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected. 6. NOTE • If you connect an additional AD8HR, the setting for this AD8HR will be used. These knobs and buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA popup window even if an AD8HR is not connected, allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected. • Error messages related to the SB168-ES will not be displayed. In addition, you will be unable to set the EtherSound parameters. Use the AVS-ESMonitor software application for these functions. Use the PORT SELECT buttons to specify the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the popup window. NOTE If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the CL series console, you must specify an appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected correctly when you patch input ports to input channels. 7. To remotely control an external HA, press the rack in which the external HA you want to control is mounted. The EXTERNAL HA popup window will appear. Here you can remotely control the external HA by using the on-screen knobs and buttons on the CL series console or the knobs on the top panel. 147 Reference Manual I/O device and external head amp 8. To remotely control the external HA from an input channel of the CL series console, use the Bank Select keys to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel on which you want to control the HA. GAIN/PATCH field 9. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel on which you want to control the external HA. The GAIN/PATCH popup window will appear. 10. Press the PATCH button, and select the input port assigned to the external HA. With these settings, you will be able to use the external HA in the same way as the head amp on the I/O device or the CL unit. For details about the GAIN/PATCH popup window, refer to “Making HA (Head Amp) settings” on page 30. 148 Reference Manual MIDI MIDI Basic MIDI settings You can select the type of MIDI messages the CL series console will transmit and receive, the MIDI port that will be used, and the MIDI channel. This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the CL series console to control the CL console’s parameters, and how to send out MIDI messages from the CL console as you operate the unit. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI popup window. This window includes several pages, which you can switch among using the tabs located at the bottom of the window. MIDI functionality on the CL series console The CL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations: ■ Program Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the CL series console, a Program Change message (a number that is assigned to the event) can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device. ■ Control Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event (fader, knob, or key operation) on the CL series console, the corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play them back later. ■ Parameter Change (SysEx) transmission and reception When specific events (fader, knob, or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are executed, “Parameter Change” SysEx (system exclusive) messages can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Parameter Changes are received from an external device. Using this capability, CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external device. In addition, changes in system and user settings can be received and executed by another CL console. NOTE You can select the port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages from the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors or an I/O card installed in a slot 1. All of the functionality described in this section will be available on the port you select. 149 Reference Manual MIDI 3. Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page. In the MIDI SETUP page you can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received, and choose the port that will be used. This page includes the following items. • OMNI ......................... If this button is on, Program Changes on all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received in Single mode. Multi mode transmission/ reception and Single mode transmission are disabled. • BANK ......................... If this button is on, Bank Select messages can be transmitted and received in Single mode. (Bank Select messages switch the group of Program Change messages to be used.) 4 CONTROL CHANGE field Enables you to switch MIDI Control Change message transmission and reception on or off. • Tx ................................ Switches Control Change transmission on or off. • Rx ................................ Switches Control Change reception on or off. • ECHO ......................... Switches on or off echo output of Control Change messages (If this function is on, Control Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.). 1 2 3 4 5 5 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field 6 Enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. • NRPN ......................... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN mode). • TABLE button........... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/received as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel (TABLE mode). 7 6 PARAMETER CHANGE field Enables you to turn SysEx (system exclusive) messages on or off. (These special messages are used to change the CL parameters.) • Tx ................................ Switches Parameter Change transmission on or off. • Rx ................................ Switches Parameter Change reception on or off. • ECHO ......................... Switches on or off echo output of Parameter Change messages (If this function is on, Parameter Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.). 1 PORT/CH field Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. • Tx PORT/Tx CH.......Press these buttons to open popup windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit MIDI messages. • Rx PORT/Rx CH.......Press these button to open popup windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to receive MIDI messages. 7 OTHER COMMAND field 2 PROGRAM CHANGE field Switches on or off echo output of other messages (If this function is on, other messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.). Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or off. • Tx .................................Switches Program Change transmission on or off. • Rx.................................Switches Program Change reception on or off. • ECHO..........................Switches on or off echo output of Program Change messages (If this function is on, Program Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.). 3 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. • SINGLE.......................If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode). • MULTI ........................If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode). 150 Reference Manual MIDI 4. 6. To specify the port that will be used to transmit or receive each type of MIDI message, press the transmit (Tx) or receive (Rx) port select popup button. The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the port will appear. Operations in this window are the same for both transmission (Tx) and reception (Rx). This window includes the following items. 1 1 2 1 CH field 1 TERMINAL field Enables you to select CH1–CH16 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI messages. Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages. You can choose from the following items. NONE No port will be used. MIDI MIDI IN (Rx) and OUT (Tx) connectors on the rear panel SLOT1 A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on the rear panel 7. Select the channel. Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the selected channel and close the MIDI SETUP popup window. NOTE • Alternatively, you can select the channel by pressing the desired channel in the field or by rotating one of the multifunction knobs. • When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes, the channel number you specify here is used as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit). 2 PORT NO. field If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field, choose port number 1–8 in this field. (The number of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed.) The currently-available card is valid only for port 1. 5. To specify the channel on which MIDI messages will be transmitted or received, press the channel select popup button. The MIDI SETUP popup window for selecting the channel will appear. Operations in this window are the same for both transmission (Tx) and reception (Rx). This window includes the following items. 8. Specify the type of port and the port number. Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the selected port and close the MIDI SETUP popup window. Turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI message. NOTE • For details on using Program Change messages, refer to “Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items,” below. • For details on using Control Change messages, refer to “Using Control Changes to control parameters” on page 155. NOTE Alternatively, you can select a port by pressing the desired port name in the field, or by pressing the field to highlight it and then rotating one of the multifunction knobs to select the port. 151 Reference Manual MIDI Using Program Changes to recall scenes and library items This page includes the following items. The CL series console lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each Program Change number, so that when this event is executed on the CL console, a Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device. 1. 1 Connect the CL series console to an external device. The following illustration shows an example of using the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit and receive MIDI messages. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN 2 3 MIDI OUT 5 4 External device 6 1 PROGRAM CHANGE Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE section on the MIDI SETUP page. • Tx ................................ Turn this button on to transmit corresponding Program Change messages when events on the list are executed. • Rx ................................ Turn this button on to execute corresponding events when Program Change messages are received. • ECHO ........................ Turn this button on to transmit Program Change messages that are received from an external device. CL5 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI popup window. 4. Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page, then select the port and MIDI channel on which Program Changes will be transmitted and received, as described in “Basic MIDI settings” on page 149. 5. 2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE section on the MIDI SETUP page. Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab to access the PROGRAM CHANGE page. On the PROGRAM CHANGE page, you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned to each program number. 3 List Shows the event (scene recall or library recall) assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI Program Change number. The list shows the following items. • CH/BANK ................. If “CH” appears as the column heading instead of “BANK,” the column indicates the MIDI channel (1–16) on which Program Changes are transmitted/received. If Program Change transmission and reception is in Single mode and the BANK button is on, this will be labeled “BANK,” and the numerical value in this column will correspond to the bank number. • NO............................... Indicates the program number 1–128. 152 Reference Manual MIDI • When the BANK button is on: The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and Bank Select (Control Change #0, #32) and Program Change messages can be transmitted and received. This can be convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single MIDI channel. When Bank Select and then Program Change messages (in that order) are received on the Rx channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the list will be executed. When you execute a specific event on the CL series console, Bank Select and Program Change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.) • PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT ...............................Indicates the type/number/title of the event assigned to each channel (bank number) or program number. Press an individual event display area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window, in which you can select the event that you want to assign. 4 Scroll knob Press this knob to scroll the list using the multifunction knob. 5 CLEAR ALL button Press this button to erase all events from the list. NOTE 6 INITIALIZE ALL button • The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode. • If the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received, the last-selected bank number will be used. • If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case, Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received. Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state. 6. Use the buttons in the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field to select the Program Change transmission/reception mode. You can select one of the following two Program Change transmission/reception modes. 7. • Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on): Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.) When a Program Change is received, the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be executed. When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be transmitted. Use the buttons in the PROGRAM CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on or off, and make settings for echo output. This field includes the following items. • Tx button ................... Switches Program Change transmission on or off. • Rx button ................... Switches Program Change reception on or off. • ECHO button............ Selects whether incoming Program Changes are echoed-out from the MIDI transmission port. • Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on): Only Program Changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be transmitted and received. When a Program Change on the Rx channel is received, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed. When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.) If you turn on the OMNI button/BANK button in Single mode, operation will change as follows. • When the OMNI button is on: Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI channel that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for Program Change transmission. 153 Reference Manual MIDI 8. 9. To change the event assignment for each program number, press the desired event in the list. The MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window will appear. In this window, you can specify the event assigned to each program number. This popup window includes the following items. 1 2 3 Use the TYPE field to select the type of event to assign. If the type is other than SCENE, use the DESTINATION field to select the rack number into which you want to recall the item. Use the LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY NAME field to select the scene or library number that will be recalled. Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE popup window. NOTE • You can also select the desired event, scene, or library in this field by pressing it. • If you press an item in the field to highlight it, you will be able to rotate any of the multifunction knobs to select the event, scene, or library. 10. Assign events to other program numbers in the same way. With these settings, executing the specified event on the CL series console will cause the corresponding Program Change (or Bank Select and Program Change) messages to be transmitted to an external device. When an external device transmits Program Change (or Bank Select and Program Change) messages on the appropriate channel, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding MIDI channel (or bank number) will be executed. NOTE • You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to program numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all program number assignments to their default state. • Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes. • In Single mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one program number on a Tx channel, only the lowest program number will be transmitted. (If the BANK button is on, only the program number of the lowest bank number will be transmitted.) • In Multi mode, if the same event is assigned to more than one MIDI channel and more than one program number, only the lowest program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted. 1 TYPE field Enables you to select the type of event. The following table lists the events you can select. NO ASSIGN No assignment SCENE Scene memory recall operations EFFECT Effect library recall operations PREMIUM RACK Premium Rack library recall operations 2 DESTINATION field Enables you to select the rack for which you want to recall a library item. If EFFECT or PREMIUM RACK is selected in the TYPE field, the rack number will be shown. If SCENE is selected, this will indicate “- - -”, and no choice is available for this field. 3 LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY NAME field Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall. If you selected SCENE or EFFECT in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY NUMBER and LIBRARY NAME field will appear. If you selected PREMIUM RACK in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY NUMBER field will appear. 154 Reference Manual MIDI Using Control Changes to control parameters You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the CL series console. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later. You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways. 1 2 ■ Using Control Changes This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1–31, 33–95, 102–119). You can freely assign an event to each control number. 3 ■ Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN. NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted Control Change messages of Control Change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of that parameter. The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be changed. 4 6 5 NOTE For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the Appendices (see page 250). 1 CONTROL CHANGE field 1. Connect the CL series console to an external device. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI popup window. 4. 5. Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify whether Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE field on the MIDI SETUP page. 2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field Enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page. Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page, then select the port and MIDI channel on which Control Changes will be transmitted and received, as described in “Basic MIDI settings” on page 149. 3 List Shows the event (fader/knob pattern, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number. • NO. .................. Indicates the Control number. You can use Control numbers 1–31, 33–95, and 102–119. • CONTROL CHANGE EVENT ................... Indicates and enables you to select the type of event assigned to each control number. When you press an event, the MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window will appear, allowing you to change the control number assignment. Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab to access the CONTROL CHANGE page. On the CONTROL CHANGE page, you can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and received, and specify the event (fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number. This page includes the following items. 4 CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all event assignments on the list. 5 INITIALIZE ALL button Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state. 6 Scroll knob Scrolls the contents of the list. You can use a multifunction knob to operate this. 155 Reference Manual MIDI 6. 1 MODE field Use the buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. You can choose one of the following two modes for Control Change transmission/reception. Enables you to select the type of event. 2 PARAMETER 1/2 field • NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on): Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments on the list will be ignored. In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of event. NOTE • The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series. For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model. • If NRPN mode is selected as the Control Change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this window are ignored. • For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes, refer to the Appendices (see page 248). • TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on): Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as Control Change messages. NOTE The channel on which Control Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT/ CH field on the MIDI SETUP page (see page 150). 7. 8. 9. Use the buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE field to turn transmission and reception on or off, and make settings for echo output. Each button has the following function. • Tx button....................Switches Control Change transmission on or off. • Rx button....................Switches Control Change reception on or off. • ECHO button ............Selects whether incoming Control Changes will be echoed out from the MIDI transmit port. In the order of the MODE field ➔ PARAMETER1 field ➔ PARAMETER2 field, specify the type of event you want to assign. Use the / buttons to select an item. Press the OK button to confirm the change and close the MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window. NOTE • You can also press the desired event in the field to select it. • If you press an item in the field to highlight it, you will be able to rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select an event. 10. To change the event assignment for each control number, press the corresponding event. The MIDI CONTROL CHANGE popup window will appear. In this window you can specify the event assigned to each control number. The window contains the following items. Assign events to other control numbers in the same way. When you operate the parameters you assigned on the CL series console, Control Change messages will be transmitted to external devices. Similarly, if the corresponding Control Change messages are received from an external device on the appropriate channel, the parameters assigned to those control numbers will change. NOTE • You can use the CLEAR ALL button to erase all assignments to control numbers. The INITIALIZE ALL button will return all control number assignments to their default state. • Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes. 1 2 156 Reference Manual MIDI Using Parameter Changes to control parameters On the CL series console, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called “Parameter Changes” to control specific events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations, system and user settings, etc.) as an alternative to using Control Changes or NRPN messages. For details on the Parameter Changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to “MIDI data format” in the Appendices. 1. Connect the CL series console to an external device. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. In the center of the screen, press the MIDI/GPI button to access the MIDI/GPI popup window. 4. Press the MIDI SETUP tab to access the MIDI SETUP page, and select the port and MIDI channel on which Parameter Changes will be transmitted and received, as described in “Basic MIDI settings” on page 149. NOTE • Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device. The transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used as the device number. • Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does not match the device number of the receiving CL console, the message will be ignored. • Do not turn Parameter Change and Control Change transmission/reception on at the same time. Otherwise, a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other problems. 5. Use the Tx button and Rx button in the PARAMETER CHANGE field to turn on Parameter Change transmission/reception. In this state when you operate specific parameters on the CL console, the corresponding Parameter Change messages will be transmitted. If valid Parameter Change messages are received from an external device, the parameters assigned to those Parameter Changes will be controlled. 157 Reference Manual User settings (Security) User settings (Security) Privileges for each user are as follows. This chapter explains the following settings and operations: the User Level settings that restrict access to the parameters by certain users, the Console Lock function that temporarily denies access to the console, the Preference settings that customize the operating environment, and Save/Load operations using a USB flash drive. Logged-in user Administrator User Level settings User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that can be operated by each user, or to change the settings of USER DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user. Settings for each user can be stored as a “user authentication key” inside the console or together on a USB flash drive, allowing users to be switched easily. This can be convenient in the following situations. • Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented. • The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited. • In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can be locked to prevent unintended operations. • Preferences of each operator can easily be switched. User Guest User authentication Editing user setup key data, such as USER Editing User Password Editing DEFINED keys and Level settings setting comments Create OverwritePreferences new save Available (Can edit the settings for Administrator and for Guest.) Available (Cannot edit the user level, since the adminisAvailable trator can always perform all operations. Can edit the settings for Guest.) — Available — Power user Available Normal user (User without Power User privileges) Available N/A Available Available (Viewing only) — Available (Excluding User Level settings) Available N/A (Viewing only) — — Available Available Available Available — Available Available Setting the Administrator password With the factory settings, the Administrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator privileges and perform all operations. If you want to restrict the operations of other users, you must specify an Administrator password. User types and user authentication keys There are three types of user, as follows. To operate the CL series console, you must log-in as a user. • Administrator ...........The administrator of the CL console can use all of its functionality. Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the console. The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users. Even if the console was locked by another user, the administrator can use the administrator password to unlock it. • Guest ...........................A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the console. • User..............................A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive as user authentication keys. Multiple sets of user settings (up to ten in internal memory) can be saved, each with the desired user name. A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. When a user logs in, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following information. • • • • Password (except for Guest) User Level settings (except for Administrator) Preferences USER DEFINED keys • • • • USER DEFINED knobs Assignable encoders Custom fader bank MASTER fader 158 Reference Manual User settings (Security) 2. 3. Creating a user authentication key Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a password. You can create a user authentication key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the console’s internal memory. A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power User. The user level is specified when the authentication key is created, but USER SETUP settings other than the user level (such as preferences and the USER DEFINED keys) will be carried over from the user who is currently logged-in. 1. To create a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector. If you want to save the user authentication key in internal memory, simply proceed to step 2. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. Press the CREATE USER KEY button. Enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button. The password can be up to eight characters. If the two passwords that were entered match, the Administrator password will be set. For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual. 159 Reference Manual User settings (Security) The CREATE USER KEY popup window will appear. 2 3 4. When you have specified the user name, comment, password, power user privileges on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE button. The CREATE KEY popup window will appear. 5. If you want to create a user authentication key in the console’s internal memory, press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field. You can store ten keys in the console’s internal memory. 6. If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive, press the button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field. 4 1 5 1 USER NAME Indicates the user name of up to eight characters. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter the user name. 2 COMMENT NOTE Enables you to specify and view a comment of up to 32 characters about the user. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter the comment. The file name of the user authentication key will be the current user name, and it will be created and saved in the root directory. 3 PASSWORD 7. Enables you to specify a password of up to eight characters. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter the password. Press the CREATE TO button. The user authentication key will be created in the location specified in step 5 or step 6. 4 POWER USER Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user. 5 ACCESS PERMISSION These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform. For details on each item, refer to page 166. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 160 Reference Manual User settings (Security) Logging-in 2. Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN popup window. 3. Press the ADMINISTRATOR button, and then press the LOGIN button. If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. 4. Enter the password and press the OK button. If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the screen. To operate the CL series console, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User. User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself. However, to log in as a User you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself, or connect the USB flash drive in which a user authentication key has been saved. If you use a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after logging-in. NOTE If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest. ■ Logging-in as Administrator 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 161 Reference Manual User settings (Security) ■ Logging-in as Guest 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN window. ■ Logging-in as a User To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB flash drive. If using a USB flash drive, you may also log-in using a user authentication key created on a different CL series console. With a user authentication key stored in the console 3. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN window. 3. In the LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE field, choose the user authentication key with which you want to log in, and press the LOAD button. Press the GUEST button, and then press the LOGIN button. 162 Reference Manual User settings (Security) If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. 4. Enter the password and press the OK button. If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the screen. 3. Press the log-in button to open the LOGIN window. 4. In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field, click the (LOAD .CLU FILE) popup button. The SAVE/LOAD popup window will appear, and the files and directories saved on the USB flash drive will be displayed. The user authentication key file has a “.CLU” file name extension. With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 163 Reference Manual User settings (Security) 5. 6. Changing the password Rotate the multifunction knob to select the user authentication key for the user as whom you want to log in. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “Loading a file from the USB flash drive” on page 178. Follow the steps below to change the password of the logged-in user. A change in the Administrator password is updated immediately. A change in a User password is also updated immediately, but will be discarded if the user simply logs out after changing it. The change must be saved by overwriting the old authentication key before the user logs-out. The Guest account does not have a password. Press the LOAD button. If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. NOTE 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the PASSWORD CHANGE button. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a password. 3. Enter the current password and press the OK button. When you enter the correct password, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the new password. 4. Enter the new password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button. If the two passwords that were entered match, the new password will be set. • If you have selected a user authentication key that was created on a different CL series console, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the CL series console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not appear.) When you enter the correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected user. • If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time. For details on re-saving the user authentication key, refer to “Editing a user authentication key” on page 165. 7. Enter the password and press the OK button. If the password was incorrect, a message of “Wrong Password!” will appear near the bottom of the screen. 164 Reference Manual User settings (Security) Editing a user authentication key The SAVE KEY popup window will appear. If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your preference settings, USER DEFINED keys, USER DEFINED knobs, assignable encoders, custom fader banks, master fader, comments, and password, and save (overwrite) them onto your user authentication key. If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level. 1. Log-in as a user, and edit the Preference settings (page 168), USER DEFINED keys (page 169), USER DEFINED knobs (page 171), assignable encoders (page 172), custom fader bank (page 173), and master fader (page 174) settings. If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. 4. Press the save-destination button, and then press the SAVE TO button. 5. A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you want to overwrite that user authentication key; press OK button. Press the SAVE KEY button. 165 Reference Manual User settings (Security) 2. Changing the user level Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. 8 You can view or change the user level. • Administrator ...........The Administrator does not have a user level setting, but can change the user level setting of the Guest account. • Guest ...........................The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest account, but cannot change it. • Normal user ...............A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her User account, but cannot change it. • Power User .................A power user can view and change his or her User account. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 1 2 3 6 4 7 5 3. Press the USER LEVEL tab to access the USER LEVEL page. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can switch to the USER LEVEL for GUEST page, and view or change the user level of the Guest account. This page includes the following items. 1 CH OPERATION Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input channels, output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the currently selected channel. Settings for currently-selected channels will be displayed below the CH OPERATION section. Use the panel [SEL] keys or the Selected Channel field in the Function Access Area to select the channel for which you want to make settings. The type of buttons shown will depend on the selected channel or group. INPUT channel.............................. [HA], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON] MIX/MATRIX channel ................ [WITH SEND], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON] STEREO/MONO channel............ [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON] DCA group ..................................... [DCA MASTER], [DCA GROUP ASSIGN] 166 Reference Manual User settings (Security) 5 FILE LOAD • HA................................................ Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that channel. • PROCESSING ........................... Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that channel (excluding the fader, channel on/off, and send level). • FADER/ON ................................ Restricts operation of that channel’s fader, channel on/off, and send level. • WITH SEND ............................. Restricts operation of that channel’s send parameters. (From MIX, From MATRIX) • DCA MASTER .......................... Restricts operation of that channel’s DCA group fader, ON/ OFF, and ICON/COLOR/NAME. • DCA GROUP ASSIGN............ Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group. • SET BY SEL................................ If this button is on, you can press the panel [SEL] key of a channel to enable or disable the operating restrictions for that channel. Specifies the settings that will be applied when a file is loaded from a USB flash drive. The user authentication key contains settings such as the user level, preferences, and the USER DEFINED key settings (USER SETUP settings). Other data is saved in an “ALL” file. The “ALL” file also includes the USER SETUP settings of the Administrator and the Guest. • USER SETUP (Preference and USER DEFINED keys settings) • SYSTEM SETUP/MONITOR SETUP • CURRENT SCENE • SCENE LIST • LIBRARY LIST 6 MONITOR SETUP Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed. • OSCILLATOR • TALKBACK 2 CURRENT SCENE 7 SYSTEM SETUP Specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory. • INPUT PATCH/INPUT NAME.................. Restricts operations for input channel patching and names. • OUTPUT PATCH/OUTPUT NAME......... Restricts operations for output channel patching and names. • BUS SETUP................................ Restricts operations for bus setup. • GEQ RACK/EFFECT RACK/PREMIUM RACK ........................................ Restricts operations for the racks. Press this area to open the RACK USER LEVEL popup window, in which you can set this restriction. However, there will be no restriction on operating the MIDI CLK button displayed for delay-type and modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC button displayed for the FREEZE effect. • MUTE GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP MASTER ........................................ Restricts operations for mute group assignment and mute group master. Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed. • MIXER SETUP • OUTPUT PORT • MIDI/GPI 8 SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button Permits/clears all items. 4. Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted. 5. When you have finished making settings, close the popup window and press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 3 SCENE LIST Specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories. • STORE/SORT operations • RECALL operations 4 LIBRARY LIST Specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries. • STORE/CLEAR operations • RECALL operations 167 Reference Manual User settings (Security) 2 PATCH field Preferences Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations. Follow the steps below to make various settings for the CL console operating environment, such as how popup windows appear, and whether [SEL] key operations will be linked. These settings are changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you will also be able to change the Guest settings. • PATCH CONFIRMATION If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the SETUP button to open the USER SETUP popup window. • STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or output patch item that is already patched to a port. 3 LOCALE SETUP field In the SAVE/LOAD screen or RECORDER screen, select JA if you want Japanese to be displayed. (This does not select the Help language.) 1 4 ERROR MESSAGE field Specifies whether error messages will be displayed. • DIGITAL I/O ERROR If this ON button is lit, an error message will appear when a digital I/O error occurs. 2 • MIDI I/O ERROR If this is on, an error message will appear when a MIDI transmit/receive error occurs. 5 5 PANEL OPERATION field 3 Enables you to make settings for options related to panel operation. • AUTO CHANNEL SELECT Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the [ON] key or fader for the channel. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels) and OUTPUT (output channels). 4 3. • [CUE] [SEL] LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If the LINK button is on, channels for which cue operations were performed will be selected. Press the PREFERENCE tab to access the PREFERENCE page. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the PREFERENCE for Guest page and make preference settings for the Guest account. This page includes the following items. • [FADER BANK] [SEL] LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader bank selection. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels), OUTPUT (output channels), and CUSTOM (Custom fader bank). If the LINK button is on, and you select the corresponding fader bank, the channel in that bank that was selected most recently will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light. 1 STORE/RECALL field Enables you to turn on or off options related to scene store/recall operations. • IDENTIFY I/O DEVICE PORT BY [SEL] Specifies whether to enable a function that allows you to identify the I/O device port connected to a channel by pressing the [SEL] key for that channel. If this ON button is lit, pressing a [SEL] key on the panel will cause the signal indicator to flash for the port of the I/O device that is assigned to the corresponding channel by the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH settings. • STORE CONFIRMATION • RECALL CONFIRMATION If these ON buttons are lit, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a Store or Recall operation respectively. 168 Reference Manual User settings (Security) USER DEFINED keys • POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED Specifies whether pressing a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section while the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed will cause a popup window (1ch) to appear. If the ON button is lit, a popup window (1ch) will open (or close) whenever you press a knob. This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the USER DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel, and press these keys to execute the defined function. This assignment procedure will define the USER DEFINED keys for the user who is currently loggedin, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account. NOTE If you press the SEND or PAN knob, a popup window (8ch) will open. • GAIN KNOB FUNCTION Specifies what will happen when you operate the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the panel. When the ANALOG GAIN button is lit, you can adjust analog gain on the head amp. When the DIGITAL GAIN button is lit, you can adjust digital gain on the console. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. 3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KEYS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account. The sixteen buttons on screen corresponds to USER DEFINED keys [1]–[16] on the top panel. The name of function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding on-screen button. If nothing is assigned to the key, an indication of “---” will appear next to the button. • SCENE UP/DOWN Specifies what the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys will do when pressed in the SCENE popup windows. When the SCENE +1/–1 button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will increment or decrement the scene number. When the LIST UP/DOWN button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will scroll the list upward or downward. • LIST ORDER Specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear on the list. When the NORMAL button is lit, the list appears in ascending numerical order. When the REVERSE button is lit, the list appears in descending numerical order. • NAME DISPLAY Specifies the content of the channel name display on the top panel. When the NAME ONLY button is lit, only the channel name appears. When the FULL FUNCTION button is lit, the channel name display also indicates knob assignment information and fader level. 4. Use the buttons on screen to make Preference settings. 5. When you have finished making settings, close the popup window and press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. 169 Reference Manual User settings (Security) 4. Using the Alternate function Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function. The USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window will appear. In this window, you can select a function to assign to the USER DEFINED key, and select the parameters. If you assign the Alternate function (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, you will be able to switch parameters on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section while pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key. The console enters Alternate mode when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key to which the Alternate function has been assigned (the key will light). The Alternate function features two options: LATCH and UNLATCH. If you select UNLATCH, Alternate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key. If you select LATCH, you will be able to turn Alternate mode on or off by the key presses. You do not need to hold down the key. NOTE • The console exits Alternate mode when you switch the display between the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or when you open a popup window. • In Alternate mode, “ALT” will be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area. In Alternate mode, the following knobs change their behavior. • [GAIN] knob Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value. If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for HA KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP popup window, rotate this knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp. NOTE • [MIX/MATRIX] knob Rotate this knob to switch between PRE and POST for the corresponding send signal. Press this knob to switch the corresponding send signal on or off. The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series. For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model. 5. 6. • [HPF] knob Press this knob to switch the high pass filter on or off. Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame, then use the / buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select the function you want to assign. For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys” on page 259. • [DYNAMICS 1] knob Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off. • [DYNAMICS 2] knob Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame, and select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way. 7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window. 8. Assign the desired functions to other USER DEFINED keys in the same way. 9. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[16] key on the panel. NOTE In Alternate mode, all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs mentioned above will be disabled. 170 Reference Manual User settings (Security) USER DEFINED knobs This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the USER DEFINED KNOBS section on the top panel, and press these knobs to execute the defined function. This assignment procedure will define the USER DEFINED knobs for the user who is currently loggedin, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. NOTE The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series. For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model. 3. 4. Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab to select the USER DEFINED KNOBS page. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account. The four on-screen buttons correspond to USER DEFINED knobs [1]–[4] on the top panel. The name of function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding onscreen button. If nothing is assigned to the knob, an indication of “---” will appear next to the button. 5. Make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame, then use the / buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select the function you want to assign. For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs” on page 262. 6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way. 7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window. 8. Assign the desired functions to other USER DEFINED knobs in the same way. 9. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]–[4] knob on the panel. About TOUCH AND TURN The TOUCH AND TURN function is assigned to the USER DEFINED [4] knob by default. If this function is assigned to one of the USER DEFINED knobs, you can press a desired knob on the touch screen and then use the USER DEFINED knob to immediately operate that on-screen knob. At this time, a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch screen, indicating that you can operate that knob. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to assign a function. The USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window will appear. In this window you can select a function to assign to the USER DEFINED knob, and select the parameters. 171 Reference Manual User settings (Security) Assignable encoders 4. Press the button in the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER field. The ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP popup window will appear. 5. Use the / buttons in the lower part of the field or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select the function you want to assign. For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders” on page 263. You can assign the desired function to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the fader strip of each channel, and control the function using the knob. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. NOTE SELECTED SEND is the default setting. It functions as the send to the MIX/MATRIX channel that is selected for SENDS ON FADER in the Function Access Area. 3. Press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab to select the USER DEFINED KNOBS page. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page, and make assignable knob settings for the Guest account. 6. Press the OK button to close the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window. 7. Press the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key on the top panel repeatedly to select ASSIGN. The CL3 and CL1 feature one [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key. Therefore, the function of all GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knobs will change simultaneously. On the CL5, you can switch the knob function in block A (left side) and block C/Master fader section (right side) independently by using the corresponding [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys. NOTE This assignment does not apply to the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section, since these knobs are used to control on-screen parameters. 8. 172 Operate the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on each fader strip. Reference Manual User settings (Security) 2 MASTER FADER field Custom fader bank • MASTER button Press this button to set channels that will be controlled by the faders in the Master fader section. Groups that organize channels routed to the top-panel faders are called “fader banks.” There are input and output channel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader banks enable you to select various combinations of channels, regardless of channel types. This section explains how to set up a custom fader bank. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. 3 Block indicators Display the graphics of the block and faders that are the current target for editing. The graphics vary depending on the console model. CL5: A (16 faders), B, C, MASTER CL3: A (16 faders), B, MASTER CL1: A (8 faders), B, MASTER 4 Fader select button Selects the target fader. Press this button to select it, then press the [SEL] keys on the top panel to add the corresponding channels to the selected fader bank. 1 5 Channel select popup button 3 Opens the channel select popup window, in which you can change the channel specified for CHANNEL ASSIGN. 2 6 CLEAR ALL button Clears the current fader bank assignment. Pressing this button will open a confirmation dialog box. Press OK to clear the assignment. Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen without changing the setting. 6 4 5 3. Press the CUSTOM FADER tab to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make custom fader bank settings for the Guest account. This page includes the following items. 1 CUSTOM FADER BANK field • Bank select buttons Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of channels. The number and name of the custom fader banks vary depending on the console model. CL5: A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6 CL3: A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 CL1: A1, B1, B2, B3, B4 4. Use the Bank Select keys to recall the fader settings to the top panel for the channels you want to add to the custom fader bank. 5. Press the bank select button for the custom fader bank you want to set up. 6. In the CHANNEL ASSIGN field, press the number button for the fader you want to set up. 7. On the top panel, press the [SEL] key of the channel that you want to assign to that fader number. The name of the selected channel will appear on the channel select popup button. 173 Reference Manual User settings (Security) 8. To assign channels to other faders, repeat steps 4 through 7. Master fader 9. If necessary, select channels by pressing the channel select popup buttons. You can set channels that will be controlled by the two faders in the Master fader section. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. 3. Press the CUSTOM FADER tab to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button in the lower right of the screen to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make master fader settings for the Guest account. 4. Press the MASTER button. The CHANNEL ASSIGN field shows the channel assignments of the master section. Use the list in the left column to select the desired channel group, then use the buttons in the right column to select channels. When you have finished selecting the channels, press the CLOSE button. 174 Reference Manual User settings (Security) Console Lock You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting completely disables operations of the panel and touch screen, so that controllers cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break. If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console Lock function. NOTE • If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the unit to the factory default settings” in the separate Owner’s Manual. • The Guest cannot set a password. • Even while the console is locked, you can operate the console from an external device via MIDI or CL Editor as usual. Locking the console 5. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the CONSOLE LOCK button. Press the channel select popup button of the fader (A or B) that you want to edit, and choose the channel. Use the list in the left column to select the desired channel group, then use the buttons in the right column to select channels. When you have finished selecting the channels, press the CLOSE button. 175 Reference Manual User settings (Security) Unlocking the console If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. 1. Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen. If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. 2. Enter the password for the logged-in user or for the Administrator, and press the OK button. The console will be unlocked, you will return to the SETUP screen, and the controllers will be operable once again. Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive, you can view that image on the CONSOLE LOCK screen. In the SAVE/LOAD popup window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it from the USB flash drive. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “Loading a file from the USB flash drive” on page 178. 3. NOTE Enter the password for the logged-in user, and press the OK button. The CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear, the Console Lock function will be enabled, and all controllers (excluding the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will become inoperable. Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16/24/32-bit, but they will be converted into 16-bit for display. 176 Reference Manual User settings (Security) Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive 2. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 3. If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory. To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field. 4. Press the SAVE button. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a file name and comment. 5. Enter a file name or comment, and press the SAVE button. When the file has been saved, the PROCESSING popup window that shows the progress of the writing operation will close. This section explains how to connect a commercially-available USB flash drive to the USB connector located to the right of the display, and save the internal settings and user authentication keys of the CL series console to the USB flash drive or load them from the USB flash drive. NOTE • Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash drives. • The operation of USB flash drives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified. (However, this does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB flash drives.) The FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16. NOTICE An ACCESS indicator appears in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed (saved, loaded, or deleted). During this time, do not disconnect the USB plug or power-off the CL unit. Doing so may damage the data in the flash drive. Saving the CL console’s internal data on a USB flash drive All of the CL series console’s internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file. The saved file will have an extension of “.CLF”. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. NOTE • If you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder, a dialog will ask you to confirm the overwrite. • You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters. • You may enter a file name of more than eight characters. However, the drive name, path name, and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters. If you exceed this limit, you will be unable to save the file. If an error message appears at the bottom of the screen, shorten the file name and try saving the file again. 177 Reference Manual User settings (Security) 6. Loading a file from the USB flash drive Follow the steps below to load CL settings file (extension .CLF) from the USB flash drive into the CL series console. You can use the same procedure to load the following files as well as setting files. Extension .CLF Type ALL Contents of file Press the OK button to begin loading the file. When the file has finished loading, the PROCESSING popup window that shows the progress of the loading operation will close. If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress, data up to the cancellation point will still be loaded. Some setting data may not be loaded, depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load operation. CL console internal setting file .CLU KEY CL console user authentication key .XML XML XML file for displaying Help .TXT TEXT Text file for displaying Help .BMP BMP Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen (256 or more colors, uncompressed bitmap format) Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive This section explains how to perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories on the USB flash drive, editing the file names or comments, copying, and pasting. ■ File editing NOTICE Some data may contain settings that will cause the console to output signals immediately after the data is loaded. Therefore, before loading data, turn off the power to the equipment connected to the CL series console and/or lower the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a problem even if a signal is output from the CL console. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. The list will show the files and sub-directories that have been saved. 5 123 4 6 7 8 9 0 C A B 1 COPY button 3. 4. 5. Copies a file into buffer memory (a temporary holding area). To select the file that you want to load, press the name of the desired file in the file list, or rotate the corresponding multifunction knob on the panel. The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations. 2 PASTE button Pastes the file from buffer memory. 3 DELETE button If you want the DANTE SETUP and I/O device-related settings saved in the CL settings file (file name extension .CLF) to be applied to the CL console, press the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button to turn it on. Deletes the selected file or directory. NOTE A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty. The message “Directory Not Empty!” will appear. Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. 178 Reference Manual User settings (Security) 4 MAKE DIR button NOTE The DANTE SETUP settings SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even if the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is on. Creates a new directory. 5 PATH 3. Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next higher level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed. 6 VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE Perform the desired editing operation. For details on the procedure, refer to the explanations that follow. ■ Sorting files and editing file names/comments Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive. If the USB flash drive is write-protected, a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME field. 1. 7 File list This area lists the files that are saved on the USB flash drive. The highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations. The file list contains the following items. When you press the item name at the top of each column, it will turn orange, and the list will be sorted by that item. Each time you press the item name, the sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order. • FILE NAME ...............Indicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon indicating its type. • COMMENT ...............The comment added to the CL console setting file is displayed here. • READ ONLY..............A lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding file is protected. You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting. • TYPE ...........................ALL indicates a file containing CL internal settings, KEY indicates a user authentication key, XML indicates a Help file, BMP indicates a bitmap image file, MP3 indicates an MP3 file, and [DIR] indicates a directory. • TIME STAMP............Indicates the date and time at which the file was modified most recently. To sort the files, press one of the headings “FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,” “TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of each column on the file list. The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press. 1 2 3 4 5 1 FILE NAME Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the file names. 2 COMMENT Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the comment. 3 READ ONLY Sort the list by Write Protect on/off status. 4 TYPE Sort the list by file type. 5 TIME STAMP 8 File selection knob Sort the list by date and time of update. Selects a file on the file list. You can operate this knob using the multifunction knob. NOTE 9 SAVE button By pressing the same location again, you can change the direction (ascending order or descending order) in which the list is sorted. Saves all of the CL console internal settings together (see page 177). 0 LOAD button Loads the selected CL setting file (see page 178). A CREATE USER KEY button Creates a user authentication key (see page 158). B FORMAT button Initializes the USB flash drive (see page 180). 2. If you want to edit the file name or comment, press the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each file to access the keyboard window. 3. Enter a file name or comment, and press the RENAME button or SET button. 4. To turn the protect setting on or off, press the READ ONLY field for the file. A protect symbol is displayed for write-protected files. These files cannot be overwritten. NOTE C WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write-protected file. If this is off, the DANTE SETUP and I/O device settings will be omitted when a settings file is loaded. 179 Reference Manual User settings (Security) ■ Copying and pasting a file Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a different file name. 1. Formatting a USB flash drive Follow the steps below to format a USB flash drive. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16. Turn the multifunction knob to select the copy-source file, and press the COPY button. The highlighted line in the file list indicates the file that is selected for operations. 2. If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory. To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field. 3. Press the PASTE button. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the file name. 4. Enter the file name, and press the PASTE button. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 3. Press the FORMAT button. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the volume name that will be applied after formatting. 4. Enter a volume name, and press the FORMAT button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Format operation. 5. To execute the Format operation, press the OK button. NOTE You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file. ■ Deleting a file 1. Rotate the multifunction knob to select a file to delete, then press the DELETE button. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the Delete operation. 2. To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button. NOTE You cannot delete a protected file. ■ Creating a directory 1. If necessary, press the directory icon and change the directory. To move to the next higher level, press the arrow button in the PATH field. 2. Press the MAKE DIR button. A keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter a directory name. 3. Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button. NOTE You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists. 180 Reference Manual Recorder Recorder Assigning channels to the input and output of the recorder This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder. Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder. You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel. About the USB memory recorder The CL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal signals to a USB flash drive, or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash drive. As the file format for recording, the CL series console supports MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3). For playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC) files. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported. By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be recorded to a USB flash drive, or background music or sound effects saved on a USB flash drive can be played back via an assigned input channel. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen. 2. Press the USB tab in the upper right of the screen. On this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder, and perform recording and playback operations. ■ Signal flow for the USB memory recorder MIX1-24 MATRIX1-8 RECORDER INPUT L PLAYBACK OUT USB memory recorder STEREO L/R MONO L R INPUT1-72* ST IN 1L1R-8L8R R INPUT1-72* DIRECT OUT * CL3: INPUT1-64, CL1: INPUT1-48 NOTE • Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously. • The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel. 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 1 RECORDER INPUT popup buttons (L/R) Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder’s L/R input channels. 2 RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder. 3 RECORDER INPUT CUE button Press this button to audition the signal input to the recorder. NOTE You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously. 181 Reference Manual Recorder 4 RECORDER INPUT meters • • • • Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder. 5 PLAYBACK OUT popup buttons (L/R) Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT popup window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder’s L/R output channels for playback. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 6 PLAYBACK OUT GAIN knob Sets the level of the recorder playback output signal. 4. Use the category list and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output. If you select a channel to which a channel is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box. 5. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button. You will return to the RECORDER screen. 6. Assign a channel to the other input in the same way. 7 PLAYBACK OUT CUE button Press this button to audition the signal output from the recorder. NOTE You cannot turn on this button and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously. 8 PLAYBACK OUT meters Indicates the level of the recorder playback output signal. 3. ST L+C ....................... STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C) channel ST R+C ....................... STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO (C) channel MONO........................ MONO channel CH1–72 ...................... Direct output of an INPUT channel 1–72 To assign channels to the recorder inputs, press the RECORDER INPUT popup button L or R. The CH SELECT popup window will appear. NOTE The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in monaural, with the same signal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to the same channel. 7. To assign channels to the recorder playback outputs, press the PLAYBACK OUT popup button L or R. The CH SELECT popup window will appear. 2 1 2 1 1 Category list Enables you to select the type of channels. 2 Channel select buttons Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s inputs. • MIX 1–24....................MIX channels 1–24 • MTRX 1–8..................MATRIX channels 1–8 • ST L/R .........................STEREO channel L/R 1 Category List Enables you to select the type of channels. 182 Reference Manual Recorder 2 Channel select buttons Recording audio to a USB flash drive Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s playback outputs, from the following choices. • CH1–72....................................... INPUT channels 1–72 • STIN 1L/1R–STIN 8L/8R ........ ST IN channels 1–8 L/R You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB flash drive inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen. 2. Press the USB tab in the upper right of the screen. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 8. Use the category list and the channel select buttons to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output. If you select a channel to which another signal is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box. NOTE The recorder playback output can be patched to multiple channels. 9. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button. You will return to the RECORDER screen. 10. Assign a channel to the other output in the same way. 1 2 C B 7 8 9 0 A 34 5 6 ■ TRANSPORT field This field enables you to control recording and playback of a song. 1 Current song Indicates the currently-selected song’s track number, title and artist name. The following indicators will appear during playback or recording. Playing Recording 2 Elapsed time display Indicates the elapsed playback time of the current song during playback, and the elapsed recording time during recording. 183 Reference Manual Recorder ■ PLAY MODE field This field enables you to specify how the recorder will behave when playback of the current song is complete. 3 Remaining time display Indicates the remaining playback time of the current song during playback. 4 Current song format B SINGLE button Indicates the file format and bit rate of the current song (the file being played back). If this button is on, only the current song will play. If this button is off, when the current song finishes playing, the recorder will play the next song in the list that is marked with a PLAY check symbol. 5 REC RATE button Switches the recording rate. 6 Display switch button C REPEAT button Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT and PLAYBACK OUT fields at the bottom of the song list. If this button is on, playback will repeat. If the SINGLE button is on, only the current song will play repeatedly. If the SINGLE button is off, all songs in the list that are marked with a PLAY check symbol will repeatedly play in the order of the list. If this is off, the song will play only once. If the SINGLE button is on, the current song will play only once, and then stop. If the SINGLE button is off, all songs in the list that are marked with a PLAY check symbol will play once in the order of the list, and then playback will stop. 7 REW button Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song. If the playback point has already been located at the beginning, the point will move to the beginning of the preceding song that has been checked for playback. When the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song, holding down this button for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point. If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the button was released. 3. 8 STOP button The recorder will change from play/record/recording-standby mode to stop mode. 9 PLAY/PAUSE button Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector. The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity. When you connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive. The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the currently-selected folder below that level. ■ Directory structure of a USB flash drive Changes the recorder mode as follows: Stop mode → Playback mode, then starts playback from the beginning of the current song Playback mode → Playback pause mode Playback pause mode → Playback mode, then starts playback from the paused point. Recording standby mode → Recording mode Recording mode → Recording-pause mode Recording pause mode → Recording mode, then starts recording from the paused point. YPE folder Root directory Songs folder Song (audio file) 0 FF button Moves the playback point to the beginning of the next song that is marked with a PLAY check symbol. If you hold down this button for two seconds or longer, fast-forward will occur. If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the button was released. A REC button Places the recorder in recording standby mode. The pause indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button will light. 4. NOTE You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key (see page 169). 184 Assign the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder (see page 181). Reference Manual Recorder 5. Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive To monitor the signal being recorded, raise the fader for the channel(s) that are patched to the input of the recorder. The level of the input signal to the recorder is shown by the RECORDER INPUT field’s level meter in the RECORDER screen. If necessary, use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the recorder. You can play back audio files that have been saved on your USB flash drive. In addition to files that were recorded on the CL series console, you can also play files that were copied from your computer to the USB flash drive. The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA (Windows Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The playable sampling rates are 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. The supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps. NOTE • The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT). • Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the corresponding output channel. 6. 1. Press the REC RATE field in the lower right of the screen, then select the bit rate for the audio file that will be recorded. You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality, but will increase the size of the data. NOTE If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder, or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of unsupported formats will not be recognized. 2. NOTE The word clock rate at which the CL series console is currently operating will automatically be selected as the sampling rate for the audio file. 7. 8. 9. Press the REC (●) button. The REC (●) button and the PAUSE ( ) indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE ( The current song indicator area will show “----RECORDING----.” Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen. 35 1 ) button will light. To start recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button. During recording, the REC (●) button and the PLAY ( ) indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE ( button will light. You can also see the elapsed recording time. 2 ) 4 To stop recording, press the STOP (■) button. The audio file will be saved to the USB flash drive. A 0 NOTE • In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. You may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder. • The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later. 10. To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows. 10–1. Select a recorded audio file, and press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button. The recorded content will be played back via the input channel you specified in step 4. You can also turn on the CUE button in the PLAYBACK OUT field to audition it. 10–2. To stop playback, press the STOP (■) button. 6 7 8 9 1 Title list This list shows the playable audio files and the folders that are saved in the selected folder of USB flash drive. The row with the blue background in the center of the list indicates the song file/folder that is selected for operations. 185 Reference Manual Recorder 2 Status indicator • The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and folders located below the SONGS folder. • The CL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single-byte characters. If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly. • A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 subdirectories can be managed. A symbol indicating whether the file is playing or paused is shown at the left edge of the title list. : Playing, : Paused 3 Track number Indicates the file number on the list. 4 Sub-directory If there is a folder at a lower level, a folder icon is shown at the track number position. You can move to the lower level by pressing the folder icon. 4. Use the multifunction knob or press the on-screen file name to select the desired file. 5. Press a button in the PLAY MODE to select the playback mode. You can choose from the following four playback modes. 5 PLAY check symbol Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively. SINGLE button 6 SELECT knob Use the multifunction knob to switch the current song. (The title list will scroll up or down.) 7 NOW PLAYING button If you turn this button on, the currently-playing song will always be selected in the list (it will have a blue background). 8 MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons On The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback. On Off The currently-selected song will play once and then stop. Off On Starting with the currently-selected song on the title list, songs will play back consecutively until the last song. Then, playback will return to the first song and will continue until you stop playback. Off Off Starting with the currently-selected song in the title list, songs will play back consecutively, and playback will stop at the last song on the list. 6. If you have selected a consecutive playback mode in step 5, press the PLAY check symbol column for each song you want to play. When performing consecutive playback, the files marked with a check symbol will be played. 7. Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button. The song you selected in step 4 will begin playing. Switch between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display on the list. 0 SAVE LIST button Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol setting as a playlist. A RELOAD button Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current playlist you are editing back to the previous setting. 3. Mode On Sort the current song list in descending or ascending order. 9 Display switch buttons REPEAT button NOTE • The USB memory recorder can play back audio files that feature a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. • Even if the sampling rate at which the CL series console is operating differs from the sampling rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly. • If the REPEAT button is on, playback will continue until you stop playback. You can use the change directory button on screen and the folder icon in the NO. column to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file. If the directory on the USB flash drive is displayed: • Upper level .................Press this button to move up to the directory that is one level higher than the current one. 8. To stop playback, press the STOP (■) button. • Subdirectory ..............Press this button to move to the corresponding sub-directory. NOTE • If you select a folder in this way, that folder will automatically be selected as the recording destination. 186 Reference Manual Recorder 6 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button Editing the title list Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME field. You can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist names. 1. Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the USB connector. 3. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen (USB tab). In the screen, you can use the folder icon in the NO. column and the change directory button to view the contents of the folder that includes the desired file. 4. If you want to edit a title in the title list, press the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button. If you want to edit the artist name, press the ARTIST EDIT button. A popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the text. 3 4 NOTE • If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be converted into for display. • The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3 format audio files. 1 2 5. Edit the title or artist name. A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-byte characters) can be input for both the title and for the artist name. If the text cannot be shown completely in the input field, the text will scroll horizontally. 6. Press the OK button to close the popup window. 7. If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button, and MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list. Use the following buttons to change the order of the title list. 5 6 • SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button Press this button to sort the title list in numerical → alphabetical order by title/file name. Pressing the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order. • ARTIST SORT button Press this button to sort the title list in numerical → alphabetical order by artist name. Pressing the button repeatedly will alternate between ascending and descending order. 1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button Enables you to edit the title of the song selected in the list. The file name cannot be edited here. • MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons Press these buttons to move the track number of the file currently-selected in the title list upward or downward by one. 2 ARTIST EDIT button Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list. • SAVE LIST button Press this button to store the title list order and playback selections (the PLAY check symbol) to a USB flash drive as a play list. You should perform this operation if you want the state of the title list to be preserved even after you disconnect the USB flash drive or turn off the power to the console. Since these settings are stored for each folder, a confirmation dialog box will ask you whether you want to save them when you attempt to change folders. 3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the title or file name. 4 ARTIST SORT button Sorts the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the artist name. 5 SAVE LIST button Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings to a USB flash drive as a playlist. 187 Reference Manual Recorder Using the CL console with Nuendo Live The following example shows Dante Controller settings for patching I/O device channels 1–16 to DVS. The CL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinberg’s Nuendo Live DAW software. In addition to the equipment and software mentioned in “Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer” on page 25, the “CL Extension” software which integrates the CL series and Nuendo Live can be installed in your computer, allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console to easily perform multi-track recording operations. Here we explain how to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console. Preparing the project Make the following settings as described in “Recording or playing back using DAW on a computer” on page 25. 1. Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard or Dante Accelerator Specify the audio format, network settings, and ASIO driver settings so that Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) or Dante Accelerator (DANTE-ACCEL) can be used. 2. Setting up Dante Controller Use Dante Controller to patch between the I/O device and DVS, and between DVS and the CL series console. Assign the signals from the I/O device to the various input ports of DVS. Patching can also be specified from the CL series console. NOTE Separately, route the signals from I/O devices to the channels on the CL series console. (see page 138) In this case, the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the CL series console must be switched when changing between multi-track recording and multi-track playback. Switching will be easy if you’ve stored the respective settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY (see page 139). 3. Setting up Nuendo Live When you start Nuendo Live and create a new project, a track for each channel specified for DVS will be created automatically. In addition, the tracks will automatically use the channel names and color information as specified on the CL series console. Make the following settings in Nuendo Live. • In Setup button → Audio System, select DVS or DANTE-ACCEL as the driver. NOTE For details on the settings of each software program, refer to the manual for that software. 188 Reference Manual Recorder 6 Location information display Recording into a project 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button to access the RECORDER screen. 2. Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the screen. The Nuendo Live screen will appear. This displays information for the current location of the Nuendo Live project. You can press the button at the right to switch the time display format. 7 GO TO PROJECT START button Returns the location to the start of the project. 8 GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button Returns the location to the previous marker. 9 GO TO NEXT MARKER button Advances the location to the next marker. 1 0 GO TO PROJECT END button Advances the location to the end of the project. 2 A CYCLE button Turns repeat on/off for the project. B STOP button 3 Stops playback/recording of the project. C PLAY button 4 G Starts playback of the project. 5 D RECORD button Starts/stops recording of the project. 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D H EI E EASY RECORDING button Immediately starts recording all tracks. Pressing this button will reset the current location to the end point of the latest recording, place all tracks in recording mode, start recording, and then display and lock the recording panel. Recording will start retroactively by the specified time duration (default: 10 seconds). F The screen shows the following items. F Record lock button 1 Nuendo meter display field Turns recording status lock on/off. This prevents recording from being accidentally stopped during recording. This shows the channel levels of Nuendo Live. 2 PEAK CLEAR button G DVS information display Clears the peak levels indicated by the peak hold function. Shows the device label of the selected DVS. 3 Marker list field H ADD MARKER button Lists the marker information recorded in the current Nuendo Live project. The markers can be selected by pressing the on-screen list or by using the multifunction knobs. Adds a marker to the project at the current location. I RECALL LINK button 4 Nuendo Live SETUP button Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene. If this function is turned on, the button will be lit. Specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with Nuendo Live. (see page 190) NOTE 5 DANTE INPUT PATCH button Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys. (see page 169) Press this to access the DANTE INPUT PATCH screen (see page 138). 189 Reference Manual Recorder 3. Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording. 4. When you have finished recording, press the record lock button and then the STOP button. ■ When setup method selection button = DVS To choose from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DVS button to display the DEVICE LIST field. Specifying DVS or DANTE-ACCEL 1. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the NUENDO Live SETUP button. The NUENDO LIVE SETUP popup window will appear. NOTE • Even if the CL’s CONSOLE ID is set to something other than #1, you can still specify DVS or DANTE-ACCEL in the NUENDO Live SETUP screen. • However, you must not select the same DVS or DANTE-ACCEL from more than one CL console. 1 1 2 This screen contains the following items. 1 DEVICE LIST Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network. From the list, choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live. 2 DEVICE LIST select knob Operate the multi-function knob to choose the DVS that you want to select. 1 Setup method selection buttons Use these buttons to select one of the following methods to specify DVS or DANTE-ACCEL. • NO ASSIGN............................... Not assigned • DVS ............................................. Select a DVS from the device list • SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS ...... When using DANTE-ACCEL, specify the IP address of the PC 190 Reference Manual Recorder ■ When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS If you’re using DANTE-ACCEL, use the SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS field to specify the IP address of the PC. Since the IP address of DANTE-ACCEL will differ from the IP address used by CL Extension, you must specify the IP address manually. NOTE Depending on the firmware version, DANTE-ACCEL might not support redundant networking. Refer to the following website to check whether your version of the DANTE-ACCEL (Dante Accelerator) firmware supports redundant networking. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ 2. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the NUENDO LIVE SET UP popup window. 1 This screen contains the following items. 1 IP ADDRESS knobs Use the multifunction knobs to specify the IP address. NOTE • As the IP address, specify the IP address of the PC that is running Nuendo Live. • Set the address of that PC in the range of 169.254.0.0 – 169.254.255.255, and set the subnet mask as 255.255.0.0. • For the PC in which DANTE-ACCEL is installed, the Dante port of DANTE-ACCEL as well as the Ethernet port of the PC must both be connected to the same network. Refer to the illustration below. PC DANTE-ACCEL CL SW (Primary) Ethernet P S Dante SW (Secondary) P S 191 Reference Manual Recorder Playing a multi-track project 1. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button. 2. Assign the signals from Nuendo Live to the desired DANTE1–DANTE64 ports. For example, press the PORT SELECT button for DANTE1. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear. 3. In the list at the left, select the DVS you’re using with Nuendo Live, and select the port that you want to assign to DANTE1. 4. Press the + button located in the upper part of the screen to switch to DANTE2, and assign a DVS port to it in the same way. 5. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to exit the screen. 6. Press the “X” symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to close it. NOTE If you’ve saved the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library, it will be easy to switch the settings on the CL series console (see page 139). 7. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the START button. 8. Operate the channels so that sound is output. 9. To stop playback, press the STOP button. 192 Reference Manual Help function Help function 4. To select the Help file (file extension: .xml) that you want to load, press one of the Help files in the file list, or turn the multifunction knob on the panel. You can view Help files provided by Yamaha, or display any user-created text file. 5. Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files created by a third party other than Yamaha. 6. Press the OK button to load the file. Loading a Help file from a USB flash drive Loading a text file from a USB flash drive NOTE 1. A help file for only one language is stored in the console’s internal memory. Once you load the help file, it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off. The first time you press the HELP button to view the help file after turning the power on, it will take a while for the help file to be loaded from internal memory. It is not possible to read from internal memory while the USB flash drive is being accessed, including while the recorder is recording or playing back, and therefore Help cannot be displayed during this time. Once the data has finished loading, subsequently pressing the HELP button will display the help file instantly. 1. Before you proceed, save the Help file (file extension: .xml) provided by Yamaha on your USB flash drive. For the latest information on help files, refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ 2. 3. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. Using a commercially available text editor or the “Notepad” included with Microsoft Windows, create a text file (file extension: .txt) and save it on your USB flash drive. By default, the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However, by adding a line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force recognition of the file using that character code set. You can specify the desired character code set when using your text editor to save the text file. The Help function is able to display the following text files (character code sets/languages). • Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.) • Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set (Japanese) • Text files of the above languages written in the UTF-8 character code set. The maximum size of the text file is 1024 Kbytes. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 193 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. Press the SAVE/LOAD button to access the SAVE/LOAD popup window. 4. To select the text file you want to load, press one of the text files in the file list or turn the multifunction knob on the panel. 5. Press the LOAD button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. 6. Press the OK button to load the file. Reference Manual Help function Viewing Help Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly 1. Before you proceed, load the Help file or text file from your USB flash drive. 1. Before you proceed, load the Help file from your USB flash drive. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the popup window. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. By turning multifunction knobs 1–2 you can scroll the index area at the left. By turning multifunction knobs 3–8 you can scroll the main area at the right. 3. In the upper left of the screen, press the USER SETUP button to access the USER SETUP popup window. 4. By pressing a link (underlined text) in the text, you can scroll to the linked destination. By pressing a window link (a location with an → symbol and underlined text), you can close the HELP popup window and open the corresponding window. 5. You can also scroll by using the buttons in the tool bar as needed. • button................Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently-displayed location. 6. (Help) button to access the HELP • button................Returns to the preceding item in the history of links you pressed. • button................Proceeds to the subsequent item in the history of links you pressed. To close the window, press the (Help) button of the Function Access Area or the “x” symbol of the HELP popup window. 194 Reference Manual Help function 4. ■ Recalling the HELP popup window using only a USER DEFINED key Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab to select the USER DEFINED KEYS page. 9. Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. The HELP popup window will appear. 10. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. ■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller 5. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Help function. 6. In the FUNCTION column, choose “HELP” and press the OK button. 7. When you have finished assigning functions to USER DEFINED keys, press the × symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page. 8. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen. 9. While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press (or rotate) the panel controller for which you want to recall Help. Panel controllers (other than the faders) will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. 10. If the corresponding controller has an explanation associated with it, the HELP popup window will appear, and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding item. If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat step 9 to successively display these explanations. 11. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. ■ Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen 195 9. While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press the on-screen controller for which you want to recall Help. The on-screen buttons and tabs will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. 10. If there is a corresponding Help item, the HELP popup window will appear and you will automatically scroll to the corresponding item. If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, close the HELP popup window and then repeat step 9 to successively view these explanations. 11. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. Reference Manual Other functions 3 COMMENT EDIT popup button Other functions Press this button to open the USER COMMENT EDIT popup window, in which you can enter comments. This chapter explains various functions of CL series consoles that are not covered in other chapters. 4 PASSWORD CHANGE popup button Press this button to open the PASSWORD CHANGE popup window, in which you can change the password. About the SETUP screen 5 SAVE KEY popup button The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire CL console. To access the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. The screen contains the following items. 1 3 2 54 6 Enables you to save the user authentication key. Press this button to open the SAVE KEY popup window. (see page 165) 7 ■ STORAGE field This field enables you to create, save, or load a user authentication key. 6 CREATE USER KEY popup button Press this button to open the CREATE USER KEY popup window, in which you can create a new user authentication key. 7 SAVE/LOAD popup button 8 A Press this button to open the SAVE/LOAD popup window, in which you can save or load user authentication keys and console files. B ■ SYSTEM SETUP field This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the CL console. D 9 0 E G F C 8 +48V MASTER button Switches the console’s master +48V master phantom power on or off. If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on. NOTE This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs (I/O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting. H I 9 WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup button J Press this button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup window, in which you can make word clock settings and various settings for each slot. ■ CURRENT USER field This field enables you to make various user-related settings. 0 CASCADE popup button Press this button to open the CASCADE popup window, in which you can make patch settings for cascade connections. 1 USER SETUP popup button Press this button to open the USER SETUP popup window, in which you can make various settings for each user. A OUTPUT PORT popup button Press this button to open the OUTPUT PORT popup window, in which you can make output port settings. 2 CURRENT USER popup button Press this button to open the LOG IN popup window, in which you can switch log-in users. 196 Reference Manual Other functions ■ CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field This field enables you to set the LCD brightness and contrast. B MIDI/GPI popup button Press this button to open the MIDI/GPI popup window, in which you can make MIDI and GPIrelated settings. H BANK A/BANK B buttons C DANTE SETUP button Select a bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can save two different settings in bank A and B, and switch between them if desired. Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window. This window enables you to make various audio network settings (console ID setting; SECONDARY PORT functionality setting; audio bit rate; latency setting; selections for devices controlled via the I/O DEVICE screen). I CONTRAST NAME knob Adjusts the contrast of the channel name display. ■ BUS SETUP field This field enables you to make bus-related settings. J BRIGHTNESS NAME knob Adjusts the brightness of the channel name display. D BUS SETUP popup button BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR knob Adjusts the brightness balance of the channel color and the channel name display. Press this button to open the BUS SETUP popup window, in which you can make MIX bus/ MATRIX bus-related settings. BRIGHTNESS SCREEN knob Adjusts the brightness of the display. ■ DATE/TIME popup button Press this button to open the DATE/TIME popup window, in which you can set the date and time. BRIGHTNESS PANEL knob Adjusts the brightness of the panel LEDs. ■ NETWORK popup button Press this button to open the NETWORK popup window, in which you can set the network address. BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector. ■ Indicator field This field displays various information about the console’s status. E BATTERY indicator Indicates the status of the internal battery. NOTE The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. In this case, immediately contact your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual (separate document) to have the backup battery replaced. F POWER SUPPLY indicator Indicates the currently-running power supply: INT (internal) or EXT (PW800). G Version indicator Indicates the version number of the main CPU, sub CPU, and DANTE module. ■ CONSOLE LOCK button This button executes the Console Lock function. If the console password has been set, pressing this button will open the AUTHORIZATION popup window. Enter the correct password to execute Console Lock. If the console password has not been set, pressing this button will execute the Console Lock immediately. 197 Reference Manual Other functions 2. Word clock and slot settings “Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing. To send and receive digital audio signals between devices, those devices must be synchronized to the same word clock. If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state, the data may not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same. Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the entire system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock slaves) so that they synchronize to the word clock master. If you wish to use the CL series console as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source (the port through which the word clock is obtained). This section explains how to select the clock source that the CL series console will use. 1. In the SYSTEM SETUP field at the center of the screen, press the WORD CLOCK/ SLOT SETUP button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP popup window. This popup window contains the following items. 3 1 2 In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. ■ MASTER CLOCK SELECT field 1 Master clock frequency display Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) of the currently-selected master clock. If the unit is not synching to the master clock, “UNLOCK” will appear. NOTE If sample rate pull-up/down has been specified in the Dante Controller application, this area indicates the change in the sample rate as a percentage, such as –4.0%, –0.1%, +4.0%, 4.1667%, etc. 2 Master clock select buttons Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock master from the following options: • INT 48 k • INT 44.1 k The CL console internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) will be the clock source. • WORD CLOCK IN The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source. 198 Reference Manual Other functions ■ SLOT SETUP field This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the console. • DANTE 48 k • DANTE 44.1 k The word clock supplied from the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source. 3 2 4 1 • SLOT 1–3 The word clock supplied via a digital I/O card installed in a console slot will be used as the clock source. Word clock can be selected in pairs for each slot. 1 Card name 3 Clock status display Indicates the type of card installed in the slot. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear. Indicates the status of synchronization with the master clock for each clock source. Each indicator is explained below: 2 SRC buttons The SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function can be switched on or off for a slot in which an MY card (MY8-AE96S) that features the SRC function is installed. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, no SRC button will appear. • LOCK (light blue) Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is occurring properly between that device and the CL series console. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized. 3 FREQUENCY display Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear. • LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow) A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the CL series console. 4 EMPHASIS STATUS display Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear. • SRC ON (green) This is a special status applied only to SLOT 1–3, indicating that the corresponding channel’s SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) is enabled. This means that even if the signal is not synchronized, normal input/output with the CL series console is occurring. 3. In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field, select a clock source. • UNLOCK (red) A valid clock is being input, but the CL series console is not synchronized to the selected clock. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, it will be unable to communicate properly with the CL console. 4. To close the WORD CLOCK/SLOT popup window, press the “x” symbol located in the upper right. You will return to the SETUP screen. • UNKNOWN (black) This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established. If the indicator for the port selected as the clock source has turned light blue, and the clock frequency appears in the upper left of the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field, this indicates that the CL series console is operating correctly with the new clock. 5. To close the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. NOTE • If the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data. • Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. To protect your speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock setting. • If you attempt to select a channel (for which SRC is on) as the word clock source, a message will appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled. 199 Reference Manual Other functions Using cascade connections Operations on a cascade slave CL unit Using multiple CL series consoles, or a CL console and an external mixing console (such as a Yamaha PM5D) in a cascade connection enable buses to be shared among the devices. This can be convenient if you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs. This section explains cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two CL units are connected in a cascade configuration. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup window. This window enables you to select an I/O port used for cascade connections. The window consists of two pages: The CASCADE IN PATCH page and the CASCADE OUT PATCH page. To switch pages, press the corresponding tab at the bottom of the window. 3. Press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab to access the CASCADE OUT PATCH page. In this screen you can select the slot and output port that will output each bus. About cascade connections To cascade two CL series consoles, you must first install digital I/O cards in the appropriate slots, and connect the output ports of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports of the receiving unit (the cascade master). The following illustration shows an example in which three eight-channel digital I/O cards for each unit are installed in the cascade slave CL unit and in the cascade master CL unit. The DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit. 2 Audio signals of unit A Audio signals of A+B DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN CL A CL B (Cascade slave) (Cascade master) 3 1 Digital I/O card In this example, up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1–24, MATRIX bus 1–8, STEREO bus (L/R), MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master CL unit. (If you use three 16-ch digital I/O cards, all buses can be shared among the devices.) You must specify bus assignments for each or channel on each CL unit. Separate procedures are outlined below for the cascade slave and the cascade master. 1 Port select popup buttons (CASCADE OUT PATCH section) Enable you to select the output port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1– 8, STEREO L/R, MONO, and CUE L/R buses. Press the button to open the PORT SELECT popup window, in which you can select a port. NOTE • If you are making a cascade connection between the CL unit and the PM5D, you can use the CL unit as the cascade slave by setting the PM5D’s CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot. However, only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked. • You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer. • There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at the cascade slave will increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade master. 2 CASCADE LINK MODE buttons Specify whether only cue operations will be linked, or all linkable operations including scene store/recall operations will also be linked when CL series consoles are cascade-connected. 3 CASCADE COMM PORT buttons Specify the communication port used for transmitting and receiving link information when operations such as cue and scene store/recall are linked between cascade-connected CL series consoles. 200 Reference Manual Other functions 4. 7. Press the port select popup button for the bus for which you want to assign the port. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear. If you want to use the Cascade Link function to link parameters and events between two CL consoles, proceed as follows. 7–1. Use the CASCADE COMM PORT field to select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link. You can choose from the following items. • NONE .......... No link operation • MIDI............ Use MIDI port • SLOT1 ......... Use SLOT1 NOTE 2 Control signals for cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings. 1 7–2. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link. You can choose from the following items. • OFF No link operation • CUE The following cue-related parameters and events will be linked. • Cue enable/disable • Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE) • Cue point settings for input channels and output channels This popup window contains the following items. 1 Category select list Selects the port (slot 1–3) that will be shown on the screen. 2 Port select buttons • ALL All linkable parameters and events (including cue-related parameters) will be linked. • Cue-related parameters and events (see above) • Scene recall operations • Scene store operations • DIMMER (MONITOR screen) operations • Panel LED and display brightness (SETUP screen) operations • Master mute group operations Within the specified slot, these buttons select the ports that will be patched. 5. Use the category select list and port select buttons to select the desired slot and output ports, and then press the CLOSE button. The port will be assigned to the selected bus. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses. NOTE You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a port to which a signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be canceled. 8. 201 To close the CASCADE popup window, press the CLOSE button. Reference Manual Other functions Operations on the cascade master CL unit Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button to open the CASCADE popup window. This section explains how to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the send point from which the signal of an input channel will be sent. The settings you make in the following procedure will be saved as part of the scene. 3. Press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab to access the CASCADE IN PATCH page. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 4. Press the port select popup button for the bus to which you want to assign a port. The PORT SELECT popup window will appear. 2. 5. Use the category select list and port select buttons to select the desired slot and input ports, and then press the CLOSE button. The port will be assigned to the selected bus. In the center right of the SETUP screen, press the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP popup window. In the BUS SETUP popup window you can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign ports to other buses. If desired, you can assign two or more buses to the same input port. 7. If you want to link specific parameters or events between two CL series consoles, proceed as follows. 1 2 4 1 3 4 7–1. Use the CASCADE COMM PORT field to select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link. The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window (see page 200). NOTE Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings. MIX 1–16 page 7–2. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link. The items you can select are the same as in the CASCADE OUT PATCH popup window (see page 200). 8. MIX BUS 17–24/MATRIX BUS page 1 SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons Select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses. Select either STEREO (stereo signal) or MONOx2 (monaural signal x 2). To close the CASCADE popup window, press the CLOSE button. In this state, the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master, and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade master. If the Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified operations or parameter changes performed on either CL series console will be followed by the other CL console. 2 Bus type/send point select buttons (MIX bus only) For every adjacent pair of buses, you can select the bus type and (for vari-type) the send point. These buttons correspond to the following parameters. Button 202 Bus type Pre-fader send point VARI [PRE EQ] VARI Immediately before the EQ VARI [PRE FADER] VARI Immediately before the fader FIXED FIXED --- Reference Manual Other functions 3 Send point select buttons (MATRIX bus only) Switching the entire phantom power supply on/ off Select the pre-fader send point from the input channel. These buttons correspond to the following parameters. Button Pre-fader send point PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ PRE FADER Immediately before the fader 1. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the +48V MASTER field’s ON button or OFF button. If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on. 4 PAN LINK button This button appears only if two adjacent buses are paired in stereo and the bus type is set to VARI. If the button is on, the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the corresponding two buses will link with the STEREO bus pan setting. 3. Use the MIX1-16 tab and MIX17-24/MATRIX tab to access the buses whose settings you want to edit. 4. Use the buttons in the SIGNAL TYPE field to specify whether each bus will function as STEREO (main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels). 5. Use the buttons of the PRE FADER SEND POINT/BUS TYPE field to select the position from which the signal of the input channel will be sent. In the case of a MIX bus, you can use this field to switch the type of bus (VARI or FIXED). 6. As desired, turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off. In the PAN LINK field, you can specify whether the panning of the signal routed from an input channel to the stereo bus will be linked with operation of the INPUT TO ST PAN knob (if the input channel’s SIGNAL TYPE is set to STEREO and BUS TYPE is set to VARI). • If the PAN LINK button is on: If the send-destination bus is stereo, the PAN knob that appears in the location of the SEND LEVEL knob on the screens for input channels will be linked with the INPUT TO ST PAN knob. NOTE • If the PAN LINK button is off: The PAN knob that appears in the location of the SEND LEVEL knob of input channels in various screens is not linked with INPUT TO ST PAN; it can be operated independently. This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs (I/O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting. 203 Reference Manual Other functions Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps Setting the date and time of the internal clock This section explains how to set the date and time of the CL console’s internal clock, and how to select the date and time display format. The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene. Follow the steps below to specify the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors. 1. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. Use the multifunction knobs to set the following parameters. In the field located in the right of the bottom row of the SETUP screen, press the BANK A or BANK B button. You can save two different brightness settings in bank A and B, and switch between them rapidly if desired. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the DATE/TIME button to access the DATE/ TIME popup window. This popup window includes the following items. CONTRAST field • NAME .........................Adjusts the contrast of the characters in the channel name displays on the top panel. 1) DATE Specifies the date of the internal clock. 2) TIME Specifies the time of the internal clock. BRIGHTNESS field • NAME .........................Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel. This will also change the CH COLOR brightness. If you want to adjust the CH COLOR brightness after setting the name display brightness, use the CH COLOR knob. • CH COLOR................Adjusts the brightness of the channel colors on the top panel. This lets you apply a relative adjustment to only the channel color brightness without changing the channel name display brightness. • SCREEN......................Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. If the brightness is set to lower than level 2, the CL will start up next time with a brightness setting of 2 so that you will be able to see the screen. • PANEL ........................Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs. If the optional MBCL meter bridge is installed on the CL3/CL1, this knob setting will also affect the LEDs on the meter bridge. NOTE 3) FORMAT Specifies the format in which the time of the internal clock is displayed. 3. • Date MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year) DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year) YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day) • Time 24-Hour (hours shown in the range of 0–23) 12-Hour (hours shown from 0am–11am, and 0pm– 11pm) If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR’s LEDs will also change. • LAMP ..........................Adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks. 4. In the FORMAT field, press the MODE buttons several times to select the desired format for date and time display. You can select from the following display formats. If desired, switch between banks A and B and make settings for the other bank in the same way. Now you can switch between the BANK A and BANK B buttons to change the brightness of the touch screen, LCD, channel name displays, and lamps in a single operation. You can also assign this parameter to a USER DEFINED key, and press that key to switch between banks A and B. 204 4. Use multifunction knobs 1–6 on the top panel to specify the current date and time. 5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button. The date, time, and display format you specified will be finalized, and the popup window will close. If you press the CANCEL button or the “x” symbol instead of the OK button, your changes will be discarded and the popup window will close. Reference Manual Other functions 3. Setting the network address This section explains how to set the network address that will be required when you use the NETWORK connector on the CL series console to connect it to a computer. NOTE Only the Administrator can change network settings. 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the NETWORK button to access the NETWORK popup window. 1 Press the on-screen knob or the multifunction knobs on the top panel to specify the address. If you plan to connect the CL series console to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we recommend that you use the following default values. Make sure that the IP address and Gateway address do not match the addresses of any other device on the network. IP address: 192.168.0.128 or similar Gateway address: 192.168.0.1 or similar Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 or similar For details on settings related to connecting to a LAN, refer to the CL Editor Installation Guide. 4. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button. If you changed the setting, a confirmation dialog box will appear. 5. To make the setting, press the OK button. The changes will be finalized, and the popup screen will close. If you decide to cancel the change, press the CANCEL button instead of the OK button. 3 2 4 1 IP ADDRESS Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network. NOTE In order for the change to take effect, you must power-off the CL series console and then turn it on again. 2 GATEWAY ADDRESS Specifies an address that identifies a device (gateway) that converts data between different media or protocols to allow communication within the network. 6. Restart the CL series console. 3 SUBNET MASK Within the IP address used in the network, this defines the bits that are used for the network address that distinguishes the network. 4 MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC (Machine Access Control) address, which identifies a host in a network. This address is for display only, and cannot be edited. NOTE The NETWORK connector on the CL series console transmits data via either 100BASE-TX (transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps). 205 Reference Manual Other functions Initializing the unit to factory default settings If an error occurs in the CL console internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot operate the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory. 3. A dialog box will ask you to confirm the initialization. Press the INITIALIZE button. A dialog box will ask you to reconfirm the operation. 4. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box. The Initialization operation starts. NOTICE The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory! NOTE Do not press any buttons until initialization is complete. Proceed with the following operation only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory. 1. 5. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. A message indicates that the initialization process is complete. Press the EXIT button. The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode. NOTE Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. 2. Press one of the following buttons, depending on the type of initialization you want to perform. • INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES The entire memory, including scene memories and libraries, will be returned to factory default settings. • INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES The contents of memory — except for scene memories and libraries — will be returned to its factory default settings. 206 Reference Manual Other functions 2. Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) Press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button. The TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to calibrate the touch screen. Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen. 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. NOTE If you are unable to access the calibration screen by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button, you can use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC ] keys to select TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION, and then press the [STORE] key to start. 3. Press the START button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. 4. Press the OK button in the dialog box. 5. A cross-shaped cursor will appear in the screen a total of three times. Press each location at which it appears. NOTE To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and posture in which you normally operate the unit. 6. Press the EXIT button. The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode. NOTE Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. 207 Reference Manual Other functions Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) 2. Press the FADER CALIBRATION button. The FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, enabling you to adjust the faders. The specified faders in the channel strip section, Centralogic section, and Master section will be semi-automatically calibrated. This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the CL is starting up. 3. Press a [SEL] key to specify the faders that you want to calibrate. Faders for which a problem was detected at start-up will already be selected. 4. Press the START button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. 5. Press the OK button in the dialog box. 6. Each of the specified faders will move to the target positions in the following sequence. Manually adjust the faders to the correct positions. 1 –∞ dB (all the way down) 2 –20 dB 3 0 dB 4 +10 dB (all the way up) 7. After you adjust the fader position, press the [NEXT] button. The process will proceed to the next fader position. Depending on the environment in which you use the CL series console, discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies. NOTE For information about adjusting the input gain or the detection point of the touch screen, refer to the appropriate sections in this chapter. 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. 208 Reference Manual Other functions 8. Repeat steps 6–7 to adjust the faders for positions 1 through 4. After the positions are corrected, automatic motorized calibration will start. Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) 9. When calibration is complete and if the RESTART button has not appeared, press the APPLY button. The calibration settings will be saved in internal memory. If the RESTART button appears, calibration has failed. Press the RESTART button to execute calibration once again. If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain. 10. 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. After the opening screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. 2. In the MODE SELECT field, select the item you want to adjust, and then press the button. The corresponding setting screen will appear. You can make the following three gain adjustments for analog input and output. Press the EXIT button. The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode. NOTE Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. 209 Reference Manual Other functions • INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain) Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog input port in 0.1 dB steps. • SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the slot output port gain) Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the output ports of the specified slot in 0.01 dB steps. • OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the output port gain) Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog output port in 0.01 dB steps. 3. Press an on-screen knob to select it, and then use the corresponding multifunction knob to adjust the value. If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen, all settings in the screen will be reset to 0 dB. The factory settings are also 0 dB. 4. Press the EXIT button. The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode. NOTE Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. 210 Reference Manual Other functions 2. Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function) If necessary, you can adjust the channel color. 1. Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button. The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the channel color. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. After the welcome screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 3. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to adjust the color. NOTE Only one can be selected. Multiple selections are not possible. 211 4. Press one of the color buttons on screen to select the desired color. All channel color indicators turn the selected color. The currently-selected color button on screen will be surrounded by a white frame. 5. While comparing the color of the selected channel’s indicator with the color of the other channel indicators (for which the [SEL] keys are turned off), use the three right-most multifunction knobs to adjust the color. The RGB values in the RGB ADJUSTMENT field change accordingly. Reference Manual Other functions 6. Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display When you have finished adjusting the color, press the APPLY button located on the right of the window to confirm the change. If necessary, you can adjust the brightness of the channel name display. NOTE 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key of the panel, turn on the power. After the welcome screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. 2. Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button. The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the channel color. 3. Press the [CUE] key or [ON] key of the channel whose brightness you want to adjust. Pressing the [CUE] key will increase the brightness, and pressing the [ON] key will decrease the brightness. 4. When you have finished adjusting the brightness, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change. 5. Press the EXIT button. The CL will start up in normal operating mode. The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB values. 7. 8. To reset all channel color indicators to the factory default setting, press the RESET ALL button. Press the EXIT button. The CL unit will start up in normal operating mode. NOTE Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. NOTE Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. 212 Reference Manual Other functions Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display Dante audio network settings You will use the CL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself and the I/O devices connected to the Dante connector of the CL series console. This section explains how to make Dante audio network settings. If necessary, you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display. 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key of the panel, turn on the power. After the welcome screen, the following startup menu screen will appear. 2. Press the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION button. The CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen will appear, allowing you to adjust the channel color. 3. Hold down a [SEL] key on the panel, and turn multi-function knob 1 in the Centralogic section. Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels; turning it toward the right will darken the contrast of all channels. 4. If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other channels, hold down the [SEL] key of the desired channel and press its [CUE] key or [ON] key. Pressing the [CUE] key will darken the contrast, and pressing the [ON] key will lighten the contrast. 5. When you have finished adjusting the contrast, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change. Setting up a Dante audio network NOTE The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting. 6. 1. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the DANTE field at the center of the screen, press the DANTE SETUP button to open the DANTE SETUP popup window. Press the EXIT button. The CL will start up in normal operating mode. NOTE Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. 213 Reference Manual Other functions 3. 5 BIT select buttons In the upper part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen, press the SETUP tab to access the SETUP field. Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24-bit or 32-bit. NOTE 1 24bit: Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an Rio unit. When using a CL series system, you will normally use this setting. 32bit: This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25-bit or larger data (when using cascade or gain compensation), but the amount of data being transmitted will increase 20–30% compared to 24-bit. 2 6 LATENCY select buttons 3 Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, or 5.0 ms. The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size. For details, refer to “Setting the Dante audio network latency” on page 215. 4 5 7 7 DANTE PATCH BY select buttons Use these select buttons when using Dante Controller to make Dante patch settings. If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT PATCH settings can be edited from the CL series console. If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, it will not be possible to edit the Dante patch settings. You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons on other CL series consoles on the network. 6 NOTE This screen contains the following items. • Settings that are shared with the I/O device (BIT/LATENCY/W.CLOCK) will reflect the settings of the CL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to #1. • If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section, and you attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings, the message “This Operation is Not Allowed” will appear at the bottom of the screen. 1 CONSOLE ID select buttons Set the IDs for the CL series consoles. If five or more CL units are connected to a network, and you plan not to assign IDs to some of the units, press the OFF button of each of those units to turn off the ID. 2 SECONDARY PORT select buttons Specify how the Dante audio network is configured. 3 CANCEL button When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, you can press this button to cancel the changes you made. 4 APPLY button After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, press this button to apply the changes you made. 214 Reference Manual Other functions Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT 1. In the SETUP field, select the CONSOLE ID and the SECONDARY PORT. Setting the Dante audio network latency An appropriate latency setting for signals sent and received via a Dante audio network varies depending on the network connection method and size. This section explains how to set an appropriate latency setting depending on the connection method of Dante-enabled devices that are connected to the CL series console. The button you switched is shown in red. ■ Relationship between the switches and the number of hops An appropriate latency setting on a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of hops in the network. One hop is the step from one router (switch) to the next. You count the number of hops starting from the master device to the most distant device (assuming that all devices are connected in series). Switches mean network switches and routers, as well as the switches that are built into CL series consoles and I/O devices. Set the latency value based on the number of hops. The following table shows typical latency settings based on the number of hops. Number of hops Latency (ms) Up to 3 0.25 Up to 5 0.5 Up to 10 1.0 11 or more (or if a problem occurs) 5.0 NOTE 2. • Depending on network conditions, you may need to raise the latency value even if the number of hops is small. • If a problem occurs, select 5.0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting is the cause of the problem. Press the APPLY button. A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the change to the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT. ■ Connection examples and latency settings Daisy chain connections Simple 64-in/48-out 3 2 2 3 3. To execute the change, press the OK button. The network audio module will be rebooted in order to change the settings. When the Dante audio network settings have been applied, the button you selected will return to its original appearance. NOTE • If you change the SECONDARY PORT, you must also change the method of connection between the CL series console and the I/O devices. For example if the connections used for the REDUNDANT setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN, it will become impossible to send and receive audio. Be sure to disconnect the cables before you change the setting. • The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the CL series console. 1 3 hops = 0.25 ms 215 1 3 hops = 0.25 ms Reference Manual Other functions Daisy chain connections FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out. Redundant connections FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out. 4 3 2 3 2 4 3 1 1 2 1 4 hops = 0.5 ms 4 hops = 0.5 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms Redundant connections Simple 64-in/48-out Daisy chain connections 256-ch HA remote (maximum size) 9 3 8 3 4 7 6 4 5 4 1 2 2 3 2 4 hops = 0.5 ms 1 9 hops = 1.0 ms 216 1 4 hops = 0.5 ms Reference Manual Other functions Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network Redundant connections Two consoles are sharing 256-ch HA remote (maximum size) Here’s how to select which of the multiple I/O devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 24 units can be mounted for one CL series console. 1. In the lower part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen, press the DEVICE MOUNT tab to access the DEVICE MOUNT field. 1 4 2 5 3 1 2 5 hops = 0.5 ms 3 This screen contains the following items. 1 CLEAR ALL button Clears all I/O devices in the list to an unmounted state. 2 REFRESH button Updates the displayed list of I/O devices on the Dante audio network. 3 I/O device select buttons Press one of the buttons to open the DEVICE SELECT popup window. The upper line of the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing. 217 Reference Manual Other functions 2. ■ When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST To mount by choosing from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DEVICE LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field. Press an I/O device select button to access the DEVICE SELECT popup window. 1 3 1 2 1 Setup method selection buttons Choose one of the following methods for mounting the I/O device. • NO ASSIGN............................... Not mounted • DEVICE LIST............................ Select and mount from the device list • SUPPORTED DEVICE............ Select and mount a supported device • DVS ............................................. Enter a device label and mount (only for DVS) • MANUAL ................................... Enter a device label and mount This screen contains the following items. 1 DEVICE LIST Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network. From the list, choose the I/O device that you want to mount. 2 DEVICE LIST select knob Use the multi-function knob to select the I/O device that you want to mount. 3 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs Use the multi-function knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio network. If the selected I/O device is supported by the CL series, the number of inputs and outputs will be entered automatically. 218 Reference Manual Other functions ■ When the setup method select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE If you want to select and mount an I/O device that is supported by the CL series, press the SUPPORTED DEVICE button to see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field. These settings can be made even when not connected to a Dante audio network. NOTE • If there is one I/O device, set the I/O device’s UNIT ID to “1”. • If multiple devices are connected, assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between devices. • For devices other than the Rio series, it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned to the same ID as an Rio series unit or the same ID as a different model of device. However since the I/O device input/output port screen shows the UNIT ID, this will make it difficult to distinguish between the units, so we recommend that whenever possible, you avoid allowing the ID numbers to overlap. • If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit screen etc. (such as the Dante-MY16-AUD card or DANTE-ACCEL), and you want to use that device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE, you must change its device label via Dante Controller. • The Dante-MY16-AUD and DANTE-ACCEL will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you assign the device label as follows. Dante-MY16-AUD: Y###-Audinate-DANTE-MY16****** DANTE-ACCEL: Y###-Yamaha-DANTE-ACCEL******* # is a three-digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0–9 and uppercase A–F (000– FFF) * indicates any desired character (alphabetical uppercase or lowercase, numerals, or (hyphen) may be used) • If you are controlling the CL console from an Rio series unit, we recommend that you set the Rio unit’s START UP MODE to “REFRESH.” Operation will be safer with the “REFRESH” setting, since mute will be cleared after synchronization has been completed with CL units whose system setting for REMOTE HA ASSIGN is set to “WITH RECALL.” With the “RESUME” setting, mute will be cleared and the unit will start operating with the settings that were backed up by the Rio series unit itself, which could allow unexpected audio to be output. • A single CL console can control the HA of up to eight Rio series units. If nine or more Rio series units are connected, you can either divide the HA control between multiple CL consoles, or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the Rio series units whose HA does not need to be controlled, and use them with START UP MODE set to “RESUME.” 3 1 4 2 This screen contains the following items. 1 DEVICE TYPE This area shows a list of the I/O device types that are supported by the CL series. From the list, choose the type of I/O device that you want to mount. 2 DEVICE TYPE select knob Use the multi-function knob to select the type of I/O device that you want to mount. 3 I/O device indication This area shows the selected I/O device. The upper line shows the front panel of the I/O device. The lower line shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. 4 UNIT ID knob Use the multifunction knobs to specify the UNIT ID. The indicator shows the UNIT ID. 219 Reference Manual Other functions ■ When setup method selection button = DVS REMOTE HA settings ■ When setup method selection button = MANUAL If you want to enter the device label of an I/O device and mount it, press the DVS or MANUAL button to access the DVS/MANUAL field. Here’s how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 8 units can be mounted for one CL series console. 1. In the lower part of the DANTE SETUP popup screen, press the REMOTE HA tab to access the REMOTE HA field. 3 1 2 2 1 3 This screen contains the following items. 1 DEVICE LABEL Displays the device label of the I/O device which you entered from the keyboard. This screen contains the following items. 2 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs 1 CLEAR ALL button Use the multi-function knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio network. Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state. 2 REFRESH button 3 Device label entry keyboard Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network. Use this keyboard to enter the device label of the I/O device. 3 HA device select buttons NOTE Press one of these buttons to open the REMOTE HA SELECT popup window. The upper line of the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the product name and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing. • If the I/O device is a DVS, mount it by pressing the DVS button. • If the device label you entered is detected automatically, the INPUT/OUTPUT knob settings will be ignored, and the rated number of inputs and outputs will be specified. 3. After you’ve selected the I/O device to mount, press the OK button to close the DEVICE SELECT popup window. 220 Reference Manual Other functions 2. Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) Press a HA device select button to access the REMOTE HA SELECT popup window. The rear panel GPI (General Purpose Interface) connector can be used as an input/output connector. This connector provides five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports. For example you can use an external switch to control internal parameters of the CL series console or to switch scenes. Conversely, operations or scene changes performed on the CL series console can send control signals to an external device. For details on how to send control signals to an external device when you switch scenes, refer to “Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)” on page 93. 1 2 Using GPI IN You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the CL series console from an external device. For example, you could use an external switch to turn the CL series console’s Talkback on/off, operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes. 3 1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector. 2. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. This screen contains the following items. 1 DEVICE LIST Shows a list of the HA devices on the Dante audio network. 2 with RECALL button If this button is on, the settings saved in the CL series console will be applied to the HA device when the CL series console starts up and when a scene is recalled. 3 DEVICE LIST select knob Use the multi-function knob to select the HA device that you want to mount. NOTE • Do not specify “with RECALL” if an HA device is shared by multiple CL series consoles and settings have already been made on a different CL series console. • The HA device can also be operated from a CL series console that is not set to “with RECALL.” 3. After you’ve selected the HA device to mount, press the OK button to close the REMOTE HA SELECT popup window. If you’ve changed the setting by pressing the “with RECALL” button, a confirmation dialog box will appear. To make the setting, press the OK button. 221 Reference Manual Other functions 3. 4. Press the MIDI/GPI button. The MIDI SETUP screen will appear. Press the GPI tab. The GPI page will appear. 3 1 2 1 GPI IN status indicator This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port. 2 POLARITY MODE select button This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port. ............ (Low active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is grounded. ............ (High active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is opened or when a high-level voltage is input. 3 GPI IN SETUP popup button Press this button to open the GPI IN SETUP popup window. The button shows the name of the currently selected function or parameter. 5. 222 Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port. For each port, select either low-active or high-active as appropriate for the specifications of the external device you’re using. Reference Manual Other functions 6. Using GPI OUT To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI IN SETUP popup button. The GPI IN SETUP popup window will appear. The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by performing operations on the CL series console. 1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector. 2. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. Press the MIDI/GPI button. The MIDI/GPI screen will appear. 4. Press the GPI tab. The GPI page will appear. 3 4 1 2 NOTE The items that can be selected are the same as for the USER DEFINED keys. 7. In each field, select the desired function or parameter. NOTE • With latched operation, the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is input from the external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of external switch. • With unlatched operation, the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch is at the high level or low level. In this case, you may use either a non-locking or a locking type of external switch as appropriate for your needs. 8. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button. You will return to the GPI screen. 9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 to specify functions and parameters for other ports. 1 GPI OUT status indicator NOTE This indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port. Settings in the GPI screen are common to all scenes. They can be saved as SETUP data. 2 POLARITY MODE select button This button selects the polarity of the GPI OUT port. ............ (Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active. ............ (Low active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active. 223 Reference Manual Other functions 3 GPI OUT SETUP popup button Press this button to open the GPI OUT SETUP popup window. The button shows the name of the currently selected function or parameter. 4 TEST button 7. In each field, select the desired function or parameter. 8. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button. 9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 to specify functions and parameters for other ports. While this is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control signal. 5. 6. Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port. For each port, select either low-active or high-active as appropriate for the specifications of the external device you’re using. Using FADER START Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate in tandem with fader operations. To assign a function or parameter, press the GPI OUT SETUP popup button. 1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector. 2. In the function access area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 3. Press the MIDI/GPI button. The MIDI/GPI screen will appear. You can assign the following functions. Function NO ASSIGN CUE ACTIVE Parameter --- CL console operation No assignment CUE ON Turn on the [CUE] key of the selected channel DCA ONLY Turn on the DCA [CUE] key INPUT ONLY Turn on the [CUE] key of an input channel OUTPUT ONLY Turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel GPI IN ACTIVE IND. PORT 1–PORT 5 The function assigned to GPI IN port 1–5 becomes active POWER ON --- The power of the CL series console is turned on USER DEF. KEY ACTIVE IND. USER DEFINED KEY 1– The function assigned to the USER DEFINED USER DEFINED KEY 16 key becomes active 224 Reference Manual Other functions 4. 4 THRESHOLD field Press the FADER START tab to access the FADER START page. The following items are displayed. • UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs These specify the level that will be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal. A trigger signal will be output when the fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level, or when the fader falls below the DOWNSTROKE level. If FADER TALLY is selected as the fader mode, UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE specify the level range for which a trigger signal will be output. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate these parameters. 1 NOTE 2 • The THRESHOLD values specified by the UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to all GPI OUT ports. However, you can individually choose the channel (fader) for each GPI OUT port. • Only the UPSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START, and only the DOWNSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP. If MODE is set to FADER TALLY, both the UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid. 3 5 MODE field Here you can select the mode of fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output from the GPI OUT port. You can choose from the following fader modes. 4 • NO ASSIGN Operating the fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output. • FADER START A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a point below it. 5 1 CLEAR ALL button • FADER STOP A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to 9.95 dB). Press this button to clear all selections. 2 OUTPUT DESTINATION field • FADER TALLY A trigger signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (–138.0 dB to 10.0 dB) from a point below it. This signal will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (–∞ dB to 9.95 dB) or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger. • GPI OUT1–GPI OUT5 buttons Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings. 3 Fader indicator This indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys of the console panel to select a fader. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 225 Reference Manual Other functions The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI OUT port will change in each fader mode when a fader is operated. In this example, UPSTROKE in the THRESHOLD field is set to –60.00, and DOWNSTROKE is set to –∞. (This illustration shows the case in which is selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port. If the polarity is , the polarity of the output signal will be reversed.) FADER START 250 msec FADER STOP 250 msec FADER TALLY NOTE At the high level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires high level, take it from the +5V power supply pin. However in this case, the amount of current is limited; for details, refer to the “Input/output characteristics” section in the separate Owner’s Manual. 5. For each GPI OUT port, specify the channel that will cause the external device to operate, and the type of operation. 6. When you have finished making settings, click the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the FADER MODE screen. 226 Reference Manual Appendices Appendices # EQ Library List # 01 Bass Drum 1 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz 1.25 10.0 0.90 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF G +8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON F 80.0 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 03 Snare Drum 1 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz 1.25 4.5 0.11 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz — 10.0 0.70 0.10 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz 1.25 0.28 PEAKING H.SHELF –2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz — 8.0 0.90 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB F 95.0 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz — 0.50 1.0 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz Q 09 E. Bass 1 10.0 PEAKING F Q 08 Percussion 1.4 L.SHELF G Q 07 High Hat — H.SHELF –0.5 dB Q 06 Cymbal 2.2 PEAKING F Q 05 Tom-tom 1 4.5 PEAKING G Q 04 Snare Drum 2 1.4 PEAKING — 4.5 0.56 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz Q — 5.0 4.5 — 11 Syn. Bass 1 +0.5 dB 4.00 kHz 0.10 5.0 6.3 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz 8.0 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz 1.6 8.0 2.2 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz — 8.0 0.90 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz 5.6 10.0 0.70 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz 0.18 10.0 6.3 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz 8.0 4.5 0.63 9.0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz 8.0 0.40 0.16 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz — 9.0 10.0 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 20 A. G. Stroke 1 0.10 PEAKING G Q 19 E. G. Dist. 2 H.SHELF +2.5 dB Q 18 E. G. Dist. 1 PEAKING 2.24 kHz Q 17 E. G. Crunch 2 PEAKING 0.0 dB Q 16 E. G. Crunch 1 PEAKING 112 Hz Q 15 E. G. Clean HIGH 112 Hz Q 14 Piano 2 H-MID +3.0 dB Q 13 Piano 1 L-MID F Q 12 Syn. Bass 2 LOW G Q PEAKING Q 02 Bass Drum 2 10 E. Bass 2 Parameter Title Parameter Title — 10.0 4.0 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 0.90 4.5 3.5 — 227 # Parameter Title 21 A. G. Stroke 2 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz Q 22 A. G. Arpeg. 1 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz — 4.5 4.5 0.125 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G 0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz — 7.0 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz 0.11 10.0 5.6 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz — 0.16 0.20 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 30 Total EQ 1 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz Q 31 Total EQ 2 7.0 PEAKING 190 Hz Q 29 Chorus & Harmo 0.70 PEAKING –0.5 dB Q 28 Female Vo. 2 2.0 PEAKING F Q 27 Female Vo. 1 2.8 PEAKING G Q 26 Male Vocal 2 — PEAKING –0.5 dB Q 25 Male Vocal 1 4.5 PEAKING F Q 24 Brass Sec. 9.0 PEAKING G Q 23 A. G. Arpeg. 2 — L.SHELF 7.0 2.2 5.6 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB F 95.0 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz Q 7.0 2.8 5.6 — Reference Manual Appendices # 32 Total EQ 3 34 Snare Drum 3 36 Piano 3 38 Piano High 40 Narrator HIGH PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 67.0 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz — 0.28 0.70 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz Q 2.0 10.0 0.40 0.40 PEAKING L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz — 4.5 2.8 0.10 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 90.0 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz Q — 4.5 1.25 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz 8.0 10.0 9.0 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz Q 39 Fine-EQ Cass H-MID L.SHELF Q 37 Piano Low L-MID +1.5 dB Q 35 Tom-tom 2 LOW G Q 33 Bass Drum 3 DYNAMICS Library List Parameter Title 10.0 6.3 2.2 0.10 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB F 75.0 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz Q — 4.5 1.8 — H.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 4.0 7.0 0.63 — # Title Type 1 Gate GATE 2 Ducking DUCKING 3 A. Dr. BD GATE 4 A. Dr. SN GATE 5 6 7 8 9 De-Esser Comp Expand Compander (H) Compander (S) DE-ESSER COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER-H COMPANDER-S 228 Parameter Threshold (dB) Range (dB) Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Frequency (kHz) Type Q Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) # Value –26 –56 0 2.56 331 –19 –22 93 1.20 S 6.32 S –11 –53 0 1.93 400 –8 –23 1 0.63 238 –8 2.00 HPF 1.6 –8 2.5 30 0.0 2 250 –23 1.7 1 3.5 2 70 –10 3.5 1 0.0 6 250 –8 4 25 0.0 24 180 Title Type 10 A. Dr. BD COMPRESSOR 11 A. Dr. BD COMPANDER-H 12 A. Dr. SN COMPRESSOR 13 A. Dr. SN EXPANDER 14 A. Dr. SN COMPANDER-S 15 A. Dr. Tom EXPANDER 16 A. Dr. OverTop COMPANDER-S 17 E. B. Finger COMPRESSOR Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value –24 3 9 5.5 2 58 –11 3.5 1 –1.5 7 192 –17 2.5 8 3.5 2 12 –23 2 0 0.5 2 151 –8 1.7 11 0.0 10 128 –20 2 2 5.0 2 749 –24 2 38 –3.5 54 842 –12 2 15 4.5 2 470 Reference Manual Appendices # Title Type 18 E. B. Slap COMPRESSOR 19 Syn. Bass COMPRESSOR 20 Piano1 COMPRESSOR 21 Piano2 COMPRESSOR 22 E. Guitar COMPRESSOR 23 A. Guitar COMPRESSOR 24 Strings1 COMPRESSOR 25 Strings2 COMPRESSOR Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value –12 1.7 6 4.0 hard 133 –10 3.5 9 3.0 hard 250 –9 2.5 17 1.0 hard 238 –18 3.5 7 6.0 2 174 –8 3.5 7 2.5 4 261 –10 2.5 5 1.5 2 238 –11 2 33 1.5 2 749 –12 1.5 93 1.5 4 1.35 S # Title Type 26 Strings3 COMPRESSOR 27 BrassSection COMPRESSOR 28 Syn. Pad COMPRESSOR 29 SamplingPerc COMPANDER-S 30 Sampling BD COMPRESSOR 31 Sampling SN COMPRESSOR 32 Hip Comp COMPANDER-S 33 Solo Vocal1 COMPRESSOR Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value –17 1.5 76 2.5 2 186 –18 1.7 18 4.0 1 226 –13 2 58 2.0 1 238 –18 1.7 8 –2.5 18 238 –14 2 2 3.5 4 35 –18 4 8 8.0 hard 354 –23 20 15 0.0 15 163 –20 2.5 31 2.0 1 342 # Title Type 34 Solo Vocal2 COMPRESSOR 35 Chorus COMPRESSOR 36 Click Erase EXPANDER 37 Announcer COMPANDER-H 38 Limiter1 COMPANDER-S 39 Limiter2 COMPRESSOR 40 Total Comp1 COMPRESSOR 41 Total Comp2 COMPRESSOR Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value –8 2.5 26 1.5 3 331 –9 1.7 39 2.5 2 226 –33 2 1 2.0 2 284 –14 2.5 1 –2.5 18 180 –9 3 20 –3.0 90 3.90 s 0 ∞ 0 0.0 hard 319 –18 3.5 94 2.5 hard 447 –16 6 11 6.0 1 180 * At fs=44.1 kHz 229 Reference Manual Appendices ■ DUCKING Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE). Dynamics Parameters Input channels provide DYNAMICS section 1 and DYNAMICS section 2. Output channels provide DYNAMICS section 1. An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types: GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, and EXPANDER. Parameter An input channel’s DYNAMICS section 2 provides the following four types: COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft), and DE-ESSER. An output channel’s DYNAMICS section 1 provides the following four types: COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard), and COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft). ■ GATE A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE). –54 to 0 (55 points) RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec 48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points) This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the THRESHOLD level. DECAY (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. • I/O Characteristics Description –72 to 0 (73 points) This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied. RANGE (dB) –∞, –69 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec 48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec (160 points) This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold. 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. Input Signal THRESHOLD Output Level Input Level Output Level ATTACK HOLD DECAY THRESHOLD RANGE Time Time • Time Series Analysis Input Signal THRESHOLD Output Signal RANGE Input Level • I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis Output Level THRESHOLD (dB) DECAY (ms) THRESHOLD (dB) Input Level Range Description This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking. Output Level Parameter Range Output Signal HOLD ATTACK DECAY THRESHOLD RANGE RANGE Input Level Time Time 230 Reference Manual Appendices ■ EXPANDER An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. ■ COMPRESSOR The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the threshold. Parameter Range Parameter Description Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander. THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor. RATIO This determines the amount of expansion. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered. This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the expander’s output signal level. OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the compressor’s output signal level. KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points) KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points) This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. RATIO ATTACK RELEASE THRESHOLD Output Level Output Signal Input Level THRESHOLD Output Level Input Signal • Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1) Input Signal Output Level • Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1) Input Level Output Level • I/O Characteristics (KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB) • I/O Characteristics (KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN= 0.0dB) Output Signal ATTACK RELEASE THRESHOLD THRESHOLD RATIO Input Level Time Input Level Time Time Time 231 Reference Manual Appendices ■ COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S) The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter. Effect Type List Output Level Title Type Description REV-X Hall REV-X HALL REV-X Room REV-X ROOM REV-X Plate REV-X PLATE New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE. Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate The companders function differently at the following levels: Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb 1 0 dB and higher ................................ Functions as a limiter. 2 Exceeding the threshold ................. Functions as a compressor. 3 Below the threshold and width ..... Functions as an expander. Early Ref. EARLY REF. Early reflections without the subsequent reverb Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay Mod.Delay MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay THRESHOLD WIDTH 0dB Input Level The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2. * The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB. * The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes. Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level at which compression is applied. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points) This determines the amount of compression. 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered. ATTACK (ms) RELEASE (ms) OUT GAIN (dB) WIDTH (dB) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. –18.0 to 0.0 (181 points) This sets the compander’s output signal level. 1–90 (90 points) This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width. ■ DE-ESSER This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal. Parameter Range Description Echo ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback Chorus CHORUS Chorus Flange FLANGE Flanger Symphonic SYMPHONIC Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto-panner Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated filter Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel RevChorus REVCHORUS Reverb and chorus in series Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel RevFlange REVFLANGE Reverb and flanger in series Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel THRESHOLD –54 to 0 (55 points) Threshold level at which the de-esser effect applies. RevSympho. REVSYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series FREQUENCY 1kHz–12.5kHz (45 points) Cutoff frequency of the filter used to detect the high frequencies. RevPan REVPAN Reverb and auto-pan in series TYPE HPF, BPF Type of filter used to detect the frequency band. Delay+Er. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reflections in parallel Q 10.0–0.10 (41 points) Q (steepness) of the filter when TYPE is BPF. DelayEr. DELAYER. Delay and early reflections in series 232 Reference Manual Appendices Title Delay+Rev Type Effects Parameters Description DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel DelayRev DELAYREV Delay and reverb in series DistDelay DISTDELAY Distortion and delay in series Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave) Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler Distortion DISTORTION Distortion Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation Comp276 COMP276 This compressor emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a sought-after classic in recording studios. Comp276S COMP276S This is a stereo model of COMP276. Comp260 COMP260 This compressor emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the latter 1970s that has become a sought-after classic for live SR. Comp260S COMP260S This is a stereo model of the COMP260. Equalizer601 EQUALIZER601 This equalizer emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It can be used to obtain a sense of drive. OpenDeck OPENDECK This is a tape saturation effect that emulates the tape compression produced by two open-reel tape recorders: a recording deck and a reproduction deck. M.Band Dyna. M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor ■ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.28–27.94 s *1 Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–120.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–1.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio LO.FREQ 22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) ROOM SIZE 0–28 Size of room DECAY 0–53 Gate closing speed HPF THRU, 22.0 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 1.00 kHz–18.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency *1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting. M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor ■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD *1 Gate open time DECAY *2 Gate closing speed *1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz) *2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) 233 Reference Manual Appendices ■ STEREO REVERB Two input, two output stereo reverb. Parameter ■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate. Range Description Parameter Range 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time TYPE REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain E/R BAL. Type-A, Type-B Description REV TIME Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency ■ MONO DELAY One input, one output basic repeat delay. ■ EARLY REF. One input, two output early reflections. Parameter Range Parameter Description Range Description DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time Type of early reflection simulation FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring *1. (Max. value depends on tempo setting) ■ STEREO DELAY Two input, two output basic stereo delay. Parameter Description 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY *1. 234 Range DELAY L (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Reference Manual Appendices ■ MOD.DELAY One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation. Parameter ■ ECHO Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop. Range Description Parameter Range Description DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) LR FBG –99 to +99% Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DLY.NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY RL FBG –99 to +99% MOD.NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R NOTE FBL *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D L NOTE FBR *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D R *1. *2. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) ■ DELAY LCR One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right). Parameter Range Description *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level Parameter LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level FREQ. FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain ■ CHORUS Two input, two output chorus effect. HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L NOTE C *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Range 0.05–40.00 Hz Description Modulation speed *1. 235 Reference Manual Appendices ■ FLANGE Two input, two output flange effect. Parameter ■ PHASER Two input, two output 16-stage phaser. Range FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz DEPTH MOD. DLY Description Parameter Range Description Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed 0–100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. SYNC OFF/ON LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. *1. ■ DYNA.FLANGE Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger. ■ SYMPHONIC Two input, two output symphonic effect. Parameter Range Parameter Description Modulation speed Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DECAY *1 Decay speed MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Low shelving filter frequency NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) *1. 236 Reference Manual Appendices ■ DYNA.PHASER Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser. Parameter ■ DUAL PITCH Two input, two output pitch shifter. Range SOURCE INPUT, MIDI SENSE DIR. Description Parameter Range Description Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity PITCH 1 –24 to +24 semitones 0–100 Sensitivity FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change LEVEL 1 –100 to +100% DECAY *1 Decay speed Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G 1 –99 to +99% STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain PITCH 2 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain LEVEL 2 –100 to +100% Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time FB. G 2 –99 to +99% Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay NOTE 2 *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) ■ HQ. PITCH One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter. Parameter Range Description PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision *1. SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY *1. Channel #1 pitch shift (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) ■ TREMOLO Two input, two output tremolo effect. Parameter (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. 237 Reference Manual Appendices ■ RING MOD. Two input, two output ring modulator. ■ AUTOPAN Two input, two output autopanner. Parameter FREQ. Range 0.05–40.00 Hz Description Parameter Range Modulation speed SOURCE OSC, SELF Description Modulation source: oscillator or input signal DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency DIR. *1 Panning direction FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. FM NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. ■ MOD.FILTER Two input, two output modulation filter. Parameter *1. LR, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R *2. ■ ROTARY One input, two output rotary speaker simulator. Parameter Range Description ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0–100 Low-frequency filter HIGH 0–100 High-frequency filter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0–100 Output level SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ *1. ■ DYNA.FILTER Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter. Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY *1 Filter frequency change decay speed TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0–100 Output Level *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) 238 Reference Manual Appendices ■ REV+CHORUS One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel. Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY HI. RATIO ■ REV+FLANGE One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel. Description Parameter Range Description Reverb time REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus) REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) SYNC NOTE OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. FB. GAIN –99 to +99% WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. *1. ■ REVCHORUS One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series. Parameter Range ■ REVFLANGE One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series. Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time Parameter INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Range Reverb time Description HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread HI. RATIO DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DIFF. 0–10 Spread 0–100% Reverb density 0–100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb) DENSITY REV.BAL REV.BAL 0–100% HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb) LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed PM DEPTH Pitch modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) 0–100% MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. FB. GAIN –99 to +99% WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. 239 Reference Manual Appendices ■ REV+SYMPHO. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel. Parameter Range ■ REVPAN This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan effect. Parameter Description Range Description Reverb time REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density REV/SYM 0–100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic) REV.BAL 0–100% HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time DIR. *1 Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY HI. RATIO Reverb time *1. *1. LR, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R *2. ■ REVSYMPHO. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series. ■ DELAY+ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel. Parameter Range Parameter Description Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb) DLY/ER 0–100% Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. *1. 240 (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Reference Manual Appendices ■ DELAYER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series. Parameter Range ■ DELAY+REV One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel. Parameter Description Range Description Left channel delay time DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay) DLY/REV 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms DELAY R FB. DLY ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing DIFF. 0–10 LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DIFF. 0–10 Spread NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY *1. *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) ■ DELAYREV One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Parameter Description 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY *1. 241 Range DELAY L (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Reference Manual Appendices ■ DISTDELAY One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series. Parameter ■ FREEZE One input, two output basic sampler. Range Description Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE –10 to +10 Tone control N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DLY.NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD.NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) START *1 Playback start point in milliseconds HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio END *1 Playback end point in milliseconds FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed LOOP *1 Loop start point in milliseconds DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth Number of times the sample plays 0–100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion) 0–100 DLY.BAL LOOP NUM PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Playback pitch shift FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift fine MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages. START [SAMPLE] 0–131000 Playback start point in samples END [SAMPLE] 0–131000 Playback end point in samples LOOP [SAMPLE] 0–131000 Loop start point in samples *1. *2. ■ MULTI FILTER Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave). Range REC DLY –1000 to +1000 ms Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received. PLY MODE MOMENT, CONTI., INPUT In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal. TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback) TRG MASK 0–1000 ms (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Parameter REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal. Description Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time. *1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz) TYPE 1 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance TYPE 2 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) TYPE 3 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency MASTER 0–100 Master volume LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level TONE –10 to +10 Tone RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction ■ DISTORTION One input, two output distortion effect. Parameter 242 Range Description Reference Manual Appendices ■ AMP SIMULATE One input, two output guitar amp simulator. Parameter Range ■ COMP276S This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters. Description AMP TYPE *1 Guitar amp simulation type DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 MASTER 0–100 BASS MIDDLE Parameter Range Description INPUT –180 to 0 dB Distortion drive OUTPUT –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the output gain Master volume RATIO 1:2, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of the compressor 0–100 Bass tone control ATTACK 0.022–50.4 ms Attack time of the compressor 0–100 Middle tone control RELEASE 10.88–544.22 ms Release time of the compressor TREBLE 0–100 High tone control N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction MAKE UP OFF, ON Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is applied CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency SIDE HPF OFF, ON When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range. EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth ■ COMP260 This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard for live SR. You can control two monaural channels independently. You can also link several parameters via stereo links. *1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT ■ COMP276 This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios. It will produce a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can control two monaural channels independently. Parameter Range Adjusts the input level Parameter Description Range Description THRE.1 –60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of CH compressor KNEE1 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of CH1 compressor ATTACK1 0.01–80.0 ms Attack time of CH1 compressor RELEASE1 6.2–999 ms Release time of CH1 compressor 1.0–500, ∞ Ratio of CH1 compressor Adjusts the CH1 output gain INPUT 1 –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 input level RATIO1 OUTPUT 1 –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 output gain OUTPUT1 –20 to 40 dB RATIO 1 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio for CH1 compressor THRE.2 –60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of CH2 compressor SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of CH2 compressor ATTACK 1 0.022–50.4 ms Attack time for CH1 compressor KNEE2 RELEASE1 10.88–544.22 ms Release time for CH1 compressor ATTACK2 0.01–80.0 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor OFF, ON Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is applied RELEASE2 6.2–999 ms Release time of CH2 compressor RATIO2 1.0–500, ∞ Ratio of CH2 compressor OUTPUT2 –20 to 40 dB Adjusts the CH2 output gain OFF, ON When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range. ST LINK OFF, ON Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair. THRE., KNEE, ATTACK, RELEASE, and RATIO parameters are linked; OUTPUT parameter is not linked MAKE UP1 SIDEHPF1 INPUT 2 –180 to 0 dB OUTPUT 2 –180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 input level Adjusts the CH2 output gain RATIO 2 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of CH2 compressor ATTACK 2 0.022–50.4 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor RELEASE2 10.88–544.22 ms Release time of CH2 compressor MAKE UP2 OFF, ON Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is applied SIDEHPF2 OFF, ON When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range. ■ COMP260S This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70’s compressors/limiters that are the standard for live SR. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters. Parameter 243 Range Description THRE. –60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of the compressor KNEE SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of the compressor ATTACK 0.01–80.0 ms Attack time of the compressor RELEASE 6.2–999 ms Release time of the compressor RATIO 1.0–500, ∞ Ratio of the compressor OUTPUT –20 to 40 dB Adjusts the output gain Reference Manual Appendices ■ OPENDECK It emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck and a playback deck.) You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such as the deck type, tape quality, playback speed, etc. ■ EQUALIZER601 This effect emulates the characteristics of 70’s analog equalizers. Re-creating the distortion of typical analog circuits will add drive to the sound. Parameter Range Description LO TYPE HPF-2/1, LSH-1/2 Type of EQ1 LO F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Cut-off frequency of EQ1 LO G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ1 MID1 Q 0.50–16.0 Q of EQ2 MID1 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ2 MID1 G –18.0 to +18.0 dB MID2 Q 0.50–16.0 MID2 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ3 MID2 G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ3 INPUT –18.0 to +18.0 dB OUTPUT –18.0 to +18.0 dB MID3 Q 0.50–16.0 Q of EQ4 MID3 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ4 MID3 G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ4 MID4 Q 0.50–16.0 Q of EQ5 MID4 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ5 MID4 G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ5 HI TYPE LPF-2/1, HSH-1/2 Type of EQ6 HI F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz *1 Cut-off frequency of EQ6 HI G –18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ6 LO SW OFF, ON Switches EQ1 on/off MID1 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ2 on/off Description REC DEC Selects the recording deck type REC LVL –96.0 to +18.0 dB Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape compression is generated, which narrows the dynamic range and distorts the sound Gain of EQ2 REC HI –6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck Q of EQ3 REC BIAS –1.00 to +1.00 Adjusts the bias of the recording deck REPR DEC Swss70, Swss78, Swss85, Amer70 Selects the playback deck type Input gain REPR LVL –96.0 to +18.0 dB Adjusts the output level of the playback deck Output gain REPR HI –6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck REPR LO –6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck MAKE UP Off, On When you adjust the REC LVL, the REPR LVL reflects the change, maintaining the relative output level. You can change the amount of distortion without changing the output level. TP SPEED 15ips, 30ips Selects the tape speed TP KIND Old, New Selects the tape type OFF, ON Switches EQ3 on/off MID3 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ4 on/off MID4 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ5 on/off HI SW OFF, ON Switches EQ6 on/off CLEAN, DRIVE Range Swss70, Swss78, Swss85, Amer70 MID2 SW TYPE Parameter ■ M.BAND DYNA. Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter L-M XOVER Selects the equalizer type. The CLEAN equalizer provides non-distorted, clear, typical digital sound, emulating variations in frequency response in the analog circuits. The DRIVE equalizer provides distorted, driven sound that enhances analog flavor, emulating changes in frequency response in the analog circuits. *1. 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz (LPF-1, LPF-2), 1.0 kHz to 20.0 kHz (HSH-1, HSH-2) 244 Range 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Description Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope LOW GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Low band gain MID GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Mid band gain HI. GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB High band gain TOTAL –72.0 dB to +12.0 dB Overall gain CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level CMP.THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the compressor CMP.RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the compressor CMP.ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the compressor CMP.REL *1 Release time of the compressor CMP.KNEE 0–5 Knee of the compressor CMP.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the compressor EXP.THRE –54.0 dB to –24.0 dB Threshold of the expander EXP.RAT 1:1 to 5:1 Ratio of the expander EXP.REL *1 Release time of the expander EXP.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the expander LIM.THRE –12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the limiter LIM.ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the limiter Reference Manual Appendices Parameter Range Premium Rack Processor Parameters Description LIM.REL *1 Release time of the limiter LIM.KNEE 0–5 Knee of the limiter LIM.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the limiter PRESENCE –10 to +10 Positive (+) values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the threshold of the low band. Negative (–) values do the opposite. If this is set to 0, the high, mid, and low bands will be affected in the same way. ■ Portico5033 This models an analog 5-band EQ made by the RND company. Parameter Range Description Turns bypass on/off for the EQ. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit. LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay ALL BYPASS OFF, ON MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level TRIM –12.0 to 12.0 dB Input gain LF FREQ 30.00 to 300.0 Hz Center frequency of the LF band LF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the LF band LMF IN OFF, ON Switches the LMF band on/off LMF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the LMF band LMF FREQ 50.00 to 400.0 Hz Center frequency of the LMF band LMF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the LMF band MF IN OFF, ON Switches the MF band on/off MF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the MF band MF FREQ 330.0 to 2500 Hz Center frequency of the MF band MF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the MF band HMF IN OFF, ON Switches the HMF band on/off HMF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the HMF band HMF FREQ 1.80k to 16.0k Hz Center frequency of the HMF band HMF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the HMF band LF/HF IN OFF, ON Switches the LF/HF bands on/off HF FREQ 2.50k to 25.0k Hz Center frequency of the HF band HF GAIN –12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the HF band *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) ■ M.BAND COMP Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter L-M XOVER Range 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Description Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope LOW GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Low band gain MID GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Mid band gain HI. GAIN –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB High band gain TOTAL –72.0 dB to +12.0 dB Overall gain CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0dB, OFF Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the low band compressor LOW RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the low band compressor LOW ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the low band compressor LOW REL *1 Release time of the low band compressor LOW KNEE 0–5 Knee of the low band compressor LOW BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the low band compressor MID THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the mid band compressor MID RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the mid band compressor MID ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the mid band compressor ■ Portico5043 This models an analog compressor/limiter made by the RND company. Parameter Range IN OFF, ON Description Turns bypass on/off for the compressor. When bypassed, the button will be unlit. However even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit. MID REL *1 Release time of the mid band compressor FB OFF, ON Switches between feed-forward type and feed-back type. MID KNEE 0–5 Knee of the mid band compressor THRESHOLD –50.0 to 0.0 dB Threshold level MID BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the mid band compressor RATIO 1.10 : 1 to 28.9 : 1, LIMIT Compression ratio HI. THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the high band compressor ATTACK 20 to 75 ms HI. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the high band compressor RELEASE 100 ms to 2.50 sec Release time HI. ATK 0–120 ms Attack time of the high band compressor GAIN –6.0 to 20.0 dB Output level HI. RAT *1 Release time of the high band compressor HI. KNEE 0–5 Knee of the high band compressor HI. BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the high band compressor LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level Attack time *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) 245 Reference Manual Appendices ■ U76 This models a well-known vintage compressor/limiter used in a wide range of situations. Parameter Range ■ Dynamic EQ This is a newly developed equalizer that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the input signal, controlling the amount of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or expander. Description Parameter Range Description INPUT –96.0 to 0.0 dB Input level OUTPUT –96.0 to 0.0 dB Output level BAND ON/OFF OFF, ON Turns the corresponding band on/off ATTACK 5.50 to 0.10 ms Attack time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest attack. SIDECHAIN CUE OFF, ON If this is on, the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring. RELEASE 1100.0 to 56.4 ms Release time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest release. SIDECHAIN LISTEN OFF, ON RATIO ALL, 4, 8, 12, 20 Switches the compression ratio. Pressing ALL produces the strongest effect. If this is on, the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics will be output to the bus (such as the STEREO bus or a MIX/ MATRIX bus) to which the inserted channel is being sent. METER OFF, +4, +8, GR Switches the meter display FILTER TYPE Low Shelf, Bell, Hi Shelf Switches the type of equalizer and sidechain filter FREQUENCY 20.0 to 20.0k Hz Frequency controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter Q 15.0 to 0.50 Q of the equalizer and sidechain filter THRESHOLD –80.0 to 10.0 dB Threshold value at which processing begins to apply RATIO ∞ : 1 to 1 : 1.50 Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal. MODE BELOW, ABOVE Specifies whether the processor will operate when the sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting (ABOVE) or when it falls below the threshold setting (BELOW) ATTACK/RELEASE FAST, SLOW, AUTO Attack time/release time for when compression or boost is applied ■ Opt-2A This processor emulates a well-known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor. Parameter Range Description GAIN –56.0 dB to 40.0 dB Output level PEAK REDUCTION –48.0 dB to 48.0 dB Amount of gain reduction RATIO 2.00 to 10.00 Compression ratio METER SELECT OUTPUT+10, GAIN REDUCTION, OUTPUT+4 Switches the meter display ■ EQ-1A This processor emulates a vintage EQ that’s considered a classic example of a passive EQ. Parameter Range Description LOW FREQUENCY 20, 30, 60, 100 Hz Frequency range of the low range filter (LOW) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the low range filter (LOW) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the low range filter HIGH FREQUENCY 3k, 4k, 5k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k Hz Frequency range of the high range filter (HIGH) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the high range filter (HIGH) BAND WIDTH 0.0 to 10.0 Band width of the high range filter (HIGH) ATTEN SEL 5k, 10k, 20k Hz Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter (HIGH) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the high range filter IN OFF, ON Turns the processor on/off. If this is off, the filter section will be bypassed, but the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit. 246 Reference Manual Appendices Effects and tempo synchronization Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60 / new TEMPO) = (1/8) x 4 x (60/121) = 0.2479 (sec) = 247.9 (ms) Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms. *a Rounded values are used for the calculation results. Some effects of the CL series can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo. Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization. 1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ. SYNC: .................................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization. NOTE and TEMPO: .........These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization. DELAY and FREQ.: ..........DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects. Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF. Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters. • It is a common value shared by all effects • You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.) This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example. Store the effect: TEMPO=120 Change TEMPO to 60 Recall the effect: TEMPO=60 Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the CL series does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored. How the parameters are related Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY (or FREQ.) value*a from the TEMPO and NOTE. Turn SYNC ON Change NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) Change TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) sec FREQ. = (TEMPO/60) / (NOTE x 4) Hz * The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values. Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY = new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) = (1/4) x 4 x (60/120) = 0.5 (sec) = 500 ms Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms. 247 = 1/48 = 1/24 = 1/16 = 1/12 = 3/32 = 1/8 = 1/6 = 3/16 = 1/4 = 3/8 = 1/2 = 3/4 = 1/1 = 2/1 Reference Manual Appendices Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2 MATRIX 1 POINT – MATRIX 8 POINT Mode NO ASSIGN Parameter 1 INPUT MATRIX 1 LEVEL L – MATRIX 8 LEVEL L MATRIX 1 POINT – MATRIX 8 POINT OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX 24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) INPUT CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX 24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) MATRIX 1 ON – MATRIX 8 ON STEREO TO MATRIX MATRIX 1/2 PAN – MATRIX 7/8 PAN ON LOW Q LOW FREQ OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX 24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) LOW MID Q LOW GAIN LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN 72*1 CH 1–CH STIN1L–STIN8R INPUT CH 1–CH 72*1 OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX 24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) ON CH 1–CH 72*1 INPUT EQ HIGH GAIN LPF ON *1 OUTPUT INPUT ATT TO STEREO ON CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R INPUT HPF LCR CSR LOW TYPE HIGH TYPE CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R FREQ LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q MATRIX 1 ON – MATRIX 8 ON LOW MID FREQ MIX 1 POINT – MIX 24 POINT LOW MID GAIN MIX 1 LEVEL L – MIX 24 LEVEL L HIGH MID Q OUTPUT EQ *1 CH 1–CH 72 STIN1L–STIN8R HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID GAIN MATRIX 1 LEVEL H – MATRIX 8 LEVEL H HIGH Q MATRIX 1 LEVEL L – MATRIX 8 LEVEL L HIGH FREQ MIX 1/2 PAN – MIX 23/24 PAN HIGH GAIN MATRIX1/2 PAN – MATRIX7/8 PAN LOW TYPE TO MONO ON CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R LOW Q CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R MIX 1–MIX 24 MIX 1–MIX 24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) HIGH TYPE TO STEREO ON MIX TO STEREO ON CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R ON MATRIX 1 POINT – MATRIX 8 POINT MIX/MATRIX SEND INPUT MIX 1 ON – MIX24 ON MIX 1 LEVEL H – MIX 24 LEVEL H CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R HIGH FREQ BALANCE ON HIGH MID FREQ HIGH Q MIX 1–MIX 24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–STEREO R ON HIGH MID Q HIGH MID GAIN CH 1–CH 72 STIN1L–STIN8R TO MONO STEREO L–MONO(C) MATRIX 1 LEVEL L – MATRIX 8 LEVEL L INPUT PAN/BALANCE MATRIX 1 LEVEL H – MATRIX 8 LEVEL H CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R INPUT MIX 1–MIX 24 MATRIX 1/2 PAN – MATRIX 7/8 PAN INPUT CH ON DIRECT OUT MATRIX 1 LEVEL H – MATRIX 8 LEVEL H CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R FADER L INSERT MIX TO MATRIX 0 FADER H PHASE MATRIX 1 ON – MATRIX 8 ON Parameter 2 — LOW HPF ON MIX 1–MIX 24 HIGH LPF ON PAN 248 Reference Manual Appendices Mode OUTPUT ATT Parameter 1 OUTPUT Parameter 2 Mode MIX1-MIX24 MATRIX1-MATRIX8 STEREO L-MONO(C) GEQ ON PREMIUM RACK A THRESHOLD RANGE PREMIUM RACK B HOLD H INPUT DYNAMICS1 DECAY/RELEASE H CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R ON B GAIN A 1 – GAIN A 31 BYPASS PARAM 1 H – PARAM 64 L BYPASS PARAM 1 H – PARAM 64 L MUTE MASTER KNEE/WIDTH FADER H Rack1–8 DCA 1–DCA 16 ON MASTER 1–MASTER 8 ON CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R MIX 1–MIX 24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) GEQ RACK 1A–16B EFFECT RACK 1A–8B PREMIUM RACK 1A–8B DCA 1–DCA16 GAIN H GAIN L ON RECALL SAFE ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE H RATIO Rack1–8 FADER L RATIO RELEASE L Rack1–16 ON DCA DECAY/RELEASE L INPUT DYNAMICS2 Parameter 2 GAIN B 1 – GAIN B 31 ATTACK HOLD L Parameter 1 ON A CH 1–CH 72*1 STIN1L–STIN8R *1. CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48 GAIN H GAIN L KNEE/WIDTH FILTER FREQ ON ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE H OUTPUT DYNAMICS1 RELEASE L RATIO MIX 1–MIX 24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO L–MONO(C) GAIN H GAIN L KNEE/WIDTH BYPASS EFFECT MIX BALANCE Rack1–8 PARAM 1 H – PARAM 32 L 249 Reference Manual Appendices NRPN parameter assignments Parameter INPUT FADER MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND INPUT to MIX9-16 LEVEL MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND INPUT to MATRIX1-4 LEVEL MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX1-20, STEREO LR to MATRIX LEVEL MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND INPUT ON MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND INPUT to MIX9-16 ON MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND INPUT to MATRIX1-4 ON MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX1-20, STEREO LR to MATRIX ON MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX1-8 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST PHASE INPUT From (HEX) 0000 To (HEX) 0057 0060 007D 007E 00DE 013E 019E 01FE 025E 02BE 031E 037E 03DE 043E 049E 04FE 0514 052A 0540 0556 056C 0582 0598 05B6 00D5 0135 0195 01F5 0255 02B5 0315 0375 03D5 0435 0495 04F5 0513 0529 053F 0555 056B 0581 0597 05AD 060D 0616 0633 0634 0694 06F4 0754 07B4 0814 0874 08D4 0934 0994 09F4 0A54 0AB4 0ACA 0AE0 0AF6 0B0C 0B22 0B38 0B4E 0B64 0B6C 068B 06EB 074B 07AB 080B 086B 08CB 092B 098B 09EB 0A4B 0AAB 0AC9 0ADF 0AF5 0B0B 0B21 0B37 0B4D 0B63 0B6B 0BC3 Parameter INPUT INSERT ON MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND INPUT to MIX9-16 PRE/ POST MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND INPUT to MATRIX1-4 PRE/POST MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8 LEVEL MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT57-64 to MATRIX5-8 LEVEL MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8 ON MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT57-64 to MATRIX5-8 ON MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8 PRE/POST MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT57-64 to MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND 250 From (HEX) 0BCC To (HEX) 0C13 0C2C 0C49 0C4A 0CAA 0D0A 0D6A 0DCA 0E2A 0E8A 0EEA 0F4A 0FAA 100A 106A 10CA 10D2 10DA 10E2 10EA 10F2 10FA 1102 110A 1112 111A 1122 112A 1132 113A 1142 114A 1152 115A 1162 116A 1172 117A 1182 118A 1192 119A 11A2 11AA 11B2 11BA 11C2 11CA 11D2 11DA 11E2 0CA1 0D01 0D61 0DC1 0E21 0E81 0EE1 0F41 0FA1 1001 1061 10C1 10D1 10D9 10E1 10E9 10F1 10F9 1101 1109 1111 1119 1121 1129 1131 1139 1141 1149 1151 1159 1161 1169 1171 1179 1181 1189 1191 1199 11A1 11A9 11B1 11B9 11C1 11C9 11D1 11D9 11E1 11E9 Parameter LOW TYPE HIGH TYPE INPUT57-64 HPF FREQ MIX1/2 MIX3/4 INPUT57-64 to MIX1/27/8 PAN MIX5/6 MIX7/8 MATRIX5/6 INPUT57-64 to MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN MATRIX7/8 INPUT57-64 to STEREO ON INPUT57-64 RECALL ON SAFE INPUT57-64 to MONO ON RATIO INPUT49-64 KNEE/WIDTH DYNAMICS1 GAIN reserved INPUT49-64 DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 ON RECALL SAFE ON LOW Q LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID Q EQ INPUT, MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID GAIN HIGH Q HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN ATT HPF ON LPF ON ON ATTACK THRESHOLD INPUT DYNAMICS1 RANGE HOLD DECAY/RELEASE INPUT DYNAMICS2 ON ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR DYNAMICS1 RATIO GAIN KNEE/WIDTH PAN/BALANCE INPUT INPUT57-64 EQ From (HEX) 11EA 11F2 11FA 1202 120A 1212 121A 1222 122A 1232 To (HEX) 11F1 11F9 1201 1209 1211 1219 1221 1229 1231 1239 123A 1241 1242 124A 125A 126A 127A 128A 1249 1259 1269 1279 1289 1299 129A 12A9 1304 1382 1400 147E 14FC 157A 15F8 1676 16F4 1772 17F0 186E 18EC 196A 19E8 1A66 1AE4 1B44 1BA4 1C04 1C64 1CC4 1D24 1DA2 1E20 1E9E 1F1C 1F9A 2018 2096 1381 13FF 147D 14FB 1579 15F7 1675 16F3 1771 17EF 186D 18EB 1969 19C1 1A65 1AE3 1B3B 1B9B 1BFB 1C5B 1CBB 1D1B 1DA1 1E1F 1E9D 1F1B 1F99 2017 2095 20ED Reference Manual Appendices Parameter MIX9/10 INPUT to MIX9/10-15/16 MIX11/12 PAN MIX13/14 MIX15/16 MATRIX1/2 INPUT to MATRIX1/2, 3/4 PAN MATRIX3/4 MATRIX1/2 MATRIX3/4 MIX1-20, STEREO LR to MATRIX PAN MATRIX5/6 MATRIX7/8 MIX1-8 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST MIX1-20, MATRIX, BALANCE STEREO LR MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MIX, STEREO LR, MONO MATRIX4 SEND to MATRIX PRE/POST MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX21-24, MONO to MATRIX ON MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MIX4 SEND MIX1-8 LEVEL MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MIX4 SEND MIX1-8 ON MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND From (HEX) 20F6 2156 21B6 2216 2276 22D6 2336 234C 2362 2378 238E To (HEX) 214D 21AD 220D 226D 22CD 232D 234B 2361 2377 238D 2395 2396 23B3 23B4 23D0 23EC 2408 2424 2440 245C 2478 2494 249A 24A0 24A6 24AC 24B2 24B8 24BE 24C4 24D4 24E4 24F4 2504 2514 2524 2534 2544 2554 2564 2574 2584 2594 25A4 25B4 23CE 23EA 2406 2422 243E 245A 2476 2492 2498 249E 24A4 24AA 24B0 24B6 24BC 24C2 24D3 24E3 24F3 2503 2513 2523 2533 2543 2553 2563 2573 2583 2593 25A3 25B3 25C3 Parameter MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MIX4 SEND MIX1-8 PRE/POST MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MIX1/2 INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MIX3/4 MIX1/2-7/8 PAN MIX5/6 MIX7/8 BYPASS MIX BALANCE PARAM1 PARAM2 PARAM3 PARAM4 PARAM5 PARAM6 PARAM7 PARAM8 PARAM9 PARAM10 PARAM11 PARAM12 PARAM13 PARAM14 PARAM15 EFFECT RACK1-8 PARAM16 PARAM17 PARAM18 PARAM19 PARAM20 PARAM21 PARAM22 PARAM23 PARAM24 PARAM25 PARAM26 PARAM27 PARAM28 PARAM29 PARAM30 PARAM31 PARAM32 251 From (HEX) 25C4 25D4 25E4 25F4 2604 2614 2624 2634 2644 2654 2664 2674 26B4 26BC 26C4 26CC 26D4 26DC 26E4 26EC 26F4 26FC 2704 270C 2714 271C 2724 272C 2734 273C 2744 274C 2754 275C 2764 276C 2774 277C 2784 278C 2794 279C 27A4 27AC 27B4 27BC To (HEX) 25D3 25E3 25F3 2603 2613 2623 2633 2643 2653 2663 2673 2683 26BB 26C3 26CB 26D3 26DB 26E3 26EB 26F3 26FB 2703 270B 2713 271B 2723 272B 2733 273B 2743 274B 2753 275B 2763 276B 2773 277B 2783 278B 2793 279B 27A3 27AB 27B3 27BB 27C3 Parameter ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GEQ RACK1A-3B GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 FADER MIX21-24, MONO MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MIX1-8 LEVEL MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MATRIX5-8 LEVEL MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND From (HEX) 27C4 27CA 27D0 27D6 27DC 27E2 27E8 27EE 27F4 27FA 2800 2806 280C 2812 2818 281E 2824 282A 2830 2836 283C 2842 2848 284E 2854 285A 2860 2866 286C 2872 2878 287E 28E4 28EA 292A 296A 29AA 29EA 2A2A 2A6A 2AAA 2AEA 2B2A 2B6A 2BAA To (HEX) 27C9 27CF 27D5 27DB 27E1 27E7 27ED 27F3 27F9 27FF 2805 280B 2811 2817 281D 2823 2829 282F 2835 283B 2841 2847 284D 2853 2859 285F 2865 286B 2871 2877 287D 2883 28E8 2929 2969 29A9 29E9 2A29 2A69 2AA9 2AE9 2B29 2B69 2BA9 2BE9 Reference Manual Appendices Parameter MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX21-24, MONO to MATRIX LEVEL MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND ON MIX21-24, MONO MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MIX1-8 ON MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MATRIX5-8 ON MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX9-24 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST INSERT MIX21-24, MONO MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MIX1-8 PRE/POST MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND ON DCA13-16 FADER BALANCE MIX21-24 (,MONO) From (HEX) 2BEA 2BF0 2BF6 2BFC 2C02 2C08 2C0E 2C14 2C2A 2C30 2C70 2CB0 2CF0 2D30 2D70 2DB0 2DF0 2E30 2E70 2EB0 2EF0 2F36 2F46 2F4C 2F8C 2FCC 300C 304C 308C 30CC 310C 314C 318C 31CC 320C 324C 3252 3258 To (HEX) 2BEE 2BF4 2BFA 2C00 2C06 2C0C 2C12 2C18 2C2E 2C6F 2CAF 2CEF 2D2F 2D6F 2DAF 2DEF 2E2F 2E6F 2EAF 2EEF 2F2F 2F45 2F4A 2F8B 2FCB 300B 304B 308B 30CB 310B 314B 318B 31CB 320B 324B 324F 3255 325C Parameter ON LOW Q LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID Q MIX21-24, MONO EQ HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID GAIN HIGH Q HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN HPF ON LPF ON LOW TYPE INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 EQ HIGH TYPE LOW TYPE MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR, MONO EQ HIGH TYPE LOW TYPE INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 EQ HIGH TYPE INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 FREQ HPF DIRECT OUT INPUT65ON 72 MATRIX5 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX5-8 LEVEL MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX5-8 ON MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MATRIX5/6 MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN MATRIX7/8 INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 HPF FREQ ON ATTACK THRESHOLD MIX21-24, MONO RELEASE DYNAMICS1 RATIO GAIN KNEE/WIDTH MIX1/2 MIX3/4 INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MIX1/2-7/8 PAN MIX5/6 MIX7/8 252 From (HEX) 325E 3264 326A 3270 3276 327C 3282 3288 328E 3294 329A 32A0 32A6 32AC 32B2 3440 3480 34C0 34E4 3508 3518 To (HEX) 3262 3268 326E 3274 327A 3280 3286 328C 3292 3298 329E 32A4 32AA 32B0 32B6 347F 34BF 34E2 3506 3517 3527 3528 3537 3538 353F 3540 3550 3560 3570 3580 3590 35A0 35B0 35C0 35D0 35E0 35F0 3600 3610 3640 3680 3686 368C 3692 3698 369E 36A4 36AA 36EA 372A 376A 354F 355F 356F 357F 358F 359F 35AF 35BF 35CF 35DF 35EF 35FF 360F 361F 367F 3684 368A 3690 3696 369C 36A2 36A8 36E9 3729 3769 37A9 Parameter MATRIX5/6 MATRIX7/8 MATRIX1/2 MATRIX3/4 MIX21-24, MONO to MATRIX1/2-7/8 PAN MATRIX5/6 MATRIX7/8 MIX9-24 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GEQ RACK4A-6B GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 LCR INPUT1-64, STIN1-4, ON MIX1-16 CSR DIRECT OUT INPUT1-64 ON INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO ON STEREO ON DCA1-12 FADER MUTE MASTER ON RECALL SAFE ON INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN From (HEX) 37AA 37EA 382A 3830 3836 383C 3842 3852 3858 385E 3864 386A 3870 3876 387C 3882 3888 388E 3894 389A 38A0 38A6 38AC 38B2 38B8 38BE 38C4 38CA 38D0 38D6 38DC 38E2 38E8 38EE 38F4 38FA 3900 3906 390C 3912 396A 39C2 To (HEX) 37E9 3829 382E 3834 383A 3840 3851 3857 385D 3863 3869 386F 3875 387B 3881 3887 388D 3893 3899 389F 38A5 38AB 38B1 38B7 38BD 38C3 38C9 38CF 38D5 38DB 38E1 38E7 38ED 38F3 38F9 38FF 3905 390B 3911 3969 39C1 3A01 3A02 3A41 3A42 3A4E 3A5A 3A66 3A4D 3A59 3A61 3B05 Reference Manual Appendices Parameter EXTERNAL GAIN1 INPUT GAIN 1 EXTERNAL GAIN2 INPUT GAIN 2 EXTERNAL GAIN3 INPUT GAIN 3 EXTERNAL GAIN4 INPUT GAIN 4 EXTERNAL GAIN5 INPUT GAIN 5 EXTERNAL GAIN6 INPUT GAIN 6 EXTERNAL GAIN7 INPUT GAIN 7 EXTERNAL GAIN8 INPUT GAIN 8 EXTERNAL +48V 1 INPUT +48V 1 EXTERNAL +48V 2 INPUT +48V 2 EXTERNAL +48V 3 INPUT +48V 3 EXTERNAL +48V 4 INPUT +48V 4 HA EXTERNAL +48V 5 INPUT +48V 5 EXTERNAL +48V 6 INPUT +48V 6 EXTERNAL +48V 7 INPUT +48V 7 EXTERNAL +48V 8 INPUT +48V 8 EXTERNAL HPF1 INPUT HPF1 EXTERNAL HPF2 INPUT HPF2 EXTERNAL HPF3 INPUT HPF3 EXTERNAL HPF4 INPUT HPF4 EXTERNAL HPF5 INPUT HPF5 EXTERNAL HPF6 INPUT HPF6 EXTERNAL HPF7 INPUT HPF7 EXTERNAL HPF8 INPUT HPF8 INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO ON MONO MIX1-16 TO MONO ON From (HEX) 3B06 3B0F 3B16 3B1F 3B26 3B2F 3B36 3B3F 3B46 3B4F 3B56 3B5F 3B66 3B6F 3B76 3B7F 3B86 3B8F 3B96 3B9F 3BA6 3BAF 3BB6 3BBF 3BC6 3BCF 3BD6 3BDF 3BE6 3BEF 3BF6 3BFF 3C06 3C0F 3C16 3C1F 3C26 3C2F 3C36 3C3F 3C46 3C4F 3C56 3C5F 3C66 3C6F 3C76 3C7F To (HEX) 3B0B 3B15 3B1B 3B25 3B2B 3B35 3B3B 3B45 3B4B 3B55 3B5B 3B65 3B6B 3B75 3B7B 3B85 3B8B 3B95 3B9B 3BA5 3BAB 3BB5 3BBB 3BC5 3BCB 3BD5 3BDB 3BE5 3BEB 3BF5 3BFB 3C05 3C0B 3C15 3C1B 3C25 3C2B 3C35 3C3B 3C45 3C4B 3C55 3C5B 3C65 3C6B 3C75 3C7B 3C85 3C86 3CC5 3CC6 3CD5 Parameter ON SLOT OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME LOW ON OMNI OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME LOW ON DIGITAL OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME LOW RATIO INPUT1-48, STIN1-4 KNEE/WIDTH DYNAMICS1 GAIN reserved INPUT1-48, STIN1-4 DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GEQ RACK7A-8B GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 253 From (HEX) 3CD6 3D06 3D36 3D66 3D76 3D86 3D96 3D98 3D9A 3D9C 3DD4 3E0C 3E44 3E7C 3EB4 3EB8 3EBC 3EC0 3EC4 3EC8 3ECC 3ED0 3ED4 3ED8 3EDC 3EE0 3EE4 3EE8 3EEC 3EF0 3EF4 3EF8 3EFC 3F00 3F04 3F08 3F0C 3F10 3F14 3F18 3F1C 3F20 3F24 3F28 3F2C 3F30 To (HEX) 3D05 3D35 3D65 3D6D 3D7D 3D8D 3D97 3D99 3D9B 3DD3 3E0B 3E43 3E7B 3EB3 3EB7 3EBB 3EBF 3EC3 3EC7 3ECB 3ECF 3ED3 3ED7 3EDB 3EDF 3EE3 3EE7 3EEB 3EEF 3EF3 3EF7 3EFB 3EFF 3F03 3F07 3F0B 3F0F 3F13 3F17 3F1B 3F1F 3F23 3F27 3F2B 3F2F 3F33 Parameter MIX, MATRIX, STEREO ATT LR, MONO EQ INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 TO ON STEREO INPUT65-72, STIN5-8, ON MIX17-24 TO MONO ON LCR IN65-72, STIN5-8, MIX17-24 CSR RATIO INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 KNEE/WIDTH DYNAMICS1 GAIN reserved INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ From (HEX) To (HEX) 3F34 3F56 3F58 3F67 3F68 3F7F 3F80 3F98 3FB0 3FC0 3FD0 3FE0 3FF0 3F97 3FAF 3FBF 3FCF 3FDF 3FEF 3FFF Reference Manual Appendices Mixing parameter operation applicability This table indicates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter. It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo, and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE, GLOBAL PASTE, and USER LEVEL settings, and a channel library. ■ Input channels Parameter HA Stereo*1 CHANNEL LINK RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE*8 ALL Gain O*10 HA*10 O HA, GLOBAL HA HA Gain Compensation O HA O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O +48V Phase O*10 Digital Gain DIGITAL GAIN*10 O O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O O DIGITAL GAIN HA O O Name, Icon, Color O INPUT NAME, GLOBAL INPUT NAME INPUT NAME Input Patch O INPUT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH Out Patch O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH In Patch O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA HA Insert +48V, Gain, Gain Compensation On INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT PROCESSING O Point INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT PROCESSING O O INPUT DIRECT OUT, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH Out Patch Direct Out Channel Library USER LEVEL Parameter Select button On, Level DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT PROCESSING Point DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT PROCESSING O O O HPF O INPUT HPF O INPUT HPF INPUT PROCESSING Att O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT PROCESSING O EQ O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT PROCESSING O O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING Key-In Filter O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING O Others O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING O O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT PROCESSING Others O INPUT DYNAMICS2 O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT PROCESSING O On O INPUT MIX ON*2 O INPUT MIX ON*7 INPUT FADER/ON*4 O Level O INPUT MIX SEND*2 O INPUT MIX SEND*7 INPUT FADER/ON*4 O *7 *4 O Key-In Source Dynamics1 Dynamics2 To Mix To Matrix DELAY Key-In Source *11 Pan/Balance O O INPUT MIX SEND Pre/Post O INPUT MIX SEND*2 O INPUT MIX SEND*7 INPUT PROCESSING*4 O On O INPUT MATRIX ON*3 O INPUT MATRIX ON*7 INPUT FADER/ON*4 O Level O FADER/ON*4 O *4 O INPUT MATRIX SEND*3 *11 O INPUT MATRIX INPUT FADER/ON SEND*7 *7 INPUT Pan/Balance O O INPUT MATRIX SEND Pre/Post O INPUT MATRIX SEND*3 O INPUT MATRIX SEND*7 INPUT PROCESSING*4 ms O*10 INPUT DELAY*10 O INPUT DELAY INPUT PROCESSING O ON O INPUT DELAY O INPUT DELAY INPUT PROCESSING O INPUT FADER/ON O To Stereo O TO STEREO O INPUT TO ST INPUT PROCESSING O To Mono O TO STEREO O INPUT TO MONO INPUT PROCESSING O 254 Reference Manual Appendices Parameter Stereo*1 CHANNEL LINK RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE*8 ALL Parameter Select button USER LEVEL Channel Library Pan/balance O*11 O INPUT TO ST INPUT FADER/ON O Pan Mode O O *5 INPUT PROCESSING O On O TO STEREO O *5 INPUT PROCESSING O CSR O TO STEREO O *5 INPUT PROCESSING O Mode O TO STEREO O *5 INPUT PROCESSING O On O INPUT CH ON O INPUT CH ON INPUT FADER/ON O Fader O*10 INPUT FADER*10 O INPUT FADER INPUT FADER/ON O LCR Mute Assign O INPUT MUTE O *5 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O DCA Assign O INPUT DCA O *5 DCA GROUP ASSIGN O O *9 STORE O*6 Fade Time, On O*6 Channel Link O Cue O GLOBAL CH LINK Key In Cue Mute Safe O Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1–8. Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1–24 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled. Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1–8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled. These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON. Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected. Applicable only to On/Off. Valid when assigned to either a Send source channel or a Send destination channel. Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME. Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. Operates differentially Balance only 255 Reference Manual Appendices ■ MIX Channels Parameter Linked for a stereo pair RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12 ALL Parameter Select button USER LEVEL Name, Icon, Color O MIX NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME Output Patch O MIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH Out Patch O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH In Patch O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH +48V, Gain, Gain Compensation O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MIX PROCESSING Insert Channel Library O On O O MIX INSERT MIX PROCESSING O Point O O MIX INSERT MIX PROCESSING O Att O O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING O EQ O O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING O O MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING Dynamics1 To Matrix Key-In Source Others O O MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING O On O O MIX MATRIX ON*7 MIX FADER/ON*4 O Level O*13 O MIX MATRIX SEND*7 MIX FADER/ON*4 O *7 MIX FADER/ON*4 O Pan/Balance O O MIX MATRIX SEND Pre/Post O O MIX MATRIX SEND*7 MIX PROCESSING*4 O O O MIX TO ST MIX PROCESSING O To Stereo To Mono O O MIX MONO MIX PROCESSING O Pan/Balance O*11 O MIX TO ST, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MIX FADER/ON O On O O *5 MIX PROCESSING O CSR O O *5 MIX PROCESSING O Mode O O *5 MIX PROCESSING O On O O MIX CH ON MIX FADER/ON O Fader O O MIX FADER MIX FADER/ON O LCR From Input On O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND*4 Level O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND*4 Pan/Balance O*11 WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND*4 Pre/Post O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND*4 O *5 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O O *9 STORE O*6 Mute Assign O Fade Time, On O Cue O Mute Safe O Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *11 *12 *13 *6 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON. Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected. Applicable only to On/Off. Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel. Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME. Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. Balance only For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT. Linked only for stereo MATRIX 256 Reference Manual Appendices ■ MATRIX Channels Parameter Linked for a stereo pair RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12 ALL Parameter Select button USER LEVEL Name, Icon, Color O MATRIX NAME,GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME Output Patch O MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH Insert Out Patch O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH In Patch O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH +48V, Gain, Gain Compensation O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MATRIX PROCESSING O On O O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX PROCESSING Point O O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX PROCESSING O O O MATRIX EQ MATRIX PROCESSING O O O MATRIX EQ MATRIX PROCESSING O O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX PROCESSING Att EQ Dynamics1 Channel Library Key-In Source Others Balance O O O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX PROCESSING O O O MATRIX BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MATRIX FADER/ON O On O O MATRIX CH ON MATRIX FADER/ON O Fader O O MATRIX FADER MATRIX FADER/ON O WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND*4 WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND*4 WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND*4 WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND*4 On From Input Level From Mix From Stereo/Mono Pan/Balance Pre/Post O O O *11 O Mute Assign O O *5 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STORE O*6 Cue O Mute Safe O Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *11 *12 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON. Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected. Applicable only to On/Off Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel. Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME. Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. Balance only For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT. 257 Reference Manual Appendices ■ STEREO, MONO Channels Linked for a stereo pair Parameter RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12 ALL Name, Icon, Color O STEREO, MONO NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME Output Patch O STEREO, MONO OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH Out Patch O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH In Patch O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH Insert +48V, Gain, Gain Compensation Channel Library USER LEVEL Parameter Select button OUTPUT NAME O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA STEREO, MONO PROCESSING On O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O Point O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O Att O O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O EQ O O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O STEREO, MONO PROCESSING Dynamics1 To Matrix Key-In Source O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 Others O O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O On O O STEREO, MONO MATRIX ON*7 STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4 O Level O*13 O STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND*7 STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4 O *7 *4 Pan/Balance O O STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O Pre/Post O O STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND*7 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING*4 O Balance O O STEREO, MONO BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O On O O STEREO, MONO CH ON STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O Fader O O STEREO, MONO FADER STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O Mute Assign O O *5 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STORE O*6 Cue O Mute Safe O Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *12 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON. Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected. Applicable only to On/Off. Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel. Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME. Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT. ■ DCA Parameter RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE ALL Parameter Select button USER LEVEL Name, Icon, Color O *5 DCA MASTER On O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER Fader O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER Fade Time, On O *9 STORE Input *5 *9 DCA Assign DCA GROUP ASSIGN Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected. Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. 258 Reference Manual Appendices Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation DYNAMICS LIBRARY FUNCTION NO ASSIGN PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation INPUT EQ LIBRARY — — No assignment. LATCH — Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is pressed. UNLATCH — Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while pressed. BRIGHTNESS BANK CHANGE — Toggle between the brightness settings stored in A and B. CH ON SPECIFIC CH *4) Switch the CH ON/OFF. — Increment or decrement the selected channel number. SPECIFIC CH *1) Select a channel from list 1). MASTER — DynamicEQ LIBRARY SENDS ON FADER — INPUT PATCH CH 1-16 {CL5/CL3/CL1} OUTPUT PATCH ALTERNATE FUNCTION INC CH SELECT DEC OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY LIBRARY GEQ LIBRARY INPUT CH LIBRARY OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY Portico5033 LIBRARY Portico5043 LIBRARY PREMIUM RACK LIBRARY U76 LIBRARY Opt-2A LIBRARY EQ-1A LIBRARY CH17-32 {CL5/CL3/CL1} PATCH EDITOR CH33-48 {CL5/CL3/CL1} CH49-64 {CL5/CL3} INPUT INSERT PATCH OUTPUT INSERT PATCH DIRECT OUT PATCH CL EDITOR CONTROL CH65-72 {CL5} OVERVIEW EFFECT LIBRARY PATCH LIST ST IN RACK MIX1-16 GEQ 1–16 MIX17-24 EFFECT 1–8 MATRIX RACK EDITOR STEREO/MONO PREMIUM 1A PREMIUM 1B DCA CL EDITOR CONTROL A1 {CL5/CL3/CL1} : Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor. PREMIUM 8A A2 {CL5/CL3} PREMIUM 8B A3 {CL3} METER B1 {CL5/CL3/CL1} B2 {CL3/CL1} GROUP/LINK OUTPUT METER MUTE GROUP B4 {CL1} CHANNEL LINK C1 {CL5} SCENE MEMORY C2 {CL5} SCENE C3 {CL5} C4 {CL5} RECALL SAFE FADE TIME FOCUS RECALL C5 {CL5} OUTPUT C6 {CL5} SELECTED CHANNEL INPUT METER DCA GROUP B3 {CL1} CUSTOM FADER BANK Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor. CUE — Switch CUE on/off *2) CUE the channel selected from list 2). CLEAR CUE SPECIFIC CH 259 — Reference Manual Appendices FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 OUTPUT EFFECT RACK1–8 PARAMETER 2 Switch MONITOR on/off. — While holding down this key, press the SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching. PREMIUM RACK1A EFFECT BYPASS PREMIUM RACK1B : SELECTED CH ASSIGN PREMIUM RACK8A PREMIUM RACK8B LATCH — Toggle the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG GAIN/DIGITAL GAIN). Lit when DIGITAL GAIN is selected. — Assign the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG GAIN/DIGITAL) to DIGITAL GAIN only while held down. * However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen etc., this will remain lit until the next time it is pressed. GAIN KNOB FUNCTION UNLATCH GEQ FREQ BANK GPI OUT HELP INC DEC LATCH UNLATCH — PORT1–PORT5 MONO(C) LCR PB OUT SOURCE SELECT — OMNI1-2 OMNI5-6 OMNI7-8 DEFINE Toggle the GPI OUT function. Lit when active. MUTE GROUP 1 Make GPI OUT active only while pressed. MUTE MASTER : — Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off. — Turns all MUTE GROUP MASTER settings on/off together. MUTE GROUP 8 ALL MUTE SELECTED CH VIEW — Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. GO TO PROJECT START OVERVIEW — Displays the OVERVIEW screen. GO TO PREV MARKER REWIND TOGGLE — Each press of the key will alternately display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the OVERVIEW screen. PEAK HOLD ON — Turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off. Lit when on. PROGRAM CHANGE PGM 0–128 CONTROL CHANGE CC 1–31, 33–95, 102–119 MIDI NOTE ON C-2 (0) NOTE ON Recall the selected signal to the monitor. OMNI3-4 Opens and closes the HELP pop-up window. Operating the controllers on the panel (excluding faders), or controllers on the screen, while holding down this key will display the related information. HOME METER STEREO L/R MONITOR Adds or removes a frequency bank in the GEQ EDIT screen. — Explanation — FAST FORWARD GO TO NEXT MARKER NUENDO LIVE TRANSPORT GO TO PROJECT END Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live. CYCLE STOP START Transmit the corresponding MIDI message. REC : EASY RECORDING NOTE ON G 8 (127) OSCILLATOR 260 Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live screen. PEAK CLEAR — OSCILLATOR ON — Switch the OSC on/off. SELECTED CH ASSIGN — While holding down this key, press a SEL key of a channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. DIRECT ASSIGN *1) Assign the oscillator to the channel selected from list 1). Reference Manual Appendices FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 BOOKMARK PAGE CHANGE NEXT PAGE CLOSE POPUP TRANSPORT RECORDER — Display the previous/next page. — Close the displayed popup window. PLAY/PAUSE, STOP, FF/NEXT, REW/PREVIOUS, REC Display the previous/next page. AUTO REC Shortcut function for STOP → REC → PLAY. Recording will be initiated in a single action. If this is executed during recording, the file being recorded will first be closed, and then recording will continue with a new file. REC & START NO ASSIGN (TITLE 1) DIRECT PLAY : SCENE SEND ENCODER MODE SENDS ON FADER Recall the scene of the next existing number. REC RECALL — Recall the scene of the previous existing number. DIRECT RECALL SCENE #000–#300 Directly recall the scene of the specified number. RECALL UNDO — Execute RECALL UNDO. STORE UNDO — Execute STORE UNDO. — If INPUT or ST IN is selected, switch the function of the Selected Channel section’s send encoders from TO MIX1-16/TO MIX17-24, MATRIX. MIX1–MIX24 Switches the MIX ON FADER function for the selected MIX on and off. MTRX1–MTRX8 Switches the MATRIX ON FADER function for the selected MATRIX on and off. — PARAMETER 2 Explanation SET [Ø] SET [INSERT ON] — Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or dark if off. If SET [PRE SEND] is selected, “SEND ON FADER” mode is engaged while you are holding down the [SEL] key. SET [DIRECT OUT ON] SET BY SEL SET [PRE SEND] SET [TO STEREO] SET [TO MONO] SET [TO LCR] SET [GAIN COMPENSATION] SET DEFAULT VALUE — — While holding down this key, press a knob in the Selected Channel or Centralogic section to reset it to the default value. SET NOMINAL VALUE — — While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to set the fader of that channel to nominal level. LATCH Switch TALKBACK on/off. UNLATCH Turn TALKBACK on while pressed. SELECTED CH ASSIGN — While holding down this key, press a SEL key of an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching. DIRECT ASSIGN *3) Assign TALKBACK to the channel selected from list 3). CURRENT PAGE — Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen. EFFECT RACK1–8 — Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect. TALKBACK ON The specified audio file will be played once from the beginning. Audio files to be played should be saved in the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder. Please note that a file cannot be specified if it is saved in the root directory or in any other folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will move to \YPE\SONGS\. — MIX ON FADER PARAMETER 1 SET [+48V] Start recording immediately without entering record-ready mode. INC RECALL MIX1-16/MIX17-24, MATRIX FUNCTION Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the addition of the SEL status. BOOKMARK with “SEL” — PREVIOUS PAGE Explanation Memorize the currently selected screen (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized screen (press and release the key within two seconds). Popup screens can also be memorized. In the case of a rack, the number of that rack is also memorized. TALKBACK TAP TEMPO *1) CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO(C) *2) CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, STEREO, MONO(C) *3) MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO(C) *4) CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, STEREO, MONO(C), DCA1–DCA16 Switches the MIX ON FADER function on and off. MATRIX ON FADER Switches the MATRIX ON FADER function on and off. SENDS ON FADER Switches the SENDS ON FADER function on and off. 261 Reference Manual Appendices Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 FUNCTION PARAMETER 2 NO ASSIGN LAMP *10) HPF FREQUENCY *4) I/O DEVICE GAIN1–GAIN32 *11) INPUT DELAY DELAY TIME *3) INPUT GAIN MIDI CONTROL CHANGE DCA TRIM MONITOR OUTPUT PFL TRIM RATIO OSCILLATOR ATTACK OUTPUT PORT OUTGAIN KNEE *13) THRESHOLD RATIO FREQUENCY *4) DELAY TIME GAIN *12) TO MIX LEVEL MIX1–MIX24 *3) TO MATRIX LEVEL MATRIX1–MATRIX8 *7) TO MIX PAN MIX1/2–MIX23/24 *3) TO MATRIX PAN MATRIX1/2–MATRIX7/8 *7) TO ST/MONO PAN/BAL CSR *5) TOUCH AND TURN OUTGAIN *2) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C) *3) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R *4) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1–ST IN 8 *5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R, MIX1–MIX24 *7) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1–CH72, CL3: CH1–CH64, CL1: CH1–CH48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 8R, MIX1–MIX24, ST L, ST R, MONO (C) *10) # 1–# 6 *11) REMOTE HA # 1–# 8 *12) DANTE 1–DANTE64, OMNI 1–OMNI 8, SLOT1 1–SLOT1 16, SLOT2 1–SLOT2 16, SLOT3 1–SLOT3 16, DIGITAL OUT L, DIGITAL OUT R *13) SELECTED CH, MIX1–MIX24, MTRX1–MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C) KNEE WIDTH ATT LOW Q LOW FREQUENCY LOW GAIN LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQUENCY LOW MID GAIN LPF INTERVAL RELEASE EQ HPF WIDTH *2) DECAY RELEASE MONITOR DELAY SINE WAVE FREQUENCY RANGE DYNAMICS2 TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL LEVEL THRESHOLD ATTACK CTRL 33–CTRL 95 MONITOR FADER CUE LEVEL WIDTH *4) DIMMER LEVEL INPUT PFL TRIM HOLD DIGITAL GAIN CTRL 102–CTRL 119 NAME DYNAMICS1 ANALOG GAIN CTRL 1–CTRL 31 SCREEN CH COLOR CUE PARAMETER 2 GAIN1–GAIN8 PANEL BRIGHTNESS PARAMETER 1 EXTERNAL HA *2) HIGH MID Q HIGH MID FREQUENCY HIGH MID GAIN HIGH Q HIGH FREQUENCY HIGH GAIN 262 Reference Manual Appendices Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders PAN GAIN ASSIGN O FUNCTION PAN/BALANCE PARAMETER 1 *1 PARAMETER 2 PAN *2 *3 BAL O ANALOG GAIN A.GAIN *1 O DIGITAL GAIN D.GAIN *1 *4 O SELECTED SEND MIX1-MTRX8 Depends on status *2 *5 O MIX1 SEND MIX1 *3 *6 O MIX2 SEND MIX2 *3 O MIX3 SEND MIX3 *3 O MIX4 SEND MIX4 *3 O MIX5 SEND MIX5 *3 O MIX6 SEND MIX6 *3 O MIX7 SEND MIX7 *3 O MIX8 SEND MIX8 *3 O MIX9 SEND MIX9 *3 O MIX10 SEND MIX10 *3 O MIX11 SEND MIX11 *3 O MIX12 SEND MIX12 *3 O MIX13 SEND MIX13 *3 O MIX14 SEND MIX14 *3 O MIX15 SEND MIX15 *3 O MIX16 SEND MIX16 *3 O MIX17 SEND MIX17 *3 O MIX18 SEND MIX18 *3 O MIX19 SEND MIX19 *3 O MIX20 SEND MIX20 *3 O MIX21 SEND MIX21 *3 O MIX22 SEND MIX22 *3 O MIX23 SEND MIX23 *3 O MIX24 SEND MIX24 *3 O MATRIX1 SEND MTRX1 *3 O MATRIX2 SEND MTRX2 *3 O MATRIX3 SEND MTRX3 *3 O MATRIX4 SEND MTRX4 *3 O MATRIX5 SEND MTRX5 *3 O MATRIX6 SEND MTRX6 *3 O MATRIX7 SEND MTRX7 *3 O MATRIX8 SEND MTRX8 *3 O HPF FREQUENCY HPF *4 O DYNAMICS1 THRESHOLD THRE1 *5 O DYNAMICS2 THRESHOLD THRE2 *6 263 Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether this will be analog gain or digital gain. The send destination that is the target of Sends On Fader will be selected. Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch the PRE/POST setting of the corresponding send or will switch the corresponding send on/off when pressed. Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch the high-pass filter on/off. Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 1 on/off. Preference setting and the state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 2 on/off. Reference Manual Appendices MIDI Data Format This section explains the format of the data that the CL series is able to understand, send, and receive. STATUS DATA 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) 1011nnnn Bn Control change 20 Control number (32) 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) If [TABLE] is selected 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE 1.1 NOTE OFF STATUS DATA (8n) Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON. They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects. STATUS DATA 1000nnnn 8n Note off message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored) 1.2 NOTE ON Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON. They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects. STATUS DATA 1001nnnn 9n Note on message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off) 1.3 CONTROL CHANGE = paramMax – paramMin + 1; = paramWidth / paramSteps; = paramWidth – add * paramSteps; = paramSteps * add + mod / 2; (1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value; (2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps paramWidth = 16384; (2-1) When High and Low data is received (2-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low); (Bn) Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON. If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 248. If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the specified parameter. Transmission If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 248. If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters that can be assigned to control changes” on page 248. CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.) CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks. 1011nnnn Bn Control change 00 Control number (00) Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low); Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN] (NonRegistered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110) messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN]. STATUS DATA 102-119) * 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) * Numbers 0, 32, and 96–101 cannot be used. * Control number 6, 38 can be used. paramSteps add mod curValue (9n) 1011nnnn Bn Control change 0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95, (2-3) When only High data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127); (3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152 steps paramWidth = 2097152; (3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low); (3-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low); (3-3) When only Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128; (3-4) When only High data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384; (3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low); (3-6) When only High and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low); (3-7) When only High and Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128; If [NRPN] is selected 1011nnnn Bn Control change 01100010 62 NRPN LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 01100011 63 NRPN MSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 00000110 06 Data entry MSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB * The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted. STATUS DATA 1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn) Reception If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT. If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene memory, effect librarya nd premium rack library are recalled according to the settings of the [PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST]. Transmission If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled. If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. If the recalled scene memory, effect library and premium rack library has been assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted. PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.) You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH. If SINGLE is selected You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH. You can choose whether a bank select message will be added. A bank of up to 16 can be specified. If MULTI is selected The Rx and Tx channels will be the same. The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select messages will not be added. You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels. STATUS DATA 1100nnnn Cn Program change 0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127) if ( rxValue > paramWidth) rxValue = paramWidth; param = ( rxValue–mod / 2) / add; 264 Reference Manual Appendices 2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE < MMC DEFERED PLAY > 2.1 SONG SELECT Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback. (F3) Reception Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder. STATUS 11110011 F3 Song select Song number 0sssssss ss Song number (0-127) 2.2 TIMING CLOCK (F8) Reception This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four times per quarter note. Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings. STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock 2.3 ACTIVE SENSING (FE) Reception Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms. This message is not subject to echoing. STATUS (FF) Reception When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running Status will be cleared). This message is not subject to echoing. STATUS EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000011 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 03 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Deferred Play(MCS) End of exclusive < MMC RECORD STROBE > Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts recording. STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000110 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 06 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Record strobe End of exclusive < MMC PAUSE > Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses. 11111110 FE Active sensing 2.4 SYSTEM RESET STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00001001 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 09 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Pause(MCS) End of exclusive 11111111 FF System reset 3.2 BULK DUMP 3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 3.1 MMC This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored within the unit. The basic format is as follows. Command < MMC STOP > Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops. STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000001 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 01 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Stop(MCS) End of exclusive EOX F0 7F dd 06 02 F7 Function BULK DUMP DATA rx BULK DUMP REQUEST The CL series uses the following data types for a bulk dump. System exclusive message “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” Data Number(dd) *1) *14) *15) *16) *2) *7) *8) *3) *9) *10) *11) *4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *21) *22) *17) *7) *8) *18) *9) *10) *11) *5) *12) *6) *13) Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Play(MCS) End of exclusive Premium Effect Portico5033 LIB Portico5043 LIB U76 LIB Opt-2A LIB “PEFFECT_” “P5033___” “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” *19) *20) *20) *20) *20) Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback. 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000010 11110111 rx/tx Module Name(mm) SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB INPUT CH LIB OUTPUT CH LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB < MMC PLAY > STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND rx/tx F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 19 mm … mm dd dd … ee F7 F0 43 2n 3E 19 mm … mm dd dd F7 265 Module Name(mm) EQP-1A LIB DynamicEQ LIB Dante Input Patch LIB Mixer Setup Outport Setup Monitor Setup MIDI Setup Lib Number Program Change Table Control Change Table Preference (Current) Preference (Admin) Preference (Guest) User Defined Keys (Current) User Defined Keys (Admin) User Defined Keys (Guest) Custom Fader Bank (Current) Custom Fader Bank (Admin) Custom Fader Bank (Guest) User Level (Current) User Level (Guest) *1) *2) *3) *4) *5) *6) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *12) *13) *14) *15) *16) *17) *18) *19) *20) *21) *22) *23) “EQ-1A___” “DYNAEQ__” “DANTEIN_” “MIXERSET” “OUT_PORT” “MONITOR_” “MIDI_SET” “LIB_NUM_” “PRGMCHG_” “CTRLCHG_” “PREF_CUR” “PREF_ADM” “PREF_GST” “UDEF_CUR” “UDEF_ADM” “UDEF_GST” “CFAD_CUR” “CFAD_ADM” “CFAD_GST” “UKEY_CUR” “UKEY_GST” Data Number(dd) *20) *20) *23) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) 0–300 Scene Number (0 Request Only), 1–199 Input EQ Library Number (1–40 Request Only) 1–199 Output EQ Library Number (1–3 Request Only) 1–199 Dynamics Library Number (1–41 Request Only) 0–199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only) 1–199 Effect Library Number (1–27 Request Only) 512–583 Input 1-72, 584–599 STIN 1L-8R, 768–791 MIX 1-24, 1024–1031 MATRIX 1-8, 1280–1282 STEREO L-C, 512–530 GEQ 1-19, 531–538 EFFECT GEQ 1-8, 512–519 EFFECT 1-8, 512 Current Data, 768 Current Data with Recall Safe, 8192 Store Undo Data, 8193 Recall Undo Data, 8194 Clear Undo Data, 0–199 Input CH Library Number (0 Request Only), 0–199 Output CH Library Number (0 Request Only), 512–527 Premium Rack 1A, 1B, 2A, … 8A, 8B 0–100 Each Premium Effect Library Number (0 Request Only) 1536–1607 Input 1-72 (for Dynamics2), 1608–1623 STIN 1L-8R (for Dunamics2), 0-10 Dante Input Patch Library Number (0 Request Only) Data is lost when you write to the preset library. The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a CL series. To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary complement, and set bit 7 to 0. CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time when a Bulk Dump Request is received. A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump Request. In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of 7-bit data. Reference Manual Appendices [Conversion from actual data to bulk data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I); } b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F; } [Recovery from bulk data to actual data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]); } 3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE Reception This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON. This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH]. Transmission If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number. In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number. Command F0 43 1n 3E 19 … F7 RARAMETER CHANGE F0 43 3n 3E 19 … F7 PARAMETER REQUEST rx/tx rx/tx Function CL series native parameter change rx/tx CL series native parameter request 4 PARAMETER CHANGE details 4.1.3 Data category Data Category 4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP 0x01 Name Current Scene /Setup/Backup/ User Setup Data 00000001 4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA Category DATA EOX 11110000 F0 System exclusive message 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 0ccccccc 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 43 1n 3E 19 cc eh el ih il ch cl dd : F7 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer CL Series Element no High. Element no Low. Index no High. 4.2 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY STORE, RECALL – 4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME Index no Low. Channel no High. Channel no Low. Data End of exclusive 4.1.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) MODULE NAME Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is received. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA Category DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 0ccccccc 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 19 cc eh el ih il ch cl F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) DATA Digital mixer CL Series Element no High. EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA "L" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Number High nl Number Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low F7 End of exclusive Element no Low. Index no High. 4.2.2 Function Name Index no Low. Channel no High. Channel no Low. End of exclusive 266 Function Name Store Recall “LibStr__” “LibRcl__” Unknown Factor Store Unknown Factor Recall Store Undo (only Score) Recall Undo (only Scene) “LibUnStr” “LibUnRcl” “LibStrUd” “LibRclUd” Reference Manual Appendices 4.2.3 Module Name Module Name Scene Input EQ Output EQ Dynamics Input CH Output CH GEQ Effect Portico5033 Portico5043 U76 Opt-2A EQP-1A DynamicEQ Dante Input Patch Function “LibStr__” “LibUnStr” “LibRcl__” “LibUnRcl” Function “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” “P5033___” “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” “EQ-1A___” “DYNAEQ__” “DANTEIN_” Dynamics LIB 0 Channel*1) *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) INPUT CH LIB 0 *1) OUTPUT CH LIB 0 *2) *3) *4) GEQ LIB 0 *6) EFFECT LIB 0 *7) Premium Effect LIB 0 *9) Dante Input Patch LIB 0 *5) “LibStrUd” SCENE 0 0 “LibRclUd” SCENE 0 0 *1) *2) *3) *4) *5) *6) SCENE Number 1-300 *5) Channel*1) INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 *1) OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 *2) *3) *4) Dynamics LIB 42-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) INPUT CH LIB 1-199 *1) OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4) GEQ LIB 1-199 *6) EFFECT LIB 28-199 *7) Premium Effect LIB 1-100 *9) Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 *5) SCENE 1-300 0 INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 0 OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 0 Dynamics LIB 42-199 0 INPUT CH LIB 1-199 0 OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 0 GEQ LIB 1-199 0 EFFECT LIB 28-199 0 Premium Effect LIB 1-100 0 Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 0 SCENE 0-300 *5) INPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *1) OUTPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4) Dynamics LIB 1-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) INPUT CH LIB 0-199 *1) OUTPUT CH LIB 0-199 *2) *3) *4) GEQ LIB 0-199 *6) EFFECT LIB 1-199 *7) Premium Effect LIB 0-100 *9) Dante Input Patch LIB 0-10 *5) SCENE 0 *5) INPUT EQ LIB 0 *1) OUTPUT EQ LIB 0 *2) *3) *4) tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx *7) *8) *9) Number tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx 0:CH1 – 71:CH72 72:ST IN 1L – 87:ST IN 8R 256:MIX 1 – 279:MIX 24 512:MATRIX 1 – 519: MATRIX 8 1024:STEREO L – 1026:STEREO C 512:will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one. 0: GEQ1A, 1: GEQ1B, 2: GEQ2A, … 36: GEQ19A, 37:GEQ19B 38: EFFECT GEQ1A, 39: EFFECT GEQ1B, 40: EFFECT GEQ2A, … 52: EFFECT GEQ8A, 53: EFFECT GEQ8B 0:Effect1- 7:Effect8 1280:CH1 – 1351:CH72 1352:ST IN 1L – 1367:ST IN 8R 0: Premium Rack 1A, 1: Premium Rack 1B, 2: Premium Rack 2A, … 14: Premium Rack 8A, 15: Premium Rack 8B 4.3 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY EDIT – 4.3.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA "L" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE). mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) 267 DATA EOX 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0sssssss 0sssssss 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 mm mm mm mm sh sl eh el dh dl F7 (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) number -source start High number -source start Low number -source end High number -source end Low number -destination start High number -destination to start Low End of exclusive 4.3.2 Function Name Function Name Copy Paste Clear Cut Insert Edit Undo “LibCpy__” “LibPst__” “LibClr__” “LibCut__” “LibIns__” “LibEdtUd” 4.3.3 Module Name Module Name SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB INPUT CH LIB OUTPUT CH LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB Portico5033 LIB Portico5043 LIB U76 LIB Opt-2A LIB EQP-1A LIB DynamicEQ LIB Dante Input Patch LIB “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” “P5033___” “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” “EQ-1A___” “DYNAEQ__” “DANTEIN_” Function Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Reference Manual Appendices 4.4 FUNCTION CALL – LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE – 4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) 4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE 4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received. 4.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library title will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000001 01110100 01110010 01100010 01110100 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0000dddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA "L" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "A" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "r" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Scene/Library number High nl Scene/Library number Low eh Element High el Element Low ih Index High il Index Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low dd Data28~31bit dd Data21~27bit dd Data14~20bit dd Data7~13bit dd Data0~6bit F7 End of exclusive STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000001 01110100 01110010 01100010 01110100 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA "L" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "A" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "r" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Scene/Library number High nl Scene/Library number Low eh Element High el Element Low ih Index High il Index Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low F7 End of exclusive Transmission When CL series receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer will be sent back with the following Parameter change. This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only. Top number is requested number or more. -ExampleSCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101 Request Number: 0 Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7 Request Number: 8 Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10 Request Number: 11 Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101 Request Number: 102 Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME 4.4.3 Module Name Module Name SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB INPUT CH LIB OUTPUT CH LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB Portico5033 LIB Portico5043 LIB U76 LIB Opt-2A LIB EQP-1A LIB DynamicEQ LIB Dante Input Patch LIB “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” “P5033___” “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” “EQ-1A___” “DYNAEQ__” “DANTEIN_” Number 0-300 (0:response only) 1-200 (1-40:response only) 1-200 (1-3:response only) 1-200 (1-41:response only) 0-200 (0:response only) 0-200 (0:response only) 0-200 (0:response only) 1-200 (1-27:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-10 (0:response only) 268 DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000101 01111000 01101001 01110011 01110100 0mmmmmmm F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA "L" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "E" (ASCII CODE) "x" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "s" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0sssssss 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ttttttt 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 11110111 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm ss nh nl th tl eh el F7 (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) Data Status ( 0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data ) Request Number High Request Number Low Top Number High Top Number Low End Number High End Number Low End of exclusive Reference Manual Appendices 4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) 4.6 FUNCTION CALL – COLLECTION STORE – Receive The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received. 4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000101 01111000 01101001 01110011 01110100 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA "L" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "E" (ASCII CODE) "x" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "s" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Request Number High nl Request Number Low F7 End of exclusive Transmission Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA 4.5.3 Module Name Module Name SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB INPUT CH LIB OUTPUT CH LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB Portico5033 LIB Portico5043 LIB U76 LIB Opt-2A LIB EQP-1A LIB DynamicEQ LIB Dante Input Patch LIB “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNL” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” “P5033___” “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” “EQ-1A___” “DYNAEQ__” “DANTEIN_” Number 1-300 41-200 4-200 42-200 1-200 1-200 1-200 55-200 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-10 EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01010101 01101110 01010011 01110100 01110010 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA "C" (ASCII CODE) "o" (ASCII CODE) "l" (ASCII CODE) "U" (ASCII CODE) "n" (ASCII CODE) "S" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "r" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Number High nl Number Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low F7 End of exclusive Module Name User Defined Keys (Admin) User Defined Keys (Guest) Custom Fader Bank (Current) Custom Fader Bank (Admin) Custom Fader Bank (Guest) User Level (Current) User Level (Guest) 4.7 FUNCTION CALL – MODULE – 4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received (depending on the effect type). STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME 4.6.2 Function Name Function “ColUnStr” Setup Number 0 User Defined Key 0 Program Change 0 Control Change 0 tx/rx tx tx tx tx DATA 4.6.3 Module Name Module Name Mixer Setting Outport Setting Monitor Setting MIDI Setting Lib Number Program Change Table Control Change Table Preference (Current) Preference (Admin) Preference (Guest) User Defined Keys (Current) EOX “MIXERSET” “OUT_PORT” “MONITOR_” “MIDI_SET” “LIB_NUM_” “PRGMCHG_” “CTRLCHG_” “PREF_CUR” “PREF_ADM” “PREF_GST” “UDEF_CUR” 269 “UDEF_ADM” “UDEF_GST” “CFAD_CUR” “CFAD_ADM” “CFAD_GST” “UKEY_CUR” “UKEY_GST” 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01001101 01101111 01100100 01000110 01111000 01010100 01110010 01100111 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0eeeeeee 0ppppppp 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA "M" "o" "d" "F" "x" "T" "r" "g" mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) ee Effect number (0:RACK1 - 7:RACK8) pp Release:0, Press:1 F7 End of exclusive 4.7.2 Module Name Module Name Freeze Play button Freeze Record button “FRZPLAY_” “FRZREC__” Number 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7 This will not work when the Effect Type is different. Reference Manual Appendices 4.8 FUNCTION CALL – CHANNEL – 4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00000000 01000011 01101000 01101100 01010000 01101001 01110010 01000011 01110000 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0sssssss 0sssssss 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA "C" "h" "l" "P" "i" "r" "C" "p" mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) sh Source Channel Number H *1) sl Source Channel Number L *1) dh Destination Channel Number H *1) dl Destination Channel Number L *1) F7 End of exclusive 4.8.2 Module Name Module Name Pair On (with Copy) Pair On (with Reset Both) Pair Off *1) “PAIRONCP” “PAIRONRS” “PAIROFF_” 0 :CH1 - 71:CH72 256 :MIX 1 - 279:MIX 24 512 :MATRIX 1 - 519: MATRIX 8 4.9 LEVEL METER DATA 4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds. If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to be sent in at least every 10 seconds. Receive The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON. Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices). When rebooted or port setting is changed, the transmission will be disabled. When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00010010 00100001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ddddddd : 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 19 21 mm mm mm dd : F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer CL Series REMOTE LEVEL METER ADDRESS UL ADDRESS LU ADDRESS LL Data1 End of exclusive 4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) Receive Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS are matched. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. the corresponding metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices). When Address UL = 0x7F is received, all metering data transmission will be immediately stopped [disabled]. Transmission When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00010010 00100001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 19 21 mm mm mm ch cl F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer CL Series REMOTE LEVEL METER ADDRESS UL ADDRESS LU ADDRESS LL Count H Count L End of exclusive 270 Reference Manual Appendices Warning/Error Messages Message Message Meaning Meaning File Already Exists! The USB flash drive already contains a file/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create. File Error [xx]! Internal file access error File Protected! Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB flash drive is write-protected. xxx Parameters Copied. Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer. xxx Parameters Initialized. Parameter xxx was initialized. xxx Parameters Pasted. Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer. Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer. Flash Memory Initializing Finished. Memory initialization has been completed. xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer. Help File Not Found! The help file has not been loaded. ALTERNATE FUNCTION: Turned off! ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off. Illegal Address! The IP address or Gateway address setting is invalid. Assignment is Restricted to Max. 8 Sources! The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected, but you attempted to assign more than eight. Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use Network. Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s Manual (separate document). Illegal Storage Format! The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported. Internal Power Supply is Cut Off! The internal (INT) power supply has stopped operating. Alternatively, some other problem has occurred. Contact a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the owner’s manual (separate document). Internal Power Supply is Turned On. The internal (INT) power supply has started up normally. KEY IN CUE: Turned Off. KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different screen. Cannot Assign! In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the CL3/CL1, you attempted to edit an item that cannot be edited for that model. Cannot Bookmark This Popup. This popup window cannot be bookmarked. Cannot Mount This Type of Device in This Position. You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it cannot be mounted. Cannot Paste! Cannot paste the character string. Cannot Recall! Failed to recall a scene memory or library. Cannot Select This Channel. You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason. Cannot Store! Failed to store a scene memory or library. Cannot Undo! You pressed the [UNDO] button when Undo was not available. Loading Aborted. Loading from USB flash drive was aborted. Channel Copied. Channel settings have been copied. Loading Finished. Finished loading from USB flash drive. Channel Moved. Channel settings have been moved. Low Battery! The backup battery voltage is low. Channel Returned to Default Settings. Channel settings have been returned to the default settings. Couldn’t Access File. File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason. Maximum Number of Audio Files Exceeded! The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded. Couldn’t Write File. File could not be saved to the USB flash drive. Current User Changed. [xxx] Current user was changed to [xxx]. Memory Error! All Memories were Initialized. Directory Not Empty! You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files remaining in the directory. All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost, due to failure of the backup battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual (separate document). MIDI: Data Framing Error! MIDI: Data Overrun! An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port. EDITOR: Data Framing Error! EDITOR: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being exchanged with CL Editor. MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port. EDITOR: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the CL Editor input port. MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! To much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port. EDITOR: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the CL Editor output port. No Access From Recorder! In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher than \YPE\SONGS\. EFFECT CUE: Turned Off. CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen. No channel selected. A copy-source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE screen. External HA Connection Conflict! External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was stored. No Copy Item Selected. In the Global Paste screen, you attempted to paste without having selected an item to paste. The PW800 (EXT) power supply connected to the CL series console has stopped operating. No Corresponding Help Items. The corresponding section was not found in the Hlep file. External Power Supply is Cut Off! No ID3 Tag exists. You can not edit. The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag. File Access is Busy! The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB flash drive is being accessed. No Response from External HA. No response from an external AD8HR. No Response from I/O DEVICE. The I/O devices not responding. 271 Reference Manual Appendices Message Meaning Message Meaning STAGEMIX: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output port. Storage Full! The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on the USB flash drive. Storage Not Found! The USB flash drive could not be recognized. Storage Not Ready! Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready. Sync Error! [xxx] The CL series console is not synchronized to the [xxx] signal. Tap Operation Ignored. Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen. This Operation is Not Allowed. This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission. Processing was interrupted. Too Large Files! Loading Failed. Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is 307,256 Bytes. PREVIEW Mode : Cannot Use This Function. The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used during Preview. Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Compare. Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source. PREVIEW Mode : Disabled Preview was disabled. PREVIEW Mode : Enabled Preview was enabled. Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to Flex15GEQ. Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source. Re-Enter Password! When specifying the user password, the password was not entered a second time. Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded! Power consumption of the I/O cards installed in the slots has exceeded the rated value. RECORDER: CODEC Error [0x%08X] ! A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen. Unassigned Encoder. Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you operated. Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted! Operation of the button was cancelled because time is required for recorder processing. Unsupported File Format! The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an unsupported format. RECORDER IN CUE: Turned Off. CUE was cancelled for RECORDER IN because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen. USB Currently Active for Recorder function! Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory recorder is recording or playing. USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD! The recorder cannot operate, since mixer scene memory or library data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive. USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped! Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB flash drive processing. USB Memory Full ! Can’t save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free space on the USB flash drive. USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped. Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating. USB Memory is Protected! The USB flash drive’s Protect setting is turned on. USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder Stopped. Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating. Page Bookmarked. The current screen or popup has been bookmarked. Password Changed. The password has been changed. PLAYBACK OUT CUE: Turned Off. CUE was cancelled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen. PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy! Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress. Please wait, Dante patch is proceeding now. You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when patching was not possible. Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned! The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. If a malfunction has occurred, please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual (separate document). Processing Aborted. Removed from the Channel Link group. The channel was removed from the link group. Saving Aborted. Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted. Saving Finished. Finished saving to USB flash drive. SCENE #xxx is Empty! No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled. SCENE #xxx is Protected! You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene. SCENE #xxx is Read Only! You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene. Scene Playback Link Canceled! The audio playback link for the scene was cancelled. SLOT x: Data Framing Error! SLOT x: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port. SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port. SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port. USB over current Error! Disconnect USB device. The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB current. Some Song Files Are Unidentified. Some songs were not identified. Songs that have not been specified might be used for DIRECT PLAY or PLAY BACK LINK. Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped! Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock was lost. Song File Not Found! The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a USER DEFINED key does not exist. Wrong Audio File Format! The format of the audio file is invalid. STAGEMIX: Data Framing Error! STAGEMIX: Data Overrun! Wrong Password! The password you input was incorrect. Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix. STAGEMIX: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port. Wrong Word Clock! The CL series console cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate. You Cannot Create User Key. The current user does not have permission to create a user key. 272 Reference Manual Appendices ■ Dynamic Range. Electrical characteristics Input All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms OMNI IN 1-8 — ■ Frequency Response. Input OMNI IN 1-8 Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz–20 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz Output RL OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω PHONES Conditions GAIN: +66dB 8Ω ■ Gain Error. Input OMNI IN 1-8 RL OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Internal OSC PHONES 8Ω Conditions Input level : –62 dBu , GAIN : +66 dB Output level +4.0 dBu (Typ.) Internal OSC Max. 0.0 0.5 –3.0 0.0 0.5 Typ. Max. Output OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: –6dB 2.0 Full scale output, Output level : +24.0 dBu (Typ.) –0.5 0 0.5 –30 dBFs, phones level control : max. Output level 0 dBu (Typ.) –0.5 0 0.5 108 dB OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω DA Converter 112 dB Parameter dB 600 Ω OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω PHONES 8Ω Unit dB Frequency Range Jitter of PLL Frequency Accuracy Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz Min. Typ. +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: +66dB Max. Min. Typ. Max. Unit ■ Sampling Frequency Unit Internal Clock Conditions Conditions * Dynamic Range are measured with A-weight filter. External Clock 0 RL OMNI OUT 1-8 Min. –2.0 Input level : +10 dBu , GAIN : –6 dB Output level +4.0 dBu (Typ.) ■ Total Harmonic Distortion. OMNI IN 1-8 Typ. –1.5 RL Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @1 kHz Output Input Min. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz Output Jitter Unit Conditions Fs= 44.1 kHz Fs= 45.9375 kHz (44.1 kHz +4.1667%) Fs= 44.1441 kHz (44.1 kHz +0.1%) Fs= 44.0559 kHz (44.1 kHz –0.1%) Fs= 42.336 kHz (44.1 kHz –4.0%) Fs= 48 kHz Fs= 50 kHz (48 kHz +4.1667%) Fs= 48.048 kHz (48 kHz +0.1%) Fs= 47.952 kHz (48 kHz –0.1%) Fs= 46.080 kHz (48 kHz –4.0%) Min. Typ. –200 DIGITAL IN Fs= 44.1 kHz DIGITAL IN Fs= 48 kHz Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz Word Clock : Int 48 kHz Unit +200 ppm 10 ns 44.1 Word Clock : Int 48 kHz Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz Max. kHz 48 –50 +50 Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz 4.429 Word Clock : Int 48 kHz 4.069 ppm ns 0.1 +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: –6dB 0.05 Full Scale Output @1 kHz 0.02 Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES Level Control: Max. 0.2 % * Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz ■ Hum & Noise. Input OMNI IN 1-8 Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise Output OMNI OUT 1-8 RL 600 Ω Conditions Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: +66dB Master fader at nominal level and one Ch fader at nominal level. Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB Master fader at nominal level and one Ch fader at nominal level. All INPUTs — — Min. Typ. Max. –62 –84 –79 dBu OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: –6dB Master fader at nominal level and all OMNI IN 1-8 in faders at nominal level. –70 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off –88 8Ω Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level Control Min. –88 PHONES Unit –128 EIN * Hum & Noise are measured with A-weight filter. 273 Reference Manual Appendices Mixer Basic Parameters Function Parameter ■ Output Function Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander Threshold= Gate: –72 dB to 0 dB Others: –54 dB to 0 dB ■ Libraries Name Number Total Ratio= Preset 1 + User 300 301 Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Input CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 Hold= Output CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 Input EQ Library Preset 40 + User 159 199 Output EQ Library Preset 3 + User 196 199 Dynamics Library Preset 41 + User 158 199 Effect Library Preset 27 + User 172 199 GEQ Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 Premium Rack Library Portico5033 Portico5043 U76 Opt-2A EQ-1A DynamicEQ Preset 1 + User 199 Dante Input Patch Library Preset 1 + User 10 200 11 Normal/Reverse Digital Gain –96 dB to +24 dB HPF Attenuator 4 Band Equalizer Slope= 12 dB/Oct Dynamics2 Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz –96 dB to 0 dB Releace= 48 kHz: 5msec to 42.3 sec 44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec Gain= 0.0 dB to +8dB Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block) Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1 Compander: 1:1 to 20:1 Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Dynamics 1 Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec 44.1 kHz: 6msec to 46.1 sec Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 MIX24/ MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block) 1:1 to ∞:1 Compander: 1:1 to 20:1 Width= 1 dB to 90 dB Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec 44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec On On/Off Gain= –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block) TYPE= HPF, BPF Q= 0.10 to 10.0 Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S –18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to + 18 dB Low Shelving (Low Band) Direct Out Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Hard to 5 (soft) Frequency= 1.0 KHz to 12.5KHz Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Type I/Type II Insert Knee= Q= 0.10 to 10.0 Insert High Shelving, LPF (High Band) Gain= Width= 1 dB to 90 dB Fader Low Shelving (Low Band) Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB Type I/Type II Q= 0.10 to 10.0 Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz High Shelving, LPF (High Band) 4Band Equalizer Decay= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec 44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec Ratio= Parameter Phase Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB Range= Gate: –∞ dB to 0 dB Ducking: –70 dB to 0 dB ■ Input Function Function 48 kHz: 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec 44.1 kHz: 0.02 msec to 2.13 sec Parameter –96 dB to 0 dB Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz 1:1 to ∞:1 Scene Memory Dynamics 1 Function Attenuator Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB Pan/Balance Position L63 to R63 Mute Group 8 Groups Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On Mix to Matrix Stereo to Matrix Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB Oscillator Level= 0 to –96dB (1 dB step) On/Off= Software control ■ Output Port Function Parameter On On/Off Out Port Delay Pan/Balance Position L63 to R63 Pan Mode: Pan/Balance Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse Gain –96 to +24 dB DCA Group 16 Groups Mute Group ■ Processor 8 Groups 24 sends Mix Send Function Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB 8 Sends Matrix Send 0 msec to 1000 msec GEQ Parameter 31 bands x 16(24) or 15 bands x 32(48) systems Effects Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems Premium Rack Parameter Stereo(Dual) In/Stereo(Dual) Out Premium Rack x 8 systems Matrix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB LCR Pan CSR= 0% to 100% DELAY 0 ms to 1000 msec 274 Reference Manual Note On Note Off Key’s Ch’s Velocity After Touch 275 O: Yes X: No Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO Effect Control Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Aux Messages X X X X O O IDI Implementation Chart Recorder Control Assignable Bank Select Data Entry NRPN LSB,MSB Assignable Cntrl Effect Control *1 Bulk Dump/Request and Parameter Change/Request. *2 MMC X X X X X X :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF :Active Sense :Reset O X X O X O *1,*2 O 0–127 0–300 O O O O X X X O 9nH, v=1-127 O Memorized Memorized Remarks Notes X X :Clock :Commands System Real Time X X X :Song Pos. :Song Sel. :Tune O *1 O 0–127 ************** Common System Exclusive :True# O O O O X X X O 9nH, v=0,127 X 0–127 X 1, 3 X X 1–16 1–16 Recognized Version: 1.0 Date: 1 Mar. 2012 M Prog Change Control Change 0,32 6,38 98,99 1-31,33-95, 102119 True Voice Note Number Pitch Bend X X ************** Default Messages Altered Mode 0–127 X 1–16 1–16 Default Changed Transmitted MIDI Implementation Chart Basic Channel Function... Model: CL5/CL3/CL1 YAMAHA [ Digital Mixing Console ] Appendices Reference Manual Appendices Index F M R Factory set........................................................ 206 Fade function..................................................... 91 Focus function................................................... 87 Function Tree...................................................... 4 Recall Safe function.......................................... 88 Recall scenes.............................................. 80, 152 Gain .................................................................... 30 Analog gain.................................................... 30 Digital gain .................................................... 34 Gain Compensation ................................... 34, 35 Global Paste function ....................................... 85 GPI.................................................................... 221 Graphic EQ...................................................... 114 Libraries ....................................................... 137 Operations ................................................... 118 Grouping............................................................ 64 Master fader.................................................... 174 MATRIX buses................................... 39, 51, 202 MBCL meter bridge (optional) .................... 113 METER screen................................................ 111 Meters .............................................................. 111 MIDI ................................................................ 149 MIDI Data Format......................................... 264 MIDI Implementation Chart ....................... 275 MIX buses ................................................. 39, 202 MIX channels Sending to MATRIX buses.......................... 51 Sending to STEREO/MONO bus ............... 48 Mixer Basic Parameters................................. 274 Mixing parameter operation applicability.. 254 Monitor function ....................................... 97, 98 Mute groups................................................ 64, 66 H N HA (Head Amp) ............................................... 30 Help function .................................................. 193 Recalling....................................................... 194 Viewing ........................................................ 194 Network address ............................................ 205 NRPN parameter assignments..................... 250 Nuendo Live ................................................... 188 D I Dante audio network ............................... 15, 213 DAW .................................................................. 25 DCA groups ...................................................... 64 Directly outputting........................................... 23 Dynamics..................................................... 56, 59 Libraries ......................................................... 63 DYNAMICS Library List............................... 228 Dynamics Parameters .................................... 230 I/O device......................................................... 138 Initialize ........................................................... 206 Input channels................................................... 27 Channel library ............................................. 45 Channel name and icon............................... 28 Sending to MIX/MATRIX bus ................... 39 Sending to STEREO/MONO buses ........... 35 Input Delay ........................................................ 44 Input patch ........................................................ 19 Inserting ............................................................. 21 Internal clock................................................... 204 Internal effects................................................. 122 Oscillator ................................................. 106, 108 Output channels................................................ 46 Channel library ............................................. 55 Channel name and icon ............................... 47 Output Delay ..................................................... 55 Output patch...................................................... 16 OVERVIEW screen .......................................... 12 A Assignable encoders ....................................... 172 Functions that can be assigned................. 263 Audio file (links to a scene recall) .................. 94 C Calibration function.............. 207, 208, 209, 211 Cascade connections ...................................... 200 Centralogic section........................................... 11 Channel Copying, moving, initializing ..................... 73 Channel color................................... 29, 204, 211 Channel library ........................................... 45, 55 Channel Link..................................................... 70 Channel name displays .................................. 204 Console Lock................................................... 175 Control Changes Control parameters .................................... 155 Cue function.............................................. 97, 101 Operating..................................................... 102 Custom fader bank ......................................... 173 E Effect................................................................. 114 Libraries ....................................................... 137 Effect Type List ............................................... 232 Effects and tempo synchronization ............. 247 Effects Parameters .......................................... 233 Electrical characteristics ................................ 273 EQ ....................................................................... 56 Libraries ......................................................... 63 EQ Library List................................................ 227 External device.................................................. 21 External head amp.................................. 138, 144 G L Lamps ............................................................... 204 LEDs ................................................................. 204 Linking ............................................................... 64 O P Parameter Changes........................................ 157 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes ............................................. 248 Patching.............................................................. 15 Pink frame (TOUCH AND TURN)............ 171 Preferences...................................................... 168 Premium Rack................................................ 130 Libraries ...................................................... 137 Premium Rack Processor Parameters......... 245 Preview mode .................................................... 96 Program Changes........................................... 152 S Scene memory .................................................. 77 Editing ........................................................... 82 Security ............................................................ 158 SELECTED CHANNEL section....................... 6 SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen............ 7 SETUP screen ................................................. 196 Slot.................................................................... 198 STEREO/MONO buses............................. 35, 48 STEREO/MONO channels Sending to MATRIX buses ......................... 51 T Talkback .......................................................... Title list ............................................................ TOUCH AND TURN.................................... Touch screen................................................... 106 187 171 204 U USB flash drive Formatting .................................................. Loading a file .............................................. Loading a Help file..................................... Loading a text file....................................... Playing back audio files............................. Recording audio ......................................... Saving and loading setup data.................. USB memory recorder................................... USER DEFINED keys.................................... Functions that can be assigned................. Recalling Help ............................................ USER DEFINED knobs................................. Functions that can be assigned................. User Level settings.......................................... 180 178 193 193 185 183 177 181 169 259 194 171 262 158 V Virtual rack ..................................................... 114 Operations................................................... 115 W Warning/Error Messages .............................. 271 Word clock...................................................... 198 276 Reference Manual Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ C.S.G., Pro Audio Division © 2012-2013 Yamaha Corporation 301IP-C0-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
-
193
-
194
-
195
-
196
-
197
-
198
-
199
-
200
-
201
-
202
-
203
-
204
-
205
-
206
-
207
-
208
-
209
-
210
-
211
-
212
-
213
-
214
-
215
-
216
-
217
-
218
-
219
-
220
-
221
-
222
-
223
-
224
-
225
-
226
-
227
-
228
-
229
-
230
-
231
-
232
-
233
-
234
-
235
-
236
-
237
-
238
-
239
-
240
-
241
-
242
-
243
-
244
-
245
-
246
-
247
-
248
-
249
-
250
-
251
-
252
-
253
-
254
-
255
-
256
-
257
-
258
-
259
-
260
-
261
-
262
-
263
-
264
-
265
-
266
-
267
-
268
-
269
-
270
-
271
-
272
-
273
-
274
-
275
-
276
-
277
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha CL1 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha CL1 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha CL1 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha CL1 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha CL1 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha CL1 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha CL1 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha CL1 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha CL1 Ohjekirja
- čeština: Yamaha CL1 Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha CL1 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha CL1 Kullanım kılavuzu
- polski: Yamaha CL1 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha CL1 Manual de utilizare